Embroidery Software 2006

Online Manual
Copyright 1998-2005 Wilcom International Pty Ltd. All rights reserved. No parts of this publication or the accompanying software may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to any third party without the express written permission of: Wilcom International Pty Ltd. (A.B.N. 62 062 621 943) 146-156 Wyndham Street, Alexandria (Sydney) New South Wales, 2015, Australia PO Box 581, Alexandria, 1435 Phone: +61 2 9578 5100 Fax: +61 2 9578 5108 Email: [email protected] Web: http://www.wilcom.com.au The Stitch Processor (SP) portion of this product is protected by the following patents: US Patent N 4,821,662 European Patent N 0221163 Japanese Patent N 2029491 Curve Line Fill Stitching in this product is protected by US Patent No. 6,587,745. TrueView and Point & Stitch are trademarks of Wilcom International Pty Ltd. Portions of the imaging technology of this product are copyrighted by AccuSoft Corporation. The EPS File Import/Export Convertor used in this product is copyrighted by Access Softek, Inc. All rights reserved. Wilcom International Pty Ltd. makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents of this publication and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantable quality or fitness for any particular purpose. Further, Wilcom International Pty Ltd. reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes in it from time to time without obligation of Wilcom International Pty Ltd. to notify any person or organization of such revisions or changes. The screen illustrations in this publication are intended to be representations, not exact duplicates of the screen layouts generated by the software. Subject to any warranties implied by law which are incapable of limitation or exclusion, the software is purchased as is without any warranty as to its performance, accuracy, freedom from error or to any results generated through its use and without any implied warranty of merchantability or of fitness for any particular purpose for which the software is being acquired. The purchaser relies on its own skill and judgement in selecting the software for its own use and assumes the entire risk as to the results and performance of the software. Wilcom International Pty Ltd. specifically does not warrant that the software will meet the purchasers requirements or operate without interruption or error.

Rev 1 April 2005

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1

Introduction

Welcome to Wilcom ES 2006, the leading software application for embroidery industry design and manufacture. Wilcom ES is a suite of CAD/CAM tools providing a fast, flexible way to create, edit, organize and stitch out embroidery designs. It is designed to support the high productivity and efficiency requirements of professional digitizers. It also allows novices and less frequent users to become productive digitizers. Wilcom ES lets you edit designs at any stage, or adapt existing designs for use with different fabrics and machines.

First-time users

Wilcom ES provides a wide range of design capabilities, allowing you to create, edit, and output embroidery designs with ease. Before you begin working with the product, read Digitizing with Wilcom ES. This chapter presents an overview of the basic concepts of digitizing with Wilcom ES and provides important guidelines on how to use the software for best results. You should also familiarize yourself with Basic Procedures. This chapter explains how to start the application and how to use some of the essential tools and features that Wilcom ES provides. The chapters Viewing Designs and Working with Design Objects contain essential information about the many ways of viewing designs in Wilcom ES as well as selecting and manipulating design objects.

Upgrade or update users

Wilcom ES 2006 has many new and expanded features which make digitizing easier and more efficient. Read the chapter Digitizing with Wilcom ES to familiarize yourself quickly with the scope of these improvements.

Wilcom ES product models

Wilcom ES 2006 is available in five product levels21L, 21E, 21D, 45 and 65. Each is designed to fulfil the needs of specific embroidery businesses and to build upon the others to provide for the whole gamut of stitching and digitizing requirements of professional digitizers. ES 2006 Introduction 2

21LLettering

Monogramming, Lettering Do you routinely embroider lettering and sports Team Name garments? Empower your business with the flexibility and reliability of in-house lettering provided by Wilcom ES level 21L. Take possession of over 130 professionally digitized embroidery alphabets, or utilize the endless variety of Windows fonts with Wilcoms TrueType Font converter. Team Names and mass monogramming is a breezeautomatically create hundreds of name badges and emblems in seconds. Powerful lettering reshape tools let you handle custom lettering jobs with confidence. Combined with professional colorway and stitch processing technology, Wilcom ES level 21L provides for all your lettering and monogramming needs.

21ELettering and Editing

Monogramming, Lettering, Editing Empower your business with the flexibility and reliability of in-house lettering and editing provided by Wilcom ES level 21E. Take possession of over 130 professionally digitized embroidery alphabets, or utilize the endless variety of Windows fonts with Wilcoms TrueType Font converter. Edit and reshape your embroidery designs or combine them with existing ones. Change between Satin, Zigzag and Tatami, as well as adjust stitch density and underlay settings over the whole or selected parts of a design. With Wilcom ES level 21E, you are professionally equipped for any embroidery lettering or editing job that comes your way.

21DPowerful Digitizing

Corporate, Sports, Fashion Wilcom ES level 21D introduces you to professional embroidery digitizing. Backed with the advanced lettering and editing features of level 21E, 21D delivers a suite of integrated and powerful digitizing tools plus the flexibility to create reliable, quality embroidery designs. Using scanned or imported artwork, create embroidery shapes with turning or parallel stitching plus advanced stitch types like Program Split or Motif Fill. Ideal for companies that do corporate, sports and fashion embroidery, level 21D supports all common embroidery industry formats.

45Creative Digitizing

Creative Flair, High Fashion, Inspiration Boasting a blend of powerful digitizing tools and creative stitch effects, Wilcom ES level 45 is Wilcoms most popular embroidery digitizing system.

Import and convert vector files to embroidery using Wilcoms legendary ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 3 Point & Stitch technology. Advanced stitch effects such as Florentine Effect, 3D Warp, Trapunto and Stipple stitch bring your embroidery to life. Smart Branching sequences your embroidery design, eliminating trims, while Offset Object automatically create borders around lettering and other design objects. Wilcom ES level 45 gives you the competitive edge to create superior embroidery designs faster and more simply than ever before.

65Advanced Digitizing

High Volume - Maximum Power To arm yourself with the full power of Wilcom ES, level 65 is the only choice for the advanced digitizer. Encompassing Wilcoms complete range of embroidery lettering, editing and digitizing tools, level 65 contains as standard superior Chenille embroidery and stunning automated Sequin design tools. Productivity and efficiency is the main focus of level 65. Crafted to support high volume embroidery, time-saving tools such as Mirror-Merge, Fusion Fill and Color Blending complement the easy-to-use interface to give you maximum power. Take charge of your embroidery design process with the powerful capabilities of Wilcom ES level 65. Note For a complete feature listing, see Product Differentiation Table in the Online Manual.

Wilcom ES documentation

Wilcom ES provides you with a number of ways to access information about the software and how to use it, both in printed form and online via the Help menu. Warning Screen illustrations in the user documentation are intended to be representations, not exact duplicates of the screen layouts generated by the software. Procedural descriptions may be at slight variance from particular installations depending on which default system settings are activated.

Printed documentation

With your Wilcom ES installation CD you will have received the following printed documentation: ES 2006 Introduction 4

Release Notes

The Release Notes provide you with information about system requirements for your Wilcom ES installation, details of new features and major and minor improvements to the software release, as well as known limitations and workarounds. For an itemized listing of the new and improved features for each level of product, refer to the Product Differentiation Table at the end of this document. For a complete table, refer to Product Differentiation Table in the Online Manual.

Quick Start Guide

The Wilcom ES Quick Start Guide contains installation instructions as well as an overview of the ES Designer and ES Design Explorer applications. The guide provides fully worked sample projects for each product level. While these projects do not cover all product features, they provide a useful starting point. There is also a Quick Reference section which lists all the commands and shortcut keys used in ES Designer. For detailed procedures covering all features of the ES Designer and ES Design Explorer applications, refer to the online manual which can be accessed via the Help menu. To identify sources of information relevant to your specific model and any options you may have selected, see Product Differentiation Table in the Online Manual.

Online documentation

Online documentation is provided in two formatsHTML Online Help and Adobe Acrobat. Components include Release Notes, Quick Reference, Online Manual, Online Help, as well as various User Manual Supplements.

Release Notes

An online version of the Release Notes is included with the software installation.

Quick Reference

All commands in ES Designer can be accessed via the various menus, both dropdown and popup, toolbar icons, menu chart (for use with digitizing tablets), as well as access and shortcut keys. Many commands can be accessed by more than one method. The Quick Reference lets you see at a glance which method best suits you. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 5

Online Manual

The Online Manual contains hundreds of step-by-step instructions together with samples and screen images. These are intended to be used as a reference, not a tutorial. The manual documents the following product components: ES Designer and ES Design Explorer. ES Machine Manager, and the ES Chenille, ES Schiffli, and ES Cross Stitch Options are documented in separate supplements described below.

Online Help

Online Help provides quick access to general information on ES Designer features and step-by-step instructions. Context Sensitive help is currently available for dialogs by pressing the 1 key.

User Manual supplements

With your Wilcom ES installation CD you will have also received the following online supplements:

Wilcom ES Machine Manager Supplement

This manual supplement documents the following product capabilities: ! ES Machine Manager Direct Connect ! feedback from machines ! machine activity reporting ! technical details of machine network setup. The supplement must be used in conjunction with the Wilcom ES User Manual.

Wilcom ES Cross Stitch Supplement

This manual supplement documents the following product capabilities: ! manual and automatic cross stitch digitizing ! cross stitch editing ! cross stitch lettering ! handling cross stitch design files. This supplement is supplied with the ES Cross Stitch Option. It must be used in conjunction with the Wilcom ES User Manual.

Wilcom ES Chenille Supplement

This manual supplement documents the following product capabilities: ES 2006 Introduction 6 ! ES Chenille features within ES Designer ! ES Chenille machines, including chain, moss, needle height ! ES Chenille stitch types and effects. This supplement is supplied with the ES Chenille Option. It must be used in conjunction with the Wilcom ES User Manual.

Wilcom ES Schiffli User Manual

This manual documents the following product capabilities: ! ES Schiffli features within ES Designer ! read/output to Schiffli files ! ES Schiffli disk utilities, Fixpat, Defced. The manual is supplied with the ES Schiffli Option. It must be used in conjunction with the Wilcom ES User Manual.

Viewing online documentation

Online documentation can be accessed from the Wilcom ES Programs folder

or from the Help menu in Wilcom ES. You can read it with Adobe Acrobat Reader which is supplied with your Wilcom ES software installation. Quickly search for the information you need using standard Adobe Acrobat Reader features.

To view the online documentation

1 From Windows Start, go to the Programs > Wilcom 2006 folder. You will find the following online documents: ! Wilcom ES Online Manual ! Wilcom ES Release Notes ! Wilcom ES Quick Reference Guide. 2 Double-click the required document to open it in Adobe Reader. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 7 Tip You can open your online documentation directly from ES Designer. Go to the Help menu and select the document you want from the dropdown list. 3 Select the topic you want by clicking on its Bookmark. 4 Change the view magnification in any of the following ways: ! Click the Actual Size, or Fit in Window, or Fit Width buttons. ! Select the Zoom In tool, then click anywhere on the pageeach click increases the magnification. ! Click the Reader Zoom dropdown and select a settingtry 200% if you want to look closely at screen diagrams. 5 Use the page turning controls at the bottom of the window to scroll backwards and forwards through the book or return to previous views. Tip Select Help > Reader Guide from the top of the Reader screen for comprehensive information about using Reader.

Using online help

Online Help can be accessed from the Help menu in Wilcom ES.
Bookmarks Page turning controls Fit in Window Actual Size Fit Width Zoom dropdown Paging settings

ES 2006 Introduction 8

To use the online help

1 Select Help > Help Topics. The ES Designer Help window opens. 2 Click Contents to display the main list of topics. Topics are grouped under high-level headings with book icons. 3 Double-click a book to view the list of topics, then double-click a topic. Alternatively, click Find and enter keywords to search on a specific subject. Note Context Sensitive help is available for dialogs. When you open a dialog box, press 1 to invoke relevant help.

Linking to the Wilcom website

To link to the Wilcom website

You can access sales and support information about the products easily from within the software.

! Select Help > Wilcom Web Page.

You are directly connected to the Wilcom homepage at http://www.wilcom.com.au/ Note You must have a correctly configured web browser on your system together with web access.

Conventions used in the documentation

The documentation adopts the following conventions:

Commands

Commands on a submenu are referred to by both the submenu and command name. For example the command Open on the submenu Embroidery Disk is referred to as Embroidery Disk > Open.

Dialog boxes

Dialog boxes are referred to as dialogs and are displayed only if they provide important information on using Wilcom ES. The screen images ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 9 provided may differ slightly to the layouts generated by the software and operating system you are using.

Mouse conventions Keyboard conventions

Instruction Symbol Description Click [ Click the left mouse button. Right-click ] Click the right mouse button. Double-click . Click the mouse button twice without moving the mouse. Shift-click V + [ Hold down Shift and click left mouse button. Click OK [ or j Click OK with the mouse or press the Enter key on the keyboard to complete the action. Shortcut Description C + S While holding down the Control key (Ctrl), press the lowercase letter S key. C + V + H While holding down the Control key (Ctrl), press Shift and the H key. For a complete list of keyboard shortcuts, see Keyboard Shortcuts. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 10

PART I OBJECT-BASED EMBROIDERY

Designs created in ES Designer are composed of embroidery objects. They are called objects because they are discrete entities which can be manipulated independently of each other. Each object has certain defining characteristics or properties such as color, size, position, and so on. The most important property of an embroidery object is its stitch type.

Basic procedures

This section describes how to start ES Designer, how to open designs, start new ones and use the basic commands. It also explains how to turn on and off the grid and measure distances on-screen. You will also find out how to select machine formats for different output as well as how to save designs. The section also explains the procedure for entering security codes. See Basic Procedures for details.

Working with design objects

This section describes how to select objects using the selection tools and keyboard. It also shows how to select while traveling through designs or by using the Color-Object List. See Working with Design Objects for details. ES 2006 Object-Based Embroidery 11

Viewing designs

This section explains the design viewing modes available in ES Designer as well as the various design viewing settings. It also describes how to view designs by traveling through the stitching sequence. Design colorways are explained, as well as how to obtain and modify design information. See Viewing Designs for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 12

Chapter 1

Digitizing with Wilcom ES

Embroidery digitizing consists of turning the basic shapes of a design into embroidery objects. Different tools are suited to different shapes. You can digitize them manually by marking points along an outline, or by using smart tools which transform shapes automatically into embroidery objects.

Planning designs
High quality embroidery starts with good design and forward planning.

Artwork

Artwork in both bitmap and vector formats can be inserted, pasted or scanned into ES Designer for use as digitizing backdrops. Unless you are an experienced digitizer, do not use complicated artwork. Possible sources include: ! books of embroidery patterns ! childrens story books ! printed table cloths or tea towels ! business cards, post cards and wrapping paper ! clipart libraries from your word processing or graphics programs ! internet or CD clipart libraries ! samples in the Wilcom ES Design folder ! original artworke.g. childrens drawings. Note Be sure to check the copyright of any images you have not created yourself. If unsure, contact the company and seek their permission.

Design shapes and stitching sequence

Before digitizing, you need to analyze and plan design shapes and stitching sequence carefully. Design shapes need to be clearly defined to make them easy to embroider. The best shapes have relatively constant width, with smooth edges, no sharp turns and no small, protruding details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 13 The digitizing sequence defines the stitching sequence, or order in which shapes are stitched out. Of course you can always change the sequence to improve the stitchoutfor example, to minimize color changes. Details should be stitched last.

Completed design

Good design is enhanced by the use of the correct backing, tension and a good quality embroidery machine. Keep the following points in mind when digitizing your design and assessing the final output: The stitched-out design should also have the following characteristics: ! The design stitches out efficiently on the machine. ! Stitches are neat, smooth and even. ! Shapes are stitched correctlyno unwanted gaps. ! The fabric has not puckered around the stitched areas. ! The design is free of loose ends.
details last 2 3 4 5 1 details are clearly defined shapes are filled with correct fill and outline stitches stitches are angled to match shapes design looks

goodshapes, colors, balance lettering is clear and easy to read

ES 2006 Chapter 1 Digitizing with Wilcom ES 14

Digitizer tablet

If you are using a digitizer tablet, you need to prepare an enlargement drawing from the artwork and place it on the digitizer tablet. After registering the drawing, you digitize it using the digitizer puck. See Using Digitizing Tablets for details.

Object-based embroidery

Designs created in ES Designer are composed of embroidery objects. They are called objects because they are discrete entities which can be manipulated independently of each other. Each object has certain defining characteristics or properties such as color, size, position, and so on. The most important property of an embroidery object is its stitch type.

Working with design objects

ES Designer provides various ways to select the objects in an embroidery design. Modify the design as a whole or select individual objects for more precise modification. The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select objects and colors in designs and access their properties. Use it to group and ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and hide objects as well. See Working with Design Objects for details.

Viewing designs

ES Designer provides many viewing modes to make it easier to work with your designs. Zoom in on an area to see more detail, view the design at actual size, or view a thumbnail of the whole design in a separate Overview window. Pan the design to move it across the design window instead of scrolling, and quickly change between one view and the last. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 15 Show or hide various design elements with the available display settings. You can show or hide outlines, needle penetration points, connectors, stitch angles, machine function symbols and the stitches themselves. You can also view designs in TrueView. When working with embroidery designs, you need to understand the stitching sequence. Check this by traveling through the design stitch-by-stitch. You can also check it by slowly redrawing the design on-screen. You can also preview a design in different colors on different fabrics by selecting from among any number of pre-defined colorways. ES Designer gives you comprehensive information about your designs. Even before opening a design, you can check the software version number and other design information for EMB files directly from Windows Explorer. View stitching details in the Design Properties dialog. The production worksheet also provides essential production information, including a design preview, the size of the design, color sequence and any special instructions. See Viewing Designs for details.

Digitizing designs

In ES Designer, you build designs from basic shapes or embroidery objects. These are like ordinary vector objects in that they have certain defining characteristics or properties such as color, size, position, and so on. They also have properties unique to embroidery such as stitch type and density.

Digitizing methods
Normal view TrueView

The process of creating embroidery objects on-screen is called digitizing. Like the creation of designs in graphics applications, this involves the use of ES 2006 Chapter 1 Digitizing with Wilcom ES 16 input or digitizing tools. These are similar to drawing tools except that the end result is an embroidery rather than a vector object. Different tools are suited to creating different shapes or design elements. There are specific tools for digitizing larger complex shapes, asymmetrical columns of turning stitches, columns of varying width, columns of fixed width, lines, and even individual stitches. See Digitizing Methods for details.

Fill and outline stitches

The most important property of all embroidery objects is the stitch type. The software uses object outlines and associated stitch type to generate stitches. Whenever you reshape, transform or scale an object, stitches are regenerated according to its stitch type and settings. Stitch types divide broadly into two categoriesoutline and fill. Satin fills are generally suited to columns and borders. Tatami stitch is used to fill larger shapes with solid fields of stitching. Run stitch, Backstitch, and Stemstitch are considered both digitizing methods and stitch types. Both Zigzag and E Stitch are used as outline stitches. Zigzag is frequently used for tacking down appliqus, while E Stitch is used as the cover stitch. Both can also be used for decorative effect. See Fill and Outline Stitches for details.
narrow columns (Input C) columns of varying width (Input A) turning stitches (Input B) large irregular shape (Complex Fill) line (Run) Run for lines Satin for narrow shapes Tatami for large shapes

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 17

Colorways and thread charts

When digitizing, you select thread colors for each object you create from the color palette. This contains a selection of thread colors tailored for each design or color scheme. The particular colorway represents the actual thread colors in which a design will be stitched. In fact you can define multiple color schemes and switch between them. This has important implications for sales presentations as well as production. You can also print multiple colorways, design backgrounds, and icons of color blocks together with the production worksheet. For each colorway you define, you can select colors from commercial thread charts or define your own. Search for particular threads by various criteria. Automatic thread color matching helps you locate thread colors based on closest match across one or several thread charts. You can also match

thread colors from imported graphicsvector or bitmap. See Colorways and Thread Charts for details.

Connecting embroidery objects

Connectors link objects in a design. They can be run stitches or jumps. You can use automatic settings to generate connectors, trims and tie-offs, or add them manually.
Colorway 1 Colorway 2 1 2 3 4 5 trim stitching starts connector

ES 2006 Chapter 1 Digitizing with Wilcom ES 18 Travel runs are typically used to connect segments within filled objects. Adjust travel run length to reduce stitch count. See Connecting Embroidery Objects for details.

Improving stitch quality

ES Designer provides many techniques for achieving smooth, even placement of stitches, and eliminating gaps in your designs. Strengthen and stabilize designs with automatic underlay. Compensate for fabric stretch with pull compensation. Reduce stitch bunching with stitch shortening and fractional spacing. Adjust stitch density for more efficient production and remove small stitches automatically. Control corner stitching with Smart Corners and fine-tune handling of long stitches with Auto Split and Auto Jump. Set automatic start and end points. These features are all object properties and can be applied, removed or modified at will. See Improving Stitch Quality for details.

Digitizing with artwork

There are two broad categories of artwork file, both of which can be imported into ES Designer for use as digitizing backdropsvector and bitmap. To create good quality embroidery, you need to choose or create suitable artwork of either format.
with underlay without underlay with no effects with Auto Split with Auto Jump

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 19

Digitizing with vector images

ES Designer provides tools to draw shapes and outlines directly on screen. Alternatively, insert or paste vector images created in third-party drawing packages for use as digitizing backdrops. Scale and transform them in the same way as embroidery objects. You can also select colors for vector object outlines and fills. When working with overlapping vector or embroidery objects, merge, trim or split them using the Shaping tools. Vector images have the advantage over bitmap images that they can be converted directly to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods. This allows you to concentrate on design shapes without having to think about stitch properties and sequence. See Digitizing with Vector Images for details.

Digitizing with bitmap images

Artwork can be inserted, pasted or scanned into ES Designer and cropped for use as digitizing templates or backdrops. These help you to: ! digitize shapes manually ! digitize shapes automatically with Point & Stitch ! digitize complete images automatically with Smart Design ! digitize photographs with Photo Flash. Scan artwork directly into ES Designer and edit it before use. Open images

directly in MS Paint, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, or Paint Shop Pro. Images updated in this way are automatically re-imported into ES Designer. Alternatively, insert bitmap images saved on your hard disk into
vector image converted to embroidery design

ES 2006 Chapter 1 Digitizing with Wilcom ES 20 ES Designer. Show or hide them as you digitize. See Digitizing with Bitmap Images for details.

Preparing images for automatic digitizing

ES Designer supports the automatic and semi-automatic digitizing of both bitmap images and vector images. The quality of the resulting designs greatly depends on the type and quality of the original artwork. In order to make bitmap imagesboth outlined and non-outlinedmore suitable for automatic digitizing, ES Designer provides image processing capabilities and links to graphics packages. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details.

Automatic digitizing

ES Designer provides a variety of complementary tools and techniques for automatically digitizing suitably prepared artwork. See Automatic Digitizing for details. ! The Auto Trace feature lets you convert scanned artwork to vector objects. You can then convert these to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods. ! The Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to digitize shapes in bitmap images automatically without using manual input methods.
Areas recolored and outlines improvedready for automatic digitizing Bitmap image scaled and background removedready for manual digitizing Background color omitted All colors omitted except black

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 21 ! Smart Design automatic digitizing is intended for people working at all levels of the embroidery industry. Smart Design automatically converts bitmap images to fully digitized embroidery. ! Photo Flash lets you create embroidery designs directly from photographs and other grayscale bitmap images. The effect resembles the output of a line printer.

Modifying designs
After digitizing a design, you can modify it as a whole, edit individual objects or even individual stitches.

Combining and resequencing objects

ES Designer provides techniques for combining and resequencing objects. You can add to designs by duplicating and copying objects. Combine designs. Split objects into smaller ones and remove overlaps between objects. See Combining and Resequencing Objects for details. The stitching sequence naturally occurs in the order in which the design was digitized. The Color-Object List displays a sequential list

of objects grouped by object and color. It provides an easy way to group, cut, copy and paste, and resequence
gray scale image digitized with Photo Flash

ES 2006 Chapter 1 Digitizing with Wilcom ES 22 selected objects and color blocks. See Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List for details. See also Resequencing embroidery objects. Group objects together to apply a change to them all at once. Better still, apply Branching to join like-objects to form a single branched object. Objects are resequenced, connectors minimized, component objects grouped, and stitches regenerated. Apply an underlay to all. See Automatic branching for details.

Arranging and transforming objects

ES Designer also provides techniques for arranging and transforming objects. Change the position, size and orientation of objects by moving, scaling, rotating, skewing, and mirroring them. Group objects together to apply universal changes, or lock them to avoid unintentional modification. Modify objects directly on-screen or using the Object Properties dialog. Access commonly used functions via the Color-Object List. See Arranging and Transforming Objects for details.

Converting and reshaping objects

There are also techniques available for converting and reshaping objects. Convert among vector and embroidery objects of different types at all stages of the design. The points you mark when digitizing a shape become its control points. These vary slightly with the object type. Use them to edit or transform objectse.g. reshaping, scaling, letter spacing, changing entry and exit points. Modify stitch angles of selected objects. Add multiple stitch angles as required. See Converting and Reshaping Objects for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 23

Editing stitches and machine functions

Techniques are available for specialist stitch and machine function editing. In essence, you edit individual stitches like any other object, moving the needlepoint position as required. ES Designer also lets you manually insert machine functions and modify them. This flexibility allows you to adapt designs to almost any machine requirement. A Stitch List is available to help you locate stitches and machine functions. See Editing Stitches and Machine Functions for details.

Advanced digitizing techniques

ES Designer provides specialized productivity features as well as special effects and digitizing techniques.

Object properties, styles and templates

Every object you create in ES Designer has a unique set of properties that are stored with it whenever you save the design. You can set the properties of a selected object to be the current property settings. You can also apply current property settings to existing objects. A style is a group of property settings stored under a unique name. You can save any combination of settings to a style. This makes it easy to apply these settings to selected embroidery and lettering objects. Templates are special files used to store styles and default property settings. See Object Properties, Styles and Templates for details.
Style 1 Style 2

ES 2006 Chapter 1 Digitizing with Wilcom ES 24

Specialized digitizing techniques

ES Designer provides specialized digitizing features to save time as you digitize, and for special effects and machine functions. There are input tools for digitizing circles, stars, rings and appliqu objects, as well as methods for creating repeated or backtracked duplicates, adding borders or filling holes. See Specialized Digitizing Techniques for details.

Borders

Add attractive borders such as rectangles, ovals, and shields to designs using the Borders symbol set. When you add a border, it is automatically sized to fit the current design. See Adding borders to designs for details.

Appliqu

Automatically create all the stitching you need for appliqu using Auto Appliqu. Simply extract appliqu shapes from a design to a separate file. See Digitizing for appliqu for details. Tip Cross stitch is sometimes combined with appliqu for special effects. Cross stitch is a popular technique for filling large areas with low stitch counts. It can also be used for outlines and borders. It is suitable for homeware, tablecloths, childrens clothes and folk designs. See ES Cross Stitch Supplement for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 25

Textured fills

ES Designer provides special tools to create textured effects from needle penetrations. Apply offset fractions and partition lines to Tatami fills to create split-line patterns. Alternatively, apply Program Split or Flexi Split to create decorative fills from pre-defined patterns of needle penetrations. Select from the library or create your own. With User Defined Split, create your own split lines when you want to add detail to filled objects. See Textured Fills for details.

Artistic stitch effects

ES Designer provides many artistic effects and stitch types to create textured and contoured fill stitching. Use Jagged Edge to create rough edges, shading effects, or imitate fur and other fluffy textures. Accordion Spacing varies stitch spacing between dense and open fill, producing shading and color effects which are difficult to achieve manually. The Color
Tatami Offset Partition Lines Random Factor

Program Split Flexi Split User Defined Split

ES 2006 Chapter 1 Digitizing with Wilcom ES 26 Blending effect creates interesting perspective, shading and color effects by blending two colored layers. Apply Trapunto effect to force underlying travel runs to the edges of an object so that they cant be seen through open stitching. See Connecting Embroidery Objects for details. Create chiaroscuro effects with Contour. Choose between Standard and Spiral. For another type of curved effect, use Florentine Effect to curve needle penetrations along a digitized line. Liquid Effect allows you to enter twin curves. See Artistic Stitch Effects for details.
Accordion Spacing with circles Jagged Edge with Tatami backstitch Tatami with Color Blending Single curve with Florentine Effect Open fill with Trapunto Contour spiral

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 27

Motif runs and fills

Motifs are pre-defined design elements, such as hearts, leaves or border patterns. They generally consist of one or more simple objects, and are stored in a special motif set. Use Motif Run and Motif Fill to create ornamental runs and textured fills. Create your own motifs or use the ones provided with the software. Motifs can be scaled, rotated and mirrored in the same way as other objects. Using 3D Warp with motif fills, you can also create interesting three dimensional effects. See Motif Runs and Fills for details.

Sequins and boring

Some embroidery machines are equipped with a sequin dispenser that drops sequins onto the garment as it stitches. Some are also equipped with a boring knife or needle to cut holes in the fabric, producing an effect similar to lace. Often the two techniques are used in combination. ES Designer provides support for both. ES Designer provides a dedicated set of Sequin tools which allow you to digitize sequined designs for compatible machines. Create sequin runs along digitized lines, either placing sequins manually or letting the software generate placement positions according to current settings. The Sequin tools also allow you to digitize individual sequins for even greater control. If your embroidery machine is equipped with a boring knife or needle, you can use the Borers tool to cut holes in the fabric, producing an effect similar to lace. See Sequins and Boring for

details.

Embroidery lettering

Create top-quality lettering quickly and simply. ES Designer provides a large range of scalable closest-join alphabet styles and multi-color and fancy stitching alphabets to choose from. ES 2006 Chapter 1 Digitizing with Wilcom ES 28

Creating embroidery lettering

Add lettering directly to designs using current settings or with the aid of the dialog. With object-based operation, you can type and manipulate your text directly on-screen, changing the size or spacings to fit. Apply formatting just like a word processor, including italics, bolding, and right/left justification. Change values for the whole text or for individual letters. See Creating Embroidery Lettering for details.

Adjusting lettering layout

ES Designer gives you both interactive and precise numeric control over many settings affecting lettering objects. Adjust both individual letters and lettering objects as a whole. Apply horizontal, vertical, and curved baselines. Modify baseline type, length, radius and angle, as well as position. You can even define the rotation angle of letters relative to the baseline or the design itself. See Editing Embroidery Lettering for details.

Adjusting lettering stitch settings

When it comes to stitching, you can fine-tune the density, add pull compensation and underlay, or change to center-out stitching. Like all embroidery objects, each lettering object has its own stitch properties. Adjust settings at any stage. ES Designer also gives you precise control over the stitch angles of individual letters. You can also specify the join method ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 29 and stitching sequence you prefer. See Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings for details.

Special lettering features

Add special characters and symbols to your lettering. Create interesting distortions using lettering envelopes. See Creating special effects with envelopes for details. Use the Team Names feature to create designs with multiple names. For example, use the same logo with different names for sports teams or corporate uniforms without having to create multiple copies of the same design. See Team lettering for details.
Bridge Pennant Perspective Diamond

ES 2006 Chapter 1 Digitizing with Wilcom ES 30

Custom alphabets

Turn any TrueType font installed on your system into an embroidery alphabet. See Converting TrueType fonts to embroidery alphabets for details. Typically spacing between certain character pairs appears uneven due to the optical illusion of having straight lines and curves side-by-side. Automatic kerning is a user-defined option allowing you to customize kerning. See Automatic letter kerning for details. Sometimes you find that you want to reshape a letter to improve its appearance, perhaps to suit a particular lettering height. ES Designer lets you save the letter as an alternative version. In fact you can save multiple versions of the same letter within the same alphabet. See User-refined alphabets for details.
Letter a opened up at smaller size Default a too narrow at small size

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 31 You can even create your own custom alphabets. Alternatively, modify an

existing alphabet for special applications. See Creating custom alphabets for details. Merge letters from two or more alphabets with the stand-alone alphabet merging utility. See Merging alphabets for details.

Design processing & encoding

Design processing and encoding involve all the important, back-end operations of embroidery design and manufacture. This is where you actually output your designs to machine, disk, printer, cutter, and so on. For this, you will need an understanding of embroidery file types as well as different machine formats. Depending on your setup, you will also need an understanding of traditional storage media including embroidery disks and paper tapes.

Processing design files

By default ES Designer saves to its native file format, EMB. This format contains all information necessary both for stitching a design and for later modification. When opening designs created or saved in other formats, ES Designer converts the design internally to EMB format. You can then modify it using the full range of ES Designer features. Depending on the file type, you may need to provide additional information to assist ES Designer in the conversion process. ES Designer also supports the processing of Melco CND outline files, including color merging and reassignment of colors. See Processing Design Files for details.

Changing machine formats

Different embroidery machines speak different languages. They have their own control commands for the various machine functions. Before you can stitch a design, it must be in a format which can be understood by the embroidery machine. When you select a machine format, ES Designer translates the digitized design into machine functions that can be ES 2006 Chapter 1 Digitizing with Wilcom ES 32 understood by that machine. If required, you can customize machine formats to meet specific machine requirements. See Changing Machine Formats for details.

Outputting designs

You can output embroidery designs in a variety of wayssaving to embroidery disk, punching to paper tape, sending appliqu shapes to a cutter, or sending directly to machine for stitching. From the same design file, you can also output a production worksheet for the embroidery machine operator. Designers frequently want to distribute their designs so that they can be seen in real colors, in TrueView or otherwise. In ES Designer you can save both design images and production worksheets to disk or email them direct. See Outputting Designs for details.

Embroidery disks and paper tapes

Embroidery disks are specially formatted floppy disks used to transfer designs from computer to embroidery machine. You can format embroidery disks and save designs to them from within ES Designer. The format you use will depend on the selected embroidery machine. You can also open designs from embroidery disk directly into ES Designer. Paper tape is the traditional medium for storing designs in stitch data format. You can read paper tape designs of various formats into ES Designer. Once a design is read, you can output it without change, modify it and output it in its original format, or save it as an EMB file. You can also punch designs to paper tape from ES Designer. See Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes for details.

Design management
ES Designer provides a number of productivity tools to help you manage designs and design elements for re-use. The Embroidery Clipart feature is a powerful productivity tool which makes whole designs and design

fragments easily available. ES Design Explorer provides an efficient way for viewing and managing embroidery designs in folders. Note ES Design Explorer is not a multi-user database for company-wide design management. Wilcom Design Workflow is a central design storage and management application. Any design format that can be read by ES Designer can be stored in Design Workflow. Design Workflow uses ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 33 Microsoft SQL technology and is a true multi-user tool, allowing far greater control of designs throughout your company. For this type of requirement, refer to the Design Workflow User Manual.

Embroidery Clipart

The Embroidery Clipart feature allows you to recycle commonly used design elements and greatly speeds up the process of creating new designs. Use the clipart library to permanently store useful embroidery elements and assign keywords to them. Summary information such as width and height, number of stitches and colors is automatically recorded. The library displays all design elements currently recorded to your personal database. Behind this functionality is the powerful Microsoft Data Engine or MSDE. Sort and search functionality is provided to filter your list according to name, keywords, number of colors, or number of stitches. Once a suitable design element is located, simply drag and drop it as embroidery clipart into the current project. Automatically find the nearest match between selected clipart element colors and the current palette. See Embroidery Clipart for details.

ES Design Explorer

With ES Design Explorer, you can browse design files stored on your computer hard disk, CD-ROM, or floppy disk, as well as cut, copy, paste and delete them. It recognizes all design file formats used by ES Designer. See ES Design Explorer Basics for details. Designs in ES Design Explorer folders can be sorted in various ways. This is useful when you want to select designs for stitching out, printing, archiving, and so on. Once a design is selected in an ES Design Explorer folder, you can send it direct to an embroidery machine or punching machine. You can also batch-convert your EMB and other design files to and from other file formats directly from ES Design Explorer. See ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions for details. ES 2006 Chapter 1 Digitizing with Wilcom ES 34 Create design catalogs containing thumbnail images and/or summary information. These can be sent to a printer, published on your website or intranet, and exported in formats suitable for spreadsheet and database programs, and for integration with third-party e-commerce solutions. Archive design files in folders with the built-in WinZip utility. This can be useful for sending or receiving multiple files via email. You can even view design files within zipped archives. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 35

Chapter 2

Basic Procedures

Wilcom ES software is an MS Windows-based product incorporating many of the conventions with which most PC users are already familiar. To start using ES Designer, you need to understand something about the organization of the graphical user interface (GUI) as well as a few basic procedures such as opening and saving designs. Other basic procedures include displaying the grid, accessing design information, and selecting machine formats. Security codes enable access to features within the software. You also need to be able to identify your systems access codes, and enter new codes for upgrades. This section describes how to start ES Designer, how to open designs, start new ones and use the basic commands. It also explains how to turn on and off the grid and measure distances on-screen. You will also find out how to select machine formats for different output as well as how to save designs. The section also explains the procedure for entering security codes.

Starting ES Designer
Double-click to start ES Designer. ES 2006 Chapter 2 Basic Procedures 36 Open ES Designer using the desktop icon or the Windows Start menu. The screen image shown here displays an exploded view of all toolbars in the product.

To start ES Designer

! Double-click the ES Designer shortcut icon on the Windows desktop.

Alternatively, select Programs > Wilcom ES > ES Designer from the Start menu. ES Designer opens with a new, blank design (Design1). ! Customize the design window by showing or hiding the grid, changing the grid dimensions, and showing and hiding toolbars. See Displaying the grid and Showing or hiding toolbars for details.
Design Window Title and Menu bars Standard toolbar Stitch Types toolbar Color toolbar Status bar Prompt line Pointer toolbar Input toolbar General object properties Show Vertical toolbar Travel toolbar Image toolbar

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 37 ! The Status and Prompt bars include a General Properties panel for continuous display and routine modification of general object properties. See also Accessing object properties.

Using commands and tools

Once you start ES Designer, you use commands or tools, and dialogs to complete your tasks. You select commands in ES Designer in the same way as other Windows applicationsfrom menus, toolbars, or popup menus. Dialogs provide the other principal way of engaging with the system. They come in two formsmodal and modeless. Modal dialogs effectively lock the system until you have finished with them. The idea of the modeless dialog is that you can keep it open as long as you need to while working interactively with different settings. Keyboard shortcuts are also available for the most frequently used commands. See Quick Reference for details.

Showing or hiding toolbars

Toolbars provide quick and easy access to most ES Designer commands. You can choose to show or hide them for convenience.

Tip To increase your working area, hide unwanted toolbars and use the menu and keyboard commands instead. See also Quick Reference.
Stitch type and current settings Stitch count Coordinates of current needle position Status bar Prompt line Current color General properties permanently available Length and angle of current stitch Current function

Use Show Pointer Toolbar (Show Vertical toolbar) to display the Pointer toolbar. Use Show Input Toolbar (Show Vertical toolbar) to display the Input toolbar. Use Show Travel Toolbar (Show Vertical toolbar) to display the Travel toolbar. Use Show Image Toolbar (Show Vertical toolbar) to display the Image toolbar. ES 2006 Chapter 2 Basic Procedures 38

To show or hide toolbars

1 Select View > Toolbars. The Toolbars dialog opens. 2 Select the toolbars you want to display. 3 Click OK. Tip Use the buttons on the Show Vertical toolbar to display the Pointer, Input, Travel, and Image toolbars on the side of the design window.

Toolbar docking and parking

ES Designer toolbars are dockable. To move a toolbar to a more convenient location, click-and-drag it. To dock it in its normal position, double-click the toolbar title. The toolbar parking feature allows you to make better use of available screen real estate. By default, the Toolbar Park toolbar is situated just above the design window. Simply drag and drop any toolbar into the Park to move it out of the way. Click the tab and drag it back out when you need it. You can also park the Color-Object List, the Color Palette Editor, and the Object
Click-and-drag toolbars and modeless dialogs into toolbar park

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 39 Properties dialog. The Toolbar Park toolbar itself can be docked at the bottom of the screen. Tip A toolbar parked in the Toolbar Park area is automatically removed by deactivating it in the Toolbars dialog.

Selecting commands from toolbars

Toolbars provide quick and easy access to ES Designer commands. Click a toolbar button to activate a command or, where applicable, right-click to set its properties. Some icons are toggles which turn on or off associated functions.

To select commands from toolbars

Rest the pointer over a tool icon to see its name in a tooltip. Click the icon to activate the command. Right-click to adjust settings or activate the secondary command. If the tool has both left and right-click commands, the name is split with a slash (/). For example, the Polygon Select/Line Select tool lets you select objects within a polygon when you click it, or objects along a line when you right-click. ! For many tools, right-clicking accesses current command settings.

! ! ! !

For example, left-clicking Satin/Values selects Satin as the stitch type, while right-clicking accesses Satin stitch settings in the Object Properties dialog. Note Object properties can be modified with or without objects selected. The former affects only selected objects. The latter affects current settings. See Working with object properties for details. ES 2006 Chapter 2 Basic Procedures 40

Using popup menus

To use popup menus

Generally speaking, popup menus of context-specific commands can be accessed from the design window as well as some modeless dialogs. 1 Right-click a selected object/s in the design window or modeless dialog such as the Color-Object List. The popup menu opens. 2 Select a command from the menu. Tip A frequently used command is Properties. This opens the Object Properties dialog for selected objects. See Accessing object properties for details.

Accessing object properties

The most important dialog in ES Designer is the Object Properties dialog. This is a modeless dialog, meaning that it stays in the design window as long as you need it. Use it together with a General Properties toolbar to adjust properties of selected objects as you work. Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to set properties for selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 41

To access object properties

1 Open the Object Properties dialog by any of the following means: ! Select View > Object Properties. ! Click the Object Properties icon. ! Double-click an object in the design window. ! Right-click an object in the design window and select Properties from the popup menu. ! Right-click an object in the Color-Object List and select Properties from the popup menu. 2 Select a tab to access the object property set you want to adjust.
Adjust settings Select required tab Scroll to view dialog Apply settings

ES 2006 Chapter 2 Basic Procedures 42 3 Use dropdown lists, radio buttons and checkboxes to choose options. Adjust settings by keying in precise values or by using the popup slider control. Tip The slider control has two operating modesNormal and Accelerated. Holding down the Ctrl key puts it in Accelerated mode. 4 Apply settings by means of the control buttons at the bottom of the dialog. Note You have the choice of applying changes to object properties immediately or by means of the Apply button. See Setting Object Property apply options for details.
Click swivel button to invoke slider control After clicking swivel button, drag popup slider to set Radio buttons are

mutually exclusive Checkboxes are optional Apply current settings to selected object/s Click to invoke help about a particular tab Click to invoke the effects tabs Save settings to the current template Revert to previous settings

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 43 5 Click the FX button to access a separate set of more specialized object property settings such as Accordion Spacing, Stitch Shortening, Smart Corners, etc. 6 Adjust general object propertieswidth, height, positionby means of the General Properties controls at the bottom of the screen where they are permanently available. Tip The Object Properties dialog can be temporarily parked in the new Toolbar Park toolbar for easy access. See Toolbar docking and parking for details. 7 Close the Object Properties dialog by any of the following means: ! Click the Object Properties icon. ! Click the X icon in the Object Properties dialog to close.

Undoing and redoing commands

You can undo the effects of most commands. If you change your mind, you can redo them again. ES Designer remembers up to 256 undo and redo command actions.
General properties permanently available on right side of status bar Click to apply or revert

Use Undo icon (Standard toolbar) to undo an action and Undo Arrow to undo a range of actions. Use Redo icon (Standard toolbar) to redo an action and Redo Arrow to redo a range of actions. ES 2006 Chapter 2 Basic Procedures 44

To undo and redo commands

! To undo a previous command, simply click the Undo icon.

When ES Designer cannot remember more commands, Undo is dimmed. ! Click Redo to re-apply an undone command. ! To undo or redo a range of actions, use the dropdown lists by clicking the arrow next to Undo/Redo icons. Tip To cancel the current selection in the Undo/Redo List or close it, click the Undo/Redo Arrow button again or click away the list without selecting any action.

Opening designs
ES Designer opens a comprehensive range of both outline and stitch files. You can also open designs from proprietary embroidery disks, or read them from paper tape. See also Embroidery design formats and Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes in the Online Manual. Warning You cannot open EMB files created with a later version of the software than the one you are currently running.

To open a design
Redo selected actions Undo selected

1 Click the Open icon.

actions

Use Open (Standard toolbar) to open an existing design. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 45 The Open dialog opens. 2 Select a folder from the Look In list. 3 If the design is not in EMB format, select a file type from the Files of Type list. 4 Select a design or designs. ! To select a range of items, hold down Shift then select the first and last in the range. ! To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you select. 5 Select the Preview checkbox to preview the design (for supported file formats) together with the design data. This includes stitch and color numbers, design height and width, and software version number (V6.0 onwards). Tip For more information about a selected file, right-click and select Properties from the popup menu. See Viewing design information in Windows Explorer for details. 6 For file types other than EMB or ESD, click Options and change the recognition options. See Processing Design Files for details. 7 Click Open.

Creating new designs

When you start ES Designer, a new fileDesign1is automatically created, ready for you to start digitizing. By default, Design1 is based on the NORMAL template. Templates contain pre-set styles, default settings or objects, to make digitizing quicker and easier. When you create a file based
preview panel design data preview on/off

ES 2006 Chapter 2 Basic Procedures 46 on a template, the templates values are copied to the new design. You can create additional designs based on the NORMAL template, or select a different template. New designs are given a name, and numbered sequentiallye.g. Design1, Design2, and so on. See also Working with design templates.

Creating new designs with the NORMAL template

To create a new design with the NORMAL template

Whenever you click the New icon, a blank design opens in the design window using the default NORMAL template.

! Click the New icon.

A blank design opens in the design window. Tip Whenever you create a new design, save it with a new name. See Saving designs for details.

Creating new designs with selected templates

To create a new design with a selected template

You can select a custom template to base your new design on. See also Working with design templates. 1 Select File > New. The New dialog opens. Use New (Standard toolbar) to start a new design with the NORMAL template. Use New (File menu) to start a new design with a selected template. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 47 Note If there is no template other than the default, the New dialog may not appear. 2 Select a template from the list. 3 Click OK. Tip Whenever you create a new design, save it with a new name. See

Saving designs for details.

Generating stitches
With ES Designer designs, stitches are automatically generated from design outlines and properties. You can either generate stitches as you digitize, or wait until you have defined the outlines. With Generate Stitches on (the default), stitches are calculated for new objects whenever you press Enter. They are also updated whenever you scale, transform or move the object. If speed is an issue, you can digitize objects with Generate Stitches off. You can also select objects and remove all generated stitches. With Generate Stitches off, only object outlines appear.

To generate stitches

! To generate stitches for new or selected objects, click the Generate

Stitches icon or press G. If any objects are selected, stitches are generated for them automatically. If no objects are currently selected, stitches are generated for new objects as soon as you press Enter. ! To remove stitches, or digitize without generating stitches, deselect Generate Stitches icon or press G again. Tip Make sure Show Outlines is selected, and the colors of background and object(s) when selected contradict each other, otherwise the objects will not be visible in the design window. See Changing background colors and fabrics for details. Use Generate Stitches (Generate toolbar) to generate stitches for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Chapter 2 Basic Procedures 48

Displaying grids, rulers and guides

ES Designer provides a set of grid lines to help accurately align or size embroidery objects. The Show Rulers and Guides feature improves usability by allowing you to accurately position stitches and align objects in the design.

Displaying the grid

To display the grid

Use grid lines to help accurately align or size embroidery objects. You can show or hide the grid at any time. Default grid spacing is 10 mm x 10 mm.

! Toggle grid display by any of the following means: ! Click the Show Grid icon. ! Select Special > Options > Grid and Guides tab and select the
Show Grid option. ! Select View > Grid and Guides tab and select the Show Grid option. ! Press Shift+G. Tip You can change grid spacing, select a reference point and turn Snap to Grid on or off in the Options dialog. You can also change the color of the grid lines. See Changing display colors for details. See also Setting grid options.

Displaying rulers and guides

Show Grid

Click Show Grid (Standard toolbar) to show or hide the grid. Right-click to change the Grid settings. Click Show Rulers and Guides (Standard toolbar) to show or hide rulers and guides. Right-click to change the Guides settings. Drag the Ruler Zero Point to reset a new ruler zero point. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 49 Rulers are located to the top and left side of the design window. The unit of measurementmm or inchesdepends on the regional settings in the Windows Control Panel. The ruler scale, illustrated with numbers and ticks, depends on the zoom setting. Guides are dotted vertical and horizontal lines placed across the design window to help you align objects. Each guide has a yellow guide handle on the ruler that can be used to move or delete it.

Guides are displayed on top of the grid, if present, but beneath all images, vector objects and embroidery objects. Rulers must be displayed before a guide can be created. Note By default, rulers and guides are switched on. When they are switched off, guides are hidden but are stored in the design and will reappear when switched back on.

To display rulers and guides

! Toggle ruler display by any of the following means: ! Click the Show Rulers and Guides icon. ! Select Special > Options > Grid and Guides tab and select the
Show Rulers and Guides option. ! Select View > Grid and Guides tab and select the Show Rulers and Guides option. ! Press Ctrl+R.
Show Rulers and Guides Click-and-drag to reset ruler zero point Click-and-drag to reposition guides Click ruler to create new guide Drag guide off ruler to remove

ES 2006 Chapter 2 Basic Procedures 50 ! Reset the ruler zero point by clicking and dragging the box in the top left-hand corner of the design window to the required point in the design. The point where you release the mouse becomes the new zero pointX,Y (0,0). The grid always lines up with the rulers. Whenever the ruler zero is changed, the Set Reference Point checkbox in Special > Options > Grid tab is deselected. ! To create a guide, click on either rulerhorizontal or verticaland click-and-drag it into position. Multiple guides can be created and just as easily removed. ! For more accurate positioning of guides, double-click the yellow handle. In the Guide Position dialog, enter a precise distance from the zero point, and click OK. Note The ruler zero and the design zero are not the same and in general do not coincide. When the zero point of the rulers is changed, the guides maintain their current displacement from the zero point of the design, not the zero point of the rulers. ! To remove a guide, drag the yellow guide handle off the design window. Tip You can turn Snap to Grid and Snap to Guide on or off in the Options dialog. You can also change the color of grid and guidelines. See Changing display colors for details. See also Setting grid options.

Measuring distances on-screen

Measure the distance between two points on screen using the Measure command. You can show these measurements in a tooltip. Measurements are shown in millimeters or inches, depending on the option selected in the Windows Control Panel. See your Windows documentation for more information.
Enter precise position

Use Measure (View menu) to measure distances on-screen. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 51 Tip For more accurate results, zoom in before you measure. The measurement is always the actual size, and is not affected by the zoom factor.

To measure a distance on-screen

1 Select View > Measure or press M. 2 Click the start point. 3 Move the pointer to the end point and hold the mouse still. The following information displays in the Status bar: ! Position coordinates of the end point (X=, Y=) ! Length of the measured line (L=) ! Angle of the line relative to the horizontal (A=). Tip If turned on, the measurements will also appear in tooltips. Use the tooltip with the crosshair cursor on for a more accurate measurement. See Setting other options for details. 4 Press Esc to finish.

Selecting machine formats

Before you start digitizing, decide which machine format to use. A designs machine format can be changed at any time for stitching to another machine type, or sending to a paper tape punch or embroidery disk.
measurements appear as tooltip

Select the Select Machine Format (Machine menu) to select a machine format. ES 2006 Chapter 2 Basic Procedures 52

To select a machine format

1 Select Machine > Select Machine Format. The Select Machine Format dialog opens. 2 Select a machine format from the list. Note You can customize or add formats to suit the embroidery machine you will use to stitch the design. See Creating custom formats or Adjusting standard machine format settings in the Online Manual for details. 3 Click OK.

Saving designs
ES Designer lets you save designs in EMB as well as other outline and stitch file formats. You can also save designs to proprietary embroidery disks, or punch them to paper tape. See Embroidery design formats and Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes in the Online Manual. See also Saving designs for machine. Saving a design records its file name, location and format, and updates it with any changes you make. When you save an existing design under a new name, to a different location or format, you create a copy of the original design.
Select machine format

Use Save (Standard toolbar) to save the current design. Right-click to open the Save As dialog. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 53 Tip Save your design early and often. Do not wait until you finish working. You can also set ES Designer to save automatically while you work. See Setting automatic save and backup options for details.

To save a design

1 Click the Save icon. If this is the first time you have saved the design, the Save As dialog opens. Tip To save changes to an existing file but preserve the original, use Save As. 2 Select the folder where you want to save the design from the Save In list. 3 Enter a name for the design in the File name field. 4 Select a file format from the Save as type list. See Supported embroidery file formats for details.

Warning If a design feature is not available in the file type you select, it will be convertede.g. Flexi Split stitching may be changed to plain Tatami. 5 Click Save.
format list design name folder containing design

ES 2006 Chapter 2 Basic Procedures 54 Tip Files saved in EMB format are automatically compressed when saved and decompressed when re-opened. This reduces the storage space required, and makes it possible to save large files to floppy disk, or send them as email attachments. Once you have saved a design, every time you click Save on the toolbar the file will be updated. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 55

Chapter 3

Working with Design Objects

ES Designer provides various ways to select the objects in an embroidery design. Modify the design as a whole or select individual objects for more precise modification. The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select objects and colors in designs and access their properties. Use it to group and ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and hide objects as well. Note In ES Designer vector objects and embroidery objects are in fact inter-convertible since they share many of the same characteristics. See also Digitizing with Vector Images. This section describes how to select objects using the selection tools and keyboard. It also shows how to select while traveling through designs or by using the Color-Object List.

Selecting and deselecting objects

Selecting all objects in a design

You can select all objects in a design, cancel all selections, or remove individual objects from a selected group. Select all objects to apply changes to a whole design. See also Quick Reference. ES 2006 Chapter 3 Working with Design Objects 56

To select all objects in a design

! Select Edit > Select All or press Ctrl+A. Deselecting objects

To deselect objects

Selection handles appear around the entire design. ! To deselect, select Edit > Deselect All, press X or Esc. You can cancel all selections in the design, or remove individual objects from a group of selected objects. Deselect an object/s by any of the following means: Click an empty area of the background. Select a different object. Press Esc or X to deselect all. Select Edit > Deselect All to deselect all. Remove an object from a group of selection by holding down Ctrl and clicking the object to deselect.

! ! ! ! ! !

Selecting objects with Select Object

ES Designer provides various means for selecting objects including point and click, and bounding box selection. You can also use the Select Object tool in conjunction with Shift and Ctrl keys to select groups of objects.

ES Designer allows precise selection of object outlines or fill stitches. It also allows selection of a solid color (for vector objects), fabric (for appliqus) or the visible portion, after cropping, of a bitmap. See also Quick Reference.
no objects selected all objects selected

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 57

Selecting objects by point & click

The simplest way to select objects is by pointing and clicking with the mouse with the Select Object tool activated (the default). With Shift and Ctrl keys, you can select multiple objects. When clicking at a point where two or more objects intersect, the last object in the sequence is selected. Clicking an embroidery object outline selects the object regardless of whether another object is on top. Closed unfilled objects such as vector objects with no fill color can only be selected by clicking their outlines. Filled objects can be selected by clicking their outlines or stitches. Note ES Designer allows a degree of selection tolerance around stitches and outlines when selecting, as though the lines were thicker. Selection tolerance does not apply to color or fabric fills. When stitching has low density and/or at high zooms, it is possible to click between stitches and not select the object.

To select objects by point & click

! Click the object you want to select.

Selection handles appear around it. You can move the cursor anywhere within these extents to click-and-drag the object. ! To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you click. Tip It helps to know the design stitching sequence for this method. See Traveling by object for details. ! To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you click. Click Select Object (Pointer toolbar) and click the object to select.
Click first object Hold down Ctrl and click another object Ctrl + Hold down Shift and click last object Shift + OR

ES 2006 Chapter 3 Working with Design Objects 58 Note Clicking within the objects extent box but outside its outline does not select it. ! Where you have a mixture of closed-curve objects with or without fills, you can select object outlines or fill stitches. Tip To select an object which is sitting behind another object, zoom in and position the cursor over the area where they overlap, and holding down the 2 key, click until the second object is selected. Each click selects the next overlapping object.

Selecting objects with a bounding box

With the Select Object tool activated, you can select objects by dragging a bounding box around them. The selection tool is generally activated by default.

To select objects with a bounding box

Clicking fill selects the object even if it is within the bounds of a larger object Clicking fill behind an object without fill selects the object Clicking outline of object selects the object

! Drag a bounding box around the objects you want to select.

Click Select Object (Pointer toolbar) and drag a bounding box around the object to select. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 59 Objects are selected when you release the mouse button.

Note Only objects completely within the bounding box will be selected when you release the mouse button. See also Grouping and ungrouping objects.

Selecting objects on the fly

Selecting objects with Selects On
To select objects with Selects On

You can select a range of objects by traveling by object with Selects On activated, or using the Select Object tool in conjunction with Shift, Ctrl and Tab keys. The Selects On tool adds objects to the selection as you travel through the stitching sequence. 1 Click the Selects On icon. 2 Click the Select Object icon. Note If the Select Object tool is not selected, Selects On has no effect. 3 Travel through the design. See Traveling by object for details. As you travel, objects are added to the selection.
Drag a bounding box around the objects Objects are selected

Click Selects On (Standard toolbar) to select a range of objects as you travel through the design. ES 2006 Chapter 3 Working with Design Objects 60

Selecting objects while traveling through a design

To select objects while traveling through a design

You can select objects as you travel through the design using the Ctrl key. Traveling is usually associated with checking the stitching sequence. 1 Click the Select Object icon. 2 Travel through the design, stopping just before the object to select. See Traveling by object for details. 3 Hold down Ctrl, and travel over the object to select it. Note If an object is already selected, it is deselected when you travel through it. ! To select more objects, continue traveling with Ctrl held down. ! To leave an object out of the selection, release Ctrl before you travel through it. Tip You can select the object you are currently traveling through by pressing Shift+O or right-clicking the Select Object tool. Click Select Object (Pointer toolbar) together with the Ctrl key to select objects as you travel through a design.
Stop before the first object Hold down Ctrl and travel by object

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 61

Selecting next or previous object

If an object is already selected, you can select the object before or after it in the stitching sequence using Tab or Shift + Tab with the Select Object tool activated. With no object selected, you can select the first or last object in the design sequence.

To select next or previous object

1 Click the Select Object icon. 2 Select an object as required. 3 Do one of the following: ! Press Tab to select the next object in the stitching sequence. ! Press Shift + Tab to select the previous object in the stitching sequence. Tip Hold down Ctrl and press Tab or Shift + Tab to add the next or previous objects to the selection.

Selecting objects with Polygon Select/Line Select

Sometimes the Select Object tool does not provide fine enough control. The Polygon Select /Line Select tool lets you select individual objects by drawing an outline around them or a line through them. Tip To select an object which is behind another object, you can zoom in and click the outline. Alternatively, position the pointer over the object, hold down the 2 key, and click until the object is selected. Each click selects the next overlapping object.

Selecting objects with Polygon Select

With the Polygon Select /Line Select tool you can select a specific object by drawing a bounding box around it. Click Select Object (Pointer toolbar) and press Tab or Shift + Tab to select next or previous objects. Click Polygon Select /Line Select (Pointer toolbar) to select objects with a bounding box. ES 2006 Chapter 3 Working with Design Objects 62

To select objects with Polygon Select

1 Click the Polygon Select /Line Select icon. 2 Mark reference points around the object/s you want to select. The objects you want to select must be completely within the outline. 3 Press Enter to select.

Selecting objects with Line Select

To select objects with Line Select

With the Polygon Select /Line Select tool you can select a specific object by drawing a line through it. 1 Right-click the Polygon Select/Line Select icon. 2 Mark two or more reference points to create a line touching all objects you want to select. Any object intersected by the line is selected. 3 Press Enter to select.
Mark reference points around object/s to select

Click Polygon Select/Line Select (Pointer toolbar) to draw a line through the object to select.
Mark two reference points

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 63

Selecting related objects

You can select all objects of the same color or stitch type with a single command. Use this feature to apply a change across all objects of the same type.

Selecting objects by color

You can select all objects of the same color with a single command. Use this feature to apply a change across all objects of the same color. See also Viewing design objects by color.

To select objects by color

1 Select Edit > Select By > Color. The Select By Color dialog opens. 2 Select a thread color from the list. ! To select a range of colors, hold down Shift as you click. ! To select multiple colors, hold down Ctrl as you click. 3 Click OK. Objects using the selected thread colors are selected in the design. Note Manual color changes are ignored. Any objects with manual color changes are selected according to their original color. ES 2006 Chapter 3 Working with Design Objects 64

Selecting objects by stitch type

To select objects by stitch type

You can select all objects of the same stitch type with a single command. Use this feature to apply a change across all objects of the same stitch type. 1 Select Edit > Select By > Stitch type. The Select By Stitch Type dialog opens. 2 Select a stitch type from the list. ! To select a range of stitch types, hold down Shift as you click. ! To select multiple stitch types, hold down Ctrl as you click. 3 Click OK. Objects using the selected stitch types are selected in the design.

Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List

The Color-Object List provides a sequential list of objects as digitized, grouped by color block. It offers an easy way to select objects and selectively view them. It is synchronized with the design window, dynamically updating whenever you manipulate objects. It is normally
Select stitch type

Use Color-Object List (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Color-Object List display on and off. Use it to select and view objects in a design. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 65 docked on the right of the design window but can be dragged to any position you require. Note You can use the Color-Object List to group and lock objects. Use it also to cut, copy and paste, resequence, as well as branch objects. See also Grouping and locking with the Color-Object List, Copying and pasting objects, Resequencing colors and objects with the Color-Object List, and Branching objects with the Color-Object List in the Online Manual.

To select and view objects with the Color-Object List

1 Click the Color-Object List icon. The Color-Object List opens. It can be docked to the left or right side of the design window, or dragged to any position. The Color-Object List shows a separate icon for each color block and each object in the design, in order of stitching sequence. Each objects stitch count is also shown, together with the input method and stitch type used in its creation.
stitch type stitch count bitmap image node vector image node more than one stitch type more than one object type color block node total color block count total object count object type total stitch count object icons

ES 2006 Chapter 3 Working with Design Objects 66 2 Click a node icon to open or close a color block and see its component objects.

3 Click an icon to select a color block and/or individual objects. When a color block is selected, all of its component objects are selected as well. A blue border appears around each. ! To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you click. ! To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you click. ! To select all items, right-click any object or color block, and choose Select All from the popup menu. ! To deselect all objects, click away from objects and color blocks. 4 Hide selected color blocks and objects via the popup menu commands. ! Right-click a color block or object icon and apply Hide from the popup menu. ! To show all items, right-click any object or color block, and select Unhide All from the popup menu.
Click to open/close all color block nodes Click to open/close individual color block node Blue border appears around selected objects Right-click any object or color block, and select Select All Select Unhide All

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 67 ! To view selected items only, select Hide Others from the popup menu. Alternatively, select the items you want to view in isolation, and hold down Locate. Note The Locate button will hide all unselected objects, but it will not pan to the located object. Nor will it update the Overview window.
Select Hide Others to view only selected items Hold down Locate to quickly view selected items

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 68

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

ES Designer provides many viewing modes to make it easier to work with your designs. Zoom in on an area to see more detail, view the design at actual size, or view a thumbnail of the whole design in a separate Overview window. Pan the design to move it across the design window instead of scrolling, and quickly change between one view and the last. Show or hide various design elements with the available display settings. You can show or hide outlines, needle penetration points, connectors, stitch angles, machine function symbols and the stitches themselves. You can also view designs in TrueView. When working with embroidery designs, you need to understand the stitching sequence. Check this by traveling through the design stitch-by-stitch. You can also check it by slowly redrawing the design on-screen. You can also preview a design in different colors on different fabrics by selecting from among any number of pre-defined colorways. ES Designer gives you comprehensive information about your designs. Even before opening a design, you can check the software version number and

other design information for EMB files directly from Windows Explorer. View stitching details in the Design Properties dialog. The production worksheet also provides essential production information, including a design preview, the size of the design, color sequence and any special instructions. This section explains the design viewing modes available in ES Designer as well as the various design viewing settings. It also describes how to view designs by traveling through the stitching sequence. Design colorways are explained, as well as how to obtain and modify design information. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 69

Design viewing modes

ES Designer provides many viewing modes to make it easier to work with your design. Zoom in on an area to see more detail, view the design at actual size, or view a thumbnail of the whole design in a separate Overview window. Pan across the design instead of scrolling, and quickly change between one view and the last. Note To make sure your design is being displayed at the correct size, you might need to calibrate your monitor. See Calibrating the monitor for details.

Zooming and panning designs

Magnify your view of the design by zooming in on individual stitches or details, or zoom out to display more of the design in the window. In addition to the scroll bars, panning provides a quick way to view parts of a design which are not currently visible in the design window. Panning is typically used after zooming in on an area. Tip Use Auto Scroll to scroll the design automatically while you are digitizing. This can be more convenient than using panning or the scroll bars. See Setting auto scroll options for details.

To zoom and pan a design

! To display a design at twice its current size, click the Zoom In 2X icon

or press Z. Click Zoom 1:1 (Zoom toolbar) to display a design at actual size. Click Show All (Zoom toolbar) to display the whole design in the design window. Click Zoom Box (Zoom toolbar) to zoom in on a section of a design. Select Zoom In 2X (Zoom toolbar) to display a design at twice its current size. Select Zoom Out 2X (Zoom toolbar) to display a design at half its current size. Select a Zoom Factor (Zoom toolbar) from the dropdown list to display the design at a particular scale. ES 2006 Chapter 4 Viewing Designs 70 ! To display a design at half its current size, click the Zoom Out 2X icon or press Shift+Z. ! To display a design at actual size, click the Zoom 1:1 icon or press 1. ! To return to the previous view, select View > Previous View or press V. ! To view the entire design in the design window, click the Show All icon or press 0. Tip To fit selected objects in the window, select View > Show All > Selected Objects. Alternatively, press Shift+0 on the keyboard. Press Shift+S to only show selected objects. See also Design viewing settings. ! Select a Zoom Factor from the dropdown list to display the design at a particular scale or key it directly into the field. Alternatively, select View > Zoom Factor or press F on the keyboard. In the Zoom Factor dialog, enter a viewing scale and click OK. ! To zoom in on a section of a design, click the Zoom Box icon and drag a bounding box around the zoom area. Alternatively, press B on the keyboard.
Enter viewing scale Click & drag bounding box around area to

zoom

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 71 ! To pan across a design in the design window, select View > Pan or press P. Move the pan box over the part of the design you want to view and left-click. ES Designer centers the design window around the point you clicked.

Working with the Overview Window

Use the Overview Window to view a thumbnail of the design. The window updates whenever you make a change and can be used to zoom in or pan across the design window. See also Zooming and panning designs. Note To change the view settings for the Overview window, click it to make it the active window. See Design viewing settings for details.

To work with the Overview Window

1 Click the Overview Window icon. Use Overview Window (Standard toolbar) to toggle Overview window display on/off. Use it to view a thumbnail of the design.
Place pan box over area to view and click

ES 2006 Chapter 4 Viewing Designs 72 The Overview Window opens. 2 To zoom in or out, click the Zoom button at the bottom of the window and drag a bounding box around the area to zoom.
Click for zoom box
Drag bounding box around area to zoom

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 73 3 To pan across the design, move the cursor inside the zoom boxit changes to a four-way arrow cursorand drag it.

Showing and hiding selected objects

ES Designer provides a number of techniques for quickly hiding or showing selected objects in the design window. You can also switch quickly between the current view and the last view you selected. After certain operations, such as editing thread colors, you may also need to redraw the screen for a clearer display. Note To view the stitching sequence, use Slow Redraw. See Redrawing the stitching sequence slowly for details.
Drag zoom box to area to pan

ES 2006 Chapter 4 Viewing Designs 74

To show or hide selected objects

To view a selected object in isolation, press Shift+S. To display the selected object full-screen, press Shift+0. To return to the previous view, select View > Previous View or press V. To re-display the entire design, press Esc followed by press Shift+S. To redraw the screen, select View > Redraw or press R. For further techniques in showing and hiding objects, see also Viewing selected parts of a design.

! ! ! ! ! !

Viewing selected parts of a design

You can set your system to display all embroidery objects in a design, or hide all but the selected objects. You can also turn off all embroidery objects in order to see backdrop images more clearly. Note Display settings apply to both the design window and production worksheet. See also Design viewing modes and Previewing production worksheets. Tip The Color-Object List provides another way to view design objects. See Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List for details.
Press Shift+S

Select Options (Special menu) to display all embroidery objects in a design, or hide all but the selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 75

To view selected parts of a design

1 Select Special > Options. The Options dialog opens. 2 Select the View Design tab. 3 In the Visibility panel, select a display option. ! No Change: the display remains the same as before. ! Show Whole Design: all embroidery objects in the design are visible. See also Viewing selected parts of a design. ! Show Selected Objects: only objects that are currently selected are visible. This option is only available when objects are selected. ! Show Unselected Objects: the reverse of the above option. This option is only available when objects are selected.
Select viewing (and print) options

ES 2006 Chapter 4 Viewing Designs 76 ! Hide Whole Design: all embroidery objects in the design are hidden. Note From this dialog you can also select the design elements you want to displaye.g. stitches, outlines, etc. You can also change TrueView settings for different effects. See Setting design element view options and Setting TrueView options in the Online Manual. 4 Click OK.

Viewing design objects by color

To help you isolate individual design elements for checking or manipulation, the View By Color function lets you view objects by color. This is particularly useful when you are reseqencing objects by color. See also Resequencing objects by color. Tip The Color-Object List provides another way to view design objects. See Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List for details.

To view design objects by color

1 Create or open a design. 2 Select View > View By Color. The Select By Color dialog opens. 3 Select the colors you want to view. ! To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you select. Select View By Color (View menu) to view design elements by color. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 77 ! To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you select. 4 Click OK. The design appears with only those colors you selected in view. Note The View By Color command will not work with grouped objects.

Design viewing settings

You can show or hide design elements with a variety of display settings. Show or hide object outlines, needle penetration points, connectors, stitch angles, machine function symbols and the stitches themselves. You can also show or hide selected colors. Tip You can change Overview window view settings separately to the design window. For example, you can view the design in TrueView in the Overview window and in normal view in the design window. See also Working with the Overview Window.

Viewing stitches and outlines

You can show or hide stitches and object outlines as you work. Hide stitches to see outlines more clearly when reshaping. Show outlines if Generate Stitches is turned off. See also Generating stitches. Click Show Stitches (Standard toolbar) to show or hide stitches. Click Show Outlines (Standard toolbar) to show or hide object outlines.

ES 2006 Chapter 4 Viewing Designs 78 Note Show Outlines will not work with stitch files that have been read without stitch recognition. See Opening stitch files in ES Designer for details.

To view stitches and outlines

! Click the Show Outlines icon to turn outlines on or off. ! Click the Show Stitches icon (or press S) to turn stitches on or off.
Tip Right-clicking these tools opens the Options > View Design tab. See Viewing selected parts of a design for details.

Viewing designs in TrueView

TrueView offers a graphical representation of what the final embroidery will look like. Tip Change TrueView settings for different effects. See Setting TrueView options for details.
stitches and outlines ON stitches ON outlines ON

Use TrueView (Standard toolbar) to change between normal view and TrueView. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 79

To view designs in TrueView

! Click the TrueView icon to switch between TrueView and normal view.
Tip Use TrueView together with a background fabric to see how your design will look when stitched out. See Changing background colors and fabrics for details.

Viewing needle points, connectors and functions

You can show or hide design elements such as needle points, connectors and machine function symbols in your design. For example: ! View needle points to select stitches for editing ! View functions to check color changes or trims ! View connectors to help position entry and exit points. See also Connecting Embroidery Objects and Editing Stitches and Machine Functions in the Online Manual. Note You can display or hide design elements in any combination. None displays while viewing in TrueView.
Normal view (stitches and outlines) TrueView ON

Click Show Needle Points (Standard toolbar) to show or hide the needle points in a design. Click Show Connectors (Standard toolbar) to show or hide the connectors. Click Show Functions (Standard toolbar) to show or hide the function symbols. ES 2006 Chapter 4 Viewing Designs 80

To view needle points, connectors and functions

! To show or hide needle points, click the Show Needle Points icon. ! To show or hide connectors, click the Show Connectors icon. See also

Types of connectors. ! To show or hide machine functions, click the Show Functions icon. See also Machine function types. Tip Right-clicking these tools opens the Options > View Design tab. See Viewing selected parts of a design for details. See also Setting design element view options.

Viewing the stitching sequence

When working with embroidery designs, you need to understand the stitching sequence. You can check a designs stitching sequence by traveling through it by stitches, segments, functions or objects. You can also check the sequence by slowly redrawing the design on-screen.

ES Designer simulates stitching out by changing stitches from black to their allocated thread color as they are stitched. Note The stitching sequence can only be viewed in stitch view. It cannot be used with TrueView.
Needle Points ON Functions ON Connectors ON

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 81 Tip You can change the display color of unsewn stitches. See Changing display colors for details.

Traveling by stitches

Use the stitch travel tools or keyboard shortcuts to travel through the design one or more stitches at a time. The current needle position is indicated by a large white cross or needle position marker. Initially, this is located at the end of the design. When you travel through stitches, the needle position marker moves accordingly. The current stitch number appears in the Status Line.

To travel by stitches

! Click the travel tool you require to travel backwards through the
stitching sequence by 1, 10, 100, or 1000 stitches. ! Right-click the required tool to travel forwards through the stitching sequence. ! Alternatively, use the arrow keys, with no objects selected, to travel backwards and forwards through the stitching sequence. See Quick Reference for details. Click Travel 1 Stitch (Travel toolbar) to travel 1 stitch at a time. Click Travel 10 Stitches (Travel toolbar) to travel backwards 10 stitches at a time. Right-click Travel 10 Stitches to travel forwards 10 stitches at a time. Click Travel 100 Stitches (Travel toolbar) to travel backwards 100 stitches at a time. Right-click Travel 100 Stitches to travel forwards 100 stitches at a time. Click Travel 1000 Stitches (Travel toolbar) to travel backwards 1000 stitches at a time. Right-click Travel 1000 Stitches to travel forwards 1000 stitches at a time.
Travel backwards one stitch

ES 2006 Chapter 4 Viewing Designs 82 Tip Slow Redraw lets you view the stitching and color sequence of a design in slow motion. See Redrawing the stitching sequence slowly for details.

Traveling by segment
To travel by segment

Use the Travel by Segment tool or keyboard shortcut to travel through the design by object segment. See also Quick Reference.

! To travel to the previous segment, click the Travel by Segment icon. ! To travel to the next segment, right-click the Travel by Segment icon. Traveling to the start or end of a design
Use the Start/End Design tool or keyboard shortcut to travel quickly to the start or end of the stitching sequence. See also Quick Reference.

To travel to the start or end of a design

! To travel to the start of the design, click the Start/End Design icon. ! To travel to the end of the design, right-click the Start/End Design icon.
Click Travel by Segment (Travel toolbar) to travel to previous and next segments. Click Start/End Design (Travel toolbar) to travel to the start or end of a design. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 83

Traveling by object

Use the Travel by Object tool or keyboard shortcut to travel through the design by object. This is useful if you need to locate a specific object to delete it from the stitching sequence, or in order to insert another object. Use it in conjunction with the stitch travel tools if you want to nest an object. See also Nesting objects. Tip You can select a range of objects by traveling by object with Selects On activated. See Selecting objects with Selects On for details.

To travel by object

! To travel to the previous object, click the Travel by Object icon. ! To travel to the next object, right-click the Travel by Object icon.
Tip You can also use keyboard shortcuts to travel through the design by object. See also Quick Reference.

Traveling by color

Use the Travel by Color tool or keyboard shortcut to travel through the design by color. This is useful if you need to locate a specific color change in order to insert an object or delete it from the stitching sequence. See also Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List and Quick Reference. Use Travel by Object (Travel toolbar) to travel to the previous or next object. Use Travel by Color (Travel toolbar) to travel to the previous or next color change function. ES 2006 Chapter 4 Viewing Designs 84 Note When you travel by color, the system looks for the next or previous color change function. Both automatically and manually inserted color change functions are recognized.

To travel by color

! To travel to the previous color, click the Travel by Color icon. ! To travel to the next color, right-click the Travel by Color icon. Traveling by machine function

Use the Travel by Function tool to travel through the design by machine function. This is useful, for example, if you are looking for an extra trim that should not be there. Note, however, that the needle point will stop at every jump, trim, and color change. See also Quick Reference. Note Both manually and automatically inserted functions are recognized. See also Changing Machine Formats. Use Travel by Function (Travel toolbar) to travel to the previous or next machine function. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 85

To travel by machine function

! To travel to the next machine function, right-click the Travel by

Function icon. ! To travel to the previous machine function, click the Travel by Function icon. Tip You can use the Stitch List to help locate stitches and machine functions for editing. See Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List for details.

Redrawing the stitching sequence slowly

The Slow Redraw tool lets you view the stitching and color sequence of a design in slow motion. Redrawing can be started from any stitch in the design. Hide previously stitched parts of the design as required. With larger designs, you can choose to scroll automatically so that the area being stitched remains on-screen. Note Slow Redraw cannot be used with TrueView.

To redraw the stitching sequence slowly

1 Select View > Slow Redraw or press Shift+R. Use Slow Redraw (View menu) to view the stitching and color sequence of a design in slow motion.
half-stitched

design

ES 2006 Chapter 4 Viewing Designs 86 The Slow Redraw dialog opens. Tip To redraw only a section of the design, travel to the point where you want to start Slow Redraw. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details. 2 Use the slider bar to adjust the redraw speed. 3 Select the options as required: ! Hide Before: Hide all sections of the design prior to the current cursor position. ! Auto Scroll: With larger designs, scroll automatically so that the area being stitched remains on-screen. 4 Click Go. The design is redrawn on-screen according to the stitching sequence and selected speed. 5 Click Pause, Stop or Back to Start as required. ! Pause pauses the redraw, letting you resume where you left off. ! Stop stops the redraw and returns to the beginning of the design. ! Back to Start redraws from the beginning of the design. Note You can adjust the display color of unsewn stitches. See Changing display colors for details.
Go Pause Stop Back to Start Adjust display options Travel to middle of design, then start Slow Redraw Only areas being redrawn are displayed, the rest are hidden

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 87

Viewing colorways, backgrounds and display colors

In ES Designer, you can define multiple colorways for the one design. This means you can preview or stitch out the same design in different colors to different fabrics. Background colors and fabrics are treated as part of the colorway rather than design window settings. In addition, display colors for borer holes, unsewn and selected stitches, object outlines and grid are part of the colorway definition.

Viewing colorways

A colorway is a color scheme or palette of thread colors. It may also include a background color or fabric sample. This means you can preview or stitch out the same design in different colors to different fabrics. In ES Designer, you can also print multiple colorways, icons of color blocks, and design backgrounds with the production worksheet. See also Working with colorways. Tip When you start a new design, Colorway 1 appears as the default color palette. You can change it by selecting from among any number of pre-defined colorways saved to the current template.

To view a colorway

1 Open a design. 2 Select a colorway from the Colorways toolbar. Tip Select View > Redraw to refresh your screen. Use the Colorways dropdown (Color toolbar) to select a new color scheme for your design. ES 2006 Chapter 4 Viewing Designs 88

Changing background colors and fabrics

ES Designer lets you change the background color of the design window to

match the color of your fabric. Or you can select a background fabric for more realistic previews and presentations. The background is saved with the colorway. Note Default settings are stored in the template as Colorway 1. If you change the background in Colorway 1 and save your template, it will always display like this at start up. See also Working with colorways.

To change the background color or fabric

1 Select a colorway and click the BKG button. The Display dialog opens for the selected colorway. Use the BKG button (Color toolbar) to change background color and fabrics.
Select colorway Select background color or fabric Edit color Select fabric Center or tile fabric pattern pattern in design window

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 89 2 Select the design window background type. ! Color: uses the selected color. ! Fabric: uses an image of a fabric. 3 Select a color or fabric to use. ! To select a background color, click Edit. Select a color from the Color dialog and click OK. ! To select a fabric, click Browse. Select a fabric type from the Open dialog and click OK. You can center or tile the fabric bitmap in the design window. If the bitmap is large enough to fill the entire window, select Center. Otherwise, select Tile. 4 Click OK. Tip Textured backgrounds can also be imported into ES Designer. Almost any artwork can be usedphotographs, magazine pictures, clipart images, and even fabric samples. See also Scanning artwork into ES Designer.

Changing display colors

In addition to background color or fabric, display colors for borer holes, unsewn and selected stitches, object outlines and grid are part of the colorway definition. You may want to change them if the default display color is not visible against the current colorway background.

To change display colors

1 Select a colorway and click the BKG button. Use the BKG button (Color toolbar) to change background color and fabrics.
blue outline black outline

ES 2006 Chapter 4 Viewing Designs 90 The Display dialog opens for the selected colorway. 2 Select an item from the Selection list. ! Borer: borer points. ! Unsewn: unsewn stitches when traveling through design. ! Selected: selected objects or stitches. ! Object Outline: object outlines. ! Grid: grid lines. ! Guides: guides. 3 Click Edit. The Color dialog opens. 4 Select or mix the new display color and click OK. 5 Click OK to close the Display dialog.

Select items displayed Edit color Select or mix new display color

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 91

Viewing design information

You can obtain design information in a variety of ways and formatsbefore opening the EMB file via Windows Explorer, from the Design Properties dialog, as well as from the production worksheet.

Viewing design information in Windows Explorer

Before opening EMB files, you can check the software version number and other design information through Windows Explorer. The Properties dialog displays a design preview together with design information such as stitch count, number of stops and color changes, as well as machine format. You can also view general file information, such as file size and modification dates. Note This same dialog can be accessed from within the Open dialog in ES Designer. See also Opening designs.

To view design information in Windows Explorer

1 In Windows Explorer, select a file. 2 Right-click the file and select Properties from the popup menu. The Properties dialog opens and displays the EMB tab. ES 2006 Chapter 4 Viewing Designs 92 3 Check the design information, or click the other tabs for general file information. Tip The Summary tab provides some of the same information entered in the Design Properties > Summary dialog in ES Designer. See Viewing design information in ES Designer for details. 4 Click OK.

Viewing design information in ES Designer

You can check the software version number and other design information through the Design Properties dialog. Stitching details are also provided. Most of the fields cannot be modified directly except for stitch counts, summary information, Colorways, and Elements. Note An element, in software terms, is a color block consisting of sequential, same-color objects. You can assign names to elements which then appear on the production worksheet. The operator generally uses these to make sure colors are correct during production. See Naming design elements via Design Properties for details.

To view design information in ES Designer

1 Select File > Design Properties.
Fish Marine animals Hatice Onay fish, tropical, marine Tropical fish using curve line fills and trapunto effect.

Use Design Properties (File menu) to view stitching details about a design. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 93 The Design Properties > Information dialog opens. This tab contains information about the design height, width, stitch count and colors. The data is extracted from the design and, except for stitch count, cannot be modified. Note This tab also provides important information about the file source Native Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or Imported Stitches. See Embroidery design formats for details. 2 Click Length Calculation to revise stitch counts according to target fabric thickness. See Estimating total thread usage for details. 3 Select the Stop Sequence tab to view the color sequence and stitch

counts for each design element.

Enter Element name

ES 2006 Chapter 4 Viewing Designs 94 The data in this tab is extracted from the design and, except for Element, cannot be modified. See also Naming design elements via Design Properties. Note There is a stitch count for each element in the design. You can show this as a stitch count for each element or a cumulative stitch count. See Setting other options for details. 4 Select the Summary tab to view or enter summary information about the design. 5 Click a field and enter any text which will help you identify the design at a later date. Note Information from this tab is included on the production worksheet as well as the Summary tab of the Windows Properties dialog. See Viewing design information in Windows Explorer and Previewing production worksheets for details. 6 Click OK.

Estimating total thread usage

To estimate total thread usage
Hatice Onay fish, tropical, marine Tropical fish using curve line fills and trapunto. Fish Marine animals

In order to get more precise thread usage estimates, you can adjust the fabric thickness setting to suit the target fabric. 1 Select File > Design Properties. The Design Properties > Information dialog opens.

Use Design Properties (File menu) to view total stitch usage. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 95 2 Click Length Calculation. The Length Calculation dialog opens. 3 Enter the thickness of the target fabric in millimeters. 4 Adjust the bobbin thread length according to the mixture of thread types in the design. This factor provides a simple mechanism for a more accurate bobbin thread length estimate. The default value (100%) is suitable for a design with a mixture of stitch types. If the design is all Run stitches or all Tatami, more bobbin thread will be used and the factor can be increased say to 125%. If the design is all Satin stitch, the factor can be reduced to say 65%. 5 Click OK. The Total Thread and Total Bobbin values are adjusted to take into account fabric thickness on total thread requirement. Tip Click Save to save the revised settings to the current template.

Naming design elements via Design Properties

You can assign names to blocks of sequential, same-color objects, known as elements. Each color block can be given a descriptive name for easy identification. Element names appear on the production worksheet. Tip The Usage field in the Color Palette Editor shows a list of selected color blocks which correspond to design elements. See Naming design elements via the Color Palette Editor for details.
Enter target fabric thickness in mm Enter bobbin thread length as a%

Use Design Properties (File menu) to assign names to blocks of sequential, same color objects. ES 2006 Chapter 4 Viewing Designs 96

To name design elements via Design Properties

1 Select File > Design Properties. The Design Properties > Information dialog opens. 2 Select the Stop Sequence tab. 3 In the Element fields, enter names for each color block as required. To do so, click the field, type the name, and press Enter. Note This information may be included on the production worksheet. See Customizing production worksheet information for details. 4 Click OK.

Previewing production worksheets

The production worksheet is the link between the designer and the embroidery machine operator. It contains a design preview and essential production information, including the size of the design, color sequence and any special instructions. See also Printing or plotting production worksheets.

To preview a production worksheet

1 Click the Print Preview icon.
Enter element names for each color block

Click Print Preview (Standard toolbar) to preview the production worksheet on-screen. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 97 The production worksheet displays in a preview window. 2 Adjust the view as required: ! To change the orientation of the paper, click Landscape or Portrait. ! To change the information that displays, and set printing/plotting preferences, click Options. See also Setting production worksheet print options. ! To print the design, click Print. ! To close the production worksheet preview, click Close. Tip Zoom in to read the production information or view the design preview more closely. Large designs may be displayed over a number of pages.

Showing and hiding backdrops

Click Close to return to Design Window Design appears at actual size Click Print to print the production worksheet Click to display one or two pages production information

Use Show Bitmap (Standard toolbar) to show and hide bitmap images. Right-click to set image display options. Use Show Vectors (Standard toolbar) to show and hide vector images. Right-click to set image display options. ES 2006 Chapter 4 Viewing Designs 98 Artwork can be inserted, pasted or scanned into ES Designer for use as digitizing templates or backdrops. You can show or hide backdrops temporarily while you digitize. Depending on the view options set up in the Options dialog, the image displays in full color, or dimmed. See Setting image viewing options for details. Note A design may include both bitmap images and vector images which can be selectively turned on or off.

To show or hide backdrops

! Click the Show Bitmap and/or Show Vectors icons.

When selected, backdrop images are visible.

! To hide images, click the icons again.

Tip So you dont accidentally move or delete the backdrop, select it and press K on the keyboard to lock it down. See Locking and unlocking objects for details.
vector image together with bitmap image

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 99

PART II DIGITIZING
Digitizing methods

DESIGNS

In ES Designer, you build designs from basic shapes or embroidery objects. These are like ordinary drawing objects in that they have certain defining characteristics or properties such as color, size, position, and so on. They also have properties unique to embroidery such as stitch type and density. This section describes how to digitize shapes manually with the available digitizing tools. It also explains how to adjust input settings to obtain the best results. See Digitizing Methods for details.

Fill and outline stitches

This section explains how to apply fill and outline stitch types to your embroidery objects, as well as how to change stitch settings to obtain the best results. See Fill and Outline Stitches for details.

Colorways and thread charts

This section describes how to select colors from the color palette as well as how to change colorways. It also explains how to define, modify and delete colorways. There is also an explanation of how to define your own thread colors and charts. See Colorways and Thread Charts for details. ES 2006 Digitizing Designs 100

Connecting embroidery objects

This section describes how to add connectors, tie-offs and trims to your designs. It also describes adjusting settings for automatic connectors, including the stitch length for travel runs. There is also a topic on hiding travel runs using the Trapunto effect. See Connecting Embroidery Objects for details.

Improving stitch quality

This section describes how to strengthen and stabilize designs with automatic underlays, as well as how to compensate for fabric stretch. Reducing stitch bunching with stitch shortening and fractional spacing is covered, together with adjusting stitch density and removing small stitches automatically. Techniques for controlling corner stitching and long stitches with Auto Split and Auto Jump are described. You will also find details of setting automatic start and end points. See Improving Stitch Quality for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 101

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods
In ES Designer, you build designs from basic shapes or embroidery objects. These are like ordinary vector objects in that they have

certain defining characteristics or properties such as color, size, position, and so on. They also have properties unique to embroidery such as stitch type and density. Note The most important property for an embroidery object is in fact its stitch type. Different stitch types are suited to different shapes. See also Fill and Outline Stitches. The process of creating embroidery objects on-screen is called digitizing. Like the creation of designs in graphics applications, this involves the use of input or digitizing tools. These are similar to drawing tools except that the end result is an embroidery rather than vector object. Different tools are suited to creating different shapes or design elements. There are specific tools for digitizing larger complex shapes, asymmetrical columns of turning stitches, columns of varying width, columns of fixed width, lines, and even individual stitches. Tip Vector objects themselves can be converted directly to embroidery objects using the Point & Stitch tools. See Digitizing shapes with Point & Stitch for details. This section describes how to digitize shapes manually with the available digitizing tools. It also explains how to adjust input settings to obtain the best results. ES 2006 Chapter 5 Digitizing Methods 102

Digitizing tools
Different digitizing methods or tools are suited to creating different shapes or design elements. Digitizing methods divide broadly into two categoriesoutline and fill. Different stitch types are suited to different digitizing methods. See also Corresponding object and stitch types. Note When you create an embroidery object, you can accept the default settings for the particular tool, or apply new ones. Default settings are stored in the design template. You can also define current properties to influence all the objects you create in the current design. See Object Properties, Styles and Templates for details.

Selecting digitizing methods

Digitizing methods divide broadly into two categoriesoutline and fill. Run and Manual digitizing methods are used to digitize outlines or individual Use Manual (Input toolbar) to enter individual manual stitches. Use Triple Manual (Input toolbar) to enter triple manual stitches. Use Run (Input toolbar) to place a row of single run stitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Triple Run (Input toolbar) to place a triple row of run stitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Backstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of backstitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Stemstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of stemstitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Input A (Input toolbar) to create columns of varying width and stitch angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Input B (Input toolbar) to create asymmetrical columns of turning stitches, where opposite sides are different shapes. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Input C (Input toolbar) to digitize columns or borders of fixed width. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with a single stitch angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with turning stitch angles. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 103

stitches. Inputs A, B & C are used to create filled columnar shapes with differing characteristics. Complex Fill and Fusion Fill, the most commonly used digitizing tools, can be used to create almost any filled shape. You can adjust the settings of most of the digitizing methods by right-clicking the tools and selecting options in the dialog. Note Run stitch, Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, and Stemstitch are considered both digitizing methods and stitch types. Other digitizing methods may use different fill stitch types depending on the particular application. See also Fill and Outline Stitches.

Control points

Once you have selected a digitizing method, you digitize shapes in the same way by marking points along an outl ine. You always use the left mouse button to mark a corner point, and the right mouse button to mark a curve point. The points you mark when digitizing a shape become its control points. These are used to edit or transform the objects. Such actions may include reshaping, scaling, letter spacing, changing entry and exi points. You can modify stitch angles of selected objects, including setting multiple stitch angles. Control points vary slightly with the object type. See Modifying Designs for details.
Object is closed automatically Object is closed automatically 1 2 3 4 5 61 2 3 4 5 6 = corner point = exit point = curve point = entry point corner point exit point entry point = stitch angle points stitch angle line

ES 2006 Chapter 5 Digitizing Methods 104 Corner and curve points can be interchanged. Most control points can be added, deleted, or moved. Entry and exit points, however, cannot be deleted.

Switching between fill and outline digitizing methods

You can quickly switch from a fill stitch digitizing method to Run or Manual digitizing methods using keyboard shortcuts. Tip After digitizing, you can convert between Run, Triple Run and Input C objects, as well as between Complex Fill and Input A & B objects. See Converting between object types for details.

To switch between fill and outline digitizing methods

! Press Enter to switch between a fill stitch digitizing method and Manual
digitizing method. ! Press Spacebar to switch between a fill stitch digitizing method and Run digitizing method.

Digitizing individual stitches

Digitize individual stitches with the Manual digitizing method. You can enter

single manual stitches, or enter three stitch layers at a time with the Triple Manual tool. Manual stitches digitized together form a single embroidery object. They are not well suited to scaling and transforming actions as the stitches have no associated properties. This means they will either be stretched or pinched during scaling operations. Use them sparingly, for example to add a few stitches to a finished design. See Editing Stitches and Machine Functions for details. Note As each stitch is individually defined, the only object properties required by manual objects are general and connector properties. Use Manual (Input toolbar) to enter individual manual stitches. Use Triple Manual (Input toolbar) to enter triple manual stitches. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 105

To digitize individual stitches

1 Click the Manual or Triple Manual icon. 2 Click to mark the start of the stitch and again to mark its end. The end-point becomes the beginning of the next stitch. 3 Continue marking stitch points until the manual stitch object is complete. Tip Stitches that are too long will automatically become jump stitches, but you can also create jumps manually by right-clicking as you digitize. See also Using jumps as connectors.

Digitizing lines

Use the Run and Triple Run tools to digitize lines of single or triple run stitching. Run places a single row of run stitches along a digitized line. Triple Run repeats each stitch three (or more) times for a thicker line. These tools are typically used to add borders and pickout runs to designs.
Use the left mouse button 5 4 3 1 26 7 8 9 10 11 Click for manual stitches Right-click for jumps Run length 123456 Triple Run 1 2 3 4 5 6

ES 2006 Chapter 5 Digitizing Methods 106 For thicker, decorative lines, use Backstitch or Stemstitch. Backstitch is an older-style, adaptable stitch which can be used for delicate outlines. This stitch follows intricate curves well. Stemstitch is thicker and can be used to mimic hand-sewn embroidery. It is used for stems and vines with other decorative stitches, or as an outline for Satin or Motif fills. See Creating decorative outlines for details. Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Run, Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, Stemstitch and Input C objects. See Converting between run objects for details.

Creating stitch runs

Use the Run and Triple Run tools to digitize lines of run stitching. Left and right mouse clicks create reference pointscorner points and curve points respectively. Use the Stemstitch and Backstitch tools for decorative runs. Motif Run is also available. See also Creating Motif Run objects.

To create stitch runs

1 Click an input tool: ! Run for run stitch ! Triple Run for triple run stitch ! Backstitch for backstitch ! Stemstitch for stemstitch. 2 Digitize the shape of the line by marking points. ! Click to enter corner points. Use Run (Input toolbar) to place a row of single run stitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Triple Run (Input toolbar) to place a triple row of run stitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Backstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of backstitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Stemstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of stemstitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 107 ! Right-click to enter curve points. ! To constrain the line to 15 increments, hold down Ctrl as you digitize. This is useful for digitizing straight lines. ! For a perfect circular arc, mark three points with a right-click. ! Where curves connecteither to a straight line or another curveclick to mark the connection point. Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last point. Press Esc to undo all new points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode. 3 Press Enter to finish digitizing the line. Note For details of adjusting Backstitch and Stemstitch settings, see Creating decorative outlines.

Setting run stitch length

Right-click for curve points Click for corner points 1357 246 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 curve point curve point curve point 13 2 Connect corners and curves with a corner point

For both Run and Triple Run stitches, set the stitch length to suit the digitized shape. Where the object has tight curves, select a shorter stitch

180 270 0 30 45 90 60 Hold down Ctrl to constrain the line to 15 increments

Use Run (Input toolbar) to place a row of single run stitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Triple Run (Input toolbar) to place a triple row of run stitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Chapter 5 Digitizing Methods 108 length. To reduce the stitch count for flatter curves, increase the stitch length. Note These values only apply to objects created with the Run or Triple Run tools. They do not affect travel runs, or underlay stitching. You can change the stitch length, chord gap and number of stitch repetitions (Triple Run only) in the Outlines tab of the Object Properties dialog. Preset Run and Triple Run values by changing the current properties before you digitize. See Modifying current property settings for details.

To set run stitch length

1 Right-click the Run or Triple Run icon. The Object Properties > Outlines dialog opens. 2 Select a stitch type from the list. 3 Enter a stitch length in the Length field.
Run Length 2.5 mm Run Length 1.6 mm Variable Run on Length 2.5 mm Adjust stitch length Select stitch type Not enough stitches to follow tight curve Stitches follow the curve more closely Run length Run length

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 109 If a line has tight, sharp curves, reduce the length, for example to 1.8 mm, so that the stitches follow the line. Alternatively, activate Variable Run Length. See Setting variable run stitch lengths for details. Tip Mimic hand-made embroidery by setting the Triple Run length to 4.0 mm. 4 Click Apply.

Setting variable run stitch lengths

To set variable stitch lengths

Automatically shorten stitches to follow tight curves with the Variable Run Length option. 1 Right-click the Run or Triple Run icon. The Object Properties > Outlines dialog opens. 2 Select the Variable Run Length checkbox. 3 In the Min Len field, enter the minimum stitch length to allow. Use Run (Input toolbar) to place a row of single run stitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Triple Run (Input toolbar) to place a triple row of run stitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Select variable run length Adjust variable run length values

ES 2006 Chapter 5 Digitizing Methods 110 4 In the Chord Gap field, enter the maximum distance to allow between the digitized outline and the stitches. When this value is exceeded the stitch length is reduced to follow the outline more closely. Note Stitches will not be reduced to less than the specified minimum length, even if the chord gap value is exceeded. 5 Click Apply.

Setting Triple Run stitch count

By default, Triple Run repeats each stitch three times. You can change the number of repetitions used for Triple Run by changing the value in the Object Properties dialog.

To set Triple Run stitch count

1 Right-click the Triple Run icon.
Run length Chord gap Fixed Run Length Variable Run Length: 0.07 mm (default) Variable Run Length: 2 mm

Use Triple Run (Input toolbar) to place a triple row of run stitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 111 The Object Properties > Outlines dialog opens. 2 Select Triple Run from the list. 3 Enter the number of repetitions in the Run Count field. 4 Click Apply.

Digitizing columns of fixed width

Use Input C to digitize columns of fixed width. It is typically used for digitizing borders and outlines of larger shapes. You can digitize columns to create thick lines or borders. Input C is typically used with Satin stitch but you can use any fill stitch type except Motif Fill. Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Run, Triple Run and Input C objects. See Converting between run objects for details.

Creating columns and borders

Select # repetitions Select stitch type

Digitize columns and borders of fixed width with the Input C tool. Create objects using left and right mouse clicks to mark points to form an outline. Use Input C (Input toolbar) to digitize columns or borders of fixed width. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Chapter 5 Digitizing Methods 112 Use left-clicks to enter corner points and right-clicks to enter curve points. Then specify the column width. You can leave the shape open, or create a border by joining the first and last points. See also Corresponding object and stitch types.

To create columns and borders

1 Select the stitch type you want to usee.g. Satin. See Selecting stitch types for details. 2 Click the Input C icon. 3 Digitize the shape of the column by marking points. ! Click to enter corner points. ! Right-click to enter curve points. Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last point. Press Esc to undo all new points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode. 4 When you have finished digitizing the line, either: ! Press Enter to keep the last stitch and place the exit point at the last

point marked, or ! Press Spacebar to omit the last stitch and place the exit point on the opposite side of the column. Tip To make a border, close the shape by entering the last point exactly on top of the first. If the points are not exactly on top of each other, the stitches will not turn smoothly around the corner. 5 Specify the column width.
5 4 3 1 2 6 7

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 113 ! To use the current width (as set in the Special > Input C tab), press Enter. ! To specify the width, mark two additional points. The distance between these points is the width of the column. (You can mark the column width anywhere on the screen.) Tip You can offset stitches by right-clicking the column-width points (rather than left-clicking) exactly where you want the offset to be in relation to the center line.

Setting offsets

By default, stitches are positioned around the center of a digitized line. Enter an exact offset value in the Object Properties dialog. See also Creating columns and borders. Tip You can offset stitches by right-clicking the column-width points (rather than left-clicking) exactly where you want the offset to be in relation to the center line. See Creating columns and borders for details.

To set offsets
8 9 Digitize column width anywhere in design window

1 Right-click the Input C icon.

Use Input C (Input toolbar) to digitize columns or borders of fixed width. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Right-click reference points Right-click reference points

ES 2006 Chapter 5 Digitizing Methods 114 The Object Properties > Special dialog opens. 2 In the Input Side panel, select Offset. 3 Set an offset in either Side 1 or Side 2 field, either as an exact measurement (in mm) or a percentage. Note You only need to enter the value for one side as ES Designer automatically calculates the other, based on the Column Width value. 4 Click Apply.

Setting column width

You can set the exact width of Input C columns in the Object Properties dialog. The value you set becomes the current width for new Input C objects.

To set the column width

Select Offset Set offsets in either Side 1 or Side 2 fields

1 Right-click the Input C icon.

Input C offset: 25% Input C offset: 75%

Use Input C (Input toolbar) to digitize columns or borders of fixed width. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 115 The Object Properties > Special dialog opens. 2 Enter a width in the Column Width field. 3 Click Apply. Note You can also change the width of Input C objects by selecting the Reshape tool, and moving the width control points. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.

Setting corner fractions

You can control the way stitches turn at the corners of Input C objects by changing the distance over which they turn. This distance is set by the corner fraction. The larger the fraction, the greater the distance. Tip Round Sharp Corners is also available for Input C objects to give you the option of sharp or round points. See Rounding sharp corners for details.

To set corner fractions

Adjust column width

1 Right-click the Input C icon. Use Input C (Input toolbar) to digitize columns or borders of fixed width. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Chapter 5 Digitizing Methods 116 The Object Properties > Special dialog opens. 2 Enter a new corner fraction in the Corner Fraction field. ! Increasing the fraction spreads the turn over more stitches. ! Decreasing the fraction reduces the number of stitches that turn. 3 Click Apply.

Digitizing columns of varying width

Adjust corner fraction corner fraction 0.5 corner fraction 0.8 corner fraction 0.25

Use Input A (Input toolbar) to create columns of varying width and stitch angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 117 Use the Input A tool to digitize columns of varying width and stitch angle. Digitized pairs of points define the outline, while lines connecting the pairs define the stitch angles. See also Corresponding object and stitch types. Tip The Continuous Input feature provides you with a simple and efficient way of digitizing a single Input A object comprised of separately stitched sections. See Creating smooth joins for details. Note ES Designer lets you convert between Complex Fill and Input A or B objects. See Converting Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill for details.

To digitize columns of varying width

1 Select the stitch type you want to usee.g. Satin. See Selecting stitch types for details. 2 Click the Input A icon. 3 Digitize the column by marking points on alternate sides of the column. ! Click to enter corner points. ! Right-click to enter curve points. Mark a pair of points wherever the outline changes, and wherever you want the stitch angle to change.

Note The control points in a pair do not have to be the same type. For example, one can be a corner point, the other a curve. Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last point. Press Esc to undo all new points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode. 4 When you have finished digitizing the column, either: ! Press Enter to keep the last stitch and place the exit point at the last point you digitized, or
Stitches change their angle gradually through the entire shape Stitches remain parallel between parallel stitch angles

ES 2006 Chapter 5 Digitizing Methods 118 ! Press Spacebar to omit the last stitch and place the exit point on the opposite side of the column. Tip If you are joining two columns, omit the last stitch on the first column so that the exit point is close to the entry point of the next column.

Digitizing asymmetrical columns of turning stitches

Use the Input B tool to digitize shapes where one side is different to the other, especially where one side requires more points than the other. Stitches turn evenly throughout the entire shape. See also Corresponding object and stitch types. Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Complex Fill and Input A or B objects. See Converting Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill for details.

To digitize asymmetrical columns of turning stitches

1 Select the stitch type you want to usee.g. Satin. See Selecting stitch types for details. 2 Click the Input B icon. 3 Digitize the first side of the shape (i.e. top or left) by marking points.
Press Enter Press Spacebar finish OR start start finish

Use Input B (Input toolbar) to create asymmetrical columns of turning stitches, where opposite sides are different shapes. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 119 ! Click to enter corner points. ! Right-click to enter curve points. 4 Press Enter. An elastic line attaches to the pointer, ready for you to digitize the second side of the shape. Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last point. Press Esc to undo all new points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode. 5 Digitize the secondi.e. bottom or rightside of the object. Tip Stitch angles vary from tightly turning fills to parallel fills, depending on the ends of the shapethe more pointy, the tighter the stitch angles. 6 When you have finished digitizing the shape, either: ! Press Enter to keep the last stitch and place the exit point at the last point you digitized, or ! Press Spacebar to omit the last stitch and place the exit point on the opposite side of the column.
5

4 3 1 26 7 Press Enter or Spacebar stitches turn evenly 9 10

90

turning fill sloping fill parallel fill

ES 2006 Chapter 5 Digitizing Methods 120

Digitizing complex shapes

Use the Complex Fill tool to digitize large, irregular shapes with fixed stitch angles. Use the Fusion Fill tool to digitize complex shapes with turning stitches. Many shapes can be digitized with these tools. By digitizing further boundaries within shapes, you can create filled objects with holes. Tip Use the Shaping tools to join, trim or split selected vector or embroidery objects to make different shapes. See Shaping vector and embroidery objects for details. Boundaries in complex objects should not overlap or intersect each other. A boundary should not overlap itself and should not have a second boundary inside (hole within a hole). These shapes below, for example, cannot be successfully digitized with Fusion Fill or Complex Fill. Where they occur, overlapping boundaries in Fusion Fill or Complex Fill shapes are ignored and stitches are generated in the largest area defined by the boundaries.

Creating complex shapes with fixed stitch angles

boundaries overlap boundary overlaps itself hole within hole

Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with a single stitch angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 121 Digitize complex shapes with the Complex Fill tool. Create objects using left and right clicks to mark points to form the boundary outlines. See also Corresponding object and stitch types. Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Fusion Fill or Complex Fill and Input A or B objects. See Converting Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill for details.

To create complex shapes with fixed stitch angles

1 Select the stitch type you want to usee.g. Tatami. See Selecting stitch types for details. 2 Click the Complex Fill icon. 3 Digitize the boundary of the shape, by marking points around the outline of the shape. ! Click to enter corner points. ! Right-click to enter curve points. Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last point. Press Esc to undo all new points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode. 4 Close the shape. ! To close the shape with the same type of point as the last one enteredi.e. corner or curvesimply press Enter. ! To close the shape using a different type of point, mark the last on top of the first and press Enter.
2 4 7 6 10 5 12

11 89 3 Last point marked on top of first with right button curve 1 2 4 7 6 10 5 12 11 89 3 Press Enterthe object is closed automatically straight line 1 13

ES 2006 Chapter 5 Digitizing Methods 122 5 Digitize any additional boundaries in the same way. Note Boundaries must not overlap. 6 Press Enter. 7 Mark the entry and exit position by clicking outside the object boundary. Tip To minimize segments and gaps in your embroidery, place the entry and exit points opposite each other on the outside boundary. Then define the stitch angle so it is perpendicular to the line between the entry and exit points. 8 Define the stitch angle by marking two points. 9 Press Enter. Note Complex Fill objects generally stitch out in several segments, joined by travel runs. However, all segments and boundaries are part of the same object. See also Adding underlay by segment.

Creating complex shapes with turning stitches

Eliminate the need to digitize multiple objects with Fusion Fill. This tool allows you to create a single complex object with multiple stitch angles and even holes. It is best used with designs containing complicated, turning
1 12 stitch angle 14 direction 13 1 13 14 15 stitch angle direction

Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with turning stitch angles. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 123 columns such as trees, animals, or large filled areas. See also Corresponding object and stitch types. Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Fusion Fill or Complex Fill and Input A or B objects. See Converting Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill for details.

To create complex shapes with turning stitches

1 Select the stitch type you want to usee.g. Tatami. See Selecting stitch types for details. 2 Click the Fusion Fill icon. 3 Digitize the boundary of the shape, by marking points around the outline of the shape. ! Click to enter corner points.

! Right-click to enter curve points.

Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last point. Press Esc to undo all new points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode. 4 Close the shape. ! To close the shape with the same type of point as the last one enteredi.e. corner or curvesimply press Enter.
2 4 7 6 10 5 12 11 89 3 Last point marked on top of first with right button curve 1 2 4 7 6 10 5 12 11 89 3 Press Enterthe object is closed automatically straight line 1 13

ES 2006 Chapter 5 Digitizing Methods 124 ! To close the shape using a different type of point, mark the last on top of the first and press Enter. 5 Digitize any additional boundaries in the same way. Note Boundaries must not overlap. 6 Press Enter. 7 Mark the entry and exit position by clicking outside the object boundary. Tip To minimize segments and gaps in your embroidery, place the entry and exit points opposite each other on the outside boundary. Then define one of the stitch angles so it is perpendicular to the line between the entry and exit points. 8 Define the stitch angles by marking two points for each angle. 9 Press Enter. Note Fusion Fill objects generally stitch out in several segments, joined by travel runs. However, all segments and boundaries are part of the same object. See also Adding underlay by segment.

Adding boundaries
1 12 stitch angle 14 direction 13 1 13 14 15 stitch angle direction

Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with a single stitch angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with turning stitch angles. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 125 ES Designer lets you add boundaries to Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects. Tip You can also create new objects from existing boundaries using the Filled Holes feature. Alternatively, you can use other objects to cut holes. See Filling holes in objects and Removing underlying stitching for details.

To add boundaries

1 Select the object to modify. 2 Click the Complex Fill or Fusion Fill icon. Points display around the object outline. 3 Digitize additional boundaries making sure they do not overlap. Press Enter each time. Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last point. Press Esc to undo all new points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode. 4 When you have digitized all additional boundaries, press Enter again. 5 When prompted, enter a new entry point, exit point and stitch angle for the object. Tip To use the current settings, press Enter to bypass each option. 6 Press Enter. ES 2006 Chapter 5 Digitizing Methods 126 Note To remove unwanted boundaries, select the object and select the Reshape Object tool. Delete each control point on the unwanted boundary, and press Enter.

Adjusting stitch angles using object properties

You can change the stitch angle of Complex Fill objects using object properties. By definition, Fusion Fill objects contain multiple stitch angles. However, they also have a property called the nominal angle. This has two functions. First, if a Fusion Fill object fails to stitch correctlyfor instance, if the stitch angles are irreconcilableit will revert to parallel stitching in the direction of the nominal angle. Second, the nominal angle affects certain underlay styles. See also Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays. Tip You can adjust the stitch angle of Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects interactively using the Stitch Angles tool. See Adjusting stitch angles for details.

To adjust stitch angles using object properties

1 Select an object. 2 Right-click the Complex Fill or Fusion Fill icon. Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with a single stitch angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with turning stitch angles. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 127 The Object Properties > Special dialog opens. 3 In the Angle or Nominal Angle field, enter the required stitch angle and click Apply. Note The nominal angle in a Fusion Fill object only takes effect if multiple stitch angles are irreconcilableit then reverts to parallel stitching in the direction of the nominal angle. The nominal angle also affects certain underlay styles.

Adjusting segment overlaps

Where segments within an object meet, the push-pull effect on the fabric during stitching may cause gaps to appear. These gaps can be prevented by adding overlapping rows. An overlap of 1 row means no real overlap. An overlap of 2 rows means that the first segment is extended by the addition of one extra row of stitches. And so on. With Fusion Fill objects you can also adjust the stitch angle where segments join. Normally, when you create

an overlap, it is formed by continuing the two sides of a segment in the direction of their endpoints. This becomes a problem if either side is parallel,
Adjust stitch angle Angle: 90 Angle: 0

Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with a single stitch angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with turning stitch angles. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Chapter 5 Digitizing Methods 128 or almost parallel, to the cover stitches the overlap may become disproportionately wide. For this reason, you can adjust the tapering angle.

To adjust segment overlaps

1 Right-click the Complex Fill or Fusion Fill icon. The Object Properties > Special dialog opens. 2 Adjust the number of overlapping rows where segments join. 3 For Fusion Fill objects, you can also adjust the stitch angle where segments join. In the Overlap Taper Angle field, enter the required angle.
Enter required number of rows overlapping rows Enter overlap taper angle

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 129 4 Click Apply.

Adjusting travel margins

When dealing with complex shapes with multiple segments, you may want to keep travel runs away from the boundary of the filled shape for various reasons. If, for instance, you are using Jagged Edge effect, the travel might become visible through the shortened stitches. For this reason, you can specify a margin for the travel stitches. As you increase the travel margin, the travels are positioned more towards the center. Where the filled area becomes very narrow, however, travel stitches do not necessarily remain at the specified distance from the boundary.

To adjust travel margins

1 Select an object. 2 Right-click the Fusion Fill icon. Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with turning stitch angles. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Overlap taper angle set to minimum Overlap taper angle increased to minimize overlapping area travel run too close to edge

ES 2006 Chapter 5 Digitizing Methods 130 The Object Properties > Special dialog opens. 3 Adjust the travel margin distance in the Distance field. The greater the distance, the more the travels are positioned towards the center of the shape. 4 Click Apply.
Adjust travel margin distance Travel run closer to center of shape

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 131

Chapter 6

Fill and Outline Stitches

All embroidery objects in ES Designer contain a defining set of settings or values. The values stored with an object become its properties. All objects

have certain properties in common such as size and position. There are other, more specific properties of objects which depend on the object type. The most important property of all embroidery objects is the stitch type. The software uses object outlines and associated stitch type to generate stitches. Whenever you reshape, transform or scale an object, stitches are regenerated according to its stitch type and settings. Stitch types divide broadly into two categoriesoutline and fill. Satin fills are generally suited to columns and borders. Tatami stitch is used to fill larger shapes with solid fields of stitching. Run/Triple Run stitch, Motif Run, Backstitch, and Stemstitch are considered both digitizing methods and stitch types. Both Zigzag and E Stitch are used as outline stitches. Zigzag is frequently used for tacking down appliqus, while E Stitch is used as the cover stitch. Both can also be used for decorative effect. See also Digitizing Methods. This section explains how to apply fill and outline stitch types to your embroidery objects, as well as how change stitch settings to obtain the best results. ES 2006 Chapter 6 Fill and Outline Stitches 132

Selecting stitch types

Different stitch types are suited to different objects. When you digitize an object, it uses the current stitch type for the selected input method. However, you can change an objects stitch type at any stage. You can also preset the stitch type by selecting it as current before digitizing. See Modifying current property settings for details. See also Corresponding object and stitch types. Tip You can change between fill stitch types quickly using the buttons on the Stitch Types toolbar, or using the keyboard to switch between fill and outline stitching. See Selecting commands from toolbars and Switching between fill and outline digitizing methods for details.

To select a stitch type

1 Select the object (or objects) whose stitch type you want to change. 2 Select a stitch type icon. The new stitch type is applied to the object. Note You cannot select Run, Triple Run, Backstitch or Stemstitch stitch types from the Stitch Types toolbar. To use these stitch types you need to change input methods. See Digitizing lines for details.

Creating fills with Satin stitch

Satin stitch is well-suited to stitching narrow columns and shapes, where the length of each stitch forms the width of the column. Satin stitches are Use Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) for narrow columns and shapes. Use Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) for large, irregular shapes. Use Zigzag (Stitch Types toolbar) for long, narrow columns of slanted, side-by-side stitches in a zigzag pattern. Use E Stitch (Stitch Types toolbar) for a comb effect with long, narrow columns. Use Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Satin stitch to new or selected narrow columns and shapes. Right-click to adjust Satin settings. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 133 almost parallel, with every second stitch slightly slanted. Because there are generally no needle penetrations breaking up the fill, Satin stitch creates a glossy, high-quality effect. See also Corresponding object and stitch types. If a column is too wide, stitches may be loose and not cover the fabric properly. Conversely, in very narrow columns, the stitch density can be too high, and the needle penetrations can damage the fabric. Adjust stitch density by setting a fixed spacing value, or let Auto Spacing calculate the spacing for you. Auto Spacing automatically adjusts the stitch spacing wherever the column changes width. Tip The Auto Split and Auto Jump features help you to control long Satin

stitches. See Splitting long stitches with Auto Split and Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump for details.

Adjusting Satin stitch spacing

Stitch spacing is the distance in millimeters between two needle penetrations on the same side of a column. Where a column is narrow, stitches are tight, thus requiring fewer stitches to cover the fabric. Where a column is very narrow, stitches need to be less dense because too many needle penetrations can damage the fabric. See also Adjusting stitch density. Change the stitch density in Satin fills by adjusting the stitch spacing setting in the Object Properties dialog. The larger the spacing between stitches, the lower the density. The smaller the spacing, the higher the density. Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Satin spacing.
Satin spacing Satin spacing

ES 2006 Chapter 6 Fill and Outline Stitches 134 Tip If you are using a digitizing tablet, you can quickly switch between preset styles with different spacing settings. Each button on the puck accesses the next preset style. For example, clicking button 1 accesses <PRESET_SATIN_1>.

To adjust Satin stitch spacing

1 Right-click the Satin icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Satin dialog opens. 2 Deselect the Auto Spacing checkbox. Note If Auto Spacing is selected, the fixed stitch spacing setting is not used. See Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch for details. 3 In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the spacing. ! To increase stitch density, enter a smaller value. ! To reduce the density for more open stitching, enter a larger value. 4 If you want to control long Satin stitch, select the Auto Split checkbox and specify the Auto Split Length and Auto Split Minimum Stitch values. See Splitting long stitches with Auto Split and Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump for details. 5 Click Apply.
Deselect Auto Spacing Adjust stitch spacing Stitch Spacing 1.0 mm Stitch Spacing 1.8 mm

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 135

Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch

The Auto Spacing option adjusts stitch spacing for Satin stitches according to column width. For varying width objects, Auto Spacing changes spacing to the best density for the width. See also Adjusting stitch density.

To apply Auto Spacing to Satin stitch

1 Right-click the Satin icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Satin dialog opens. 2 Select the Auto Spacing checkbox. 3 Adjust standard Auto Spacing in the Adjust field. The spacing is given as a percentage of the preset values: ! To decrease stitch density, increase the percentagee.g. to 110-115%. ! To increase stitch density, decrease the percentagee.g. to 90-85%. Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Auto Spacing settings.
Select Auto Spacing and adjust spacing percentage >100%fewer stitches 100%no adjustment <100%more stitches

ES 2006 Chapter 6 Fill and Outline Stitches 136 Tip 75% generally produces high quality embroidery. An increased stitch count means the design will take longer and be more expensive

to stitch. 4 Click Apply. Note For even more precise results, you can adjust Auto Spacing settings. See Adjusting Auto Spacing settings for details.

Adjusting Auto Spacing settings

Adjust Auto Spacing settings to get the exact results you want. You can specify how rapidly spacing changes, and by how much, by changing the stitch length and spacing settings. You can also specify spacing offsets to automatically adjust spacing for different thread types. Tip Take a note of the default settings before you start. You will usually want to save modified settings to a template. See Working with design templates for details. Warning If you want to restore the default settings and have not kept a record of them, use the Revert utility in the Wilcom ES folder to revert to factory settings.

To adjust Auto Spacing settings

length 1 spacing 1 spacing 2 length 2 Fixed spacing Auto spacing

1 Right-click the Satin icon. Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Auto Spacing settings.

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 137 The Object Properties > Fills > Satin dialog opens. 2 Click Values in the Auto Spacing panel. 3 Adjust stitch settings in the Stitch panel: ! Length: These values define the increments by which spacing is adjusted. The smaller the distance between each length, the more rapidly stitching changes from open to dense. Each length value must be greater than the previous one. ! Spacing: These values define the spacing corresponding to each stitch length. 4 Adjust spacing offsets for different thread types.
Click to adjust Auto Spacing values Select Auto Spacing Adjust stitch length values Adjust spacing values Enter spacing offsets for each thread type default spacing values custom spacing values

ES 2006 Chapter 6 Fill and Outline Stitches 138 The offset set the compensatory amount by which stitch settings will be adjusted for different thread types. ! Thread type A is average thread, and will generally use the default value, 0.01 mm. ! Thread Type B is thicker than average and requires a larger offset valuee.g. 0.03 mmin order to slightly increase stitch spacing (decrease density). ! Thread type C is thinner than average and requires a negative valuee.g. -0.03 mmto decrease stitch spacing (increase density). ! Thread Type D is very thin and requires an even greater negative valuee.g. -0.06 mmto decrease stitch spacing. Note You assign the thread type in the Add Thread dialog. Stitch spacing of the assigned thread type is automatically adjusted according to the values set here. See Adding your own colors to thread charts for

details. 5 Click OK in the Auto Spacing dialog. 6 Click Apply. Tip If you change your mind, click Reset to revert to the factory default settings.

Adjusting Satin stitch count

Triple Satin is often used for folk designs to mimic handmade embroidery that uses thicker thread. If you require thicker stitches, set the Satin stitch to repeat itself multiple times. You set the number of repetitions of each stitch in the Satin Count field. Every odd (forward) stitch of a Triple Satin column can be stitched up to 15 times.

To adjust Satin stitch count

1 Right-click the Satin icon. Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust the Satin stitch count. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 139 The Object Properties > Fills > Satin dialog opens. 2 Enter the number of repetitions in the Satin Count field. Warning Using a value higher than 10 may cause thread breaks, depending on the design, fabric, or thread tension. 3 Click Apply. Tip When you increase the Satin stitch count, you should also increase the stitch spacing to avoid bunching of stitches and thread breaks. See Adjusting Satin stitch spacing for details.

Creating fills with Tatami stitch

Tatami stitch consists of rows of run stitches and is suitable for filling large, irregular shapes. Stitches are laid in rows going back and forth across the shape. Stitch offsets in each row are used to eliminate horizontal split lines. See also Corresponding object and stitch types.
Enter number of repetitions

Click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Tatami stitch to new or selected large, irregular shapes. Right-click to adjust Tatami settings. ES 2006 Chapter 6 Fill and Outline Stitches 140 You can control stitch density in Tatami objects by adjusting the backstitch type, stitch length, and row spacing. With Tatami fills you can specify how each row is offset in order to control the patterns formed by needle penetrations. See Creating textures with Tatami offsets for details.

Adjusting Tatami stitch spacing and length

Tatami stitch density is determined by the distance between each row of stitches. The spacing setting is the distance between two forward rows. Specify the optimum and minimum stitch lengths to be generated for Tatami objects. The stitch length varies slightly in Tatami fills to ensure that small stitches are not generated at the edges of the shape. See also Adjusting stitch density. Tip Sometimes you may want to increase row spacing to create open stitching. This is often useful for backgrounds. However, this also means that travel runs, spacing variations and overlapping rows between segments are visible and can spoil the effect. The Trapunto effect automatically moves underlying travel runs to the edges of an object so that they cant be seen. See Creating open stitching with Trapunto for details.

To adjust Tatami stitch spacing and length

row spacing

1 Right-click the Tatami icon. Right-click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami spacing and length.

row direction stitch length offset fraction

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 141 The Object Properties > Fills > Tatami dialog opens. 2 In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the new spacing value. This value is the distance between each forward row of stitching. ! To increase the density, enter a smaller value. ! To decrease the density, enter a larger value. 3 Enter a stitch length in the Length field. 4 In the Min Stitch Length field, enter the length of the shortest stitch to be generated. 5 Click Apply.
Adjust stitch values Spacing: 0.4 mm Spacing: 0.6 mm Spacing: 0.8 mm Length: 4.5 mm Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm Length: 2 mm Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm Length: 1 mm Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm Length: 4 mm Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm Length: 4 mm Minimum Stitch: 0.8 mm Length: 4 mm Minimum Stitch: 1.2 mm

ES 2006 Chapter 6 Fill and Outline Stitches 142

Selecting a Tatami backstitch

Tatami backstitch is the term used for every second row of stitches in a Tatami fill. There are three types availableStandard, Borderline, and Diagonal.

Standard backstitch

The rows are approximately parallel, with every backstitch row slightly shorter than the forward row. Because the rows are different lengths, there are fewer small stitches at the edge of the shape, reducing possible damage to the fabric. Standard backstitch is suitable for high density fills.

Borderline backstitch

The rows are approximately parallel. With lower density fills, borderline backstitch creates a smooth, well-defined edge. Borderline backstitch is also called Trapunto style. See Creating open stitching with Trapunto for details. Right-click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to select a Tatami backstitch. Click to apply Standard backstitch. Click to apply Borderline backstitch. Click to apply Diagonal backstitch.
Standard backstitch Borderline backstitch Diagonal backstitch

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 143 Note Borderline backstitches may not follow the outline of the shape if the stitch spacing is less than the minimum stitch length. Where the stitch rows are perpendicular to the boundary, connecting stitches are adjusted to be longer than the minimum stitch.
.

Diagonal backstitch

The backward rows are diagonal, directly connecting the forward rows. Diagonal backstitch is suitable for turning shapes, and gives good results with Jagged Edge. See Creating jagged edges for details.

To select a Tatami backstitch

1 Right-click the Tatami icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Tatami dialog opens. 2 Select a backstitch type in the Backstitch panel. 3 Click Apply.

Creating outlines with Zigzag stitch

Zigzag stitch is similar to Satin in that the needle penetrates each side of the column. But while Satin gives a straight line followed by a diagonal, Zigzag produces two diagonal lines, thereby producing a more open stitch. Zigzag is frequently used for tacking down appliqus, while E Stitch is used
minimum stitch stitch spacing connecting stitches connecting stitches follow the boundary are adjusted Select backstitch type

Click Zigzag (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Zigzag stitch to new or selected objects. Right-click to adjust Zigzag settings. ES 2006 Chapter 6 Fill and Outline Stitches 144 as the cover stitch. It can also be used for decorative effect or where fewer stitches are required. See also Corresponding object and stitch types. Tip Zigzag and Double Zigzag stitches are frequently used as underlays. See Adjusting Center Run and Edge Run underlay settings for details.

To create outlines with Zigzag stitch

1 Right-click the Zigzag icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Zigzag dialog opens. 2 Enter a spacing value in the Stitch Spacing field. This value is the distance in millimeters between two needle penetrations on the same side of the column. 3 Click Apply.

Creating outlines with E Stitch

Adjust stitch spacing stitch spacing: 2.0 mm stitch spacing: 3.0 mm stitch spacing: 4.5 mm

Click E Stitch (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply E Stitch stitch to new or selected objects. Right-click to adjust E Stitch settings. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 145 E Stitch, sometimes referred to as blanket stitch, produces long, narrow columns with a comb effect. It is often used to stitch borders around appliqus. The needle penetrates both sides of the column, and then penetrates the second side again, laying the thread along the side. E stitches are usually more open than Satin or Zigzag stitches. See also Corresponding object and stitch types.

To create outlines with E Stitch

1 Right-click the E Stitch icon. The Object Properties > Fills > E Stitch dialog opens. 2 In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the spacing value. This value is the distance in millimeters between each perpendicular stitch.
Adjust stitch spacing Enter # run stitches Stitch Spacing: 1.0 mm Stitch Spacing: 2.0 mm Stitch Spacing: 3.5 mm

ES 2006 Chapter 6 Fill and Outline Stitches 146 3 In the Number of Runs field, enter the number of run stitches between each E Stitch. 4 Click Apply.

Creating decorative outlines

Digitizing methods divide broadly into two categoriesoutline and fill. Run and Manual digitizing methods are used to digitize outlines or individual stitches. Run stitch, Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, and Stemstitch are considered both digitizing methods and stitch types. See also Digitizing lines and Creating motif runs. For thicker, decorative lines, use Backstitch or Stemstitch. Backstitch is an older-style, adaptable stitch which can be used for delicate outlines. This stitch follows intricate curves well. Stemstitch is thicker and can be used to

mimic hand-sewn embroidery. It is used for stems and vines with other decorative stitches, or as an outline for Satin or Motif fills.
1 run E Stitch spacing E Stitch spacing 3 runs

Use Backstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of backstitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use Stemstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of stemstitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Backstitch Stemstitch Stemstitch with Motif Fill

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 147 Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Run, Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, Stemstitch and Input C objects. See Converting between run objects for details.

Adjusting Backstitch settings

Adjust Backstitch settings to get the exact results you want. You can specify the exact stitch length, chord gap, thickness and overlap values as well as the number of strokes.

To set Backstitch settings

1 Right-click the Backstitch icon. The Object Properties > Outlines > Backstitch dialog opens. Use Backstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of backstitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Adjust backstitch values

ES 2006 Chapter 6 Fill and Outline Stitches 148 2 Enter minimum and maximum run lengths in the Length and Min Length fields. 3 Adjust the Chord Gap setting as required. See Setting variable run stitch lengths for details. 4 Adjust stitch thickness in the Thickness field. Needle penetrations are spaced more widely for thicker stitches. 5 Adjust the backstitch overlap percentage in the Overlap field.
Run Length: 1.5 mm Run Length: 2.5 mm Run Length: 4.5 mm Stitch Thickness: 0.30 mm Stitch Thickness: 0.50 mm Stitch Thickness: 0.70 mm Overlap: 10% Overlap: 50% Overlap: 90%

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 149 6 Select the number of strokes3 or 5. 7 Click Apply. 8 Digitize Backstitch outlines as you would a Run stitch outline. See Creating stitch runs for details.

Adjusting Stemstitch settings

Adjust Stemstitch settings to get the exact results you want. You can specify the exact stitch and line thickness, spacing and overlap values as well as the number of strokes.

To adjust Stemstitch settings

1 Right-click the Stemstitch icon.
Strokes: 3 Strokes: 5

Use Stemstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of stemstitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Chapter 6 Fill and Outline Stitches 150 The Object Properties > Outlines > Stemstitch dialog opens. 2 Adjust the line thickness in the Thickness field. 3 Adjust stitch spacing in the Spacing field. 4 Enter a stitch angle in the Angle field.
Adjust stemstitch values Select type and adjust thickness Line Thickness: 1.0 mm Line Thickness: 1.5 mm Spacing: 1.2 m Spacing: 0.8 mm Angle: 90 Angle: 45

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 151 5 Select either Single or Triple.

Note For Triple only, you can also adjust stitch thickness in the Stitch Thickness field. Needle penetrations are spaced more widely for thicker stitches. 6 Click Apply. 7 Digitize Stemstitch outlines as you would a Run stitch outline. See Creating stitch runs for details.
Type: Triple Type: Single

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 152

Chapter 7

Colorways and Thread Charts

When digitizing, you select thread colors for each object you create from the color palette. This contains a selection of thread colors tailored for each design or color scheme. The particular colorway represents the actual thread colors in which a design will be stitched. In fact you can define multiple color schemes and switch between them. This has important implications for sales presentations as well as production. You can also print multiple colorways, design backgrounds, and icons of color blocks together with the production worksheet. For each colorway you define, you can select colors from commercial thread charts or define your own. Search for particular threads by specific code. Automatic thread color helps you locate thread colors based on closest match across one or several thread charts. You can also match thread colors from imported graphicsvector or bitmap. This section describes how to select colors from the color palette as well as how to change colorways. It also explains how to define, modify and delete colorways. There is also an explanation of how to define your own thread colors and charts.

Changing thread colors

New objects are digitized using the selected color in the color palette. You can change the color before or after digitizing. If the color you want is not ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 153 available in the color palette, you may need to add it to the colorway. See Modifying colorways for details. Note Color change machine functions are automatically inserted when you assign a color.

Selecting colors

When you digitize a new object, it automatically takes the color selected in the color palette. This is the current color. Change the color of one or more selected objects in your design at any time. Tip If the color palette itself does not appear, you need to select it from the Toolbars dialog. See Showing or hiding toolbars for details.

To select a color

! Deselect all objects, and then select a color from the palette.

This color becomes current for all new objects. ! To change the color of selected objects, simply select a new color from the palette. Note While the selected object/s change color, the current color does not change.
Edit background Select color Change colorway Edit colorways Add color to palette Compact palette Split palette color Edit color palette object selected color changed

ES 2006 Chapter 7 Colorways and Thread Charts 154

Recoloring consecutive objects

You can change the color of consecutive objects of the same color at the same time. Consecutive objects follow each other in the stitching sequence. See also Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List.

To recolor consecutive objects

1 Select the first object in the sequence to recolor. 2 Select Machine > Set Color. The Set Color dialog opens. 3 Select the All consecutive objects of the same color option. Note If you selected more than one object, this option is not available. 4 Select a color from the list. Only colors in the colorway are available. Select Set Color (Machine menu) to change the color of consecutive objects.
blue blue green Change color of consecutive objects Select color

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 155 5 Click OK.

Working with colorways

ES Designer lets you define multiple color schemes, or colorways, for the one design. Change them to preview an existing design in different colors on different fabrics. When you start a design, Colorway 1 appears as the default color palette. Colorways are saved automatically with the design when saving in EMB format. You can save all your colorways as an EMT template file for use in future designs. Colorways cannot, however, be saved with stitch files. See also Viewing colorways and Working with design templates. Note Certain properties are included as part of the colorway definitionbackground color or fabric, unique number, as well as display colors for borer symbols, unsewn stitches, selected objects, object outlines and the grid. As dark-colored threads cover light-colored fabrics better than vice versa, different densities may be required when you change from one colorway to another. For example, a black design on a white shirt may have been digitized with slightly open Tatami to save on stitches. If the colorway is changed to white on black, the Tatami density may need adjusting. See Adjusting stitch density for details.
red red green

ES 2006 Chapter 7 Colorways and Thread Charts 156 Note Colorways are not intended to compensate for the different densities. Rather, different styles should be used, or separate designsone for dark threads on light fabric, and one for light threads on dark fabric.

Setting up color palettes

When you create a new design, it includes a single default colorway called Colorway 1. This contains 15 default colors, unassigned to any thread chart. The Color Palette Editor displays the same default colors. Add extra color slots as required.

To set up a color palette

1 Open a new design. The default color palette provides 12 colors. Tip If you using artwork as a backdrop, you can match image colors directly to the nearest matching threads in selected thread charts. See Matching image colors to threads for details. 2 Click the Add Color To Palette icon to add further color slots as

required. 3 Click the Color Palette Editor icon. The Color Palette Editor dialog opens displaying the same default colors. 4 Click the Thread Charts button. Use Add Color To Palette (Color toolbar) to add a new color slot to the palette. This can be edited by means of the Color Palette Editor. Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to assign thread colors to slots in the Color Palette. Use Compact Palette (Color toolbar) to remove all unused colors from palette. Unused slots appear gray.
Click to add color slots

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 157 The Active Thread Charts dialog opens. 5 Select the thread chart/s you want to use and click OK. All color definitions from the selected chart/s are transferred to the Color Palette Editor. 6 Select a color slot in the Color Palette Editor and match it to a suitable thread by one of the following means: ! Simply click the Match button at the top of the color list to find the nearest equivalent thread color in the selected charts. ! Enter an exact color code in the Find Code field. ! Click-and-drag the selection handle and scroll down the color list to locate a color you want to use. ! Click the arrow buttons on top and at the bottom of the color list.
Select tread chart/s to use Click to select thread chart/s Search color list manually for suitable colors Click Match to match selected color Enter exact color code if known Default colors

ES 2006 Chapter 7 Colorways and Thread Charts 158 Note The current selection in the Color Palette Editor is not linked to the current selection in the Color Palette itself. 7 Select the color in the list by clicking the color or the code. The color is assigned to the selected color slot, ready for use. 8 Click Assign. The selected thread is assigned to the color slot and the Color Palette Editor selection is advanced by one slot. Tip Once all colors are assigned to objects, you can click the Compact Palette icon to display only those colors used in the design. See also Naming design elements via the Color Palette Editor. Note The Compact Palette tool is disabled for machine formats that use needle addressingi.e. that have Color Change set as Needle No in the Machine Format Values dialog. See also Setting color change functions.

Adding and deleting colorways

It is often difficult to imagine your designs stitched out on different fabric colors and textures, using different combinations of thread colors. When you create a new design, the design contains a single default colorway called Colorway 1. You can define up to 100 colorways for each design.

To add or delete a colorway

1 Create a new design or open an existing one. 2 Click the Multi-Colorway Box icon. The Multi-Colorway Box dialog opens. Use Multi-Colorway Box (Color toolbar) to open or close the modeless

Multi-Colorway Box dialog which allows you add and edit colorways.
Click to add new colorways
Colorway 1

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 159 3 Click New and enter a New Colorway name. Tip By default, the Based on Colorway field contains the current colorway. Select from the dropdown list to change colorways. If you want to base the new colorway on default settings, leave the field blank. 4 Edit the colors and background of the new colorway using the Color Palette Editor. See Modifying colorways for details. 5 Select a colorway in the list to view. This has the same effect as selecting the colorway from the dropdown list on the Color toolbar. 6 To delete a colorway, select it and click Delete. You are prompted to confirm the deletion. 7 Click OK.

Modifying colorways
Enter new colorway name Select colorway to base on
My Colorway Colorway 1

You can modify a colorway by adding or changing colors. New colors can be selected from any of the available thread charts. Any modifications to thread

Click to delete colorway Click to choose colorway

Colorway 1 My Colorway

Use Multi-Colorway Box (Color toolbar) to open or close the modeless Multi-Colorway Box dialog which allows you add and edit colorways. Use Add Color To Palette (Color toolbar) to add a new color slot to the palette. This can be edited by means of the Color Palette Editor. Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to assign thread colors to slots in the Color Palette. Use Compact Palette (Color toolbar) to remove all unused colors from palette. Unused slots appear gray. ES 2006 Chapter 7 Colorways and Thread Charts 160 colors only affect the selected colorway. All others remain unchanged. The modified colorway can be saved with the design you are working with and/or the current template. Note The default settings are stored as Colorway 1. If you change the background in Colorway 1 and save your template, it will always display like this at start up. All defined colorways are saved in the template.

To modify a colorway

1 With a design open, click the Multi-Colorway Box icon. The Multi-Colorway Box dialog opens. 2 Select the colorway you want to edit. 3 To edit the name, click the field, key in a new name, and press Enter. 4 To add further color slots, click the Add Color To Palette icon. 5 To change the colorway background and display colors, click BKG. The Display dialog opens. Background colors and fabrics are treated as part of the colorway rather than design window settings. In addition, display colors for borer holes, unsewn and selected stitches, object outlines and grid are part of the colorway definition. See Viewing colorways, backgrounds and display colors for details. 6 To modify the thread colors of the selected colorway, click the Color Palette Editor icon.
Click to change background of colorway Select colorway to edit
Colorway 1 My Colorway

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 161 The Color Palette Editor dialog opens displaying the current colorway. 7 Assign colors from the current thread chart to selected color slots. See Setting up color palettes for details. Tip Once all colors are assigned to objects, you can click the Compact Palette icon to display only those colors used in the design. See also Naming design elements via the Color Palette Editor.

Modifying thread colors

To modify a thread color
Search color list manually for suitable colors Click to assign color to selected color slot Enter exact color code if known Click to locate selected color Enter descriptive name for selected color
1 - Clouds

Change the code, description, brand, thickness or display color of existing threads by means of the Color Palette Editor. 1 Click the Color Palette Editor icon.

Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to modify threads in existing charts. ES 2006 Chapter 7 Colorways and Thread Charts 162 The Color Palette Editor dialog opens. 2 Import threads from the thread chart of your choice. See Setting up color palettes for details. 3 Select the color slot you want to edit and click the Edit Thread button. The Edit Thread dialog opens. 4 Edit thread details as required. See Adding your own colors to thread charts for details. 5 Click OK.

Naming design elements via the Color Palette Editor

You can assign names to blocks of sequential, same-color objects, known as elements. Element names appear on the production worksheet. The Usage field in the Color Palette Editor shows a list of selected color blocks which correspond to design elements. By default, the number in the stop sequence is displayed. However, each color block can be given a descriptive name for easy identification. Tip You can also name design elements via the Design Properties dialog. See Naming design elements via Design Properties for details.
Click to edit selected thread Click to assign new color to slot Click to select or mix color Edit thread details

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 163

To name design elements via the Color Palette Editor

1 Use the Color Palette Editor to set up a new palette or edit an existing colorway. See Setting up color palettes for details. The Color Palette Editor dialog opens displaying the current colorway. 2 Select a color slot. 3 To view the color, click Locate and hold. Tip When more than one element appears in the Usage list, you can select and locate them singly or as a group. 4 To name the design element, double-click the Usage field and key in a descriptive titlee.g. Clouds. 5 To check the naming of all design elements, select File > Design Properties.

The Design Properties > Information dialog opens. 6 Select the Stop Sequence tab to view the color sequence and stitch counts for each design element. The data in this tab is extracted from the design and, except for Element, cannot be modified. Tip You can show the stitch count for each element individually or as a cumulative count. See Setting other options for details.
Enter descriptive name for selected color Select color slot Click and hold to locate selected color Click to edit design elements
1 - Clouds

ES 2006 Chapter 7 Colorways and Thread Charts 164 7 To edit an Element name, simply click the field, key in a new name, and press Enter. Tip The information on this tab may be included in total or in part on the production worksheet. See Customizing production worksheet information for details.

Splitting color blocks

A color block or element corresponds to a color stop in the design. The color block may be comprised of a single iteme.g. ropesor moree.g. ropes and birds. While with one colorway you may want to assign the same thread color to both items, with another you may want to assign different colors to each. The Split Palette Color tool lets you create a new color slot with the same thread specification as the selected slot. Any selected objects are assigned to the new palette slot. Note The design needs to contain at least two colorways and two objects. The button is disabled when objects of different colors are selected.

To split a color block

1 With a design open, click the Multi-Colorway Box icon. The Multi-Colorway Box dialog opens. 2 Select the colorway you want to modify. 3 Select the object(s) whose color needs to changethey must be assigned to the same color slot. Use Multi-Colorway Box (Color toolbar) to open or close the modeless Multi-Colorway Box dialog which allows you add and edit colorways. Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to assign thread colors to slots in the Color Palette. Use Split Palette Color (Color toolbar) to create a new color slot with the same thread specification as the selected slot.
Select colorway to edit

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 165 The Split Palette Color button is activated. 4 Click the Split Palette Color icon. A new color slot of the same color is added to the palette and all colorways. Selected objects are assigned to the new palette position. 5 Assign a new thread color to the new color slot in the selected colorway. See Setting up color palettes for details. The colors of the other colorways remain unaffected.
Select objects to change New color slot added to all colorways based on selected color (#2) New color assigned to slot in selected colorway

ES 2006 Chapter 7 Colorways and Thread Charts 166 Note By default, the new color slot is placed at the end of the Color Palette. This, however, does not affect the stitching sequence.

Matching image colors to threads

You can manually match colors from an inserted bitmap or vector image to thread colors in a selected chart. But the quicker way is by using automatic color matching.

To match image colors to threads

1 Right-click the image. 2 Select Match Bitmap Color from the popup menu. Right-click the image and select the Match Bitmap Color command to match image colors to actual threads.
Consecutive blocks of same color remain separate

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 167 All colors used in the image appear in the Match Bitmap Color dialog. 3 Select the thread chart/s to include in the search from the Thread Charts list. Note To automatically match the image colors to available threads, simply click OK. The system automatically assigns thread colors from the selected chart/s to the current colorway. 4 To make your own color selections, first select the color to match. 5 Click Match. The system searches for the closest match across all selected charts and displays them in the thread color list below. 6 Select a thread and assign to the color palette by double-clicking or clicking Assign. 7 Repeat until all the colors you intend to use in the design have been matched. Note Each search negates the previous results. 8 Click OK. The selected thread colors are assigned to the current colorway. If the number of available thread colors is less than the number of colors in the image, the system will increase the number of slots in the color palette accordingly. Note The maximum number of new thread colors which can be added to the color palette from a bitmap is 128.
Select thread chart Select color to match Matched colors listed Click to assign Click to match

ES 2006 Chapter 7 Colorways and Thread Charts 168

Customizing thread charts

Thread charts are lists of pre-defined thread colors. They may be based on commercially available thread charts, or charts you define yourself. When you create a thread chart, you are creating a store of colors to use in future use. You may use pre-defined thread colors from existing charts or define your own. You may also want to update existing thread charts by modifying thread details or removing threads.

Creating new thread charts

To create a new thread chart

ES Designer lets you define your own thread charts. When you create a thread chart, you are creating a store of colors to use in future use. 1 Click the Color Palette Editor icon.

The Color Palette Editor dialog opens displaying the current colorway. 2 Click the Thread Charts button. The Active Thread Charts dialog opens. 3 Click Modify. The Modify Thread Chart dialog opens displaying the current thread chart. Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to create new thread charts.
Click to select thread chart/s Click to modify thread charts Click to create new chart

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 169 4 Click New. The New Thread Chart dialog opens. 5 Enter a name for the chart and click OK. You return to the Modify Thread Chart dialog. The new chart is created, ready for you to add thread colors. 6 Click Add to add your own colors. See Adding your own colors to thread charts for details. 7 Click Copy From to add colors from an existing chart. See Copying colors between charts for details. 8 Click Close to finish. The new chart is created and ready for use.

Modifying existing thread charts

Use the Modify Thread Chart dialog to rename existing thread charts and remove them entirely from the system. Select names that will help you remember the charts you need or to help you sort frequently-used charts to the top of the list.
Enter new thread chart name Click to add your own threads Click to copy threads from other chart
A-My Thread Chart

Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to modify existing charts. ES 2006 Chapter 7 Colorways and Thread Charts 170 Warning Be careful when deleting thread charts. If you delete the wrong chart you will need to reinstall Wilcom ES to restore it.

To modify existing thread charts

1 Open the Active Thread Charts dialog. See Creating new thread charts for details. 2 Select a thread chart and click Modify. The Modify Thread Chart dialog opens displaying the current thread chart. 3 From the Name list, select the chart to modify. 4 Click Delete to remove the entire chart. 5 Click Rename to change names. The Rename Thread Chart dialog opens. 6 Enter the new name for the thread chart and click OK.

Modifying threads in existing charts

Select thread chart Click to modify selected thread chart Click to rename Click to delete A-My Royal Chart Enter new thread chart name

Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to modify existing charts. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 171

Remove obsolete thread colors from a thread chart using the Modify Thread Chart dialog. Change the code, description, brand, thickness or display color of existing threads.

To modify threads in existing charts

1 Open the Active Thread Charts dialog. See Creating new thread charts for details. 2 Select the required thread chart and click Modify. The Modify Thread Chart dialog opens displaying the current thread chart. 3 From the Name list, select the chart to modify. 4 In the Threads list, select the thread to modify. 5 Click Remove to remove the selected thread from the chart. Tip To delete all the threads from the thread chart, click Clear All. 6 Click Edit to change thread details.
Select thread chart Select color to modify Click to remove selected thread color Click to remove ALL colors from chart Click to edit selected thread details

ES 2006 Chapter 7 Colorways and Thread Charts 172 The Edit Thread dialog opens. 7 Edit thread details as required. See Adding your own colors to thread charts for details. 8 Click OK.

Copying colors between charts

To copy colors between charts

You can copy colors between different thread charts to create your own charts from existing colors. 1 Open the Modify Thread Chart dialog. See Creating new thread charts for details. 2 Create a new chart or open an existing one from the Name list. 3 Click Copy From.
Click to select or mix color Edit thread details

Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to modify existing charts.

Click to create new chart Select existing chart Click to copy threads from other chart

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 173 The Copy From dialog opens. 4 Select the source thread chart from the Name list. 5 Select the color/s you want to copy. Tip Use Ctrl or Shift keys to copy a group or range of colors. 6 Click OK. All colors are copied to the new thread chart.

Adding your own colors to thread charts

Select thread chart Select color to copy

You can add colors to thread charts using colors from other charts or colors you mix yourself.

Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to modify existing charts. ES 2006 Chapter 7 Colorways and Thread Charts 174

To add your own colors to a thread chart

1 Open the Modify Thread Chart dialog. See Creating new thread charts for details. 2 Create a new chart or open an existing one from the Name list. 3 Click Add to add your own colors. The Add Thread dialog opens. 4 Enter code, brand, and description details for the new thread color. Code is the identification number of a thread color in a brand. 5 Select the appropriate thread thickness. ! Thickness A: normal embroidery thread (thickness 120/2, or 40). ! Thickness B: thicker than normal. ! Thickness C: finer than normal. ! Thickness D: very fine. Note This setting determines the Auto Spacing setting used with the thread. See also Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch. 6 Mix the thread display color. See Mixing your own thread colors for details.
Select existing chart Click to add own colors to thread chart Click to create new chart Enter code, brand, and description details Click to select or mix color Select thread thickness
1234 My Brand Deep Purple

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 175 7 Click OK. The new color appears in the Threads list.

Mixing your own thread colors

To mix your own thread colors

You can change the color that displays for a particular thread, or create new thread colors using the Color dialog. 1 Add your own colors to a thread chart or modify threads in an existing chart. See Adding your own colors to thread charts or Modifying threads in existing charts for details. 2 Click Mix. The Color dialog opens. 3 From the Basic colors palette, select a color that approximates the one you require. 4 To further refine your color choice, drag the crosshairs on the color spectrum. 5 To adjust color brightness, drag the arrow on the slider bar. Alternatively, set the exact HLS or RGB values you require. 6 Click Add to Custom Colors to add mixed color to Custom Colors palette for future use. Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to modify existing charts.
Drag crosshairs to adjust color Drag arrow to adjust brightness Click to select color

Click to add selected color to Custom Colors Enter exact values if known

ES 2006 Chapter 7 Colorways and Thread Charts 176 7 Click OK. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 177

Chapter 8

Connecting Embroidery Objects

Connectors link objects in a design. They can be run stitches or jumps. You can use automatic settings to generate connectors, trims and tie-offs, or add them manually. Travel runs are typically used to connect segments within filled objects. Adjust travel run length to reduce stitch count. Warning For Schiffli work, you are advised to add connectors manually rather than rely on the automatic settings. Automatic connectors are turned off in the Schiffli template. See Adding connectors manually for details. This section describes how to add connectors, tie-offs and trims to your designs. It also describes adjusting settings for automatic connectors, including the stitch length for travel runs. There is also a topic on hiding travel runs using the Trapunto effect. Note You can set separate connector settings for Auto Start and End. See Setting automatic start and end points for details.

Types of connectors
The type of connector you use depends on whether you want it to be visible in the final design. The default connector setting in ES Designer is for jumps.

Jumps

Jumps move the frame from one part of the design to another without needle penetrations. You can use automatic jumps as connectors between embroidery objects. The connecting thread generally needs to be tied-off ES 2006 Chapter 8 Connecting Embroidery Objects 178 and trimmed. The default connector jump length is the same as that set for Auto Jump. Tip You can also digitize jumps manually using the Penetrations function or with Manual stitch. See Adding jumps with penetrations off and Digitizing individual stitches for details.

Runs

Travel runs are typically used to connect segments of complex shapes. They can also connect adjacent objects. Because runs are not trimmed, they may be visible in the final embroidery. For this reason, they are less commonly used as connectors between objects than jumps. If objects are adjacent and connectors will be hidden, they can be used. You can change the stitch length of travel runs to ensure they do not protrude from the cover stitching. You may also adjust the travel run length to reduce the stitch count. See also Adjusting travel run stitch length. Note While you can control the properties of run connectors between objects, you generally cannot control connectors within objects. Lettering and motif run objects are the exception.

Tie-ins

Tie-in stitches are inserted at the start of objects to prevent stitches from unraveling. They are inserted inside the shape on the second stitch. You generally use them when the previous connector is trimmed.

Tie-offs

Tie-offs are generally placed before trims to prevent stitches from unraveling. You can adjust connector settings to automatically add tie-offs under certain conditions, or add them manually. You can also include trim functions so machines with trimmers cut the thread automatically.

Trims

If you are using a machine with an automatic trimmer, the trim function causes the thread to be cut after a tie-off. In the software, trims are represented by a triangle with a small circle at the point where stitching ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 179 starts again. The trimmed connector appears as a dotted line. You can adjust connector settings to automatically add trims, or add them yourself.

Using automatic connectors

ES Designer lets you generate automatic connectors in your design based on settings in the Object Properties > Connectors dialog. You can change the connector settings for the whole design or selected objects. Tip If you prefer to add tie-offs and trims as you digitize, you can turn off automatic connectors altogether. For Schiffli work, you are advised to add connectors manually rather than rely on the automatic settings. Automatic connectors are turned off in the Schiffli template. See Adding connectors manually for details. Note The Branching feature lets you digitize like-objectse.g. the fingers of a handwithout having to think about the most efficient stitching sequence and joins. See Automatic branching for details.

Using jumps as connectors

trim stitching starts connector

You can use automatic jumps as connectors between embroidery objects. Jumps move the frame from one part of the design to another without

Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties dialog on/off. Use it to set jumps as connectors. ES 2006 Chapter 8 Connecting Embroidery Objects 180 needle penetrations. You generally need to tie-off and trim the connecting thread. You can also digitize jumps manually using the Penetrations function. See Adding jumps with penetrations off for details.

To use jumps as connectors

1 Click the Object Properties icon. The Object Properties dialog opens. 2 Select the Connectors tab. 3 Select a connector method. ! After Object: allows you to adjust settings of connectors immediately following the current object. ! Inside Object: allows you to adjust settings of connectors joining letters within a lettering object, and motifs within motif runs. This setting also applies to disconnected parts of branched objects.
Select Jump and enter distance Select connector method Adjust Trim After settings Adjust tie-in / tie-off settings

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 181 Note This option does not apply to segments within an object. See also Adjusting travel run stitch length. 4 Select Jump and enter a distance for each frame movement. 5 In the Trim After panel, adjust the trim settings. See Adjusting automatic trim after settings for details.

6 Select Tie In from the list to adjust tie-in settings. See Adjusting automatic tie-in settings for details. 7 Select Tie Off from the list to adjust tie-off settings. See Adjusting automatic tie-off settings for details. 8 Click Apply.

Using runs as connectors

You can use runs of single stitches to connect objects in a design. Because runs cannot be trimmed, they are visible on the final embroidery, unless another object is digitized to cover them. For this reason, runs are less commonly used as connectors than jumps.

To use runs as connectors

1 Click the Object Properties icon. The Object Properties dialog opens. Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties dialog on/off. Use it to set runs as connectors.
Run connectors Jump connectors

ES 2006 Chapter 8 Connecting Embroidery Objects 182 2 Select the Connectors tab. 3 Select a connector method. ! After Object: allows you to adjust settings of connectors immediately following the current object. ! Inside Object: allows you to adjust settings of connectors joining letters within a lettering object, and motifs within motif runs. This setting also applies to disconnected parts of branched objects. Note This option does not apply to segments within an object. See also Adjusting travel run stitch length. 4 Select Run and enter a length for the connecting run stitches. The Tie Off and Trim After options are disabled as they do not apply to travel runs. 5 Select Tie In from the list to adjust tie-in settings. See Adjusting automatic tie-in settings for details. 6 Click Apply.

Adjusting automatic tie-in settings

Select Run and adjust stitch length Adjust tie-in settings Select connector method

Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties dialog on/off. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 183 Tie-in stitches are inserted at the start of objects to prevent stitches from unraveling. They are inserted inside the shape on the second stitch. You generally use them when the previous connector is trimmed.

To adjust tie-in settings

1 Click the Object Properties icon. The Object Properties dialog opens. 2 Select the Connectors tab. 3 Select Tie In from the list and select a tie-in option: ! Off: no tie-ins are inserted. ! Always tie in: tie-ins are inserted before the object. ! Tie In If: tie-ins are created if certain conditions are met. When you select this option, the condition checkboxes become available. 4 If you selected Tie In If, set the conditions:

! After Trim/Color Change: tie-ins are inserted after trims and color
changes. ! Previous Connector: tie-ins are inserted when the previous connector exceeds the length you specify. 5 Set the tie-in values: ! Length: determines length of tie-in stitches. ! Number: determines number of tie-in stitches to generate. 6 Click Apply.
Tie-in with four stitches Adjust tie-in settings

ES 2006 Chapter 8 Connecting Embroidery Objects 184

Adjusting automatic tie-off settings

With trims, stitches need to be tied off so the thread can be trimmed without unraveling. Select between two automatic tie-off methods. Method 1 is generally more visually pleasing on smaller objects and Satin columns. With this method, however, stitches sew on top of each other with the consequent risk of thread breakage. On larger areas, the safer alternative is Method 2. Tip For narrow shapes or columnse.g. small letteringuse only one tie-off stitch. You may also decrease the stitch length.

To adjust tie-off settings

1 Click the Object Properties icon. The Object Properties dialog opens. 2 Select the Connectors tab. 3 In the Tie Off panel, select a tie-off option: Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties dialog on/off.
Method 1 with four stitches Method 2 with two stitches Method 2 with four stitches Adjust tie-off settings

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 185 ! Off: no tie-off is inserted. By selecting this option, you need to add tie-off functions manually. See Adding tie-offs for details. ! Always Tie Off: a tie-off is inserted after the object. ! Tie Off If: a tie-off is created if certain conditions are met. When you select this option, the condition checkboxes become available. 4 If you selected Tie Off If, set the conditions: ! Before Trim/Color Change: a tie-off is inserted before a trim or color change. ! Always Tie Off Last: a tie-off is inserted if the object is the last one in the design. ! Next Connector Longer Than: a tie-off is inserted if the next connector exceeds the specified length. 5 Select a tie-off method: ! Method 1 inserts tie-off stitches along the last stitch. This hides well and prevents stitches from bulging. It is suitable for Satin columns and lettering objects. ! Method 2 inserts tie-off stitches between the last two stitches. This is suitable for larger Tatami-filled shapes. 6 Set the tie-off values: ! Length: determines length of tie-off stitches. ! Number: determines number of tie-off stitches to generate. 7 Click Apply.

Adjusting automatic trim after settings

You can choose to turn off automatic trimming, to always trim connecting stitches, or to trim only when the connecting stitch is longer than a specified value.

To adjust automatic trim settings

1 Click the Object Properties icon. The Object Properties dialog opens. Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties dialog on/off. ES 2006 Chapter 8 Connecting Embroidery Objects 186 2 Select the Connectors tab. 3 In the Trim After panel, select a trim option: ! Off: no trims are inserted. This feature is useful if trimming causes your machine to slow down, or the needle to lose the thread. You can either add trim functions yourself, or trim the final embroidery by hand. ! Always Trim: trims are inserted after the object. ! Trim If Next Connector Is Longer Than: trims are inserted if the next connector exceeds the length you specify. Tip Usually, connectors shorter than 3 mm are not visible on the final embroidery. You may sometimes require a smaller valuee.g. if the thread color contrasts with the background color. 4 Click Apply.

Adding connectors manually

You can add tie-offs and trims in a design yourself, using the Tie Off, Trim and Empty Stitch tools. This method is less efficient than using automatic connectors and it is not recommended, but gives you more control over the final design. Some machine formats are unable to read functions that appear on a normal stitch. For these machines, you need to add trim, tie-off and other machine functions to an Empty Stitch or Empty Jump. You may also need to add one or more empty stitches or empty jumps to either side of a function for the machine to read it correctly. Note If you want to add all the tie-offs and trims yourself, turn off automatic features in the Object Properties > Connectors dialog. See Using automatic connectors for details.

Adding tie-offs
Adjust trim after settings

Click Tie Off (Pointer toolbar) to insert a tie-off. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 187 You can add tie-offs in your design using the Tie Off tool. This provides a semi-automated technique for adding tie-offs as an alternative to digitizing them with manual stitches. Tie-offs are usually added before a trim at the end of an object. Tip You can also insert machine functions manually using the Insert Machine Function dialog. See Inserting machine functions manually for details.

To add a tie-off

1 Travel to the object you want to tie-off. See Traveling by object for details. 2 Click the Tie-off icon. A Tie-off function is inserted. The default number of tie-off stitches is two. This means the needle backtracks twice and returns at the insertion point. Adjust this value in the Object Properties > Connectors dialog. See Adjusting automatic tie-off settings for details. Note Generally you will follow a tie-off with a trim. See Adding trims for details.

Adding trims

You can add trims in your design, using the Trim tool. When you add a trim in this way, the trim function is added to the current stitch. Some machines
Tie-off function start Tie-off function inserted, needle backtracks and returns Tie-off function end

Click Trim (Pointer toolbar) to insert a trim. ES 2006 Chapter 8 Connecting Embroidery Objects 188 require empty stitches or empty jumps on either side of the trim. If this is the case for the machine you want to stitch to, you will need to insert them. Tip Make sure that all stitches you trim have been tied in and tied off, otherwise the stitches will not be secured.

To add a trim

1 Travel to the needle position where you want to trim the thread. See Traveling by stitches for details. 2 Click the Trim icon. A trim function is inserted at the current needle position. Tip You can also insert machine functions manually using the Insert Machine Function dialog. See Inserting machine functions manually for details.

Adding empty stitches and empty jumps

Empty stitch is a tight (zero length) lockstitch, used together with, or as an alternative to, tie-in and tie-off stitches. Use empty stitches instead of tie-ins or tie-offs for objects filled with light density stitching where standard tie-ins and tie-offs may be visible. Also, use empty stitches or empty jumps when required by the selected machine format. Tip You can also insert machine functions manually using the Insert Machine Function dialog. See Inserting machine functions manually for details.
trim symbol tie-in symbol

Click Empty Function (Pointer toolbar) to insert an empty stitch. Right-click to insert an empty jump. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 189

To add empty stitches and empty jumps

1 Travel to the needle position where you want to trim the thread. See Traveling by stitches for details. 2 Click the Empty Function icon to insert an empty stitch. 3 Right-click Empty Function to insert an empty jump.

Adding jumps with penetrations off

You can create jump connectors manually in a design by digitizing with penetrations off. The Penetrations tool (formerly known as Needles In) prevents the needle from penetrating the fabric, forcing the machine to move across the design in a series of jumps. You can use Penetrations with any input method.

To add a jump with penetrations off

1 Select an input method. 2 Deselect Penetrations. 3 Digitize the connector (or row of jumps) in the usual way for the selected input method. The jumps are saved together as an embroidery object.

Adjusting travel run stitch length

Deselect Penetrations (Generate toolbar) to create jumps with needles or borers out. Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties dialog on/off. Use it to set the travel run stitch length.

Penetrations offjump stitches Satin Jumps Tatami

ES 2006 Chapter 8 Connecting Embroidery Objects 190 Travel runs are usually used to connect segments within filled objects. They are usually covered by fill stitches when the object is stitched out. You can adjust the travel run length to reduce the stitch count.

To adjust travel run stitch length

1 Click the Object Properties icon. The Object Properties dialog opens. 2 Select the Special tab and Travel Run from the list. 3 Enter a value in the Length field as required. Tip Increase stitch length to reduce the stitch count. Travel Run automatically varies the stitch length on tight curves. 4 Click Apply.
Adjust travel run length Travel Run length: 1mm Travel Run length: 3mm

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 191

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

ES Designer provides many techniques for achieving smooth, even placement of stitches, and eliminating gaps in your designs. Strengthen and stabilize designs with automatic underlay. Compensate for fabric stretch with pull compensation. Reduce stitch bunching with stitch shortening and fractional spacing. Adjust stitch density for more efficient production and remove small stitches automatically. Control corner stitching with Smart Corners and fine-tune handling of long stitches with Auto Split and Auto Jump. Set automatic start and end points. These features are all object properties and can be applied, removed or modified at will. This section describes how to improve stitch quality with automatic underlay and pull compensation. It also covers stitch shortening and fractional spacing together with adjusting stitch density and automatic removal of small stitches. Auto Split and Auto Jump are described as well as setting automatic start and end points.

Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays

Embroidery appearance and quality depends a lot on underlay which serves as a foundation for the cover stitching. Without an underlay, embroidery lies flat on the underlying fabric which can often show through. New digitizers might be tempted to increase stitch density but it is much more effective to apply an underlay. Although it increases the stitch count, underlay helps to ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 192 stabilize fabrics and reduce puckering and pulling especially on larger designs. It also provides loft, raising cover stitches and preventing them from sinking into soft fabrics. It can also prepare a napped fabric by flattening it. Larger areas and stretchy fabrics such as knits and pique generally need more underlay than smaller areas and firm fabrics such as drill or leather. ES Designer lets you set values to suit different fabrics, lettering appearance and size. Underlay settings are stored with each object in the same way as other object properties. They are regenerated whenever the object is scaled or transformed.

Applying automatic underlays

You can generate automatic underlay stitching from scratch or apply it to existing objects. The type of underlay you choose is determined by the purpose it is to serve. Any combination of underlay types can be applied in order to achieve the desired purpose.

To apply automatic underlays

! Click the Auto Underlay icon with or without objects selected.

With no objects selected, underlay stitches are automatically generated for all new objects. For both new or selected objects, automatically generated underlay stitches are based on current properties. ! Click again to turn off the effect.

Selecting underlays
Use Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to strengthen and stabilize embroidery designs with automatic underlays. Right-click to adjust underlay settings.
with underlay without underlay

Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust underlay settings. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 193 ES Designer provides a selection of underlay types to choose from. Use a single layer of underlay, or for more support, combine two underlay types. The Auto Underlay feature lets you see both underlay settings at the same time.

To select underlays

1 Right-click the Auto Underlay icon. The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens. 2 Select the First Underlay checkbox. 3 From the first Type field, select the first underlay type. 4 Select the Second Underlay checkbox as required. 5 From the second Type field, select the second underlay type. 6 Adjust settings as required and click Apply. Adjusted settings are applied to any selected objects. Otherwise, new settings become current.
Center Run and Edge Run underlays used together Adjust 2nd underlay settings Adjust 1st underlay settings Select 1st underlay Select 1st underlay type Adjust 1st underlay margins Select 2nd underlay Select 1st underlay type Adjust 2nd underlay margins

ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 194

Adjusting Center Run and Edge Run underlay settings

Center Run places a row of stitches along the center of a column. It is used to stabilize narrow columnse.g. 2-3 mm wide. Edge Run places stitches around the edge of an object. Use Edge Run together with the Zigzag or Tatami underlays when digitizing large shapes. Note You cannot use Center Run with Complex Fill objects. Adjust the stitch length for Center Run and Edge Run underlays to ensure the underlay stitches follow the shape of curves and are not visible in the final embroidery. Set a specific run stitch length, or use a variable stitch length calculated by ES Designer. If you use a variable length, enter a chord gap value to control how closely the stitches follow the digitized lines. The chord gap is the distance between the digitized curve and the underlay stitch. See also Setting variable run stitch lengths. Note Stitch settings for Center and Edge Run underlays are stored

separately from and do not affect Run and Triple Run objects.

To adjust Center Run and Edge Run underlay settings

1 Right-click the Auto Underlay icon. Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Center Run and Edge Run underlay settings.
Center Run underlay Edge Run underlay

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 195 The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens. 2 Select the first and second (as required) Underlay checkbox and select Center Run or Edge Run as the First or Second underlay type. 3 Enter the required length values for each underlay type: ! Length: Sets the maximum length of each stitch. ! Vary Run Length: If enabled, specify minimum stitch length and Chord Gap values as required. See Setting variable run stitch lengths for details. 4 Click Apply.
Adjust fixed or variable run length Adjust fixed or variable run length Select 1st underlay Select Center Run (or Edge Run) Select 2nd underlay Select Edge Run (or Center Run) Adjust underlay margins Edge Run and Center Run underlay with 2.5 mm stitch length Edge Run and Center Run underlay with variable run length

Adjusting Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay settings

Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay settings. ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 196 Use Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay stitching to support wide columns. You can combine Zigzag or Double Zigzag with Center Run or Edge Run underlays. These underlays are best used under Satin cover stitching. You can set spacing and stitch length properties for Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay. Note Zigzag underlay stitch settings are stored separately from, and do not affect, zigzag cover stitch settings.

To adjust Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay settings

1 Right-click the Auto Underlay icon. The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens. 2 Select the first and second (if required) Underlay checkbox and select Zigzag or Double Zigzag as the First or Second underlay type. 3 Enter the required spacing and length for each underlay type: ! Spacing: Sets the required distance between two needle penetrations on the same side of the column.
Zigzag underlay Double Zigzag underlay Adjust spacing and length Adjust spacing and length Select 1st underlay Select Zigzag (or Double Zigzag) Select 2nd

underlay Select Double Zigzag (or Zigzag) Adjust underlay margins Adjust underlay margins

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 197 ! Length: Sets the maximum length of each stitch. 4 Click Apply.

Adjusting Tatami underlay settings

Tatami underlay is used to stabilize large, filled shapes. It resembles an extremely open Tatami fill stitch, where rows of stitches are placed across the object to create the underlay. Tatami underlay is often used together with Edge Run, especially for Complex Fill objects under Tatami cover stitching. Change stitch spacing and length settings for Tatami underlay in the same way as for Tatami fill stitches. Select the backstitch type you require and, for Complex Fill objects, set the angle of the underlay stitches. Note Tatami underlay stitch settings are stored separately from, and do not affect, Tatami cover stitch settings.

To adjust Tatami underlay settings

1 Right-click the Auto Underlay icon.
Spacing: 3.0 mm Spacing: 4.0 mm

Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami underlay settings.
Tatami stitch with Edge Run and Tatami underlay direction of cover stitching direction of underlay

ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 198 The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens. 2 Select first or second Underlay checkbox as required and select Tatami. 3 Adjust spacing and length settings as required: ! Spacing: Sets the distance between each row of stitching. ! Length: Sets the maximum length of each stitch. 4 For Complex Fill objects, you can also set the stitch angle for Tatami underlays. 5 Select a backstitch. See Selecting a Tatami backstitch for details. 6 Click Apply.
Adjust Tatami underlay values Select 1st underlay Select Tatami Adjust underlay margins Spacing: 2mm Spacing: 3mm Angle: 135 Angle: 45

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 199

Setting underlay margins

The underlay margin is the distance between an object outline and the edge of the underlay. Increase this margin to prevent underlay stitches from extending outside the cover stitches. For Complex Fill objects, you can enter a single margin value which is used for all edges in the shape. For objects created with the Input A, Input B, Input C or Lettering tools, you can set three different marginsone for the

sides of the column and one for each end. Note Margin values do not apply for Center Run underlays.

To set underlay margins

1 Right-click the Auto Underlay icon. The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens. 2 In the Margins panels, set the required margins. Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust underlay margins.
underlay margin Select 1st underlay Select 2nd underlay Set underlay margins Set underlay margins Select required underlay type Select required underlay type

ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 200 ! For Input A, Input B, Input C and Lettering objects, enter margins in the 1:, 2: and 3: fields, using the diagram as a guide. ! For Complex Fill objects, enter a margin in the 1: field only. Values in the other fields will be ignored. Tip If you are joining two columns, use a negative value at the joining end. The underlay will extend outside the cover stitching, allowing for smooth joining of the columns. 3 Click Apply.

Adding underlay by segment

Normally underlay is applied to all segments before the cover stitches are sewn. With Fusion Fill objects, however, underlay can be applied by segment. This means that underlay and cover stitch are stitched segment by segment.
Mgn 1: 0.8 mm, Mgn 2: 0.2 mm, Mgn 3: 0.4 mm All margins: 0.1 mm two columns joined

Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to add underlay by segment. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 201

To add underlay by segment

1 Right-click the Auto Underlay icon. The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens. 2 Select first and second underlays as required. 3 Select By Segment for either first or second underlay. Note If you select By Segment for the first underlay, it is selected by default for the second as well. 4 Click Apply.

Compensating for fabric stretch

Embroidery stitches tend to pull fabric inwards where the needle penetrates. This can cause fabric to pucker, and gaps to appear in the embroidery. Experienced digitizers can manually compensate for pull by overlapping objects as they digitize. Automatic pull compensation, however, counters the pull effect by overstitching outlines of filled shapes on the sides where the needle penetrates. See also Adjusting stitch density. Adjust the amount of overstitching you need by varying the pull compensation setting in the Object Properties dialog. This is handy if you want to stitch a design on fabrics with varying degrees of stretch. Tip Applying underlay stitching, and using appropriate backing and topping when stitching out can also reduce the push-pull effect.
Select By

Segment Or select By Segment for the 2nd underlay only Pull compensation Digitized outline Calculated outline

ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 202

Applying automatic pull compensation

To apply automatic pull compensation

Apply automatic pull compensation to objects in your design, either before or after you digitize.

! Click the Pull Compensation icon with or without objects selected.

With no objects selected, pull compensation is applied to all new objects. For both new or selected objects, pull compensation is based on current properties. ! Click again to turn off the effect.

Adjusting pull compensation settings

Appropriate pull compensation settings vary with the type of fabricstretchy, pile, etchooping methodtight or loosely hoopedand size of embroidery objectwide or narrow columns. Use the following table as a guideline. Use Pull Compensation (Stitch Types toolbar) to automatically compensate for fabric stretch. Right-click to adjust pull compensation settings.
Pull Compensation OFF Pull Compensation ON

Right-click Pull Compensation (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust pull compensation settings. Fabric Pull compensation (mm) drills, cotton 0.20 T-shirt 0.35 fleece, jumper 0.40 lettering 0.2 - 0.3 ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 203

To adjust pull compensation settings

1 Right-click the Pull Compensation icon. The Object Properties > Pull Comp dialog opens. 2 Select the Pull Compensation checkbox. 3 Enter the amount (in millimeters) by which you want to overstitch. 4 Click Apply.

Adjusting column width

The Column Width setting adjusts the width of columnar shapes, allowing you to change the column width at every point by a constant amount in the direction of stitching. The purpose is to fatten or thin a column, for example, in order to create bold lettering. See also Making bold lettering. Tip Reduce column width if you need to allow the underlay to extend outside the object boundary.
Select Pull Compensation and enter overstitch allowance Pull Compensation: 0.3 mm Pull Compensation: 0.6 mm

Right-click Pull Compensation (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust column width setting. ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 204

To adjust column width

1 Right-click the Pull Compensation icon. The Object Properties > Pull Comp dialog opens. 2 Select the Column Width checkbox. 3 Enter the amount (mm) by which you want to adjust column widths. 4 Click Apply.

Reversing stitch direction

Stitching direction can affect embroidery quality because of the push-pull effect. This is especially visible with Input C objects. Reverse Curve lets you control the push-pull effect by reversing the stitch direction. This in turn affects the stitching direction of Jagged Edge, Contour Stitch and E Stitch objects. It can also affect Contour stitching, Tatami offsets, Flexi Split pattern orientation, and Motif Run orientation. Note Only closed vector and embroidery objects such as Input C can be reversed. The effect on vector objects will not be visible, convert them to embroidery objects first.
Select Column Width and enter column width adjustment column width: -1 no adjustment column width: +1

Use Reverse Curves (Image menu) to reverse stitch direction in vector or closed embroidery objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 205

To reverse stitch direction

1 Select a closed embroidery object. 2 Select Image > Reverse Curves. The stitch direction is reversed.

Creating smooth joins

The Continuous Input feature provides a simple and efficient way of digitizing a single Input A object comprised of separately stitched sections. You can also create two smoothly joined objects with different cover stitch parameters in each. Note Continuous Input applies only to Input A. The objects so created can be deleted or edited using standard reshape tools.

To create smooth joins

1 Select Special > Options and click the General tab. 2 Select a continuous input style. ! Normal: Use this for non-continuous input. Use Input A (Input toolbar) together with Continuous Input to create single objects comprising separately stitched sections.
Reverse Curve applied Input C object with Jagged Edge Select a continuous input style

ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 206 ! Continuous Replace: Use this to continue digitizing the same object after each Enter keypress. Any properties you change during digitizing will affect the entire object, not just the section you are working on. ! Continuous Add: Use this to join objects of different size where different stitch types are usede.g. a narrow section of Satin stitch joining to a larger section of Tatami. 3 Click OK. 4 Digitize the Input A object. See Digitizing columns of varying width for details. When you press Enter, the digitized object fills with stitches. The input tool is still active. 5 If you are using Continuous Add mode, you can select another stitch type at this point. Tip To stop the screen scrolling while moving the mouse, hold down Shift and click the stitch type button you require. 6 Recommence digitizing where you left off and press Enter when you have finished. The new section fills with stitches and joins to the previous one. If you are using Continuous Add mode, the new section actually comprises a

new object. This means that, while the two sections (objects) are smoothly joined, they can have quite different property settings. 7 To start a new object without joining to the previous object, click the Input A icon again.
Second section smooth joined to firsttwo sections become a single First section created object First section created Second section smooth joined to firsttwo sections become separate objects

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 207

Reducing stitch bunching with stitch shortening

Standard stitch spacing is calculated at the outside edge of a shape. With sharp curves, spacing which provides adequate coverage on the outside edge may cause bunching along the inside edge. This may cause thread breakage when stitching out. The longer the stitches, the worse the problem. Stitch shortening reduces the length of some stitches in sharp turns so that the needle penetrations are distributed evenly, creating smoother stitching. Tip Fractional spacing provides another way of reducing stitch bunching. See Reducing stitch bunching with fractional spacing for details.

Applying stitch shortening

To apply stitch shortening
shortened stitches

Apply stitch shortening to sharp corners to decrease stitch density on the inside edge.

! Click the Shortening icon with or without objects selected.

Use Shortening (Stitch Types toolbar) to reduce stitch bunching in tight curves by shortening some stitches on the inside edge. Right-click to adjust stitch shortening settings. ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 208 With no objects selected, stitch shortening is applied to all new objects. For both new or selected objects, stitch shortening is based on current properties. ! Click again to turn off the effect.

Adjusting stitch shortening settings

Default shortening settings are set to suit most designs. However, advanced users can adjust the way ES Designer shortens stitches by setting precise shortening settings. Note Only change these settings if you understand how stitch shortening is calculated.

To adjust stitch shortening settings

1 Right-click the Shortening icon. The Object Properties > Shortening dialog opens. Right-click Shortening (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust stitch shortening settings.
Select Shortening Access further settings Adjust shortening settings

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 209 2 In the If Spacing < field, enter the minimum spacing permitted between stitches (as % of nominal spacing) before automatic shortening takes effect.

3 In the Max No Of Short Stitches field, enter the maximum number of consecutive short stitches to allow, up to a limit of five. A higher number allows smoother distribution of the needle penetrations in tight curves, and reduces stitch bunching. 4 Click the Values button. The Shortening dialog opens.
If spacing < 90% If spacing < 40% Max no. of short stitches: 1 Max no. of short stitches: 5 Define length of short stitches relative to original stitch length Randomize shortening pattern

ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 210 5 In the Shorten Stitch Length to (%) panel, define the individual lengths of consecutive short stitches, as a percentage of the original. Note A value of 80% means that the stitch is shortened to 80% of the original length, not by 80%. The smaller the percentage, the shorter the stitch. If you allow three short stitches, you need only fill in the first three rows. If you allow five short stitches, fill in all five rows. If only one short stitch is generated between normal stitches, the value in Row 1 will apply. If two consecutive short stitches are generated, the values in Row 2 will apply to 1st and 2nd stitch respectively. And so on up the scale. Tip For best results use a jagged pattern between consecutive stitches.
Max no. of short stitches: 1 Shorten stitch length to: 80% Max no. of short stitches: 1 Shorten stitch length to: 50% Max no. of short stitches: 5 Shorten stitch length to: 50% Row 1: 80 Row 2: 85 70 Row 3: 70 90 70 Row 4: 70 90 80 70 Row 5: 70 85 65 85 70 Max no. of short stitches: 5 Shorten stitch length to: 50% Row 1: 90 Row 2: 70 60 Row 3: 55 85 55 Row 4: 55 85 75 55 Row 5: 55 70 45 70 55

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 211 6 Select the Randomize checkbox to randomize the shortening pattern values. This will eliminate unwanted lines appearing in regular curves. 7 Click Apply.

Reducing stitch bunching with fractional spacing

Standard stitch spacing is calculated at the outside edge of a shape. With sharp curves, spacing which provides adequate coverage on the outside edge may cause bunching along the inside edge. This may cause thread breakage when stitching out. The longer the stitches, the worse the problem. With Fractional Spacing, ES Designer calculates spacing settings from a specified point called the offset fraction. This lies between the outside and inside edges of the shape. You can change the offset fraction to adjust stitch spacing at inside and outside edges. Tip Stitch shortening provides another way of reducing stitch bunching. See Reducing stitch bunching with stitch shortening for details.
Randomize ON Randomize OFF 0.00 0.66

0.33 1.00 offset fraction: outside edge

ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 212

Applying fractional spacing

Apply fractional spacing to curved shapes to even out the stitch density along the outside and inside edges. Fractional spacing is particularly useful for columns of Satin stitches with sharp turns. Tip For best results, combine stitch shortening and fractional spacing effects.

To apply fractional spacing

! Click the Fractional Spacing icon with or without objects selected.

With no objects selected, fractional spacing is applied to all new objects. For both new or selected objects, fractional spacing is based on current properties. See Adjusting fractional spacing settings for details. ! Click again to turn off the effect.

Adjusting fractional spacing settings

Fractional stitch spacing calculates the spacing at some point between the outside and inside edges of the shape. This point is called the offset fraction. The offset fraction is entered as a fraction of the column width, where the outside edge is 0.00, and the inside edge is 1.00.

To adjust fractional spacing settings

1 Right-click the Fractional Spacing icon. Use Fractional Spacing (Stitch Types toolbar) to reduce stitch bunching in tight curves by adjusting the point at which stitch spacing is calculated. Right-click to adjust fractional spacing settings.
Fractional Spacing OFF Fractional Spacing ON

Right-click Fractional Spacing (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust fractional spacing settings. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 213 The Object Properties > Smart Corners dialog opens. 2 Select the Fractional Spacing checkbox. 3 In the Offset Fraction field, enter the offset fraction value as a fraction of the column width, where the outside edge is 0.00, and the inside edge is 1.00. Tip An offset fraction of 0.33 generates fewer stitches than standard spacing, reducing bunching along the inside edge. An offset fraction of 0.66 eliminates bunching on the inside edge, but may produce insufficient stitches to cover the fabric. 4 Click Apply.

Controlling corner stitching

Sharp points in a shape may cause a bunching of stitches and needle penetrations which can create a hard spot in the embroidery and may damage the fabric or needle. Smart Corners helps you control sharp corners in Input A and Input C objects. There are two typesMitre Corners and Cap Corners. Specify the corner angle at which either will be automatically invoked. Mitre Corners create a sharp line at the intersection of the two
Select Fractional Spacing and enter offset fraction as fraction of column width offset fraction 0.00 offset fraction 0.33 offset fraction 0.66 59 stitches 49 stitches 43 stitches

ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 214 columns. Use them primarily for corner angles of 75 to 90. Cap Corners are suitable for very sharp corners as they generate fewer stitches.

Applying Smart Corners

Apply Smart Corners to reduce the number of stitches and the risk of bunched, distorted embroidery, in sharp corners.

To apply Smart Corners

! Click the Smart Corners icon with or without objects selected.

With no objects selected, Smart Corners are automatically generated for all new objects. For both new or selected objects, Smart Corners are based on current properties. See Adjusting Smart Corners settings for details. Note You can also apply Smart Corners in Input C objects in conjunction with sharp corner rounding. See Rounding sharp corners for details. ! Click again to turn off the effect. Use Smart Corners (Stitch Types toolbar) to control the stitching out of sharp corners in Input A and Input C objects. Right-click to adjust settings.
Smart Corners OFF Mitre Corners Cap Corners Smart Corners OFF Mitre Corner Cap Corner

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 215

Adjusting Smart Corners settings

You can set the angles at which Mitre Corners and Cap Corners will be applied, and specify the overlap and stitch length allowances. Note You can use Mitre Corner and Cap Corner options together. For example, you may wish a corner with an angle less than 75 to be mitred, but sharp corners of less than 45 to be capped.

To adjust Smart Corners settings

1 Right-click the Smart Corners icon. The Object Properties > Smart Corners dialog opens. 2 Select the Smart Corners checkbox. 3 In the Mitre Corner panel adjust the following settings: Right-click Smart Corners (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Smart Corners settings.
Adjust Mitre Corner settings Select Cap Corner and adjust settings Select Smart Corners

ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 216 ! Mitre below Angle: the angle below which to apply Mitre Corner. Any corners less than this angle are mitred. For example, set ES Designer to automatically mitre corners with an angle of less than 75, but stitch wider angles using normal fill stitch values. ! Mitre Overlap: the distance by which the stitches are allowed to overlap in the center of the corner. 4 In the Cap Corner panel adjust the following settings: ! Cap below Angle: the angle below which to apply capped corners. Any corners less than this angle are capped. If Mitre Corners are also selected, then the cap angle is usually smaller than the mitre angle.
mitre below angle: 75 mitre below angle: 45 mitre overlap: 0.5 mm mitre overlap: 1.5 mm cap below angle: 45 cap below angle: 75

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 217 ! Capping overlap: the number of overlapping rows to allow where the sections of the cap join. ! Max Capping stitch length: the maximum length of cap stitches.

Cap Corners with stitches exceeding this length will become Mitre Corners. This prevents long and short stitches appearing next to each other. 5 Click Apply.

Rounding sharp corners

ES Designer applies rounding to sharp corners by default. Round Sharp Corners is available for Input C objects to give you the option of sharp or round corner points. The option is only available in conjunction with the Smart Corners effect, and is typically used with the Cap Corner option. See also Applying Smart Corners.

To round sharp corners

1 Right-click the Input C icon. The Object Properties > Special > Input C dialog opens. 2 Select the Round Sharp Corners checkbox. This checkbox is only enabled when Smart Corners is turned on in the Object Properties dialog. See Controlling corner stitching for details.
capping overlap: 1 capping overlap: 3

Right-click Input C (Input toolbar) to set sharp corner rounding.

Select Round Sharp Corners

ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 218 3 Click Apply.

Adjusting stitch density

You may want to change stitch density in order to stitch on a different fabric or with a different thread. Alternatively, you may want to make production cheaper by reducing the overall stitch count. The Process feature lets you change the density of all stitch types (except Manual) across the whole or selected parts of a design. It also lets you adjust the density of selected stitch types. You can even use the feature to scale a design. See also Adjusting Auto Spacing settings and Removing small stitches automatically.

Adjusting overall stitch density

The Process tool lets you adjust the overall stitch density across the whole or selected parts of a design in order to achieve a target number of stitches. You can adjust density as a percentage to avoid calculating the absolute stitch spacing and length values for each stitch type.
Sharp corner Rounded corners

Use Process (Generate toolbar) to adjust stitch density of and/or scale the whole or selected parts of a design.
100%: 5195 stitches 20%: 987 stitches

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 219 Tip If a design was originally created in ES Designer, or was converted into objects, the changes you make through the Process dialog will change the properties of the selected objects. You can check any changes via the Object Properties dialog.

To adjust overall stitch density

1 Select the design or objects you want to process. 2 Click the Process icon. The Process dialog opens. 3 In the Stitch Values panel, enter the number of Target Stitches either as a percentage or absolute value. This value sets how much the density of each stitch type needs to change to achieve the target stitch count. The spacing and length settings for each stitch type automatically adjust according to the new overall density setting. 4 In the Pull Compensation field, enter the amount by which to overstitch (or understitch) in order to compensate for fabric pull.

If the design was originally created in ES Designer, or has been converted to EMB format, enter a pull compensation value which will be applied to all objects in the design. See also Compensating for fabric stretch.
Enter target stitch count Adjust Pull Compensation

ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 220 5 In the Dimensions panel, adjust the Width and Height values to scale the selected objects as required. Enter the new sizes as an absolute value or as a percentage of the current size. The default 100% for stitch spacing and length adjusts automatically to reflect the new density. See Scaling objects by an exact amount for details. 6 Click Apply. Stitches for Tatami, Satin, Run, and Program Split objects are regenerated using the new settings. Note Like the Object Properties dialog, the Process dialog lets you specify design dimensions precisely.

Adjusting stitch density of certain stitch types

The Process tool lets you adjust the density of one or more stitch types across the whole or selected parts of a design. You do not have to select objects individually, and you can change density as a percentage. Even if the selection includes objects created with different stitch types, you can change the density of only one type. For example, you can select the whole design, then change the density of all Satin objects. The changes are reflected in the properties of the individual objects.
Adjust width and height settings to scale 100%: 5195 stitches 20%: 987 stitches

Use Process (Generate toolbar) to change the density of selected stitch types in a design. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 221

To adjust the density of certain stitch types

1 Select the design or objects you want to process. 2 Click the Process icon. The Process dialog opens. 3 In the Stitch Values panel, adjust the density for each stitch type as required. You can select the new spacing or length as a percentage of the originalfrom 10% to 1000%or as an absolute value (in millimeters). Note If you do not want to change the density of a certain stitch type, leave it as 100%. 4 Select the checkbox if you want to use Auto Spacing for Satin stitching. If the checkbox is cleared, Auto Spacing will be removed from all Satin elements of the design which will change to fixed spacing. If the checkbox is dimmed, the original Auto Spacing values are retained. See also Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch. 5 In the Pull Compensation field, enter the amount by which to overstitch (or understitch) in order to compensate for fabric pull.
Adjust Pull Compensation Adjust stitch densities Select Auto Spacing

ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 222 If the design was originally created in ES Designer, or has been converted to EMB format, enter a pull compensation value which will be

applied to all objects in the design. See also Compensating for fabric stretch. 6 Click Apply. Note Like the Object Properties dialog, the Process dialog lets you specify design dimensions precisely.

Removing small stitches automatically

Very small stitches can damage the fabric and cause thread or needle breakage. Before you stitch out a design, you can remove unwanted small stitches automatically. See also Filtering stitches by stitch length. Tip For small stitches to be removed automatically whenever you output the design, select the Run Small Stitch Filter on Output checkbox in the Options dialog. See Setting other options for details.

To remove small stitches automatically

1 Select Stitch > Small Stitches.
Program Split stitch spacing reduced (density increased) Tatami stitch spacing reduced (density increased) Tatami stitches Program Split

Use Small Stitches (Stitch menu) to remove unwanted small stitches automatically. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 223 The Small Stitches dialog opens. 2 Enter the minimum stitch length you want to keep. 3 Click Ok. All stitches shorter than the specified length will be removed from the design. Tip If the new value is smaller than the previous value, regenerate stitches for the object before you stitch out. Check the Status bar for the new stitch count.

Setting automatic start and end points

Before stitching, some embroidery machines require you to position the starting needle exactly above the first needle penetration point. Use Auto Start and End to connect the first and last stitches in the design. This makes it easy to position the needle before stitching, and reduces the chance of the needle hitting the side of the frame.

To set automatic start and end points

1 Select Stitch > Auto Start and End.
Enter minimum stitch length to keep

Use Auto Start and End (Generate toolbar) to toggle the Auto Start and End function on/off according to the current settings. Right-click to open the Auto Start and End dialog. ES 2006 Chapter 9 Improving Stitch Quality 224 The Auto Start and End dialog opens. 2 Select the Use Auto Start and End checkbox to connect the first and last stitches in the design. 3 Select the Maintain Automatically checkbox to maintain the design center after modifying the design. 4 Select a centering method. ! Auto Start and End: by default, connecting stitches are created from the start and end points to the center of the design. Select one of the nine preset end points. ! Return to Start Point: creates a connecting stitch from the end point to the start point. ! Digitize Auto Start/End Point: creates connecting stitches from the start and end points to a point you define. If you select this, you are prompted to select the point after you click OK. Click the Separately checkbox to enter separate start and end points.

Select Use Auto Start and End Select centering method Specify how to match connecting stitches Specify the connector type Select preset end point Click to enter separate start and end points

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 225 5 Select to match connecting stitches on the Horizontal plane, Vertical plane or both in the Match On panel. 6 Select the type and length of the connecting stitches in the Connectors panel. See Connecting Embroidery Objects for details. 7 Click OK. Connecting stitches will be inserted as required before the first and after the last stitch of the design.
Match on vertical Match on horizontal Match on both

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 226

PART III DIGITIZING WITH ARTWORK

There are two broad categories of artwork file, both of which can be imported into ES Designer for use as digitizing backdropsvector and bitmap. To create good quality embroidery, you need to choose or create suitable artwork of either format. See Digitizing with Vector Images for details.

Digitizing with vector drawings

This section describes how to create drawing objects using the drawing tools as well as how to import them from third-party applications. It also explains how to merge, trim and split overlapping drawing or embroidery objects using the Shaping tools. See Digitizing with Vector Images for details.

Digitizing with bitmap images

This section describes how to choose suitable artwork for digitizing purposes as well as how to scan it into ES Designer and edit it before use. It also describes how to insert and save bitmap images into ES Designer, as well as how to show and hide them as you digitize. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details. ES 2006 Digitizing with Artwork 227

Preparing images for automatic digitizing

This section describes how to prepare images for automatic digitizing. It explains how to crop images for digitizing as well as how to prepare both outlined and non-outlined images. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details.

Automatic digitizing

This section describes how to automatically convert bitmap images to embroidery objects and complete designs, as well as how to create

embroidery from grayscale images. See Automatic Digitizing for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 228

Chapter 10

Digitizing with Vector Images

ES Designer provides tools to draw shapes and outlines directly on screen. Alternatively, insert or paste vector images created in third-party graphics packages for use as digitizing backdrops. Scale and transform them in the same way as embroidery objects. You can also select colors for vector object outlines and fills. When working with overlapping vector or embroidery objects, merge, trim or split them using the Shaping tools. Tip Vector images have the advantage over bitmap images that they can be converted directly to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods. This allows you to concentrate on design shapes without having to think about stitch properties and sequence. See also Converting between object types. This section describes how to create vector objects using the drawing tools as well as how to import them from third-party applications. It also explains how to merge, trim and split overlapping vector or embroidery objects using the Shaping tools.

Creating vector outlines

ES Designer drawing tools let you draft shapes and outlines on screen. Vector objects can then be converted to embroidery objects with the ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 229 application of manual input methods and stitch types. See Converting vector objects to embroidery for details. Tip ES Designer lets you select colors for vector object outlines and fills. These can be different to the corresponding embroidery objects. See Coloring vector objects for details.

Drawing straight lines

Draw straight lines in your design using the Line drawing tool. Note You can convert line vector objects to embroidery objects using an outline input methode.g. Run, Triple Run, or Motif Runor Input C. See Converting vector objects to embroidery for details.

To draw straight lines

1 Click the Line icon. 2 Click the start point of the line. 3 Click the end point. Tip To constrain the line vertically, horizontally or in 15 angles, press Ctrl as you mark the end point.

Drawing open shapes

Draw lines of any shape using the Polyline tool. Enter reference points to create the shape you want. Use Line (Image toolbar) to create straight line vector objects. Use Polyline (Image toolbar) to create open-ended vector objects. ES 2006 Chapter 10 Digitizing with Vector Images 230 Note You can convert polyline vector objects to embroidery objects using Input C or an outline input methode.g. Run, Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, or Stemstitch. See Converting vector objects to embroidery for details.

To draw open shapes

1 Click the Polyline icon. 2 Mark reference points to draw the shape of the line.

! Click to enter a corner point. ! Right-click to enter a curve point.

3 Press Enter. Tip ES Designer lets you select colors for vector object outlines and fills. These can be different to the corresponding embroidery objects. See Coloring vector objects for details.

Drawing polygons

Draw closed shapes using the Polygon tool. Enter reference points to create the shape you want. Note You can convert polygon vector objects to embroidery objects using Input C, Complex Fill, Fusion Fill, or an outline input methode.g. Run, Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, or Stemstitch. See Converting vector objects to embroidery for details.

To draw polygons
corner point curve point

1 Click the Polygon icon. 2 Digitize the shape by marking reference points on screen. Use Polygon (Image toolbar) to create closed vector objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 231 ! Click to enter a corner point. ! Right-click to enter a curve point. Tip To constrain the line between two points to 15 increments, press Ctrl as you mark the second point. 3 Press Enter to close the shape. Tip ES Designer lets you select colors for vector object outlines and fills. These can be different to the corresponding embroidery objects. See Coloring vector objects for details.

Drawing rectangles and squares

Draw rectangles and squares using the Rectangle tool. Note You can convert rectangle vector objects to embroidery objects using Input C, Complex Fill, Fusion Fill, or an outline input methode.g. Run, Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, or Stemstitch. See Converting vector objects to embroidery for details.

To draw rectangles and squares

1 Click the Rectangle icon. 2 Click to mark the corner of the rectangle. An outline attaches to the mouse pointer.
corner point curve point

Use Rectangle (Image toolbar) to create rectangular or square vector objects. ES 2006 Chapter 10 Digitizing with Vector Images 232 3 Move the pointer until the outline is the size and shape you require, then click again. Note To draw a square, hold down Ctrl as you move the pointer.

Drawing circles and ellipses

Draw circles and ellipses using the Ellipse tool. Note You can convert ellipse vector objects to embroidery objects using Input C, Complex Fill, Fusion Fill, or an outline input methode.g. Run, Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, or Stemstitch. See Converting vector objects to embroidery for details.

To draw circles and ellipses

1 Click the Ellipse icon.

2 Click to mark the center of the circle or ellipse. The outline of a circle attaches to the mouse pointer. 3 Move the pointer until the outline is the diameter you require, then click again. ! To draw a perfect circle, press Enter.
Click to enter corner point Drag pointer, click again

Use Ellipse (Image toolbar) to create circular or elliptical vector objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 233 ! To draw an ellipse, move the pointer again, then mark a second radius point when the outline is the required size. Press Enter. Tip ES Designer lets you select colors for vector object outlines and fills. These can be different to the corresponding embroidery objects. See Coloring vector objects for details.

Importing and exporting vector images

You can insert or paste vector images created in third-party drawing packages for use as digitizing backdrops. You can then convert these to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods or with the Point & Stitch tools. See also Converting vector objects to embroidery and Digitizing shapes with Point & Stitch. Note The Auto Trace feature lets you convert scanned artwork to vector objects. See Converting bitmaps to outlines with Auto Trace for details.

Inserting vector images

Images from third-party applications can be inserted into ES Designer in a variety of native and interchange vector formats. You can choose to remove overlapping objects in vector images by flattening them. This eliminates overlapping areas of stitching when vector objects are converted to embroidery objects. You can also import vector images (not DXF) as bitmaps. See also Supported image formats. Tip You can also paste vectors directly into ES Designer through the Windows clipboard. See Pasting vector images for details.
Click to enter center point Press Enter for circle OR Drag pointer Mark a point for ellipse

Use Insert File (Image menu) to insert a vector image for use as a backdrop. ES 2006 Chapter 10 Digitizing with Vector Images 234

To insert a vector image

1 Create a new file in ES Designer or open the design file into which you want to insert the vector image. 2 Select Image > Insert File. The Open dialog opens. 3 From the Look In list, select the folder where you keep your vector files. 4 From the Files of Type list, select a suitable vector image format and select the file you want to insert. 5 If you are working with DXF files: ! Click Options. The DXF File Options dialog opens. ! Select Inches or Millimeters from the Units of Measurement list and click OK. If this information is not specified, the vector image may not display at the correct size.
Select to remove overlapping objects Select to

insert as bitmap rather than vector

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 235 6 Select the As Bitmap checkbox to insert the vector image as a bitmap image. Note DXF files cannot be imported as bitmaps. 7 Select the Flatten checkbox to remove any overlapping areas from the vector image. Note If a vector image is imported as a bitmap, it is flattened automatically. 8 Select the Preview checkbox to see a preview of the vector image. 9 Click Open to insert the vector image into the design window. Note To work with individual vector objects, you need to ungroup them first. See Grouping and ungrouping objects for details.

Exporting vector images

You can export vector images and embroidery designs from ES Designer in various vector formats for use in third party programs. This can be useful, for example, for screen printing. See Supported image formats for details.
imported as bitmap imageindividual objects cannot be selected imported as vector imageindividual objects can be selected vector objects flattened vector objects not flattened hidden areas removed hidden areas preserved

ES 2006 Chapter 10 Digitizing with Vector Images 236

To export a vector image

1 Select the vector image or embroidery design. 2 Select File > Export As. The Save Image As dialog opens. 3 Select a folder in the Save In field. 4 Select a format from the Save as type list. 5 Enter a new file name in the File name field and click Save.

Pasting vector images

To paste a vector image

You can insert a vector image into ES Designer by copying it from another embroidery design or graphics application, and pasting it into your design. 1 Select the vector image or embroidery design you want to copy and paste. 2 Copy it to the Windows clipboard.
Select folder Select required format Enter file name

Use Paste Drawing > As Vector (Edit menu) to paste a vector image for use as a digitizing backdrop. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 237 3 Create a new file in ES Designer or open the design file into which you want to insert the vector image. 4 Select Edit > Paste Vector > As Vector. The vector image is pasted into the design. Note You cannot flatten vectors using Paste.

Manipulating vector images

Vector images may consist of grouped vector objects. You can ungroup these to work with them individually. ES Designer lets you remove unnecessary reshape nodes by applying smoothing to individual ungrouped

objects. You can select colors for outlines as well as fills. The Make Complex Shape feature lets you combine any number of vector curves into a single complex shapei.e. a shape with holes in it. You can also show or hide vector images in the design. Tip You can scale and transform vector images in the same way as embroidery objects. Unlike bitmap images, any changes you make to vector objects are updated and saved with the design file. See also Arranging and Transforming Objects.

Smoothing vector objects

When you insert a vector image into a design, reshape nodesthe same as for embroidery objectsare added to the outline. On shapes where the angle changes constantly, the software may insert hundreds of reshape Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) in combination with Image > Smooth Vector Curves to remove unnecessary reshape nodes from vector image objects. ES 2006 Chapter 10 Digitizing with Vector Images 238 nodes, making reshaping difficult. To remove unnecessary reshape nodes, ungroup the vector image, and apply smoothing to the vector objects.

To smooth a vector object

1 Select the vector object (or objects) to smooth. Note You can only smooth vector objects that have been ungrouped and selected. However, you can select multiple objects. 2 Click the Reshape Object icon. Reshape nodes display around the vector image object. 3 Select Image > Smooth Vector Curves. The Smooth Vector Curves dialog opens. 4 In the Precision field, enter the smoothing precision value. This value controls how closely the smoothed outline follows the original. The larger the precision value, the fewer the reshape nodes. 5 Click OK.

Coloring vector objects

without smoothing Precision: 0.5 mm Precision: 0.1 mm Enter smoothing precision value

Vector images may be composed of outlines only. ES Designer lets you select colors for outlines as well as fills. These can be different to the

Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties dialog on/off. Use it to select colors for vector outlines and fills. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 239 embroidery objects you may create. Coloring makes vector objects easier to interpret. For example, a solid fill color might suggest Satin or Tatami, while a fill pattern may be interpreted as Motif Fill or Program Split. Tip Colored vector outlines are also important for appliqu cutting. If appliqu objects are digitized in ES Designer, they can be ungrouped, duplicated, and sent to the laser or other type of cutter. Some can cut several layers of fabric at the same time. The cutting depth is controlled by object colors. These can be set within ES Designer without having to export the shapes to a graphics package. See also Cutting appliqu shapes.

To color a vector object

1 Insert a vector image into the design file. See Inserting vector images for details. 2 Ungroup the vector objects as necessary. 3 Select a vector object, right-click and select Properties from the popup menu. The Object Properties > Special > Vector dialog opens.

4 To change the outline color of the selected object, adjust the settings in the Line panel: ! Select an outline style from the Style list. ! Select an outline width from the Width field.
inserted vector image

ES 2006 Chapter 10 Digitizing with Vector Images 240 ! Click Color and select an outline color from the Color dialog. 5 To fill the selected object with a solid color, select the Solid Fill icon and click the Color button to access the Color dialog. 6 To fill the selected object with a pattern fill, select the Pattern Fill icon and adjust the settings: ! Select a pattern style from the dropdown list. ! Select a foreground color via the Front button. ! Make the background transparent as required or choose a color via the Back button.
Select outline style Select outline width Select outline color No fill currently selected Select solid fill Click to choose color Select pattern fill Select pattern style Select colors for pattern foreground and background

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 241 7 To fill the selected object with a bitmape.g. a fabric textureselect the Bitmap Fill icon and click the Load button to insert an image file via the Open dialog. 8 Click Apply. Note To view the changes in the production worksheet, select File > Print Preview. Then click Options and select the Drawings checkbox.

Combining vector curves into complex shapes

The Make Complex Shape feature lets you combine any number of vector curves into a single complex shapei.e. a shape with holes in it. This can then be converted directly to an embroidery object. See also Shaping vector and embroidery objects. Tip You can convert complex vector shapes directly to embroidery using a number of different input methods. See Converting between object types for details. See also Digitizing fills with Point & Stitch.

To combine vector curves in complex shapes

Select bitmap fill Click to load image file

1 Insert a vector image or create one using the drawing tools.

ES 2006 Chapter 10 Digitizing with Vector Images 242 2 Select the objects you want to combine. Tip Ungroup any imported vector object in order to select the required component objects. 3 Select Image > Make Complex Shape or press Shift+H. The selected objects become a single Complex Shape vector object. 4 You can use the Offset Object feature to digitize the complex shape. See Creating outlines and filling holes for details. Tip You can select any number of curves. Different selections create different complex shapes.
complex shape object created and colored Input C applied Run applied Motif Run applied

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 243 Tip By copying the original vector objects, you can also create borders and filled holes. See also Creating outlines and filling holes.

Creating overlapped complex shapes

If vector objects are overlapping, Make Complex Shape selects the largest area and clips off the remaining shape. Depending on the shapes you use, you can create combined or clipped shapes. See also Shaping vector and embroidery objects.

To create overlapped complex shapes

1 Insert a vector image or create one using the drawing tools. 2 Decide how you want to combine the shapes. ! If you want to combine the overlapping shapes, draw a box around them and select all objects. ES 2006 Chapter 10 Digitizing with Vector Images 244 ! If you want to clip the overlapping shapes, simply select them. 3 Select Image > Make Complex Shape. The selected objects become a single vector object. Make Complex Shape selects the largest area and clips off the remaining shape. See also Trimming vector and embroidery objects.

Shaping vector and embroidery objects

When working with overlapping vector or embroidery objects, you can merge, trim or split them using the Shaping tools. All shaped embroidery objects convert to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill. Vector objects remain as vector objects unless combined with embroidery objects. You have the option of preserving the source objects of shaping operations. You also have the option of adding overlaps to objects resulting from Flatten or Divide operations. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 245

Shaping tools summary table

Source Apply Tool Result Description Weld Selected objects are combined into a single object. The resulting object takes the propertiesstitch color and type, etcof the topmost object. Flatten Only areas unique to each selected object are retained. All overlapping areas are removed. Intersect Only areas common to all selected objects are retained. All non-overlapping areas are removed. Exclude Areas where pairs of selected objects overlap are removed, starting from the topmost object. ES 2006 Chapter 10 Digitizing with Vector Images 246 Tip The Make Complex Shape feature lets you combine any number of vector curves into a single complex shape. This can then be converted to an embroidery object. See Combining vector curves into complex shapes for details.

Merging vector and embroidery objects

Front-Back The topmost object is retained, but all of the areas overlapping with other selected objects are removed. Back-Front The bottommost object is retained, but

all of the areas overlapping with other selected objects are removed. Divide The objects are split wherever overlaps occur and all hidden areas are removed. Combine Areas where pairs of selected objects overlap are removed, starting from the topmost object. All resulting objects share the propertiesstitch color and type, etcof the topmost object. Source Apply Tool Result Description Use Weld (Shaping toolbar) to merge overlapping objects into a single flattened object. Use Combine (Shaping toolbar) to merge the properties of overlapping objects and trim overlapping areas. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 247 Merge selected objects using the Weld or Combine tools.

To merge vector and embroidery objects

! Select the vector or embroidery objects to shape. ! Click Weld to merge overlapping objects into a single flattened object.
Tip Make symmetrical shapes by digitizing one half, duplicating and reflecting, then welding the duplicate shapes.
Weld Combine Weld applied (petals only) Weld applied

ES 2006 Chapter 10 Digitizing with Vector Images 248 ! Click Combine to convert embroidery objects into multiple objects sharing the propertiesstitch color and type, etcof the topmost selected object. If drawing tools are used as the input method, Combine converts vector objects to a single complex shape. If overlapping areas comprise an even number, all are removed when Combine is applied. If the overlapping areas comprise an odd number, the topmost area remains. Compare this with the behavior of the Exclude tool. See Trimming vector and embroidery objects for details. Tip Cut objects in half by drawing a line through them and applying Divide. Apply Combine to create closed objects or Weld to fuse two objects.
Combine applied (petals only) Combine applied (petals only) Weld + Run + Combine applied to resulting objects Weld + Run applied to resulting objects Divide applied

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 249

Trimming vector and embroidery objects

Trim selected objects using the Intersect, Exclude, Front-Back or Back-Front tools. Note Use the Remove Overlaps feature to maintain shapes but remove the underlying layer of stitching. See Removing underlying stitching for details.

To trim vector and embroidery objects

! Select the vector or embroidery objects to shape. ! Click Intersect to trim overlapping areas so that only those intersected
by all selected objects remain. Use Intersect (Shaping toolbar) to trim overlapping areas so that only those intersected by all selected objects remain. Use Exclude (Shaping toolbar) to trim overlapping objects and preserve their individual properties. Use Front-Back (Shaping toolbar) to trim overlapping objects so that only non-overlapped areas of the topmost object remain. Use Back-Front (Shaping toolbar) to trim overlapping objects so that only non-overlapped areas of the bottommost object remain.
Intersect used Exclude used Front-Back used Back-Front used Intersect applied

ES 2006 Chapter 10 Digitizing with Vector Images 250 ! Click Exclude to trim overlapping objects and preserve their individual properties. The result is similar to Combine except that object properties are not merged. If overlapping areas comprise an even number, all are removed when Exclude is applied. If the overlapping areas comprise an odd number, the bottommost area remains. Compare this with the behavior of the Combine tool. See Merging vector and embroidery objects for details. Tip Use Exclude to cut holes in Complex Fill objects. ! Use Front-Back to trim overlapping objects so that only non-overlapped areas of the topmost object remain. Tip Use Image > Make Complex Shape or press Shift+H to trim overlapping shapes in unfilled vector objects. ! Use Back-Front to trim overlapping objects so that only non-overlapped areas of the bottommost object remain.
Exclude applied (petals only) Front-Back applied Back-Front applied

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 251

Splitting vector and embroidery objects

To split vector and embroidery objects

Split selected objects using the Flatten or Divide tools. These tools preserve the outlines of the original shapes.

! Select the vector or embroidery objects to shape. ! Click Flatten to trim all overlaps while retaining the original objects.
Use Flatten (Shaping toolbar) to trim all overlaps while retaining the original objects. Use Divide (Shaping toolbar) to split selected objects into separate adjoining objects wherever they intersect with other selected objects.
Flatten Divide Flatten applied

ES 2006 Chapter 10 Digitizing with Vector Images 252 ! Click Divide to split selected objects into separate adjoining objects. All overlapped areas become discrete objects.

Preserving original objects

The Keep Source Objects is a toggle which affects the behavior of all the other shaping tools. While it is active, all selected source objects of all shaping operations are preserved. The resultant objects are inserted after the last source object in the stitching sequence.

To preserve original objects

1 Select the source objects.

2 Click the Keep Source Objects icon. Use Keep Source Objects (Shaping toolbar) to keep the source objects after shaping.
Divide applied (petals only)

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 253 3 Apply a shaping operation to the selected objects. All source objects of the shaping operation are preserved. The resultant objects are inserted after the last source object in the stitching sequence.

Overlapping shaped objects

To overlap shaped objects

The Overlap feature allows you to add overlaps to the objects resulting from Flatten or Divide shaping operations. 1 Select the source objects. 2 Adjust the overlap amount using the Overlap control on the Shaping toolbar. Use Overlap (Shaping toolbar) to adjust the overlaps of objects resulting from Flatten or Divide shaping operations. Use Flatten (Shaping toolbar) to trim all overlaps while retaining the original objects. Use Divide (Shaping toolbar) to split selected objects into separate adjoining objects wherever they intersect with other selected objects. ES 2006 Chapter 10 Digitizing with Vector Images 254 Note The Overlap range is from 0.00 to 5.00 mm with increments of 0.01 mm. The default overlap is 0.50 mm. 3 Click Flatten or Divide to apply shaping to the selected objects. The border of the uppermost objectthe last one in the stitching orderis left unchanged. The border of the next object is extended where it touches the uppermost fragment by the specified amount. The border of a third object in the stitching order is extended where it touches the other two layers of objects. And so on.
Source objects Flatten: 0.00 mm Flatten: 2.00 mm Source objects Flatten: 0.00 mm Flatten: 2.00 mm

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 255

Chapter 11

Digitizing with Bitmap Images

Artwork can be inserted, pasted or scanned into ES Designer for use as digitizing templates or backdrops. Backdrops can help you to: ! Digitize shapes manually. You trace shapes and lines over the artwork using the appropriate input methods. Using a bitmap image in this way is like using an enlargement drawing and digitizer tablet, except that everything is done on-screen. See Digitizing Methods for details. ! Digitize shapes automatically with Point & Stitch. The Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to digitize shapes in bitmap images and vector images automatically without using manual input methods. See Digitizing shapes with Point & Stitch for details. ! Digitize complete images automatically with Smart Design. Smart Design automatically converts bitmap images to fully digitized embroidery. See Automatic Digitizing for details. ! Digitize photographs with Photo Flash. Photo Flash lets you create embroidery designs directly from photographs and other grayscale bitmap images. See Creating embroidery from photographs for details. ES 2006 Chapter 11 Digitizing with Bitmap Images 256

From within ES Designer you can open images in MS Paint, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, or Paint Shop Pro. Images updated in this way are automatically re-imported into ES Designer. Tip Textured backgrounds can also be imported to show what a design will look like on real fabric. Almost any artwork can be used photographs, magazine pictures, clipart images, and even fabric samples. See also Changing background colors and fabrics. This section describes how to choose suitable artwork for digitizing purposes as well as how to scan it into ES Designer and edit it before use. It also describes how to insert and save bitmap images into ES Designer, as well as how to show and hide them as you digitize.

Choosing suitable artwork

For both manual and automatic digitizing purposes, clean images, sometimes referred to as cartoons, work best. Such images have a limited number of solid colors which in turn have well-defined outlines. Ideally, they are: ! well defined, where each shape is made up of pixels of the same color ! clearly blocked, where each shape is a stitchable size, at least 1 sq mm ! saved at a color depth of at least 256 colors (8 bit), or preferably millions of colors (16 bit). (Images are automatically reduced to 256 colors or less when loaded into ES Designer.) ES Designer automatic digitizing techniques Smart Design and Point & Stitch produce best results with images of the type found in clipart libraries or created from scratch in a graphics package. Automatic digitizing can work with images from other sources but they require some preparation. This is because most commonly available images are not made
clean image with well-defined outlines clean image with well-defined color blocks complex image, needs editing to remove background and improve outlines

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 257 up of solid colors. Scanners introduce noise, while graphics packages perform dithering and anti-aliasing to improve image print quality. Automatic digitizing works least effectively with photographic images which may contain many dithered colors and complex forms. With photographs, however, you can pick out shapes that you want to embroider, leaving out unnecessary detail. Alternatively, Photo Flash is available to create embroidery designs from scanned grayscale photographs.

Scanned images

Images scanned from hardcopy drawings or existing embroidery typically contain a lot of introduced noise. While they can be used as input to automatic digitizing, once again, best results are achieved with relatively clean images consisting of solid color blocks. Typically, logos and simple drawings scanned from business cards, letterheads, books, magazines, cards all fall into this category. Noisy images typically need to be prepared by reducing the color count and sharpening the outlines. See Image preparation techniques for details.

Dithered images

Dithering is a software technique which combines existing colors in a checkerboard arrangement of pixels. It is typically used to simulate colors that are missing from an image palette.

image containing a lot of scanner noise dithered color blocks

ES 2006 Chapter 11 Digitizing with Bitmap Images 258 Like noisy images, dithered images need to be color-reduced before use. Be aware, however, that while the software is able to process dithered colors within a defined outline, it does not work so well with non-outlined images. See Image preparation techniques for details.

Anti-aliased images

Anti-aliasing is a software technique similar to dithering which is used to soften hard outlines where color blocks intersect. It produces smoother outlines by blurring the pixels where colors join. Where anti-aliasing is deliberately used to blur outlines, these need to be sharpened before use with automatic digitizing. See Image preparation techniques for details.

Scanning artwork into ES Designer

If you have existing artwork, you can scan it with a TWAIN-compatible scanner using the ES Designer scanning function. It is important to scan your artwork properly if you intend to use one of the automatic digitizing techniques; the scanned image quality will affect the quality of the final embroidered design. Tip There are many graphics packages which can help you improve your scanned images. At one end of the spectrum there is the simple MS Paint program. This comes free with Windows but can handle few formats or color conversions. At the other end, there are professional tools such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Such programs can do almost anything but may be too expensive for occasional use. A compromise is Paint Shop Pro which has many of the features of the high-end tools but at a much lower cost. See also Editing bitmaps in third-party applications.

Preparing artwork for scanning

With embroidery design, less is more. You do not need every detail in an image to create a design. You use the structure of the image rather than the fine details of texture and color. To simplify artwork, you can cover it with tracing paper and draw only the essential shapes and lines which will be filled with stitches. When scanning, take away the original artwork and put white paper behind the tracing paper.
anti-aliased outlines

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 259 Shiny surfaces, such as glossy photographs, may not scan well. Cover them with tracing paper. If the artwork has very light colors, highlight outlines with a fine black felt-tip pen.

Scanning resolution

Most scanners require you to enter scanning resolution information. Resolution determines the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to create an image. Generally speaking, the smaller the source image and/or more detail it contains, the higher the resolution needs to be. Use the following table as a guide.

Color mode

Most scanners also require you to enter color mode information. First decide whether your image is line art (black and white drawing), sketch, color picture, or black and white or color photograph, then choose an appropriate mode. Black and white mode produces the smallest files. Color photograph and grayscale modes generate 256 color images and produce similar sized files. RGB, True Color or millions of colors modes generate 16.7 million colors and produce the biggest files. Use the table below to decide which

mode is suitable for use with your image. Type of artwork Scanning resolution Business cards, letter heads 150 - 300 dpi Hand sketches 150 - 300 dpi Photos and images 150 - 300 dpi Commercial art, line drawing 72 - 150 dpi Source image Example Description Recommended color mode * No. of colors in scanned image Line art Two colors usually black and white Black/white drawing Line art 22 * Different scanning software uses different terms for the same mode. ES 2006 Chapter 11 Digitizing with Bitmap Images 260

Scanning tips ! Do not scan line art images in grayscale mode; grayscale scanning

produces fuzzy edges. ! Scan color images in RGB mode (millions of colors) rather than 256 color mode. You may not notice any difference on screen. In fact the 256 color image may look better than the RGB image. However, ES Designer Drawing/sketch Sketch or drawing with shades of gray Grayscale Line art 256 2 Black & white photograph Shades of gray Black/white photo Grayscale 256 256 Color photograph Many colors Color RGB Color photo 16 million 256 Color picture Two colors or more Color RGB Millions of colors Color drawing 16 million 16 million 2 - 256 Source image Example Description Recommended color mode * No. of colors in scanned image * Different scanning software uses different terms for the same mode. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 261 converts all images to 256 colors or less upon loading. It uses the extra information to produce a better image than if it was originally scanned at 256 colors. ! Do not scan color images in CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black) mode as this is only used for images that will be printed; the colors may

be different from RGB colors. ! If the image needs to be rotated, do so while scanning. Rotating afterwards may distort the image.

Sharpening

Some scanning software lets you apply what is called sharpening as you scan. Sharpening compensates for the slight blurring in a scanned image by looking for any differences between colors in the image. Sharpening accentuates these differences which makes the image edges more defined. It does not increase the image details; it just makes them more obvious. In general, use sharpening with images that have well-defined outlines. Do not use it with non-outlined images.

Scanning bitmap images

scanned in 256 color mode scanned in RGB color mode (millions of colors)

Use Scan (File menu) to scan an image into ES Designer.

scanned with sharpening scanned without sharpening

ES 2006 Chapter 11 Digitizing with Bitmap Images 262 You can scan images directly into ES Designer for use as digitizing backdrops. You can also scan in your own textured background to see what a design will look like on real fabric. Fabrics can be scanned to provide full, centered, backgrounds to your design, or as small samples which can be tiled to fill the screen. See also Changing background colors and fabrics. The scanning feature in ES Designer allows you to use most TWAIN-compatible scanners. You can use any scanning software provided that it can save the image in one of the compatible formats.

To scan bitmap images

1 Set up your scanner. See Setting up scanners for details. 2 Prepare the artwork for scanning. See Preparing artwork for scanning for details. 3 Create a new file or open a design you want to insert the image into. 4 Select File > Scan. Your scanning program will open. 5 Choose a scanning mode and resolution. See Scanning resolution and Color mode for details. Tip If you are scanning a fabric background, set the scan to 256 colors, 100% and 72 dpi (dots per inch). These settings will give a small file which will display well on your screen without taking up too much disk space or memory. 6 Preview the image in the scanning program. 7 Select the area to be scanned and scan the image. 8 Save the scanned image in a compatible format image file to the Design folder. 9 Scan the artwork. Note Scanned images can be saved separately from the design file. See Saving bitmap images as separate files for details.

Inserting and saving bitmap images

Bitmap images can be inserted, pasted or scanned into ES Designer for use as digitizing backdrops. For both manual and automatic digitizing purposes, clean images, sometimes referred to as cartoons, work best. Scanners introduce noise, while graphics packages perform dithering and ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 263 anti-aliasing to improve image print quality. See also Image preparation techniques.

Inserting bitmap images

You can insert bitmap images of various formats for use as digitizing backdrops. See Supported image formats for details. Note You can also insert vector image files. See Inserting vector images for details.

To insert bitmap images

1 Select Image > Insert File. The Open dialog opens. 2 Select a folder from the Look In list. Use Insert File (Image menu) to insert an image for use as a backdrop.
partially digitized bitmap original bitmap Select folder Select required format Select file

ES 2006 Chapter 11 Digitizing with Bitmap Images 264 3 Select a file type from the Files of Type list (e.g. BMP). 4 Select the file you want to insert. Tip Select the Preview checkbox to preview the selected file. 5 Click Open.

Pasting bitmap images

You can insert a bitmap image into ES Designer by copying it from another embroidery design or graphics application, and pasting it directly into your design.

To paste bitmap images

1 Select the image you want to copy and paste. 2 Copy it to the Windows clipboard. 3 Create a new file in ES Designer or open the design file into which you want to insert the image. 4 Select Edit > Paste Vector > As Bitmap. The image is pasted into the design.

Saving bitmap images as separate files

When you save a design containing a backdrop, a reference to the image file is saved together with information on its position in the design. When you re-open the design, the image file is re-inserted. If you scale or transform a backdrop, you need to save it as a separate file or the changes will be lost. Note Images that are scanned from within ES Designer must be saved this way or will be lost when the design is closed.

To save bitmap images as separate files

1 Select the backdrop. 2 Select File > Save Bitmap As. Save Image As dialog opens. Use Paste Vector > As Bitmap (Edit menu) to insert an image for use as a backdrop. Use Save Bitmap As (File menu) to save an image as a separate file. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 265 3 In the Save In field, select a folder, then select a format from the Files of Type list. 4 Enter a new file name and click Save. When you save the design, the reference is updated to use the new image file.

Editing bitmap images

ES Designer allows you to crop bitmap images prior to use. From within ES Designer you can also open images directly in third-party graphics packages. Images updated in this way are automatically re-imported into ES Designer. Within ES Designer you can set general properties such as size and position. You can also scale and transform bitmap images although it may be best to do this during scanning. Scaling after scanning can distort the image. However, ES Designer allows you to smooth an image before and

after scaling or transforming, making it easy to digitize. See also Arranging and Transforming Objects. Tip If you scale or transform a backdrop, you need to save it as a separate file or the changes will be lost. See Saving bitmap images as separate files for details.

Cropping images for digitizing

Before using bitmap images for design purposes, crop them to remove unnecessary detail and save processing time. Use Crop Bitmap (Image menu) to crop a rectangular image. Use Crop Bitmap with Polygon (Image menu) to crop a free form image. ES 2006 Chapter 11 Digitizing with Bitmap Images 266

To crop images for digitizing

1 Select the image. See also Inserting bitmap images. 2 Select a cropping tool. ! Select Image > Crop Bitmap to crop the image in rectangular form. Click-and-drag a cropping rectangle around the part of the image you require. ! Select Image > Crop Bitmap With Polygon to crop the image in free form. Mark points to create a cropping shape around the part of the image you require and press Enter. Tip Use the prompt line to guide you.
Crop bitmap Crop bitmap with polygon

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 267 ES Designer crops the area inside the cropping rectangle or polygon selection. This process may take some time.

Editing bitmaps in third-party applications

Sometimes you need to edit bitmap images directly in a third-party graphics package. You would normally do this in order to eliminate backgrounds, flood-fill solid areas with color, add or reinforce outlines, or close gaps. From within ES Designer you can open images directly in MS Paint, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, or Paint Shop Pro. Images updated in this way are automatically re-imported into ES Designer.

To edit bitmaps in a third-party application

1 Select the image. See also Inserting bitmap images. 2 Select Image > Edit Bitmap Using and select a graphics package. The image opens in the graphics package. Use Edit Bitmap Using (Image menu) to edit images in a graphics package.
Bitmap cropped in rectangular form Bitmap cropped along marked points background may be cleaned and eyes added

ES 2006 Chapter 11 Digitizing with Bitmap Images 268 3 Edit the image and save. Note If you return to ES Designer before closing the image in the graphics package, it appears in ES Designer overlaid with stripes. Return to the graphics package and select either File > Close or File > Exit & Return <Filename>. In ES Designer, the stripes will disappear.

Smoothing bitmap images

When you scale or transform backdrops, the quality is sometimes reducede.g. thin straight lines become jagged or distorted. By smoothing an image before and after scaling and transforming, you can preserve its quality, making it easy to digitize.

To smooth a bitmap image

1 Select the image and double-click. See also Inserting bitmap images.

background cleaned eyes added file still open in the graphics package

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 269 The Object Properties > Special dialog opens. 2 Select the required smoothing option, depending on whether the majority of lines in the image are light or dark. ! None: turned off. ! Dark lines: dark lines on the image are smoothed. ! Light lines: light lines on the image are smoothed. 3 If required, set the scaling or transforming options in the General tab. You can scale and transform objects both here and on-screen. 4 Click Apply. Note Scaling and transforming takes longer than usual when smoothing is applied.
Select required smoothing option no smoothing light lines smoothed dark lines smoothed

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 270

Chapter 12

Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing

ES Designer supports the automatic and semi-automatic digitizing of both bitmap images and vector images. The quality of the resulting designs greatly depends on the type and quality of the original artwork. Generally speaking, vector images preserve the picture quality when resized, whereas bitmap images cause problems of pixilation and image degradation when enlarged or scaled down. In order to make bitmap images more suitable for automatic digitizing, ES Designer provides image processing capabilities and links to graphics packages. This section describes how to prepare images for automatic digitizing. It explains how to crop images for digitizing as well as how to prepare both outlined and non-outlined images.

Image preparation techniques

Before applying automatic digitizing, you frequently need to improve or clean up artwork. To work effectively, both Smart Design and Point & Stitch require solid color images as input. You can improve artwork both with bitmap editing tools in graphics packages and/or the image processing tools provided in ES Designer. In fact, the software will not let you apply Smart Design until the image has been suitably processed. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 271

Outlined vs non-outlined images

Before preparing your image you need to know what type you are using. For the purposes of automatic digitizing, there are two categoriesoutlined and non-outlined. Outlined images ideally have a solid black outline around each colored area. Non-outlined images ideally consist of solid areas of color. Outlined and non-outlined images require different methods of preparation.

Image clean up

In practice, cleaning up scanned images may involve any one or a combination of the following techniques: ! reducing the number of colors ! adding or emphasizing outlines

removing noise, dithering or anti-aliasing eliminating unnecessary detail cropping sections eliminating backgrounds. See also Choosing suitable artwork.

! ! ! !

Color reduction

Sometimes an image looks clean but extra colors have been introduced during scanning or in a graphics package. Color reduction means reducing the actual number of image colors in order to eliminate unnecessary detail and reduce each block to a single color. Color reduction also cleans the image, removing noise and anti-aliasing if present. This in turn helps minimize the number of trims and color changes required in the resulting embroidery design. Reduce colors in a non-outlined image using the Reduce Colors tool and in an outlined image using the Sharpen Edges tool. Color reduction should only be applied if the loss of detail does not affect the image shapes. Before color reduction, the colored areas in the image below
image with outlines image without outlines

ES 2006 Chapter 12 Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing 272 include many colors. After reduction, each area is reduced to a single color. The detail is preserved. If you are scanning images, make sure you scan them correctly for best results. See Scanning artwork into ES Designer for details. Be aware that the Reduce Colors tool is good at removing noise and anti-aliasing but not so good at processing dithering in non-outlined images. By contrast, the Sharpen Edges tool is excellent at processing dithered
image before color reduction image after color reduction image scanned in RGB color mode, then colors reduced to 6 image scanned in 256 color mode, then colors reduced to 6

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 273 colors as it averages all pixels within a defined outline. See also Choosing suitable artwork.

Outline sharpening

Outline sharpening means more clearly defining the outlines bordering distinct color blocks or shapes in the artwork. These may have been indistinct in the original or made so by the scanning process. Outline sharpening is important for automatic digitizing because it makes it easier for the software to identify the distinct areas which become embroidery objects in the resulting design. Note Outline sharpening only works on images with black or dark outlines. Some images have solid outlines but they may be indistinct or incomplete. These need to be rectified with the ES Designer image preparation tools or a graphics package. See Editing bitmaps in third-party applications for details.
Sharpen Outline tool used with outlined imagedithered color blocks cleaned, edges sharp Reduce Colors tool used with non-outlined imagedithered color blocks not completely cleaned, edges fuzzy image before outline sharpening image after outline sharpening

ES 2006 Chapter 12 Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing 274

Noise filtering

Noise filtering means restoring the solid color blocks of the original artwork in scanned images. This is achieved by merging different shades into one

solid color. Noise filtering is important for automatic digitizing because it makes it easier for the software to identify solid color blocks which become embroidery objects in the resulting design. It also cleans up blurred or mottled areas of color.

Image preparation tools

image before noise filtering, mottled color image after noise filtering, single colors

Use the artwork preparation tools to prepare images for automatic digitizing. Your choice of tool depends on the artwork. There are three tools:

Tool Purpose Capabilities Edit Image Link to a graphics packagee.g. Paint Shop Profor editing an image outside ES Designer. Lets you crop, sharpen, re-color, add outlines, remove noise from an image. Reduce Colors Prepare any non-outlined image. Lets you reduce colors to a specified number. It automatically: reduces each block to a single color removes anti-aliasing, noise and dithering removes colors smaller than specified area. Sharpen Edges Prepare outlined images. Lets you adjust lightness or darkness of outlines. It automatically: blends each outlined block into a single color removes anti-aliasing, noise and dithering sharpens outlines. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 275 Note Even if your artwork looks ready to stitch when inserted into the software, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. The software will not let you apply automatic digitizing techniques without preliminary image-processing.

Using image preparation tools

It is important to use the correct preparation tools for your artwork. The example below shows an image with indistinct outlines. If the Sharpen Edges tool is used, outlines can be made darker and more distinct, improving stitching. By contrast, using the Reduce Colors tool before stitching produces a poorly stitched design.
Reduce Colors usedoutlines not sharpened, poor stitching image with indistinct outlines image with solid outlines Sharpen Edges usedimproved stitching

ES 2006 Chapter 12 Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing 276 Before using the Sharpen Edges tool, make sure that the image contains solid outlines. If there are gaps, separate color areas will be blended into one. If you need to add outlines, close gaps, or reinforce an outline, you may need to draw it in by hand before scanning. Or you might add it in a graphics package after scanning. See Editing bitmaps in third-party applications for details.

Tip Try darkening the outlines using the Outline Appearance slider. See Preparing outlined images for details.

Image preparation summary

image partially outlined, some image colors blended areas not closed Sharpen Edges used image outline completed in graphics package outlines sharpened Sharpen Edges used

Action Outlined image Non-outlined image Photograph Scan artwork Scan in RGB mode Use sharpening Scan in RGB mode No sharpening Scan in RGB mode Scan line vector Scan in two color mode - Touching up in graphics package Crop Add or edit outlines Edit colors Remove noise Crop Edit image shapes Edit colors Remove noise Crop Convert to grayscale Remove background Lighten or darken Adjust contrast ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 277

Preparing non-outlined images

Use the Reduce Colors tool to prepare non-outlined images for automatic digitizing. The tool automatically reduces color blocks in bitmap images to a single color, removing anti-aliasing and noise. You can let the software reduce the color count automatically or specify a precise number. The latter is useful if you want to match design colors to an exact number of thread colors. Tip Depending on the quality of the scanned image, you may need to touch it up manually before processing in ES Designer. You would normally do this in order to eliminate backgrounds, or flood-fill solid areas with color. See Editing bitmaps in third-party applications for details.

To prepare non-outlined images

1 Select Image > Insert File to load an image. Use Sharpen Edges tool in ES Designer Sharpen outlines and remove noise -Use Reduce Colors tool in ES Designer - Reduce colors and remove noise Digitize Manual Point & Stitch Smart Design

 Manual Point & Stitch Smart Design Photo Flash Use Reduce Colors (Image toolbar) to reduce the number of colors and remove image noise in non-outlined images. Action Outlined image Non-outlined image Photograph ES 2006 Chapter 12 Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing 278 2 Select the image. 3 Click the Reduce Colors icon. The Reduce Colors dialog opens. The image appears in the preview panel. The Color Count field shows the number of image colors. 4 Click Zoom In to view the image more closely. 5 Set the color reduction options you require:
image scanned in RGB color modeconverted to 256 colors upon loading Set color reduction options Zoom in and out of image preview Set noise filtering options Save Image after processing

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 279 ! Select the By Number option to enter the number you require. ES Designer suggests a number and shows how the image will look. You can accept this number or change it. ! Select the Automatic Selection option if you want the software to reduce the color count automatically. The slider increases or decreases the effectmoving the slider towards 100% gives you more colors, moving the other way gives you fewer. 6 Check how many colors are in the image. This is indicated by Color Count. If there appear to be too many, the image probably contains noise. 7 Set the noise filtering options you require. ! Minimum color area: This defines the smallest area recognized in the conversion. The default is 0.5 by 0.5 square mm (about eight pixels). Increase this value if your image has a lot of out-of-color pixels. The minimum color area should not exceed 1/16 of the total area.
reduced to 13 colors reduced to 6 colors reduced to 3 colors

ES 2006 Chapter 12 Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing 280 ! Minimum line length: This defines the smallest line length recognized as an object. The default is 2 mm. The minimum line length should not exceed 25% of the smallest dimension. 8 Click Save Image As to save changes. 9 Click OK to apply the changes.

Preparing outlined images

Use the Sharpen Edges tool to prepare outlined images for automatic digitizing. The tool automatically sharpens outlines and reduces noise. Areas enclosed by a black outline are reduced to a single color. Outline sharpening makes it easier for the software to recognize distinct areas in the artwork. These areas then become the embroidery objects of the finished design. Use it particularly if the outlines are blurry, fuzzy or indistinct. Tip Depending on the quality of the scanned image, you may need to touch it up manually before processing in ES Designer. You would normally do this

in order to eliminate backgrounds, flood-fill solid areas with color, add or reinforce outlines, or close gaps. See Editing bitmaps in third-party applications for details.

To prepare outlined images

Min. color area: 0.5 sq mm Min. line length: 2 mm Min. Color area: 1 sq mm Min. line length: 5 mm Min. color area: 5 sq mm Min. line length: 9 mm

1 Select Image > Insert File to load an image.

Use Sharpen Edges (Image toolbar) to sharpen outlines and reduce noise in outlined images. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 281 2 Select the image. 3 Click the Sharpen Edges icon. The Sharpen Outlines dialog opens. The image appears in the preview panel. The Color Count field shows the number of image colors. 4 Click Zoom In to view the image more closely. 5 Set the outline contrast tolerance by dragging the slider control.
zoomed area Set outline appearance Click to see colored areas Zoom in and out of image preview Save image after processing

ES 2006 Chapter 12 Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing 282 This produces a black and white preview of the detected outlines. 6 Set the Noise reduction options you require. ! Minimum color area: This defines the smallest area recognized in the conversion. The default is 0.5 by 0.5 square mm (about eight pixels). Increase this value if your image has a lot of out-of-color pixels. The minimum color area should not exceed 1/16 of the total area. ! Minimum line length: This defines the smallest line length recognized as an object. The default is 2 mm. The minimum line length should not exceed 25% of the smallest dimension. Tip Move the slider to the right until there is too much black, then move it slowly back to the left. Stop when the image shows all the outlines you need. 7 Click Show Color Areas to see the updated image.
Set outline appearance Outlines not sharpened Slider control moved to left Slider control moved to right

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 283 8 Click Save Image As to save changes. 9 Click OK to apply the changes.
Outlines sharpened and noise reduced

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 284

Chapter 13

Automatic Digitizing
ES Designer provides a variety of complementary tools and techniques for automatically digitizing suitably prepared artwork. ! The Auto Trace feature lets you convert scanned artwork to vector

objects. You can then convert these to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods. ! The Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to digitize shapes in bitmap images automatically without using manual input methods. ! The Smart Design feature automatic digitizing is intended for people working at all levels of the embroidery industry. Smart Design automatically converts bitmap images to fully digitized embroidery. ! Photo Flash lets you create embroidery designs directly from photographs and other grayscale bitmap images. The effect resembles the output of a line printer. This section describes how to automatically convert bitmap images to embroidery objects and complete designs, as well as how to create embroidery from grayscale images.

Converting bitmaps to outlines with Auto Trace

0

Vector image Converted to Complex Fill Converted to Run Converted to Input C

Use Auto Trace (Image toolbar) to convert artwork to vector objects for conversion to embroidery objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 285 Use Auto Trace to create vector outlines from bitmap images. You can then convert these to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods. Auto Trace can find holes in shapesboth inside and outside boundaries are detected. See also Converting vector objects to embroidery. Note Even if your artwork looks ready to stitch when inserted into the software, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details.

To convert a bitmap to outlines with Auto Trace

1 Scan or insert a bitmap image. See Scanning artwork into ES Designer or Inserting bitmap images for details. 2 Select the image and process it. See Image preparation techniques for details. 3 Click the Auto Trace icon. ES Designer will prompt you to click an image to select a single-colored area. 4 Click the shape you want to digitize. 5 Press Enter. The vector object is created and selected. 6 Select an input method then follow the prompts to enter start, end and angle. At this point you can convert the created vector object directly into an embroidery object. See also Converting vector objects to embroidery.

Digitizing shapes with Point & Stitch

Click object Press Enter Select input method

Use Turning Satin (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize narrow column shapes. ES 2006 Chapter 13 Automatic Digitizing 286 The Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to digitize shapes in bitmap images automatically without using manual input methods. These tools are useful for quickly creating embroidery objects from scanned images that do not require particular artistic effects or embroidery-specific knowledge. This in turn frees you to spend more time on the artistic or inherently complicated areas of your designs. Note If you use a bitmap image as input, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. The software will not let you apply automatic digitizing techniques without preliminary image-processing. See Preparing Images for

Automatic Digitizing for details.

Matching palette colors to an image

Use the Match to Palette tool to find the nearest match between a selected image color block and a palette color. If Match to Palette is not selected, the color block is digitized in the current palette color. Use Tatami Fill (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize large areas, preserving any holes. Use Tatami Fill without Holes (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize large areas, ignoring any holes. Use Pickout Run (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize centerlines. Use Outline Run (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize boundaries of shapes. Use Match to Palette (Point & Stitch toolbar) to find the nearest match between the selected image color and the color palette.
Bitmap image Embroidery design digitized with Point & Stitch tools

Use Match to Palette (Point & Stitch toolbar) to find the nearest match between the selected image color and the color palette. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 287 Note If your artwork contains colors which are very different to those in the colorway, you can use the Match Bitmap Color function to first add those colors. See Matching image colors to threads for details.

To match palette colors to an image

1 Select the artwork: ! Scan or insert a bitmap image. See Scanning artwork into ES Designer or Inserting bitmap images for details. ! Insert or create a vector image. See Inserting vector images or Creating vector outlines for details. Note If you use a bitmap image as input, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details. 2 Click the Match to Palette icon. 3 Select a Point & Stitch digitizing method. 4 Click the shape you want to digitize. The object is digitized in the nearest palette color. Note If Match to Palette is not selected, the object is digitized in the current palette color.

Digitizing fills with Point & Stitch

Matched t Original image o palette Digitized in current color

Use Turning Satin (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize narrow column shapes. ES 2006 Chapter 13 Automatic Digitizing 288 Point & Stitch can be used to create closed Tatami fill objects, as well as objects with turning Satin fills. Use Tatami Fill to digitize large areas in your artwork with Tatami stitch, preserving any holes within them. If you are using a vector image, it must include a fill color. If you want holes ignored, use the Tatami Fill without Holes tool. Use Turning Satin to digitize narrow column shapes with Satin stitch. Current properties are applied. You can modify these as required before or after using the tools.

To digitize fills with Point & Stitch

1 Select the artwork: ! Scan or insert a bitmap image. See Scanning artwork into ES Designer or Inserting bitmap images for details. ! Insert or create a vector image. See Inserting vector images or Creating vector outlines for details. Note If you are using a bitmap image as input, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details. 2 Select a thread color from the color toolbar. Alternatively, use the Match to Palette tool to find the nearest matching

thread color. See Matching palette colors to an image for details. 3 Select the required Point & Stitch fill input method. 4 Click the shape you want to digitize. Use Tatami Fill (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize large areas, preserving any holes. Use Tatami Fill without Holes (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize large areas, ignoring any holes. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 289 The shape is immediately filled with stitches. Note Stitches are generated according to current stitch settings. Jumps may occur if stitch length exceeds the default setting. These can be modified

Digitizing outlines with Point & Stitch

Use Point & Stitch to digitize boundaries and details with run stitching. Use Pickout Run to digitize centerlines in your artwork with run stitches. Use Outline Run to digitize boundaries of shapes with run stitching. Current properties are applied. You can modify these as required before or after using the tools.

To digitize outlines with Point & Stitch

1 Select the artwork: ! Scan or insert a bitmap image. See Scanning artwork into ES Designer or Inserting bitmap images for details. ! Insert or create a vector image. See Inserting vector images or Creating vector outlines for details.
Tatami Fillhole in apple ignored Original artwork Turning Satinleaf and stem filled with turning stitches Tatami Fill without Holeshole in apple preserved

Use Pickout Run (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize centerlines. Use Outline Run (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize boundaries of shapes. ES 2006 Chapter 13 Automatic Digitizing 290 Note If you are using a bitmap image as input, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details. 2 Select a thread color from the color toolbar. Alternatively, use the Match to Palette tool to find the nearest matching thread color. See Matching palette colors to an image for details. 3 Select the required Point & Stitch outline input method. 4 Click the centerline or outline you want to digitize. The line is traced with Run stitches. Note Stitches are generated according to current stitch settings. These can be modified.

Digitizing designs with Smart Design

Smart Design automatically converts bitmap images to fully digitized embroidery. With Smart Design, novice embroiderers can create simple designs quickly and easily. Similarly, experienced embroiderers can improve productivity when working with simple designs. Sales people can estimate stitches quickly and accurately for price quotations. An extension of Point & Stitch technology, Smart Design recognizes shapes in bitmap images and makes decisions about the most suitable input methods and stitch types to use. It also determines the stitching sequence based on closest join. Artwork is effectively batch processed to create the many embroidery objects that make up a design. Smart Design gives you some control over how an image is interpreted during conversion. You can choose to omit selected colors as well as select

colors for stitching in front or behind. There are options to add image colors to the color palette, or match them to the existing palette. You can choose to ignore lines or shapes under a specified width. Once created, you can
Pickout lines digitized Outlines digitized

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 291 always edit the final result using the available digitizing techniques. See also Digitizing Methods. Note Even if your artwork looks ready to stitch when inserted into the software, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. The software will not let you apply automatic digitizing techniques without preliminary image-processing. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details.

Creating embroidery designs with Smart Design

In essence, creating an embroidery design with Smart Design is simply a matter of selecting the image you want to convert, and clicking the Smart Design tool. There are, however, many settings you can adjust to optimize the conversion process for a particular image. Note Only one image may be selected at a time. The command is disabled if the selection contains anything other than an image. The display mode of the imagefor example, dimmedwill not affect the embroidery object colors.

To create embroidery designs with Smart Design

1 Scan or load an image. See Scanning artwork into ES Designer for details. 2 Select the image and process it. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details. Use Smart Design (Image toolbar) to create embroidery designs directly from imported images. ES 2006 Chapter 13 Automatic Digitizing 292 3 Select the image and click the Smart Design icon. The Smart Design dialog opens. Image colors are distributed among the Omit, Fill, and Details fields depending on how the software interprets the source image. Note Image information is given in the top panel, including width and height values as well as the number of image colors. 4 Click-and-drag any colors you want to omit from automatic stitch processing into the Omit column. 5 Similarly, click-and-drag or leave any colors you want to be treated as filled areas in the Fill column. Note You can adjust stitching styles and other settings for fill colors. See Adjusting fill color settings for details.
Click-and-drag colors between fields Select color conversion method white background color omitted all colors omitted except black fill color pink only, the rest omitted fill colors pink and yellow, the rest omitted

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 293 6 Click-and-drag any colors you want to be treated as detailsi.e. any outlines, borders or small areas you want to stitch out lastinto the Details column. Note You can adjust stitching styles for detail colors. See Adjusting detail colors settings for details. 7 Select a Thread Colors conversion method for image processing. ! By default, image colors are matched to the nearest thread colors in the current colorway. ! Select the Add Colors to Palette option to add image colors to the palette. 8 Click OK. Smart Design converts the artwork to embroidery objects and generates stitches. Note Click Save to save the dialog settings to the template.

Adjusting detail colors settings

detail color black only detail color green only image colors matched to nearest thread colors image colors added to palette

Smart Design lets you adjust object recognition settings for the colors of anything in the design you identify as a detail. A detail may be an outline,

ES 2006 Chapter 13 Automatic Digitizing 294 a border, a pickout run, or a small area of the design you want to be stitched out last. Tip If an image color is both a fill and a detail, you can either recolor the fill color in a graphics package, or omit the color for later editing.

To adjust detail colors settings

1 Select a processed image and click the Smart Design icon. The Smart Design dialog opens. 2 Click-and-drag any colors you want to be treated as detailsi.e. any outlines, borders or small areas you want to stitch out lastinto the Details column. See Creating embroidery designs with Smart Design for details. 3 Select a stitching style for colors in the Details column. ! Double Run: most suited for use with thin lines. ! Input C: suited for use with thicker lines of constant width. ! Satin: most suited for use with thicker lines or small shapes of varying width. 4 Click OK. Smart Design converts the artwork to embroidery objects and generates stitches.

Adjusting fill color settings

To adjust fill color settings
Choose a suitable line thickness for details Details: black outlines with Double Run Details: black outlines with Satin

Smart Design lets you adjust object recognition settings for fill colors, giving you control over stitch types, stitch angles, and sequencing settings. 1 Select a processed image and click the Smart Design icon.

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 295 The Smart Design dialog opens.

2 Click-and-drag or leave any colors you want to be treated as filled areas in the Fill field. See Creating embroidery designs with Smart Design for details. 3 Click Values. The Automatic Stitching Values dialog opens. 4 Select the Detect lines in objects checkbox if you want areas defined up to maximum width set to be interpreted as lines. The sample below, for example, shows narrow linear shapes being interpreted as Satin Input C rather than Tatami Complex Fill objects. 5 Adjust the maximum width for each object type. These rows determine the way in which graphic elements of specified thicknesses are to be interpreted.
Adjust fill color settings Adjust settings for automatic object sequencing Adjust max. widths for each object type Adjust settings for recognition of Complex Fill objects Select style to apply to each object type Detect Lines selected, Satin usedfills stitched in Tatami, lines in Satin Original image Detect Lines not selected, default values usedmost objects stitched in Tatami Yellow and green in Details with Satinlarger areas also stitched in Satin

ES 2006 Chapter 13 Automatic Digitizing 296 Note A value entered in the Maximum Width field becomes the Minimum Width value for the next graphic element. 6 Select a style to apply to each objecte.g. Run , Satin, Tatami, etc. 7 Adjust settings for the recognition of Complex Fill objects in the Object Options panel. 8 Adjust settings for automatic object sequencing in the Object Sequence panel. See Adjusting object sequencing settings for details. 9 Click OK. Smart Design converts the artwork to embroidery objects and generates stitches.

Adjusting object sequencing settings

Tatami styles selected Satin styles selected with Auto Split stitch angle 90 stitch angle 0

Smart Design lets you adjust settings for the automatic object sequencing of recognized embroidery objects.

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 297

To adjust object sequencing settings

1 From the Smart Design dialog, access the Automatic Stitching Values dialog. See Adjusting fill color settings for details. 2 Enter the length of the maximum travel run connector in the Maximum travel path length field. You may enter a large value to avoid trims that

may cause production problems. 3 Enter the minimum width of foreground objects to overlap background objects in the Stitch under objects below width field. 4 Enter the minimum stitch length you want to keep in the Filter small objects below width field. See Removing small stitches automatically for details. 5 Click OK. Smart Design converts the artwork to embroidery objects and generates stitches.

Creating embroidery from photographs

Adjust settings for automatic object sequencing original image below width: 1.5 mm below width: 4.0 mm

Use Photo Flash to create embroidery from photographs or other images, color or grayscale. Grayscale images are made up of different shades of gray

Use Photo Flash (Insert menu) to create embroidery designs directly from photographs. ES 2006 Chapter 13 Automatic Digitizing 298 pixels. Color images are automatically converted to grayscale when you apply Photo Flash. Photo Flash designs consist of rows of stitches of varying spacing settings. The effect resembles the output of a line printer. Adjust the angle of the rows and/or the stitches themselves. Tip For best results, use images with well-defined subjects or constantly varying shades.

To create embroidery from photographs

1 Insert the bitmap image in your design and scale it to the required size. See Inserting bitmap images for details. 2 With the bitmap still selected, select Insert > Photo Flash. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 299 The Object Properties > Special > Photo Flash dialog opens. 3 In the Resolution panel, select a resolution optionCoarse, Medium, or Fine. Note The coarser the resolution the more spacing between rows.
Select resolution option Select background option Enter angle fine resolution medium resolution coarse resolution

ES 2006 Chapter 13 Automatic Digitizing 300 4 In the Row panel, enter a new angle as required. 5 In the Background panel, select a background option: ! Light: applies the maximum row width value to the lightest part of the image. ! Dark: applies the maximum row width to the darkest part of the image. Tip The option you select usually depends on whether the fabric is light or dark. The Dark option produces a negative of the image.
Row Angle: 0o Row Angle: 90o Light background Dark background

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 301 6 Select the Fills tab and adjust the stitch spacing and skew angle as required. The Skew Angle determines the angle of the stitches. See Adjusting Satin stitch spacing for details. 7 Click Apply. You are prompted to select the part of the image you want to convert. 8 Click-and-drag a cropping rectangle around the part of the image you

require. ES Designer generates stitches for the area within the cropping rectangle. This process may take some time. Tip Use TrueView for a more accurate representation of the stitching.
Adjust stitch values Skew Angle: 0o Skew Angle: 45o

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 302

PART IV MODIFYING
Combining and resequencing objects

DESIGNS

After digitzing a design, you can modify it as a whole, edit individual objects or even individual stitches. This section describes how to combine objects and designs by copying and pasting, duplicating, and inserting techniques. It also describes how to resequence objects by cut and paste, by color, with the Color-Object List, and by number. Using Branching to sequence objects is also explained. See Combining objects and designs for details.

Arranging and transforming objects

This section describes how to position objects, how to lock and group, align and space objects, as well as how to scale, rotate, skew, and mirror objects. See Arranging and Transforming Objects for details.

Converting and reshaping objects

This section describes how to reshape objects with control points, reshape circle, star and ring objects. It also describes how to convert object types, adjust stitch angles, change entry and exit points, as well as keep or omit the last stitch. See Converting and Reshaping Objects for details. ES 2006 Modifying Designs 303

Editing stitches and machine functions

This section deals with selecting and editing stitches, and converting selected stitches to objects. It also includes instructions for inserting, checking, editing and clearing manually-inserted functions. It also describes how to edit stitches and functions using the Stitch List. See Editing Stitches and Machine Functions for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 304

Chapter 14

Combining and Resequencing Objects

ES Designer provides techniques for combining and resequencing objects. You can add to designs by duplicating and copying objects. Combine designs. Split objects into smaller ones and remove overlaps between objects. The stitching sequence naturally occurs in the order in which the design was digitized. The Color-Object List displays a sequential list of objects grouped by object and color. It provides an easy way to group, cut, copy and paste, and resequence selected objects and color blocks. Group objects together to apply a change to them all at once. Better still, apply Branching to join like-objects to form a single branched object. Objects are resequenced, connectors minimized, component objects

grouped, and stitches regenerated. Apply an underlay to all. This section describes how to combine objects and designs by copying and pasting, duplicating, and inserting techniques. It also describes how to resequence objects by cut-and-paste, by color, with the Color-Object List, and by number. Using Branching to sequence objects is also explained. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 305

Combining objects and designs

You can copy or cut a design or design objects to the Windows clipboard for temporary storage. These can then be pasted any number of times to the same or another design until replaced on the clipboard. You can also cut, copy and paste lettering objects within and between designs.

Copying and pasting objects

You can copy objects to create multiple, identical objects, or to insert objects from other designs. Tip ES Designer lets you click-and-drag objects between designs. To copy, hold down the Ctrl key as you click-and-drag the object. To temporarily deactivate Auto Scroll, hold down the Shift key. Note Cut-and-paste changes the stitching sequence in the design. See Resequencing objects with cut-and-paste for details.

To copy and paste objects

1 Select the object (or objects) to copy. 2 Click the Copy icon. The selected object is copied to the clipboard. 3 Select a color palette option as required. See Setting inserted embroidery file options for details. Click Copy (Standard toolbar) to copy selected objects to the clipboard. Click Paste (Standard toolbar) to paste copied objects in the design.
Petals copied and pasted

ES 2006 Chapter 14 Combining and Resequencing Objects 306 By default, when you insert a design, colors are matched to the current color palette. 4 Travel to the position in the stitching sequence at which you want to paste the object. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details. Alternatively, use the Color-Object List to locate the required position in the stitching sequence. See Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List for details. Tip You can paste between other objects in the sequence, or nest the copied object within an object. See Nesting objects for details. 5 Click the Paste icon. The object is pasted in the design, according to the current paste options. Alternatively, use the popup menu to override the current paste options. Tip Change the default paste option as required. See Setting paste position options for details.
Colors added to palette Colors matched to palette

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 307 6 Make sure that there is only one copy of an object at any one position. If an object is pasted twice into the same position, it will be stitched twice. Note The object remains on the clipboard and can be pasted repeatedly until the next Copy or Cut command.

Duplicating objects

Objects can be duplicated rather than copied. When an object is duplicated, it is not copied to the clipboard. This leaves the clipboard free for you to cut or copy other objects.

Tip The Mirror-Merge tools allow you to duplicate and transform selected embroidery objects, and merge them into a single object. See Duplicating and mirroring objects for details.

To duplicate objects

1 Select the object (or objects) to duplicate. 2 Travel to the position in the stitching sequence at which you want to place the object. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details. You can place the duplicate between other objects in the sequence, or nest it within an object. See Nesting objects for details. 3 Select Edit > Duplicate. The duplicate object is placed directly on top of the original, in the specified position in the stitching sequence. 4 Move the duplicate object to the required position. Select Duplicate (Edit menu) to duplicate selected objects. ES 2006 Chapter 14 Combining and Resequencing Objects 308

Cloning objects
To clone objects

The Quick Clone feature lets you quickly duplicate selected objects by right-clicking, dragging and releasing at a new position. 1 Select an object or objects. 2 Holding down the right mouse button, drag the object(s) to a new position. A black outline of the object appears. The cursor icon includes a plus symbol. Tip For more precise positioning, hold down the Ctrl key while draggingmovement is thereby constrained to X or Y axes. 3 Release the mouse. A duplicate object(s) is created at the release point. Use Select Object (Pointer toolbar) to select and clone objects.
Right-click object Drag-and-drop Object duplicated Right-click, hold down Ctrl key, and drag-and-drop object

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 309 Tip Clone objects to another window by the same method. To temporarily deactivate automatic scrolling, hold down the Shift key while dragging. An identical copy of the selection is created at the same coordinates as the first window, no matter where the mouse is released.

Deleting objects
To delete objects

Various methods are available for deleting objects.

! Select the object (or objects) to delete, and do one of the following: ! Press Delete. ! Select Edit > Delete. ! Right-click and select Delete from the popup menu. Nesting objects
ES Designer lets you nest one object inside another at an exact point of the stitching sequence. This feature is particularly useful with motifs and other designs where long connectors may be generated. It also helps reduce the overall numbers of objects, minimizing trims and tie-offs. Select Delete (Edit menu) to delete selected objects. ES 2006 Chapter 14 Combining and Resequencing Objects 310

To nest objects

1 Travel through the first object until the needle position marker is positioned where you want to insert the second object. See Traveling by stitches for details. 2 Insert the second object. To do this, either digitize the object, or copy

and paste, or cut-and-paste it. The second object is nested in the stitching sequence of the first object. All required functions are automatically inserted for the second object. 3 Move the copied object into the required position. Tip To view the connectors that are generated for the nested object, click the Show Connectors icon.

Combining designs

ES Designer lets you insert one design into another. The two (or more) designs can then be saved as a combined design. When you insert a design in another, the two color palettes are combined. Colors with the same RGB values are automatically identified as having the same thread color. If you want to preserve these as separate colors, you need to change one or other before merging. See Modifying colorways for details.

To combine designs

1 Open the first design. 2 Travel to the position in the stitching sequence where you want to insert the design. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details.
Travel to insertion point and paste object

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 311 You can insert a design between objects in the sequence, or nest the design within an object. See Nesting objects for details. 3 Select a color palette option as required. See Setting inserted embroidery file options for details. By default, when you insert a design, colors are matched to the current color palette. 4 Select Insert > Embroidery File. ! To select a design from any available DOS drive, select DOS Disk. ! To select a design from an embroidery disk, select Embroidery Disk. The Open dialog opens. 5 From the Look In list, select the folder where the design you want to insert is stored, and select the required format from the Files of type list. 6 Select the design file to insert, and click Open. The design is inserted at the current needle position. 7 Move the second design into the required position. See Positioning objects for details. Tip To ensure that all the objects in the inserted design stay together, group the design while working with it. See Grouping and ungrouping objects for details. 8 Save the combined design under the original or different name. The designs you have inserted are now combined into one design.

Splitting objects
Colors added to palette Colors matched to palette

Use Split Object (Edit menu) to split selected objects. ES 2006 Chapter 14 Combining and Resequencing Objects 312 ES Designer lets you split embroidery objects into smaller objects. This is useful, for example, when you want to split Manual objects up in order to convert sections to outline objects with Stitch Processor. Use the Split Object command to split embroidery objects created with the Input A,

Input B, and Input C tools together with Satin, Tatami, or Program Split as the stitch type. Run objects may also be split but Complex Fill objects cannot. See also Shaping vector and embroidery objects.

To split objects

1 Select an object to split. 2 Travel to the stitch where you want it to be split. You can travel to a stitch inside a Satin, Tatami, Run or Manual object. See Traveling by stitches for details. Note You cannot split an object at the first stitch. 3 Select Edit > Split Object. The object is split into two objects at the needle position marker. Tip You can convert any split Manual objects to outline objects with Stitch Processor. See Recognizing object/outlines after editing for details.

Resequencing embroidery objects

The embroidery objects in a design form a stitching sequence. Initially, objects are stitched in the order in which they were created. You can change
Split object Split object deleted

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 313 the position of a selected object by cutting it, then pasting it somewhere else in the sequence, or by using the Resequence command. You can also resequence objects by color or using the Color-Object List.

Resequencing objects with cut-and-paste

You can resequence objects by cutting an object from the design and pasting it back at a different point in the sequence. This does not change the physical location of the object. See also Nesting objects.

To resequence objects with cut-and-paste

1 Select the object (or objects) to resequence. 2 Click the Cut icon. The selected object is removed from the design and moved to the clipboard. 3 Travel to the position in the stitching sequence where you want to paste the object. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details. You can paste between other objects in the sequence, or nest the cut object within another object. See Nesting objects for details. If you do not move the current needle position marker, the object is pasted at the end of the sequence. Click Cut (Standard toolbar) to cut a selected object or objects and place them on the clipboard. Click Paste (Standard toolbar) to paste copied objects in the design.
Completed designcenter stitched first Object cut to clipboard

ES 2006 Chapter 14 Combining and Resequencing Objects 314 4 Click the Paste icon. The object is pasted back in the design according to the current paste options. See also Setting paste position options. Note The object remains on the clipboard and can be pasted repeatedly until the next Copy or Cut command.

Resequencing selected objects

To resequence selected objects

You can resequence objects by selecting them in the required stitching order. 1 Select the first object in the range you want to resequence. 2 Holding down Ctrl, select the subsequent objects to resequence.

Note Select each object in the order you want it to stitch out in. 3 With the objects still selected, select Edit > Resequence > By Selects. The objects are resequenced in the order they were selected.

Resequencing objects by color

Cursor inserted Object pasted at end of design

The Resequence By Color feature lets you resequence all objects by color. This reduces the number of color changes in a design. Select Resequence By Selects (Edit menu) to resequence selected objects. Select Resequence By Color (Edit menu) to resequence objects by color. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 315 Note This technique resequences all color blocks of the same color in the stitching sequence. If, for any reason, you want to maintain separate color blocks, you should use the Color-Object List. See Resequencing colors and objects with the Color-Object List for details.

To resequence objects by color

1 Select the objects to resequence. 2 Select Edit > Resequence > By Color. The Sequence By Color dialog opens listing the colors used in the selected objects. 3 Select a color and click Move Up or Move Down to change its position in the sequence. 4 Click OK.

Resequencing colors and objects with the Color-Object List

The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select objects in designs and access their properties. You can resequence color blocks and objects easily by changing their position in the Color-Object List. Tip You can also use it to group and ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and hide objects. Use it also to cut, copy and paste, as well as branch objects. See also Grouping and locking with the Color-Object List, Copying and pasting objects, and Branching objects with the Color-Object List.
Select color block Use buttons to resequence

Use Color-Object List (Standard toolbar) to resequence objects. ES 2006 Chapter 14 Combining and Resequencing Objects 316

To resequence objects with the Color-Object List

1 Click the Color-Object List icon. The Color-Object List opens. 2 Select the color block or object to resequence. ! To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you click. ! To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you click. 3 Click-and-drag selected objects to reposition them. Note You cannot move an object between colors in a manual color change. However, you can move an object between consecutive members of a grouped object. Tip You may need to select allpress Ctrl+Athen regenerate stitchespress Gto update the display.
Click-and-drag object to new position Drop object into new position

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 317

Automatic branching
The Branching feature lets you digitize like objectse.g. the fingers of a hand, sections of a custom letterwithout having to think about the most efficient stitching sequence and joins. Branching is designed for use with shapes made up of objects that overlape.g. complicated letters, Asian

characters, etc. Apply Branching to join selected objects to form a single branched object. Objects are resequenced, connectors minimized, component objects grouped, and stitches regenerated. All component objects are grouped and selectable as one. You can apply a single underlay to all.

Properties of branched objects

Branching works with any combination of the following object typesRun, Input A, Input B, Input C, Complex Fill and Fusion Fill. Objects with Motif Run and Motif Fill cannot be used. Branched objects preserve their original properties while sharing the color of the first object in the sequence. Note When dissimilar objects are selected and branched, any which cannot be branched are omitted.

Connections between branched objects

The component objects of a branched object are connected by the Closest Join method used with custom alphabets. All objects are resequenced both externally (in relation to each other) and internally (by automatic segmentation). See also Digitizing custom letters. Click Branching (Standard toolbar) to automatically branch selected embroidery objects.
Mixture of object types and colors Color shared but object types preserved

ES 2006 Chapter 14 Combining and Resequencing Objects 318

Editing branched objects

Branched objects remain editable. They can be reshaped. There is only one entry and one exit point, but all component objects have individual reshape points. The object properties of a branched object can be accessed via the Object Properties dialog. Stitch types can also be re-assigned via the toolbar.

Applying branching
To apply branching

Apply Branching to selected objects. These become a single branched object. 1 Select the objects. Note The function is only available if more than one object of any suitable type is selected. Click Branching (Standard toolbar) to automatically branch selected embroidery objects.
Long connectors between separate objects

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 319 2 Click the Branching icon. ES Designer will prompt you to digitize entry and exit points. 3 Digitize entry and exit points, or press Enter twice to accept the defaults. Component objects are grouped and share the color of the first branched object. Objects are resequenced, connectors minimized, and stitches regenerated. 4 Travel through the branched object to check stitching. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details.

Branching objects with the Color-Object List

The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select objects in designs and access their properties. You can use it to branch like objects in a design. Tip Use the Color-Object List also to cut, copy and paste, group and ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and hide objects, as well as resequence objects. See also Grouping and locking with the Color-Object List, Copying and pasting objects, and Resequencing colors and objects with the Color-Object List.

To apply branching with the Color-Object List

1 Click the Color-Object List icon. 2 Select objects in the Color-Object List.
Objects resequenced, connectors minimized

Use Color-Object List (Standard toolbar) to branch objects in a design. ES 2006 Chapter 14 Combining and Resequencing Objects 320 3 Right-click and select Branching from the popup menu. Note The function is only available if more than one object of any suitable type is selected. 4 Digitize entry and exit points, or press Enter twice to accept the defaults. Component objects are grouped and share the color of the first branched object. Objects are resequenced, connectors minimized, and stitches regenerated.

Applying automatic underlay to branched objects

Branch selected objects Long connectors join objects

Because Branching combines objects to form a single branched object, you can apply an underlay (single or double) to all.

Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to select an underlay type to apply to branched objects.
Selected objects grouped into single branched object Long connectors eliminated

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 321

To apply automatic underlay to branched objects

1 Select the branched object. 2 Right-click the Auto Underlay icon. The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens. 3 Select the First Underlay checkbox and select an underlay type. 4 Click Apply. Underlay stitches are automatically generated for the branched object. Note If component objects are touching or overlapping, the underlay is first stitched out for the whole branched object followed by the cover stitch.

Applying two-layer run stitching with branching

With run stitching, digitizers frequently aim to have exactly two layers of stitching on every segment while minimizing jumps and trims. This technique effectively eliminates the need to have extra travel or jump stitches to get from one part of the outline to another. It does so by using the stitches themselves as travel stitches wherever possible, providing a higher quality result in the process.
Select underlay type Select First Underlay Whole underlay stitched first Cover stitched after underlay

ES 2006 Chapter 14 Combining and Resequencing Objects 322

To apply two-layer run stitching with branching

1 Select the objects. 2 Click Branching and digitize entry and exit points in the normal way. See Applying branching for details. Stitches are regenerated. Component objects are grouped and connectors minimizedno jumps, no extra travels.

3 Travel through the branched object to check stitching. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details. Tip When the entry and exit point are the same, there are two layers of outline stitching. If they are different, the path between the entry and exit will have three layers. It is your choice whether to have the extra travel layer or a trim connection to the next object instead.
One layer of run outline stitches Combination of one and two layers of run stitches created

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 323

Chapter 15

Arranging and Transforming Objects

You can change the position, size and orientation of objects in a design by moving, scaling and transforming them. Group objects together to apply universal changes, or lock them to avoid unintentional modification. Modify objects directly on-screen or using the Object Properties dialog. Access commonly used functions via the Color-Object List. Warning The scalability and stitching quality of a design ultimately depend on its original source Native Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or Imported Stitches. Only EMB designs contain the complete set of design information required for 100% perfect scaling and transformation. See also Embroidery design formats. This section describes how to position objects, how to lock and group, align and space objects, as well as how to scale, rotate, skew, and mirror objects.

Positioning, aligning and distributing objects

Position objects in your design using the mouse to drag them to a new position, nudging them with the arrow keys or by specifying the X:Y coordinates in the General Properties bar. ES Designer lets you align objects to position them relative to each other, or distribute them evenly in your design. ES 2006 Chapter 15 Arranging and Transforming Objects 324

Positioning objects

The simplest way to move an object in your design is to click-and-drag it to a new position. Use the arrow keys to nudge objects into position. Note If no objects are selected, using the arrow keys moves the current needle position.

To position objects

! Select the object/s to move and click-and-drag it to a new position. ! For more accurate positioning, use the arrow keys to nudge the object
into the required position. ! For even more accurate positioning, enter the X:Y coordinates in the General Properties bar. The object is centered above the coordinates you set. Tip Zoom in to make small adjustments. The distance the object moves depends on the current zoom factor. The greater the zoom factor, the smaller the distance moved.

Aligning objects
Use cross-hair cursor to center object Enter exact coordinates

Use Align Left (Arrange toolbar) to left-align selected objects.

Use Align Vertical Centers (Arrange toolbar) to align selected objects through their vertical centers. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 325 You can align selected objects in a design to the left, right, top, bottom or center of a specific object. The Arrange toolbar offers a set of buttons to trigger functions of the same name found in the Arrange menu. The tools all become enabled when two or more objects are selected.

To align objects

1 Select the objects you want to align. 2 Select the object you want to align with. 3 Click an alignment tool or select Arrange > Align > ... Note Objects are aligned with the last object selected. When we select all the objects in the design by using Ctrl+A all the objects are aligned with the last object in the sequence.

Distributing objects evenly

Use Align Right (Arrange toolbar) to right-align selected objects. Use Align Top (Arrange toolbar) to top-align selected objects. Use Align Horizontal Centers (Arrange toolbar) to align selected objects through their horizontal centers. Use Align Bottom (Arrange toolbar) to bottom-align selected objects.
Align center Align left Align bottom 1 3 2

Use Space Evenly Across (Arrange toolbar) to distribute selected objects evenly across the screen. ES 2006 Chapter 15 Arranging and Transforming Objects 326 You can automatically distribute selected objects with even spacing between them, both vertically or horizontally. The Arrange toolbar offers a set of buttons to trigger functions of the same name found in the Arrange menu. The tools all become enabled when three or more objects are selected.

To distribute objects evenly

1 Select the objects you want to space. 2 Click a spacing tool or select Arrange > Space Evenly > ...

Grouping and locking objects

ES Designer lets you group objects together for group modifications. Ungroup whenever you need to work with the component objects. You can also lock objects to prevent them from being moved or modified by accident.

Grouping and ungrouping objects

You can group selected objects, or an entire design, to keep them together for moving, scaling and transforming actions. With grouped objects you can also apply global changes, saving time and ensuring consistency. When you have finished making changes to a group, you can ungroup and work with the component objects. Note You need to ungroup before you can set properties for any individual object in the group. Use Space Evenly Down (Arrange toolbar) to distribute selected objects evenly down the screen. Click Group (Arrange toolbar) to group selected objects. Click Ungroup (Arrange toolbar) to ungroup selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 327

To group or ungroup objects

! Select the objects and click the Group icon or press Ctrl+G.
Selected objects are combined into a group. This can be selected, moved, resized and transformed as a single object. ! To ungroup, select the grouped object and click the Ungroup icon or press Ctrl+U.

Tip To select with a bounding outline, simply drag the outline over one component object and the whole group will be selected. See also Selecting objects with a bounding box.

Locking and unlocking objects

Lock objects to prevent them from being moved or modified by accident. For example, locking backdrop images holds them in place as you digitize, transform or reshape the embroidery objects near them. Locked objects can be unlocked for modification at any time.
Select, move, resize, or transform grouped objects as a single object ungrouped objects are selected

Click Lock (Arrange toolbar) to lock selected objects. Click Unlock All (Arrange toolbar) to unlock all locked objects in a design. ES 2006 Chapter 15 Arranging and Transforming Objects 328

To lock or unlock objects

! Select the object/s to lock and click the Lock icon or press K.

The selection handles disappear, indicating that the object can no longer be selected or modified. ! To unlock objects, click the Unlock All icon. All locked objects in the design are unlocked.

Grouping and locking with the Color-Object List

The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select objects in designs and access their properties. You can use it to group and ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and hide objects. Tip Use the Color-Object List also to cut, copy and paste, resequence, as well as branch objects. See also Copying and pasting objects, Resequencing colors and objects with the Color-Object List, and Branching objects with the Color-Object List.

To group or lock with the Color-Object List

1 Click the Color-Object List icon. The Color-Object List dialog opens. Use Color-Object List (Standard toolbar) to group and/or lock objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 329 2 Click a node to open or close a color block and see its component objects. 3 Select a color block or object/s and right-click to invoke the popup menu. 4 Group and/or lock selected color blocks and objects via the popup menu.

Scaling objects

You can scale objects by dragging selection handles, specifying the exact dimensions in the General Properties bar, or by setting the distance between reference points on the design. As an object is scaled, the stitch count changes to preserve the current stitch spacing. Note Only EMB designs contain the complete set of design information required for 100% perfect scaling and transformation.

Scaling objects using click-and-drag

You can change the height and width of an object, or scale it proportionally using selection handles. Scale objects individually, or select multiple objects and scale them together.

To scale objects using click-and-drag

1 Select the object/s to scale. Eight selection handles appear around the object. 2 Click-and-drag a selection handle to resize the object.
Click to open or close node Group/Lock objects

ES 2006 Chapter 15 Arranging and Transforming Objects 330 ! To scale height and width proportionally, use a corner handle. Tip By default, objects scale proportionally. To scale freely in vertical and horizontal planes, hold down Ctrl as you drag. ! To change the height, use the handles at the center-top or center-bottom. ! To change the width, use the handles at the center-sides.
Scale proportionally Scale freely in both directions Ctrl + drag Drag Scale vertically Drag Drag Scale vertically Scale horizontally Scale horizontally Drag

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 331 ! To resize proportionally around a central anchor point, hold down Shift as you drag.

Scaling objects by an exact amount

You can scale artwork, selected objects or a whole design using their properties. With normal outline (EMB) files, this allows stitches to be regenerated while preserving the original stitch density. See also Adjusting stitch density. Warning If you scale a stitch design by more than 5%, changes to stitch density will affect the design quality. See also Embroidery design formats.

To scale objects by an exact amount

1 Select the object/s to scale. 2 In the General Properties bar, either: ! Enter exact height and width values. ! Enter the new height and width as a percentage of the current dimensions. Tip To preserve aspect ratio, copy the calculated percentage from one field to the other.
Scale proportionally about center Shift + drag Scale horizontally in both directions Shift + drag Enter dimensions as exact values or as a percentage Click Apply

ES 2006 Chapter 15 Arranging and Transforming Objects 332 3 Click the Apply button. Note After scaling, the new object size is reset to 100%.

Scaling objects using reference points

You can scale an object or design by marking reference points and specifying the required length of the line between them. For example, to resize a design to a specific width, select all objects, then mark the reference points across the width of the design.

To scale objects using reference points

1 Select the object/s to scale. 2 Select Edit > Transform. The Transform dialog opens. 3 Select the Size checkbox, and enter the required distance between the reference points. 4 Click OK.
vase scaled Width: 120% Height: 140%

shadow scaled Width: 140% Height: 120%

Select Transform (Edit menu) to scale an object or design using reference points.
Select Size checkbox Specify size

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 333 You are prompted to enter the start and end points of the reference line. You will have already decided which two points in the object or design will form the reference line. 5 Click to mark the reference points on the design. The object is scaled so that the distance between the points is the value you entered in the dialog. Tip Press Ctrl to constrain the angle of the axis to 15 increments. Press Enter twice to use the default reference line.

Making objects the same size

To make objects the same size
Click to mark the reference points

You can scale objects to the same size as a reference object. Resize the height or width separately or both. 1 Select the object/s to resize. 2 Select the object that is the size you require. Click Make Same Width (Arrange toolbar) to scale an object or design to the same width as a reference object. Click Make Same Height (Arrange toolbar) to scale an object or design to the same height as a reference object. Click Make Same Width and Height (Arrange toolbar) to scale an object or design to the same size as a reference object. ES 2006 Chapter 15 Arranging and Transforming Objects 334 3 Click a sizing tool or select Arrange > Make Same Size > ... Note Objects are resized according to the last object selected.

Rotating objects

You can rotate objects directly on-screen or by setting an exact rotation angle.

Rotating objects using click-and-drag

To rotate objects using click-and-drag
1 Select the object/s to rotate. 2 Click the object a second time.
Make same width Make same height Make same width and height 2 31

When you select an object, selection handles display at its extremities. If you click the object again, the handles change to rotation handles.

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 335 Rotation handles appear at the corners and an anchor point at the center. Note If you click too quickly, the Object Properties dialog opens. 3 Drag the anchor point to any position required. 4 Click a rotation handle, and drag it clockwise or anti-clockwise. An outline displays as you rotate.

Rotating objects by an exact amount

First click displays selection handles Second click displays rotation handles

You can rotate selected objects in 45 increments or by entering an exact value using the Transform toolbar.

anchor point skew handle rotation handle Drag a corner to rotate about the anchor point Anchor point repositioned Drag a corner to rotate about the anchor point

Click Rotate 45 CW (Transform toolbar) to rotate selected objects by 45 in a clockwise direction. Click Rotate 45 CCW (Transform toolbar) to rotate selected objects by 45 in a counter-clockwise direction. Use Rotate (Transform toolbar) to rotate selected objects by an exact amount (in degrees). ES 2006 Chapter 15 Arranging and Transforming Objects 336

To rotate objects by an exact amount

1 Select the object/s to rotate. 2 To rotate in 45 increments, click one of the Rotate 45 icons. 3 To rotate by an exact amount, enter the angle in the Rotate field and press Enter.

Rotating objects by reference line

The Transform Special tool lets you rotate selected objects with the aid of reference points alone. It can be used both with embroidery and vector objects. Tip This technique is particularly useful to duplicate and rotate objects around an anchor pointe.g. the petals of a flower.

To rotate objects by reference line

1 Select the object/s to rotate. 2 Select Edit > Transform Special. 3 Follow the instruction in the prompt bar: ! Click the first reference point. This will become the anchor point for the rotation. Select Transform Special (Edit menu) to rotate an object using reference points. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 337 ! Click a second reference point. An outline attaches to the pointer. Tip Press Ctrl to constrain the angle of the axis to 15 increments. ! Click the anchor point. The pointer then aligns itself with the second reference point. ! Click a guide point for the required rotation position. Use the coordinates on the Status bar for exact alignment.

Rotating objects by reference line and angle

The Transform tool provides another method for transforming selected objects using a combination of reference points and numeric values. This provides a very accurate technique for rotating selected objects. It can be used with embroidery objects, vector images or bitmap images. The technique is particularly useful when you want to align objects precisely with a common reference line.

To rotate objects by reference line and angle

1 Select the object/s to rotate. 2 Decide which two points in the object or design will form the reference line. This should be a significant line e.g. one which must be perfectly horizontal or vertical in the final design. 3 Select Edit > Transform.
Move the pointer

Select Transform (Edit menu) to scale an object or design using reference points and specified angle. ES 2006 Chapter 15 Arranging and Transforming Objects 338

The Transform dialog opens. 4 Select the Angle checkbox, and enter the rotation angle of the reference line. For example, to rotate the image so that it aligns with the horizontal axis, enter a value of 0. 5 Click OK. 6 Click to mark the start and end points of the reference line. Tip Press Ctrl to constrain the angle of the axis to 15 increments. Press Enter twice to use a horizontal reference line by default.

Skewing objects

You can skew objects directly on-screen or by setting an exact skew angle.

Skewing objects using click-and-drag

Select Angle Enter absolute rotation angle in degrees Select rotation angle e.g. 0 reference line set to angle specified in dialog Digitize reference line align with base of object

You can skew objects along the horizontal plane by clicking skew handles and dragging to the required angle.

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 339

To skew objects using click-and-drag

1 Select the object/s to skew. 2 Click the object a second time. Rotation and skew handles appear around the object. Skew handles are diamond-shaped and appear at the center-top and bottom of the object. 3 Drag the skew handles left or right. The object skews along the horizontal plane.

Skewing objects by an exact amount

To skew objects by an exact amount

You can skew selected objects by entering an exact angle in the Skew field. 1 Select the object/s to skew. 2 In the Skew field of the Transform toolbar, enter the skew angle you require. 3 Press Enter.

Duplicating and mirroring objects

You can mirror objects horizontally or vertically by means of the Transform toolbar. You can also mirror around a defined axis using a reference line. The Use Skew (Transform toolbar) to skew selected objects by an exact amount (in degrees).
Drag skew handle left or right

ES 2006 Chapter 15 Arranging and Transforming Objects 340 Mirror-Merge tool allows you to duplicate and transform selected embroidery objects, as well as merge them into a single object.

Mirroring objects horizontally and vertically

To mirror objects horizontally or vertically
1 Select the object/s to mirror. 2 Click one (or both) of the Mirror icons.

You can mirror selected objects horizontally or vertically using the Transform toolbar.

Mirroring objects about a specified axis

You can mirror objects around a defined axis using a reference line. Using this method you mark the start and end points of the line around which the object mirrors.

To mirror objects about a specified axis

1 Select the object/s to mirror. Click Mirror Horizontally (Transform toolbar) to flip selected objects in the horizontal plane. Click Mirror Vertically (Transform toolbar) to flip selected objects in the vertical plane. Select Transform (Edit menu) to mirror objects about a specified axis.
mirrored in X & Y mirrored in Y mirrored in X starting object

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 341 2 Select Edit > Transform. The Transform dialog opens. 3 Select the Mirror checkbox. 4 Click OK. 5 Click to mark the reference points of the mirror axis. After the second click, the selected object is mirrored in the reference line. Tip Press Ctrl to constrain the angle of the axis to 15 increments. If you just want to mirror your selection around a horizontal axis, press Enter twice. The mirror axis defaults to zero.

Reflecting designs with Mirror-Merge

Select Mirror mirrored starting object

Use Reflect (Mirror-Merge toolbar) to duplicate and mirror objects or designs. ES 2006 Chapter 15 Arranging and Transforming Objects 342 Use the Mirror-Merge Reflect tool to duplicate and mirror designs simultaneously. You can use it to quickly create borders. You can also use it merge duplicates into a perfectly symmetrical object such as a face or heart.

To reflect designs with Mirror-Merge

1 Select the object or design. 2 Click the Reflect icon. The pointer attaches to the center point. As you move it around, the duplicate outlines move accordingly. Tip Press Shift to disable Auto-Scroll while using Mirror-Merge. 3 Set the number of columns and rows you require. 4 Move the reference line to position the duplicates.
Set no. of rows Set no. of columns

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 343 5 For more precise positioning, adjust spacing settings. Tip Tab from field to field to enter values. Press Enter to confirm. 6 Click to mark the anchor point or press Enter to confirm. The design is duplicated and distributed around the center point. Note If the duplicates overlap the original, you are prompted to merge objects. Use this feature to merge duplicates into a perfectly symmetrical object such as a face or heart.

Creating wreaths with Mirror-Merge

Set precise row spacing Set precise column spacing

Use the Mirror-Merge Wreath tool to duplicate objects around a center point. The Kaleidoscope tool works like Wreath but mirrors objects as well. Use Wreath (Mirror-Merge toolbar) to duplicate objects around a center point. Use Kaleidoscope (Mirror-Merge toolbar) to duplicate and mirror objects around a center point.
object reflected reflected objects merged

ES 2006 Chapter 15 Arranging and Transforming Objects 344 Because objects are mirrored, Kaleidoscope works best with an even number.

To create wreaths with Mirror-Merge

1 Select the object or design.

2 Click the Wreath or Kaleidoscope icon. The pointer attaches to the center point. As you move it around, the duplicate outlines move accordingly. 3 Enter the number of Wreath points. Note Enter an even number for a kaleidoscope effect. 4 Move the reference line to position the duplicates. Tip Hold down Ctrl to constrain the reference line to 45o increments.
six-point wreath eight-point kaleidoscope five-point wreath Enter no. of wreath points five-point wreath six-point kaleidoscope

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 345 5 For more precise positioning, adjust the Distance and Angle settings. Distance and angle are measured from the center of the original to the center of the wreath or kaleidoscope. Tip Tab from field to field to enter values. Press Enter to confirm. 6 Click to mark the anchor point or press Enter to confirm. The design is duplicated and distributed around the center point. Note If the duplicates overlap the original, you are prompted to merge objects.

Duplicating designs with Mirror-Merge

Set precise distance Set precise angle five-point wreath six-point kaleidoscope

Use the Mirror-Merge Array tool to create multiple copies of designs, such as badges, spaced in rows and columns for faster stitchouts. Mirror-Merge Use Array (Mirror-Merge toolbar) to duplicate objects or designs. ES 2006 Chapter 15 Arranging and Transforming Objects 346 automatically sequences each color block to eliminate unnecessary machine color changes.

To duplicate designs with mirror-merge

1 Select the object or design. 2 Click the Array icon. The pointer attaches to a reference line. As you move it around, the duplicate outlines move accordingly. Tip Press Shift to disable Auto-Scroll while using Mirror-Merge. 3 Set the number of columns and rows you require. 4 Move the reference line to position the duplicates.
Set no. of rows Set no. of columns

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 347 5 For more precise positioning, adjust spacing settings. Tip Tab from field to field to enter values. Press Enter to confirm. 6 Click to mark the anchor point or press Enter to confirm. The design is duplicated and distributed around the reference lines. Note If the duplicates overlap the original, you are prompted to merge objects.
Set precise row spacing Set precise column spacing

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 348

Chapter 16

Converting and Reshaping Objects

ES Designer also lets you convert among vector and embroidery objects of different types at all stages of the design. For example, you can convert vector images directly to embroidery objects. Similarly, you can convert embroidery designs or objects to vector images. These can then be converted to any kind of embroidery object. You can also convert between embroidery object types.

The reference points you mark when digitizing a shape become its control points. These vary slightly with the object type. Use them to edit or transform objectse.g. reshaping, scaling, letter spacing, changing entry and exit points. Modify stitch angles of selected objects. Add multiple stitch angles as required. Most control points can be added, deleted, moved or changed to corner or curve points. Some control points have a specific function and cannot be deleted, for example, the entry point.
Key to control points = corner point = exit point = curve point = entry point corner point exit point entry point = stitch angle points stitch angle line

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 349 Tip Before modifying any design, a good practice is to save a copy under a new name and keep the original in case you want to discard your changes and start again. This section describes how to reshape objects with control points, reshape circle, star and ring objects. It also describes how to convert object types, adjust stitch angles, change entry and exit points, as well as keep or omit the last stitch.

Converting between object types

ES Designer lets you convert vector images directly to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods. Similarly, you can convert embroidery designs or objects to vector images. These can then be converted to any kind of embroidery object. You can also convert between different run objects as well as Input C objects. This is useful when scaling designse.g. for creating thicker or thinner columns and borders, or converting between Complex Fill and Input A or Input B objects. See also Object interconversion. Tip You can also create embroidery objects with turning stitches by applying stitch angles directly to vector objects. You can also add turning stitches to Complex Fill objects with the Stitch Angles tool. See Adding stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode for details.

Converting vector objects to embroidery

Use Convert > Stitch Angles (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Fusion Fill objects. Use Convert > Complex Fill (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Complex Fill objects. Use Convert > Input C (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Input C objects. Use Convert > Fusion Fill (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Fusion Fill objects. Use Convert > Auto Appliqu (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Appliqu objects. Use Convert > Run (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Run objects. ES 2006 Chapter 16 Converting and Reshaping Objects 350 You can convert vector objects to embroidery objects using Complex Fill, Input C, or an outline input method. The resulting object takes the current stitch type, color and object properties set for that input method. Vector objects can be converted to appliqu. You can even send them directly to a laser cutter. See also Cutting appliqu shapes. Tip You can also create embroidery objects with turning stitches by applying stitch angles directly to vector objects. See Adding stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode for details.

To convert vector objects to embroidery

1 Select a thread color from the color palette. 2 Select the vector object to convert. Note If you select Complex Fill as the input method, you can select several vector objects to create an object with multiple boundaries. 3 Select an input method from the Input toolbar. Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > from the popup menu. Tip Before you apply an input method, select the correct properties. For Complex Fill and Input C, select a stitch type and set the desired effects, otherwise the last selected stitch types and properties are used. Use Convert > Triple Run (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Triple Run objects. Use Convert > Motif Run (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Motif Run objects. Use Convert > Backstitch (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Backstitch objects. Use Convert > Stemstitch (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Stemstitch objects.
Vector object Complex fill object Motif run object Fusion Fill object

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 351 ! For open shapes and outlines, select Run, Triple Run, Motif Run or Input C. You can apply these input methods to closed shapes as well if you want to stitch their outlines. ! For closed, filled shapes, use Complex Fill. Tip You can also create objects with turning stitches by adding stitch angles directly to vector objects. See Adjusting and adding stitch angles in Reshape mode for details. 4 Follow the instruction in the prompt bar: ! For Complex Fill objects, enter stitch entry and exit points and the stitch angle points. ! For Input C objects, enter width point1 and width point2. ! For Auto Appliqu objects, enter stitch entry and exit points, and follow other details as prompted. See Creating appliqu objects for details. ! For other Run objects, enter the entry point. Motif Run is converted automatically. Tip Press Enter to accept defaults at each step. You can edit the results at any stage. 5 Press Enter. Stitches are generated according to the current properties of the selected input method. For fill input methods, the current properties include the stitch type as well. Tip The Point & Stitch tools can also be used with vector images created either in a graphics package or with the ES Designer drawing tools. See Digitizing shapes with Point & Stitch for details.

Converting embroidery objects to vector objects

Use Convert > Drawing (popup menu) to convert embroidery objects to vector objects. ES 2006 Chapter 16 Converting and Reshaping Objects 352 You can convert embroidery designs or objects to vector images at any time. These can in turn be re-converted to any kind of embroidery object. See also Pasting vector images.

To convert an embroidery object to a vector object

1 Select an embroidery object or design. 2 Right-click it and select Convert > Drawing from the popup list. The selected embroidery objects are converted to vector objects. 3 Convert selected vector objects to embroidery objects as required. See Converting vector objects to embroidery for details.

Converting between run objects

run object vector object appliqu object

Use Run (Input toolbar or popup menu) to digitize and then convert to Triple Run or Input C. Use Triple Run (Input toolbar or popup menu) to digitize and then convert to Run or Input C. Use Motif Run (Input toolbar or popup menu) to digitize and then convert to Run or Input C. Use Convert > Backstitch (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Backstitch objects. Use Convert > Stemstitch (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Stemstitch objects. Use Input C (Input toolbar or popup menu) to digitize and then convert to Run or Triple Run. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 353 You can quickly inter-convert objects digitized with Run, Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, Stemstitch, or Input C. This is useful for creating thicker or thinner columns and borders when scaling. Tip You can convert vector objects to embroidery objects (and vice versa) in the same way. See also Converting vector objects to embroidery.

To convert between run objects

1 Select a run objecte.g. Run, Triple Run, Motif Run, Stemstitch, Backstitch, or Input C. 2 Click a run stitch icon. Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > from the popup menu 3 Follow the instruction in the prompt bar: ! Motif Run is converted automatically. ! For Input C, enter width point1 and width point2. ! For other run stitches, enter the entry point. Tip Press Enter to accept defaults at each step. You can edit the results at any stage. The object is converted.
Run object Enter width point1 and point2 Converted to Input C object

ES 2006 Chapter 16 Converting and Reshaping Objects 354 Note You can convert between any of these object types in the same way.

Converting Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill

You can easily convert objects from Input A or Input B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill. This is useful for editing. For example, as curved fill effects can only be used with Complex Fill objects, you can add them to Input A or B shapes by first converting to Complex Fill. Also when scaling designs, an Input A or B shape may become too big for Turning Satin. By converting to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill, you can apply fixed or turning Tatami or some other fill stitch type. If the original object has overlapping areas, these are removed. See also Object interconversion. Tip You can also convert Complex Fill objects to turning stitches using the Stitch Angles tool. You can even convert vector objects to embroidery in the same way. See Adding stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode and Converting vector objects to embroidery for details.

To convert Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill

1 Select the Input A or Input B object. 2 Click the Complex Fill or Fusion Fill icon. Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > Complex Fill or Fusion Fill from the popup menu. 3 Follow the instruction in the prompt line: Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar or popup menu) to convert objects from Input A or B to Fusion Fill. Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar or popup menu) to convert objects from Input A or B to Complex Fill.
Converted to Complex Fill Motif fill applied Curve effect applied

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 355 ! For Complex Fill objects, enter angle points 1 and 2. ! For Fusion Fill objects, enter more than one stitch angle line and press Enter. Note If the Input A or B object stitch type is not applicable to Complex Fille.g. contour stitchSatin will be substituted. If the underlay type is not applicablee.g. Center RunZigzag will be used. 4 Adjust reshape nodes and add effects as required. Tip You can change an Auto Appliqu or vector object to a Complex Fill object in the same way. You can also convert Complex Fill to Fusion Fill.

Converting Complex Fill to Auto Appliqu

You can convert objects from Complex Fill to Auto Appliqu with the Auto Appliqu tool. By adding entry, exit points and frame-out position, the object is converted to an appliqu object. See also Cutting appliqu shapes.

To convert Complex Fill to Auto Appliqu

1 Select the Complex Fill object. 2 Click the Auto Appliqu icon.
Enter angle points Press Enter

Use Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar or popup menu) to convert objects from Complex Fill to Auto Appliqu. ES 2006 Chapter 16 Converting and Reshaping Objects 356 Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > Auto Appliqu from the popup menu. 3 Follow the instruction in the prompt bar: ! Click the outline to set the stitch entry and exit points or press Enter to accept the defaults. ! Mark the frame-out position if you are prompted or press Enter to use the current frame-out values. See also Adjusting the default frame-out position. The object is converted to an appliqu object. Note You can convert a vector object to an Auto Appliqu object in the same way.

Reshaping embroidery objects

The Reshape Object tool is an important tool in ES Designer. Use it to add, delete, or move reshape nodes on the object outline. For some objects, you can also change corner points to curves. ES Designer lets you select a range of reshape nodes in open and closed objects, making reshaping operations quick and simple.

Viewing control points

Frame-out position Entry and exit points Complex Fill object

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected objects, edit stitch angles, and adjust entry/exit points. Use Show Reshape Nodes (Reshape toolbar) to toggle reshape node display when using the Reshape Object tool. Use Show Stitch Angles (Reshape toolbar) to toggle stitch angle display when using the Reshape Object tool. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 357 The Reshape Object tool is an important tool in ES Designer. It invokes its own Reshape toolbar which allows you to selectively view reshape nodes, stitch angles, and entry/exit points. Use the Reshape Object tool whenever

you want to change object shapes by adding, deleting, or moving reshape nodes on the object outline. Edit stitch angles as well as entry and exit points in Reshape mode.

To view control points

! Select the object and click the Reshape Object icon.

Control points appear around the object and the Reshape toolbar appears. By default, reshape nodes, stitch angles and entry/exit points display together. Note When editing an Input A object in Reshape Mode, turning off the Show Reshape Nodes button also disables the Show Stitch Angles button. When editing an Input C object or any outline object, the Show Stitch Angles button is always disabled. Use Show Start/End (Reshape toolbar) to toggle entry/exit point display when using the Reshape Object tool.
stitch angle point curve reshape node entry point stitch angle point stitch angle line curve reshape node corner reshape node exit point

ES 2006 Chapter 16 Converting and Reshaping Objects 358 ! Click icons on the Reshape toolbar to selectively display control points depending on what you want to edit. ! Use Show Reshape Nodes to toggle reshape node display. See Reshaping objects with reshape nodes for details. ! Use Show Stitch Angles to toggle stitch angle display. See Adjusting stitch angles for details. ! Use Show Start/End to toggle entry/exit point display. See Changing entry and exit points for details. Tip The Show Reshape Nodes button can be toggled using the hotkey combination Alt+N. The Show Stitch Angles button can be toggled using the hotkey combination Alt+A. ! To view the next or previous objects, press Tab or Shift+Tab keys. Note Pressing Tab or Shift+Tab also causes all changes to the object to be accepted.
Show Reshape Nodes Show Stitch Angles Show Entry/Exit Shift + Tab Tab

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 359

Reshaping objects with reshape nodes

Change object shapes with the Reshape Object tool. Use it to add, delete, or move reshape nodes on the object outline. For some objects, you can also change corner points to curves. Note The Reshape Object tool lets you modify shapes without affecting the stitch angles and the entry and exit points.

To reshape objects with reshape nodes

1 Select the object to reshape. 2 Click the Reshape Object icon. Control points appear around the object and the Reshape toolbar appears. 3 Click Show Reshape Nodes to view only these control points. 4 To add extra nodes on the outline: ! Left-click to add a corner point. ! Right-click to add a curve point. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected objects by means of control points.

Use Show Reshape Nodes (Reshape toolbar) to toggle reshape node display when using the Reshape Object tool.
Right-click Left-click

ES 2006 Chapter 16 Converting and Reshaping Objects 360 5 Select reshape nodes as required: ! Click to select a single reshape nodes. ! Use the Ctrl key to select multiple reshape nodes. ! Click-and-drag a bounding box around a group of reshape nodes to select. ! Use the Shift key to select a range of reshape nodes. Left-clicking or right-clicking in closed shapes changes the direction of the selection. 6 Adjust the position of selected reshape nodes by dragging them along the outline as required and press Enter. Tip Use the arrow keys to nudge selected reshape nodes.
Click to selecthold down Ctrl to select multiple nodes Drag bounding box around reshape nodes to select OR Hold down Shift and right or left-click to select range of nodes Drag reshape nodes Press Enter

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 361 7 Press Delete to delete unwanted reshape nodes and press Enter. If the object only has two reshape nodesor two pairs of reshape nodes as in the case of Input A objectsdeleting one deletes the whole object. 8 Press Spacebar to toggle between selected corner and curve reshape nodes and press Enter. Tip If you make a mistake, press Esc to remove the changes, press Esc again to exit Reshape mode. Note You can also adjust stitch angles as required, as well as change entry and exit points. See Adjusting stitch angles and Adjusting entry/exit points and last stitches for details.

Reshaping circle, star and ring objects

For objects created with the Circle/Star or Ring tools, you reshape using the existing control points only. You cannot add, change or delete control points in these objects.
Delete reshape nodes Press Enter Select reshape nodes and press spacebar Press Enter

ES 2006 Chapter 16 Converting and Reshaping Objects 362

Reshaping circle/star objects

You can change circle/star objects from circles to ovals using the Reshape Object tool. The Show Stitch Angles icon is disabled. Circle/star objects have two reshape nodes (used to change the radius and orientation of the object), a center point (used to reposition it), and an entry point. Tip To scale a circle without changing it to an oval, select it with the Select Object tool, and use the selection handles to scale it.

To reshape circle/star objects

1 Select the circle/star object. 2 Click the Reshape Object icon. The Reshape toolbar appears. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape circle and star objects.
Entry point Center point Reshape node

Stitch angle 90

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 363 3 Click a reshape node on the circumference of the circle, and drag it to reshape the outline. ! To reshape without changing the orientation, use the reshape node at the top of the object. ! To reshape and spin the object around its center point, use the reshape node at the side. 4 To move the circle, click the center point and drag it to a new position. 5 Press Enter.

Reshaping ring objects

You can reshape the inner and outer boundaries of ring objects with the Reshape Object tool. Reshaping rings is similar to reshaping circle/star objects except that you reshape each boundary individually. Each boundary has two reshape nodes for changing radius and orientation, as well as a center point for moving the boundary. The object has a single entry point.

To reshape ring objects

Click-and-drag reshape node Press Enter

1 Select the ring object. 2 Click the Reshape Object icon.

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape ring objects. ES 2006 Chapter 16 Converting and Reshaping Objects 364 The Reshape toolbar appears. 3 Click a reshape node on either boundary, drag it to change the outline, and press Enter. ! To reshape without changing the orientation, use the reshape node at the top of the boundary. ! To reshape and spin the boundary around its center, use the reshape node at the side. 4 To offset the boundaries, select the center point of a boundary, drag it to a new position, and press Enter. Note The center points are generally on top of each other to begin with, and may not be visible.
Entry point Center point may Reshape node not be visible Click-and-drag Press Enter reshape node Press Enter Click-and-drag center point

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 365

Adjusting stitch angles

Stitch angle adjustments depend on the type of object you are working with. With Complex Fill objects you can set a single stitch angle for the entire object. You can add multiple stitch angles to objects with the Stitch Angles tool. You can also adjust stitch angles with the Reshape Object tool. Note You cannot change the stitch angle of Star, Ring and Input C objects as the stitches automatically turn to follow the shape. You can, however, change the stitch angle of Circle objects by moving the entry point. See Reshaping circle, star and ring objects for details.

Adjusting and adding stitch angles in Reshape mode

You can adjust the stitch angle of embroidery objects interactively using the Reshape Object tool. ES Designer also lets you add stitch angles to Input A, Input B or Fusion Fill objects while in Reshape Object mode. Input A objects thereby convert to Input B. See also Converting between object types.

Tip You can also use the Reshape Object tool to add individual reshape nodes on either side of Input A and B objects, modifying the shape without affecting the stitch angles. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.You can change the stitch angle of Complex Fill objects using object properties. See Adjusting stitch angles using object properties for details. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to add stitch angles to selected Input A and B objects. Use Show Stitch Angles (Reshape toolbar) to toggle stitch angle display when using the Reshape Object tool. ES 2006 Chapter 16 Converting and Reshaping Objects 366

To adjust and add stitch angles in Reshape mode

1 Select the object. 2 Click the Reshape Object icon and click Show Stitch Angles to view only these control points. 3 Click-and-drag stitch angle points to their required positions. 4 Select and adjust the end points as required. Note You cannot add stitch angles to Complex Fill objects in Reshape mode. See Adding stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode for details. 5 Holding down the Ctrl key, click the outline wherever you want to place a stitch angle line.
Input A object Input B object Complex Fill object Input A object Input B object Complex Fill object Input B object with stitch angle added Fusion Fill object with stitch angle added Input A object converted to Input B

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 367 Tip Input A objects automatically convert to Input B as soon as you add or adjust a stitch angle. See Adding stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode for details. 6 Press Enter. The stitch angles change accordingly. Tip You need to convert Input B objects to Input A in order to apply Smart Corners. To do this, you need to edit the reshape nodes to create reshape node pairs. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.

Adding stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode

Modify the stitch angles of Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects with the Stitch Angles tool. You can also create objects with turning stitches by adding stitch angles directly to vector objects. Adding stitch angles to Complex Fill or vector objects converts them to Fusion Fill. See also Converting between object types.

To add stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode

1 Select an object. 2 Click the Stitch Angles icon. Use Stitch Angles (Pointer toolbar or popup menu) to add stitch angles to selected Complex Fill objects.
Complex Fill objectone stitch angle Complex Fill converted to Fusion Fill

ES 2006 Chapter 16 Converting and Reshaping Objects 368 Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > Stitch Angles from the dropdown menu. You are prompted to enter stitch angles. 3 Digitize stitch angles so that they intersect two sides of the object. Make sure that they do not intersect each other. 4 Press Enter. The object is re-generated with the new angles.

Adjusting entry/exit points and last stitches

ES Designer lets you change the entry and exit points of individual objects. You can also keep or omit the last stitch in a column of stitches.

Changing entry and exit points

You can change the entry and exit points of individual objects. Aim to place the end point next to adjoining objects for smaller connecting stitches, or to reduce the number of travel runs.

To change entry and exit points

1 Select the object to change. 2 Click the Reshape Object icon and click Show Start/End to view only the entry and exit points.
Complex Fill object Stitch angles added

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to adjust the entry and exit points of selected objects. Use Show Start/End (Reshape toolbar) to toggle entry/exit point display when using the Reshape Object tool. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 369 3 Select the entry or exit point as required, and drag it to a different position on the object outline. Tip To view the next or previous objects, press Tab or Shift+Tab keys. Pressing these keys also causes all changes to the object to be accepted. 4 Press Enter. Note In circle/star or ring objects, only the entry point appears. In circle objects, the stitch angle is perpendicular to the line connecting the entry point to the circle center point. Thus, changing the stitch entry point changes its stitch angle.

Keeping or omitting the last stitch

If you are digitizing adjoining columns, you can keep or omit the last stitch in the first column to achieve a smoother join or shorter connecting stitches. Note This feature only applies when the exit point is at the end of the columni.e. the default exit point. Moving the exit point using the Reshape Object tool overrides the Keep Last Stitch/Omit Last Stitch command.
exit point entry point exit point entry point exit point entry point

Click Keep Last Stitch (Pointer toolbar) to keep the last stitch in a column. Right-click to omit the last stitch in a column.
columns smoothly joined columns with unwanted space

ES 2006 Chapter 16 Converting and Reshaping Objects 370

To keep or omit the last stitch

! To keep the last stitch, select the object and click the Keep Last

Stitch/Omit Last Stitch icon. ! To omit the last stitch, select the object and right-click the Keep Last Stitch/Omit Last Stitch icon. Tip Alternatively press Spacebar to omit the last stitch or Enter keep it.
last stitches kept last stitches omitted columns smoothly joined Press Enterlast stitch kept Press Spacebarlast stitch omitted

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 371

Chapter 17

Editing Stitches and Machine

Functions

ES Designer automatically generates stitches from design outlines and properties. This means you can scale, transform, and reshape native designs without affecting stitch density or quality. However, ES Designer also lets you edit individual stitches. You simply select them like any other object and move the needlepoint position as required. You may need to do this, for example, when working with stitch files which do not contain design outline data. See Embroidery design formats for details. Like stitches, most machine functions are inserted automatically whenever you select commands or specify object properties. They are stored with the embroidery object and updated whenever the object is modified. However, ES Designer also lets you manually insert machine functions and modify them. This flexibility allows you to adapt designs to almost any machine requirement. Warning Stitches or machine functions which are manually inserted into non-manual objectse.g. Input A, Complex Fill, etcneed to be maintained manually. If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, stitch edits are lost. Machine functions may be moved to another point in the stitch sequence. For this reason, only insert functions manually if they cannot be added automatically. This section deals with selecting and editing stitches, and converting selected stitches to objects. It also includes instructions for inserting, checking, editing and clearing manually-inserted functions. It also describes how to edit stitches and functions using the Stitch List. ES 2006 Chapter 17 Editing Stitches and Machine Functions 372

Selecting and deselecting stitches

The Stitch Edit tool lets you select single stitches, several stitches, or a range of stitches by selecting their needle points, or dragging a bounding box around them. You can select all stitches in a design, cancel all selections, or remove individual stitches from a selected group. Selected stitches are highlighted in a different color. You can also select individual stitches in your design using the Stitch List.

Selecting stitches by needle point

You can select individual stitches in Stitch Edit mode by selecting their needle points. Tip Zoom in and display the needle points for easier selection.

To select stitches by needle point

1 Click the Stitch Edit icon. 2 Click a needle point. The needle point changes color and the needle position marker moves to the selected stitch. All stitches after the needle position marker in the stitching sequence appear in black. ! To select a range of stitches, hold down Shift as you select. ! To select multiple stitches, hold down Ctrl as you select. Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select individual stitches for editing.
Selected stitch Hold down Shift to select a range of stitches

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 373

Selecting stitches with a bounding box

With the Stitch Edit tool activated, you can select stitches by dragging a bounding box around them.

To select stitches with a bounding box

1 Click the Stitch Edit icon. 2 Drag a bounding box around the stitches you want to select. Stitches are selected when you release the mouse button.

Selecting stitches with the Stitch List

To select stitches with the Stitch List

You can view and select individual stitches in your design by means of the Stitch List. See also Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List. 1 Click the Stitch List icon. Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select stitches with a bounding box. Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Stitch List display on and off. Use it to select individual stitches.
bounding box stitches selected

ES 2006 Chapter 17 Editing Stitches and Machine Functions 374 The Stitch List opens. It shows stitch position coordinates and function informatione.g. whether the stitch is a jump. It also shows the length of every stitch in the design. Tip To display the text in black, select Black Text from the popup menu (right-click). To display the text in the associated stitch color, select MultiColored Text. To change the background color of the Stitch List, select Background Color and edit to suit stitch colors. 2 Click a stitch in the Stitch List to select it. Stitches selected in the Stitch List are also selected in the design, and vice versa. ! To select a range of stitches, hold down Shift as you select. ! To select multiple stitches, hold down Ctrl as you select. Tip Right-click inside the Stitch List to access the popup menu options. For example, you can select to display the Stitch List in black and white, or open the Stitch Edit dialog. See Editing stitch coordinates with Stitch List for details.
Stitch List shows position coordinates, function information, and individual stitch lengths Change Stitch List text and background colors selected stitches

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 375

Selecting a range of stitches

You can select a range of stitches with Selects On activated. The Selects On tool adds stitches to the selection.

To select a range of stitches with Selects On

1 Click the Stitch Edit icon. 2 With the Selects On tool off, travel through the design, stopping just before the first stitch to select. 3 Click the Selects On icon. 4 Click the last stitch in the range. The stitches between the needle marker and this stitch are selected. Note If the Stitch Edit tool is not selected, Selects On has no effect.

Selecting stitches while traveling through a design

Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select individual stitches for editing. Click Selects On (Standard toolbar) to select a range of stitches.
Stop before the first

stitch Click the last stitch in the range

Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select individual stitches for editing. Click Selects On (Standard toolbar) to select a range of stitches as you travel through the design. ES 2006 Chapter 17 Editing Stitches and Machine Functions 376 You can select a range of stitches by traveling by stitch with Selects On activated. The Selects On tool adds stitches to the selection as you travel through the stitching sequence.

To select stitches while traveling through a design

1 With the Selects On tool off, travel to the required stitch or select an individual stitch. 2 Click the Stitch Edit icon. 3 Click the Selects On icon. Note If the Stitch Edit tool is not selected, Selects On has no effect. 4 Travel through the design. See Traveling by stitches for details. As you travel, stitches are added to the selection. Note If a stitch is already selected, it is deselected when you travel through it.

Deselecting stitches
To deselect stitches

You can deselect individual stitches from a group of selected stitches or cancel all selections in the design.

! Deselect individual stitches using the following method. ! Travel backwards by one stitch.
Travel to the first stitch Travel 10 Stitches tool used

Note The Stitch Edit and Selects On must be selected. ! Deselect all stitches using any of the following methods.

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 377 ! Press Esc. ! Deselect Selects On, then select another stitch. ! Select Edit > Deselect All.

Editing stitches

You can insert stitches in an object to fill gaps. You can move or delete individual or clusters of selected stitches. Warning If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, all stitch editing functions are lost. Where possible, edit the object properties rather than individual stitches.

Inserting stitches

You can insert stitches in an object to fill gaps. Inserted stitches are considered part of the object (rather than independent objects). They will, however, be lost if the objects stitches are regenerated. Where possible, edit the object properties rather than individual stitches. For example, to increase stitch density, reduce spacing rather than insert stitches. Note Inserting stitches is different from creating stitches using the Manual input method. Using the Manual tool you create a separate object, with its own properties and connectors. See Digitizing individual stitches for details.

To insert stitches

1 Click the Stitch Edit icon. 2 Zoom into the area you want to edit. 3 Select a needlepoint. Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to insert stitches in an object. ES 2006 Chapter 17 Editing Stitches and Machine Functions 378 The stitch changes color and the needle position marker moves to the selected stitch.

4 Move the mouse pointer where you want to insert the new stitch, and right-click. 5 Move the mouse to where you want to insert the next stitch, and right-click. 6 Continue right-clicking as required.

Moving stitches

You can move individual or groups of selected stitches. Warning If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, all stitch editing functions are lost. Where possible, reshape the object rather than move individual stitches. See Converting and Reshaping Objects for details.

To move stitches
Right-click Right-click

1 Click the Stitch Edit icon. 2 Select stitches and drag them to a new position. Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select individual stitches for moving. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 379 The stitch shadow outline shows the new position. 3 Press Enter.

Deleting stitches

You can delete individual or groups of selected stitches. Warning If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, all stitch editing functions are lost. Where possible, edit the object properties rather than individual stitches. See Adjusting Satin stitch spacing, Adjusting Tatami stitch spacing and length and Adjusting stitch density for details.

To delete stitches

1 Click the Stitch Edit icon. 2 Select a stitch or stitches. 3 Press Delete.
Drag selected stitch to new position shadow outline

Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select individual stitches for deletion.
Select stitches Press Delete

ES 2006 Chapter 17 Editing Stitches and Machine Functions 380

Converting selected stitches to objects

New or revised object outlines can be recognized after stitch edits have been made. This capability is particularly useful with stitch files which have been opened without Object/Outline recognition. You may do this to preserve the original stitching in most of the design, while modifying a single section of it. You may also want to turn edited stitches into an embroidery object in order to preserve the edits. See also Recognizing object/outlines after editing.

To convert selected stitches to objects

1 Click the Stitch Edit icon and select the individual stitches you want to process. See Selecting and deselecting stitches for details. 2 Select Edit > Recognize Object/Outline. The selected stitches are converted to objects.

Editing machine functions

Most machine functions are inserted automatically whenever you select commands or specify object properties. They are stored with the embroidery object and updated whenever the object is modified. However, ES Designer lets you insert machine functions manually. Depending on your Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) together with Recognize Object/Outline to

turn selected stitches into an embroidery object.

Stitches selected Objects and outlines created

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 381 machine, different machine functions are available. The most common types are described below. See your machine manual for further details. Warning When you insert stitches or machine functions manually, you must maintain them manually. If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, all stitch editing and machine functions are lost. For this reason, only insert manual functions if they cannot be added automatically.

Machine function types

ES Designer lets you manually insert color changes, thread trims, jumps, machine stops, needles in and out, and boring functions, depending on the selected machine format.

Color Change functions

Color Change functions tell the machine to use the next thread color in the design. They are automatically inserted when you select a new color from the color palette. See Changing thread colors for details. You only need to insert manual color change functions if you cannot recolor using the standard methods, for example, when using multiple colors within a single object. See Editing machine functions for details.

Trim functions

Trim functions instruct machines with trimmers to cut connecting threads before moving to the next object. You insert trims automatically by setting connector values or using the Trim tool. See Adjusting automatic trim after settings and Adding trims for details. If you need additional trims, you can insert the functions manually. See Editing machine functions for details. Note If a machine does not have a trimmer, the Trim function is ignored. Depending on the machine format, the Trim function may be a code or a sequence of jumps. See Setting trim functions for details.

Stop functions

If you want the embroidery machine to stop for any special reason during stitching, you need to manually insert a Stop function in the stitching sequence. See Editing machine functions for details. ES 2006 Chapter 17 Editing Stitches and Machine Functions 382 Tip Because a Stop function may be inserted for various reasons, you should record the purpose of the stop on the production worksheet to assist the machine operator.

Jump functions

Jump functions cause frame movements without needle penetrations and are used to move smoothly from one part of a design to another. There are various methods for automatically entering Jump functions. ! Apply Auto Jump to preserve long stitches. See Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump for details. ! Digitize individual jumps by right-clicking the Manual icon. See Digitizing individual stitches for details. ! Select jumps as connectors. See Using jumps as connectors for details. ! Create jump connectors manually by digitizing with Penetrations deselected. See Adding jumps with penetrations off for details. If you need additional jumps, you can insert the functions manually. See Editing machine functions for details.

Begin/End Jump functions

The Begin/End Jump functions (formerly known as Needle Out/In) instruct the machine whether or not to use needle penetrations. You insert these functions automatically using the Penetrations tool (formerly known as

Needles In). See Adding jumps with penetrations off for details. If you need additional Begin/End Jump functions, you can insert them manually. See Editing machine functions for details. Note Remember to insert a End Jump function to instruct the machine to resume normal stitching.

Borer In/Out functions

Borer In/Out functions are available for embroidery machines equipped with a borer. They instruct the machine when to use the boring knife or tool instead of a needle. You insert these functions automatically using the Borers tool (formerly known as Borers In). See Digitizing boring holes for details. If you need additional Borer In or Out functions, you can insert them manually. See Editing machine functions for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 383

Sequin On/Off functions

Sequin On and Sequin Off functions are available for embroidery machines that are equipped with a sequin dispenser. The Sequin On function generally instructs the machine to physically lower the sequin dispenser into position for sequins to be placed (fed and cut). These functions are automatically inserted when using the Sequin Mode tool. See Sequins and Boring for details. If you need additional Sequin On or Sequin Off functions, you can insert them manually. See Editing machine functions for details. Some machines, notably Schiffli, use only explicit Drop Sequin functions. These instruct the machine to drop a sequin on the fabric for stitching. Schiffli machines, for example, do not require Sequin On/Off functions. See the ES Schiffli User Manual Supplement for details.

Inserting machine functions manually

You can insert machine functions manually by means of the Insert Function dialog. Depending on your machines requirements, you will either add the function to the current stitch, or insert it on an empty stitch or empty jump. For some machines you will also need to add empty stitches or empty jumps on either side of some functions. See your machine manual for details. Note The available functions and their options depend on the selected machine format. See also Selecting machine formats.

To insert machine functions manually

1 Travel to the position in the design where you want to insert a machine function. See Traveling by stitches for details. 2 Select Machine > Insert Function. Use Insert Function (Machine menu) to insert machine functions manually in your design. ES 2006 Chapter 17 Editing Stitches and Machine Functions 384 The Insert Function dialog opens. Tip It is faster to digitize individual jumpsJump(M)by right-clicking with the Manual input method selected. If you want the whole object to consist of jumps, deselect the Penetrations icon. See Adding jumps with penetrations off for details. 3 From the Available Functions list, select the function you want to insert. With some functions you can choose whether to insert on the current stitch or on an empty stitch. 4 If available, choose the insertion method: ! Insert on Empty Stitch: inserts the selected function on an empty stitch. ! Add to Current stitch: inserts the selected function on the current stitch. Depending on your machine, you may need to insert additional empty stitches or empty jumps before or after the selected function. For

example, before a particular Stop function, you may want to insert a number of empty jumps. See your machine manual for details. 5 To insert additional empty stitches or empty jumps, select one or other in the Component field. ! Select Insert Before if you want the empty stitch/jump to precede the selected function. ! Select Insert After if you want the empty stitch/jump to follow the selected function.
Select from functions available for selected machine format

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 385 To insert multiple empty stitches or jumps, click Add. The selected function, together with any additional empty stitches or jumps, appears in the Sequence panel. 6 Click OK. The selected function, together with any additional empty stitches or jumps, is added at the current needle position. Tip The Stitch List provides an alternative means for inserting machine functions manually. See Editing stitch coordinates with Stitch List for details.

Adding empty stitches/empty jumps to machine functions

You can edit the encoding of machine functions by changing the number or sequence of empty stitches or empty jumps that appear around them. Some machines require a specific number of empty stitches or empty jumps in combination with a function in order to interpret it correctly. You may need to edit functions if they were inserted incorrectly or the machine format has changed.
Additional empty stitches inserted before and after selected function Additional empty jumps inserted before and after selected function

Use Edit Function (Machine menu) to add empty stitches/empty jumps to machine functions. ES 2006 Chapter 17 Editing Stitches and Machine Functions 386 Note You generally only need to edit manually inserted machine functions. Functions added by ES Designer are automatically updated if the machine format changes.

To add empty stitches/empty jumps to machine functions

1 Travel to the function you want to edit. See Traveling by machine function for details. When you reach the function, its name appears in the Prompt line. 2 Select Machine > Edit Function. The Edit Function dialog opens. The Sequence panel shows the current format of the selected function. 3 To insert additional empty stitches or empty jumps, select one or other in the Component field. ! Select Insert Before if you want the empty stitch/jump to precede the selected function. ! Select Insert After if you want the empty stitch/jump to follow the selected function. 4 To insert multiple empty stitches or jumps, click Add. 5 To delete an empty stitch or empty jump from the sequence, select it, then click Remove. 6 Click OK. Tip The Stitch List provides an alternative means for editing machine functions manually. See Editing machine functions with Stitch List for

details.
Select empty stitch or empty jump Insert empty stitch/jump before or after the machine function

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 387

Clearing machine functions

Manually inserted machine functions are not automatically removed or updated when an object is modified. If a function is no longer required, it must be manually cleared from the design. Both automatic and manually-inserted functions can be removed. Tip Check the Prompt line for the functions name to ensure you clear the correct one.

To clear machine functions

1 Travel to the function you want to remove. See Traveling by machine function for details. When you reach the function, its name appears in the Prompt line. 2 Select Machine > Clear Function. The function is removed. Tip The Stitch List provides an alternative means for editing machine functions manually. See Editing machine functions with Stitch List for details.

Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List

You can use the Stitch List to help locate stitches and machine functions for editing. The Stitch List displays stitch number, stitch coordinates, stitch length, stitch function, stitch color. When you select a stitch in the list, it is simultaneously selected in your design.

Editing stitch coordinates with Stitch List

Use the Stitch List to edit the coordinates, and therefore position, of individual stitches. Use Clear Function (Machine menu) to clear a manually inserted machine function from your design. Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Stitch List display on/off. Use it to edit coordinates of individual stitches. ES 2006 Chapter 17 Editing Stitches and Machine Functions 388 Note Changes to stitch coordinates are stitch edits and will be lost if the objects stitches are regenerated.

To edit stitch coordinates with Stitch List

1 Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for details. 2 Double-click the stitch you want to edit. The Move Stitch dialog opens. 3 Enter the new coordinates in the X and Y fields. Note The specified coordinates will change the location of the stitch end point. 4 Click OK. The stitch is regenerated in the new position and the Stitch List information is updated.

Inserting machine functions with Stitch List

You can use the Stitch List to access the Insert Function dialog. This provides a convenient means for inserting machine functions manually into the stitching sequence. Warning When you insert machine functions manually, you must maintain them manually. For this reason, only insert manual functions if they cannot be added automatically.
Enter new coordinates

Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Stitch List display on/off. Use it to insert machine functions directly into the stitching sequence. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 389

To insert machine functions with Stitch List

1 Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for details. 2 Locate the position in the stitching sequence where you want to insert the machine function. 3 Right-click the stitch in the Stitch List and select Insert Function from the popup menu. 4 From the Available Functions list, select the function you want to insert. See Inserting machine functions manually for details. 5 Click OK. The name of the inserted function appears in the Prompt line.

Editing machine functions with Stitch List

You can use the Stitch List to access the Edit Function dialog. This provides a convenient means for editing existing machine functions. The Stitch List also lets you clear machine functions from the stitching sequence. Note You generally only need to edit manually inserted machine functions. Functions added by ES Designer are automatically updated if the machine format changes.

To edit machine functions with Stitch List

Insert machine functions directly

1 Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for details. Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Stitch List display on/off. Use it to edit machine function encoding and to clear machine functions. ES 2006 Chapter 17 Editing Stitches and Machine Functions 390 2 Locate the function you want to edit. 3 Right-click any stitch in the Stitch List and select Edit Function from the popup menu. The Edit Function dialog opens. 4 Edit the function as required. See Editing machine functions for details. 5 To remove the function altogether from the stitching sequence, select Clear Function from the popup menu.

Filtering stitches by function

To filter stitches by function

You can apply a filter to the Stitch List so that only stitches associated with specific functions appear in the list. 1 Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for details. 2 Right-click any stitch in the Stitch List and select Show Functions from the popup menu.
Edit selected machine function

Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Stitch List display on/off. Use it to display stitches associated with specific functions. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 391 The Show Functions dialog opens. 3 Select the functions you want to show. Tip Click Select All to show all function types. To select multiple function types, hold down Ctrl as you select. To select a range, click the first type in the range, then hold down Shift and click the last type in the range. 4 Click OK. Only the selected functions are displayed in the list. Tip To display the text in the associated stitch color, select MultiColored Text from the popup menu. To display the text in black, select Black Text.

5 To show all stitches again, right-click in the Stitch List and select Show All from the popup menu.

Filtering stitches by stitch length

You can apply a filter to the Stitch List so that only stitches of a certain length appear in the list. The main use of this feature is to find stitches which cause production problems, such as short stitches (e.g. < 1.0 mm). See also Removing small stitches automatically.
Select functions to show Only selected functions are displayed

Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Stitch List display on/off. Use it to display only stitches of a certain length. ES 2006 Chapter 17 Editing Stitches and Machine Functions 392

To filter stitches by stitch length

1 Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for details. 2 Right-click any stitch in the Stitch List and select Show Stitches from the popup menu. The Show Stitches dialog opens. 3 Select the range of stitch lengths you want to show. ! Radial corresponds to the actual stitch length. ! Axial X,Y corresponds to the horizontal and vertical frame movements. See Adjusting Auto Jump settings for details. 4 Click OK. Only the selected stitches are displayed in the list.
Show specified stitches Select stitch range to show Only selected stitches are displayed

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 393 Tip To display the text in the associated stitch color, select MultiColored Text from the popup menu. To display the text in black, select Black Text. 5 To show all stitches again, right-click in the Stitch List and select Show All from the popup menu. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 394

PART V ADVANCED
Specialized digitizing techniques

DIGITIZING

ES Designer provides specialized productivity features as well as special effects and digitizing techniques.

Object properties, styles and templates

This section explains how to change the property settings in your design, as well as how to apply, create and maintain styles and templates in ES Designer. See Object Properties, Styles and Templates for details. This section describes how to reinforce outlines. It also describes how to digitize circles, stars and rings. Creating smooth joins, as well as borders and filled holes are covered. You can also find instructions for specialist digitizing with appliqu, sequins and boring. See Specialized Digitizing Techniques for details.

Textured fills

This section describes how to apply textures to fills, and how to adjust their settings to get the results you want. Details of Tatami offsets and partition lines are explained, as well as how to create textures with Program Split and Flexi Split. Adding details with User Defined Split is also covered. See Textured Fills for details. ES 2006 Advanced Digitizing 395

Artistic stitch effects

This section describes how to create artistic effects with Jagged Edge, Accordion Spacing, and Color Blending, and how to adjust their settings to get the results you want. Creating contoured stitch effects with the Contour feature is also covered, as well as how to create curved fills with Florentine Effect and Liquid Effect. See Artistic Stitch Effects for details.

Motif runs and fills

This section describes how to insert motifs into your design, and how to rotate, mirror and scale them. It explains how to manage motifs, including how to create your own motifs and motif sets. It also describes how to create both motif runs and motif fills, as well as how to apply 3D effects to motif fills. See Motif Runs and Fills for details.

Sequins and Boring

This section describes how to set up custom sequin palettes for the creation of sequin designs. It also describes how to create sequin runs and digitize individual sequins, as well as how to convert sequin artwork to Sequin Run. Scaling and reshaping sequin runs is also explained as well as digitizing boring holes. See Sequins and Boring for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 396

Chapter 18

Object Properties, Styles and Templates

Every object you create in ES Designer has a unique set of properties that are stored with it whenever you save the design. These properties define general characteristics such as size and position, as well as embroidery-specific characteristics such as stitch type and density. The stitch properties determine how stitches will be regenerated when you reshape, transform or scale the object.

Default property settings

Default or starting property settings are the ones stored with the design template. These are automatically applied to any newly created objects in the design.

Current property settings

Current property settings override the template defaults. Unless you deliberately change them, these take the default values. You generally change them to save time when digitizing. For example, you may preset Tatami stitch spacing to use a specific density for all new Tatami objects you create. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 397 Note When you close the design, the current settings are not automatically saved. You can save them as the new default settings of the current template or to another template altogether.

Object properties

Each object has its own unique set of properties stored with it. You can set the properties of a selected object to be the current property settings. You can also apply current property settings to existing objects.

Styles

A style is a group of property settings stored under a unique name. You can save any combination of settings to a style. This makes it easy to apply these settings to selected embroidery and lettering objects. When you apply a style to an object, the style settings replace its current properties. Any properties not specified in the style, retain their current settings.

Templates

Templates are special files used to store styles and default property settings. Use templates when digitizing frequently-used design types to save time re-adjusting the current property settings. This section explains how to change the property settings in your design, as well as how to apply, create and maintain styles and templates in ES Designer.

Working with object properties

When you create an embroidery object, you can simply accept the default settings or apply new ones. Default property settings are stored with the design template. You can also define current settings to influence all the objects you create in the current design. You can change an objects properties at any time without affecting those of any other object. Alternatively, you can make any changes to the selected object current for all new objects. Alternatively again, you can change all the current property settings in the Object Properties dialog with no objects selected at all. You can then apply current settings to any existing objects. You can also save any modified settings to the current template as the new default property settings. Tip You can save any combination of settings to custom styles. See Working with styles for details. ES 2006 Chapter 18 Object Properties, Styles and Templates 398

Changing properties of existing objects

You can change an objects properties at any time without affecting those of any other object not currently selected. Nor do such changes affect the current or default settings. Some properties can be modified on-screenfor example, you can change the size properties by scaling the object with the selection handles. Other properties, such as stitch spacing or length, can only be modified via the Object Properties dialog. If you select more than one object, the Object Properties dialog will only display tabs relevant to all selected objects. For example, if you select a Complex Fill object and an Input C object, neither of these tabs will display as the settings do not apply to both. If selected objects have different values for the same settinge.g. stitch lengththe field will be blank. If you enter a new value, it will apply to both objects.

To change properties of an existing object

1 Select an object and double-click. The Object Properties dialog opens. Tabs display at the top of the Object Properties dialog. These provide access to all possible object property settings. 2 Select a tab to view the object properties and adjust as required. 3 Click the FX button to access another set of tabs. 4 When you are finished, click Apply.
Select tab Modify settings as required Click to apply settings Click to access another set of tabs

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 399 These settings are applied to the selected object. They do not affect current settings or those newly created objects. See also Making selected object properties current.

Tip Some properties, such as Auto Underlay, are applied by means of toolbar buttons. When the button is selected, that tools settings are current.

Making selected object properties current

You can make the properties of an existing object current for all newly created objects. Note Only the settings applicable to the selected object change. Other settings retain their current values. For example, if you make the properties of a selected Input C object current, settings specific to Complex Fill will not change.

To make selected object properties current

1 Select the object on which you want to base the current properties. 2 Click the Make Properties Current icon. The properties of the selected object become the current ones. You can now create new objects with these settings or apply them to existing objects. Tip To check that the now current settings are as you intended, open the Object Properties dialog.

Modifying current property settings

Whenever you change the current property settings, these will automatically apply to any new objects you create. If you know which settings you require before digitizing, you can preset them. Click Make Properties Current (Styles toolbar) to make the properties of a selected object current for the design. Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties dialog on/off. Use it to set properties for the current design. ES 2006 Chapter 18 Object Properties, Styles and Templates 400 Note Some object properties, such as Auto Underlay, are made current by means of toolbar buttons. When the button is selected, that tools settings are current.

To modify current property settings

1 With no objects selected, click the Object Properties icon. The Object Properties dialog opens. Tabs display at the top of the Object Properties dialog. These provide access to all possible object property settings. 2 Select a tab to view the current settings and adjust as required. 3 Click the FX button to access another set of tabs. 4 When you are finished, click Apply. These settings are current for all newly created objects. You can apply them to existing objects by means of the Apply Properties Current tool. See Applying current settings to existing objects for details.

Applying current settings to existing objects

Select tab Modify settings as required Click to apply settings Click to access another set of tabs

Use Apply Current Properties (Styles toolbar) to apply current settings to selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 401 When you change the current property settings, these apply to all new objects you create but not automatically to any existing objects. However, you can apply them to selected objects as required.

To apply current settings to existing objects

1 Select the object (or objects) whose properties you want to change. 2 Click the Apply Current Properties icon. The current values are immediately updated.

Changing default property settings

You can change default property settings at any time by saving the current settings in the Object Properties dialog to the current template. If the settings you are saving are based on a selected object, only these values are updated in the template. Note All changes affect any new designs created using this template. If you only want the changes to apply to the design you are working in, change the currentnot the defaultproperties. See Modifying current property settings for details.

To change default property settings

1 With or without any objects selected, click the Object Properties icon. Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties dialog on/off. Use it to set change default property settings for the current template. ES 2006 Chapter 18 Object Properties, Styles and Templates 402 The Object Properties dialog opens. 2 Select the tab you want and change the settings as required. 3 Click Save. The object properties are saved to the current template. These will apply to any new objects in any design based on this template. Tip You may wish to save your modified property settings to a custom template for certain specialist purposes. See Working with design templates for details.

Working with styles

A style is a group of property settings stored under a unique name. You can save any combination of settings to your styles. This makes it easy to apply them to selected embroidery and lettering objects. When you apply a style to an object, the style settings replace its current properties. Any properties not specified in the style, retain their current settings. Styles are stored with the design template. The NORMAL template provides a selection of preset styles for you to use. You can modify these as required and save them back to the NORMAL template or to your own custom templates. Each template may contain specific styles for different types of embroidery. See also Working with design templates.

Styles toolbar
Change settings as required Click to save to template

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 403 Use the Styles toolbar to quickly apply styles in your design. This toolbar lets you: ! apply current settings to selected objects ! change current settings, and ! apply styles to selected objects. The styles you select as favorites are each assigned a tool icon on the toolbar.

Applying styles

When you select a style, the settings overwrite the current property settings. You can apply a style to current property settings before you digitize, or to a selected object. See also Working with object properties. Tip If you are using a digitizing tablet, you can quickly switch between preset styles. Each button on the puck accesses the next preset style with different spacing settings. For example, clicking Button 1 accesses <PRESET_SATIN_1>.

To apply styles

1 Click the Apply Style icon. The Use Object Style dialog opens.

2 Select a style from the dropdown list, then click OK. ! If an object is selected, the style settings are applied to it alone. ! If no object is selected, the style settings become the current property settings, and apply to any new objects you create. Click Apply Style (Styles toolbar) to apply a style from the template to new or selected objects. Use the Styles toolbar to apply favorite styles to new or selected objects.
My Style

ES 2006 Chapter 18 Object Properties, Styles and Templates 404 Any settings that are not specified in the style will remain unchanged. Tip To apply a favorite style, click the Favorite Style icon assigned to it. See also Assigning favorite styles.

Select style

Defining new styles

Define new styles for a template, either from scratch, or based on an existing style or object. You can create styles in the Object Properties box by specifying settings in any or all of the tabs. New styles are saved to the current template. Note The stitch type, settings and effects you specify for the new style do not automatically change the current property settings. See also Applying current settings to existing objects.

To define new styles

1 To base the new style on an existing object, select it now. To base it on the current settings, make sure no objects are selected. 2 Select Stitch > Define Style. The Organize Styles dialog opens. 3 Click New.
Style 1, E stitch spacing 0.75mm Style 2, E stitch spacing 1.25mm Style 3, E stitch spacing 1.75mm

Select Define Style (Stitch menu) to make the properties of a selected object current for the design.
My Style

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 405 The New Object Style dialog opens. 4 Enter a name in the Style Name field. 5 To base the new style on an existing style, select it from the Based On Style dropdown list. Tip If you want the new style to be added to the Style toolbar, select the Add to Favorites checkbox. 6 Click OK. The Object Properties dialog opens. If you selected a style to base the new style on, those settings will display. 7 Update the Object Properties tabs for the new style. Note You do not have to enter values in all fields, only those you specifically wish to store. 8 Click Apply and close the dialogs. The new style is saved to the current template.

Click to define new style

Assigning favorite styles

To assign favorite styles
My Style My New Style

You can assign up to ten favorite styles to tool icons on the Styles toolbar. To apply the style, you then simply select the tool. 1 Select Stitch > Define Style.
Enter name for new style Select style to base it on

Select Define Style (Stitch menu) to assign a favorite style. ES 2006 Chapter 18 Object Properties, Styles and Templates 406 The Organize Styles dialog opens. 2 Click Favorites. The Organize Favorites dialog opens. 3 Click Add. The Add To Favorites dialog opens. 4 Select a style from the list. 5 Click OK. 6 Change the order in which the favorites will appear on the Styles toolbar using Move Up and Move Down. 7 Click OK and then Close. The styles are assigned in the order they appear in the Organize Favorites box. The tool tip for each button shows the style name.
Organize favorite styles Select style
My Style My New Style

Click Add
My New Style

Select style

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 407

Merging styles
To merge styles

You can merge settings from one style to another. When you merge, the settings from the second style overwrite the first. 1 Select Stitch > Define Style. The Organize Styles dialog opens. 2 Select a style to merge to. 3 Click Merge. The Merge With Style dialog opens. 4 Select a style to merge from and click OK. 5 Close the dialogs. The first selected style is updated and saved to the current template.

Modifying styles
My Style My New Style

Select Define Style (Stitch menu) to merge style settings.

Click to merge styles Select style My Old Style Select style

Select Define Style (Stitch menu) to modify a style. ES 2006 Chapter 18 Object Properties, Styles and Templates 408 You can modify all styles, including the preset styles in the NORMAL template. Tip At some stage, you may want to revert to the original style settings in the NORMAL template. See Reverting to the NORMAL template for details.

To modify a style

1 Select Stitch > Define Style. The Organize Styles dialog opens. 2 Select a style and click Edit. The Object Properties dialog opens. 3 Change the settings in the tabs as required. See Modifying current property settings for details. 4 Click Apply. A warning message asks you to confirm that you want to overwrite the existing style settings. 5 Close the dialogs. The modified style is updated and saved to the current template. Note Changes apply only to future uses of the style. Existing objects based on the style are not affected.

Renaming styles

You can rename a style without affecting its settings.

My Style My New Style

Click to edit style Select style

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 409 Tip At some stage, you may want to revert to the original style settings in the NORMAL template. See Reverting to the NORMAL template for details.

To rename a style

1 Select Stitch > Define Style. The Organize Styles dialog opens. 2 Select a style to rename. 3 Click Rename. The Rename Object Style dialog opens. 4 Enter a new style name and OK. 5 Close the dialogs. The style is renamed.

Deleting styles

You can remove any unwanted styles from a template. Tip At some stage, you may want to revert to the original style settings in the NORMAL template. See Reverting to the NORMAL template for details.
My Style My New Style

Click to rename style Select style My Style 1 Enter new style name

ES 2006 Chapter 18 Object Properties, Styles and Templates 410

To delete styles

1 Select Stitch > Define Style. The Organize Styles dialog opens. 2 Select a style to delete and click Remove. A warning message asks you to confirm the deletion. 3 Close the dialogs. The style is deleted from the current template and removed from the list of style names. Note To remove all styles from a template click Remove All.

Working with design templates

Templates are special files used to store styles and default settings. Use templates when digitizing frequently-used design types so that you do not have to set the current property settings every time. For example, a template may include standard objects and sample lettering. It may simply have preferred stitch settings, lettering font and size, and colors set as current settings. Or it may have special density, pull compensation or underlay settings to suit different fabrics.

The NORMAL template

The NORMAL template is the default template supplied with ES Designer. It contains current property settings as well as a selection of preset styles. These styles include variations on the current property settings. For example, <PRESET_SATIN_1> and <PRESET_SATIN_2> contains different
My Style 1 My New Style

Click to remove style Select style

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 411 stitch spacing settings for Satin stitches. You can view and modify the settings for these styles at any time. See Modifying styles for details. Note If necessary, you can revert to the original NORMAL template after modifying it. See Reverting to the NORMAL template for details.

Creating design templates

You create templates from designs containing the required objects and property settings. Simply save the design, or elements of it, as a template.

Templates look the same as design files, but use the file extension EMT. Note You cannot overwrite templates by accident. Each time you create a new design from a template, ES Designer opens a duplicate. When you save the design the first time, the Save As dialog opens so you can save the template under a new name.

To create a design template

1 Start a new design or open an existing one. 2 Adjust the property settings, styles, and effects as required. 3 Add the objects and lettering you want to appear in the template. Tip You can enter lettering baselines on their own but it helps to include sample text. You can overtype the sample text when using the template. 4 Select File > Save As. The Save As dialog opens.
Select Design Templates (EMT) Enter template name

ES 2006 Chapter 18 Object Properties, Styles and Templates 412 5 Select Design Templates (EMT) from Save as type list. ES Designer automatically opens the ESWin\Template folder. Design templates must be saved here or they will not appear in the template list when you start a new design. 6 Enter a name for the template in the File name field. 7 Click Save.

Using design templates

When you start a new design from the File > New menu, a list of the available templates appears in the New dialog. See Creating new designs with selected templates for details. Note The template list only appears when you start a design from the File menu. If you select the New tool on the Standard toolbar, the NORMAL template is applied by default. See also Creating new designs with the NORMAL template.

Modifying design templates

You can modify templates in the same way as a normal design. Note Changes apply only to future uses of the template. Existing designs based on the template are not affected.

To modify design templates

1 Select File > Open. The Open dialog opens. 2 Navigate to the ESWin\Template folder, then select Templates (EMT) from the Files of type list. The available template files display. 3 Select the template you want to modify and click Open. 4 Modify property settings, styles and other settings as required. 5 Select File > Save As. The Save As dialog opens. 6 From the Save as type list, select Templates (EMT). 7 Enter the name of the template and click Save. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 413 Tip To create a new template based on the modified one, type a new file name and click Save. 8 Click Yes to confirm. The modified template is ready for use.

Saving current properties to a template

To save current properties to a template

You can easily save current property settings to the current template. See also Working with object properties. 1 Access the Object Properties dialog. ! To use the current property settings, deselect all objects, then click

the Object Properties icon. ! To use the properties for a particular object, select the object, then double-click it. The Object Properties dialog opens. 2 Change property settings as required. See Modifying current property settings for details. Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to change current properties.
Select tab Modify settings as required Click to save to current template

ES 2006 Chapter 18 Object Properties, Styles and Templates 414 3 Click Save. The modified settings are saved to the current template. Note Only the current property settingsnot the objects or other settings in the designare saved to the template. Tip To save more than one set of property settings to the template, save them as styles. See Defining new styles for details.

Reverting to the NORMAL template

If you modify the NORMAL template supplied with ES Designer, you can revert to the original version. A factory copy is always maintained so that the NORMAL template can be restored.

To revert to the NORMAL template

1 Close ES Designer. 2 Click the Windows Start button and select Programs > Wilcom ES> Revert. The Revert to Factory Template dialog opens. 3 Select the Templates checkbox and click OK. The original settings for the NORMAL template are restored.
Select Templates Click OK

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 415

Deleting design templates

Delete templates in the same way as you would any other Windows file, using Windows Explorer. Templates are located in the ESWin\Template folder. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 416

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing Techniques

ES Designer provides specialized digitizing features to save time as you digitize, and for special effects and machine functions. There are input tools for digitizing circles, stars, rings and appliqu objects, as well as methods for creating repeated or backtracked duplicates, adding borders or filling holes. If your machine type supports boring or sequining, you can use ES Designer to digitize these effects as well. This section describes how to reinforce outlines. It also describes how to digitize circles, stars and rings. Creating smooth joins, as well as borders and filled holes are covered. You can also find instructions for specialist digitizing with appliqu, sequins and boring.

Digitizing circles, stars and rings

ES Designer provides special time-saving input tools for digitizing circles, stars, rings. Use the Ring and Circle tools to digitize circles or rings and the Star tool for smaller scale star effects. You can use any fill stitch type with circles and ovals although Contour stitch only looks effective with long, narrow ovals.
circle with Program Split star ring with Contour

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 417

Digitizing circles and ovals

Digitize filled circles and ovals with a few clicks. You can use any fill stitch type with circles and ovals although Contour stitch looks most effective with long, narrow ovals. Tip To achieve a spiral contour fill effect for a circle, digitize the circle using a different input methode.g. Ringleaving a small hole in the middle.

To digitize circles and ovals

1 Click the Circle/Star icon. 2 Digitize the circle or oval. ! Click to mark the center of the circle or oval. A circle outline attaches to the pointer. ! Move the pointer until the outline is the required size, then click to mark the radius reference point. This point becomes the entry point for the whole object. The stitch angle will be perpendicular to the line connecting the center point and the radius reference point. ! To create a circle, press Enter. ! To create an oval, click again to mark a second radius point, and press Enter. Use Circle/Star (Input toolbar) to digitize filled circles and ovals.
oval with Contour circle with Program Split 1
90

reference point reference point 3 2 center

ES 2006 Chapter 19 Specialized Digitizing Techniques 418

Digitizing stars

You can digitize circles and ovals which use turning Zigzag stitches to create a Star or French dot. Note Stars are only stitched using Zigzag. You cannot select a different stitch type for this effect. See also Corresponding object and stitch types.

To digitize stars

1 Right-click the Circle/Star icon. 2 Digitize the reference points for the star. ! Click to mark the center of the star. A circle outline attaches to the pointer. ! Move the pointer until the outline is the required size, then click to mark the radius reference point. This point becomes the entry point for the whole object. ! To create a circular star, press Enter. ! To create an oval star, click again to mark the second radius point, then press Enter.

Digitizing rings
1

Use Circle/Star (Input toolbar) to digitize star shapes filled with Zigzag stitching.

center 2 reference point

Use Ring (Input toolbar) to digitize circle and oval-shaped rings. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 419 Create rings by digitizing circles and ovals within each other. Use different combinations of inner and outer boundary shapes to create different effects. You can digitize rings with a variety of fill stitch types. Contour stitch is well suited to rings, as it runs stitches around the ring in a spiral pattern. See also Corresponding stitch types, input methods, and effects. Tip Digitize the inner circle first to ensure that the stitches push outwards.

To digitize rings

1 Click the Ring icon. 2 Digitize the inner boundary of the ring. ! Click once to mark the center of the inner boundary. A circle outline attaches to the pointer. ! Move the pointer until the outline is the required size, and click to mark the radius reference point. This point becomes the entry point for the whole object. ! Press Enter to create a circle, or click again to mark a second radius point for an oval. The outline of the second boundary now attaches to the pointer.
circle in oval oval in circle oval in oval ring with Satin ring with Contour ring with Tatami

ES 2006 Chapter 19 Specialized Digitizing Techniques 420 3 Digitize the outer boundary of the ring in the same way as the first, then press Enter.

Reinforcing outlines
Use Backtrack and Repeat to reinforce outlines while specifying the direction of the stitching. Backtrack stitches in reverse direction to the original. It is typically used to make run stitch outlines thicker without creating unwanted connecting stitches. Repeat duplicates the original stitch direction and is typically used with closed shapes. Note If you use Repeat for open shapes, a connecting stitch is inserted from the end to the start of the object which will require trimming.

To reinforce outlines

1 Select the object (or objects) to reinforce an outline. 2 Click the Backtrack/Repeat icon to backtrack, right-click to repeat. The object is duplicated and placed on top of the original. It is the same color as the original and is positioned after it in the stitching sequence. 3 Check that the object has been duplicated by using one of the following methods: Use Backtrack / Repeat (Pointer toolbar) to reinforce an outline, stitching it in the same or opposite direction.
center reference point reference point 1 2 3 4 reference point Use Backtrack for open shapes Use Repeat for closed shapes

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 421 ! Check the stitch count in the Status Line. ! Use Slow Redraw. See Redrawing the stitching sequence slowly for details. ! Travel through the stitches. See Viewing the stitching sequence for

details.

Removing underlying stitching

Use the Remove Overlaps command to remove the underlying layer of stitching in overlapping objects. This helps to reduce the stitch count and prevent a build-up of stitches where they are not needed. See also Shaping vector and embroidery objects.

To remove underlying stitching

1 Select one or more cutters. 2 Select Arrange > Remove Overlaps. Use Remove Overlaps (Arrange menu) to remove overlapping stitches.
Select cutters

ES 2006 Chapter 19 Specialized Digitizing Techniques 422 The Remove Overlaps dialog opens. 3 In the Cutters panel, enter the minimum object width and the maximum stitch spacing allowed. These settings are useful if, for example, you choose an entire design as a cutter and wish to exclude objects, such as borders or details, less than a certain width. The Maximum Stitch Spacing setting allows you to exclude background stitches of a certain density. 4 Select Accordion Allowed to include Accordion Spacing objects. By default, the software treats Accordion Spacing objects as backgrounds and excludes them from the cutting operation. This option allows you to include them. 5 Enter the amount of overlap required in the Cutting Overlaps field. 6 In the Minimum Fragments field, enter the size of the smallest object that will be produced after cutting. This eliminates the generation of small objects and unnecessary color changes. 7 Click OK.
Set cutter values Enter amount of overlap Enter size of smallest permissible object Cutting Overlap: 0.5 mm Cutting Overlap: 2.0 mm Cutting Overlap: 3.5 mm

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 423 The stitching overlap is removed. Tip You can use an entire design as a cutter excluding objects, such as borders or details, less than a certain width.

Splitting long stitches with Auto Split

If a Satin shape is wide, some stitches may exceed the maximum stitch the particular embroidery machine can produce. When Auto Split is applied, ES Designer breaks any long Satin stitches into shorter ones. It also distributes needle penetrations in a random pattern so that they do not form a line in the middle of the shape. While Auto Split is used primarily to prevent long stitches in wide columns, it can also be used as an alternative to Tatami fill. Auto Split looks more Satin-like and works well with turning stitches, creating soft lines and a little more depth. By contrast, Tatami is flat and can show unwanted patterns with tight curves. Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Auto Split to new or selected Satin objects.
Auto Split OFF Auto Split ON

ES 2006 Chapter 19 Specialized Digitizing Techniques 424 Note If you want to preserve the Satin effectfor example, if only a few stitches are too longyou can use Auto Jump instead. Auto Split must be turned off for Auto Jump to take effect. See Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump for details. If you do not apply either Auto Split or Auto Jump, the stitches are split into smaller stitches of equal length. The line formed by the needle penetrations

will be visible in the final embroidery.

To split long stitches with Auto Split

1 Right-click the Satin icon. The Object Properties > Special dialog opens. 2 Select the Auto Split checkbox. 3 In the Length field, enter the maximum Satin stitch length to allow before Auto Split is applied. Stitches that exceed this value will be split into smaller stitches. This value can be smaller than the maximum stitch generally used in the design. Tip Use a length of 7.00 mm to preserve the Satin effect.
Select Auto Split Adjust max and min stitch lengths Length: 5 mm Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm Length: 4 mm Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm Length: 3 mm Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 425 4 In the Minimum Stitch field, enter the shortest stitch that can be generated when using Auto Split. 5 Click Apply. Tip As an alternative to Auto Split, try a textured Tatami fill or Program Split. Or, use User Defined Split to manage split lines in Satin fills. See Textured Fills for details.

Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump

Embroidery machines have a maximum possible stitch length which is determined by the frame movement limitations of the machine itself. If a stitch exceeds this, it is broken into smaller stitches. This can affect the appearance of the embroidery, especially Satin fills. By applying Auto Jump,
Length: 4 mm Minimum Stitch: 5 mm Length: 4 mm Minimum Stitch: 3 mm Length: 4 mm Minimum Stitch: 1 mm with Tatami with Program Split with User Defined Split

ES 2006 Chapter 19 Specialized Digitizing Techniques 426 you can preserve long stitches in an object by turning them into a series of jumps. Note Auto Jump is applied by default to connectors. See also Using jumps as connectors. Auto Jump can be used, for example, with manually digitized underlays. It can also be used to create quilted effects, for example, by applying it to Satin areas that are over-stitched with Run stitch or Motif Fill. To create a narrow column with more loft than normal Satin, apply Auto Jump, in conjunction with a suitable underlay, with the maximum stitch length set to a small valuee.g. 6 mm. If the cover stitches are short, splitting them with a jump makes them looser and thus more effectively raised off the fabric. See also Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays. Note The maximum frame movement is defined in the software by the machine format values. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details.

Applying Auto Jump

Auto Jump OFF Auto Jump ON

Use Auto Jump (Stitch Types toolbar) to preserve long stitches in new and selected objects. Right-click to adjust settings. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 427

Apply Auto Jump to objects with stitches that exceed the maximum stitch length. Note Many machines trim by jumps. Thus, to prevent the trimmers being activated, usually only one or two jumps between needle penetrations may be used. See also Setting trim functions.

To apply Auto Jump

! Click the Auto Jump icon with or without objects selected.

With no objects selected, Auto Jump is applied to all new objects. For both new or selected objects, Auto Jump is based on current properties. ! Click again to turn off the effect.

Adjusting Auto Jump settings

You can adjust Auto Jump settings to vary the length at which stitches are converted to jumps, the length of the jumps themselves, and the method of calculating stitch length.

To adjust Auto Jump settings

1 Right-click the Auto Jump icon.
jump stitchesnot trimmed NO jump stitches additional needle penetrations

Right-click Auto Jump (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust settings. ES 2006 Chapter 19 Specialized Digitizing Techniques 428 The Object Properties > Auto Jump dialog opens. 2 Select the Auto Jump checkbox. 3 In the Maximum Stitch field, enter the maximum stitch length to allow. Stitches exceeding this value will have Auto Jump applied. Note This value must be smaller than or equal to the maximum stitch length possible for the selected machine format. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details. 4 In the Jump Length field, enter the length of each jump. Smaller jumps increase the time required to stitch out, but move the frame more smoothly across the design. 5 In the Length Calculation panel, click the required method of calculating stitch length. ! Along Radius: measures the distance between two consecutive needle penetrations. ! Along Axis: measures either the horizontal or vertical movement required for the stitch. The option you select depends on the way your machine measures stitch length. See your embroidery machines documentation for details. 6 Click Apply.
Select Auto Jump Enter maximum stitch and jump length settings Select calculation method measured along radius measured along axis Y X maximum stitch maximum stitch maximum stitch

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 429

Creating outlines and filling holes

ES Designer provides tools for quickly creating outlines and filled areas based on existing boundaries. The Offset Object feature creates new outlines (up to eight) from the outlines of selected objects with both fixed and variable spacings. The Filled Holes feature creates filled objects from the outlines of selected Complex Fill objects.

Creating offset objects with fixed spacings

Use the Offset Object tool to quickly create new outlines from selected objects. Any closed object can be used, including vector objects, runs, or any of the input types. The generated outline is an independent object that can be reshaped or modified as required. Use offset objects to highlight design detailse.g. small Satin objectsor create seamless borders. You can center generated objects over the original outline or offset them. Various offset object types are availableRun, Triple Run, Motif Run or Input C, Backstitch, Stemstitch, or vector objects. You can even create offset Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects.

To create offset objects with fixed spacings

1 Select the source object. 2 Click the Offset Object icon. Use Offset Object (Generate toolbar) to create accurate outlines for any filled embroidery object or any closed vector object.
Run outline Stemstitch outline Motif outline Input C outline

ES 2006 Chapter 19 Specialized Digitizing Techniques 430 The Offset Object dialog opens. 3 Select Fixed Offset and enter the required offset in millimeters. ! To center the generated object over the original, accept the default value of 0.00. ! To position the generated object outside the original, enter a positive offset (e.g. 1.00). ! To position the generated object inside the original, enter a negative offset (e.g. -1.00). Note For Complex Fill objects, offset objects are created around all boundaries. If necessary, select any unwanted objects, and press Delete.
Enter required offset Enter offset count Select rounded or squared corners Choose target object type Replace the original object if required Source object Negative Offset Zero Offset Positive Offset

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 431 4 In the Offset Count field, enter the required number of offset objects. Note If the Use Spiral checkbox is selected, the offsets are joined together to create one or more spirals, according to the geometry of the original outline. The Offset Count field needs to be set to 2 or more. 5 Select rounded or squared corners as required. Note The squared option allows you to adjust the angle limitfirst select Cut Sharp Corners and set required angle value. 6 From the Object Type list, select an object type for the offset object(s).
Source object Offset Count: 1 Offset Count: 2 Offset Count: 3 Spiral Offset Object: 2 Spiral Offset Object: 3 Spiral Offset Object: 4 Squared

Angle limit: 30 Squared Rounded Angle limit: 20 Squared

ES 2006 Chapter 19 Specialized Digitizing Techniques 432 Note If you select Complex Fill as the outline object type, you get a complete offset shape, not just an outline. Tip If you are using Input C, set the column width in the Object Properties dialog before you start as the default setting is generally too wide. 7 Adjust the Approximation setting as required. This controls the smoothness of the generated object outlinethe larger the value, the smoother the curve. The smaller the value, the greater the number of reshape points. Tip If the value is set to zero, there is no approximation and the generated outline is unsmoothed. This is suitable for use with cutting machines. 8 Choose to replace the original or source object with the offset object as required. If this option is selected, the offset object replaces the original in the same position in the stitching order. The start and end points of the resultant object will be as close as possible to those of the source object. 9 Click OK. Warning If angle lines in the offset object cross, they are removed one-by-one until the object can be generated. If this happens, you are prompted to continue.

Creating offset objects with variable spacings

Approximation: 0 mm Approximation: 0.3 mm Approximation: 0.6mm

Use Offset Object (Generate toolbar) to create accurate outlines for any filled embroidery object or any closed vector object. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 433 The Offset List allows you to specify up to eight offsets with different spacings. All objects are created by offsetting from the original selection. Offsets are cumulative.

To create offset objects with variable spacings

1 Select the source object. 2 Click the Offset Object icon. The Offset Object dialog opens. 3 Select Use Offset List and click Offset List. The Offset List dialog opens. 4 Select the required number of offset objects using the checkboxes.
Select variable offset Select rounded or squared corners Choose a target object type Replace the original object if required Select required number of offsets Specify offset values

ES 2006 Chapter 19 Specialized Digitizing Techniques 434 5 Set the offset values for different spacings and click OK. The Result column gives you the cumulative total of each offset. 6 Select other options as required. See Creating offset objects with fixed spacings for details. 7 Click OK.

Filling holes in objects

Create new objects from boundaries in Complex Fill or Fusion Fill objects using the Filled Holes feature. This lets you fill holes formed by existing boundaries, without having to re-digitize the shape. When you fill a hole, a new object is created using the current fill stitch type. You can choose to fill the hole exactly or offset it.

To fill holes in objects

1 Select the source object. 2 Select Insert > Filled Holes.

Offset Object: 2 Offset Object: 3 Offset Object: 4

Use Filled Holes (Insert menu) to create new objects from object outlines.
positive offset-gap between objects negative offsetoverlapping objects

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 435 The Holes dialog opens. 3 In the Offset field, enter the offset value. ! To cover holes exactly, accept the default value of 0.00. ! To leave a gap between the filled holes and the original object, enter a positive offset (e.g. 1.00). ! To overlap the filled holes and the original object, enter a negative offset (e.g. -1.00). Overlapping the objects prevents gaps appearing between them. 4 Click OK. All holes in the object are converted to Complex Fill objects and are filled with the current fill stitch type and color. You can modify the outlines and object properties of the filled holes in the normal way. Note If you do not want to fill all the holes, select the unwanted new objects, and press Delete.

Adding borders to designs

Enter required offset Offset: Source object 0.00 Offset: 1.00 Offset: -1.00

Use Borders (Generate toolbar) to edit letters in envelopes on-screen. ES 2006 Chapter 19 Specialized Digitizing Techniques 436 Add decorative borders such as rectangles, ovals, and shields to designs using the Borders library. When you add a border, it is automatically sized to fit the current design. Adjust border thickness and size as required.

To add borders to designs

1 Open the design. 2 Click the Borders icon. The Select Border dialog opens. 3 Select a border and adjust the Border Width setting as required. The default is 3.00 mm. This value can be adjusted after insertion in the design. 4 Click Make Current.
Select border Click to insert Adjust border width

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 437 The Select Border dialog closes and the border is generated to include all design elements in the design window. 5 Change the thread color as required. Note Thread color defaults to the last object in the design. 6 Adjust border size as required. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.

Digitizing for appliqu

Automatically create all the stitching you need for appliqu using the Auto Appliqu tool. When you digitize an object with Auto Appliqu, the guide run, tacking and cover stitches are automatically generated using the current Auto Appliqu settings. You can also extract appliqu shapes from a design to output to a cutter or to a separate file. See Cutting appliqu shapes for details. Tip Apply Smart Corners to appliqu objects as required. See Controlling corner stitching for details. Tip Print a copy of appliqu patterns to use in cutting out fabric pieces. Each appliqu pattern piece is numbered according to the stitching sequence. See Printing appliqu patterns for details.

Creating appliqu objects

Use Auto Appliqu to produce the stitching you require for appliqu objects. Appliqu objects are digitized in the same way as Complex Fill objects and may have multiple boundaries. Tip You can also convert Complex Fill and vector objects to appliqu by selecting them, then clicking the Auto Appliqu icon. Use Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to digitize appliqu objects. ES 2006 Chapter 19 Specialized Digitizing Techniques 438

To create appliqu objects

1 Click the Auto Appliqu icon. 2 Digitize the boundary of the appliqu, by marking reference points around the outline of the shape. ! Click to create a corner point. ! Right-click to create a curve point. Tip Follow the prompts in the Prompt Line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last reference point, then continue digitizing. 3 Press Enter to close the shape. 4 Click the outline to set the stitch entry and exit points or press Enter to accept the defaults. 5 If prompted to do so, mark the frame-out position. ! To use the current frame out values, press Enter. See also Adjusting the default frame-out position. ! To specify a frame out position, click a point on the design. Note If you select None as the Frame Out option in the Object Properties > Auto Appliqu dialog for both guide and tack stitching, you will not be prompted to enter a frame out position. See Adjusting guide run settings or Adjusting tacking settings for details. 6 Press Enter.
frame out position

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 439 Up to four layers of stitchingguide run, cutting line, tack and coverare generated for the appliqu object, depending on the current Auto Appliqu values. Tip When you stitch out an appliqu object, the machine stops between layers. Before you start, lay the fabric over the design and start the machine. When the guideline has been stitched, trim the excess appliqu material and start the machine again for the tack and cover stitch.

Adjusting guide run settings

A guide run is a layer of run stitches around the outline of an appliqu object. It is the first appliqu layer stitched and is used to position the appliqu fabric on the background material. You can adjust the guide run

stitch length, offset and frame-out setting.

To adjust guide run settings

1 Right-click the Auto Appliqu icon. The Object Properties > Special dialog opens. 2 Enter Stitch length and Offset values as required in the Guide Run panel. Right-click Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to adjust Auto Appliqu guide run settings.
Adjust settings for guide run stitching

ES 2006 Chapter 19 Specialized Digitizing Techniques 440 A negative offset value moves the guide run within the outline, a positive value moves it outside. 3 Select a Frame Out option to insert a Stop or Color Change function after the guide run. Note If you select None for both guide and tack stitching, you will not be prompted to enter a frame-out position. 4 Click Apply.

Adjusting the default frame-out position

When you stitch out appliqu objects, you can set a frame-out position. This shifts the hoop out from under the needle, making it easier to place and trim the appliqu shapes. The frame-out settings determine the distance and direction of the hoop movement.

To adjust the default frame-out position

1 Right-click the Auto Appliqu icon. The Object Properties > Special dialog opens. 2 In the Frame Out panel, set the frame-out coordinates.
Offset: 1 mm Offset: -1 mm Offset: 0 mm

Right-click Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to adjust Auto Appliqu frame out settings.
Set frame out coordinates

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 441 ! X: enter a horizontal distance for the hoop to move. ! Y: enter a vertical distance for the hoop to move. 3 Click Apply.

Adjusting tacking settings

Tacking is used to fix appliqu shapes to a background fabric before cover stitching is applied. You can change the stitch type and settings used to generate tacking, or choose to omit this layer altogether.

To adjust tacking settings

1 Right-click the Auto Appliqu icon. The Object Properties > Special dialog opens. 2 In the Tack panel, select a tack stitch type. If you do not require a tacking layer, select None. Right-click Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to adjust Auto Appliqu tacking settings.
Select tack stitch type Adjust settings for tack stitching tacking: E Stitch tacking: Zigzag

ES 2006 Chapter 19 Specialized Digitizing Techniques 442 3 Select the tack stitch settings. Depending on the selected stitch type, you can set different stitch properties: ! Stitch Length: stitch length value for Run stitch only. ! Spacing: stitch spacing value for E Stitch and Zigzag. ! Count: number of stitch repetitions for Zigzag only. ! Width: column width value for Zigzag and E Stitch. ! Offset: negative offset value moves the tack stitching within the

outline, a positive value moves it outside (Run stitch only). ! No. of Runs: number of runs between stitches for E Stitch only. ! Inside/Outside: offset value as a percentagethe sum of both equals 100%. 4 Select a Frame Out option to insert a Stop or Color Change function after the tack stitching. Note If you select None for both guide and tack stitching, you will not be prompted to enter a frame-out position. 5 Click Apply.

Adjusting cover stitch settings

The cover stitch is the Satin border around the appliqu shape. You can change the width of the cover stitch, and offset it to the inside or outside of the digitized outline. An extra line of stitching can be added if you need to trim the appliqu fabric in position. If the fabric has been pre-cut, this cutting line is not needed.

To adjust cover stitch settings

1 Right-click the Auto Appliqu icon.

inside: 25% outside: 75% inside: 50% outside: 50% inside: 75% outside: 25%

Right-click Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to adjust Auto Appliqu cover stitch settings. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 443 The Object Properties > Special dialog opens. 2 In the Cover panel, adjust the cover stitch settings. ! Width: enter the width of the Satin column. ! Inside/Outside: offset value as a percentagethe sum of both equals 100%. 3 Select an appliqu cutting method. ! Pre-Cut: no cutting line. ! Trim in Place: creates a cutting line.
Adjust cover stitch settings inside: 10% outside: 90% inside: 90% outside: 10% Select cutting method

ES 2006 Chapter 19 Specialized Digitizing Techniques 444 Tip A cutting line is only generated if Trim in Place is selected. Place the fabric patch after the placement line has been stitched, then trim after the cutting line has been stitched. 4 Click Apply. Tip Ungroup the auto-appliqu object, then Select All and generate the stitches. You now have a guide stitch, cutting line, tack down and cover stitch that are separate objects. This allows you to edit them separately or resequence by color. This technique is useful when you have multiple auto-appliqu objects in the same design.

Creating partial cover appliqu objects

You can create appliqu objects with partial cover stitching to create an overlapping effect without doubling-up borders. Tip Print a copy of appliqu patterns to use in cutting out fabric pieces. Each appliqu pattern piece is numbered according to the stitching sequence. See Printing appliqu patterns for details.

To create partial cover appliqu objects

1 Digitize appliqu shapes in the same way you digitize with Auto Appliqu. Right-click Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to digitize appliqu objects. Select Partial Appliqu (Stitch menu) to create appliqu objects with partial cover stitching.

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 445 Note If the appliqu has holes, digitize the shape in the same way as Complex Fill with Holes so that the software can recognize the holes. 2 Select the appliqu shapes in the group and select Stitch > Partial Appliqu. Note The cover stitches are generated in a clockwise direction between the start and end points, leaving the rest of the boundary unstitched.
unstitched part of boundary partial cover

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 446

Chapter 20

Textured Fills
ES Designer provides special tools to create textured effects from needle penetrations. Use Stipple Run for special stippled effects. Apply offset fractions and partition lines to Tatami fills to create split-line patterns. Alternatively, apply Program Split or Flexi Split to create decorative fills from pre-defined patterns of needle penetrations. Select from the library or create your own. With User-Defined Split, create your own split lines when you want to add detail to filled objects. This section describes how to apply textures to fills, and how to adjust their settings to get the results you want. Details of Tatami offsets and partition lines are explained, as well as how to create textures with Program Split and Flexi Split. Adding details with User-Defined Split is also covered.

Creating textures with stippling

Stippling is a method for creating textured fills of run stitching which meanders more or less randomly within a border. It can be applied to closed objects with a single stitch angle. You can control stitch density in Stipple Use Stipple Run (Generate toolbar) for special stippled effects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 447 objects by adjusting stitch length and loop spacing. See Corresponding object and stitch types for details. Note When creating Stipple objects, you need to preset the stitch values. You can, however, adjust the stitch settings of the generated Run object via the Object Properties dialog.

To create a texture with stippling

1 Create a closed curve object of some kind and select it. 2 Click the Stipple icon. The Stipple dialog opens.
Adjust stitch settings Choose whether to replace original object

ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 448 3 Adjust the Stitch Length as required. 4 Adjust Minimum Stitch Length and Chord Gap as required. 5 Adjust the Loop Spacing as required. 6 Choose whether to preserve the original object or replace it with the generated stipple object.

7 Click OK.
Stitch length: 0.25 mm Stitch Length: 0.75 mm Stitch Length: 1.5 mm Min stitch length: 0.1 mm Chord Gap:0.01 mm Min stitch length: 0.4 mm Chord Gap:0.03 mm Min stitch length: 0.7 mm Chord Gap:0.05 mm Loop Spacing: 1.0 mm Loop Spacing: 2.0 mm Loop Spacing: 3.0 mm

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 449 Tip You can change run stitch settings of stipple objects in the Object Properties dialog. You can even change run stitch typee.g. Triple Run, Stemstitch, Backstitch, etc.

Creating textures with Tatami offsets

With Tatami fills you can specify how each row is offset in order to create patterns formed by needle penetrations. You do this by adjusting either offset fractions or partition lines. With only two offsets available, the number of patterns is limited, but even with small offsets, visible lines are produced. Partition lines, with up to eight offsets, can create more patterns. Using a random factor you can eliminate patterns formed by regular needle penetrations and distribute stitches randomly inside the shape. Tip Auto Split can be used to create special textures in Satin stitches as an alternative to Tatami fill. See Splitting long stitches with Auto Split for details. Use Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply to new or selected objects. Right-click to adjust settings.
Stipple with Stemstitch Stipple with Satin Stipple with Backstitch Tatami Offset Partition Lines Random Factor

ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 450

Setting Tatami offset fractions

The Tatami offset default settings are designed to create a needle penetration pattern or texture in the stitched embroidery that is uniformly flat and smooth. The texture is like a woven Tatami mat without obvious split lines. By manipulating offset fractions, you can create textured fills where the stitch penetrations are more clearly visible. To control the patterns created by needle penetrations you set offset fractions for both forward and backward rows. Offsets for each row are defined as fractions of stitch lengthe.g. 0.3 = 30%. Tip By adjusting the offsets, you can also improve the quality of turning Tatami where the pattern may be disturbed by non-parallel stitches. Changing the offsets can reduce this interference.

To set Tatami offset fractions

1 Right-click the Tatami icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Tatami dialog opens. 2 Select the Offset Fraction option. 3 In the A: and B: fields, enter the offset fraction values you require. Use Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami offset fractions.
default offset values textured fill stitch penetrations visible Select Offset Fraction Enter offset fraction values

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 451 Different combinations of offset settings create different effects. ! Even stitching: set both fields to 0.25. ! Strong horizontal lines: set both fields to 0.00 or 1.00. The distance between each line of needle penetrations is the stitch length. ! Light horizontal lines: set both fields to 0.5. Lines are produced at half stitch-length intervals. ! Diagonal lines: set both fields to any value other than 0.00, 0.50 and 1.00. Diagonal lines are less noticeable than horizontal or

vertical lines. Vary both values to change the angle of the lines and the distance between them. ! Other: set one field to 0.00, and experiment with the other values to place the needle penetrations on the forward and backward rows close to each other, but with different effects.
A=0.00, B=0.00 A=0.50, B=0.50 A=0.25, B=0.25 A=0.50, B=0.25 A=0.30, B=0.60 A=0.40, B=0.00 offset: A=0.3, B=0.6 stitch length: 4 mm offset: A=0.3, B=0.6 stitch length: 3 mm offset: A=0.3, B=0.6 stitch length: 2 mm

ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 452 Note If A-B offsets add up to 1.0, the lines will be horizontal. If the sum is less than 1.0, the lines will slope down, more and they slope up. The mirror image of A=0.3 and B=0.6 is A=0.7 and B=0.4. That is, the mirror of A and B is 1.0-A and 1.0-B. 4 Click Apply.

Applying Tatami partition lines

The Partition Line feature provides an alternative method for offsetting needle penetrations in Tatami fills. Two parameters can be setSequence and Angle.

Setting the sequence

Partition Line allows you to specify up to eight Tatami offsets. Each stitch length is split into knots numbered anywhere from 0 up to 7. For example,
A=0.30, B=0.60 A=0.50, B=0.50 A=0.70, B=0.40

Use Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami partition lines. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 453 a typical partition sequence number might be 20143. This translates to the following pattern. In this partition sequence (20143), there are five rows of stitches indicated by the five digits. The stitch length is also divided into five knots numbered 0 to 4. (In any pattern, both the number of rows and the number of knots are determined by the number of digits in the sequence number.) The first digit in the sequence, 2, is the knot number at which the needle penetration will occur in the first row. The second digit, 0, is the knot assigned to the second row. And so on. Thus, each row in a partition sequence is assigned a digit which represents a particular knot. Note Because Partition Line allows you to specify only up to eight Tatami offsets (0 to 7), the software ignores digits 8 and 9 and nothing appears in the entry field.

Setting the angle

If you imagine lines drawn through the rows and partition knots, they form a grid, as seen above. You can skew the grid formed by the partition knots to further vary the needle penetrations. For example, the partition sequence 20143 at a 45 angle produces the following stitch pattern:
knot 0 row 1 row 2 row 3 row 4 knot 1 knot 2 knot 4 row 5 knot 3 stitch length knot 0 row 1 row 2 row 3

row 4 row 5

ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 454

To apply partition lines

1 Right-click the Tatami icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Tatami dialog opens. 2 Select the Partition Line option. 3 In the Sequence field, enter the partition sequence number. In any pattern, both the number of rows and the number of knots are determined by the number of digits in the sequence number. See Setting the sequence for details. 4 In the Angle field, enter the grid angle you require. See Setting the angle for details. 5 Click Apply.
Select Partition Line Enter partition sequence and grid angle Sequence: 11 Sequence: 012 Sequence: 01 Sequence: 11 Angle: 135 Sequence: 11 Angle: 45

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 455

Applying random factors

Using a random factor you can eliminate the split line patterns formed by regular needle penetrations and distribute the stitches randomly inside the shape. This can create interesting mottled effects.

To apply random factors

1 Right-click the Tatami icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Tatami dialog opens. Right-click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply random factors and eliminate split line patterns.
Random factor: 0% Random factor: 50% Enter random factor

ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 456 2 In the Random field, specify a random factor between 0% and 100%. Tip A value of around 50% generally gives good results. 3 Click Apply.

Creating textures with program splits

Program Split is a decorative fill stitch in which the needle penetrations form a tiled pattern. Select a pre-defined pattern or create your own. Note For a complete catalog of samples, see Program Split Samples.

Applying Program Split

You can apply Program Split to a wide variety of objects. The current Program Split values are set in the Object Properties > Fills dialog. You can adjust these either before or after applying the effect. See also Corresponding stitch types, input methods, and effects.
random factor: 10% offset fraction A: 0.25, B: 0.25 random factor: 50% offset fraction A: 0.25, B: 0.25 random factor: 100% offset fraction A: 0.25, B: 0.25

Use Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to create decorative fill stitches where needle penetrations form a tiled pattern. Right-click to adjust settings. Click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply the effect to new or selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 457

To apply Program Split

! Click the Program Split icon.

Program Split stitching is applied to new or selected objects, based on the current Program Split settings. Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to see the Program Split effect.

Selecting and sizing program split patterns

You can select a wide variety of program split patterns from the Object Properties dialog. Select the pattern either before or after digitizing the object. Set the exact program split pattern size in the Object Properties dialog. Note For a complete catalog of samples, see Program Split Samples.

To select program split patterns

1 Right-click the Program Split icon. Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to select patterns. ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 458 The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens. 2 Select a pattern from the dropdown list. Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the pattern list for TrueView representations of patterns and select one. 3 In the Size X field, enter the required width of each fill pattern. 4 In the Size Y field, enter the required height of each fill pattern. 5 Click Apply.

Selecting Combination Split options

Standard program split consists of a Satin foreground and backgroundi.e. Satin-in-Satin. In effect it is a Satin stitch with a complicated user-defined split. If the patterns do not overlap you may get jump stitches occurring in the background. In this case, you can select from different combinations of Satin and Tatami stitches. There are two possible combinationsSatin-in-Tatami and Tatami-in-Tatami. Tatami in
Click to expand Click to select pattern pattern list pattern preview Enter pattern width and height Select pattern default values Size X and Size Y decreased Size X increased

Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to access Combination Split options. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 459 combination with Satin also offers a different, flatter look to standard Satin-in-Satin.

To select Combination Split options

1 Right-click the Program Split icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens. 2 In the Combination Split panel, click the icon you require. ! Satin-in-Satin: The needle penetrates the fabric only where the patterns intersect the stitch rows. This is the standard program split stitch type, which produces the smallest number of stitches. ! Satin-in-Tatami: The foreground of the pattern uses Satin stitching, while the background is filled with Tatami. Use this option to avoid long stitches when the patterns are small but the column and row spacings are wide. ! Tatami-in-Tatami: Both foreground and background use Tatami. Select this option for large objects and patterns to avoid long stitches. 3 Click Apply.
Satin-in-Satin Satin-in-Tatami Tatami-in-Tatami Satin-in-Tatami Satin-in-Satin Tatami-in-Tatami

Satin-in-Satin Satin-in-Tatami Tatami-in-Tatami

ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 460

Adjusting column and row spacing settings

Set the exact row and column spacing in program split objects. Column and row spacing settings determine the distance between grid lines. Patterns are placed at intersection pointsthe center of each pattern coincides with an intersection. The initial settings define a simple grid, where the spacing equals the dimensions of the pattern. The row offset is set to 0.00 mm so columns and rows are perpendicular. Note Spacing is measured from the start of each pattern. Thus, to define a new spacing setting, add the distance you require between patterns to the original setting. Reducing it will cause the patterns to overlap.

To adjust column and row spacing settings

1 Right-click the Program Split icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens. 2 In the Column panel, set the spacing and offset settings for columns in the pattern grid. ! Spacing: the distance between each vertical column of patterns. Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to access column and row spacing settings.
default spacing values column spacing increased row spacing decreased Set column spacing and offset values Set row spacing and offset values

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 461 ! Offset: the distance by which to offset patterns in each column. 3 In the Row panel, set the spacing and offset settings for rows in the same way as for columns. 4 Click Apply.

Adjusting program split stitch settings

To adjust program split stitch settings

Specify the stitch length, minimum stitch length and spacing settings for program split objects, in the same way as for other fill stitch types. 1 Right-click the Program Split icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens. 2 In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the required spacing. For Tatami this is the distance between two forward rows of stitches, for Satin, the distance between each forward stitch. 3 In the Length field, enter the stitch length. This is the maximum stitch length to be generated in the fill.
default spacing values column spacing increased row spacing decreased

Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust stitch settings.

Adjust stitch spacing, length and minimum length

ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 462 4 In the Min Len field, enter the length of the shortest stitch to be generated. 5 Click Apply.

Adjusting program split offset settings

With all three program split combinationsSatin-in-Satin, Satin-in-Tatami and Tatami-in-Tatamiyou can vary the pattern by applying offset settings to rows and/or columns. Using Tatami in combination with Satin offers a different, flatter look to standard Satin-in-Satin. With these combinations, you can also provide background texture with Tatami stitch offsets.

Column and row offsets

The column and row offsets determine the angle of the grid lines by shifting

rows and/or columns relative to each other. If both offsets are set to 0, the grid lines are perfectly vertical and horizontal. As a rule, it only makes sense to use values between 0 and half the pattern size. For example, if the pattern is 8 mm, select row and column offsets between 0 mm and 4 mm.

Tatami stitch offsets

When using Tatami stitch in the program split combinations Satin-in-Tatami or Tatami-in-Tatami, you can also control Tatami stitch offsets. In effect,
default spacing values stitch spacing increased stitch spacing decreased

Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust row and column offset settings.
column and row offset: 0 row offset: 3 column offset: 3 column and row offset: 3

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 463 Tatami stitch becomes the background pattern with the program split superimposed. Tatami is mainly used to avoid long stitches, so it should not have a distinct appearance which may obscure the program split pattern. Therefore, typical offsets are in the range 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm. See also Creating textures with Tatami offsets.

To adjust program split offset settings

1 Right-click the Program Split icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens. 2 Enter an offset for each column of the pattern in the Column > Offset field. Tip As a rule, it only makes sense to use values between 0 and half the pattern size. For example, if the pattern is 8 mm, select row and column offsets between 0 mm and 4 mm.
offset A: 0 offset A: 0.25 offset A: 0.4 offset A: 0.75 Enter column offset Enter row offset Enter stitch offset column offset: 1.00 column offset: 2.50 column offset: 4.00

ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 464 3 Enter an offset for each row of the pattern in the Row > Offset field. 4 Enter a stitch offset in the Stitch > Offset A field. This offset controls where the needle penetrations line up for each row of stitching. 5 Click Apply.

Applying program split random factors

You can eliminate unwanted patterns and distribute stitches evenly within a shape using a random factor. Apply random factors to program splits that use combinations of Satin-in-Tatami or Tatami-in-Tatami. Note The random factor does not affect the deliberate needle penetrations that form the pattern.

To apply program split random factors

1 Right-click the Program Split icon.
row offset: 1.00 row offset: 2.50 row offset: 4.00 offset A: 0.00 offset A: 0.25 offset A: 0.50

Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust random factor setting. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 465 The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens. 2 Enter a value in the Random fieldspecify a factor between 0% and 100%. Tip Values of around 50% generally give good results. 3 Click Apply.

Laying out program split patterns on-screen

You lay out program splits on-screen in a similar way to Motif Fills by using guide patterns to scale, space, transform and offset the entire pattern fill. There are three blue guide patterns. Other sample patterns appear in

yellow. Each guide pattern lets you change different elements of the layout. When you change a guide pattern, all patterns in the fill change accordingly. See also Laying out motif fills on-screen.
Enter random factor value random factor: 0% random factor: 25% random factor: 90%

Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust layout options. ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 466 Tip Generally you define the layout of the fill before digitizing the object. If it is important to align the patterns with the object boundary, digitize the object using the current settings, and change the layout afterwards.

To lay out program split patterns on-screen

1 Right-click the Program Split icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens. 2 Select a pattern from the dropdown list. Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the pattern list for TrueView representations of patterns and select one. 3 Click Layout. Sample and guide patterns appear in the design window. When you change a guide pattern, all patterns in the fill change accordingly. Tip Zoom in to select the correct guide pattern. 4 Adjust the guide patterns to achieve the effect you require. ! Move patterns by selecting the middle guide pattern and dragging it to a new position.
Select pattern Click to change pattern layout Use top guide pattern to change row spacing, row offset, and to scale patterns Use side guide pattern to change column spacing, and to scale patterns Use middle guide pattern to move, rotate, skew, and scale patterns

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 467 ! Scale patterns by selecting a guide pattern and resizing it using the selection handles. ! Rotate patterns by clicking the middle guide twice to display the rotation handles. Click a corner handle and drag to rotate. ! Skew patterns by clicking the middle guide twice, then dragging the skew handles. ! Change column spacing by selecting the side guide and dragging it left or right.
Drag the pattern Scale proportionally Scale horizontally Scale vertically rotate skew anchor

ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 468 ! Change column offset by selecting the side guide and dragging it up or down. ! Change row spacing and offsets in the same way as columns. 5 Press Esc to finish. The size and layout settings you select become the current Program Split settings. Tip To revert to the original factory settings, run the Revert utility. See Reverting to factory settings for details. Alternatively, enter the values

manually in the Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog and click Save. See Program Split Samples for details. 6 Digitize the object outline as you normally would.
Change column spacing Change offset Change row spacing Change offset

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 469 Note Digitize the stitch angle carefully when creating objects filled with program split. The needle penetrations are placed where the lines of the pattern intersect the stitch rows. If the rows are parallel with the lines of the pattern, they will rarely intersect, and the pattern may not be visible. A 45 stitch angle is suitable for most patterns.

Making program split patterns

Make your own patterns to use in program split fills. Create patterns from the outlines of embroidery objects or from drawing objects. Note Patterns you create can also be used for Flexi Split effects.

To make program split patterns

1 Select the object (or objects) you want to use for the pattern. 2 Select Special > Make Program Split. The Make Program Split dialog opens. 3 Enter a name in the Make Program Split dialog. You are prompted with a confirmation message. 4 Click OK. The new pattern is automatically selected in the Pattern list.
Enter pattern name
A-My Program Split

ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 470

Editing program split patterns

To edit program split patterns

Editing a pattern changes the actual pattern, not just the object layout. See also Laying out program split patterns on-screen. 1 Right-click the Program Split icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens. 2 Select a pattern and click Edit. The pattern appears in the design window. Tip Press Shift+0 to zoom in on the pattern. 3 Scale, transform or reshape the pattern as required. ! See Arranging and Transforming Objects for details. ! See Converting and Reshaping Objects for details. 4 Select Special > Make Program Split with the pattern selected. The Make program Split dialog opens.
Select pattern Click to edit pattern Edit pattern Enter pattern name
A-My New Program Split

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 471 5 Enter a name for the pattern in the Make Program Split dialog. ! To create a pattern based on the old one, enter a new name. ! To overwrite the original pattern, enter the name of the original. 6 Click OK. The pattern is automatically selected in the Pattern list.

Creating textures with Flexi Split

Flexi Split is a decorative effect where one or more lines of a program split pattern are used in the object fill. The pattern follows the stitch angle and may be scaled to fit the width of the object. There are four different Flexi Split effects. Use the existing patterns for Flexi Split or create your own. See also Making program split patterns.

Applying Flexi Split

You can apply Flexi Split to a wide variety of object and stitch types. It is intended for use with objects with turning stitches or constantly changing column width. You can adjust Flexi Split values either before or after applying the effect. See also Corresponding stitch types, input methods, and effects.

To apply Flexi Split

! Select an object and click the Flexi Split icon.

The effect is applied based on the current Flexi Split settings. Use Flexi Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply a decorative effect to new or selected objects. Right-click to adjust settings. ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 472 You can also activate the effect with no objects selected. It then applies to all newly created objects. Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to see the effect of Flexi Split.

Selecting Flexi Split patterns and options

To select Flexi Split patterns and options

You select Flexi Split patterns and options from the Object Properties > Flexi Split dialog. 1 Right-click the Flexi Split icon. The Object Properties > Flexi Split dialog opens. 2 Select the Flexi Split checkbox. Right-click Flexi Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to select patterns and options.
Click to select pattern Select Flexi Split Select option Pattern preview Click to expand pattern list Select pattern

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 473 3 Select a pattern from the dropdown list. Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the pattern list for TrueView representations of patterns and select one. 4 Select one of four Flexi Split options. 5 Adjust size and spacing settings as required. See Adjusting Flexi Split settings for details. 6 Click Apply.

Adjusting Flexi Split settings

To adjust Flexi Split settings

You can adjust Flexi Split settings to vary size, shape indent, spacing and pattern offsets. 1 Right-click the Flexi Split icon. The Object Properties > Flexi Split dialog opens. 2 Select the Flexi Split checkbox. 3 Select a pattern from the dropdown list. Right-click Flexi Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust settings.
Enter dimensions of largest pattern Select Flexi Split option

Enter spacing and offsets Enter distance between first pattern and first stitch line Select Flexi Split Select pattern

ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 474 Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the pattern list for TrueView representations of patterns and select one. See also Selecting Flexi Split patterns and options. 4 In the Size X and Size Y fields, enter the dimensions of the largest pattern in the effect. 5 In the Indent field, enter the distance between the first pattern and the first stitch line. 6 In the Column panel, enter spacing and offset settings as required: ! Spacing: the distance between each column of patterns in the effect. ! Offset: the distance by which each pattern repeat is offset. Note If you selected an option that uses more than one row of patterns, the fields in the Row panel are available. 7 In the Row panel, enter spacing and offset settings as required. 8 Click Apply.
default indent values Indent: 2 mm Indent: 4 mm default column values column spacing decreased column offset value changed default column and row values column and row spacing decreased row offset value changed

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 475

Creating user-defined splits

User-Defined Split lets you add detail to filled objects by digitizing lines of needle penetrations called split lines. Split lines are stored as object properties. They are preserved when stitches are regenerated even if you apply a different stitch type. Note Split lines are not part of the object outline and cannot be reshaped with the rest of the object.

Creating new objects with User-Defined Split

Select User-Defined Split before digitizing to add split lines to new objects. As you digitize, you are prompted to enter the split lines. You digitize them in the same way as Run objects. You can define multiple splits if required. Tip Satin is the most suitable stitch type for User-Defined Split as there are no initial needle penetrations inside the shape.

To create new objects with User-Defined Split

1 Select a fill input method and stitch type. 2 Click the User-Defined Split icon. 3 Digitize the object boundaries, entry and exit points and stitch angle as you normally would, following the prompts in the Prompt Line. 4 Digitize a split line over the object when prompted, then press Enter. Use User-Defined Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to create your own split line effects. Right-click to adjust settings. ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 476 Repeat this step for additional split lines. Tip For best results, digitize split lines approximately perpendicular to the stitch angle.

5 Press Enter.

Applying User-Defined Split to selected objects

Add split lines to an existing object by digitizing the required line over it, then converting it to a split line. Digitize the split line using an input methode.g. Runor a vector drawing tool.

To apply User-Defined Split to selected objects

1 Select an input method or drawing tool to digitize the split line. Tip Use any input methodincluding fill input methodsas only the outlines are used to create the split lines. 2 Digitize a split line on top of the filled object, using left and right-clicks to enter reference points, and press Enter.
Digitize object outline Digitize split line Generate stitches

Use User-Defined Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply the effect to selected objects. Right-click to adjust settings. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 477 To create more than one split line, repeat this step. Tip To use existing objects to create split lines, simply move the object on top of the filled object you are creating lines for. 3 Select the split line object (or objects). 4 Select Special > Make Lines For > User Defined Split. 5 Press Delete to remove the split line object (or objects). 6 Select the filled object on which you digitized split lines. 7 Click the User Defined Split icon. Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to view the effect.

Splitting alternate lines

The User-Defined Split feature sometimes creates a split line which is too hard for certain applications such as Schiffli design work. The Split Alternate Stitch Lines setting softens the split line.

To split alternate lines

1 Select a user-defined split object. 2 Right-click the User Defined Split icon. The Object Properties > Decorative dialog opens. Right-click User-Defined Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply split lines.
user-defined split

ES 2006 Chapter 20 Textured Fills 478 3 Select the Split Alternate Stitch Lines checkbox. 4 Click Apply. Split lines are softened.
Select to soften split line split lines applied

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 479

Chapter 21

Artistic Stitch Effects

ES Designer provides many artistic effects and stitch types to create textured and contoured fill stitching. Use Jagged Edge to create rough edges, shading effects, or imitate fur and other fluffy textures. Apply Trapunto effect to move underlying travel runs to the edges

of an object so that they cant be seen through open stitching. Accordion Spacing varies stitch spacing between dense and open fill, producing shading and color effects which are difficult to achieve manually. The Color Blending effect creates interesting perspective, shading and color effects by blending two colored layers. The colors are merged smoothly from one to another using a mixture of dense and open fill. Create interesting chiaroscuro effects with Contour. Choose between Standard and Spiral. For another type of curved effect, use Florentine Effect to curve needle penetrations along a digitized line. Liquid Effect allows you to enter twin guidelines. This section describes how to create artistic effects with Jagged Edge, Accordion Spacing, and Color Blending, and how to adjust their settings to get the results you want. Creating contoured stitch effects with the Contour feature is also covered, as well as how to create curved fills with Florentine Effect and Liquid Effect. Tip ES Designer also provides special tools to create patterns from needle penetrations. These include Program Split, User Defined Split and Flexi Split. See Textured Fills for details. ES 2006 Chapter 21 Artistic Stitch Effects 480

Creating jagged edges

Use Jagged Edge to create rough edges, shading effects, or imitate fur and other fluffy textures. See also Corresponding stitch types, input methods, and effects. Note Jagged Edge does not work with Contour stitch.

Applying Jagged Edge

Apply Jagged Edge to create a rough edge along one or more sides of an object. Change settings before or after applying the effect. See Adjusting Jagged Edge settings for details.

To apply Jagged Edge

! Click the Jagged Edge icon.

The effect is applied to new or selected objects, based on the current Jagged Edge settings. Tip For objects filled with Tatami, use Diagonal backstitch for the best results. See Selecting a Tatami backstitch for details. Click Jagged Edge (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply the effect to new or selected objects.
side 1 jagged side 2 jagged both sides jagged

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 481

Adjusting Jagged Edge settings

To adjust Jagged Edge settings

Adjust Jagged Edge settings to change the side of the object to which the effect is applied. You can also set the range within which stitches will fall. 1 Right-click the Jagged Edge icon. The Object Properties > Decorative dialog opens. 2 Select the Jagged checkbox. 3 Select the side to apply the effect toSide 1, Side 2, or Both Sides. Right-click Jagged Edge (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Jagged Edge settings.
Adjust Jagged Edge settings Select Jagged Edge Side 2 Both Sides Side 1

ES 2006 Chapter 21 Artistic Stitch Effects 482 4 In the Roughness field, enter a value between 1 and 10 to indicate the

required degree of jaggedness. The larger the value, the more variation in the stitch length. 5 In the Range field, enter the margin within which you want the stitches to fall. 6 Click Apply.

Creating open stitching with Trapunto

Trapunto traditionally refers to quilting in which a design is outlined with two or more rows of running stitches and then padded from the underside to achieve a raised effect. For a consistent puffed look, rows need to be separated with fixed spacing. In ES Designer, the Trapunto effect is typically used in combination with open stitching to fill backgrounds or for
Roughness: 1 Range: 5 Roughness: 5 Range: 5 Roughness: 10 Range: 5 Range: 1.5 Range: 4

Use Trapunto (Stitch Types toolbar) to force underlying travel runs to the edges of a selected object. Right-click to adjust Trapunto settings. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 483 shading effects where the absence of travels under the fill is more important than exact spacing. The Trapunto effect automatically moves underlying travel runs to the edges of an object so they cant be seen. It also applies consistent row spacing and prevents segments from overlapping, regardless of the Overlapping Rows setting. Without it, travel runs, spacing variations and overlapping rows between segments are visible and can spoil the effect of open stitching. Another major use of Trapunto is with color blending which is created by a combination of Trapunto and Accordion Spacing. Accordion Spacing extends the usefulness of Trapunto by providing a simple way to produce variation in a filled pattern and the illusion of depth in a design. Trapunto and Accordion Spacing can also be combined with Liquid and Florentine effects to produce curved color blending. See also Creating color blending effects and Creating curved fills with Florentine Effect. Note The Trapunto feature is only available with Complex Fill objects using Tatami stitching.

To create open stitching with Trapunto

1 With or without a Complex Fill object selected, right-click the Tatami icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Tatami dialog opens. 2 In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the required stitch spacing.
Complex Fill / Tatami object without Trapunto effect Complex Fill / Tatami object with Trapunto effect Adjust stitch spacing

ES 2006 Chapter 21 Artistic Stitch Effects 484 The larger the value, the more open the spacing. 3 Click Apply. 4 With the Complex Fill object selected, click the Trapunto icon. Travel runs and overlapping rows are removed and consistent row spacing applied. Note Trapunto effect overrides whatever Tatami Backstitch settings currently apply. See also Selecting a Tatami backstitch.

Creating accordion spacing effects

Accordion Spacing varies the stitch spacing between dense and open fill,

producing shading and color effects which are difficult to achieve manually. Eight different Accordion Spacing effects are available. When you use Accordion Spacing, the current spacing settingsincluding Auto Spacing and Fractional Spacingare ignored. However, other stitch effects will still apply. See also Corresponding stitch types, input methods, and effects. Tip Apply Trapunto effect to force underlying travel runs to the edges of an object so that they cant be seen through open stitching. See Creating open stitching with Trapunto for details.
Spacing: 5 mm Spacing: 3 mm

Use Accordion Spacing (Stitch Types toolbar) to vary stitch spacing between dense and open fill. Right-click to adjust settings. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 485

Applying Accordion Spacing

Use Accordion Spacing to create perspective effects and shading. You can apply it using the current settings. These can be adjusted and the type of Accordion Spacing changed either before or after you apply it. Tip You cannot use Accordion Spacing with Contour stitch or Motif Fill. However, you can also use Accordion Spacing over standard Tatami to create interesting shading effects.

To apply Accordion Spacing

! Click the Accordion Spacing icon.

The effect is applied to new or selected objects, based on the current Accordion Spacing settings.

Adjusting Accordion Spacing settings

Use the Object Properties dialog to select the Accordion Spacing type and set the minimum and maximum spacings. Tip Because of the open stitch, Accordion Spacing is best used without Auto Underlay.

To adjust Accordion Spacing settings

1 Right-click the Accordion Spacing icon. Click Accordion Spacing (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply the effect to new or selected objects.
maximum spacing minimum spacing

Right-click Accordion Spacing (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust settings. ES 2006 Chapter 21 Artistic Stitch Effects 486 The Object Properties > Accordion dialog opens. 2 Select the Accordion Spacing checkbox. 3 In the Profile panel, click an Accordion Spacing icon. 4 In the Values panel, enter new spacing values as required. ! Maximum Spacing: the largest spacing value to allow.
Select Accordion Spacing Select spacing effect Adjust spacing settings

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 487 ! Minimum Spacing: the smallest spacing value to allow. Tip Apply Trapunto effect to force underlying travel runs to the edges of an object so that they cant be seen through open stitching. See Creating open stitching with Trapunto for details. 5 Click Apply.

Creating color blending effects

From sunsets to wood grains, the Color Blending effect creates interesting perspective, shading and color effects by blending colored layers. Two colors are merged smoothly from one to another using a mixture of dense and open fill. The effect is created by duplicating the object, then applying Accordion Spacing and Trapunto to both layers which are then grouped. There are four Color Blending effectslinear stitch spacing, exponential

spacing, convex or concave spacing, and wavy spacing. Color Blending can be applied to ungrouped objects filled with Satin, Tatami, Zigzag, E Stitch, or Program Split stitch, or objects outlined with Satin or E Stitch.

Applying Color Blending

max spacing: 3.5 mm max spacing: 6 mm min spacing: 1 mm min spacing: 3 mm

Click Color Blending (Generate toolbar) to apply the effect to selected objects. ES 2006 Chapter 21 Artistic Stitch Effects 488 Use the Color Blending effect to create color blends, perspective effects and shading. Select which type of Color Blending to use, and set the spacing settings in the Color Blending dialog. Note Color Blending cannot be applied to grouped objects. Ungroup, select the object, then apply Color Blending.

To apply Color Blending

1 Select the object. 2 Click the Color Blending icon. The Color Blending dialog opens. 3 In the Top Layer panel, select a profile and color, and set spacing values. 4 Repeat this step with the Bottom Layer panel.
maximum spacing minimum spacing Select first Spacing effect Select first color Select second color Select second Spacing effect Select first spacing Select second spacing

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 489 5 Click OK. Tip To prevent underlay stitching from showing through, deselect Auto Underlay. Trapunto effect is applied by default. See also Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays and Creating open stitching with Trapunto.

Adjusting Color Blending settings

Objects with Color Blending can be resized, rotated and skewed without losing the color blending effect. However, reshaping the object is not recommended. Editing a Color Blending object is limited. The two objects must first be ungrouped and the separate objects edited according to Accordion Spacing settings such as color, profile, and spacing. See Creating accordion spacing effects for details.

To adjust Color Blending settings

1 Select the blended object and ungroup it. 2 Select one of the objects and change the color as required. 3 Double-click the object to open the Object Properties dialog.
Top and Bottom Layer Linear Profile Top and Bottom Layer Exponential Profile Top and Bottom Layer Convex Profile Top and Bottom Layer Wave Profile

ES 2006 Chapter 21 Artistic Stitch Effects 490 4 Click the FX button and select the Accordion tab.

5 Select a profile and adjust spacing settings as required. 6 Click Apply. 7 Repeat the process for the second object and re-group the objects.

Creating contoured stitch effects

Contour is a curved fill stitch typestitches follow the contours of a shape, creating a curved, light and shade effect. It only works on columnar shapes. There are two typesStandard and Spiralboth of which can be applied to a variety of objects. See also Corresponding object and stitch types.

Standard Contour
Select spacing effect Adjust spacing settings

Standard Contour creates rows of stitches across the shape, perpendicular to the digitized stitch angle. The number of stitch lines is constant, so the Use Contour (Stitch Types toolbar) to create curved fills where stitches follow the contours of the shape. Right-click to adjust Contour settings. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 491 stitching is denser where the shape is narrower, and more open where the shape is wider.

Spiral Contour

Spiral Contour creates a single, continuous line of stitching that spirals around to fill the shape. Typically, it is used for rings and borders, but it is also suitable for other closed shapes. Spiral Contour can only be used with closed shapes with two outlines such as rings. If a shape is not properly closed, it will be filled with Standard Contour instead. You cannot use Spiral Contour with Circle objects. Tip To fill a solid shape with Spiral Contour, create a closed object with a very small hole at the center. For example, to create a circle filled with Spiral Contour, digitize a thick ring with a very small inner boundary.

Applying Contour stitch to fills

Standard Contour Spiral Contour circle with Spiral Contour created from a ring

Apply Contour to filled objects in the same way as other stitch typesby selecting it from the toolbar either before or after digitizing.

Click Contour (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Contour stitch to new or selected objects. ES 2006 Chapter 21 Artistic Stitch Effects 492

To apply Contour stitch to fills

! Click the Contour icon.

Contour stitch is applied to selected objects based on the settings in the Object Properties dialog. See Adjusting Contour stitch settings for details. Tip When you digitize shapes with pointed endse.g. leaves, diamonds, starscut the ends to prevent the stitches from bunching.

Selecting Contour stitch types

To select Contour stitch types

Apply Standard or Spiral Contour to new or existing objects in a design. 1 Right-click the Contour icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Contour dialog opens. 2 In the Type panel, click a contour type icon. Right-click Contour (Stitch Types toolbar) to select Contour stitch types.
stitch bunching at sharp ends 1 23 4 5 6 7

89 10 1 23 4 5 67 8 Input B Input B Select contour type Select backstitch type

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 493 ! Standard: lays rows of stitches back and forth along the shape. ! Spiral: fills the shape with a continuous spiral of stitches. 3 In the Backstitch panel, click a backstitch type icon. ! Standard: creates backstitch rows that are slightly shorter than the forward rows, reducing small stitches. Suitable for high density fills. ! Borderline: creates parallel backstitch rows to give a smooth, well-defined edge. Suitable for lower density fills. Note If the spacing is small, Borderline backstitch will not be applied. This is to prevent damage to the fabric from the large number of small stitches that are generated. 4 If required, adjust the Contour stitch settings. See Adjusting Contour stitch settings for details. 5 Click Apply.

Adjusting Contour stitch settings

To adjust Contour stitch settings
1 Right-click the Contour icon.
Standard Spiral Borderline Standard

Set the stitch settings for Contour fills to adjust the stitch length, spacing and offset fraction.

Right-click Contour (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Contour stitch settings. ES 2006 Chapter 21 Artistic Stitch Effects 494 The Object Properties > Fills > Contour dialog opens. 2 In the Length field, enter an approximate stitch length. Each stitch is adjusted to distribute the stitches evenly throughout the shape. See Adjusting Tatami stitch spacing and length for details. 3 In the Spacing field, enter the maximum spacing value. This value is used at the widest part of the shape. As the shape narrows, the spacing decreases. See Adjusting Tatami stitch spacing and length for details. 4 In the Offset Fraction field, enter the required offset value.
Adjust stitch values Adjust offset setting Adjust variable stitch settings stitch length 3.6 mm stitch length 1.5 mm stitch spacing: 3.0 mm stitch spacing: 1.5 mm

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 495 The offset fraction controls the pattern of needle penetrations to achieve even distribution of stitches and prevent needle penetrations from forming unwanted lines. 5 In the Vary Stitch Length panel, set the variable stitch length values,

if required. See Setting variable run stitch lengths for details. 6 Click Apply.

Creating curved fills with Florentine Effect

Florentine Effect can be applied to Complex Fill objects to create a flowing stitch effect along a digitized line. The stitches follow the digitized line but maintain uniform density and needle penetration patterns. The digitizing method varies, depending whether you are applying the effect to new or existing objects. See also Creating curved fills with Liquid Effect. Note For all other object types, use Standard Contour to achieve curved stitching.
too big offset: 1 mm, unwanted lines default offset: 0.25 mm, stitches evenly distributed Variable Length selected, stitch values vary Variable Length not selected, stitch values fixed

ES 2006 Chapter 21 Artistic Stitch Effects 496

Creating new objects with Florentine Effect

To apply the effect to new Complex Fill objects, select Florentine Effect before starting. Tip For best results, use smaller stitch lengthse.g. 4.00 mm or less.

To create a new object with Florentine Effect

1 Click the Complex Fill icon and select Tatami stitch. 2 Click the Florentine Effect icon. 3 Digitize the boundaries, and entry and exit points of the Complex Fill object following the prompts. 4 Digitize the guideline you want the stitches to follow. Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to create an embroidery object. Use Florentine Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to create user-defined curved stitching. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 497 The guideline must intersect both sides of the object, have at least three points, and must not overlap itself. Curves generally give better results than sharp corners. 5 Press Enter. Tip Use the Reshape Object tool to change the shape of the curve. See Applying Florentine Effect to existing objects for details.

Applying Florentine Effect to existing objects

To apply Florentine Effect to existing objects

Apply Florentine Effect to existing Complex Fill objects in a design. Then use the Reshape Object tool to adjust the guideline. 1 Select an object. Note The Florentine Effect icon is only available with Complex Fill objects using a suitable stitch type. 2 Click the Florentine Effect icon. 3 With the object still selected, click the Reshape Object icon. Use Florentine Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply curve stitching to existing objects. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to adjust control points of the guideline. ES 2006 Chapter 21 Artistic Stitch Effects 498 A default guideline with three corner control points appears. 4 Reshape the guideline by moving, adding, changing or deleting reference points. 5 Press Enter. ES Designer regenerates the stitches along the new curve. Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to view the

results.

Applying Florentine Effect to multiple objects

You can apply Florentine Effect to multiple objects in a design by copying the properties of the first object and applying them to other objects. Use Florentine Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply curve stitching to multiple objects. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to adjust control points of the guideline. Click Make Properties Current (Styles toolbar) to make the properties of a selected object current for the design. Use Apply Current Properties (Styles toolbar) to apply current settings to selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 499

To apply Florentine Effect to multiple objects

1 Select an object. Note The Florentine Effect icon is only available with Complex Fill objects using a suitable stitch type. 2 Click the Florentine Effect icon. 3 With the object still selected, click the Reshape Object icon. A default guideline with three corner control points appears. 4 Reshape the guideline so that it overlaps the objects you want to include. 5 Press Enter. ES Designer regenerates the stitches of the first selected object along the curve. 6 With the first object selected, click the Make Properties Current icon. The stitch properties of the first object, including the florentine effect, now become the current settings. See Making selected object properties current for details. 7 Apply the current settings to each of the other objects with the Apply Current Properties tool. See Applying current settings to existing objects for details.
Apply current settings to selected object

ES 2006 Chapter 21 Artistic Stitch Effects 500 Tip Turn on TrueView or use the Show Needle Points tool to view the results.

! Adjusting Florentine Effect settings

In a Florentine Effect fill, stitch lengths vary to adjust the needle point pattern to the curve of the digitized line. You can specify how ES Designer calculates the stitch length by choosing between Nominal and Maximum. The Nominal setting generates roughly the same number of fill stitches as with normal stitching. The Maximum setting generally produces smoother curves than Nominal, but the stitch count is higher. Tip Use Maximum when the curve is tight with respect to the stitch length.

To adjust Florentine Effect settings

1 Right-click the Florentine Effect icon. The Object Properties > Curve dialog opens. 2 Select the Florentine Effect checkbox. 3 Select the required stitch length calculation option: ! Nominal: the average length of the fill stitches matches the Stitch Length setting. Right-click Florentine Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust settings.
Select Florentine Effect

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 501 ! Maximum: the longest stitch matches the Stitch Length setting. 4 Click Apply.

Creating curved fills with Liquid Effect

Liquid Effect is similar to Florentine Effect except that you enter twin guidelines for stitches to follow in Complex Fill objects. This means that stitches at the top of a shape can follow a different guideline to those at the bottom. The change between the two guidelines is distributed evenly to produce smooth stitching.

Creating new objects with Liquid Effect

nominal maximum

Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to create an embroidery object. Use Liquid Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to create curved stitch effects with two guidelines. ES 2006 Chapter 21 Artistic Stitch Effects 502 Unlike Florentine Effect, Liquid Effect guidelines are digitized outside the object, rather than over it. If any part of a guideline crosses the object boundary, an error message appears. Tip You can also apply the Liquid Effect to existing objects. To get the required shapes, select the object and adjust the guidelines using Reshape Object icon.

To create new objects with Liquid Effect

1 Click the Complex Fill icon and select Tatami stitch. 2 Click the Liquid Effect icon. You are prompted to enter the first point of boundary 1 of the object. 3 Digitize the boundaries, entry and exit points and stitch angle of the Complex Fill object following the prompts. Note You are not prompted to digitize the stitch angle. 4 Digitize the first guideline around the outside of the object. You must enter at least three reference points. 5 Press Enter.
guideline 1

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 503 You are prompted to enter the second guideline. Notice that the pointer has elastic lines attached to it. These lines join each side of the guideline shape. 6 Digitize the second guideline in the same direction of the first, marking at least three reference points. Note The two guidelines must not overlap or intersect the object outline. 7 Press Enter. Tip To modify the guidelines, select the object and then the Reshape Object icon. Click-and-drag the guidelines into the required shapes, and press Enter.

Adjusting Liquid Effect settings

As with Florentine Effect fill, you can specify how ES Designer calculates the stitch length by choosing between Nominal and Maximum. Tip Use Maximum when the guideline is tight with respect to the stitch length.
guideline 1 guideline 2

Right-click Liquid Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust settings. ES 2006 Chapter 21 Artistic Stitch Effects 504

To adjust Liquid Effect settings

1 Right-click the Liquid Effect icon. The Object Properties > Curve dialog opens. 2 Select the Liquid Effect checkbox. 3 Select the required stitch length calculation option: ! Nominal: the average length of the fill stitches matches the Stitch Length setting.

! Maximum: the longest stitch matches the Stitch Length setting.

4 Click Apply.
Select Liquid Effect Nominal Maximum

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 505

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

Motifs are pre-defined design elements, such as hearts, leaves or border patterns. They generally consist of one or more simple objects, and are stored in a special motif set. With Motif Run and Motif Fill you can use simple motifs such as hearts, leaves or border patterns to create ornamental runs and textured fills. Create your own motifs or use the ones provided with the software. Motifs can be scaled, rotated and mirrored in the same way as other objects. Using 3D Warp with motif fills, you can also create interesting three dimensional effects. This section describes how to insert motifs into your design, and how to rotate, mirror and scale them. It explains how to manage motifs, including how to create your own motifs and motif sets. It also describes how to create both motif runs and motif fills, as well as how to apply 3D effects to motif fills.

Creating motif runs

Motif Run is an input method that creates motif repeats along a digitized line. You can create decorative outlines using any motif from the selection ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 506 list. You can modify the rotation angle, orientation and scale, and vary the space between motifs.

Creating Motif Run objects

Use the Motif Run tool to create a string of motifs along a digitized line. You can select motifs in the Object Properties dialog before or after digitizing. You can also adjust scale and spacing settings. Tip You can also apply Motif Run to other selected run objects such as Run, Stemstitch, etc. See Converting between run objects for details.

To create a Motif Run object

1 Click the Motif Run icon. 2 Digitize the line along which you want the motif to appear by entering reference points. ! Click to add a corner point ! Right-click to add a curve point. 3 When you have finished digitizing the line, press Enter. An outline of the current motif attaches to your cursor. ! To use the original size and orientation of the motif press Enter. Use Motif Run (Input toolbar) to create a string of motifs along a digitized line.
Resize motif outline to scale

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 507 ! To scale the motif, move the pointer until the motif is the required size, click, then press Enter. ! To mirror the motif, right-click then press Enter. Tip You can combine scaling and mirroring.

Selecting motifs for motif runs

You can select motifs to use before or after digitizing a motif run. If you use Motif Run without selecting a motif, a default will be used. To change a motif after digitizing, use the Object Properties dialog as described here. See also Selecting and inserting single motifs.

Note For a complete catalog of samples, see Motif Samples.

To select a motif for motif runs

1 Select a Motif Run object. 2 Right-click the Motif Run icon. Right-click Motif Run (Input toolbar) to select motifs to use with Motif Run. ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 508 The Object Properties > Outlines > Motif Run dialog opens. 3 Select a motif set from the Set list. There are two pre-defined setsSingle Motifs and Two-Part Motifs. Two-Part Motifs are more appropriate to motif fills but can be used for motif runs as well. You can also define your own motif sets. See Creating motif sets for details. 4 Select a pattern from the dropdown list. Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the motif list for TrueView representations of motifs and select one. 5 Click Apply. The selected Motif Run object is updated according to the motif selected. Tip Select a motif with no object selected and click Apply to make the selection current.
Select motif Select motif set Select motif Click to expand motif list Motif preview

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 509

Scaling motifs in motif runs to an exact size

You can set the exact size of motifs in a Motif Run by entering the dimensions in the Object Properties dialog. Note You can enter motif dimensions before or after digitizing the object.

To scale motifs in a motif run to an exact size

1 Select a Motif Run object. 2 Right-click the Motif Run icon. The Object Properties > Outlines > Motif Run dialog opens. 3 In the Size X and Size Y fields, enter horizontal and vertical dimensions for the motifs. 4 Click Apply. Tip You can also scale motifs as you digitize Motif Run objects. See Creating Motif Run objects for details. Right-click Motif Run (Input toolbar) to scale motifs in Motif Run.
Enter horizontal and vertical dimensions Original run Scaled in X Scaled in Y

ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 510

Adjusting Motif Run spacing

To adjust Motif Run spacing

Adjust the spacing between each motif in a Motif Run before or after digitizing. See Saving motifs for details. 1 Select a Motif Run object. 2 Right-click the Motif Run icon. The Object Properties > Outlines > Motif Run dialog opens. 3 In the Spacing field, enter the distance between each repetition of the motif. If they do not fit the baseline exactly, ES Designer adjusts the spacing to make them fit: ! If the space remaining at the end of the baseline is less than half a motif, the extra space is spread evenly between the motifs. Right-click Motif Run (Input toolbar) to adjust Motif Run spacing.
Original spacing Spacing increased Spacing decreased Enter distance between

motif repetitions spacing initial spacing

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 511 ! If the space is larger than half a motif, ES Designer inserts an extra motif, and slightly overlaps the motifs to distribute them evenly along the baseline. Tip You can reshape the baseline to achieve the exact spacing you require. See Reshaping Motif Run objects for details.

Keeping or omitting motifs

If you are digitizing adjoining lines with Motif Run, you can omit the last motif of the current objector the first motif of the next objectto avoid an overlap where the lines join. Note You can adjust these settings either before or after digitizing the object.

To keep or omit motifs

1 Select a Motif Run object. 2 Right-click the Motif Run icon. Right-click Motif Run (Input toolbar) to select whether to keep or omit first and last motifs.
First and last motifs kept First motif kept, last motif omitted

ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 512 The Object Properties > Outlines > Motif Run dialog opens. 3 Choose whether to keep or omit first and last motifs. 4 Click Apply.

Reshaping Motif Run objects

To reshape Motif Run objects

Reshape Motif Run objects in the same way as you reshape lettering objects. See also Special Lettering Features. 1 Select a Motif Run object and click the Reshape icon. Control points appear around the motifs. 2 Adjust the outline and motif spacings as required: ! Reposition and/or change reshape nodes from corner to curve. ! Add or delete reshape nodes.
Choose whether to keep or omit first and last motifs

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected Motif Run objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 513 ! Click-and-drag individual motifs to adjust spacing. 3 Adjust the size of the whole object as required: ! Drag the vertical resize handle to scale the height of the object. ! Drag the horizontal resize handle to scale the width of the object. ! Drag the proportional resize handle to scale the object proportionally. 4 Click the diamond control point of the motif to activate reshape nodes: ! Drag resize handles to scale the motif. ! Drag the skew handle to skew the motif. ! Drag the rotate handle to rotate the motif. 5 Press Esc to finish.
Drag to shift motif Select and press Spacebar to toggle between corner and curve reshape nodes Right/left-click to add reshape node Drag to scale

object height Drag to scale object proportionately Drag to scale object width Click to activate Drag to resize motif reshape nodes Drag to skew motif Drag to rotate motif

ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 514

Creating motif fills

Motif Fill is a decorative stitch used for filling Complex Fill objects. This feature repeats motifs in parallel rows to fill the shape. You can select different motifs for forward and backward rows. You can design the motif layout on-screen, or by adjusting settings in the Object Properties dialog.

Creating Motif Fill objects

Digitize Complex Fill objects with Motif Fill or apply it to existing Complex Fill objects to create decorative fill stitching using current settings. You can select motifs in the Object Properties dialog before or after digitizing. You can also adjust scale and spacing settings. Note The stitch angle has no effect on motif layout.

To create a Motif Fill object

1 Click the Complex Fill and Motif Fill icons. 2 Digitize an object. Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to create an object to apply Motif Fill to. Use Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Motif Fill to objects using current settings. Right-click to change settings. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 515 As soon as the entry and exit points are entered the Motif Fill stitches are generated using current settings. See Digitizing complex shapes for details. Tip You can generate layers of colored motifs by duplicating an object and selecting a different color. For example, after filling a shape with circles, you can create a second layer, apply a different color and motif, and offset it from the first. You can even apply effects such as Globe Out to the whole motif fill. See also Applying 3D effects to motif fills.

Selecting motifs for motif fills

t

Select from a wide range of motifs in the Object Properties dialog. You can mix and match different motifs for forward and backward rows, or use the same motif for each. See also Using two-part motifs in motif fills. Note For a complete catalog of samples, see Motif Samples.

To select a motif for motif fills

1 Right-click the Motif Fill icon. Use Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Motif Fill to objects using current settings. Right-click to change settings. ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 516 The Object Properties > Fills > Motif Fill dialog opens. 2 In the Motif 1 panel, select a motif set to choose from and select a motif from the dropdown list. Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the motif list for TrueView representations of motifs and select one. See also Selecting motifs for motif runs. 3 If you want different motifs for forward and backward rows, select the Motif 2 checkbox. 4 In the Motif 2 panel, select the motif to use in the backward row fill using the same method. Note You can scale Motif 1 and Motif 2 motifs independently. See

Scaling motifs to an exact size for details. 5 Click Apply.

Select motif set to select from for forward row Select motif for backward row Select motif for forward row Select motif set to select from for backward row Same motif selected for forward and backward rows Different motif selected for backward row

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 517

Using two-part motifs in motif fills

ES Designer provides two pre-defined motif sets. One contains single motifs for fills which use the same pattern in both forward and backward rows. The other set is intended for use with two-part motifs which use complementary patterns for forward and backward rows. Note For a complete catalog of samples, see Motif Samples.

To use two-part motifs in motif fills

1 Right-click the Motif Fill icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Motif Fill dialog opens. 2 In the Motif 1 panel, select the two-part motif set and select a motif from the dropdown list. Click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to select the current motif. Select the Motif Fill object, and click Properties to change the properties of Motif Fill objects.
Select two-part motif set to select from for forward row Select complementary motif for backward row Select motif for forward row Select two-part motif set to select from for backward row

ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 518 Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the motif list for TrueView representations of motifs and select one. See also Selecting motifs for motif runs. 3 Select the Motif 2 checkbox to add a complementary backward row and again select the two-part motif set from the dropdown list. 4 In the Motif 2 panel, select a complementary motif to use in the backward row. The pre-defined two-part motif set is specially designed to provide complementary motifs for forward and backward rowse.g. Duet01a and Duet01b. Note You can scale Motif 1 and Motif 2 motifs independently. See Scaling motifs to an exact size for details. 5 Click Apply.

Adjusting Motif Fill spacing and offset settings

You can adjust the exact row, column and spacing settings for motif fills. The default settings define a simple grid where the spacing equals the motif dimensions. The row offset is set to 0.00 mm so columns and rows are perpendicular. Right-click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust the exact row, column

and spacing settings. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 519 Note Spacing is measured from the start of each motif. So to define new spacing settings, add a distance between motifs to the original spacing. Reducing the original setting causes motifs to overlap.

To adjust spacing and offset settings

1 Right-click the Motif Fill icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Motif Fill dialog opens. 2 Select a motif set and motif. See Selecting motifs for motif fills for details. 3 Enter column spacing in the Column > Spacing field. 4 Enter row spacing in the Row > Spacing field. 5 Enter row offset in the Row > Offset field.
Enter column spacing Enter row spacing and offset Scale and clip motifs to fit shape row spacing changed offset changed

ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 520 6 Select the Scale motifs to fit grid checkbox to scale motifs to exactly fit the grid squares. 7 Select the Clip motifs to fit shape checkbox to clip motifs that do not fit the shape. Note If more than half a motif is outside the boundary, it will be omitted. 8 Click Apply.

Scaling motifs to an exact size

Scale motifs to fit grid OFF Scale motifs to fit grid ON Clip motifs to fit shape OFF Clip motifs to fit shape ON

You can set the exact size of motifs in a fill. You can also scale Motif 1 and Motif 2 motifs independently to create special effects.

Right-click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to scale motifs to an exact size. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 521

To scale motifs to an exact size

1 Right-click the Motif Fill icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Motif Fill dialog opens. 2 Select a motif set and motif. See Selecting motifs for motif fills for details. 3 In both panels, enter the dimensions of motif 1 and 2 for the forward and backward rows: ! Size X: Enter motif width. ! Size Y: Enter motif height. Note If you want the same motifs for forward and backward rows, deselect the Motif 2 checkbox. 4 Click Apply.
Enter motif width and height of forward rows Enter motif width and height of backward rows

Motif 1: default size Motif 2: default size Motif 1: size adjusted Motif 2: default size Motif 1: default size Motif 2: size adjusted

ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 522

t

Rotating motif fills by an exact amount

The rotation angle defines the orientation of the entire motif fill pattern. It overrides the stitch angle you set when digitizing the shape with Complex Fill.

To rotate a motif fill by an exact amount

1 Right-click the Motif Fill icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Motif Fill dialog opens. 2 Select a motif set and motif. See Selecting motifs for motif fills for details. 3 In the Rotation field, enter the rotation angle of the fill. 4 Click Apply. Right-click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to rotate motifs by an exact amount.
Enter rotation angle Rotation: 0 Rotation: 30 Rotation: 90

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 523

Laying out motif fills on-screen

Lay out motif fills on-screen in a similar way to program splits by using guide motifs to scale, space, transform and offset the entire motif fill. There are three blue guide motifs. Other sample motifs appear in yellow. Each guide motif lets you change a different element of the layout. When you change a guide motif, all other motifs change accordingly. See also Laying out program split patterns on-screen. Motif Fill does not have a column offset since motifs are connected along each row. Instead you can rotate the layout to achieve a similar effect. See Rotating motif fills by an exact amount for details. Tip Generally you define the layout of the motif fill before digitizing the object. If it is important to align motifs with the object boundary, digitize the object using current settings, and change the layout afterwards.

To lay out Motif Fills on-screen

1 Right-click the Motif Fill icon. The Object Properties > Fills > Motif Fill dialog opens. 2 Select a motif set and motif. See Selecting motifs for motif fills for details. Right-click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to access layout options.
Click to lay out selected motif

ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 524 3 Click Layout. Sample and guide motifs appear in the design window. When you change a guide motif, all motifs in the fill change accordingly. Tip Zoom in to select the correct guide motif. 4 Adjust the guide motifs to achieve the effect you require. ! Move motifs by selecting the middle guide motif and dragging it to a new position. ! Scale motifs by selecting a guide motif and resizing it using the selection handles. ! Rotate motifs by clicking the middle guide twice to display the rotation handles. Click a corner handle and drag to rotate.
Use top guide motif to change row spacing, row offset, and to scale motifs Use side guide motif to change

column spacing, and to scale motifs Use middle guide motif to move, rotate, skew, and scale motifs Scale proportionally Scale horizontally Scale vertically

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 525 ! Skew motifs by clicking the middle guide twice, then dragging the skew handles. ! Change column spacing by selecting the side guide and dragging it left or right. ! Change row spacing by selecting the top guide and dragging it up or down.
rotate skew anchor Change column spacing

ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 526 ! Change row offset by selecting the top guide and dragging it left or right. 5 Press Esc to finish. The size and layout settings you select become the current Motif Fill settings. Tip To revert to the original factory settings, run the Revert utility. See Reverting to factory settings for details. Alternatively, enter the values manually in the Object Properties > Fills > Motif Fill and click Save. See Motif Samples for details.

Applying 3D effects to motif fills

Use the 3D Warp tool with motif fills to create three dimensional effects. You can make shapes appear concave or convex using Globe In or Globe Out. You can also create distance effects using Perspective. You can apply 3D Warp as you digitize, or apply it to existing motif fills. Tip Small stitches may be generated along the edge of objects using 3D Warp. You can remove these automatically. See Removing small stitches automatically for details.
Change row spacing Change offset Without 3D Warp Globe In Globe Out Perspective

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 527

Applying and adjusting 3D Warp with Globe In/Globe Out

Using Globe In with 3D Warp gives a concave effect by increasing the motif size and spacing around a center point. Globe Out gives a convex effect by decreasing motif size and spacing. You can apply Globe In and Globe Out to an entire object, or to a specified part of the fill. You can modify the effect by adjusting the guide frame.

To apply and adjust 3D Warp with Globe In/Globe Out

1 Select the Motif Fill object. Note To apply 3D Warp to newly created objects, make sure you have no objects selected. 2 Right-click the 3D Warp icon. The Object Properties > Curve dialog opens. 3 Select the 3D Warp checkbox, and select Globe In or Globe Out from

the list. 4 Click Apply. Click 3D Warp (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply 3D effects to selected motif fills. Right-click to change settings. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected 3D Warp objects.
Select 3D Warp Select Globe In or Globe Out

ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 528 The Globe In or Out effect is applied to the selected object. 5 To make further adjustments, click the Reshape icon with the object selected. A guide frame appears around the object with three control points. 6 Adjust the control points to modify the effect as required: ! Top point: change frame height ! Side point: change frame width ! Center point: reposition frame. 7 Press Enter. Tip You can generate layers of colored motifs by duplicating an object and selecting a different color. For example, after filling a shape with circles, you can create a second layer, offset it, and apply a different color. You can then apply effects such as Globe Out to the whole motif fill.
Complex FIll object Globe In applied with Motif Fill Globe Out applied OR Click-and-drag to reposition frame Click-and-drag control point

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 529

Applying and adjusting 3D Warp with Perspective

Use Perspective with 3D Warp to create a perspective effect by exaggerating relative sizes. Note You need to adjust the guide frame for Perspective 3D Warp to specify the direction in which to make motifs larger and smaller.

To apply and adjust 3D Warp with Perspective

1 Select the Motif Fill object. Note To apply 3D Warp to newly created objects, make sure you have no objects selected. 2 Right-click the 3D Warp icon. The Object Properties > Curve dialog opens. 3 Select the 3D Warp checkbox, and select Perspective from the list. 4 Click Apply. 5 Click the Reshape icon. Click 3D Warp (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply 3D effects to selected motif fills. Right-click to change settings. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected 3D Warp objects.
Select 3D Warp Select Perspective

ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 530 A guide frame appears around the object. 6 Adjust the frame to move the guidelines closer together or further apart. Warning The guide frame must not cross the outer boundary of the shape, and cannot be inside the shape. 7 Press Enter. The perspective effect is applied.

Working with single motifs

You can add motifs to your design one-by-one. Rotate, scale, or mirror motifs as you add them or edit them like any other object.

Selecting and inserting single motifs

Select object and click Reshape Adjust frame and Press Enter

Add motifs to your design by selecting them from the Object Properties dialog.

Use Motif Run (Input toolbar) to select motifs for individual use. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 531 Note If a motif is comprised of two or more objects, these will be automatically grouped when inserted.

To select and insert a single motif

1 Right-click the Motif Run icon. The Object Properties > Outlines > Motif Run dialog opens. 2 Select a motif set from the Set list. 3 Select a pattern from the dropdown list. Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the motif list for TrueView representations of motifs and select one. 4 Click Apply to make the selection current. 5 Select Special > Motif > Use. The outline of the motif appears attached to the mouse pointer. 6 Move the pointer to the position you want to add the motif, and click to mark the anchor point. 7 Move the pointer until the motif is in the position you need, then click again for a guide point. Stitches are generated automatically. The outline of the motif appears attached to the mouse pointer ready for the next motif.
Select motif Select motif set Insert anchor point Insert guide point Repeat if required

ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 532 You can rotate, scale and mirror motifs as you insert them. See Rotating, mirroring and scaling motifs for details. 8 Repeat the steps to insert the motif again. Tip Press Enter to accept the default position and settings. 9 Press Esc to finish.

Rotating, mirroring and scaling motifs

You can rotate, scale, or mirror motifs as you add them to your design using the keyboard and mouse. Tip If you find it easier to insert a motif at its original size and orientation, you can scale, rotate and mirror it later just like any other object.

To rotate, mirror and scale motifs

1 Select a motif to insert. See Selecting and inserting single motifs for details. 2 Move the pointer to the position you want to add the motif, and click to mark the anchor point. The motif attaches to the mouse pointer. As you move the pointer, the motif rotates around the anchor point you marked. 3 Rotate, scale, or mirror the motif with the mouse.
Click to mark anchor point

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 533

! To rotate the motif, move the pointer until the rotation angle is

correct, then click again. ! To mirror the motif, right-click. ! To scale the motif, press Shift. Move the pointer until the motif outline shows the required size, then click again. Tip When mirroring and scaling, make sure the motif is at the required rotation angle, before clicking or right-clicking. 4 Press Esc to finish. Tip You can create motifs from patterns made in the cross stitch program and use them to create a cross stitch sampler. See the Cross Stitch User Manual Supplement for details.
Click to mark guide point motif rotated Motif rotated and mirrored Right-click to mark guide point and mirror motif Hold down Ctrl to constrain rotation angles Motif rotated and scaled Hold down Shift to resize the motif motifs created in Cross Stitch program

ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 534

Managing motifs
ES Designer provides various ways to manage your motifs including making motif sets, saving motifs, copying motifs between motif sets, and deleting motifs.

Saving motifs
To save motifs

The Make Motif function lets you save your own motifs for future use. Motifs may be saved to different files or motif sets. 1 Select the embroidery object you want to save as a motif. 2 Select Special > Motif > Make. The Make Motif dialog opens. 3 Select a Motif Set from the list. See also Creating motif sets. 4 Enter a name in the Motif Name field. 5 If you want to automatically remove machine functions from the motif, select the Remove Functions checkbox. 6 Click OK. 7 Click to mark two reference points for the motif. Use Motif > Make (Special menu) to save motifs.
Select motif set Enter motif name Select to remove unwanted machine functions

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 535 These determine the default motif orientation in motif runs and fills. Reference points also determine the spacing between each motif. Reference point 1 becomes the anchor point in the final motif. Reference point 2 becomes the rotation point. 8 Click OK. The motif is ready to use.

Creating motif sets

To create motif sets

The Make Motif function lets you create your own motif sets to organize and classify your motifs.

1 Select an embroidery object. 2 Select Special > Motif > Make.

Reference point 1 Reference point 1 Reference point 2 rotation direction Reference point 2

Use Motif > Make (Special menu) to create your own motif set. ES 2006 Chapter 22 Motif Runs and Fills 536 The Make Motif dialog opens. 3 Click New. The New Motif Set dialog opens. 4 Enter a name for the new motif set and click OK. The Motif Set is ready for use. Note Motif sets are stored in the C:\ESWin\Userletw folder. You can delete or rename these motif sets as required.

Deleting motifs
To delete motifs

Delete any motifs you no longer want from a motif set. 1 Select Special > Motif > Select. The Select Motif dialog opens. 2 Select the motif to delete. 3 Click Delete. A confirmation message appears. 4 Click Yes.
Click New to create new motif set Enter name for motif set
My New Motif Set

Use Motif > Select (Special menu) to delete motifs from a set. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 537

Chapter 23

Sequins and Boring

Some embroidery machines are equipped with a sequin dispenser that drops sequins onto the garment as it stitches. Some are also equipped with a boring knife or needle to cut holes in the fabric, producing an effect similar to lace. Often the two techniques are used in combination. ES Designer provides a dedicated set of Sequin tools which allow you to digitize sequined designs for compatible machines. There are also tools for creating boring holes. Note Sequin Mode is currently only supported in Schiffli, Tajima, and ZSK embroidery machine formats. Before you can use Sequin Mode, you must select a machine format that supports it. See Selecting machine formats for details. See also Saving designs in ZSK-TC format. You can set up a sequin palette for each design from a library of pre-defined shapes and sizes. Create sequin runs along digitized lines, either placing sequins manually or letting the software generate placement positions according to current settings. You can change sequin shapes and fixing stitch patterns at any stage. The Sequin tools also allow you to digitize individual sequins for even greater control. Artwork for sequin designs is frequently prepared in

third-party applications. Vector files can be imported into ES Designer and converted directly to sequin runs. You have complete control over scaling and reshaping Sequin Run objects. If your embroidery machine is equipped with a boring knife or needle, you can use the Borers tool to cut holes in the fabric, producing an effect similar to lace. With Borers selected, each needle penetration point becomes a borer hole, regardless of the selected stitch type. Borer holes are generally ES 2006 Chapter 23 Sequins and Boring 538 stabilized with Zigzag to prevent fraying and movement, and bordered with Satin stitches. This section describes how to set up custom sequin palettes for the creation of sequin designs. It also describes how to create sequin runs and digitize individual sequins, as well as how to convert sequin artwork to Sequin Run. Scaling and reshaping sequin runs is also explained as well as digitizing boring holes.

Setting up custom sequin palettes

Set up a dedicated sequin palette from a library of pre-defined shapes and sizes. The Sequin Palette dialog lets you prepare a palette of sequins to use in your design. Adjust the color and size of each sequin. You can even adjust the hole size.

To set up a custom sequin palette

1 Click the Sequin Palette Editor icon. The Sequin Palette dialog opens. 2 Click the Add button to add sequin types to the Sequin Palette. Use Sequin Palette (Sequin toolbar) to select from a user-defined palette of sequin shapes for the current design. Use Sequin Palette Editor (Sequin toolbar) to select sequin shapes from a sequin library.
Click to add sequin types Click to mix colors of sequins Adjust size and hole size

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 539 The Select Sequin Type dialog opens. 3 Select a sequin from the list and click OK. 4 Adjust the sequin and hole size as required. Note The number in the Name field adjusts automatically to correspond to the Size field setting. 5 Select the color checkbox or Mix button in the Sequin Palette dialog. The Color dialog opens. 6 Select or mix a color and click OK. 7 Repeat as many times as necessary.
Select sequin to add Click to add to palette Drag crosshairs to adjust color Drag arrow to adjust brightness Click to select color Add selected color to Custom Colors Enter exact values if known

ES 2006 Chapter 23 Sequins and Boring 540 Selected sequins are now available for use in the Sequin Palette.

Creating sequin runs

Create sequin runs along digitized lines, either placing sequins manually or letting the software generate placement positions according to current

settings. You have the choice of exact spacing, for open shapes, or even spacing, for closed shapes. You can preset sequin type or change at any stage. Similarly, you can preset fixing stitches or change them after digitizing. There is an option to ensure that the stitch before the Drop Sequin function is placed opposite the feeding direction, as recommended by machine manufacturers. Note The Backtrack/Repeat tool is enabled for Sequin Run objects. See Reinforcing outlines for details.

Creating manual and automatic sequin runs

Select sequin to use

Use Sequin Run Auto (Sequin toolbar) to create a string of sequins along a digitized line according to current settings. Use Sequin Run Manual (Sequin toolbar) to manually digitize sequin-drops along a digitized line. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 541 Use the Sequin Run input method to create a string of sequins along a digitized line. You have the option of digitizing individual sequin drops with the manual method, or letting the system automatically generate drops along the line according to current settings. Digitize lines as you would motif runs. Fixing stitches are generated automatically according to current settings. Note Sequin Mode is currently only supported in Schiffli, Tajima, and ZSK embroidery machine formats. Before you can use Sequin Mode, you must select a machine format that supports it. See Selecting machine formats for details.

To create manual and automatic sequin runs

1 Select the sequin type you want to use from the dropdown list in the Sequin Palette. See Setting up custom sequin palettes for details. 2 Click the Sequin Run Auto icon. 3 Digitize the line along which you want the sequin run to appear by entering reference pointsleft-click for corner points, right-click for curve points. 4 When you have finished digitizing the line, press Enter. Sequins of the selected type are automatically generated along the digitized line along with their fixing stitches. Spacings can be individually adjusted. See Scaling and reshaping sequin runs for details. 5 To add details or create special spacings, click the Sequin Run Manual icon. Use Sequin Palette (Sequin toolbar) to select from a user-defined palette of sequin shapes for the current design.
Press Enter Digitize outlineleft-click corner points, right-click curve points

ES 2006 Chapter 23 Sequins and Boring 542 6 Digitize individual sequinsagain, left-click for corner points, right-click for curve points. Connecting and fixing stitches are automatically generated. See Changing sequin shapes and fixing stitches for details.

Changing sequin shapes and fixing stitches

You can select sequins before or after digitizing a sequin run. Similarly, you can preset fixing stitches or change them at any stage. Note Sequin Run stitch has potential as a decorative stitch in its own right. For this purpose you can select None in the Sequin Palette. This option is best used with the Sequin Drop Direction set to Any. See also Changing sequin-drop direction.

To change sequin shapes and fixing stitches

1 To change shapes, select the object and select a different sequin type

from the Sequin Palette on the Sequin toolbar. Use Sequin Palette (Sequin toolbar) to select from a user-defined palette of sequin shapes for the current design.
Press Enter Digitize individual sequinsleft-click corner points, right-click curve points

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 543 All sequins in the object are immediately substituted. 2 To change fixing stitches, double-click the object. The Object Properties > Outlines > Sequin Run dialog opens. 3 Click the Fixing Type Chooser button in the Type panel. The Object Properties dialog extends to the Fixing Type Chooser.
Click to open Fixing Type Chooser Fixing stitch preview Select fixing stitch type

ES 2006 Chapter 23 Sequins and Boring 544 4 Select a fixing stitch type. A preview of the selected fixing stitch appears in the Preview Pane. 5 Click Apply. Fixing stitches for the object are regenerated. Note To close the Fixing Type Chooser, click the Fixing Type Chooser button again. 6 To adjust the fixing stitch size, select one of the followings: ! Match Sequin: sets a margin around the sequin so that fixing stitches dont punch too close to the sequin. ! Set Manually: sets the fixing stitch size for all sequins, regardless of size. 7 Click Apply.
Adjust automatic or manual settings Sequin size: 7 mm Auto Margin: 0.50 mm Sequin size: 7 mm Manual Size: 5.00 mm Sequin size: 7 mm Manual Size: 10.00 mm

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 545

Changing sequin-drop direction

There is an option to ensure that the stitch before the Drop Sequin function is placed opposite the feeding direction, as recommended by machine manufacturers. Otherwise, the sequin may be deflected by the thread. If the needle then misses the center of a sequin because of incorrect placement, the embroidery material, needles or needle plates may be damaged. In multihead machines, sequins are fed from the front or south which means that the initial fixing stitch should be placed on the north side. In Schiffli machines, the opposite is the case.

To change sequin-drop direction

1 Select a sequin run object and double-click. The Object Properties dialog opens. 2 Select the Special tab and Sequin in the dropdown list. 3 Select a required sequin drop stitch direction:

! From North: ensures that the initial fixing stitch is opposite the
feeding directionfront or southwhich is the case in multihead machines.
Select special tab Select sequin Select sequin drop direction Select to prevent multiple penetrations

ES 2006 Chapter 23 Sequins and Boring 546 ! From South: ensures that the initial fixing stitch is opposite the feeding directionthe top or northwhich is the case in Schiffli machines. Warning With the Any option, direction is not important. This option generates the least number of fixing stitches but may not be suitable for your sequin device. It should be used by experienced digitizers only. 4 Enter an angle in the Max Angle field to specify an angular range within which drop sequin stitch will fall. You can set the value for either North or South fixing stitches. The default is 90 but this can be increased or decreased depending on the capabilities of your machine. 5 Select the Prevent multiple penetrations option as required.
Drop direction From South: initial fixing stitch always placed below, and sequin fed from north Drop direction From North: initial fixing stitch always placed above, and sequin fed from south Set maximum allowable angle for placement of fixing stitch Drop stitch direction set to North or South

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 547 This option is used to minimize penetrations at the same point, and to generate Schiffli-compatible fixing stitching. If you select the Schiffli template, the option is on by default. When set to off, some fixing stitches will have multiple penetrations at the same point, both at the sequin center and outer edge. 6 Select the Closest Point Join option as required. By default, this option is off, meaning that the system connects the predefined exit leg of the fixing stitch motif to the predefined entry leg of the next fixing stitch motif. That is, unless the connector exceeds the maximum sequin stitch. Choose the Closest Point Join option if you want to always connect fixing stitch motifs from the leg closest to the nearest leg of the next fixing stitch motif. 7 Click Apply.

Adjusting sequin run spacing and orientation

You can change the spacing in a sequin run at any stage. If you use the manual method, you define the spacings between sequin-drops with every click you make. If you use the automatic method, sequin-drops are calculated according to the current spacing setting. You have the choice of exact spacing, better for open shapes, or even spacing, better for closed shapes. You can also manually fine-tune sequin spacings with the Reshape tool.
Prevent Multiple Penetrations on Prevent Multiple Penetrations off

ES 2006 Chapter 23 Sequins and Boring 548

To adjust sequin run spacing and orientation

1 Select a sequin run objectmanual or automatic.

2 Double-click the object. The Object Properties > Outlines > Sequin Run dialog opens. 3 In the Positioning panel, select a spacing method: ! Exact: uses the specified Spacing exactly. This may result in an uneven spacing at the end of the curve. ! Expand to fit: makes the spacing increase from the nominal value until there is a sequin at the end of the path. ! Compact to fit: makes the spacing decrease from the nominal value until there is a sequin at the end of the path. Tip If you want the sequins irregular, digitize using the Sequin Run Manual tool and for fine-tuning of individual sequin spacings, use the Reshape tool. See also Scaling and reshaping sequin runs.
manual sequin run automatic sequin run Select spacing method Exact Expand to fit Compact to fit

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 549 4 To adjust fixing stitch orientation to place the first stroke of the fixing stitch, select one of the following: ! Left Orientation: to the left of the sequin run curve. ! Right Orientation: to the right. ! Vertical Orientation: always in the vertical planenot relevant to one-stroke fixing stitch types. 5 Adjust the minimum, run and maximum stitch lengths when connecting the fixing stitches, if required. 6 Click Apply.

Digitizing individual sequins

Choose fixing stitch orientationleft, right, vertical Orientation: Left Orientation: Right Orientation: Vertical Adjust stitch lengths

Use Manual Sequin (Sequin toolbar) to digitize individual sequins. ES 2006 Chapter 23 Sequins and Boring 550 The Manual Sequin input method allows you individual control over sequin placement and fixing stitches. Create decorative outlines and patterns manually using sequins from the selection list. To add a sequin to the stitching sequence, simply right-click to drop it onto the design, and secure it with manual stitches. Manual sequin stitching is a difficult digitizing skill to master and you need to plan the stitching sequence carefully in order to minimize unnecessary stitches. Experiment with your machine and stitch width and spacing settings to achieve the desired result. See also Sequin On/Off functions. Note Sequin Mode is currently only supported in Schiffli, Tajima, and ZSK embroidery machine formats. Before you can use Sequin Mode, you must select a machine format that supports it. See Selecting machine formats for details.

To digitize individual sequins

1 Click the Manual Sequin icon. 2 Right-click to add a sequin to the design. A shape representing the sequin appears. 3 Left-click to digitize fixing stitches around the sequin to secure it. Three stitches in the shape of a Y are generally used. The needle points of each stitch must be placed precisely to ensure that sequins are not

pierced by the needle when stitching. Tip Zoom in for more accurate digitizing. 4 Press Enter.
Left-click to digitize fixing stitches Right-click to drop a sequin

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 551

Converting sequin artwork to Sequin Run

Frequently, artwork for sequin designs is independently created by a specialist designer and supplied to the embroidery digitizer in vector file format. The Vectors to Sequins tool is available for just this purpose. A sequin run is automatically created from a set of vector objects representing sequins selected by intersecting line. The order the line crosses the sequins determines the sequin order. Fixing stitches are generated automatically according to current Sequin Run settings. Note Sequin Mode is currently only supported in Schiffli, Tajima, and ZSK embroidery machine formats. Before you can use Sequin Mode, you must select a machine format that supports it. See Selecting machine formats for details.

To convert sequin artwork to Sequin Run

1 Insert the sequin artwork into the design. Properly designed artwork will contain vector objects centered on the exact locations required for sequins in the design. 2 Select the Vectors to Sequins icon. You are prompted to Enter point 1 on the polyline on the Prompt Message bar. Use Vectors to Sequins (Sequin toolbar) to create a sequin run from a set of sequin vector objects selected by intersecting line.
Specially prepared sequin artwork

ES 2006 Chapter 23 Sequins and Boring 552 3 Click the sequin graphic which will start the Sequin Run. 4 Digitize a line connecting all sequins to be included in the Sequin Run. The line only needs to touch the sequin object somewhere within its boundary. Enter reference points by left-clicking for corner points and right-clicking for curve points. 5 Press Enter. A Sequin Run is generated with a curve that passes through the center of each sequin graphic with sequin objects positioned at these centers. Current properties are applied and the object is set to manual by default. Note The generated curve contains a reshape node at each sequin position.
Digitize connecting line passing through all sequin graphics Generated curve contains reshape node at each sequin position

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 553

Scaling and reshaping sequin runs

Sequin editing often requires individual control over sequin positions. Change sequin shapes and fixing stitch patterns at any stage. You have complete control over scaling and reshaping Sequin Run objects. Scale and reshape sequin run lines, as well as remove or add individual sequins. You can also manually fine-tune sequin spacings. You can even edit individual fixing stitches. Note Performing manual edits to Sequin Run objects automatically

deselects all the options. If you set it back to Exact, Compact to fit, or Expand to fit spacing, all manual edits are lost.

To scale and reshape a sequin run

! Scale Sequin Run objects in the normal way by clicking and dragging
selection handles, or by adjusting the general properties. See Scaling objects for details. ! If the object is created with the Sequin Run Auto tool, the sequin drops are automatically recalculated. Use Select Object (Pointer toolbar) to resize objects using selection handles. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected Sequin Run objects.
Sequin drops regenerated according to current settings

ES 2006 Chapter 23 Sequins and Boring 554 ! If the object is created with the Sequin Run Manual tool, the original number of sequin drops is preserved. ! Reshape sequin run lines with the Reshape tool as you would any run object. Add reshape nodes by left- or right-clicking the outline. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details. Note When a sequin run object is in the Reshape Mode, the Show Stitch Angles icon is disabled. ! Fine-tune individual sequin spacings with the Reshape toolclick-and-drag a spacing handle. You can also select a range of or multiple spacing handles by using Shift or Ctrl keys. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.
Original number of sequin drops preserved

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 555 Note The movement of sequin objects is contained on the sequin run line. ! Delete selected sequins by pressing the Delete. ! Add sequins by holding down the Alt key and clicking the sequin run line. ! Rotate sequins and fixing stitches with the Reshape tool. ! Reshape individual fixing stitches with the Reshape tool. To view the fixing stitch reshape nodes, click the sequin outline.

Digitizing boring holes

Click-and-drag spacing handle Click-and-drag rotation handle

Use Penetrations (Generate toolbar) together with Borers to digitize boring holes.
Click-and-drag fixing stitch

ES 2006 Chapter 23 Sequins and Boring 556 If your embroidery machine is equipped with a boring knife or needle, you can use the Borers tool (formerly known as Borers In) to cut holes in the fabric, producing an effect similar to lace. With Borers selected, each needle penetration point becomes a borer hole, regardless of the selected stitch type. Borer holes are generally stabilized with Zigzag to prevent fraying and movement, and bordered with Satin stitches. Tip Boring is a difficult digitizing skill to master. You may need to experiment with your machine and stitch width and spacing settings to achieve the effect you require. With Tajima and Barudan machines Borers inserts a Stop function which allows the machine to change to the needle position

that uses the boring attachment. The machine must be correctly programmed to use the correct needle position. Note The default setting for Multihead borers is for a knife attachment, where the cutting position is offset 12 mm from the main needle line. This offset is only expressed when you save your design to a stitch format like DST. If you are using a boring needle, you need to change the offset value to 0. See Setting borer functions for details.

To digitize boring holes

1 Ensure Penetrations is on. Use Run (Input toolbar) to digitize an outline around the shape you want to bore. Use Borers (Generate toolbar) to activate the boring function. Use Manual (Input toolbar) to digitize boring holes. Use Input A (Input toolbar) to digitize border stitching around the holes. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 557 2 Click the Run icon and digitize an outline around the shape you want to bore. This helps prevent the fabric from tearing. 3 Click the Borers icon. A machine function is inserted to indicate the change from stitching to boring. 4 Click the Manual icon and digitize individual stitches where you want a boring knife to cut. See Digitizing individual stitches for details. Each stitch you digitize becomes a boring hole. The borer penetration points appear as diamonds, connected by dotted lines. These do not appear in TrueView. Alternatively use Run to digitize lines for boring holes. See Digitizing lines for details. ! For a round hole, digitize two intersecting lines. ! For an oval hole, digitize one line. Tip Reduce the Run stitch lengthe.g. 1.0-1.5 mmto place the borer penetrations closer together, thereby ensuring the fabric will be cut right through. See Setting run stitch length for details. 5 Click Borers again to deselect it.
Digitize outline with Run stitch Digitize boring holes with Manual or Run stitch

ES 2006 Chapter 23 Sequins and Boring 558 This returns you to normal stitching. You now need to stabilize the fabric and create borders by stitching around them with Zigzag and Satin cover stitches. 6 Digitize around the hole with Input A together with Zigzag stitch. Place the inside edge close to the center of the hole so it wraps the fabric. See Digitizing columns of fixed width for details. 7 Digitize border stitching with Input A together with Satin stitch. Place the inside edge of the object close to the center of the hole. If you have used Zigzag stitches for reinforcement, ensure they are covered. Warning You should not use Satin with a Zigzag underlay because a run stitch is also generated (to return to the entry point). This can cause thread breakage.
Digitize borders with Input A and Satin Digitize around hole with Input A and

Zigzag

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 559

PART VI EMBROIDERY
Creating embroidery lettering

LETTERING

Create top-quality lettering quickly and simply. ES Designer provides a large range of scaleable closest-join alphabet styles and multi-color and fancy stitching alphabets to choose from. This section describes how to add and edit lettering, change formatting settings, and adjust lettering size and spacing. See Creating Embroidery Lettering for details.

Adjusting lettering layout

This section describes how to adjust lettering objects as well as individual letters. It also describes how to apply and adjust lettering baselines. See Editing Embroidery Lettering for details.

Adjusting lettering stitch settings

This section describes changing lettering stitch types in lettering objects, and adjusting lettering stitch angles. It also explains how to adjust the lettering stitching sequence as well as lettering join method. See Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings for details.

Special lettering features

This section shows you how to add special characters and symbols. It describes how to create special effects with envelopes. It also covers adding ES 2006 Embroidery Lettering 560 borders to lettering, as well as setting up team lettering designs. See Special Lettering Features for details.

Custom alphabets

This section describes how to create new alphabets from TrueType fonts. It also describes how to create and modify your own custom alphabets and letters. Alphabet merging is also explained. See Custom Alphabets for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 561

Chapter 24ca

Creating Embroidery Lettering

Create top-quality lettering quickly and simply. ES Designer provides a large range of scalable closest-join alphabet styles and multi-color and fancy stitching alphabets to choose from. Add lettering directly to designs using current settings or with the aid of the dialog. With object-based operation, you can type and manipulate your text directly on-screen, changing the size or spacings to fit. Apply formatting just like a word processor, including italics, bolding, and right/left justification. Change values for the whole text or for individual letters. This section describes how to add and edit lettering, change formatting settings, and adjust lettering size and spacing. ES 2006 Chapter 24 Creating Embroidery Lettering 562

Adding lettering to embroidery designs

You can add lettering to a design by typing it directly in the design window, or entering it via the Object Properties dialog. Tip The size of your lettering will determine the type of underlay you need to apply. Apart from stabilizing, underlay helps give loft or to raise your

lettering off the fabric. Lettering with heights under 5 mm should not have underlay. Letters 6 mm to 10 mm can have a center-run underlay applied. Lettering larger than 10 mm is large enough for edge-run underlay. See Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays for details.

Creating lettering on-screen

If it is not essential to fit letters precisely to a certain area, you can type them directly on-screen as with a word processor. Current lettering settings are used. You can change these before or after you digitize. You can also modify lettering objects directly on-screen to achieve various artistic effects.

To create lettering on-screen

1 Click the Lettering icon. 2 Select a color from the color palette. 3 Click where you want to insert the text and start typing. Tip To start a new line, press Shift + Enter. 4 Press Enter to complete. Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to add lettering directly on-screen. Use Generate Stitches (Generate toolbar) to generate stitches for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 563 5 Click the Generate Stitches icon or press G. Note Appearance and layout depend on current settings in the Object Properties dialog. Baselines determine the shape of lettering objects in a design. You can place lettering on a straight horizontal or vertical line, curve lettering around a circle or arc, or digitize your own baseline.See Working with lettering baselines for details.

Creating lettering with Object Properties

Using the Object Properties dialog, you can specify letter formatting before adding it to the design. This is the more traditional method and is useful with more complex designs.

To create lettering with Object Properties

1 Right-click the Lettering icon. Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to enter text in the dialog and adjust settings for embroidery lettering. Use Generate Stitches (Generate toolbar) to generate stitches for new or selected objects. ES 2006 Chapter 24 Creating Embroidery Lettering 564 The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Enter the text you want to embroider in the text entry panel. To start a new line of lettering, press Enter. Tip You can insert a color change between two letters by keying a caret (^) symbol. Subsequent letters default to the next color in the palette. 3 Select alphabet, formatting and baseline settings for the lettering. See Selecting alphabets and Formatting lettering for details. 4 Click Apply.
Select baseline Adjust formatting Select alphabet Enter text Click to apply

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 565 Note Alternatively, click Create Text to create text on the screen when the Apply button is deactivated. 5 Click where you want to place the lettering, or mark reference points for the baseline you selected. See Working with lettering baselines for details. 6 Select Generate Stitches icon or press G. Note Appearance and layout depend on current settings in the Object Properties dialog. Baselines determine the shape of lettering objects in

a design. You can place lettering on a straight horizontal or vertical line, curve lettering around a circle or arc, or digitize your own baseline.See Working with lettering baselines for details.

Selecting alphabets

ES Designer provides an alphabet range suitable for many applications. Select from the supplied alphabets, create your own, or convert TrueType fonts. See also Custom Alphabets.
apply button deactivated Click to create text

Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to select an alphabet for new or selected lettering objects. ES 2006 Chapter 24 Creating Embroidery Lettering 566 Tip Once recorded, user-refined alphabet letters can be applied via the Use saved version checkbox. See also Saving user-refined letters.

To select an alphabet

1 Right-click the Lettering icon. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Click the Preview in Dropdown List checkbox to view preview of alphabets. 3 Select an alphabet from the Alphabet list. A sample character of the chosen alphabet appears in the preview window. For samples of the complete selection of standard alphabets, see Standard Alphabets. Tip Consider letter size before you change alphabets. Some alphabets look best in a smaller size. Others can be stitched at a larger size. See also Adjusting letter height and width. 4 Click the Use saved version checkbox to use saved user-refined lettering in preference to the default.
Select alphabet Select to preview alphabet in dropdown list Use user-refined version

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 567 User-refined lettering lets you save multiple versions of the same letter to the same alphabet. Each version can have a unique height range. See User-refined alphabets for details. 5 Click Apply. The lettering alphabet is set.

Working with lettering baselines

Baselines determine the shape of lettering objects in a design. You can place lettering on a straight horizontal or vertical line, curve lettering around a circle or arc, or digitize your own baseline. Different reference points are needed depending on the baseline you use. You can digitize baselines on-screen or, if you are working from an enlargement drawing, on a digitizing tablet. Baselines use default settings to determine their size, spacing and angles. ES Designer gives you both interactive and precise numerical control over many baseline settings. Techniques are available to modify baseline type, length, radius and angle, as well as baseline position. You can numerically define the rotation angle of letters relative to the baseline or the design itself.
User-refined letter a used for smaller sizes

ES 2006 Chapter 24 Creating Embroidery Lettering 568

Applying baselines

You can select different baselines through the Object Properties > Special dialog. You can also adjust baseline settings. You can apply baselines to

existing objects or pre-set a baseline for new lettering objects.

To apply a baseline

1 Double-click a selected lettering object or right-click the Lettering icon. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Select a baseline from the list. The baseline you choose depends on the effect you want to achieve. Options include: Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to select baselines and adjust baseline settings.
Select baseline

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 569 ! Horizontal (Free Line and Fixed Line): See Applying horizontal baselines for details. ! Vertical (Free Line Vertical and Fixed Line Vertical): See Applying vertical baselines for details. ! Arc (Arc CW and Arc CCW): See Applying arc baselines for details. ! Circle (Circle CW and Circle CCW): See Applying circular baselines for details. ES 2006 Chapter 24 Creating Embroidery Lettering 570 ! Custom (Any Shape): See Applying custom baselines for details. ! Predefined: See Using predefined baselines for details. 3 Adjust baseline settings in the Layout dialog. See Adjusting baselines for details. 4 Click Apply.

Applying horizontal baselines

Free Line and Fixed Line baselines are straight, horizontal baselines. Free Line does not have a fixed or pre-determined lengththe baseline extends as long as you keep adding letters. Fixed Line has a fixed length which you can digitize or specify numerically. If the text extends beyond the baseline, letter spacing is reduced and letters may overlap. The letter width, however, does not change. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 571

To apply horizontal baselines

1 Create a new lettering object. See Creating lettering with Object Properties for details. 2 Select the horizontal baseline you want to apply and click Apply. 3 For variable-length horizontal lines, enter your text in the Object Properties dialog and select Free Line. Click the screen to establish the start-point of the baseline. ! For fixed-length horizontal lines, enter your text in the Object Properties dialog and select Fixed Line. Click the screen to establish the start and end points of the baseline. You can define any angle depending on where you mark the reference points. You can adjust baseline settings at any stage. See Adjusting straight baseline settings for details.

Applying vertical baselines

Vertical baselines are effective for embroidering on sleeves, as a decorative effect, and for Asian text. There are two typesFree Line Vertical and Fixed Line Vertical. Free Line Vertical baselines do not have a fixed length, and extend to fit the letters you enter. Fixed Line Vertical baselines are a fixed length. Letter spacing may be compressed to make the letters fit. Line spacing is calculated horizontally while letter spacing is calculated vertically. Letters, by default, are centered along vertical lines. New lines are placed by default from right to left to suit Asian languages. Tip For Western languages, vertical lettering is best suited to

uppercase because descenders in lowercase letters are not accommodated in the letter spacing.
Free LineClick on-screen to mark start point Fixed LineClick on-screen to mark start and end points

ES 2006 Chapter 24 Creating Embroidery Lettering 572

To apply a vertical baseline

1 Create a new lettering object. See Creating lettering with Object Properties for details. 2 Select the vertical baseline you want to apply and click Apply: ! For variable-length vertical lines, enter your text in the Object Properties dialog and select Free Line Vertical. Click the screen to establish the start-point of the baseline. ! For fixed-length vertical lines, enter your text in the Object Properties dialog and select Fixed Line Vertical. Click the screen to establish the start and end points of the baseline. You can define any angle depending on where you mark the reference points. Note You can adjust baseline settings at any stage. See Adjusting straight baseline settings for details.

Applying arc baselines

Use Arc Clockwise (Arc CW) and Arc Counter-Clockwise (Arc CCW) baselines to place lettering objects in a curved arc. You can place the lettering clockwise (CW) or counter-clockwise (CCW) along the arc. By
Free Line Verticalclick the screen to mark mid-point Fixed Line Verticalclick the screen to mark start and end points

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 573 default, letters are positioned above the Arc CW and below the Arc CCW baseline. They are also centered by default.

To apply arc baselines

1 Create a new lettering object. See Creating lettering with Object Properties for details. 2 Select Arc CW or Arc CCW as a baseline and click Apply. 3 Mark the start and end points of the arc. Tip Hold down the Ctrl key to constrain the line to 15 increments. 4 Move the pointer up or down to increase the radius of the arc. 5 Mark a third point above the first two points for Arc CW, and below them for Arc CCW baseline. 6 Press Enter to complete and press G to generate stitches. Depending on the order in which you mark the reference points, the text will be placed left to right, or right to left.
12 3 12 3 arc clockwise arc counter-clockwise

ES 2006 Chapter 24 Creating Embroidery Lettering 574

Applying circular baselines

To apply circular baselines

Use Circle Clockwise (Circle CW) or Circle Counter-Clockwise (Circle CCW) baseline to place letters around a full circle or oval. 1 Create a new lettering object. See Creating lettering with Object Properties for details.

2 Select Circle CW or Circle CCW as a baseline and click Apply. 3 Mark the center of the circle. 4 Mark a point on the circumference to define the radius. Tip Hold down the Ctrl key to constrain the line to 15 increments. 5 Mark a third point to define an ellipse or press Enter directly for a perfect circle. As soon as Enter is pressed, the letters of your text are distributed around the circle. See also Setting letter justification. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 575

Applying custom baselines

Use Any Shape baselines to shape lettering around elements in your design. Digitize Any Shape baselines by marking reference points to form the required line. The number of reference points and length of baseline are practically unlimited. Tip If the baseline has tight curves, or sharp corners, the letters may overlap. For best results, only mark curve points, and digitize lines which have shallow, gentle curves.

To apply custom baselines

1 Create a new lettering object. See Creating lettering with Object Properties for details. 2 Select Any Shape as a baseline and click Apply. 3 Mark the baseline reference points. ! Mark curve points with the right mouse button. ! Mark corner points with the left mouse button. 4 Press Enter to complete and press G to generate stitches.
12 3 4

ES 2006 Chapter 24 Creating Embroidery Lettering 576

Using predefined baselines

Use Predefined baselines to quickly create three rows of lettering, or two rows surrounding a design object. This technique is typically used for creating logos.

To use a predefined baseline

1 With no objects selected, right-click the Lettering icon. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Enter two or three lines of text in the text entry panel. To start a new line of lettering, press Enter. Tip If you want to insert a logo or design between the top and bottom lines, leave the middle line of text blank.
Select options and adjust settings Enter two or three lines of text

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 577 3 Select the alphabet and adjust other settings you require. See Selecting alphabets and Formatting lettering for details. 4 Select Predefined from the baseline list. 5 Click OK. 6 Click where you want to place the lettering and drag the cursor downward. Tip Hold down the Ctrl key to constrain the line to 15 increments. 7 Click to enter a point on the circumference of the circle. 8 Mark another point if you want to create an oval, or press Enter for a circular baseline.

9 Press G to generate stitches. The lines of text are generated and dispersed around the baseline you have defined. Each line of text becomes a separate lettering object.
Select Predefined baseline

ES 2006 Chapter 24 Creating Embroidery Lettering 578

Formatting lettering
You can control the appearance of lettering by changing formatting settings in the Object Properties dialog. Change current formatting settings before or after adding lettering in the same way as other objects.

Making italic lettering

To make italic lettering

You can slant letters to the left or right for an italic effect. Enter the degree of slant in the Angle field. The default angle is 0. 1 Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Enter an angle in the Italic field. The largest angle that the lettering can lean at is 45. (0 is equivalent to no italics.) 3 Click Apply.

Making bold lettering

You can create the effect of bold lettering either by increasing the pull compensation settings for selected lettering objects, or adjusting the column width setting. The difference is that the column width setting adjusts
Enter italic angle italic angle 45 italic angle 0 italic angle -45

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 579 the entire column, including underlay, while pull compensation adjusts only cover stitching. See also Compensating for fabric stretch.

To make bold lettering

1 Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Select the Pull Comp tab. 3 Select Column Width or Pull Compensation as required. See Compensating for fabric stretch and Adjusting column width for details. 4 Increase the values in the respective fields. 5 Click Apply.
Increase pull compensation or column width Select Pull Comp tab normal pull comp: 0.3 mm column width: 140%

ES 2006 Chapter 24 Creating Embroidery Lettering 580

Setting letter justification

Justification is the way that lettering aligns itself on a baseline. You can justify lettering left or right, center it, or fully justify it. Full justification spreads the letters out to fill the length of the baseline.

To set letter justification

1 Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Select a justification settingLeft, Centered, Right, or Justified. 3 Click Apply.

Adjusting letter spacing

Letter, word and line spacings can be determined before or after creating lettering objects and placing them in your design. You can edit spacing directly on-screen or via the dialog. Letter spacing is calculated
left centered right fully justified

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 581 automatically according to justificationLeft, Centered, Right, or Full

Justified. See also Setting letter justification. Note When the justification setting is Full, letters are evenly distributed along the baseline. To change the spacing for fully justified lettering, simply change the length of the baseline.

Adjusting overall letter spacing on-screen

The spacing between letters is calculated automatically as a percentage of the letter height. In most cases the default spacing is adequate. Sometimes, however, you may want to change the overall letter spacing.

To adjust overall letter spacing on-screen

1 Select the lettering object. 2 Click the Reshape Object icon. 3 Drag the letter spacing control point left or right to adjust the spacing of all letters along the baseline. Click Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to change letter spacing.
Drag letter spacing control point

ES 2006 Chapter 24 Creating Embroidery Lettering 582 4 Release the mouse button to complete and press Esc.

Adjusting individual letter spacing on-screen

The spacing between letters is calculated automatically as a percentage of letter height. In most cases the default spacing is adequate. Sometimes, however, the spacing between certain letters may appear too large or too small, depending on the shape of neighboring letters. To compensate for this visual effect, you can move one or several selected letters closer or further apart along the baseline to improve spacing. See also Automatic letter kerning.

To adjust individual letter spacing on-screen

1 Select the lettering object. 2 Click the Reshape Object icon. 3 Click the diamond control point in the centre of the letter. Tip To select multiple or a range of letters, hold down Ctrl or Shift as you select. 4 Drag selected letter/s along the baseline or use arrow keys to adjust the spacing. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to change individual letter spacing.
Hold down Ctrl and click diamond control points

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 583 Tip Alternatively, to move multiple letters, right-click the diamond control point of the first letter and drag. All letters to the end of the line move as one. 5 Release the mouse button to complete and press Esc.

Adjusting line spacing on-screen

To adjust line spacing on-screen

Change the space between lines in a multiple-line lettering object using the Reshape Object tool. 1 Select the lettering object. 2 Click the Reshape Object icon. 3 Drag the line spacing control point up or down to change line spacing. 4 Release the mouse button to complete and press Esc. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to change line spacing.
Drag line spacing control point

ES 2006 Chapter 24 Creating Embroidery Lettering 584

Adjusting spacing settings

To adjust spacing settings

You can adjust letter, word and line spacings in lettering objects at any stage via the Object Properties dialog.

1 Double-click a selected lettering object or right-click the Lettering icon. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Enter Spacing values as absolute values (mm) or percentages of the height. ! Letter Spacing: the space between letters. ! Word Spacing: the space between words. ! Line Spacing: the space between lines.
Enter values as absolutes (mm) or percentages

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 585 Note Whether you enter a percentage or absolute value, the other updates automatically. 3 Click Apply. Tip If you want to remove spacing between words, set Word Spacing to 0%. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 586

Chapter 25

Editing Embroidery Lettering

ES Designer gives you interactive and precise numeric control over many settings affecting lettering objects. Adjust both individual letters and lettering objects as a whole. Apply horizontal, vertical, and curved baselines. Modify baseline type, length, radius and angle, as well as position. You can even define the rotation angle of letters relative to the baseline or the design itself. This section describes how to adjust lettering objects as well as individual letters. It also describes how to apply and adjust lettering baselines.

Editing lettering text

When you have created a lettering object, you can select it and make changes to it directly on-screen or by adjusting object properties. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 587

Editing lettering text on-screen

To edit lettering text on-screen

With ES Designer you have the option of editing lettering directly on-screen. 1 Click the Lettering icon then click inside the lettering object. An I-beam appears where you clicked. 2 Edit the text as required. Tip Press Shift + Enter to start a new line. 3 Press Enter to complete.

Editing lettering via object properties

To edit lettering via object properties

When you have created a lettering object, you can select it and make changes to it by adjusting object properties. 1 Use one of the following techniques to select lettering objects: ! Select a single lettering object: Click the lettering object with the left mouse button. The object changes color and eight selection handles appear around it. ! Select a group of lettering objects: Select a lettering object then, holding down the Ctrl key, click other objects as required. ! Select lettering objects with a bounding box: Click-and-drag a bounding box around the lettering object/s and release the mouse. 2 Double-click the selected lettering object/s. Click Lettering (Input toolbar) to edit lettering on-screen.
I-beam

ES 2006 Chapter 25 Editing Embroidery Lettering 588 The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

3 Edit the text in the text entry panel as required. 4 Make any other adjustments you require. See Formatting lettering for details. 5 If you want to save settings to the template, click Save. 6 Click Apply. Letters are filled with stitches according to current settings. See also Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings.

Scaling lettering

When you first create lettering, it may be too big or too small. Size can be adjusted in three ways: ! by scaling on-screen with the Select Object or Reshape Object tools ! by adjusting width and height settings in the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog
Edit text Adjust settings Click to save to template

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 589 ! by adjusting width and height settings in the General Properties bar. Tip The size of your lettering will determine the type of underlay you need to apply. Apart from stabilizing, underlay helps give loft or to raise your lettering off the fabric. Lettering with heights under 5 mm should not have underlay. Letters 6 mm to 10 mm can have a center-run underlay applied. Lettering larger than 10 mm is large enough for edge-run underlay. See Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays for details.

Scaling lettering with Select Object

You can scale your lettering objects vertically, horizontally and proportionally with the Select Object tool. See also Transforming lettering with Select Object.

To scale lettering with Select Object

1 Click the Select Object icon and select the lettering object. Selection handles appear around the lettering object. Use Select Object (Pointer toolbar) to scale lettering objects on-screen.
Drag to resize Horizontally Drag to resize Proportionally Drag to resize Vertically

ES 2006 Chapter 25 Editing Embroidery Lettering 590 2 Click-and-drag one of the selection handles to resize the object horizontally, vertically or proportionally. A shadow outline shows the new size of the lettering object as you drag. 3 Release the mouse to complete.

Scaling lettering with Reshape Object

You can scale your lettering objects vertically, horizontally and proportionally with the Reshape Object tool. See also Rotating lettering with Reshape Object.

To scale lettering with Reshape Object

1 Select the lettering object. 2 Click the Reshape Object icon. 3 Click-and-drag one of the dark triangular control points to resize the object horizontally, vertically or proportionally.
Drag

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to scale lettering objects on-screen.

Drag to resize Horizontally Drag to resize Proportionally Drag to resize Vertically Drag

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 591 A bounding box shows the new size of the lettering object as you drag. 4 Release the mouse to complete.

Adjusting letter height and width

You can scale your lettering objects vertically, horizontally and proportionally via the Special tab of the Object Properties. Tip Change the appearance of an alphabet by changing the letter width in proportion to the height. The original width value is 100%.

To adjust letter height and width

1 Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 In the Height field enter the height of your lettering object in millimeters. Note Letter height can be between 1 mm and 200 mm. For recommended sizes, see Standard Alphabets. 3 Enter the width of your lettering object in the Width field as a percentage of the height. ! For wide letters, increase the percentagee.g. 140%. ! For narrow letters, decrease the percentagee.g. 70%. 4 Click Apply. Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to adjust letter height and width.
Enter width percentage Enter letter height in mm width 100% width 70% width 140%

ES 2006 Chapter 25 Editing Embroidery Lettering 592

Adjusting lettering dimensions

You can scale your lettering objects vertically, horizontally and proportionally using the general properties. Tip Change the appearance of an alphabet by changing the letter width in proportion to the height. The original width value is 100%.

To adjust lettering dimensions

1 Select the lettering object. The current dimensions of the selected object appear in the General Properties bar. 2 Adjust width and height settings either as absolute values (mm) or as a percentage of the current settings. 3 Click Apply. Tip When you enter a value in either width or height field, the percentage is automatically calculated. To resize proportionally, copy this value to the other field and click Apply.
Adjust width and height settings Click Apply to accept changes original width and height 125%

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 593

Transforming lettering objects

Apart from scaling, you can use the Select Object and Reshape Object tools to skew and rotate lettering objects. See also Scaling lettering.

Transforming lettering with Select Object

You can transform lettering objects by manipulating control points on-screen with the Select Object tool. See also Scaling lettering with Select Object.

To transform lettering with Select Object

1 Click the Select Object icon and select the lettering object. The selection handles appear. See also Scaling lettering with Select Object.

2 Click the lettering object again. Another set of control points appears. These let you rotate and skew the lettering object. Use Select Object (Pointer toolbar) to transform lettering objects on-screen.
Drag to skew Drag to rotate rotation point

ES 2006 Chapter 25 Editing Embroidery Lettering 594 3 Click-and-drag one of the diamond-shaped control points to skew the lettering object horizontally. A shadow outline shows the skewed lettering object as you drag. 4 Click-and-drag one of the hollow square control points to rotate the lettering object. A shadow outline shows the rotated lettering object as you drag. Tip Click-and-drag the rotation point itself to a new position before rotating. 5 Release the mouse to complete.

Rotating lettering with Reshape Object

To rotate lettering with Reshape Object
1 Select the lettering object. 2 Click the Reshape Object icon.
Drag Drag rotation point

You can rotate lettering objects by manipulating control points on-screen with the Reshape Object tool. See also Scaling lettering with Select Object.

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to rotate lettering objects on-screen. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 595 Control points appear around the lettering object. 3 Click-and-drag one of the solid square control points on the baseline to rotate the lettering object. A baseline shows the rotated position of the lettering object as you drag. 4 Release the mouse to complete.

Adjusting individual letters

As well as scaling and rotating lettering objects, the Reshape Object tool is used to manipulate individual letters. You can reposition letters in relation to each other, scale, rotate and skew them, as well as reshape them. You can also recolor letters individually.
Click and drag to rotate object

Repositioning letters on-screen

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reposition individual letters on-screen. ES 2006 Chapter 25 Editing Embroidery Lettering 596 You can reposition individual letters in a lettering object using the Reshape Object tool.

To reposition letters on-screen

1 Select the lettering object. 2 Click the Reshape Object icon. 3 Click the diamond control point in the centre of the letter. Tip To select multiple or a range of letters, hold down Ctrl or Shift as you select. 4 Click-and-drag the letter to the new position: ! To move the letter horizontally, drag it along the baseline. See Adjusting individual letter spacing on-screen for details. ! To move the letter vertically, hold down Shift as you drag.

Click diamond control points

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 597 ! To move the letter freely, hold down Ctrl as you drag. 5 Release the mouse button to complete.

Transforming individual letters on screen

To transform individual letters on screen

You can transform individual letters by manipulating control points on-screen with the Reshape Object tool. 1 Select the lettering object. 2 Click the Reshape Object icon. Control points appear. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to transform individual letters on-screen.
Select diamond control point

ES 2006 Chapter 25 Editing Embroidery Lettering 598 3 Click the diamond control point of the letter to activate reshape nodes. 4 Click-and-drag the special control points to transform individual letters. 5 Press Esc to finish.

Reshaping individual letters on-screen

To reshape individual letters on-screen

Create special lettering effects by reshaping letter outlines with the Reshape Object tool. 1 Select the lettering object. 2 Click the Reshape Object icon. Control points appear around the lettering object. 3 Click the letter outline.
Drag to scale letter width Drag to scale letter proportionally Drag to scale letter height Drag to rotate Drag to skew

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape individual letters on-screen. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 599 Control points appear around the outline. You can turn on or off reshape nodes, stitch angles, and entry/exit points as required. 4 Select reshape nodes by any of the following means: ! Drag a bounding box around the reshape nodes you require. ! Holding down Ctrl, select individual nodes. ! Holding down Shift, left- or right-click start and end nodes. 5 Reshape the letter by adding, deleting and dragging the reshape nodes, and press Enter. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.
Click letter outline Hold down Shift and left- or right-click to select range Hold down Ctrl and click to select individual nodes Draw bounding box to select group of nodes Reshape by adding, deleting and dragging reshape nodes

ES 2006 Chapter 25 Editing Embroidery Lettering 600 6 Adjust the stitch angles as required and press Enter. See Adjusting stitch angles for details. Tip Holding down the Ctrl key, click the outline wherever you want to place an additional stitch angle line.

7 Adjust the entry/exit points as required and press Enter. See Adjusting entry/exit points and last stitches for details. Tip You can select and delete multiple nodes on a single segment. If there are fewer than four nodes remaining, the segment itself is deleted. However, if the letter includes more than one segment, those remaining are still viable. 8 Press Esc to finish.
Adjust entry/exit points

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 601 Tip The Stitch Angle and Reshape Object tools let you add, delete, or adjust stitch angles in lettering objects. See Adjusting stitch angles for details.

Recoloring letters on-screen

ES Designer lets you change the color of individual letters within a lettering object. Tip You can also insert a color change between two letters by keying a caret (^) symbol. Subsequent letters default to the next color in the palette. See Creating lettering with Object Properties for details.

To recolor letters on-screen

1 2 3 4

Click the Lettering icon then click within the lettering object. Select a letter (or letters) by dragging the cursor over the letter. Click a color on the color palette. Press Enter.

Adjusting baselines
Baselines can be modified after placement either directly on-screen or via the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog. With the exception of Free Line, baselines allow you to set the final length of the finished Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to recolor letters on-screen.
Drag cursor over letter to select

ES 2006 Chapter 25 Editing Embroidery Lettering 602 lettering. Once you have placed a baseline, ES Designer attempts to fit all the letters without altering the baseline length. Tip As a baseline is filled with letters, letter spacing decreases. Eventually, letters may overlap. If so, you can adjust the baseline length to accommodate them, or change the lettering width in the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog.

Reshaping baselines on-screen

Baselines can be adjusted on-screen after they have been placed in the design with the Reshape Object tool. Depending on the baseline type you are working with, you can adjust baseline angles, lengths, and sizes. You can change curve radii and justification points. You can completely reshape Any Shape baselines. Tip For more precise numeric control over lettering layout, use the Layout dialog. See Adjusting straight baseline settings and Adjusting curved baseline settings for details.

To reshape a baseline on-screen

! Select the lettering object and click the Reshape Object icon
Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape lettering baselines. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 603 Different control points display for different baselines. Tip The large diamond and cross represent stitching start and end points. You may need to move them to access baseline control points. See Reshaping individual letters on-screen for details. ! Change angles of straight baselines by dragging the solid square control points at either end. ! Create an arc baseline from a circular one by dragging the hollow square

control point apart.

baseline control points Drag up or down to change baseline angle Drag left or right to change circle baseline to arc

ES 2006 Chapter 25 Editing Embroidery Lettering 604 ! Change lettering orientation of arc baselines by dragging the solid square control points at either end. Tip The exact letter positions depend on the justificationleft, center, right or justified. If the baseline becomes too short, letter spacing is reduced, and letters may overlap. ! Change the radius of curved baselines by dragging the solid square control point in the center of the circle. ! Alternatively, change the radius of curved baselines by dragging the solid square control point in the center of the baseline.
Drag along circumference to change baseline length Drag up or down to change radius of curve Drag up or down to change radius of curve

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 605 ! Adjust Any Shape baselines by adding, deleting, changing or moving reference points like any embroidery object. See also Reshaping embroidery objects. ! To reshape, left-click to bend the line at an angle, right-click to bend into a curve. ! To re-position, drag any one of the baseline control points up or down. ! To delete, select a control point and press Delete. ! To change straight to curve, or curve to straight, select the control point and press Spacebar. ! Press Esc to finish.

Adjusting straight baseline settings

A Free Line baseline does not have a fixed or pre-determined length; the baseline extends as long as you keep adding letters. You can adjust baseline angle numerically. A Fixed Line baseline has a fixed length which you can digitize or specify numerically. Various options are available to handle text
Left or right-click on the baseline to add Drag any control point up or down Drag to change curvature

Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to adjust baseline settings. ES 2006 Chapter 25 Editing Embroidery Lettering 606 that extends beyond the baseline. See also Applying horizontal baselines and Applying vertical baselines.

To adjust straight baseline settings

1 Double-click a selected lettering object/s. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Click Layout. The Layout dialog opens. The baseline options depend on the type of baseline selected. 3 Select a horizontal or vertical baseline, free or fixed, from the list.
Click to lay out baseline Adjust length and angle values

Select auto frame style

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 607 Free Line baselines allow you to adjust the Line Angle value. Fixed Line baselines also give you control over line length as well as options for handling text which does not fit the baseline. This is particularly useful for multiple team names. See Team lettering for details. 4 For fixed line baselines, select an auto-frame style: ! Spacing: Letter size and width stays the same and letters are spaced evenly along the baseline. Letters may overlap if the text is too wide. ! Width: The width of each letter is reduced and the original spacing kept. ! Size (Keep Proportions): Letter width and height is reduced proportionally but the original spacing remains. ! Spacing and Width: Letter width and spacing is reduced. ! Spacing and Size (Keep Proportions): Letter width, height and spacing is reduced proportionally. 5 Adjust the Length and Line Angle values as required. ! Length: Enter the default length of fixed line baselines. For free line baselines this is not available. ! Line Angle: Enter the exact angle of the baseline to the horizontal axis. ES 2006 Chapter 25 Editing Embroidery Lettering 608 6 Select a baseline position. When creating lettering for a badge, for example: ! For lettering above the badge, select a baseline below. ! For lettering below the badge, select a baseline above. ! For horizontal lettering through the middle of the badge, select a centered baseline. 7 Specify the letter, word and line spacing as required. See Adjusting spacing settings for details. 8 Select the letter orientation. See Changing letter orientation for details. 9 Click OK to return to Object Properties > Special and click Apply.

Adjusting curved baseline settings

Adjust circle and arc baseline settings for more precise numeric control over radius (X and Y), as well as tilt, justification, and arc angles. Tip For interactive control over lettering layout, see Reshaping baselines on-screen.

To adjust curved baseline settings

baseline below baseline centered baseline above

1 Double-click a selected lettering object/s.

Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to adjust baseline settings. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 609 The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Click Layout. The Layout dialog opens. The baseline options depend on the type of baseline selected. 3 Select a circle or arc baseline type from the list. The Tilt, Radius X, Radius Y, Justification Angle and Arc Angle fields are activated. 4 Adjust these values as required: ! Radius X: default radius of the baseline arc (X-axis).

! Radius Y: default radius of the baseline arc (Y-axis).

Click to lay out baseline Adjust Tilt, Radius X, Radius Y, Justification and Arc Angle values radius X: 50 radius Y: 50 radius X: 50 radius Y: 100 radius X: 100 radius Y: 50

ES 2006 Chapter 25 Editing Embroidery Lettering 610 ! Tilt: angle of the baseline relative to the horizontal axis. Note The Tilt field is activated when Radius X and Radius Y values are different. ! Justification Angle: angle of the vertical axis through the lettering object relative to the horizontal axis. ! Arc Angle: angle between radii connecting ends of baseline to center of arc. This constrains the baseline so the text falls within the arc specified. 5 Select a baseline position. When digitizing lettering for a badge, for example:
tilt angle 45 tilt angle 0 justification angle 90 justification angle 45 arc angle 100 arc angle 70 baseline below baseline centered baseline above

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 611 ! For lettering above the badge, select a clockwise circle or arc with baseline below. ! For lettering below the badge, select a counterclockwise circle or arc with baseline above. ! For horizontal lettering through the middle of the badge, select a fixed line with baseline centered. 6 Specify the letter, word and line spacing as required. See Adjusting letter spacing for details. 7 Select the letter orientation. See Changing letter orientation for details. 8 Click OK to return to Object Properties > Special > Lettering and click Apply.

Changing letter orientation

You can define the rotation angle of letters relative to the baseline or the design itself. The latter lets you keep letters vertical regardless of baseline angle in order to achieve a staircase effect.

To change letter orientation

1 Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Click Layout to open the Layout dialog.
Click to lay out baseline

ES 2006 Chapter 25 Editing Embroidery Lettering 612 3 Select an Orientation setting. ! Baseline: orients letters relative to the lettering baseline.

! Design: orients letters relative to the horizontal.

4 Enter an orientation angle. 5 Click OK to return to Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog and click Apply.
Set orientation angle Select orientation relative to baseline or design Baseline angle: 0 Orientation: 60 to design Baseline angle: 0 Orientation: 10 to baseline

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 613

Chapter 26

Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings

When it comes to stitching, you can fine-tune the density, add pull compensation and underlay, or change to center-out stitching. Like all embroidery objects, each lettering object has its own stitch properties. Adjust settings at any stage. ES Designer also gives you precise control over the stitch angles of individual letters. You can also specify the join method and stitching sequence you prefer. This section describes changing lettering stitch types in lettering objects, and adjusting lettering stitch angles. It also explains how to adjust the lettering stitching sequence as well as lettering join method. Note For information about adjusting travel run length in lettering objects, see Adjusting travel run stitch length. For information about adjusting lettering connector values, see Using automatic connectors.

Changing lettering stitch types

By default, lettering objects are filled with Satin stitch. You can also apply other basic fill stitch types, such as Tatami or Zigzag, as with other embroidery objects. See Selecting stitch types for details. ES 2006 Chapter 26 Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings 614 Note Lettering values are stored in the <PRESET_LETTERING> style in the Normal template. Changing these does not affect the values of other objects. Do not delete or rename this style. See Working with styles for details.

Adjusting Satin stitch settings for lettering objects

By default, lettering objects are filled with Satin stitch. Where a letter is narrow, stitches are tight, thus requiring fewer stitches to cover the fabric. Where a column is very narrow, stitches need to be less dense because too many needle penetrations can damage the fabric. See also Creating fills with Satin stitch.

To adjust Satin stitch settings for lettering objects

1 Double-click a selected lettering object. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Select the Fills tab. Alternatively, right-click the Satin icon with the lettering object selected. Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Satin values for lettering objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 615 3 Select Satin stitch from the Stitch Type list. 4 Select the type of stitch spacing you want for your lettering.

! For Fixed Spacing, clear the Auto Spacing checkbox and select a

value (in millimeters) in the Stitch Spacing field. For more open stitching, select a higher value for decreased stitch density. See Adjusting Satin stitch spacing for details. ! For Auto Spacing, select the Auto Spacing checkbox and specify the amount of adjustment to make to the spacings as a % value. See Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch for details. 5 If you want to use Auto Split, select the checkbox and specify the Auto Split Length and Auto Split Minimum Stitch values. Note The Auto Split and Auto Jump features help you to control long Satin stitches. See Splitting long stitches with Auto Split and Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump for details. 6 Click Apply.
Adjust stitch settings Select Satin Auto Spacing ON Auto Spacing OFF

ES 2006 Chapter 26 Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings 616

Adjusting Tatami stitch settings for lettering objects

To adjust Tatami stitch settings for lettering objects

You can fill lettering shapes with Tatami stitching. It is suitable for filling large, irregular lettering shapes. See also Creating fills with Tatami stitch. 1 Double-click a selected lettering object. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Select the Fills tab. Alternatively, right-click the Tatami icon with the lettering object selected. 3 Select Tatami stitch from the list. 4 Adjust stitch spacing to increase or decrease density. 5 Adjust stitch length to increase or decrease needle penetrations. Right-click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami values for lettering objects.
Select Tatami Adjust stitch values Adjust offset settings Select backstitch type Enter random factor

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 617 See Adjusting Tatami stitch spacing and length for details. 6 Choose a backstitch typeStandard, Borderline, or Diagonal. See Selecting a Tatami backstitch for details. 7 Select the Offset Fraction option to specify how each row is offset in order to create special embroidery effects. See Setting Tatami offset fractions for details. 8 Select the Partition Lines option as an alternative method for offsetting needle penetrations in Tatami fills. See Applying Tatami partition lines for details. 9 Specify a random factor to eliminate the split line patterns formed by regular needle penetrations. See Applying random factors for details. 10 Click Apply.

Adjusting Zigzag stitch settings for lettering objects

Zigzag stitch is similar to Satin in that the needle penetrates each side of the column. But while Satin gives a straight line followed by a diagonal, Zigzag produces two diagonal lines, thereby producing a more open stitch. It is generally used for decorative effect or where fewer stitches are required. The density is determined by the stitch spacing setting. See also Creating outlines with Zigzag stitch.

To adjust Zigzag stitch settings for lettering objects

1 Double-click a selected lettering object.

The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Select the Fills tab. Alternatively, right-click the Zigzag icon with the lettering object selected. Right-click Zigzag (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Zigzag values for lettering objects. ES 2006 Chapter 26 Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings 618 3 Select Zigzag stitch from the Stitch Type list. 4 Enter a spacing value in the Stitch Spacing field. 5 Click Apply.

Adjusting stitching sequence and join method

You can specify the sequence in which letters are stitched to minimize registration problems such as on caps or difficult fabrics. While the Closest Join method is recommended in most cases to minimize trims, you may sometimes want to use the As Digitized setting with alphabets which include multiple colors, multiple stitch types, or special effects.

Adjusting letter sequencing

You can specify the sequence in which letters are stitched to minimize registration problems such as on caps or difficult fabrics. For example, the Center Out option is especially useful when stitching on caps. There are also options for multiple lines of lettering which are useful for machines without trimmers.

To adjust letter sequencing

1 Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s.

Adjust stitch spacing Select Zigzag stitch spacing: 1.0mm stitch spacing: 1.5mm

Click Lettering (Input toolbar) to adjust the lettering stitching sequence. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 619 The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Click Sequence. The Sequence dialog opens. 3 Select a stitching sequence. Options include: ! In Line: Select whether you want the lettering to be stitched left-to-right or right-to-left in each line. ! Center Out: Select this checkbox if you want the lettering stitched from the center out. You can specify that one side of the center is stitched followed by the other, or that each letter is stitched alternatively on either side of the center.
Click Sequence Adjust single line stitching sequence Adjust multiple line stitching sequence stitched right-to-left stitched left-to-right right side stitched first left side stitched first

ES 2006 Chapter 26 Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings 620 ! Line by Line: Choose whether you want multiple lines of lettering to stitch top-to-bottom or bottom-to-top. You can also specify that the first line should be stitched left-to-right, and the second right-to-left. Note You can combine both In Line and Line by Line sequencing options. 4 Click OK to return to the Special tab. 5 Click Apply. Tip Travel through your design to check the stitching sequence. See Traveling by stitches for details.

Changing lettering join method

The lettering stitch method is preset to give the best results for each alphabet. In most cases, Closest Join is recommended in order to minimize trims. See Standard Alphabets for details.The As Digitized setting is used with alphabets which include multiple colors or special effects. Such alphabets may include machine functions, as for two-color alphabets, or run stitches as part of the cover stitching. Lettering objects normally consist of one stitch type only. However, the As Digitized join method together with Original Stitch Values setting can be used with special fonts which combine several stitch typese.g. Satin with Run, or Tatami, or Motifs.

To adjust lettering join method

stitched bottom-to-top stitched top-to-bottom

1 Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s.

Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to change the lettering join stitch method. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 621 The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Click Sequence. The Sequence dialog opens. 3 Select a join method from the list: ! Bottom Join: Letters are joined along the baseline. Use it when stitching on towellingjoins are hidden in the pile. ! Closest Join: Letters are joined at the closest point. Use it to minimize trims. ! As Digitized: Letters are stitched out the same way they were originally digitized. Use it with alphabets combining different fill stitch types or special effects. 4 Select the Original Stitch Values checkbox as required. This setting is only available if the As Digitized join type is selected. Select it when using special fonts which combine several stitch types. If not selected, these letters will be stitched with a single stitch type. Tip For the recommended stitch and join methods, see Standard Alphabets. 5 Click OK to return to the Special tab. 6 Click Apply.
Select join method Select Original Stitch Values Bottom Join Closest Join As Digitized As Digitized and Original Stitch Values selected As Digitized but Original Stitch Values not selected Closest Join selected

ES 2006 Chapter 26 Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings 622

Adjusting lettering underlay settings

Lettering appearance and quality depends a lot on underlay which serves as a foundation for the cover stitching. As well as stabilizing, underlay also provides loft, raising cover stitches and preventing them from sinking into soft fabrics. It can also prepare a napped fabric by flattening it. Most lettering used in designs is 15 mm high or less. The columns at such sizes are less than 3 mm wide for normalnot heavy or blockfonts. Such objects are best served with a single Center Run or Edge Run underlay. Center Run places a row of stitches along the center of a column. Edge Run places stitches around the edge of each column. Large letters for jacket

backs and so on, can of course use a second layer of underlay. Double-zigzag is sometimes used to give added loft. See also Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays. Edge Run underlays for lettering and branched objects also provide a Weld option. When activated, underlay is applied to the lettering object as a whole, rather than segment-by-segment. This means there should be no overlaps where segments join.

To adjust lettering underlay settings

1 Select a lettering object. 2 Right-click the Auto Underlay icon. Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust lettering underlay settings. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 623 The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens. 3 Select the First Underlay checkbox and select Center Run or Edge Run as the First underlay type. Tip If you select Edge Run, a further Weld option becomes available. When activated, underlay is applied to the lettering object as a whole. This means there is no duplication where two objects overlap. 4 Enter the required length values for each underlay type. See Adjusting Center Run and Edge Run underlay settings for details. 5 Click Apply. Tip Run Slow Redraw to see how the underlay will stitch out. See Redrawing the stitching sequence slowly for details.
Adjust fixed or variable run length Select Edge Run (or Center Run) Select 1st underlay and optionally select Weld

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 624

Chapter 27

Special Lettering Features

Add special characters and symbols to your lettering. Create interesting distortions using lettering envelopes. Add attractive borders such as rectangles, ovals, and shields. Use the Team Names feature to create designs with multiple names. For example, use the same logo with different names for sports teams or corporate uniforms without having to create multiple copies of the same design. This section shows you how to add special characters and symbols. It describes how to create special effects with envelopes. It also covers adding borders to lettering, as well as setting up team lettering designs.

Adding special characters and symbols

Embroidery and TrueType fonts generally contain many more characters than are available via your keyboard. In ES Designer, you can add special characters and symbols directly through the Select Symbols dialog or by means of the Windows Character Map.

Inserting symbols

Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to add special characters and symbols. Right-click to select lettering options. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 625 You can quickly add special characters and symbols to your lettering

designs. Tip If you know the keyboard shortcut for a symbol, add it to your lettering by entering the combination on-screen or in the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog.

To insert symbols

1 Right-click the Lettering icon. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Click Insert Symbol.
Click Insert Symbol

ES 2006 Chapter 27 Special Lettering Features 626 The Symbol Selection dialog opens. 3 Select an alphabet or symbol set from the Symbol Set list. 4 Select the symbols you want to use. The selected symbols are displayed in the Selection field. 5 Click Make Current. The selected symbols are displayed in the text entry panel of the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog. Note Click Delete to remove symbols displayed in the Selection field as required. 6 Click Apply. 7 Continue creating the lettering object in the normal way. See Creating lettering with Object Properties for details.
Show pictures and characters Select alphabet or symbol set Select symbols Show pictures Show characters Selected symbols displayed Click to add Click to close Click to delete

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 627

Using the Character Map

Use the Windows Character Map to provide quick access to common symbols and letters. The Character Map is usually installed as part of the Windows setup. See your Windows documentation for more details.

To use the Character Map

1 Open the Windows Character Map. By default, you will find it under Start > Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Character Map. 2 Select a font from the Font list. 3 Double-click a character, or select it and press Select. The character/s appear in the Characters to copy field. 4 Click Copy to copy the character to the clipboard. 5 Paste it into the text entry panel of the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog. To do this, click inside the text entry panel and press Ctrl+V. Tip You can also paste characters and symbols into an external graphics program to use as the basis for creating your own custom characters. See Digitizing custom letters for details.
Select font Select symbols or double-click Selected symbols displayed Click to select Click to copy

ES 2006 Chapter 27 Special Lettering Features 628

Creating special effects with envelopes

Distorting lettering objects

Apply Envelope effects to lettering objects to make them bulge or arch, stretch or compress. Four types of Envelope effect are availableBridge, Pennant, Perspective and Diamond. Tip Envelopes are typically applied to lettering objects, but they can also be applied to other types of embroidery object.

To distort lettering objects

1 Select the lettering object you want to distort. Tip To apply an envelope to several objects, group them first, then apply the envelope. See Grouping and ungrouping objects for details. 2 Select Edit > Envelope. 3 Select an envelope type from among the following alternatives: Different handles display around the object outline depending on the envelope type. Use Envelope (Edit menu) to create special effects with envelopes.
Bridge Pennant Perspective Diamond Bridge Pennant Perspective Diamond Bridge reshape handles

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 629 4 Drag one or more handles up or down to distort the object. ! To move two handles in opposite directions, hold the Shift key down while dragging a handle. ! To move the handles in the same direction, hold down the Ctrl key while dragging a handle. 5 Press Esc to finish.

Editing text in envelopes

You can edit the lettering text in envelopes on-screen in the same way as normal lettering. When you click inside the lettering, a duplicate displays below the envelope.

To edit text in envelopes

1 Click the Lettering icon with the lettering object in an envelope selected. Duplicate letters appear below the selected shape in their original form. The cursor changes to an I-beam and appears after the last letter.
Drag Shift + drag Ctrl + drag

Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to edit letters in envelopes on-screen. ES 2006 Chapter 27 Special Lettering Features 630 2 Click inside the duplicate lettering object and edit text as required. 3 Press Enter to complete. The lettering in the envelope is updated.

Removing envelopes
To remove envelopes

Return an object to its original shape by removing the envelope.

! Select the lettering object. ! Select Edit > Envelope > Delete.

The envelope is removed and the letters return to their original shape.

Team lettering
The Team Names feature lets you create designs with multiple names. For example, you can use the same logo with different names for sports teams or corporate uniforms without having to create multiple copies of the same design. When you use Team Names, you create a variable lettering object,
Add letters at

I-beam cursor Press Enter

Use Envelope > Delete (Edit menu) return an object to its original shape by removing the envelope. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 631 and associate names with it. Names are stored in lists that can be accessed from any design. You can add to these lists, or remove names at any time. Depending on how you want to stitch out, you can choose to save and stitch the names and designs separately, or together.

Creating name groups

Create a new name group to associate a list of names with Team Names objects. Once you create a group, the names in it are available to all designs. Note Team Names groups are stored in the Namedrop.emn file in your installations ...\res folder. If the file becomes corrupted, copy ESWin\bin\namedrop.emn to ESWin\res\namedrop.emn. This will restore Team Names groups to the default settings.

To create a name group

1 Click the Team Names icon. The Team Names dialog opens. 2 Click Add in the Group panel. Use Team Names (Input toolbar) to create name groups.
Add new group

ES 2006 Chapter 27 Special Lettering Features 632 The Group Name dialog opens. 3 Enter a name for the group and click OK. The new group name appears in the Group list. The Group Members panel remains empty until you add names to it. 4 Add members to the group as required: ! See Adding individual members to name groups for details. ! See Adding multiple members to name groups for details. 5 Click OK.

Adding individual members to name groups

To add individual members to a name group
1 Click the Team Names icon.
Enter group name Gaelic Football Club new group Gaelic Football Club

You can add members to a group one-by-one or as a entire group. See also Adding multiple members to name groups.

Use Team Names (Input toolbar) to add individual members to a group. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 633 The Team Names dialog opens. 2 Select a group from the Group list, or create a new one. See Creating name groups for details. 3 Click Add in the Group Members panel. The Group Member Add/Edit dialog opens. 4 Enter the first name of the member in the Name 1 field. 5 Optionally, enter second and third names as required. 6 Click OK.
Select group Gaelic Football Club Add new member Add first name Add second name Add third name
Patrick Michael Fitzpatrick

ES 2006 Chapter 27 Special Lettering Features 634

The name is added to the Group Members list.

Adding multiple members to name groups

You can add members to a group one-by-one or as a entire group. See also Adding individual members to name groups.

To add multiple members to a name group

1 Click the Team Names icon. The Team Names dialog opens. 2 Select a group from the Group list, or create a new one. See Creating name groups for details. 3 Click Quick Names. Use Team Names (Input toolbar) to add multiple members to a group.
Gaelic Football Club name added Michael Patrick Fitzpatrick

Select group Gaelic Football Club Select Quick Names

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 635 The Quick Names dialog opens. 4 Enter the names in the format Name 1, Name 2, Name 3. You can type the names, or paste them in from a text file. Each name must be separated by a comma. Each complete name must be on a new line. 5 Click OK. The new names are added to the Group Members list. Tip Edit the list by using Add, Delete and Edit.

Creating team name designs

To associate multiple names with a design, you create a variable Team Names object. Names are stored together in groups. You can select names from an existing group or create a new one.
Michael,Patrick,Fitzpatrick Patrick,Simon,Fitzsimons Simon,Gerald,Fitzgerald Gerald, Roy, Fitzroy Roy,John, Fitzjohn John, Maurice, Fitzmaurice Maurice,Henry,Fitzhenry

Enter names
Gaelic Football Club Michael Patrick Fitzpatrick Patrick Simon Fitzsimons Simon Gerald Fitzgerald Gerald Roy Fitzroy Roy John Fitzjohn John Maurice Fitzmaurice Maurice Henry Fitzhenry

names added Add/edit/delete names

Use Team Names (Input toolbar) to associate multiple names with a design. ES 2006 Chapter 27 Special Lettering Features 636

To create a team name design

1 Open the design you want to use. 2 Click the Team Names icon. The Team Names dialog opens. 3 Select a group from the Group list. The names display in the Group Members list. See also Creating name groups and Adding multiple members to name groups. 4 Select names to associate with the design from the Group Members list. ! To select multiple names, hold down Ctrl as you select. ! To select a range of names, hold down Shift as you select. 5 Click Add to add them to the Team Members list. Alternatively, to associate all names in the group, click Add All. Selected names are copied to the Team Members list. The Naming Order defaults to Name 1, Name 2, Name 3.

Tip When you click Add, names are appended to the Team Members list. Clicking Add repeatedly means that a fresh copy of the selected name or names is appended each time.
Gaelic Football Club Michael Patrick Fitzpatrick Patrick Simon Fitzsimons Simon Gerald Fitzgerald Gerald Roy Fitzroy Roy John Fitzjohn John Maurice Fitzmaurice Maurice Henry Fitzhenry

Select group Add all or selected names

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 637 6 In the Team Members list, edit members as required. ! To sort team member names alphabetically, select a column by clicking the button at the top of the column. To select multiple columns, hold down Ctrl as you select. ! To change the stitching order, select a name and click Up or Down. ! To remove a name from the list, select it, and click Remove. To clear all names from the Members Selected list, click Remove All. 7 Set Naming Order options as requirede.g. ! To stitch only first and third names, select Name 1 and Name 3 in columns one and two. ! To stitch names in reverse order, select Name 3, Name 2, and Name 1 in columns one, two and three. 8 To adjust lettering format settings, click Show Properties. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. The text entry panel is grayed out, indicating that you are entering lettering by a different method to normal.
Gaelic Football Club Michael Patrick Fitzpatrick Patrick Simon Fitzsimons Simon Gerald Fitzgerald Gerald Roy Fitzroy Roy John Fitzjohn John Maurice Fitzmaurice Maurice Henry Fitzhenry

Remove all or selected names Set naming order options Click to sort names alphabetically Adjust lettering format
Michael Patrick Simon Gerald Roy John Maurice Fitzpatrick Fitzsimons Fitzgerald Fitzroy Fitzjohn Fitzmaurice Fitzhenry

Text entry panel grayed out

ES 2006 Chapter 27 Special Lettering Features 638 Tip You have the opportunity to change the settings after the names are stitched, but it is quicker to set them at this stage. If the design already contains Team Member objects, Show Properties is disabled. 9 Adjust the settings as required. See Creating lettering with Object Properties for details. 10 Click Apply. 11 Click OK in the Team Names dialog.

Depending on your baseline selection, you may be prompted to enter reference points. See Applying baselines for details. ES Designer generates stitches for all names in the Team Members list. The associated Team Members dialog opens automatically, the first Team Member name in the list is selected and is visible in the design window. 12 Select names one-by-one from the Team List to view them together with the design.

Viewing and modifying individual team names

Select names to view on-screen
Simon Patrick Michael Gerald Maurice John Roy Fitzgerald Fitzsimons Fitzpatrick Fitzroy Fitzhenry Fitzmaurice Fitzjohn

You can preview individual team names in the design window as they will be stitched out with the design. Set individual properties for each name.

Use Team List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Team Members display on/off. Use it to view and edit individual team names. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 639

To view and modify team names

1 Open the Team Names design you want to use. See also Creating team name designs. 2 Click the Team List icon. The Team Members dialog opens. By default all member names are selected. Tip By default a space is inserted between Name 1 and Name 2. To remove this space, set the Word Spacing value in the Layout dialog to 0%. See Adjusting letter spacing for details. 3 View team names in any of the following ways: ! Select a team member name. The selected name displays on-screen with the current lettering properties. ! Use the arrows keys to scroll up and down the list to view each name in turn. ! To sort team member names alphabetically, click the tab at the top of a column to select, then click the Sort button. 4 To view and/or edit a selected team members object properties, select a name then click Show Properties.
Simon Patrick Michael Gerald Maurice John Roy Fitzgerald Fitzsimons Fitzpatrick Fitzroy Fitzhenry Fitzmaurice Fitzjohn Select

name to view on-screen Click to select column View properties of selected names Click to sort selected names alphabetically

Simon Patrick Michael Gerald Maurice John Roy Fitzgerald Fitzsimons Fitzpatrick Fitzroy Fitzhenry Fitzmaurice Fitzjohn

ES 2006 Chapter 27 Special Lettering Features 640 The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 5 Adjust the settings as required and click Apply. The lettering updates automatically. See Creating lettering with Object Properties for details. 6 For additional reshaping on-screen, do one of the followings: ! Edit a selected name on-screen as you would any other lettering object. Team Names lets you do this without having to save the name as separate design. Most important is the ability to manually adjust lettering kerning. See Editing Embroidery Lettering for details. ! Adjust the lettering baseline as you would any other lettering object. Most important is the ability to select an auto-frame style for fixed line baselines. See Adjusting straight baseline settings for details. 7 To copy the object properties of one selected team member to all team members, click Apply to All. 8 To add members to the list, click Add. The Team Names dialog opens. You can add further names to the list from the current Team Names group or any other group. See Creating team name designs for details. 9 To delete members from the list, click Delete.
Simon Fitzgerald

Adjust settings for individual names Edit text for individual name

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 641 10 Click X in the top corner of the dialog to close. Note When the Team Members dialog is closed, all team member names become visible but the one on top is selected in the design window.

Modifying team names by column

You can easily set properties, such as font, size or color for an entire column of names. For example, you might want to highlight the given name in a particular way.

To modify team names by column

1 Open the Team Names design you want to use. See also Creating team name designs. 2 Click the Team List icon.
All team member names visibleonly the one on top selected

Use Team List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Team Members display on/off. Use it to view and edit individual team names. Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to edit lettering on-screen. ES 2006 Chapter 27 Special Lettering Features 642 The Team Members dialog opens. By default all member names are selected. 3 Click the tab at the top of a column and right-click the Lettering icon. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 4 Adjust the settings as required and click Apply.

The lettering for the entire column updates automatically. See Creating lettering with Object Properties for details.
Simon Patrick Michael Gerald Maurice John Roy Fitzgerald Fitzsimons Fitzpatrick Fitzroy Fitzhenry Fitzmaurice Fitzjohn

Click to select column Adjust settings for all names in column Text entry panel grayed out Select alphabet

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 643

Creating individual designs with team names

You can create individual designs from each name in a Team Names design. The name will still be included in the original.

To create individual designs with team names

1 Open the Team Names design you want to use. See also Creating team name designs. 2 Click the Team List icon. The Team Members dialog opens. By default all member names are selected. 3 Select names you want to use. ! To select multiple names, hold down Ctrl as you select. ! To select a range of names, hold down Shift as you select. ! To select all names in the list, click Select All. 4 To create individual embroidery designs for each selected team member, click Create Design(s). A new design is created for each selected name. The name is now a normal lettering object. 5 Click the Save icon to open the Save As dialog. Use Team List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Team Members display on/off. Use it to view and edit individual team names.
Select names to use Click to create individual designs
Simon Patrick Michael Gerald Maurice John Roy Fitzgerald Fitzsimons Fitzpatrick Fitzroy Fitzhenry Fitzmaurice Fitzjohn

ES 2006 Chapter 27 Special Lettering Features 644 6 Enter a new name for the design and click Save.

Creating a matrix of team name designs

The Team Names Matrix feature allows you to automatically create a matrix for all names in a team name object together with their corresponding design. You have the option to minimize the number of color changes created by the matrix operation. The operation also attempts to minimize the number of jumps. A team name object must be present in the

design to activate the feature.

To create a matrix of team name designs

1 Open the team name design you want to use. See also Creating team name designs. 2 Select the entire design if you want to process the design together with the team name object. 3 Select Arrange > Team Name Matrix. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 645 The Team Names Matrix dialog opens. ! The Team Names field derives from the actual number of names included in the design. ! The Rows field is calculated from Hoop Height divided by Row Height. Similarly the Columns field is calculated from Hoop Width divided by Column Width. ! The Output Files field is calculated from the number of team names divided by rows X columns, rounded up to the nearest whole number. Note All calculated fields are updated when you change any of the height and width settings. 4 Set the hoop height and width to suit the requirements of the hoop you are using. These settings are remembered within a session but the defaults are loaded whenever you launch ES Designer. 5 Set the row height and column width within the selected hoop settings. These settings are based on the design height and width properties. Increase them if you want to enlarge the gap between designs. Minimum and maximum settings: 2.50 mm and 999.99 mm. 6 Select a Sequence option. Each option indicates a possible stitch sequence for the entire matrix. The red square indicates the starting point and the arrow shows the direction of the stitching sequence. 7 Select the Minimize Color Changes checkbox as required.
Adjust row and column settings Adjust hoop width and height Select stitching sequence Select to minimize color changes Calculated fields based on hoop size, and row and column settings

ES 2006 Chapter 27 Special Lettering Features 646 When selected, provided the team name object has more than one color, the entire matrix is resequenced by color. 8 Click OK. A new file is created containing the number of team names that will fit into the specified hoopi.e. the number of rows multiplied by the number of columns, or less. If the number of team names exceeds this value, another file is created to accommodate the additional names. The total number of files created is given by the Output Files field.

Outputting team name designs

When you output a Team Names design, you need to define how it is to be generated as a stitch file. You can generate files that include: ! both the design and the names ! design in one file and names in another, or ! design and names in individual files. You set these options whenever you save the file in stitch format or output

it to machine.

To output team name designs

1 Create a Team Names design or open an existing one. 2 Select File > Save As and select a stitch format from the Save As Type list. 3 Click Options. The Save Options > Team Names dialog opens. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 647 Note Options is also available when you output designs. See also Stitching designs with Stitch Manager. 4 Select a Save option: ! Design and Team Names with stops: creates a single stitch file including one copy of the design and all names. Stops are inserted after the design, and between the namesi.e. Design Stop TeamMember1 Stop TeamMember2 Stop, etc. ! Repeated Design and Team Names with stops: creates a single stitch file with multiple copies of the design, and all names. Stops are inserted after each static design/name combinatione.g. Design + TeamMember1 Stop Design + TeamMember2 Stop. ! Create multiple output files: creates separate files for each name, each of which includes a copy of the static part of the design. When stitching to ES Machine Manager, each file is queued separately. ! Design part only: creates a file containing only the static part of the design. ! Team Names only with stops: creates a single file containing only the names, separated by stops. This means that after each machine stop, you can change frames. If you have selected Team Names only with stops, you have a further two options: ! Select Follow Auto Start/End Menu to set the start/end point for each name. ES 2006 Chapter 27 Special Lettering Features 648 As with any design, the needle should return to a known position before a frame change. This ensures that the next name is stitched in the correct position. See Setting automatic start and end points for details. ! Select Based on justification to set the start/end point for each name according to its lettering justification, as follows: 5 Click OK to return to the Save As dialog. 6 Click Save. You are prompted with a confirmation message. 7 Click OK. Justification Auto Start / End Point Align Left Bottom Left Center Bottom Middle Align Right Bottom Right Justify Bottom Left ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 649

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

Turn any TrueType font installed on your system into an embroidery alphabet. Typically spacing between certain character pairs appears uneven due to the optical illusion of having straight lines and curves side-by-side.

Automatic kerning is a user-defined option allowing you to customize kerning. Sometimes you find that you want to reshape a letter to improve its appearance, perhaps to suit a particular lettering height. ES Designer lets you save the letter as an alternative version. In fact you can save multiple versions of the same letter within the same alphabet. You can even create your own custom alphabets. Alternatively, modify an existing alphabet for special applications. Merge letters from two or more alphabets with the stand-alone alphabet merging utility. This section describes how to create new alphabets from TrueType fonts. Automatic letter kerning and user-refined alphabets are explained. The section also describes how to create and modify your own custom alphabets and letters. Alphabet merging is also explained.

Converting TrueType fonts to embroidery alphabets

The Convert TrueType Font feature lets you convert any TrueType font installed on your system to an embroidery alphabet. You can do this on the ES 2006 Chapter 28 Custom Alphabets 650 fly or convert entire fonts for later use. This is an important feature for Asian alphabets which may contain several thousands of characters. The process is fully automatic. Lettering shapes are cut into Input A or Input B embroidery objects. Overlaps and stroke order are detected and stitch angles defined. The result is similar to manually digitized alphabets although the quality may not be quite as high. The quality greatly depends on the original shapes, narrower serif type alphabets producing better results than blocked alphabets.

Converting individual TrueType letters

To convert individual TrueType letters

You can convert individual TrueType letters on the fly and add them directly to a design through the Object Properties dialog. 1 Right-click the Lettering icon. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to add TrueType lettering directly on-screen. Right-click to set the formatting values for new or selected lettering objects.
Select TT font Enter text Set conversion values

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 651 2 Select a TrueType font from the Alphabet list. 3 Enter the text you want to embroider in the text entry panel. Alternatively, type it directly on-screen after adjusting the conversion settings. Note The more letters you enter, the more time needed to convert them. 4 Click TTF Conversion. The Conversion Values dialog opens. Tip Click Suggest Values if you are not sure which options to select. Values are automatically set according to the selected alphabet. 5 Select the lettering style you want to create from the Styles listRegular, Bold, Bold Italic or Italic. Note The Style panel is not available for some fonts. 6 If you want the stitching to follow the contours of the letters, select Turning Strokes. Otherwise select Complex Fill.
Select lettering style Select Complex Fill for fixed stitch angle Select Turning Strokes for variable stitch angle

ES 2006 Chapter 28 Custom Alphabets 652

The Turning Strokes option has preset values adjusted for the particular alphabet style. The Complex Fill option lets you adjust the stitch angle. 7 Select the Match Ends checkbox to keep stitch angles parallel to the end of the stroke. Note This option will override any corner detection and corner fraction where parallel stitching applies. Tip Stitch angles in strokes should normally be perpendicular to the stroke, but the exceptions are letters like K, X, Y with short slanted strokes. In these cases it is better to keep the stitch angle parallel to the end of the stroke. 8 Select the Break Angle checkbox to apply a cap to sharp angles. This effect is similar to Smart Cornersif the stroke bends sharply, like the letter A or V, it will be split or capped.
Complex Fill stitch angle 0 Turning Strokes Complex Fill stitch angle 30 Match Ends ONstitches parallel to baseline Match Ends OFF Break Angle Break Angle 87 OFFno split

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 653 9 Select the Create Overlaps checkbox to prevent gaps forming between segments. You can fine-tune the overlaps by setting values in the T junctions and O junctions fields. 10 Select the Separate Serifs checkbox if you are converting a serif font. Tip As the serifs are made into separate strokes, this option is better used with larger lettering where serifs are greater than 0.8 mm in breadth. 11 Fine-tune processing of corners with these settings: ! Corner Detection Angle specifies the angle which will identify a corner in the letter. This is more important for getting well-defined small letters. Note, however, that ES Designer automatically inserts stitch angles where needed in order to obtain smooth turning stitches. These generally occur at locations where the shape changes significantly in direction or width.
Create Overlaps OFF Create Overlaps ON Separate Serifs ON Separate Serifs OFF

ES 2006 Chapter 28 Custom Alphabets 654 ! Corner Fraction specifies fractional spacing at corners. It is used to create smooth transitions of stitch angle at corners, shape ends, or where a shape changes in width or curvature significantly. 12 Click OK to return to the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog. 13 Click Apply. 14 Click the entry point. ! If you have already entered text in the Lettering dialog, lettering outlines are created directly. ! If not, type the letters on-screen and press Enter to create the lettering outlines. 15 Select Stitch > Generate Stitches or press G.

Converting complete TrueType fonts

The Convert TrueType Font feature lets you convert any suitable TrueType font installed on your system into an embroidery alphabet. Converted letters can be filled with parallel or turning stitches. Note The conversion usually only takes a few minutes, although Asian fonts may take longer.
Corner Detection Angle 150 Corner Fraction 0.6 mm Corner Detection Angle 30 Corner Fraction 1.0 mm

Use Convert TrueType Font (Special menu) to convert a TrueType font into an embroidery alphabet. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 655

To convert a complete TrueType font

1 Select Special > Alphabet > Convert TrueType Font. The Convert TrueType Font dialog opens. 2 Select the font to be converted and font style. 3 Click Conversion Values. The Conversion Values dialog opens. See Converting individual TrueType letters for details. Tip Click Suggest Values if you are not sure which options to select. Values are automatically set according to the selected alphabet. 4 Enter a Font Name if you want to overwrite the default. 5 Choose whether to convert standard or extended character sets. The standard character set contains alphanumeric characters only. It excludes punctuation marks and other special characters. 6 Click OK.
Select font Select font style Set values Enter font name Choose character set Arial Regular Arial Bold Arial Italic

ES 2006 Chapter 28 Custom Alphabets 656 When the font has been converted, the Convert TrueType Font dialog confirms. 7 Click OK. 8 To check that the alphabet has been created, right-click the Lettering icon to open the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog. The newly converted TrueType font will be selected by default. You can now use it in the same way as other embroidery alphabets.

Converting between Complex Fill and Turning Strokes

When you convert TrueType fonts to embroidery lettering, the letters can be filled with parallel or turning stitches. You can convert between Complex Fill and Turning Strokes at any stage.

To convert between Complex Fill and Turning Strokes

1 Digitize a lettering object using Convert TrueType Font. See To convert individual TrueType letters for details. 2 Select the lettering object. 3 Right-click the Lettering icon. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to convert between Complex Fill and Turning Strokes.
Complex Fill with stitch angle of 0 TrueType font appears in Alphabet list Set conversion values

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 657 4 Click TTF Conversion. The Conversion Values dialog opens. 5 Specify whether the letters will be converted as Turning Strokes or Complex Fill. ! If Turning Strokes is selected, select the required options. ! If Complex Fill is selected, enter the stitch angle. See To convert individual TrueType letters for details. 6 Click OK to return to the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog. 7 Click Apply.

Automatic letter kerning

Select Complex Fill for fixed stitch angle Select Turning Strokes for variable stitch angle letters converted to Turning Strokes

The purpose of the automatic kerning feature is to improve lettering appearance and legibility by fine-tuning spacings between letter pairs. Typically spacing between certain pairs appears uneven due to the optical

ES 2006 Chapter 28 Custom Alphabets 658 illusion of having straight lines and curves side-by-side. Automatic kerning is a user-defined option allowing you to customize kerning.

Applying automatic kerning

To apply automatic kerning

The automatic kerning option is accessed by means of the Object Properties dialog. 1 Double-click a lettering object. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Scroll down to the Spacing panel. If a kerning table exists for the selected alphabet or TrueType font, the Auto Kerning checkbox is enabled and selected by default. Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to adjust automatic kerning for selected lettering objects.
Select or deselect auto kerning

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 659 3 Select or deselect Auto Kerning as required and click Apply. Note If the Auto Kerning checkbox is disabled, no kerning table exists for the selected alphabet or TrueType font, or all the kerning values are set to zero. See Managing user-refined letters for details.

Managing kerning tables

A kerning table is an array of kerning values for every possible pair of letters in the alphabet. The Kerning Table command accesses a dialog used to manage kerning tables. You can copy tables from one alphabet or TrueType font to an embroidery alphabet or remove its kerning table altogether. Note TrueType kerning tables cannot be replaced, added to, or modified in any way. You can, however, convert a TrueType font to an embroidery alphabet and add or modify a kerning table as required.

To manage kerning tables

Click to access kerning table Select alphabet

1 Open the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog. Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to access kerning tables.

ES 2006 Chapter 28 Custom Alphabets 660 2 Select an alphabet from the dropdown list.

3 Scroll down to the Spacing panel and click the Kerning Table button. The Kerning Table dialog opens with the current (target) embroidery alphabet displayed. The Choose Source dropdown list displays all alphabets and TrueType fonts that contain kerning tables. Note The Zero Table command is enabled if the current (target) alphabet already has a kerning table. If you click this button, you are prompted to confirm removal of kerning information. 4 Choose a suitable alphabet or TrueType font from the list and click Copy Source to Table to load its kerning table to the current embroidery alphabet. If the current alphabet already contains a kerning table, you are prompted to overwrite it.

Editing kerning values

Choose similar alphabet or font Current (target) alphabet Copy kerning table to current alphabet

You have created a lettering object which has Automatic Kerning toggled ON.

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected objects, edit stitch angles, and adjust start/end points. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 661

To edit kerning values

1 Select a lettering object with automatic kerning and click the Reshape icon. 2 Click the diamond control point in the centre of the letter. 3 Drag selected letter/s along the baseline or use arrow keys to adjust the spacing. See Adjusting individual letter spacing on-screen for details. Tip Alternatively, to move multiple letters, right-click the diamond control point of the first letter and drag. All letters to the end of the line move as one. 4 Repeat as many times as necessary to fine-tune all letter spacings in the object. 5 Select one or more blocks of contiguous letters by Ctrl-clicking their diamond control points or dragging a selection box around them. Each block may contain two or more letters. 6 Select Special > Alphabet > Update Kerning Values. You are prompted with a confirmation message box stating that the operation will affect letter spacing of new lettering objects. 7 Click OK. A new kerning value is generated for each contiguous pair of selected letters of the same alphabet or font, and written to the associated kerning table.

User-refined alphabets
Sometimes you find that you want to reshape a letter to improve its appearance, perhaps to suit a particular lettering height. ES Designer lets you save the letter as an alternative version. In fact you can save multiple versions of the same letter within the same alphabet. Each version can have ES 2006 Chapter 28 Custom Alphabets 662 a unique height range. When using the letter in a design, the height setting will automatically determine which version is used. The feature thereby allows you to permanently record fixes to particular lettering problems and thereafter automatically apply them. Note The software preserves all user-refined alphabet letters when a new version is installed. Only factory default letters are overwritten. Similarly all

user-refined alphabets are preserved unchanged.

Saving user-refined letters

User-refined letters are saved via the Save Letter option. This is enabled only if an alphabet letter or converted and/or reshaped TrueType font letter is currently highlighted in the design window or selected in Reshape mode. One and only one letter may be saved at a time. In the example below, the letter a tends to close over at reduced sizes. You may want to open it up. By saving it as a user-refined letter, any changes made will be automatically applied to new lettering objects using the alphabet in the specified size range.

To save a user-refined letter

1 Create a lettering object using the embroidery alphabet letters or a TrueType font. See Creating Embroidery Lettering for details. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected objects, edit stitch angles, and adjust start/end points.
Letter a opened up at Default a too narrow at smaller size smaller size

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 663 2 Size the lettering object and reshape the letter as required. See Reshaping individual letters on-screen for details. Tip The Stitch Angle and Reshape Object tools let you add, delete, or adjust stitch angles in lettering objects. See Adjusting stitch angles for details. 3 With the letter selected (by clicking the diamond control point), select Special > Alphabet > Save Letter. The Save User-Refined Letter dialog opens. 4 Set the height range for the letter: ! All: the letter will be used at all letter heights (effectively replacing the factory default). ! Greater than: the letter will only be at heights greater than that specified. ! Less than: the letter will only be at heights less than that specified. 5 Give the new letter a unique name that you can easily identifyby default, the new version is given the name User 1.
Select modified letter Name the new version Specify the height range

ES 2006 Chapter 28 Custom Alphabets 664 If the name has already been used for that letter, you will be prompted to overwrite the existing saved letter. You can use the same name for other letters. 6 Click OK. A confirmation message appears when the letter has been saved. Note that changes to the selected letter are not automatically applied to the current lettering object. 7 To apply changes to all the same letters in the selected object, select the Use saved version checkbox in the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog and click Apply. See also Selecting alphabets.

Managing user-refined letters

User-refined letters are managed via the Manage User-Refined Letters option. This menu item is only enabled when a lettering object with an alphabet containing user-refined letters is currently selected.

To manage user-refined letters

modified letter a default letter a

1 While the letter is selected, select Special > Alphabet > Manage User-Refined Letters.

Changes applied to both letters Select to use user-refined letters

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 665 The Manage User-Refined Lettering dialog opens. The name of the alphabet is shown at the top of the dialog. If the alphabet is a TrueType font, the TT font symbol is shown before the name. ! The original factory default letter is identified by the name Factory. For converted TrueType font letters, the word Convert appears instead of Factory. These labels cannot be edited. ! With embroidery alphabets generated entirely by you, the original digitized letter is named User 1 by default. Every version of the letter, including the original, is editable. 2 Use the left and right arrow buttons or dropdown list to select a user-refined letter in the current alphabet. 3 Make any of the following modifications: ! Click and rename any of the versions, except Factory or Convert, as required. ! Delete any selected version name except Factory by clicking Delete. If the letter is a TrueType font conversion, all versions may be deleted. If the letter is user-definedi.e. non-Wilcomyou can delete all versions except one. ! Deselect the Use checkbox of any version if you dont want to include it in the alphabet but dont want to delete it. When deselected, the size range formerly occupied by the letter is distributed evenly between the closest neighboring versions which have their Use checkbox checked. 4 Adjust the height range for the selected version of the letter by moving the slider bars.
Swap height ranges by moving selected version up or down Adjust height range for the selected letter version Select letter version to include in alphabet Scroll to next or previous letter Click and rename version as required

ES 2006 Chapter 28 Custom Alphabets 666 The height is shown in the current units set in the Regional Options of your PC. These can only be changed via the Control Panel. 5 Swap height ranges of the selected version of the letter with the Move Up and Move Down buttons. 6 Click OK to confirm changes.

Creating custom alphabets

You digitize letters for a custom alphabet just like other embroidery objects. Custom letters can be made up of multiple objects, and may be letters, numbers, symbols or pictures. You can use artwork from sources such as calligraphy books to create alphabet letters. Note You can also create new alphabets by converting TrueType fonts. See also Converting TrueType fonts to embroidery alphabets.

Choosing artwork to create custom alphabets

You can use artwork to create alphabet letters in the same way you do other objects. Before digitizing, however, establish whether the letter shapes are suitable for embroidery, and determine reference height and baseline for the

alphabet. Warning Because of copyright laws, you cannot simply select letters from an existing embroidery alphabet and save them directly to another alphabet. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 667

Letter shapes

For best results, letter columns should be of similar width, without tight curves or sharp corners, or very fine, very wide, or curved serifs.

Reference height and baseline

Reference height is the maximum height of capital letters. Although there may be subtle differences between upper and lower case letters, it is a useful guide for digitizing. See also Saving custom alphabets. Tip Place letters along a standard baseline to help digitize at a standard height. Draw in the baseline if you are digitizing from artwork, or use a grid line as your guide. Descenders in letters such as y or g generally fall below the baseline. Tip Use E or H as reference letters to determine the height and baseline for the alphabet. These letters work well because they sit on the baseline and do not extend above the standard cap-height.
corners too sharp differences in column width too great serifs too long and fine letter height baseline

ES 2006 Chapter 28 Custom Alphabets 668

Letter spacing and width

Letter width varies with the letter shape and spacing. When you digitize letters, you enter two reference points to mark the width, and a third to mark the height. Default spacing affects kerning or spacing across all letters. Additional width can be added as spacing around individual letters. Tip For italic styles, you may need some overlap between letter extents.

Digitizing custom letters

You can digitize letters from backdrop images, convert vector objects, or digitize freehand using any of the input method tools. You can also copy characters and symbols from the Windows Character Map into an external graphics program. Here you can modify them as you like, save them to a graphics file, and use it as a design backdrop. See also Using the Character Map. Letter stitching sequence is based on the alphabet join type you select when saving it. If you save using the Closest Join or Bottom Join methods, ES Designer applies automatic branching to the letters. In this case, you dont need to worry about the direction individual letter strokes will stitch in. When branching is applied, ES Designer determines where each stroke starts and ends, adding travel runs as necessary. However, it is good discipline to digitize the strokes in the direction they are most likely to be stitched in. It is also important to specify the stroke order as this is maintained when sequencing is calculated. See also Saving custom alphabets. If you want to specify the stitching sequence and connectors yourself, digitize the letter in sequence and manually digitize the connecting stitching. You then need to select As Digitized as the alphabet join method. See also Changing lettering join method.
letter width letter width spacing increased

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 669

To digitize custom letters

1 Select an input method. If you are digitizing the sequence and connectors manually, use any input method. If you want the letter to be automatically resequenced with Closest Join or Bottom Join, use Input A, Input B, Input C and Complex Fill objects. 2 Select the stitch type. Tip Most letters use Satin or Tatami. 3 Digitize each section of the letter. ! Where one stroke butts up against the side or end of another, create an underlap to bind the two strokes together. Underlaps should be about a third of the stroke width or less, but may be half for thin strokes. ! Try to avoid having more than two strokes on top of each other as this causes thread buildup and can lead to thread breaks. Sometimes modifying the shape can improve it. ! Sometimes it is helpful to angle the ends of underlaps so that a few stitches are caught by the overlapping stroke. This prevents a gap appearing if the stitches of the top stroke pull back.
underlaps overlap / underlap

ES 2006 Chapter 28 Custom Alphabets 670 ! Where a stroke crosses another stroke, such as in the letter t, one stroke is commonly broken into two parts. For thin objects, you may digitize the above stroke in one piece, crossing over or under the other. 4 Adjust outlines using the Reshape Object tool if necessary. When the letter is the correct shape, save it as a custom letter. See also Saving custom letters.

Saving custom letters

When you create a new letter, you need to select an alphabet for it, give it a name, specify its height, and indicate whether to preserve any machine functions. You also need to indicate its spacing settings by digitizing reference points on-screen. Warning Do not use the tilde (~) symbol when naming letters. This is a special character for entering letters with multiple-character names. See Selecting custom alphabets for details.

To save custom letters

1 Digitize the objects that make up the new letter, and select them. See Digitizing custom letters for details. 2 Select Special > Alphabet > Make Letter. Use Alphabet > Make Letter (Special menu) to create a new letter.
Select whole character

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 671 The Make Letter dialog opens. 3 Select an alphabet from the Alphabet Name list. See also Saving custom alphabets. 4 Enter a name for the letter in the Letter field. For example, if you digitized the letter H, enter H in the Letter field. Tip You can create names with multiple characters to identify special letterse.g. Star for a star symbol, or e-acute for . See also Selecting custom alphabets. 5 In the Reference Height field, enter a height for the letter. The letter is recorded at this height regardless of its original size. You can also set height on-screen by selecting the Digitize Reference Height checkbox. When you return to the design window, you are prompted to digitize the height. If you select Digitize Reference Height, the value in the Reference Height field is ignored. Tip Letters are generally 20 to 40 mm in height. See also Standard

Alphabets. 6 Deselect Remove Functions only if you want to keep any machine functions in the object. The letter may, for example, include deliberate color changes or other machine functions. Such letters require the As Digitized join type. See also Changing lettering join method. 7 Click OK. 8 Click to mark two reference points for letter width and the baseline.
Enter reference height Enter letter name Select alphabet Select to set height on-screen Deselect to include functions

ES 2006 Chapter 28 Custom Alphabets 672 The distance between reference points determines the letter width, including any spacing either side of the letter. This then determines standard spacing between letters. See also Letter spacing and width. Note The reference points you digitize also determine where the letter sits on the baseline. 9 If you selected Digitize Reference Height in the Make Letter dialog, you are prompted to digitize a third reference point to mark letter height. See also Reference height and baseline. A message confirms that the letter has been saved to current alphabet. 10 Click OK.

Saving custom alphabets

Use custom alphabets to store any letters you create. To make a new alphabet, you name it and set the default spacing and join type for adjacent letters. You also specify the file type.

To save custom alphabets

1 Digitize the objects that make up the new letter, and select them. See Digitizing custom letters for details. 2 Select Special > Alphabet > Make Letter.
12 12 12 Select whole letter

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 673 The Make Letter dialog opens. 3 Click New. The New Alphabet dialog opens. 4 Enter a name for the alphabet in the Alphabet Name field. 5 Enter the default spacing in the Default Letter Spacing field. Tip Use 8-10% for standard alphabets such as block and serif styles and 0% for script-style alphabets. 6 Select a default method of joining adjacent letters from the Default Join Type list. ! As Digitized: preserves the original stitching sequence of each letter as it was digitized, as well as any stitch types and machine functions used in its creation. ! Closest Join: resequences entry and exit points in adjacent letters to join them at the closest point. ! Bottom Join: resequences entry and exit points in adjacent letters to create a connector along the lettering baseline. See also Changing lettering join method. 7 Click OK. 8 Enter additional values for the selected letter in the Make Letter dialog. See Saving custom letters for details. 9 Click OK.
Click to create new alphabet

Enter alphabet name Enter default spacing Select join method

ES 2006 Chapter 28 Custom Alphabets 674

Selecting custom alphabets

To use a custom alphabet, select it like any other alphabet. If a letter has a multi-character name, you can only access it from the Lettering dialog using the special tilde (~) symbol.

To select custom alphabets

1 Right-click the Lettering icon. The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. 2 Select a custom alphabet from the Alphabet list. 3 Enter the names of the letters you want to use in the text box. ! If the letter name is a single charactere.g. Aenter that character. ! If the letter name consists of more than one charactere.g. Starenter a tilde (~) followed by the letter name. Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to select a custom alphabet.
Select custom alphabet

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 675 Tip Combine letters that use single or multiple characters in their name by prefacing the single character with two tildese.g. ~Star~~A~Star. See also Saving custom letters. 4 Set the formatting values as you would for other lettering objects. See Formatting lettering for details. 5 Click Apply. 6 Add the lettering to your design. See Adding lettering to embroidery designs for details.

Modifying custom alphabets

You can modify custom alphabets by changing names, default letter spacings and join types. If an alphabet is no longer required you can delete it. You can also rename, delete or reshape letters within custom alphabets.

Modifying alphabets
To modify alphabets

Modify custom alphabets by changing names, default letter spacings and join types. If an alphabet is no longer required, delete it. 1 Select Special > Alphabet > Modify Alphabet. The Modify Alphabet dialog opens. 2 Select an alphabet from the Alphabet > Name list. Use Alphabet > Modify Alphabet (Special menu) to modify custom alphabets.
Select alphabet Click to rename alphabet

ES 2006 Chapter 28 Custom Alphabets 676 ! To rename the alphabet, click Rename. Enter a new name in the Rename Alphabet dialog and click OK. ! To delete an alphabet, click Delete. A message prompts you for confirmation. ! To change default letter spacing, enter a new value in the Default Letter Spacing field. See also Adjusting spacing settings. ! To change the default join type, select a new one from the Default Join Type list. See also Adjusting stitching sequence and join method. 3 Click OK.

Modifying custom letters

To modify custom letters

Rename, delete or reshape letters within custom alphabets.

1 Select Special > Alphabet > Modify Alphabet. The Modify Alphabet dialog opens. 2 Select an alphabet from the Alphabet > Name list.
Enter new name

Use Alphabet > Modify Alphabet (Special menu) to rename, delete or reshape letters within custom alphabets.
Select alphabet Select letter

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 677 3 Select a letter from the Letter > Name list. ! To delete a letter, click Delete. A message prompts you for confirmation. ! To rename a letter, click Rename. Enter a new name in the Rename Letter dialog and click OK. Tip You can use names with more than one character. 4 Click OK.

Reshaping custom letters

To change the shape of letters in custom alphabets, ungroup them and change their outlines and stitch angles using the Reshape Object tool. Warning When you ungroup, the letter is converted back to objects, and letter details such as alphabet and baseline are lost. When you have finished reshaping, you have to enter these details again.
Enter new name

Use Ungroup (Standard toolbar) to ungroup a letter into its component objects. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape custom letters. Use Alphabet > Make Letter (Special menu) to create a new letter. ES 2006 Chapter 28 Custom Alphabets 678

To reshape custom letters

1 Select a letter and ungroup. 2 Click the Reshape Object icon and reshape the objects as required. 3 When you have finished reshaping, select the objects. 4 Select Special > Alphabet > Make Letter. The Make Letter dialog opens. 5 Select the alphabet to which the letter belongs from the Alphabet Name list. 6 Select the letter name from the Name list. Note To save the letter under a different name, enter a new name. 7 Click OK. 8 Confirm you want to replace the old letter with the new.
Reshape objects Select alphabet Select letter name

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 679

Merging alphabets
To merge alphabets

You can merge letters from two or more alphabets with the stand-alone alphabet merging utility. Files to be merged must be placed in the ES Designer userletw folder of your installation. 1 Select Start > Programs > MS-DOS Prompt. 2 When the DOS prompt appears, change to the bin directory of your ES Designer installation. This is usually C:/ESWin/bin. 3 Choose whether to automatically overwrite or receive prompt. ! To automatically overwrite the letters in the first file with letters of the same name from the other file(s), type: alphcat.exe file1.ESA file2.ESA file3.ESA. ! To receive a prompt message before a letter is overwritten, type:

alphcat.exe file1.ESA file2.ESA file3.ESA /Y. Press Y or N to confirm whether to overwrite. 4 Click Yes to merge. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 680

PART VII DESIGN PROCESSING ENCODING

Design processing and encoding involve all the less glamorous, back-end operations of embroidery design and manufacture. This is where you actually output your designs to machine, disk, printer, cutter, and so on. For this, you will need an understanding of embroidery file types as well as different machine formats. Depending on your setup, you will also need an understanding of traditional storage media including embroidery disks and paper tapes.

&

Processing design files

This section describes how to select conversion options for opening and saving different stitch and outline design formats. It also provides details about the processing of Melco CND outline files, including color merging, as well as reassigning colors to both stitch and Melco CND files. See Processing Design Files for details.

Changing machine formats

This section describes how to select a machine format for a design, output it using other formats, and customize machine formats to meet your machines specific requirements. See Changing Machine Formats for details. ES 2006 Design Processing & Encoding 681

Outputting designs

This section describes how to create production worksheets. It explains how to send designs as email attachments, as well as how to output designs as drawings and images. Cutting appliqu shapes is also covered, as well as stitching designs with Stitch Manager. See Outputting Designs for details.

Embroidery disks and paper tapes

This section describes how to read from and write embroidery design files to embroidery disk and paper tape. See Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 682

Chapter 29

Processing Design Files

By default ES Designer saves to its native file format, EMB. This format contains all information necessary both for stitching a design and for later modification. When opening designs created or saved in other formats, ES Designer converts the design internally to EMB format. You can then modify it using the full range of ES Designer features. Depending on the file type, you may need to provide additional information to assist ES Designer in the conversion process. This section describes how to select conversion options for opening and saving different stitch and outline design formats. It also provides details about the processing of Melco CND outline files, including color merging, as

well as reassigning colors to both stitch and Melco CND files.

Embroidery design formats

Embroidery designs are saved in one of two formatsoutline format or stitch format. Note For details of specific formats supported by ES Designer, see Supported embroidery file formats.

Outline files

Outline or condensed files are high-level formats which contain object outlines, object properties and stitch data. When you open an outline file in ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 683 ES Designer, corresponding stitch types, input methods and effects are applied. Outline files can be scaled, transformed and reshaped without affecting stitch density or quality. After modification, you can choose to save your design to EMB format, or to a different format altogether. Note Some outline files, such as Wilcom INP and Gunold PCH, contain incomplete information. Old format ESD designs are somewhere between an outline and a stitch file. They contain stitch data, information about selected stitch types, densities, and machine functions. They do not, however, contain information about shapes and lines. ESD files require object/outline recognition if you want to perform object editing in ES Designer. See Opening stitch files in ES Designer for details.

Stitch files

Different embroidery machines understand different languages. Each has its own control commands for the various machine functions. Before you can stitch a design, it must be in a format which can be interpreted by the machine. Stitch or expanded designs are low-level formats for direct use by embroidery machines. They contain only stitch coordinates and machine functions. They are generally created on the fly when sending designs to machine. They can also be output to embroidery disk or paper tape. See Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes for details. See also Supported File and Machine Formats and Disk Types. When they are read into ES Designer, stitch files do not contain object information such as outlines or stitch types, but present the design as a collection of stitch blocks called Manual objects. Manual objects are created wherever machine functionse.g. color changes or trimsare detected in
Complex Fill object

ES 2006 Chapter 29 Processing Design Files 684 the design. They have only General and Connector properties. Manual objects, in turn, consist of individual stitches, called Manual stitches. Stitch designs are generally not suited to modification because stitches are not regenerated. However, ES Designer patented Stitch Processor technology can interpret object outlines, stitch types and spacing from stitch data with some success. In this way, you can re-constitute old tape format files and other stitch file format designs for modification in ES Designer. These recognized designs can be scaled with stitches recalculated for the new outlines. Processing is effective for most stitch designs but cannot produce the same level of quality as original outlines and may not handle some fancy stitches. By default, stitch files are converted to outlines and objects upon opening but you can also choose to open them without recognition. Designs opened in this way can be output for stitching in another format. Or you can edit stitches and add new elements. For such purposes, you do not need to retrieve information about how the design was created. You can scale stitch format designs which have been opened without object/outline recognition. However, because the stitch count does not change, the density increases or decreases with the design size. Thus you

Manual object

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 685 should not scale stitch designs by more than 5% or some areas may be too thickly or too thinly covered. Alternatively, you can process the whole or selected parts of a design after editing. You can even split larger manual objects into smaller objects, and process them individually. Note With or without object/outline recognition, stitch files can be saved in EMB format once they are opened in ES Designer.

File sources

While embroidery files are broadly classified as outline (condensed) or stitch (expanded), ES Designer internally tags files as belonging to one of four typesNative Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or Imported Stitches.
Original stitch design Scaled stitch design opened without object/outline recognition

File source Description Native Design Designs created in ES Designer (or equivalent). Imported Outlines Designs read from non-EMB outlineCND or PCHwhere stitches have been generated in ES Designer (or equivalent) from original outlines and stitching data. Processed Stitches Designs read from stitch files where stitches have been regenerated by processing. ES 2006 Chapter 29 Processing Design Files 686 For information about the source of a design file, refer to the Design Properties dialog. See Viewing design information in ES Designer for details.

Opening stitch files in ES Designer

If you want to scale a design, edit an outline or change a stitch type, then the design or selected elements must be converted into objects using Stitch Processor. By default, stitch files are converted to outlines and objects upon opening. If you do not want to scale the design by more than 5%, or only want to make minor stitch edits, or output in another format, you can choose to open the stitch file without object/outline recognition. The design is then presented as a collection of manual objects. If you only want to convert selected parts of a design, you can open the file without object/outline recognition and process only the required stitch blocks. Tip To ensure object outlines, stitch types, stitch density and colors are correct, it is always a good idea to check and edit designs after conversion. To improve the quality of a stitch file, it is often better to edit stitches before conversion.

Object/outline recognition

When you convert a stitch file to outline format, ES Designer reads stitch data stitch-by-stitch according to the needle penetration points. It recognizes stitch types, spacing and length values, stitch effects, and can determine object outlines. All filled areas in a design become Input A or Run objects with fill or outline stitch properties as well as general and connector properties. Stitch types are assigned as Satin, Tatami, or Program Split depending on the pattern of needle penetrations. With Tatami, ES Designer recognizes stitch spacing and length, and applies a random factor. If a design is converted from ESD Imported Stitches Designs read from stitch files, where outlines may or may not have been recognized, but stitches have not been regenerated through stitch processing.

Note, however, that if you change a stitch designe.g. add a lettering objectthe status changes to Processed Stitches even though the imported stitches may not have been regenerated. File source Description ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 687 format, Zigzag and Triple Run objects are also recognized. If an object is not recognized, it becomes (or remains) a manual object with general and connector properties only. As such, it will not scale well. Recognized object outlines and stitch values are stored as object properties in ES Designer. This means you can scale and transform recognized designs in the usual way. You can also change the stitch density of the whole or selected parts of a design, and/or of certain stitch types. Tip ES Designer Stitch Processor is intended primarily to enable the re-use of stitch format designs, but it also provides a convenient method for changing the object properties of EMB designs. You can change stitch density as a percentage without having to select objects individually. See Adjusting stitch density for details.

Recognition limitations

ES Designer cannot recognize the backstitch type for Tatami fills. Before scaling a design, select the correct backstitch in the Object Properties dialog. If a stitch type is not recognized accurately, the values in the Object Properties dialog will not match the stitches. The stitches will remain the same as in the original design, until you make changes and regenerate them. If you change the design, stitches will be regenerated according to the object properties. Tip Designs converted from tape format files and expanded designs which have non-standard stitch types may require editing in ES Designer to ensure that the object outlines, stitch types, stitch density and colors are correct.

Opening stitch files with object/outline recognition

When you open stitch files with object/outline recognition, you can set open options to determine how to convert the design. Options vary with the type of stitch file you select. Note Open options should reflect how the design was originally digitized, not how you want it now. Experiment with the settings to get the best results.

To open stitch files with object/outline recognition

1 Open the file from your hard disk, or read it from tape or embroidery disk. ES 2006 Chapter 29 Processing Design Files 688 The Open dialog opens. 2 Select a stitch format from the Files of Type list and select the file to open. 3 Click Options. The Open Options dialog opens. Note Depending on the file type selected, different options are available. 4 Select the Objects/Outlines checkbox. 5 Select a different machine format from the Machine Type list as required. 6 Enter the number of jumps to recognize as trims. When ES Designer encounters this number of consecutive jumps, it will convert them to a trim function.
Select format Click Options Select file Select Objects/Outlines Select machine format

Select output type for stop codes Enter number of jumps as trims

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 689 Warning If this value is different from the original design, trim functions will be not be inserted correctly. 7 Use the Stop Code as panel to select the output type for stop codes as required. ! Color Change: Stop codes are interpreted as Next Color commands. The next color is selected from the default color palette. ! Stops: Stop codes are interpreted as Explicit Stops. The machine stops stitching. ! Custom: Lets you map thread colors to every stop code in the file. This means you can color code stitch file designs which do not contain needle addressing information, before opening the file. See Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files for details. 8 Select or deselect the Automatic Connectors checkbox as required. ! Deselect to open designs with connectors recognized as Manual objects. This avoids stitch editing problems caused by automatic connectors. This is recommended for open fills. ! Select to open appropriate designs with automatic connectors without having to use object/outline recognition. 9 Check the status of your embroidery machine as required, then select the correct settingSpeed1 or Speed2from the list (if available). On some Barudan machines there is a speed switch. Depending on its position, fast is assigned as either Speed1 or Speed2. For example, if you select Speed1, each fast speed function will be translated into a Speed1 command. 10 Click Advanced to set advanced recognition options. See Adjusting advanced recognition settings for details. 11 Click OK. 12 Click Open.
Select required speed

ES 2006 Chapter 29 Processing Design Files 690 The selected design is processed and converted to Input A or Run objects with fill or outline stitch properties as well as general and connector properties. If an object is not recognized, it becomes a manual object with general and connector properties only. Note Stitch Processor adds the missing information to the file, but does not change the stitches. See also Adjusting stitch density.

Opening stitch files without object/outline recognition

By opening a stitch file without object/outline recognition, you can output the design without change, edit individual stitches, and perform minor scaling and transforming actions without losing the original stitch information. Alternatively, you can process the whole or selected parts of a design after editing. See also Recognizing object/outlines after editing.

To open stitch files without object/outline recognition

1 Open the file from your hard disk, or read it from tape or embroidery disk. The Open dialog opens. 2 Select a stitch format from the Files of Type list and select the file to open. 3 Click Options.
Manual object Input A object

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 691

The Open Options dialog opens. 4 Deselect the Objects/Outlines checkbox. 5 Set other open options as required. Depending on the file type selected, different options are available. See Opening stitch files with object/outline recognition for details. 6 Click OK. 7 Click Open. The design opens as a collection of manual objects with only general and connector properties. Tip At this point, you can edit the stitches so that the Stitch Processor can recognize the stitch types and object outlines more accurately: ! Eliminate Stitch Shortening and Jagged Edge effects for smooth, accurate outlines. ! Remove small stitches from the design.
Deselect Objects/Outlines Manual object

ES 2006 Chapter 29 Processing Design Files 692 ! The exit point of a column may be on the same side as the entry point. You may need to add an extra stitch at the end so that the Stitch Processor can recognize the outline accurately. See Editing Stitches and Machine Functions for details.

Recognizing object/outlines after editing

You can process a stitch file, or selected parts of it, to recognize objects and outlines, or adjust its size and stitch density. Processing a stitch file is similar to converting it to an outline file when opening except that you can process only selected objects or stitches. You can also split larger manual objects into smaller objects, and process them individually. See also Splitting objects and Converting selected stitches to objects. Tip You can also use the Process feature to change stitch count and density for the whole design, or for objects of a particular stitch type only. See Adjusting stitch density for details.

To recognize object/outlines after editing

1 Open a stitch file without object/outline recognition. See Opening stitch files without object/outline recognition for details. 2 Edit parts of the design as required. See Editing Stitches and Machine Functions for details. 3 Select the part of the design you want to process. You can select the whole design or individual manual objects. Use Process (Generate toolbar) to adjust stitch density of the whole or selected parts of a design.
Manual object

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 693 4 Click the Process icon. The Process dialog opens. 5 In the Stitch Values panel, enter the number of Target Stitches as either a percentage or absolute value (in millimeters). 6 Adjust the density for each stitch type as required. You can change the density for selected objects and/or for specific stitch types only. See also Adjusting stitch density of certain stitch types. Note If a design contains objects created with other stitch types, the target stitch count will not be achieved as these objects will not change. 7 Click Recognition to set advanced recognition options as required. See Adjusting advanced recognition settings for details. 8 Click OK.
Adjust stitch densities Enter target stitch count

Adjust Pull Compensation Click to access advanced recognition options

ES 2006 Chapter 29 Processing Design Files 694 The selected objects are processed and converted to Input A or Run objects with fill or outline stitch properties as well as general and connector properties. If an object is not recognized, it remains a manual object with general and connector properties only. In this case, the target stitch count may not be reached. Note Stitch Processor adds the missing information to the file, but does not change the stitches. See also Adjusting stitch density.

Adjusting advanced recognition settings

You can fine-tune how ES Designer converts stitch files using the advanced recognition settings. By default, ES Designer converts stitches as Tatami, Satin, or Run stitches according to the settings in the Recognition Advanced Options dialog. You can change these values, or choose not to convert a certain stitch type at all. Generally, the default settings provide the best results for the most frequently used fill stylesTatami and Satintheir propertiesstitch length and spacingand edge effects, such as stitch shortening. Default settings, however, cannot always guarantee the best results as the variety of embroidery designs is virtually unlimited.
Manual object converted to Input A and Run objects, or left as Manual Original design opened without stitch recognition Opened with stitch recognition pattern splits recognized as Tatami

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 695 Tip When using the advanced object/outline recognition options, select only those options you want to be recognized. This will minimize the time taken to process the design and ensure stitches are preserved.

To adjust advanced recognition settings

1 Access the Open Options dialog. See Opening stitch files with object/outline recognition for details. 2 Click Advanced. The Recognition - Advanced Options dialog opens. 3 In the Tatami panel, select Recognize Tatami in order to process Tatami fills, and adjust conversion options as required: ! Stitch Spacing: enter spacing range to recognize. If the row spacing falls outside this range it will not be converted to Tatami. ! Min Stitch Length: enter minimum stitch length to recognize as Tatami.
Select to recognize Tatami stitches Select to recognize Satin stitches Select to recognize Run stitches Select to recognize

Jagged Edges Select to recognize Splits Set space and stitch length rounding Select Segments Resolution and Merging Factors Select to recognize random needle penetrations

ES 2006 Chapter 29 Processing Design Files 696 ! Random Factor: select to allow for random needle penetrations. Deselect the Recognize Splits checkbox to detect Random Factor more accurately. 4 In the Satin panel, select Recognize Satin in order to process Satin stitching, and adjust stitch spacings as requiredif the row spacing falls outside the specified range it will not be converted to Satin. 5 In the Run panel, select Recognize Run in order to process Run stitching, and adjust conversion options as required: ! Max Stitch Length: enter maximum stitch length to recognize. ! Length Variation: enter percentage by which stitch length can vary in Run objects. 6 In the Parameter Consistency panel, set options for Complex Fill segment recognition. ! Spacing Rounding: enter rounding value for stitch spacingssnaps spacing values in Tatami and Satin fills to specified increments.
Tatami Spacing range 0.4 mm to 1.5 mm, Random Factor not selected Tatami Spacing range 0.4 mm to 1.5 mm, Random Factor selected Satin Spacing range 0.5 mm to 5.0 mm Satin Spacing range 0.1 mm to 2.0 mm Run, Max Stitch Length 4 mm Length Variation 10% Run, Max Stitch Length 4 mm Length Variation 90%

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 697 ! Stitch Length Rounding: enter rounding value for stitch lengthssnaps stitch length values in Tatami fills to specified increments. For example, if the Tatami minimum stitch length is 4 mm, and the Stitch Length Rounding is 0.4 mm, stitches from 3.80 to 4.20 mm are snapped to 4.0 mm, and recognized as Tatami. 7 In the Effects panel, select Jagged in order to recognize the Jagged Edge effect. Specify a minimum range in millimetersanything variation greater than this value will be recognized as Jagged Edge. 8 In the Splits panel, select Recognize Splits to recognize splits in Tatami fills, and adjust conversion options as required. ! Program Splits as User Defined Splits: recognize split patterns as user-defined splits. Note, however, that user-defined splits are scaled when the design is scaled. This results in stitch lengths getting longer as the design is enlarged, thus limiting scaling. With native program splits, on the other hand, patternsshape, size and spacingremain the same after objects are scaled. See also Textured Fills.

! Recognize Auto Splits: recognize Auto Splits in Satin objects.

Tatami Spacing range: 0.4 mm to 1.5 mm, Spacing Rounding: 0.01 mm, Stitch Length Rounding: 0.2 mm Tatami Spacing range: 0.4 mm to 1.5 mm, Spacing Rounding: 0.05 mm, Stitch Length Rounding:0.5 mm Jagged selected, border object recognized as jagged edge Jagged NOT selected, border object recognized as Manual

Otherwise, patterns created with Auto Split will be recognized as Tatami. See also Splitting long stitches with Auto Split.

ES 2006 Chapter 29 Processing Design Files 698 ! Recognition Level: restrict recognition of Program Splits by increasing percentage. Decrease to increase recognition. A low percentage number will detect more areas as Satin with User Defined Split than Tatami. Tip Program splits are reliably recognized when patterns are not overlapping. Warning Split patterns can be complex, so the recognition process can take up to five times longer with this option. Do not use it unless the design contains Program Splits, User Defined Splits with Tatami or Satin, or Auto Splits. 9 In the Segments Resolution/Merging Factors panel, enter values to fine-tune the recognition of segments and objects. ! Spacing: this value expresses the ratio between stitch spacings in adjacent stitch blockse.g. adjacent spacings of 0.6 mm and 1.0 mm gives a ratio of 1.67. A value of 2.0 in the Spacing field means that these stitch blocks will be recognized as one segment or object. A value of 1.5 means that they will not. The default value is 3.0. Normal Satin and Tatami stitching ranges in spacing from 0.3 to 0.6 mm, so most continuous sections of stitching of the same type will not be split. To preserve spacing variations for color-blended designs and more artistic designs, you may need to reduce the spacing factor. In manually punched designs which include stitching with irregular spacing, segment breaks can be reduced by increasing the factor. ! Height: this value expresses the ratio between heights of stitch blocks. It is important in recognizing Complex Fill shapes, particularly with holes. Tip Generally, the lower these values, the larger the number of segments/objects likely to be identified. Normally you want to obtain design information with a minimum number of identified
User Defined Split Auto Split

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 699 segments/objects. In practice there is always a compromise between design recognition quality and the minimum number of correctly identified segments/objects. 10 Click OK. Tip To revert to the original conversion settings, click Reset.

Opening Melco CND outline files

Melco Condensed (CND) is the native file format of Melco embroidery digitizing software. CND files store only digitized outlines and stitch values. When you open CND designs in ES Designer, these outlines are scaled and stitches recalculated to preserve density. ES Designer recognizes all Melco machine functions and stitch types, including Partition Lines and Complex Fill, and automatically converts them to EMB format. However, CND files do not contain specialty features such as Pull Compensation or Auto Spacing,

nor do they include actual stitches, thread colors, or design icons. There are several versions of CND, all of which can be read by ES Designer. While these designs scale accurately, the number and placement of stitches may differ somewhat from the original design. You may notice some difference (5%) in the stitch counts between original and converted files. This is because of differences in the software methods used to calculate stitches. ES Designer cannot interpret certain specialty features of CND design objects because there is no direct equivalent. However, stock designs do not normally use these features and will generally convert without problem. Tip Before CND designs are stitched out, an EXP format file is created. The EXP stores the actual stitches and can be stitched directly. This file too can be opened in ES Designer. See Opening stitch files in ES Designer for details. When you open Melco CND files, the Melco stitch types used in the design are converted to ES Designer stitch typesSatin, Run, Tatami, etc. You
Recognized objects shown in different colors Spacing: 0.5 mm, Height: 2 mm Spacing: 3 mm, Height: 4 mm

ES 2006 Chapter 29 Processing Design Files 700 can change conversion settings to adjust the spacing, stitch length, effects and defaults applied to ES Designer stitch types. You can also set scaling values to open the design at a different size to the original. See also Saving designs in Melco CND format. Note For details of how each CND stitch type is converted, see Conversion of Melco CND format to Wilcom EMB.

To open a Melco CND outline file

1 Open the file from your hard disk, or read it from tape or embroidery disk. The Open dialog opens. 2 Select Melco (CND) from the Files of Type list and select the file to open. 3 Click Options.
Select CND format Select file

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 701 The Condensed File Input Values dialog opens. 4 In the Scale Factor panel, enter the scale at which you want to open the design. New dimensions are expressed as a ratio of the original design size. For example, to scale to 120% of the original, enter a scale factor of 1.2 in each field. 5 In the Adjust panel, enter the spacing and length values to apply to the design as a percentage of the original values. You can adjust Satin spacing, Run stitch length as well as Tatami spacing and length. 6 In the Auto Color Merge panel, choose whether you want to read thread color information from CND files.
Select Auto Color Merge option Enter scale values Adjust stitch values Select effects to apply Adjust default

values Scale Factor X: 1.00 Y: 1.00 Scale Factor X: 0.50 Y: 1.00

ES 2006 Chapter 29 Processing Design Files 702 This ensures that stitches are displayed in the correct colors when converted to EMB. See Color merging Melco CND files and Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files for details. 7 In the Effects panel, select the effects you want to apply to the design. For information about these effects, see the relevant sections of the manual: ! Auto Spacing: See Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch. ! Short Stitches: See Reducing stitch bunching with stitch shortening. ! Fractional Spacing: See Reducing stitch bunching with fractional spacing. 8 In the Default Values panel, adjust the default values for Satin Spacing, Stitch Length and Maximum Stitch Length as required. If the CND design was created with values different to the factory settings, you can override them in these fields. ! To save new settings as defaults, click Save. ! To revert to the Melco factory settings, click Reset. 9 Click OK. 10 Click Open. The selected design opens in the Design window. You can scale the design directly on screen, or via the Object Properties dialog. You can also rotate, mirror and skew the design. See Modifying Designs for details.

Color merging Melco CND files

The Auto Color Merge feature reads thread color information for CND files from an associated TXT file so that stitches are displayed in the correct colors when they are converted to EMB. Tip Your EMB and other design files can be converted to and from other file formats using ES Design Explorer. Use it to batch process multiple CND designs using Auto Color Merge. See Converting design files in folders for details.

Setting up the color merge TXT file

Auto Color Merge reads and interprets a TXT file that contains color names from a thread chart. You can create this text file manually with a text editor ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 703 such as MS Notepad. The text file must have the same file name as the CND filee.g. Fish.TXT and Fish.CND. Both files must also reside in the same folder. For the Auto Color Merge function to work correctly, information in the text file must be entered in a certain format.

Example text file: Fish

Fish Uses curve effects File: Fish 55.9mmW X 74.5mmH ST: 6,780 Colors: 8 1. Tropical Sunset 2. Saffron 3. Pale powder Blue 4. Tropical Sunset 5. Pale powder Blue Curve effect 6. Tropical White 7. Tropical Sunset

A typical text file might look like this:

8. Pale powder Blue

Text file structure

All text files contain some or all of the following elements. Text file element Mandatory Description Example Design name This is the name of the design as it appears in File > Information > Design Properties > Subject. Fish Comments Lines inserted here appear under File > Information > Design Properties > Comments. Uses curve effects File name ! This is the file name of the CND design file. The file extension should not be included. File: Fish Design size Enter the expected design size for the design. The actual design size is derived from the software. 55.9mmW X 74.5mmH Stitch count Enter the expected stitch count for the design. The actual stitch count is derived from the software. ST: 6,780 Number of colors ! States the total number of colors in the design. Colors: 8 ES 2006 Chapter 29 Processing Design Files 704

Reading Melco CND files with Auto Color Merge

When opening a CND file which has a TXT file associated with it, you must specify the thread chart used when the design was originally created in EDS (or other design software). The thread colors nominated in the text file will correspond to the selected thread chart. Alternatively, you can assign colors manually to every Color Stop code in the file. See also Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files.

To read Melco CND files with Auto Color Merge

1 Select File > Open. The Open dialog opens. 2 Select a CND design. 3 Click Options. Thread name 1
!

Enter the first thread name. The name of the thread is searched against the Thread Chart. The thread name is shown in the File > Design Properties > Stop Sequence tab. 1. Tropical Sunset Thread name 2 ! Enter the second thread name. 2. Saffron Thread name 3 ! Enter the third thread name. 3. Pale Powder Blue Thread name 4 ! Enter the fourth thread name. 4. Tropical Sunset Thread name 5 ! Add any extra threads to this list. 5. Pale Powder Blue Thread comments Place comments below the relevant thread number. Curve effect Thread name 6 ! 6. Tropical White Thread name 7 ! 7. Tropical Sunset Thread name 8 ! 8. Pale Powder Blue Text file element Mandatory Description Example

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 705 The Condensed File Input Values dialog opens. 4 Select a color merge option from the Auto Color Merge panel. ! If you want to read thread color information for the selected CND file from an associated TXT file, select From File and follow the steps below. ! If you want to assign colors manually to every Color Stop code in the file, select Custom and click Define Stop Sequence. See Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files for details. 5 If you have chosen to associate a text file with your CND file, select a corresponding thread chart from the Auto Color Merge dropdown list. Note Any thread color named in the text file must correspond to a color in the selected thread chart. If not, it will default to black. 6 Click OK. The design opens, the stitches appear in the correct thread colors, and the color palette displays the selected thread chart.
Select thread chart Assign colors manually no chart selecteddefault colors assigned original colors correctly assigned from text file one color not correctly matcheddefaults to black

ES 2006 Chapter 29 Processing Design Files 706

Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files

When you open a stitch file or CND file, a design without color code assignment automatically uses the default color palette. You can, however, map thread colors to every Color Stop code in the file. This means that before opening the file you can color-code designs which do not contain needle addressing information. Note In order to assign colors correctly, you need to consult a production worksheet for the necessary color sequence information.

To reassign colors to a stitch or Melco CND file

1 Select File > Open. The Open dialog opens. 2 Select a stitch file or CND design and click Options. If youve selected a stitch file, the Open Options dialog opens. If CND, the Condensed File Input Values dialog opens. This procedure is the same. 3 Select Custom and click Define Stop Sequence.
without color code assignment with color code assignment Select Define Stop Sequence CND file Stitch file Select Define Stop Sequence

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 707 The Define Stop Sequence dialog opens. Initially the Building Stop Sequence grid is empty. 4 Select a thread chart and first color. 5 Click Assign Color. The color and the description are entered at the current Stop in the Building Stop Sequence grid. Note The selection moves to the next color in the thread chart. Two

consecutive same colors are not allowed and Assign Color is disabled. 6 Click Assign Stop to enter an explicit Stop code.
Select thread chart Select color Click to assign color

ES 2006 Chapter 29 Processing Design Files 708 Stop is entered in the Description field. Note A Stop Sequence Warning message displays if a redundant color function is assigned. Press Delete to delete a selected entry in the stop sequence. Click Reset to delete all the entries. 7 Use the Extra Stop codes as panel to select the output type for extra stop codes. ! Color Changes: Extra Stop codes are interpreted as Next Color commands. The next color is selected from the default color palette. ! Stops: Extra Stop codes are interpreted as Explicit Stops. The machine stops stitching. ! Repeat Sequence: If you select fewer colors than the design requires, the selected colors are repeated. For example, if your design requires four colors and youve only selected two in the Building Stop Sequence list, colors 3 & 4 will be the same as original colors 1 & 2. 8 Repeat the operation as many times as indicated in the production worksheet. 9 Click OK. The design will have the desired colors and the correct number of Color Changes. Note You can convert color changes to an explicit Stop Code. You can also remove Color Stops by assigning the same color number to consecutive color blocks.
Click to assign stop Choose how extra stops are to be interpreted

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 709

Chapter 30

Changing Machine Formats

Different embroidery machines speak different languages. They have their own control commands for the various machine functions. Before you can stitch a design, it must be in a format which can be understood by the embroidery machine. When you select a machine format, ES Designer translates the digitized design into machine functions that can be understood by that machine. If required, you can customize machine formats to meet specific machine requirements. This section describes how to select a machine format for a design, output it using other formats, and customize machine formats to meet your machines specific requirements. ES 2006 Chapter 30 Changing Machine Formats 710

Selecting machine formats

When you create a design, you need to select an embroidery machine format for it. You can change the machine format if machine values are incorrect for your particular machine. You can even change the machine format for a particular design. You should only modify formats if you no longer require the original values. Otherwise see Creating custom formats. Note You do not need to change the designs native machine format in

order to output to a different machine type. See Outputting to different machine formats for details.

To select a machine format

1 Select Machine > Select Machine Format. The Select Machine Format dialog opens. 2 From the Available Machine Formats list, select the required machine format. 3 Adjust machine formats as required: ! To check or modify settings for the selected format, click Values. See also Adjusting standard machine format settings. ! To create a new format based on the selected one, click Create. See also Creating custom formats. 4 Click OK. Use Select Machine Format (Machine menu) to change the machine format.
Select machine format Click to adjust format Click to create new format

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 711 Note If a selected machine format does not support a particular function in the designeither automatically or manually insertedit is simply ignored.

Outputting to different machine formats

Once a design is complete, you can stitch it out to any supported embroidery machine without changing the original design format. If a selected machine format does not support a particular function in the designeither automatically or manually insertedit is simply ignored. Note To change the original format, see Selecting machine formats.

To output to a different machine format

! Click the Stitch to Stitch Manager icon, then select a different format
from the Output as Machine Format list. See Stitching designs with Stitch Manager for details. Use Stitch to Stitch Manager (Standard toolbar) to send a design to a machine for stitching. Use Save to Embroidery Disk (Standard toolbar) to save a design to an embroidery disk.
Select machine format

ES 2006 Chapter 30 Changing Machine Formats 712 ! Click the Save to Embroidery Disk icon, then select a different machine format from the dropdown list. See Saving designs to embroidery disk for details. ! Select File > Paper Tape > Punch, then select a different machine format from the dropdown list.

Adjusting standard machine format settings

Different machines require different settings. When you select a machine format, you only modify values relevant to that machine. Typical modifiable values are stitch and jump length, trim functions and color change functions. Use the Machine Format Values dialog to define values to allow when outputting to a specific machine format.
Select machine format Select machine format

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 713 Note Not all values described here are available for all machine formats. Use these instructions to enter values that apply to your selected format.

See your embroidery machine manual for more information about machine formats.

Setting stitch and jump length values

To set stitch and jump values

With some machines you can set the maximum frame movement, minimum stitch length to recognize, and automatic jump length. 1 Access the Machine Format Values > Standard dialog. See Selecting machine formats for details. Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear. 2 In the Maximum Stitch field, enter the maximum stitch length to allow. The value you enter depends on the tape code used by your machine: ! Binary coding system: 12.7 mme.g. Barudan machines ! Ternary coding system: 12.1 mme.g. Tajima machines 3 In the Minimum Stitch field, enter the minimum stitch length to allow. This sets the default Small Stitches value. See Removing small stitches automatically for details. Tip Generally the minimum stitch length is increased for dense materials and thick threads to prevent thread breakage. 4 In the Maximum Jump field, enter the maximum jump length to allow. This sets the default Auto Jump value. See Adjusting Auto Jump settings for details. Tip Shorter jump values generally improve stitch quality and reduce wear on the machine but may increase stitch-out time. 5 Click Save then Close.
Adjust stitch and jump settings

ES 2006 Chapter 30 Changing Machine Formats 714

Setting trim functions

With some machine formats you can specify how to format and interpret trim commands. Some machines understand specific trim codes. Other machines interpret multiple jumps as a trim command. Machines without an automatic trimmer may not know how to interpret trim commands, and may even shift the design when a trim code is encountered. For these machines you need to deselect the Output Trims checkbox so that trim functions are ignored when the design is stitched.

To set trim functions

1 Access the Machine Format Values > Standard dialog. See Selecting machine formats for details. Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear. 2 In the Trim panel, select the Output Trims checkbox to include trim functions when outputting to the selected machine format. Note If you deselect the Output Trims checkbox, the trim functions are not removed from the design but simply ignored for the selected machine format. 3 Specify the trim function format to use: ! Jumps: for machines that interpret multiple jumps as trims. You also need to enter the required number of jumps. ! Trim Code: for machines that require specific trim codes. 4 Click Save then Close.

Setting color change functions

Select to output trim functions Select trim function format

Machines interpret the Color Change function differentlyeither as a Needle Number or Stop command.

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 715

Needle number commands

Needle Number commands tell the machine to move to the next needle

whenever a Color Change function is encountered. Each color in the design corresponds to a needle number in the order listed in the Colors list. See Changing thread colors for details. Note The machine must have the correct thread colors loaded for each needle to stitch out correctly. For needle addressing machines, you need to specify how many needles are on the machine. This tells the machine how often it needs to stop for the operator to change threads. For example, for a design with 25 colors to be stitched out on a machine with five needles, it must stop after every five color changes in order for the operator to change threads. Needle Number commands are sometimes combined with Jump commands to indicate color changes.

Stop commands

Stop commands allow the operator to manually change threads whenever a Color Change function is encountered. They are generally used with machines that only have one needle or do not support needle addressing. Stop commands are sometimes combined with Jump commands to indicate color changes.

To set color change functions

1 Access the Machine Format Values > Standard dialog. See Selecting machine formats for details. Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear. 2 In the Color Change panel, select a method to use to interpret color change functions. ! Needle No: converts color change functions to Needle Number commands.
Select method to interpret color change functions Select optional functions as required Enter number of needles

ES 2006 Chapter 30 Changing Machine Formats 716 ! Stops: converts color change functions to Stop commands. ! Stop & Jump: converts color change functions to Stop and Jump commands. ! Needle No and Jumps: converts color change functions to Needle Number and Jump commands. 3 For needle-addressing machines, enter the number of needles on the machine in the No of Needles field. 4 Select the Use Group Addressing checkbox as required. Some machines can group two heads together so you can stitch a design using needles from both heads. For example, if a machine has two heads and nine needles per head, the machine moves the hoop from the first head under the second head, which allows you to stitch 18 colors without a manual change. Note If this is the case, enter the combined number of needles on the machine in the No of Needles field. 5 Select the First CC required checkbox as required. Some machines require a First CC code to initialize the machine and bring the head back to the first color change needle position. 6 Select the Return to Start checkbox as required. This returns the needle to the start of the design, preparing the machine for the next run of the same design. 7 Click Save then Close.

Setting borer functions

Some embroidery machines are equipped with a borer. The borer often replaces one of the needles. You need to specify the needle position of the borer and its offset value. Borers are often knife attachments where the cutting position is offset 12 mm from the main needle. Before the machine

starts, the frame moves so that the borer is in the correct position. This extra frame movement compensates for the borer offset. Some machines automatically adjust for this offset when a Borer In function is encountered. These machines should have an offset value of 0. Similarly, if you are using a boring needle (instead of a knife), you do not need an offset value. See your embroidery machines manual for details.

To set borer functions

1 Access the Machine Format Values > Standard dialog. See Selecting machine formats for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 717 Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear. 2 In the Boring panel, enter the required borer offset. ! If your machine automatically inserts an offset when a Borer In function is encountered, enter an offset of 0 mm. ! If your machine requires an offset value, enter an offset of 12.0 mm. 3 Enter the needle number to which the borer is attached. 4 Click Save then Close.

Setting end-of-design functions

Some machines require an explicit End of Design function code in order to recognize when the end of the design has been reached. Some machines do not understand the End of Design function code, requiring a Stop code instead. For example, Tajima machines recognize the explicit End of Design function code while Happy machines require a simple Stop. See also Setting the Start of Design / End of Design sequence.

To set end-of-design functions

1 Access the Machine Format Values > Standard dialog. See Selecting machine formats for details. Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear. 2 In the End of Design panel, select the appropriate option for your machine: ! End of Design: some machines require an explicit End of Design function codee.g. some Tajima machines. ! Stop: some machines require a Stop code insteade.g. Happy machines.
Enter borer offset Enter needle number of borer Select relevant option

ES 2006 Chapter 30 Changing Machine Formats 718 3 Click Save then Close.

Adjusting advanced machine format settings

The Advanced tab lets you set additional machine format options. Again, the available settings depend on the selected machine format. You can set the color change sequence, insert special codes for the start or end of a design, and enter speed settings. There are also miscellaneous settings, including whether to change the fabric tension during boring, and whether to rewind tape when stitching is complete. Use the Machine Format Values dialog to define values to allow when outputting to a specific machine format. Note Not all values described here are available for all machine formats. Use these instructions to enter values that apply to your selected format. See your embroidery machine manual for more information about machine formats. Warning Only change Advanced values if you are familiar with the codes used by your embroidery machine.

Setting the color change sequence

Some machines cannot interpret Color Change commands unless they

form part of a color change sequence made up of empty stitches and empty jumps before and after each Color Change command. Check the requirements of your machine to determine whether you need to enter color change sequence values. In the Advanced tab, the Color Change Sequence panel reads from top to bottom, in the order the codes appear in the sequence. The first two fields show the number of Empty Stitches and Empty Jumps to insert before the Color Change command. The other ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 719 fields show the Empty Jumps and Empty Stitches to insert after the command.

To set the color change sequence

1 Access the Machine Format Values > Advanced dialog. See Selecting machine formats for details. Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear. 2 In the Color Change Sequence panel, enter the color change sequence. ! In the first 0:0 field, enter the number of empty stitches to insert before the Color Change. ! In the first 0:0 Jump field, enter the number of empty jumps to insert before the Color Change. ! In the second 0:0 Jump field, enter the number of empty jumps to insert after the Color Change. ! In the second 0:0 field, enter the number of empty stitches to insert after the Color Change. 3 Click Save then Close.
Color Change Sequence in Stitch List matches sequence defined in Machine Format Values Advanced tab Enter number of Empty Stitches and Jumps to insert before Color Change Enter number of Empty Jumps and Stitches to insert after Color Change

ES 2006 Chapter 30 Changing Machine Formats 720

Setting the Start of Design / End of Design sequence

In addition to any End of Design function, some machines require extra more empty stitches and empty jumps in order to stitch the start and end of a design. Other machines require a Stop function. Depending on the machine type, you may also require commands to initialize the machine or trigger the frame-out command after stitching. Note Remember that these fields show the number of extra codes you want to insert in addition to the default settings.

To set the Start of Design/End of Design sequence

1 Access the Machine Format Values > Advanced dialog. See Selecting machine formats for details. Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear. 2 In the Start of Design panel, enter the start of design sequence. ! In the 0,0 Jump field, enter the number of empty jumps to insert at the start of the design. ! In the 0,0 field, enter the number of empty stitches to insert at the start of the design. 3 In the End of Design panel, enter the end of design sequence. ! In the 0,0 field, enter the number of empty stitches to insert at the end of the design. ! In the 0,0 Jump field, enter the number of empty jumps to insert at the end of the design. 4 Select the Set Needle Number checkbox as required.
Enter number of Empty Stitches and Jumps to insert at end of design

Enter number of Empty Jumps and Stitches to insert at start of design

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 721 Where available, this option initializes the machine and brings the head back to the first color change needle position. 5 Select the Frame Out checkbox as required. Where available, this option triggers the frame to exit after stitching the design. 6 Click Save then Close.

Setting speed options

Some machines can stitch at different speeds. Depending on your machine, you may then be able to select different speeds to use when you start stitching or for when the borer is engaged. You need to first assign the speeds as Speed 1 and Speed 2 in the Machine Format Values dialog.

To set speed options

1 Access the Machine Format Values > Advanced dialog. See Selecting machine formats for details. Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear. 2 In the Speed panel, select the Boring Auto Speed Changes checkbox as required. This option slows the machine automatically whenever the borer is engaged.
Select to initialize machine and bring head back to first needle position Select to trigger frame to exit after stitch out Select and adjust speed options

ES 2006 Chapter 30 Changing Machine Formats 722 3 From the Start list, select the preferred starting speedFast or Slow. 4 From the Fast list, select the faster setting on your machineSpeed 1 or Speed 2. Check your machine manual for details. 5 Click Save then Close.

Setting miscellaneous advanced options

Depending on the selected machine format, you may also be able to select whether to reduce the tension on the fabric while boring, and indicate whether to rewind the tape when stitching is complete.

To set miscellaneous advanced options

1 Access the Machine Format Values > Advanced dialog. See Selecting machine formats for details. Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear. 2 Select the Tension Control for Boring checkbox as required. This option reduces the fabric tension when the borer is engaged. 3 Select the Stop before rewind at end checkbox as required. This option stops the machine at the end of the design and rewinds the tape. 4 Select the Rewind with jump at end checkbox as required. This option inserts a jump at the end of the design and rewinds the tape. 5 Click Save then Close.

Creating custom formats

ES Designer provides standard formats for most machines. However, if your machine is different, you may need to customize the machine format settings. For example, if you have different models of the same type of embroidery machine, different functions may require different values. There are two ways to customize machine formats:
Set miscellaneous speed options

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 723 ! Create a new format, based on the original, and make it available to all designs. See Creating custom machine formats for details. ! Modify the format for a specific design, creating a custom format to use only with that design. See Customizing machine formats for specific designs for details. Note If necessary, you can update the standard machine format itself. However, you should only do this if the original values are no longer used. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details.

Creating custom machine formats

To create a custom machine format

You can create a new machine format based on a standard machine format, and make it available to all designs. 1 Select a machine format on which to base the new format. See Selecting machine formats for details. 2 Click Create. The Machine Format Values > Standard dialog opens. 3 In the Format Name field, enter a name for the new format. The name of the format you based it on and a number appear as the defaulte.g. Melco - 1. 4 In the Comment field, enter any information that will help you identify the machine formate.g. No Trim. 5 Adjust the machine format settings as required. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details. Use Select Machine Format (Machine menu) to change machine format settings.
Enter format name Adjust settings

ES 2006 Chapter 30 Changing Machine Formats 724 6 Click the Advanced tab and adjust the settings as required. See Adjusting advanced machine format settings for details. 7 Click Save then Close. The new format appears in the Available Machine Formats list.

Customizing machine formats for specific designs

You can create a custom machine format for use with the current design. Use this feature if you need to modify machine format values for a design without changing the original format. The custom format appears in the selection list. Note The custom format is based on the selected machine format for the design. If you want to base it on a different machine format, select it from the Select Machine Format dialog. See Selecting machine formats for details.

To customize machine format for a specific design

1 Select Machine > Machine Format Values. The Machine Format Values > Standard dialog opens. 2 Adjust the machine format settings as required. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details. 3 Click the Advanced tab and adjust the settings as required. See Adjusting advanced machine format settings for details. Note You cannot change the Name or Comment fields. The custom machine format is automatically named using the original machine format and design namee.g. Melco - Design1. Use Machine Format Values (Machine menu) to customize machine formats for specific designs.
Adjust settings

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 725 4 Click OK. A new machine format is created for the design. It appears in the Select Machine Format dialog and is saved with the design.

Removing custom machine formats

To remove custom machine formats

You can remove custom machine formats from your system when they are no longer required. 1 Access the Select Machine Format dialog and select a machine format to remove. See Selecting machine formats for details. Note You cannot remove machine formats that come with the software. You can only remove a custom format which you created. 2 Click Remove. A confirmation box appears. 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion, then click OK.

Checking control commands

If you change the machine format of a design that contains manual machine functions, you may need to check whether the functions are compatible with the new format. Generally, functions that cannot be performed by the new machine type are simply ignored. If an ignored function was inserted on an empty stitch or empty jump, the stitch or jump is automatically removed. Sometimes, however, functions may not be correctly translated. For example, trim commands may be misinterpreted, as some machines use trim codes, and others a sequence of jumps. Note If a function is not available in the new machine format, the word Ignored appears in brackets after the function name.

To check control commands

! Travel to the position of the machine function. See Traveling by machine

function for details. ! Alternatively, use the Stitch List to identify and select a given machine function. See Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List for details. ES 2006 Chapter 30 Changing Machine Formats 726 The machine function name appears in the Prompt line. Extra information may appear in brackets after the function namee.g. needle number.

Support for the Barudan FDR-II machine

The ES 2006 release provides support for the new Barudan FDR-II machine format which is a backward-compatible extension of the older FDR format. The FDR-II format supports all machine types that Barudan produce but is associated with the control panel rather than a particular machine. Currently the BED* machine series uses the new DR controller which supports the FDR-II format. The new FDR-II format is required by Lockstitch machines with sequin attachments, Chenille with programmable needle height, and Chenille-combination machines. Older machines interpret the additional information in FDR-II format as Stop codes. In ES Designer, the new Barudan FDR-II Chenille Combination machine formatavailable with the Chenille Optionsupports Lockstitch, Chenille, and Sequin stitching in the one design. It switches from Lockstitch to Chenille whenever it encounters a Chain or Moss command, and from Chenille back to Lockstitch whenever it encounters a Lockstitch Needle command. The new format can combine up to 15 Lockstitch needles and 6 Chenille loopers.

Two new machine formats

Two new Barudan FDR-II machine formats are now availableLockstitch and Chenille Combination. Lockstitch format is available in all product levels while Chenille Combination is only available with the Chenille cost-option. See also Selecting machine formats.
BEDRH modelFDR-II format is also supported by BEDSH and BEDYH machines

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 727

Barudan FDR-II Lockstitch machine

The Barudan FDR-II Lockstitch machine uses a modified Machine Format Values dialog. FDR-II combines and extends the capabilities of the existing two Barudan Lockstitch machines. The Barudan FDR-II supports up to 15 needles. You still need to set the number of needles to match that of the actual machine which may have 8, 9, 12 or 15 needles. The Barudan Z series machines also support up to 15 needles but only the FDR-II supports Sequin encoding. See also Adjusting standard machine format settings. Note Barudan FDR-II cannot be saved to T03 or DSB stitch file formats without loss of Sequin encoding.
Two new Barudan FDR-II formats available

ES 2006 Chapter 30 Changing Machine Formats 728

Barudan FDR-II Chenille Combination machine

Barudan FDR-II Chenille Combination is implemented as a unique combination of Lockstitch, Chenille, and needle addressing, meaning that you can combine Lockstitch and Chenille stitches within the same design. This format is now provided as part of the Chenille cost-option. ES 2006 allows you to select any needle or looper. To do so, we have introduced the concept of the Chenille Colors machine format value. This
Barudan FDR-II supports up to 15 needles

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 729 value notionally divides the palette into Lockstitch and Chenille colorse.g. a value of 6 means that the first six colors in the palette are reserved Chenille Colors, while Color Slot #7 and above are reserved for Lockstitch. Therefore, picking Color Slot #7 will change to Lockstitch.

Encoding of Chenille functions

The Barudan FDR-II machine can encode multiple Chenille states on a single stitch: ! Stitch Mode (Lockstitch/Chain/Moss) ! Needle Height (H00...H10) ! Looper Number (Chenille Color 1...6)
First six color slots reserved for Chenille Barudan FDR-II supports up to 15 Lockstitch needles and 6 Chenille loopers

ES 2006 Chapter 30 Changing Machine Formats 730 Thus, a Chain, a Looper, and a Needle Height function can all co-exist on the same empty stitch. The stitch list display has been updated specifically for the new Barudan FDR-II machines (old machines are unaffected). Logical functions display as follows: ! Color Change: (Palette #1) ... (Palette #100) ! Needle Height: (H00) ... (H10) Physical functions display as follows: ! Needle: (Needle #C01) ... (Needle #C15) ! Looper: (Looper #1) ... (Looper #6) ! Chain: (CC) ! Moss: (CL)

Adjustable starting Needle Height setting

You can now set the starting needle height via the Advanced tab of the Machine Format Values dialog for the Barudan FDR-II Chenille Combination machine format. The default value is H06. The Chenille needle height should vary with the thread typethickness, material, etcand sometimes type of stitchingChain or Mosstogether with stitch length. The starting needle height is simply the height the system assumes the machine to be set to at the start of the design. You should only change the

software setting if you know the machine to be set to a different starting height.
Three Chenille states encoded on single stitch

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 731

Stitching out existing designs on the FDR-II machine

If you want to stitch out an existing Lockstitch or Chenille design on a Barudan FDR-II Chenille Combo machine, you must ensure that all Lockstitch colors are higher than the allocated Chenille colors. Heres how you do it: ! Open the Color-Object List and collapse all the colors. ! For each color block, ensure the color number for Lockstitch objects is higher than the allocated number of Chenille Colorse.g. greater than 6. At the same time, ensure that Chenille objects use a color slot equal
Change software setting if you know the machine is set to a different default starting height Ensure that Chenille objects use a color slot equal to or less than allocated number of Chenille Colors

ES 2006 Chapter 30 Changing Machine Formats 732 to or less than the allocated number of Chenille Colors. If not, change colors. It doesnt matter what the actual color is. The palette can be adjusted at any time. In the example here, the red ES object is allocated Color Slot #2 while the red Wilcom object is allocated Color Slot #9. The first is a Chenille object, the second a Lockstitch object. Warning Conversely, if you want to change from the Barudan FDR-II format to a pure Chenille or pure Lockstitch machine, you have to divide the Lockstitch and Chenille portions of the design (cut and paste). Changing from the Barudan FDR-II to another needle-based machine will change all the lockstitch needlese.g. Needle 1 in a default Barudan FDR-II machine will become Needle 7 in a regular Barudan machine because it uses Color Slot #7.

Sequin encoding

The new Sequin Jump function is a variation of Sequin Off. Sequin Jump turns off the sequin device, but unlike a full Sequin Off does not raise the sequin head. This allows the machine to quickly and efficiently make jumps, then turn Sequin On again to continue dropping sequins. Sequin Jump functions are inserted automatically if a connector occurs between two sequin objects of the same color has jumps. Sequin Off functions are inserted if a connector occurs between: ! a sequin and a non-sequin object ! two sequin objects of different color ! two sequin objects of different sequin type. A new Sequin Off Mode dialog is invoked whenever you insert or edit a Sequin Off function and click OK. The dialog prompts you to force the
Sequin Jump turns off sequin device without raising sequin head

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 733 sequin head to be raised or stay down as required. See also Editing machine functions.

Sequin device addressing

You must ensure that the correct needle is used for sequin digitizing. A sequin device is attached to a needle, typically Needle #1 (left side) or the rightmost needle (8, 9, 12, or 15) of the Lockstitch head. You must manually select the needlei.e. by picking the correct needle slot for the sequin

device when digitizing sequin objects. Warning If the wrong needle is selected and the FDR-II machine receives a Sequin On command, the sequin device will not be turned on.
Change Sequin Off mode

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 734

Chapter 31

Outputting Designs
You can output embroidery designs in a variety of wayspunching to paper tape, sending appliqu shapes to a cutter, saving designs to specific machine formats and/or to embroidery disk, or sending directly to machine for stitching. Note Wilcom ES provides alternative means for sending designs directly to embroidery machine for stitching. Depending on your software options, you can send the design to a machine using either Stitch Manager or ES Machine Manager. Stitch Manager is described in this section. ES Machine Manager is described in a separate ES Machine Manager Supplement. From the same design file, you can also output a production worksheet for the embroidery machine operator. Designers frequently want to distribute their designs for viewing in real colors, in TrueView or otherwise, with or without fabric backgrounds. In ES Designer you can save both design images and production worksheets to disk or email them direct. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 735 This section describes how to create production worksheets. It explains how to send designs as email attachments, as well as how to output designs as images. Cutting appliqu shapes is also covered, as well as stitching designs with Stitch Manager. Note For details of reading from and writing to embroidery disk and paper tape, see Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes.

Creating production worksheets

The production worksheet is the link between the designer and the embroidery machine operator. It contains a design preview as well as essential production information, including the design size, the color sequence and any special instructions. You can customize production worksheets before printing. You can also print multiple colorways, icons of color blocks, and backgrounds. Note If certain thread colors are not available on your printer, they may be mapped to a different color, including white. If a color is mapped to white, it will be invisible on the worksheet. Print the design in TrueView color, or black and white, or turn off color mapping. See your printer manual for more information.

Printing or plotting production worksheets

Create a hard copy of the production worksheet using a printer or plotter. Set worksheet and printer options before you print, or use the current options. Tip Preview the production worksheet before you print to check whether it is correct. See Previewing production worksheets for details.

To print or plot a production worksheet

1 Select File > Print. Use Print (Standard toolbar) to print production worksheets for the current design using the current settings. ES 2006 Chapter 31 Outputting Designs 736 The Print dialog opens. 2 Select the printer or plotter you want to use, and enter the number of copies of the worksheet you require. Note To customize the worksheet, click Options, and change the

settings as required. See Setting production worksheet print options for details. 3 If you are using a plotter, click Properties, and set the pen colors to correspond with the thread colors in the design. Refer to your plotters manual for information on setting up pen colors. 4 Click OK.

Setting production worksheet print options

Set production worksheet options to show the information you want in the format you require. You can specify the data to print, graphics to include, zoom factor, and general options such as company name. You can use a color printer or a plotter to produce production worksheets. If you are using a color printer, you can print in TrueView.

To set worksheet print options

Click to preview worksheet Click to customize worksheet

1 To access the Print Options dialog, either select File > Print or File > Print Preview.

Use Print (File menu) to access production worksheet print options. Use Print Preview (File menu) to access production worksheet print options. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 737 2 Click Options. The Print Options dialog opens. 3 Select the option to print a production worksheet or appliqu patterns. When the appliqu patterns is selected all other options are grayed out. See Printing appliqu patterns for details. 4 In the Information to Print panel, select the information type to include. ! Full information: shows details specified in the Customize Worksheet dialog. See Customizing production worksheet information for details. ! Short information: shows summary information about the design. This and the previous options include information provided in the Summary tab of the Design Properties dialog. See Viewing design information in ES Designer for details. ! Stop sequence: lists all stops in the design together with the stitch number at which they occur, color number, and thread color name and brand. See also Printing multiple colorways. ! None: shows the design preview only. ! Current Colorway: prints the design in the current colorway only. ! Selected Colorways: prints multiple colorways. See Printing multiple colorways for details. 5 In the Zoom panel, set the zoom factor for the design preview. This controls the size of the preview on the worksheet.
Set zoom factor for design preview Select other general options Select information type to include Select graphical features to include Select worksheet or appliqu

ES 2006 Chapter 31 Outputting Designs 738 ! 1.0: shows the design at its actual size. ! Show All: scales the design to fill the available space on the

worksheet. ! Custom: lets you set a specific zoom factor. 6 In the Graphics panel, select the graphical features to include. If you select TrueView, the Draft Quality checkbox becomes available. Select this checkbox for quicker printing at lower resolution. Tip Click Standard to reset the printing options to the original values. 7 Click Display Repeats to set display options for Schiffli repeats. This is only available with the Schiffli Option. See the Schiffli Option Supplement for details. 8 In the General panel, select the other options you require. ! Print in English: deselecting this checkbox prints worksheets in the same language as the Windows operating system. This feature is useful when printing to plotters where the device driver does not support the character set you require. ! Extents Box Around Design: places an outline around the design. ! Company Name: prints a specified company name on the worksheet. Select a company name from the list, or enter a new one. ! Color Film: prints color blocks in the design as they appear in the Color List. Consecutive objects of the same color form a single color block. See Printing color film for details. 9 Click OK. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 739

Customizing production worksheet information

To customize production worksheet information

You can fine-tune production worksheet information when Full Information is the selected text option. 1 To access the Print Options dialog, either select File > Print or File > Print Preview. 2 Click Options. The Print Options dialog opens. 3 In the Information to Print panel, select the Full Information checkbox. 4 Click Customize. The Customize dialog opens. 5 In the Blocks to Print panel, select the design statistics to include on the worksheet. ! Left/Right/Up/Down: the margins between the edges of the design and the edges of the design area. ! End X/Y: the coordinates of the last stitch. ! Max/Min Stitch: the maximum and minimum stitch lengths in the design. ! Thread Chart Type: the thread chart name used in the design. ! Thread Usage: thread usage statistics by color. ! Total Bobbin: total bobbin thread length. 6 In the Columns in Stop Sequence panel, select the statistics for each color block. Use Print (File menu) to access production worksheet print options. Use Print Preview (File menu) to access production worksheet print options. ES 2006 Chapter 31 Outputting Designs 740 ! Stitch Count: number of stitches per color. ! Needle Number: the needle number stitching each color block. ! Brand: name of the color (may vary from name of thread chart). ! Element Name: user-defined name to identify each color block. See Naming design elements via Design Properties for details. ! Show Colors in Summary: includes actual color samples in the colorways summary table/s. See also Printing multiple colorways. 7 Select the Use Left Side checkbox to print on the left side. By default, text prints on the right of the page.

8 Click OK.

Printing multiple colorways

You can print your design in the current or multiple colorways. See also Working with colorways.

To print multiple colorways

1 To access the Print Options dialog, either select File > Print or File > Print Preview. 2 Click Options. The Print Options dialog opens. 3 Select Selected Colorways to print multiple colorways. Tip Select Current Colorway to print the design in the current colorway only. 4 Click Colorways. Use Print (File menu) to print designs in multiple colorways. Use Print Preview (File menu) to print designs in multiple colorways.
Select Current Colorway or Selected Colorways

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 741 The Colorway Options dialog opens. 5 Select Selected Colorways and then select one or more colorways from the list. ! To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you select. ! To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you select. Alternatively, select All Colorways to print out all the colorways in the design. Each colorway is printed on a separate sheet. 6 Click OK to return to the Print Options dialog. 7 In the Graphics panel, select Background if you want to include the background color or fabric with the colorway. Tip Select Crop to Design to crop the space around the design. 8 Click OK.
Select one or more colorways from the list Select Background to include on worksheet

ES 2006 Chapter 31 Outputting Designs 742 9 Click OK in the Print dialog or Print Now in the Print Preview dialog. A colorway summary sheet is also printed. To print colors in the colorway summary table/s, make sure the Show Colors in Summary is selected in the Customize Worksheet dialog. See Customizing production worksheet information for details.

Printing color film

The Color Film option lets you print color blocks in the design as they appear in the Color-Object List. Consecutive objects of the same color form a single color block. See also Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List.

To print color film

1 To access the Print Options dialog, either select File > Print or File > Print Preview. 2 Click Options. The Print Options dialog opens. Use Print (File menu) to print separate color films of the design for selected colorways. Use Print Preview (File menu) to print separate color films of the design for selected colorways.
Select Color Film

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 743

3 Select the Color Film checkbox. 4 Click OK. 5 Click OK in the Print dialog or Print Now in the Print Preview dialog. A separate color film prints for selected colorways. See also Printing multiple colorways.

Printing appliqu patterns

Print a copy of appliqu patterns to use in cutting out fabric pieces. Each appliqu pattern piece is numbered according to the stitching sequence. One copy of the placement outlines is printed to show how their positions relate to each other. This copy is printed to fit one page. A second copy of the placement outlines is printed at 100% scaling, with each outline separated for use in cutting the fabric. Note Automatically create all the stitching you need for appliqu using the Auto Appliqu input method. See Digitizing for appliqu for details. Use Print Preview (File menu) to print appliqu patterns. ES 2006 Chapter 31 Outputting Designs 744

To print an appliqu pattern

1 Select File > Print Preview. 2 Click Options icon. Print Options dialog opens. 3 Select the Appliqu Patterns option. Each appliqu pattern piece is numbered according to the stitching sequence.
Select Appliqu Patterns

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 745 4 Click OK. 5 Click Print Now.

Sending designs as email attachments

You can attach designs to emails from the design window or via the Open dialog.

To send designs as email attachments

1 Do one of the following: ! With the design open in the design window, select File > Send, or Use Send (File menu) to send a design as an email attachment. Use Open (Standard toolbar) to send a design as an email attachment. ES 2006 Chapter 31 Outputting Designs 746 ! Click the Open icon to display the Open dialog. Select the file to send, then right-click it. The popup menu appears. Select Send To > Mail Recipient. The email application for your system is launched, and a new email is created with the design file attached. 2 Enter mailing details and send.

Outputting designs as images

Once a design is digitized in ES Designer, you can output object outlines as a vector file. This can then be downloaded to a laser cutter through a program such as CorelDRAW. This can serve various purposes such as appliqu cutting, multimedia, screen printing, and so on. Designers frequently want to distribute their designs for viewing in real colors, in TrueView or otherwise, with or without fabric backgrounds. This might be for stock design sales purposes, for approval of digitized designs, or for presentation on the web or in catalogs. ES Designer lets you save both design images and production worksheets to disk or email them direct.

Saving designs as vector images

You can copy embroidery outlines directly to the Windows clipboard. Using the Microsoft Clipboard Viewer, you can then save them to CLP format. This file can then be opened in a program such as CorelDRAW.

Note You may need to install Microsoft Clipboard Viewer from your Windows operating system installation CD.
Select Send To > Mail Recipient

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 747

To save designs as vector images

1 Select the object/s whose outlines you want to copy. 2 Press Ctrl+C to copy them to the clipboard. 3 Open Microsoft Clipboard Viewer. The copied outlines appear in the Clipboard Viewer window. 4 Save the outlines as CLP file format. This file can now be opened in a program such as CorelDRAW.

Capturing designs as bitmap images

You can save design images to disk or email them direct. This might be for stock design sales purposes, for approval of digitized designs, or for presentation on the web or in catalogs. The image can be captured as a
Save outlines as CLP format

Use Capture Design Bitmap (File menu) to save a design as a bitmap image. ES 2006 Chapter 31 Outputting Designs 748 bitmap with or without background color or fabric. It can be captured in TrueView or otherwise, and can include connectors, outlines and any other display options provided in ES Designer.

To capture a design as a bitmap image

1 Open the embroidery design. 2 Select File > Capture Design Bitmap. The Capture Design Bitmap dialog opens. 3 Select a Selection option: ! Whole Design (1:1): captures the screen image in a ratio of 1:1. ! Current Design Window: captures the screen image at the currently selected zoom factor. ! Custom: lets you specify a capture area. After clicking OK, you are prompted to enter a rectangle origin and rectangle corner to define the area to capture. 4 Select an Output option: ! Save to Disk: lets you save the screen capture to disk. After clicking OK, the Save Capture Screen dialog opens, allowing you to select a location, name and format for the captured design image.
Select Output option Select Output format Select image selection option Select to include background color or fabric Click to enter rectangle origin Click to enter rectangle corner

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 749 ! Send via Email: lets you send the screen capture as email. After clicking OK, a new email message opens with the image attached. ! Both Save and Send: lets you both save to hard disk and send as an email attachment. 5 Select an output format for the screen image from the dropdown listBMP, JPG, etc. 6 Select Include Background/Fabric to include the background color or fabric with the screen capture. 7 Click OK.

Cutting appliqu shapes

Use the Cut Appliqu feature to send appliqu shapes from a design file to a laser cutter. ES Designer extracts outlines from the design and sends them to the cutter. Only closed outlines are extracted. You can also send drawing objects directly to the cutter using this feature. ES Designer also lets you output object outlines as a vector file. This can then be downloaded to a laser cutter through a program such as CorelDRAW. See To save designs as vector images for details. Note Before you send appliqu shapes to a cutter, make sure it is set up on your system with the correct Windows (printer) driver. Some cutterse.g. Iolineuse a standard driver for HP-7475 plotters. Once the driver is installed in Windows, there is no need for a separate hardware setup in ES Designer.
Image captured as Whole Design (1:1)

Use Cut Appliqu (File menu) to send appliqu shapes from a design file to a laser cutter. ES 2006 Chapter 31 Outputting Designs 750

To output appliqu shapes

1 Create your appliqu object and duplicate it. See Creating appliqu objects for details. 2 Select the duplicated object and click the Complex Fill icon. 3 Enter stitch angles or press Enter to accept the default. This creates a Complex Fill object. 4 Select and ungroup the Complex Fill object. This converts the embroidery object into a drawing object. 5 Repeat these steps for all applique objects in the design. 6 Select all the drawing objects and cut them to the clipboard. 7 Start a new design and paste them into it. Tip If you need more than one copy of the appliqu shape, create multiple copies of the shape, and arrange them so you get the most efficient use from the appliqu fabric. 8 Select File > Cut Appliqu. The Print dialog opens. 9 From the Name list, select the appliqu cutter. 10 Click OK. Tip If you intend to reuse the design, save the appliqu shapes file under a similar name.

Saving designs for machine

Appliqu object Converted to Complex Fill object Converted to drawing object

Different embroidery machines understand different languages. Each has its own control commands for the various machine functions. Before you can stitch a design, it must be in a format which can be interpreted by the

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 751 machine. Stitch or expanded designs are low-level formats for direct use by embroidery machines. They contain only stitch coordinates and machine functions. They are generally created on the fly when sending designs to machine. They can also be output to embroidery disk or paper tape. See Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes for details. See also Supported File and Machine Formats and Disk Types.

Saving designs in Melco CND format

You can save files to Melco CND format from ES Designer. Designs originally created in ES Designer generally give the best results. Other file types may not have all the data necessary for successful conversion. Some stitch quality features, stitch types, and decorative fills and effects do not convert

well to CND format. If you intend to save a file in CND format, you should only use input methods, stitch types and effects that are compatible with Melco EDS-III software. Note For details of how each CND stitch type is converted, see Conversion of Melco CND format to Wilcom EMB. ES Designer has two save as CND output optionsSuperstar Compatible and Output Tatami as Complex Fill. Superstar-compatible machines do not have trimmers. The Output Tatami as Complex Fill option is for controlling Turning Tatami fills.

Trim functions

If you want to stitch a design to a machine without trimmers, then set machine values to not output Trim codes. Then digitize the design for manual trimming. Early versions of CND do not support Melco Trim codes. In this case, set the machine format values to output Trims as Jumps. See also Adjusting standard machine format settings and Adding connectors manually.

Turning Tatami fills

When you save to CND format, you need to specify how to convert turning Tatami stitches. Objects with curving Tatami stitchese.g. Input A objectsare not supported by early versions of CND format. For Superstar-compatible machines, turning Tatami stitches are simply converted to Walk stitches, the EDS equivalent of Manual. For earlier machines, Turning Tatami fills need to be converted to normal Tatamii.e. with a single stitch anglethen to Normal Fill, the EDS equivalent of normal Tatami. ES 2006 Chapter 31 Outputting Designs 752

To save designs in Melco CND format

1 Select File > Save As. The Save As dialog opens. 2 Select Melco (CND) from the Files of Type list. 3 In the File name field, enter a name for the design. 4 Click Options. The Save Options dialog opens. 5 Select the required option for converting Turning Tatami fills. ! Superstar Compatible: converts Turning Tatami to Walk (EDS equivalent of Manual). Complex Fill Tatami is output as Normal Fill (EDS equivalent of Tatami). ! Output Tatami as Complex Fill: converts Turning Tatami fills to normal Tatamii.e. with a single stitch anglethen to EDS Normal Fill. Note These functions are also available when you send a CND design for stitching. 6 Click OK. 7 Click Save.

Saving designs in CSD format

The CSD Save Option allows you to select between CSD Type I and Type II. Type II was introduced in CS 1.2B software for the POEM machine. It is also used by the Singer EU software for the POEM machine. Type II CSD files additonally store the thread color RGB values and also an icon of the design. See also Opening stitch files in ES Designer.

To save designs in CSD format

1 Select File > Save As. The Save As dialog opens. 2 Select CSD from the Files of Type list.
Select required option

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 753 3 In the File name field, enter a name for the design.

4 Click Options. The Save Options dialog opens. 5 Select the required CSD file type option. 6 Click OK and then Save.

Saving designs in ZSK-TC format

When encoding to ZSK-TC, the system writes the sequin attachment number. Attachment numbers are assigned to each palette entry through a table listing in the Save Options dialog. When a ZSK-TC format design is opened, ES Designer reads and interprets the sequin attachment number. No other format currently supports attachment numbers. Any set sequin sizes will be used to set the size values in the Sequin Palette. If the sizes are the same and the sequin description does not contain a color, then the #1 attachment sequin type will have blue (0, 0, 255) color and the #2 attachment will have red (255, 0, 0) color. See also Opening stitch files in ES Designer.

To save designs in ZSK-TC format

1 Select File > Save As.
Select CSD file type option

ES 2006 Chapter 31 Outputting Designs 754 The Save As dialog opens. 2 Select ZSK TC (*.Z??) from the Files of Type list. 3 In the File name field, enter a name for the design. 4 Click Options. The Save Options dialog opens. When saving as ZSK-TC, attachment numbers are assigned to each palette entry through a table listing. 5 Set the sequin attachment numbers to #1 or #2 as required by your machine. By default, attachment numbers are set to the ZSK default #1 (right-hand attachment) but these are editable. 6 Click OK and then Save.
Click to access options Select image selection option

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 755

Stitching designs with Stitch Manager

You can send designs directly to connected embroidery machines for stitching with Stitch Manager. When you send several designs in a row, they are automatically queued and stitched out one at a time. See also Setting up embroidery machines. Note You can also use ES Machine Manager to send designs to machine from within ES Designer, ES Design Explorer or Design Workflow. ES Machine Manager lets you view and manage job queues. See the ES Machine Manager Supplement for details.

To stitch designs with Stitch Manager

1 Open the design. 2 Click the Stitch to Stitch Manager icon. The Stitch to Stitch Manager dialog opens. 3 From the Machine Identification list, select an embroidery machine. Click Setup to modify the machines settings as required. See Setting up

embroidery machines for Stitch Manager for details. 4 From the Output as Machine format list, select the correct machine format. Click Values to modify the machine format settings as required. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details. Note This field is automatically updated if the target machine format is different to the current format. Select the Prompt Changing Machine Format checkbox if you want to be prompted when the Output as Machine Format field updates. Use Stitch to Stitch Manager (Standard toolbar) to send a design to a machine for stitching.
Select embroidery machine Select machine format

ES 2006 Chapter 31 Outputting Designs 756 5 If the design includes a Team Names object, click Options and specify stitching details. See Outputting team name designs for details. 6 Click OK to return to the Stitch to Stitch Manager dialog. 7 Click OK. The Stitch Manager dialog opens listing the files to be stitched out. Tip To delete a design from the queue, select it and click Cancel. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 757

Chapter 32

Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes

Embroidery disks are specially formatted floppy disks used to transfer designs from computer to embroidery machine. You can format embroidery disks and save designs to them from within ES Designer. The format you use will depend on the selected embroidery machine. You can also open designs from embroidery disk directly into ES Designer. Paper tape is the traditional medium for storing designs in stitch data format. You can read paper tape designs of various formats into ES Designer. Once a design is read, you can output it without change, modify it and output it in its original format, or save it as an EMB file. You can also punch designs to paper tape from ES Designer. This section describes how to read from and write embroidery design files to embroidery disk and paper tape. ES 2006 Chapter 32 Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes 758

Storing designs on embroidery disk

Embroidery disks are specially formatted floppy disks used to store designs. They are primarily used to transfer designs from computer to embroidery machine. Designs are generally stored in stitch data format, although Melco CND, for example, is a condensed file format. You can open designs from embroidery disks of various formats directly into ES Designer. Once it is read, you can output it without change, modify it and output it in its original format, or save it as an EMB file. You can optionally convert it into objects. After conversion, the design can be scaled and changed. See Opening stitch files in ES Designer for details. Tip You can save to embroidery disk in any machine format without changing the format of the original design.

Embroidery floppy disks

Most embroidery machines are equipped with the same floppy disk drives as those used in PCs. So that you can transfer your designs, make sure your PC floppy disk drive can read, write and format floppy disks that your

embroidery machine uses. For example, if your machine requires a Double Density (DD) disk, you must use this format even if your computer has a High Density (HD) floppy disk drive.

Floppy disk types

Different floppy disks store different amounts of data:

Disk drives and floppy disks

Different floppy disk drives read and write floppy disks of different capacity: Capacity Density Code 360 Kb Single-Sided Single-Density SS/SD 720 Kb Double-Sided Double-Density DS/DD 1.44 Mb Double-Sided High-Density DS/HD 2.88 Mb also called Double-Sided High-Density DS/HD Computer Disk Drive 360 Kb 720 Kb 1.44 Mb 2.88 Mb Single Density ! ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 759 Currently most computer models have one 3.5" floppy disk drive. The capacity of a floppy disk drive depends on its controller. Most computers have a High Density 1.44 Mb drive which can read both Double Density 720 Kb and High Density 1.44 Mb floppy disks. Most embroidery machines use Double Density or High Density disks so there is usually no problem transferring designs. See also Supported embroidery disk formats.

Controller cards for Melco embroidery disks

Old floppy disk drives were designed to format, read and write 3.5" Double Sided Single Density (DS/SD) disks which could store 360 Kb of information. This is the format that Melco uses. Only a few floppy disk controllers support single density floppy disks. If you want to format and use Melco 3.5" disks, you need to disable the onboard floppy disk controller through the PC BIOS and install a floppy disk controller card which supports IMB 3740 single density format (FM). The following floppy disk controller cards have been tested and proved suitable for Melco embroidery disks. Currently there are no floppy disk controller cards available for laptop computers which are suitable for formatting, reading and writing Melco embroidery disks. If you want to stitch designs on Melco Star or Superstar machines but your disk drive cannot produce a Melco format disk, you can connect from Double Density ! High Density (1.44) ! ! High Density (2.88) ! ! ! Can only be formatted with correct controller installed. Computer Disk Drive 360 Kb 720 Kb 1.44 Mb 2.88 Mb Floppy Disk Controller Capacity Western Digital WD37C65 single/double density NEC Electronics Inc. PD765A/7265 single/double density Intel 8272A single/double density POWER I/O 5000AT/5100AT (with SMC type chip numbered FDC37C664QF) high density 2.88 Mb (requires DOS 6.0 or later) ES 2006 Chapter 32 Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes 760 ES Designer using a Wilcom DCi unit to send designs directly to machine (Windows 9x only).

Testing embroidery disks

Some newer PC hardware and operating systems do not support some of the older embroidery disk formats. Check that your PC can read, write and format embroidery machine formats using Wilcoms Test Disk utility. If the utility returns errors associated with any embroidery formats, your PC will not support the reading, writing or formatting of these disks. See also Supported embroidery disk formats.

Newer PCs cannot usually handle Melco format. To enable formatting in Melco, a multiple input/output card capable of formatting single density disks is needed. See Controller cards for Melco embroidery disks for details. Note Wilcom Test Disk only works under Windows 98/ME.

To test embroidery disks

1 On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button and select Programs > Wilcom ES > Test Disk. The Test Disk window opens. 2 Select Test Disk > All. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 761 The Disk Format Test Selection dialog opens. 3 In the Floppy Disk Drive panel, select a disk drive from the list. 4 In the Disk Format Type panel, select the embroidery formats to check. 5 Insert a DS/DD disk in the floppy drive. Warning Dont use a floppy disk containing data that you want to keep as the Test Disk utility erases all data contained on it. 6 Click OK. When testing finishes, the Test Results dialog will display. Your PC will not support the reading, writing or formatting of specified diskettes. Tip The MelCheck feature in the Test Disk menu is identical to the Melco feature in the Disk Format Test Selection dialog.

Reading designs from embroidery disk

To read designs from embroidery disk
Select disk drive to test Select embroidery formats to check

You can open designs of other formats from specially formatted embroidery disks. See also Supported embroidery disk formats. 1 Insert the embroidery disk in your computers floppy disk drive.

Use Open As (Standard toolbar) to open a design from an embroidery disk. ES 2006 Chapter 32 Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes 762 2 Click the Open As icon. The Open Embroidery Disk dialog opens. 3 From the Look In list, select the floppy disk drive. 4 Select the disk format. Either: ! Select the format from the Diskette Format list. ! Select the Auto Detect checkbox and let ES Designer automatically determine the format. This generally takes longer. 5 Click OK. The Open From Embroidery Disk dialog opens. 6 From the Designs of Type list, select a design type. Any designs saved on disk are listed in the panel. If no designs are listed, make sure that the correct drive and disk format are selected. Note If the Options button is available, you can set recognition options for the design. See Opening Melco CND outline files, Opening stitch files with object/outline recognition and Opening stitch files without object/outline recognition for details. 7 Click Open.
Select drive Select format Select design type

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 763 Note If you have problems with embroidery disks, see Testing embroidery disks for details.

Formatting embroidery disks

Embroidery disks must be formatted to suit the embroidery machine you

intend to use or the machine will not be able to read the design. Most computers have a High Density 1.44 Mb drive which can read both Double Density 720 Kb and High Density 1.44 Mb floppy disks. Most embroidery machines use Double Density or High Density disks so there is usually no problem with transferring designs. See your embroidery machines manual for details of the appropriate disk type. Warning Use the disk type required by the embroidery machine, not the computer. For example, if a machine requires DD disks, you must use DD disks even though your computer may have an HD drive. If your machine can only read single density disks you may need to install a special floppy disk controller card in your computer. See also Supported embroidery disk formats.

To format embroidery disks

1 Insert a 3.5" floppy disk of the correct density in your computers floppy disk drive. Note Use the disk type required by the embroidery machine, not the computer. See Embroidery floppy disks for details. 2 Select File > Embroidery Disk > Format. The Format Embroidery Disk dialog opens. 3 From the Drive list, select the floppy disk drive. 4 From the Diskette Format list, select the required disk format. 5 Click OK. Use Embroidery Disk > Format (File menu) to format an embroidery disk.
Select drive Select format

ES 2006 Chapter 32 Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes 764 A confirmation message appears. 6 Click OK to confirm. The Format dialog opens. Warning This is a Windows system dialog and may vary with the particular operating system you are using. 7 From the Capacity list, select the disk storage capacity. 8 In the Format Options panel, select the full format option: Quick Format erases all data from the disk but does not reformat it. Untick the option to reformat a blank disk. See your Windows manual for details. 9 Click Start. A progress bar appears. You are prompted when formatting is complete. Note If you have trouble with formatting a Melco embroidery disk, check if your floppy disk drive can read and write single density floppy disks. See Testing embroidery disks for details.

Saving designs to embroidery disk

Save designs to embroidery disk to stitch out on a specific machine. When you save to a new format, the design is converted to encode the machine functions and commands supported by the particular machine.
Select disk format Select format option Enter disk label

Use Save to Embroidery Disk (Standard toolbar) to save a design to an embroidery disk. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 765 Note Embroidery disks must be correctly formatted before you save designs to them. See Formatting embroidery disks for details.

To save designs to embroidery disk

1 Insert the embroidery disk in your computers floppy disk drive. 2 Click the Save to Embroidery Disk icon. The Save to Embroidery Disk dialog opens.

3 From the Look In list, select the floppy disk drive. 4 Select the disk format. Either: ! Select the format from the Diskette Format list. ! Select the Auto Detect checkbox and let ES Designer automatically determine the format. Any designs already saved on disk are listed in the panel. Note If the disk is not formatted, or its format is not correct, click Format. See Formatting embroidery disks for details. 5 In the Design Name field, enter a name for the design. 6 In the Filename field, enter a name for the design file. 7 If the Number field is enabled, enter a file number. Not all machine formats require this information. This option is greyed out if the file naming mechanism is not supported by the particular embroidery disk type. Tajima uses a free-form file name, so both a numbering system and a text file name system are supported, as seen in the dialog.
Select drive Select format Enter file number if required Enter design name Enter file name Click to view or Enter machine modify settings format and design file type

ES 2006 Chapter 32 Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes 766 8 From the Machine Format list, select a machine format. Some machines can read different formats. For example, some Tajima machines can read Barudan as well as Tajima. Tip To view or modify machine format settings, click Values. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details. 9 From the Design Type list, select the file type to save to embroidery disk. Only one file type is generally available. 10 If available, select the Save Icon checkbox to include a thumbnail image of the design with the design file. This icon appears in the machine control panel during stitch-out. 11 Click Save. Warning Wait until the light on the floppy disk drive stops flashing before removing the disk.

Storing designs on paper tape

Paper tape is the traditional medium for storing designs in stitch data format. Now largely replaced by floppy disk, they are still used by older machines. More specifically, stitch data paper tapes are eight-channel paper tapes which, in effect, are hard copies of 8 bit binary data. Paper tapes are normally punched by the designer and read into the embroidery machine at a later time. You can read paper tape designs of various formats into ES Designer. Once a design is read, you can output it without change, modify it and output it in its original format, or save it as an EMB file. You can optionally convert the design into objects. After conversion, the design can be scaled and changed. See Opening stitch files in ES Designer for details. You can also punch designs to paper tape from ES Designer. You can select the output format type and include labels with the design. You can also choose to rewind the tape after punching, or punch in the reverse stitching sequence.

Reading designs from paper tape

Use Paper Tape > Read (File menu) to read a paper tape design. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 767 You can read paper tape designs of various formats into ES Designer. Once

a design is read, you can save it as an EMB file. See also Supported paper tape formats. Tip Create backups of your paper tape designs by reading them into ES Designer, then saving them to hard disk or embroidery disk in the same machine format. This does not change the design in any way.

To read designs from paper tape

1 Make sure the tape reader is connected and configured correctly and that a tape is loaded. See Setting up paper tape readers for details. Warning Do not read the optional label which is at the beginning of the tape as it is not part of the stitch data. 2 Select File > Paper Tape > Read. The Choose Read Tape Type dialog opens. 3 From the Choose input machine list, select the required machine format. Note Make sure you select the correct format as it cannot be detected automatically by ES Designer. 4 Click OK. The Tape Manager dialog opens.
Select machine format Click to access serial port settings Select required reader Select to confirm tape reader setup before reading

ES 2006 Chapter 32 Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes 768 5 Set up the paper tape reader if not already configured. See Setting up paper tape readers for details. 6 Click Read. If the Confirm Setup checkbox is selected, the Read from Tape dialog opens displaying technical details of the reader connection. Click OK to continue.

Punching designs to paper tape

You can punch designs to paper tape from ES Designer. You can select the output format type and include labels with the design. You can also choose to rewind the tape after punching, or punch in the reverse stitching sequence.

To punch designs to paper tape

1 Make sure the tape reader is connected and configured correctly and that a tape is loaded. See Setting up paper tape punches for details. 2 Select File > Paper Tape > Punch. The Choose Write Tape Type dialog opens. 3 From the Choose output machine list, select the required machine format. Note Make sure you select the correct format as it cannot be detected automatically by ES Designer. 4 Click OK. Use Paper Tape > Punch (File menu) to punch a design to a paper tape.
Select machine format

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 769 The Tape Manager dialog opens. 5 Set up the paper tape punch if not already configured. See Setting up paper tape punches for details. 6 Click Punch. If the Confirm Setup checkbox is selected, the Punch to Tape dialog opens displaying technical details of the punch connection. Click OK to

continue.
Click to access serial port settings Select options as required Select required tape punch Select to confirm punch setup before punching

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 770

PART VIII DESIGN MANAGEMENT

ES Design Explorer provides an efficient way for viewing and browsing embroidery designs. With this tool, you can browse design files stored on your computer hard disk, CD-ROM, or floppy disk. It recognizes all design file formats used by ES Designer.

Embroidery Clipart

This section describes how to view, search and sort embroidery clipart. It also explains how to record it and manage keywords. See Embroidery Clipart for details.

ES Design Explorer basics

This section describes how to use ES Design Explorer to access and view designs in folders. It also covers cutting, copying, pasting, and deleting designs in folders. See ES Design Explorer Basics for details.

ES Design Explorer advanced functions

This section describes the more advanced workings of ES Design Explorer from sorting files to stitching, punching, and converting designs. It also describes how to print and publish catalogs of designs, as well as how to archive dormant or unused designs. See ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions for details. ES 2006 Design Management 771 Note ES Design Explorer helps you manage designs in folders. It is not a multi-user database for company-wide design management. Wilcom Design Workflow is a central design storage and management application. Any design format that can be read by ES Designer can be stored in Design Workflow. Design Workflow uses Microsoft SQL technology and is a true multi-user tool, allowing far greater control of designs throughout your company. For this type of requirement, refer to the Design Workflow User Manual. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 772

Chapter 33

Embroidery Clipart
The Embroidery Clipart feature is a powerful productivity tool which makes whole designs and design fragments easily available. This allows you to recycle commonly used design elements and greatly speeds up the process of creating new designs. Use the clipart library to permanently store useful embroidery elements and assign keywords to them. Summary information such as width and height, number of stitches and colors is automatically recorded. The library displays all design elements currently recorded to your personal

database. Behind this functionality is the powerful Microsoft Database Engine or MSDE. Sort and search functionality is provided to filter your list according to name, keywords, number of colors, or number of stitches. Once a suitable design element is located, simply drag-and-drop it as embroidery clipart into the current project. Automatically find the nearest match between selected clipart element colors and the current palette. Note Used in conjunction with Design Workflow, the Embroidery Clipart library allows you to share embroidery elements between multiple users. Available as a cost option, Design Workflow is an embroidery design centralization and management solution for businesses that share embroidery files across a network. It can serve as the repository for your designs and design elements making the task of securing, searching for, and managing your assets much easier. This section describes how to view, search and sort embroidery clipart. It also explains how to record it and manage keywords.

Viewing and selecting embroidery clipart

Click Show Clipart (Clipart toolbar) to open the embroidery clipart. Use Match to Palette (Embroidery Clipart dialog) to find the nearest match between the selected clipart element colors and the color palette. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 773 The Embroidery Clipart library displays all design elements currently recorded to your personal database. You may want to put together a design such as a wreath with components such as ribbons, leaves, fruit and flowers. With the Clipart Library this becomes a simple task.

To view and select embroidery clipart

1 Click the Show Clipart icon. The Embroidery Clipart dialog opens. The design elements currently recorded are displayed. The dialog consists of three main sections: ! The Search For panel allows you to specify either names or keywords to search the library for a specific design. There is also a dropdown list to specify the sorting order. ! The Clipart panel contains thumbnail images of designs in the clipart library, ready to be dragged and dropped onto the design window. ! The toolbar contains three iconsProperties, Match To Palette, and Search Web Clipart. 2 Click-and-drag the dialog to any position you require. The dialog is modeless and can stay on screen while you work. 3 Browse the library using the scroll bar.
Scroll to browse Click to sort by name, color or stitches Search for names or keywords Toggle Match to Palette on or off

ES 2006 Chapter 33 Embroidery Clipart 774 You can use the search and sort functions. See Searching and sorting embroidery clipart for details. 4 Click a clipart thumbnail to select, or hover your mouse over it to view summary information. Note Before using the clipart in your design, decide whether to toggle Match to Palette on or off: ! On: when you insert your clipart, its colors are matched to the current color palette. ! Off: unique colors in the clipart are added to the current color palette. See also Setting inserted embroidery file options. 5 Drag-and-drop the design element into the design window to open. Alternatively, right-click the thumbnail and select Insert from the popup

menu.
Hover cursor over thumbnail Colors added to palette Colors matched to palette Right-click and select Insert

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 775

Searching and sorting embroidery clipart

There are more efficient ways of finding an appropriate design element than scrolling and browsing through your entire library. Depending on what you intend to do, it is helpful to narrow the search for design elements which best suit your purpose.

Sorting the clipart library

To sort the clipart library

You can sort the clipart thumbnails by different criteria. 1 Click the Show Clipart icon. The Embroidery Clipart dialog opens. 2 Click the Sort by list. 3 Select: ! Name Ascending or Descending to sort by names alphabeticallyAscending sorts letters from A to Z and numbers from lowest to highest, Descending sorts in reverse order. ! Colors Ascending or Descending to sort by the number of colors. ! Stitches Ascending or Descending to sort by the number of stitches. Click Show Clipart (Clipart toolbar) to open the embroidery clipart.
Select to sort by name and number of colors or stitches

ES 2006 Chapter 33 Embroidery Clipart 776

Searching the clipart library by name

You can search the clipart thumbnails by names.

To search the clipart library by name

1 Click the Show Clipart icon. The Embroidery Clipart dialog opens. 2 Type in the name you want to find in the Names field. Tip You can use a wildcard if unsure of the exact name: ! Use asterisk (*) at the end of a string of letters. The asterisk (*) must be placed at the end of the stringit cannot appear at the beginning or in the middle of the string. ! Use a question mark (?) if you are not sure of an individual character in a namee.g. T?re will return both Tyre and Tire. The question mark (?)must be used as a substitute for a single character in a name. 3 Click Search.

Searching the clipart library by keyword

Enter name Click to search
deer

You can search the clipart thumbnails by keywords. Click Show Clipart (Clipart toolbar) to open the embroidery clipart. Click Show Clipart (Clipart toolbar) to open the embroidery clipart. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 777

To search the clipart library by keyword

1 Click the Show Clipart icon. The Embroidery Clipart dialog opens. 2 Click the Browse button next to the Keywords field.

The Keywords dialog opens. Note Alternatively, simply enter keyword(s) in the Keywords field with a space between them. 3 Key in required letters to filter the keywords list as required. 4 Select a keyword and click the Move button or double-click to move it to the Selected Keywords column.
Click to select keywords Click to search Click to remove all from selected keywords list Key in letters to filter list Select keyword to search
deer Racket Realistic Ribbon Rifle Ring Sail Sail boarding Santa Sea Shapes Snow

Click to move to selected keywords list Click to remove from selected keywords list

ES 2006 Chapter 33 Embroidery Clipart 778 Note To remove a keyword from the Selected Keywords list, select it and double-click or click the Remove button. To remove all the selected keywords click the Remove All button. 5 Click OK to transfer selected keywords to the Keywords search field. 6 Click Search. All clipart elements associated with the selected keywords are displayed in the list.

Recording embroidery clipart

Use the Record to Clipart function to record design elements or even an entire design to the clipart library. Assign a name and keywords to each design element you record.

Recording designs to the clipart library

To record a design to the clipart library

The Record to Clipart option is enabled when at least one embroidery object is selected. Use it to record design elements or even an entire design. 1 Select a design you want to record. 2 Click the Record to Clipart icon. Use Record to Clipart (Clipart toolbar) to record a design to the embroidery clipart. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 779 The Record to Clipart dialog opens. Note Design information, such as number of colors and stitches, height, width, and date and time created, cannot be modified. You can, however, overwrite the default numeric name. 3 Enter a meaningful name for the design in the Name field. 4 Assign one or more keywords. See Assigning keywords to clipart for details. 5 Click OK.

Assigning keywords to clipart

Keywords play an important part in organizing the clipart library. This is especially so as it grows in size and diversity. Finding a suitable design element can take time but searching on keywords speeds up the process by narrowing the selection. Any number of keywords can be assigned to the same clipart element.

Animal Ball Baseball Basketball Bicycle

Assign name Preview Click to add keyword Click to remove all from assigned keywords list Click to move to assigned keywords list Click to remove from assigned keywords list

Click Show Clipart (Clipart toolbar) to open the embroidery clipart. Click Object Properties (Embroidery Clipart dialog) to set properties for selected objects. ES 2006 Chapter 33 Embroidery Clipart 780

To assign keywords to clipart

1 Click the Show Clipart icon. The Embroidery Clipart dialog opens. 2 Select a clipart thumbnail. 3 Open the clipart properties dialog by any of the following means: ! Double-click the thumbnail. ! Click the Object Properties icon on the Embroidery Clipart dialog. ! Right-click the thumbnail and select Properties from the popup menu. The Clipart Properties dialog opens. 4 Click New to create a new keyword. The Add Keyword dialog opens. 5 Click OK. 6 Select a keyword and click the Move button or double-click to move it to the Selected Keywords column.
Select keyword
Animal Ball Baseball Basketball Bicycle

Assign keywords to design element Click to add keyword Type in new keyword
Love

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 781 Note To remove a keyword from the Selected Keywords list, select it and double-click or click the Remove button. To remove all the selected keywords click the Remove All button. 7 Click OK. Selected keywords are associated with the clipart. These can now be used during clipart searches. See Searching and sorting embroidery clipart for details.

Managing keywords

Managing keywords is an essential part maintaining the clipart library efficiently. You can add keywords to your list for future use without having to assign them to a particular design. You can also remove keywords and modify them with the Manage Keywords feature.

Adding, modifying and deleting keywords

To add, modify and delete keywords

Manage keywords by adding, modifying or deleting keywords. 1 Click the Manage Keywords icon. Use Manage Keywords (Clipart toolbar) to manage keywords for the clipart.

ES 2006 Chapter 33 Embroidery Clipart 782 The Manage Keywords dialog opens. 2 Click Add or press Alt+A to add a keyword. The Add Keyword dialog opens. 3 Enter a keyword and click OK. The keyword is added to the list. 4 To modify a keyword, select and click Modify or press Alt+M.
Actor Animal Applique Architecture Ball Basketball Beetle Bells Boat Building Butterfly Cartoon Cats Children Christmas Crab

Click to add Click to modify Click to delete Balloon Type in keyword

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 783 The Modify Keyword dialog opens. 5 Enter a new keyword or select a replacement keyword from the list. 6 Click OK. The old keyword is replaced with the new one in the Manage Keywords dialog. 7 To remove a keyword, select and click Delete or press Alt+D. You are prompted to confirm deletion. 8 Click OK. The keywords list is updated. Clips using old keywords will be updated with any modified keywords.

Importing and exporting keywords

Aside from adding, modifying and deleting keywords, you can manage your keyword collection by exporting to a text file. You can later restore keywords by re-importing the text file.

To import or export keywords

1 Click the Manage Keywords icon.
Actor Animal Applique Architecture Ball Basketball Beetle Bells Boat Baboon Enter

new keyword

Use Manage Keywords (Clipart toolbar) to manage keywords for the embroidery clipart. ES 2006 Chapter 33 Embroidery Clipart 784 The Manage Keywords dialog opens. 2 To import keywords, click Import or press Alt+I. The Open dialog opens. 3 Browse and select the text file you want to import. 4 Click Open. Keywords are imported to the Manage Keywords dialog. Note When you import keywords, only unique keywords are appended to any existing list. Duplicates are ignored. 5 To export the keywords in the list, click Export or press Alt+E.
Actor Animal Applique Architecture

Ball Basketball Beetle Bells Boat Building Butterfly Cartoon Cats Children Christmas Crab

Click to import Click to export Select to import Only Text (TXT) format available Browse proper location

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 785 The Save As dialog opens. 6 Browse and type in a filename. 7 Click Save. The keywords are saved to a text file where each keyword is written to a separate line.

Setting Design Workflow as an Enterprise Engine

When you install ES Designer, the Embroidery Clipart feature is installed with the Microsoft Database Engine or MSDE together with a sample clipart library. When you first open the library, it displays all the design elements currently recorded to your personal sample database installation. However, if you are running Design Workflow on a company-wide network, you may
Type in file name Browse proper location
Actor Animal Applique Architecture Ball Basketball Beetle Bells Boat Building Butterfly Cartoon Cats Children Christmas Collie Column

ES 2006 Chapter 33 Embroidery Clipart 786 want to share the Embroidery Clipart library across the entire organization. It is a relatively simple matter for your the DW Administrator to configure a dedicated Embroidery Clipart database and provide all users with a Microsoft Database Engine file shortcut to connect to the database. Note Used in conjunction with Design Workflow, the Embroidery Clipart library allows you to share embroidery elements between multiple users. Available as a cost option, Design Workflow is an embroidery design centralization and management solution for businesses that share embroidery files across a network. It can serve as the repository for your designs and design elements making the task of securing, searching for, and managing your assets much easier.

To set Design Workflow as an Enterprise Engine

1 Select Special > Clipart > Set Design Workflow as Enterprise Engine. The Open dialog opens. 2 Browse to the location of the supplied UDL file. 3 Select and click Open. Your clipart library will be linked to the enterprise clipart database. This means that any design elements you record to the clipart library can be accessed by all other users of the clipart database. Note If you do not have the Design Workflow option activated on your

dongle, the menu will display a Learn About Design Workflow Engine option. This explains the benefits of using the engine across the enterprise.
Select UDL to connect to Only UDL format available Browse to network location

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 787

Chapter 34

ES Design Explorer Basics

ES Design Explorer provides an efficient way for viewing and managing embroidery designs. With this design management tool, you can browse design files stored on your computer hard disk, CD-ROM, or floppy disk, as well as cut, copy, paste and delete them. It recognizes all design file formats used by ES Designer. See also Supported File and Machine Formats and Disk Types. Note ES Design Explorer helps you manage designs in folders. It is not a multi-user database for company-wide design management. For this type of requirement, refer to the Design Workflow User Manual. This section describes how to use ES Design Explorer to access and view designs in folders. It also covers cutting, copying, pasting, and deleting designs in folders.

Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs

ES Design Explorer does not require a separate installation. It works as an integral part of Wilcom ES and is easy to set up and get started. ES Design Explorer displays thumbnails and limited design information whenever a design folder is accessed. You can filter the contents of the display window to show only certain file types. You can also rename folders, add sub-folders and delete folders without leaving ES Design Explorer.

Opening ES Design Explorer

Navigating to design folders with ES Design Explorer is very similar to browsing with Windows Explorer. Your access to design folders on your network is only limited by network access rights determined by your System Administrator. ES Design Explorer lets you view any supported design file Double-click the desktop icon to open ES Design Explorer. ES Designer will open by default. ES 2006 Chapter 34 ES Design Explorer Basics 788 type residing in design folders. See also Supported File and Machine Formats and Disk Types. Note If you start ES Design Explorer from the desktop or from the Windows Start button, ES Designer will also open. If your computer is slow or you have many applications running, ES Design Explorer may not open.

To open ES Design Explorer

1 Double-click the ES Design Explorer icon on the Windows desktop. ES Design Explorer and ES Designer open in separate windows. ES Design Explorer defaults to the Design folder, showing all of your EMB designs as thumbnails. Tip If ES Designer is hiding ES Design Explorer from view, switch between them using the Windows Alt+Tab function. Note The thumbnail image generation process can be very slow on older machines or if there are a lot of designs in the selected folder. Holding down the Alt key will abort the redraw. The thumbnail will be drawn using a default yellow exclamation mark. This does not mean that the design is missing. See also Locating missing files.

2 Drag the split bar between the folders and thumbnails to the left or to the right to resize the window sections. 3 To find a design which is not in the current foldere.g. C:\Designsuse the folder listing to locate the required folder.
folder listing design thumbnails contained in selected folder status bar menu bar split bar toolbar files dropdown Change Design View

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 789 Tip If not all drives or folders are displayed, click the + to the left of My Computer to show all local and network drives available to your PC. 4 Click a folder in the folder listing to display its contents in the display window. You can list the folder contents in different ways. See Viewing design properties for details. Tip Close ES Design Explorer in View by Details mode so that it opens more quickly next time.

Displaying design thumbnails and summary information

The designs in ES Design Explorer can be listed as thumbnails only (the default), thumbnails and summary information, or design information only. Tip Designs can also be displayed full screen using ES Designer. See Opening designs in ES Designer for details.

To display design thumbnails and summary information

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a folder. See Viewing design properties for details. 2 Use the viewing options to view designs in the display format you require: ! To display the designs as thumbnails only, click the Change Design View icon and select Thumbnails from the dropdown menu. Or, select View > Design Thumbnails. Click to Change Design View to select thumbnails only, thumbnails with stitching details, or summary information only.
thumbnail view

ES 2006 Chapter 34 ES Design Explorer Basics 790 ! To display the designs as thumbnails with stitching details, click the Change Design View icon and select Summary from the dropdown menu. Or, select View > Design Thumbnails and Summary. ! To display the designs in a detailed list, click the Change Design View icon and select List from the dropdown menu. Or, select View > Design List. By default, designs are listed showing design name, file size, file type, version, etc. See also Customizing design lists. Note The number of selected designs is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the ES Design Explorer window.

Viewing designs in the whole window

It is often more convenient to view designs in folders and databases in the whole window. When doing so, you can always browse for designs using the Look In list or Browse Location option.

To view designs in the whole window

1 Click the Show/Hide folders icon.
Summary view List view

Click Show/Hide folders to hide the folder listing. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 791 Designs are now viewable across the window.

2 To view designs in another folder, select from the Look in dropdown list. Tip Alternatively, select View > Browse Location to open the Browse For Folder dialog.

Viewing zipped designs in folders

ES Design Explorer lets you archive and view design files in folders which have been archived by means of the popular WinZip utility. This is a software program which bundles files into a single compressed file with the extension *.ZIP. This can be useful for sending or receiving multiple files via email. See also Archiving design files.
Click to run in full-screen mode

ES 2006 Chapter 34 ES Design Explorer Basics 792

To view zipped designs in folders

1 Open ES Design Explorer and browse to the folder containing the zipped design files. ! If the folder contains individually zipped designs, these will appear directly in the display window. The file name will appear in italics. ! If the folder contains zipped files containing multiple designs, these will appear in the folder listing. 2 Select the zipped file to view its contents.

Locating missing files

If users incorrectly move files, the normal design thumbnail is usually replaced by a missing design thumbnail when ES Design Explorer is next opened. Each color indicates the likely cause:
Zipped design names appear in italics Zipped design file appears in folder listing

Icon Description This means that ES Design Explorer cannot find the design file. Replace missing files from backup or another source. If this is not possible, delete the record or refresh the directory. See also Refreshing the display. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 793

Adjusting view settings

ES Design Explorer allows you to customize window settings. It lets you customize the toolbar layout. You can switch between localesEnglish, French, German, etcat any time. Occasionally you may need to refresh the display. You can also change the way selected designs are highlighted, whether thumbnail files are created, and so on. Design Workflow even lets you customize design lists to display only the fields you require in any order you prefer.

Changing locale

During installation of the ES Design Explorer software, optional languages (locales) can be selected for dialogs and messagese.g. English, French, German, etc. You can switch between these locales at any time after installation. Warning If the default locale is not the same as the language of the Operating System, then this option will not work properly. See also locale in Windows Help for information about changing Windows to suit different locales.

To change locale

1 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. This means that ES Design Explorer has found an up-to-date thumbnail but doesnt recognize the format. Use Validate and Refresh to update the display. ES Design Explorer will try to make a replacement next time the folder is opened or refreshed. See

also Refreshing the display. ES Design Explorer recognizes a pre-determined set of file types as per the file type dropdown list. If it sees a design that has the required file suffixEMB, BMP, etcbut it is unable to read the file, it will display the green question mark. Locate the file and delete it. Icon Description Select Change Locale (View menu) to switch between locales. ES 2006 Chapter 34 ES Design Explorer Basics 794 2 Select View > Change Locale to open the locale required. The Choose Locale dialog opens. Note Only those locales selected when ES Design Explorer was installed will be listed. 3 Select the locale required, and click OK to make the change. Tip See also locale in Windows Help for information about changing keyboards, fonts and so on to suit different locales.

Refreshing the display

Occasionally, your screen will not show changes you have made until you refresh the display. Changes to folders may not display either until you refresh the folder listing. If graphics and thumbnails still do not appear correctly, or if you have updated your Wilcom ES software, you may need to validate and refresh.

To refresh the display

! To refresh the display window, select View > Refresh, or press F5. ! To refresh folders in the folder listing, select View > Refresh Folder.

Alternatively, select the node you want to refresh, right-click and select Refresh Folder from the popup menu. ! To validate and refresh a folder, select View > Validate and Refresh. Tip Occasionally, ES Design Explorer displays red, blue or green question marks and a short description instead of a graphic thumbnail. See Locating missing files for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 795

Modifying user preferences

You can change several default settings in ES Design Explorer: ! the way selected designs are highlighted ! what happens when you double-click designs.

To modify user preferences

1 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. 2 Select View > User Preferences. The User Preferences dialog opens. 3 In the Options panel, select Highlight in Full to fully highlight each thumbnail as it is selected. If you only require selected thumbnail borders to be highlighted, clear Highlight in Full. Tip The color and intensity of highlights can be changed in the Windows Control Panel to suit each user. See Windows Help for details about Display Settings. 4 In the Double-click Options panel, select either: ! Open Design: if you want the normal Windows action when you double-click a design name or thumbnail, or ! Show Properties: if you want to open the Properties dialog for designs that you double-click. 5 Click OK to save the settings. Tip If you need more space in the display window for viewing thumbnails, click the Hide/Show folder listing button. Select User Preferences (View menu) to set design view user preferences.
Set user preferences

ES 2006 Chapter 34 ES Design Explorer Basics 796

Customizing design lists

To customize design lists

Design Workflow lets you customize design lists to display only the fields you require in any order you prefer. 1 To display the designs in a detailed list, click the Change Design View icon and select List from the dropdown menu. Or, select View > Design List. By default, designs are listed showing design name, date first designed, when last changed, when first recorded, etc. 2 Right-click the column header and select the Customize Column from the popup menu. Alternatively, select View > Customize Columns > Design List. The Columns dialog opens. 3 Exclude a field from the listing by deselcting the associated checkbox.
Select Customize Column Select / deselect fields to include in listing Click to reorder selected fields Click to hide selected fields

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 797 Alternatively, highlight the field and select Hide. 4 Adjust the order of selected fields with the Move Up and Move Down buttons. Alternatively, select the column header in list view and drag-and-drop to a new location.

Browsing designs in folders

Information about designs in folders can be viewed in the Properties dialog. Designs can then be browsed using navigation buttons and slide show buttons on this dialog. Tip You can also filter the contents of any design folder to show only certain types of filee.g. EMB only. See Sorting files in folders for details.

Viewing design properties

Information about designs in folders can be viewed in the Properties dialog. The data is extracted directly from design files created in ES Designer. You cannot add, delete and edit these fields. Tip Designs in folders can be browsed using navigation buttons and slide show buttons on the Properties dialog. See Sorting files in folders for details.

To view design properties

Drag-and-drop header to new location

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Viewing design properties for details.

Click Design Properties to view information about selected designs. ES 2006 Chapter 34 ES Design Explorer Basics 798 2 Double-click a design or click the Design Properties icon. The Properties dialog opens showing all stitch information derived from the design file together with user-defined information. Stitch information from the design file appears grayed out and cannot be edited. The Design, Description, and Selected fields are ranged across the top of the dialog. Use the Selected field at the top of the dialog to select or deselect designs in the main window as you move between designs. See Sorting files in folders for details. Tip If not all text is visible in a field, select the field and use the Arrow,

Home and End keys to scroll. Alternatively, resize the dialog. 3 Click OK to close.

Browsing through designs in folders

Navigation buttons on the Properties dialog allow you to move forwards, backwards, as well as to the start and end of all designs in the selected folder. Similarly, you can move forward and back through selected designs. As you browse, the Properties dialog displays a thumbnail together with relevant design information. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 799 Tip When you find the design you want, right-click the name or thumbnail and select Open with Wilcom ES Designer to open it in ES Designer. Or choose File > Open to open bitmaps images in a third-party graphics program.

To browse through designs in a folder

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. 2 Select or sort the designs as required. See also Sorting files in folders. 3 Open the Properties dialog. See Viewing design properties for details. 4 Browse through the entire folder or a selection of designs as required. ! If you want to browse the entire folder, use the red navigation buttons. These allow you to move to the first design, last design, previous design and next design in the folder. ! Use the Selected checkbox to select or deselect designs as you browse. ! If you want to browse through selected designs, use the blue navigation buttons. These allow you to move to the first selected design, last selected design, previous selected design and next selected design in the folder. 5 Click OK.
navigation buttons Click to select or deselect designs folder navigation selection navigation start end start end

ES 2006 Chapter 34 ES Design Explorer Basics 800

Browsing designs using slide show buttons

All designs in folder can be displayed as a slide show. The slide show is run from the Properties dialog which displays each designs thumbnail together with relevant information. You can control the speed and direction of the slide show.

To browse designs using slide show buttons

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. 2 Select or sort the designs as required. See also Sorting files in folders. 3 Open the Properties dialog. See Viewing design properties for details. 4 Click the Forwards or Backwards button to start the slide show. The slide show automatically scrolls through every design in the folder. 5 Click + or - to increase or decrease the speed. 6 Click the Stop button to stop.

Accessing designs in folders

ES Design Explorer lets you select designs residing in folders. Once selected, you can manipulate them in a variety of wayse.g. cutting, copying, pasting, editing the record, and converting designs to other formats. You can also open designs in ES Designer directly from ES Design Explorer for viewing or editing.

Tip With the file selected, right-click to open a popup menu which includes the commands Open, Print, Convert, Punch to Tape, Stitch to Machine, and Delete.

Selecting designs in folders

slide show buttons stop backwards fast/slow forwards

Designs must be selected before an action can be performede.g. view, open or copy a design. A group of designs, a range, or all the designs in a

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 801 database can be selected. A group is made up of any selected designs. A range is a series of consecutive designs.

To select designs in a folder

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Viewing design properties for details. 2 Display designs as thumbnails or as a details list. See Displaying design thumbnails and summary information for details. Tip The thumbnail image generation process can be very slow on older machines or if there are a lot of designs in the database. Holding down the Alt key will abort the redraw. The thumbnail will be drawn using a default yellow exclamation mark. 3 Sort designs by required categorye.g. sort by customer to list each customers designs consecutively. See Sorting files in folders for details. 4 Select a design or designs. ! To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you select. ! To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you select. ! To select all designs in the current folder, select Edit > Select All or click Ctrl+A. 5 To deselect all selected designs, select Edit > Deselect All, or click any unselected design. Tip To deselect a single design amongst a group of selected designs, click it again while holding down the Ctrl key.

Opening designs in ES Designer

To open designs in ES Designer

Any designs selected in the ES Design Explorer display window can be opened in ES Designer for viewing or editing. 1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Viewing design properties for details. 2 Select a design or designs. Click Open Design to open a selected design or designs in ES Designer. ES 2006 Chapter 34 ES Design Explorer Basics 802 Tip If you want to open several designs at once, select the details list view. See Displaying design thumbnails and summary information for details. 3 Click the Open icon. All selected files are opened. 4 Alternatively, if displaying designs as thumbnails, double-click a single design thumbnail. Make sure Double-click Options > Open Design is selected in the User Preferences dialog. See Modifying user preferences for details. The selected design or designs are displayed in the ES Designer window ready for editing. Tip To switch between ES Designer and ES Design Explorer: ! Hold down the Alt key, then tap the Tab key until the ES Designer icon is highlighted. Release the Alt key. ! Alternatively, click the ES Designer icon on the Windows taskbar.

Creating new designs with custom templates

You can open a new design template in ES Designer from within ES Design Explorer.

To create new designs with a custom template

1 Select File > New. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 803 ES Designer opens and the New dialog appears. Note If there is no template other than default, the New dialog may not appear. 2 Select a template from the list. 3 Click OK.

Reconnecting ES Design Explorer to ES Designer

Occasionally ES Design Explorer may encounter a problem preventing it from connecting with ES Designer. Follow the instructions below (in the same order as they are listed) to find the solution.

To reconnect ES Design Explorer with ES Designer

! Check that your dongle security device is connected. ! Open ES Design Explorer and check that it runs correctly on its

ownclose ES Design Explorer, then open ES Designer by clicking its icon on the Windows Desktop. ! If none of the above correct the problem, re-install ES Designer. ! Check that the version of ES Designer you are running is the same as that registered in ES Design Explorers Shortcut Properties: ES 2006 Chapter 34 ES Design Explorer Basics 804 ! Right-click the ES Design Explorer icon on your Windows Desktop, then select Properties. The Design Explorer Properties > Shortcut dialog opens. ! Read the last text item in the Target fielde.g. ...version=2006 This version should be identical to the version of ES Designer you are running. If it is not, change it to the correct version and click OK. ! Install ES Designer again.
shortcut

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 805

Chapter 35

ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions

Designs in ES Design Explorer folders can be sorted in various ways. This is useful when you want to select designs for stitching out, printing, archiving, and so on. Once a design is selected in an ES Design Explorer folder, you can send it direct to an embroidery machine or punching machine. You can also batch-convert your EMB and other design files to and from other file formats directly from ES Design Explorer. Create design catalogs containing thumbnail images and/or summary information. These can be sent to a printer, published on your website or intranet, and exported in formats suitable for spreadsheet and database programs, and for integration with third-party e-commerce solutions. Archive design files in folders with the built-in WinZip utility. This can be useful for sending or receiving multiple files via email. You can even view design files within zipped archives. This section describes the more advanced workings of ES Design Explorer from sorting files to stitching, punching, and converting designs. It also describes how to print and publish catalogs of designs, as well as how to archive dormant or unused designs.

Sorting files in folders

The simplest way to sort files in ES Design Explorer folders is by file

typee.g. EMB files only. Designs can be further sorted in the following ways: ! As simple sorts using View > Sort by (Name, Type, Size, or Date). The designs are arranged according to the sort selection. The designs can be sorted whether they are displayed as thumbnails or as a details list. ES 2006 Chapter 35 ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions 806 ! As simple sorts using details list headings: by File Name, Size, File Type, Version, Date, Stitches, or Description. Designs are arranged according to the heading selected, and repeating the sort reverses the order. Designs must be displayed as a details list. ! As a complex sort in up to two levels in ascending or descending order: by Colors, Date Designed, Design Name, File Type, Height, Stitches, Version, Width or None. Designs can be displayed as thumbnails, thumbnails with stitching details, or details lists.

Limiting file types displayed

To limit file types displayed

With ES Design Explorer you can filter the contents of any design folder to show only certain types of filee.g. only EMB files. 1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs for details. 2 Click the Files dropdown on the toolbar. 3 Select: ! All Files to show every file type in the folder. ! Artwork Files to display only BMP and PNG files. ! Any other option to display only files of that typee.g. templates.

Running simple sorts using the View menu

To run a simple sort using the View menu

You can sort your thumbnails or details lists by any of four types. 1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 807 2 List the designs as either thumbnails or as a details list. See Displaying design thumbnails and summary information for details. 3 Select View > Sort by Design Name, Sort by File Type, Sort by File Size, or Sort by Last Changed. The designs will be sorted according to the option selected.

Running simple sorts using the details list

To run a simple sort using the details list

You can sort details lists by clicking the column headings. 1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. 2 List the designs as a details list. See Displaying design thumbnails and summary information for details. 3 Click the heading at a column to be sortede.g. Design Name. The designs will be sorted in the order of the selection. 4 Click the heading again to reverse the order.

Running complex sorts

You can sort designs by various criteria such as Colors, Design Date, Design Name, File Type, etc. ES Design Explorer lets you sort them by up to two levels, in ascending or descending order.
Click column heading to sort

Use Sort to run a complex sort using the Sort dialog. ES 2006 Chapter 35 ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions 808

To run a complex sort

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details.

2 List the designs as a details list. See Displaying design thumbnails and summary information for details. 3 Click Sort icon. The Sort dialog opens. 4 Select the first sort criterion: ! Select the main category you want from the Sort By liste.g. Colors. ! Select Ascending to sort letters from A to Z and numbers from lowest to highest, or Descending to sort in the reverse order. 5 Select the second level sort criterion: ! Select a different category from the And Then By liste.g. Stitches. ! Select Ascending or Descending. 6 Click OK. In the above example, the details list will display all designs by color, together with number of stitches used.

Emailing designs direct

Select Level 1 criterion Select Level 2 criterion

Use Email Selected Designs to email design information direct. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 809 ES Design Explorer lets you email design information direct. This includes all files associated with the design record, including design files, TrueView, thumbnail, artwork and stitchout images as well as stitch files.

To email designs direct

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. 2 Select one or more design records and either: ! Click the Email Selected Designs icon on toolbar, or ! Right-click the design record and select Email Design from the popup menu. The Email Design Options dialog opens. 3 Select the files you want to include in the email.
Email selected designs Select files to include

ES 2006 Chapter 35 ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions 810 Note If all options are grayed out, your administrator must configure the email settings for your user account. 4 Click OK. The selected files are attached to an email and the subject line populated with the names of the selected designs.

Stitching and punching designs direct

Once a design is selected in a folder, you can: ! send it direct to any embroidery machine connected to the ES Designer system. ! send it direct to any punching machine and punch the tape. Tip When a file is selected, right-click to open a popup menu which includes the commands Open, Print, Convert, Punch to Tape, Stitch to Machine, and Delete.

Stitching designs direct

Select one or more designs in a folder using ES Design Explorer. You can then stitch to any embroidery machine connected to your ES Designer system.

To stitch a design direct

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. 2 Select and sort the design(s) to be stitched using Sort or Search. See Sorting files in folders and Selecting designs in folders for details. 3 Click the Stitch Selected Designs icon. Use Stitch Selected Designs to stitch a design directly to machine. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 811 The Stitch Options dialog opens. 4 Select a machine type and format from the lists. To define or modify the machines settings. See Setting up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager for details. 5 Click OK. The ES Machine Manager window opens. See the ES Machine Manager Supplement for details.

Punching designs direct

Select one or more designs in a folder using ES Design Explorer. You can then punch to any paper tape punching machine connected to your ES Designer system.

To punch a design direct

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. 2 Select and sort the design(s) to be punched using Sort or Search. See Sorting files in folders and Selecting designs in folders for details. 3 Click the Punch Selected Designs icon. The Punch Options dialog opens. 4 Select a machine type from the list and click OK.
Select machine type and format

Use Punch Selected Designs to punch a design directly to a punching machine.

Select machine type

ES 2006 Chapter 35 ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions 812 The Tape Manager dialog opens. See Punching designs to paper tape for details.

Printing and publishing designs

Catalogs of designs in a folder contain thumbnails and/or summary information. These can be sent to a printer, published on your website or intranet, and exported in formats suitable for spreadsheet and database programs, and for integration with third-party e-commerce solutions. Tip Before printing, publishing or exporting, sort the designs into useful groups. For example, sort by Type or search by Customer. See Sorting files in folders for details.

Printing production worksheets

You can print production worksheets for selected groups of designs in folders, and include thumbnails of each design in the worksheet. Note Unlike Print Designs, this option can provide all of the design and sewing information available, but it uses far more paper to do so. See also Printing design catalogs.

To print a production worksheet

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. 2 Select and sort the designs to be printed using Sort. See Sorting files in folders for details.
Select tape punch Select to label tape Select to automatically rewind tape before stitching Select to punch in reverse direction

Use Print Selected Designs to print production worksheets. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 813 3 Click the Print Selected Design icon. The Print dialog opens. 4 Select the printer you want to use, and enter the number of copies of the worksheet you require. 5 To customize the worksheet, click Options. The Print Options dialog opens. 6 Set production worksheet options to show the information you want in the format you require. See Setting production worksheet print options for details. 7 Click OK when finished, then ensure that your printer settings are correct in the Windows Print Setup dialog. Note The dialog and the settings available will vary from printer to printer. See your printer manual for details. 8 Click OK.

Printing design catalogs

Printed catalogs of your designs are a handy sales and marketing tool. They contain thumbnails of the designs plus limited text details. You can prepare catalogs of all your designs, and others to suit specific markets, types of design, and individual customers.
Set zoom factor for design preview Select other general options Select information type to include Select graphical features to include Select worksheet or appliqu

ES 2006 Chapter 35 ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions 814

To print a design catalog

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. 2 Select and sort the designs to be printed in the catalog using Sort. See Sorting files in folders for details. 3 Select File > Print Catalog. The Print Catalog Options dialog opens. 4 Change the Scale (%) amount if you want your thumbnails bigger or smaller. 5 Select Summary if you want design details to be printed. 6 Click Preview as required. 7 Click Printer to select a printer, paper size and other options in the Windows Print dialog for the printer attached to your PC. 8 Click OK to print the catalog.
Select for design details Change the scale Click to preview Click to set printer settings

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 815 Tip If the catalog requires more than one page, you can select which page to print in the Windows Print dialog.

Publishing design catalogs for browser viewing

You can convert your designs to the HTML and PNG formats suitable for viewing by any browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer. This allows you to publish designs throughout the company via an intranet, or throughout the world via the internet. You can also attach catalogs to emails and send

them as design samples.

To publish a design catalog for browser viewing

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. 2 Select and sort the designs to be published in the catalog using Sort. See Sorting files in folders for details. 3 Select File > HTML Catalog. The HTML Catalog Options dialog opens. 4 Change the Scale (%) amount if you want your thumbnails bigger or smaller. 5 Adjust the number of rows and number of columns for the final output, which will appear as a table. 6 De-select Summary if you dont want design details to appear. 7 Enter a filename and location in the File Name fielde.g. C:\Designs\Catalogs\Crests.htmor accept the default settings. Tip Make a separate folder for each catalogthe catalog conversion will generate a PNG file for a thumbnail of each design, another PNG file for a TrueView of each design, and an HTML file for each page. 8 Click OK to start converting the designs.
Change the scale Adjust number s of rows and columns Enter filename and location

ES 2006 Chapter 35 ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions 816 Your browsere.g. Windows Internet Explorerwill open automatically at the first page of designs when the conversion is finished. If your browser does not open automatically: ! Open your browsere.g. Windows Internet Explorervia the Windows Start button. ! Click the Address field, browse to the selected folder, and double-click the first HTM file containing thumbnailse.g. Crests1.htm. There will be at least two HTM files with similar namese.g. Crests.htm, Crests1.htm, etc. The filename without a number is the index to all of the HTM files. Your browser will display one or more design thumbnails in the window. 9 Examine the contents of the page. Click Next Page to view the next screen of thumbnails. Tip Double-click a thumbnail to view its TrueView image in real size. 10 Repeat the procedure to adjust thumbnail size and table layout as required.

Exporting design catalogs

Design details can be converted to Tab and CSV (Comma Separated Value files) formats suitable for use by most spreadsheets. See your spreadsheet program for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 817

To export a design catalog

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. 2 Select and sort the designs to be exported to the catalog using Sort. See Sorting files in folders for details. 3 Select File > Export Design List. The Export to File Options dialog opens. 4 Click either Tabs or Commas, depending on your spreadsheet programs recommended format. The Save As dialog opens. 5 Select a folder and filename to store the CSV or TXT file. 6 Click Save. The designs will be generated and saved in the selected format.

Converting design files in folders

Use Convert Selected Designs to convert from one design file type to another. ES 2006 Chapter 35 ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions 818 You can convert your EMB and other design files to and from other file formats directly from ES Design Explorer. Tip You can use this capability in conjunction with the Auto Color Merge feature. The Auto Color Merge feature reads thread color information for CND files from an associated TXT file so that stitches are displayed in the correct colors when they are converted to EMB. See Color merging Melco CND files for details.

To convert design files in folders

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. 2 Select the file(s) to be converted. See Selecting designs in folders for details. 3 Click the Convert Selected Design icon. The Convert Options dialog opens. 4 Select the file types you want to convert to. 5 Browse to the folder where you want to store the converted designs, using the Browse button. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 819 The Browse for Folder dialog opens. 6 Click OK to start the conversion. The converted designs will be stored in the nominated folder. Note Embroidery disks must be formatted to suit the embroidery machine you intend to use or the machine will not be able to read the design. Select File > Format Embroidery Disk to format a disk to required format. See Formatting embroidery disks for details.

Archiving design files

ES Design Explorer lets you archive and view design files in folders which have been archived by means of the popular WinZip utility. This is a software program which bundles files into a single compressed file with the extension *.ZIP. This can be useful for sending or receiving multiple files via email.

Saving design files to a single compressed file

To save design files to a single compressed file

ES Design Explorer provides a shortcut to the WinZip utility via the toolbar. 1 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. 2 Select a folder and select the design(s) you want to archive. Use WinZip to archive selected designs to a single compressed file. ES 2006 Chapter 35 ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions 820 3 Click the WinZip icon or right-click the design(s) and select Create Zip Archive from the popup menu. ! If you have selected one design file, the system will create a ZIP file taking the designs name as its own. ! If you have selected more than one design file, the Create Zip Archive dialog opens. 4 Choose whether to archive the selected files individually or as a single file: ! Create one archive containing multiple designs: creates a ZIP file for every design, taking the designs name as its own. ! Create individual archives for each design: opens the Save As dialog. 5 Enter a file name for your zipped file and click Save. The selected designs are copied to the zip file. You can view them in the specified folder. See Viewing zipped designs in folders for details.

Extracting design files from a zipped archive

ES Design Explorer allows you to extract design files from a zipped archive. This is useful, for example, if you are receiving zipped designs via email.

To extract design files from a zipped archive

1 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 821 2 Select the folder which contains the design or designs you want to extract. 3 Select the individual design to extract in the display window or the zipped file in the directory tree. 4 Within the zipped file, select the design(s) you want. ! To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you select. ! To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you select. 5 Select File > Extract Zip Archive. The Save As dialog opens prompting you to specify the location of the extracted file. 6 Choose a location and click Save.
Zipped design names appear in italics Zipped design file appears in folder listing

ES 2006 Chapter 35 ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions 822 The designs are extracted to the selected location. If you have saved them to a location referenced by ES Design Explorer, you can now view them. See Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs for details.

Organizing designs in folders

You can rename, duplicate and edit database information without opening designs. You can also rename folders, add sub-folders and delete folders without leaving ES Design Explorer.

Renaming, adding and deleting folders

To rename, add or delete folders

You can rename, add and delete folders without leaving ES Design Explorer. 1 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs for details. 2 Browse to the folders you want to rename, delete or add folders to. See Browsing designs in folders for details. 3 Add, rename, or delete folders as required: ! To add a sub-folder to another, select the folder and right-click. Select Add Folder and type in the name when the new sub-folder appears. ! To rename a folder, select it and right-click. Select Rename from the popup menu, and type in the new name. ! To delete a folder, select it and right-click. Select Delete Folder from the popup menu. You will be prompted to confirm the deletion.

Copying and pasting designs

To copy and paste a design

Once a selected design is copied, it can then be pasted to another location using Paste. A copied design can be pasted any number of times. 1 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs for details. 2 Select any number of designs. See Selecting designs in folders for details. 3 Select Edit > Copy. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 823 4 Change to another folder using the directory if required. A design can be pasted to the same folder as the original design. 5 Select Edit > Paste.

If the selected designe.g. Bear.EMBis pasted into the current folder, and the current folder contains the original design, or a file of the same name, the new design is automatically named Copy of Bear.EMB. You can then change the name of the new file by right-clicking its name, selecting Rename and typing the new name. Press Enter to complete the name change. Note If you rename the file, ensure that the three letter extensione.g. EMBis not altered.

Cutting and pasting designs

When a selected design is cut, the design is removed from the current folder. The design can then be pasted at another location using the Paste command.

To cut and paste designs

1 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs for details. 2 Select any number of designs. See Selecting designs in folders for details. 3 Select Edit > Cut. A confirmation dialog opens. 4 Click Yes to cut the design. 5 Browse to the folder where you want to paste the file or files. 6 Select Edit > Paste to paste the selected design into the new folder. If a design of the same name already exists, each pasted copy is renamed.

Renaming designs in folders

Duplicate designs, designs with misleading names, and designs with misspelled names can be quickly renamed without opening them. ES 2006 Chapter 35 ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions 824

To rename a design in a database or folder

1 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs for details. 2 Ensure that the design you select is not currently open in ES Designer. 3 Right-click and select Rename from the popup menu. The Rename Design dialog opens. 4 Enter the new name. 5 Click OK. The original design name is overwritten.

Deleting designs

Delete designs to remove them permanently from your PC.

To delete designs from ES Design Explorer

Rename selected design Bear Enter new name

1 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs for details.

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 825 2 Select any number of designs. See Selecting designs in folders for details. 3 Select Edit > Delete. A confirmation dialog opens. 4 Click Yes to delete the design. Warning The file is removed permanently from the folder. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 826

PART IX

HARDWARE & SOFTWARE SETUP

Setting up hardware
This section describes how to set up digitizing tablets, embroidery machines, paper tape readers and punches, and scanners. It also describes how to calibrate the monitor. See Setting up Hardware for details.

Using digitizing tablets

This section describes how to register both the menu chart and enlargement drawing on the digitizing tablet so that ES Designer can interpret the commands you select as well as the outlines you digitize. It also explains how to change the drawing scale, shift an enlargement drawing, and how to select preset spacing values using the menu chart. See Using Digitizing Tablets for details.

Changing system settings

This section describes how to change TrueView display, grid spacing and positioning, and design window scrolling options. It also describes how to save designs automatically as you work. There is also information about how to adjust the pointer position display, paste position options, and other general options. See Changing System Settings for details. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 827

Chapter 36

Setting up Hardware

You will need to connect peripheral devices for use with ES Designer. These may include digitizing tablets, plotters, printers, paper tape readers and punches, appliqu cutters, scanners and embroidery machines. Different devices are set up in different wayssome in Windows, via the Control Panel, others within ES Designer itself. This section describes how to set up digitizing tablets, embroidery machines, paper tape readers and punches, and scanners. It also describes how to calibrate the monitor. Note For instructions on connecting devices to your computer and setting up in Windows, see the documentation for the device as well as your Microsoft Windows documentation.

Peripheral device connection settings

Peripheral devices can be connected to your computer via serial ports, parallel ports, a specialized network card or an ethernet network. Note Local area networks (LANs) commonly use ethernet networks for machine connection.

Serial port settings

PC serial COM ports are male connectors, and can be either 9-pin or 25-pin. They are named COM1, COM2, COM3, etc. When you set up a digitizer or machine that is connected via a serial port, you need to enter the serial port settings in ES Designer as part of the setup procedure. See Setting up digitizing tablets or Setting up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager. Use Hardware Setup (Special menu) to access serial port settings.

ES 2006 Chapter 36 Setting up Hardware 828 The number of available ports limits the number of devices you can connect. If additional ports are required, you can add them. Multi-port serial cards can also be used. See a PC technician about your requirements. The following table provides standard settings for various devices. They are a guide only. Settings for the same device may vary according to manufacturer. Check the documentation supplied with the device before setting up. Note You must be able to identify the ports on your computer. If in doubt, consult a PC technician.

To enter serial port settings

1 Select Special > Hardware Setup. The Hardware Setup dialog opens. 2 Select a device from the Type list and select an item in the Name column, then click Values. Device Port Baud Hand shaking Data bits Stop bits Parity Digitizer * COM1 9600 None 8 1 None Plotter COM2 9600 XOn/XOff 8 1 None Tape Punch COM2 4800 XOn/XOff 8 1 None Tape Reader COM2 4800 XOn/XOff 8 1 None Embroidery Machine COM2 9600 Hardware 8 1 None * The digitizer applies only to 21D, 45, 65
Select device Click to access device settings

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 829 The <Device> Setup dialog opens. 3 In the Connected To panel, select a serial port from the Port list. 4 Click Setup. The Serial Port Setup dialog opens. 5 Enter the Baud rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits and Parity and Handshaking settings for the device. Note The port settings must match those of the embroidery machine or selected device. The type of handshaking must match the type of cable you are using. Check the communications setup section of the documentation that came with the device. 6 Click OK.

Parallel port settings

Parallel ports are used to connect some embroidery machines. They are named LPT1, LPT2, etc. When you set up the machine, select the parallel port and the required protocol, and complete the machine setup procedure. See Setting up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager for details.

Network settings

If an embroidery machine connection uses a Melco StarLAN network with a Melco StarLAN card, enter the network settings. You do this as part of the procedure for setting up or modifying machines in ES Designer. See Setting up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager for details.
Click Setup Select serial port Enter port settings for embroidery machine or selected device

ES 2006 Chapter 36 Setting up Hardware 830

See the document Connecting Melco Embroidery Machines to Wilcom ES Designer Embroidery software for more information. This document is available on the Wilcom website (http://www.wilcom.com.au).

Ethernet settings

Enter the following information when setting up embroidery machines that are connected using an ethernet network. See also Setting up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager.

To enter ethernet connection settings

1 Click the Stitch to Stitch Manager icon. The Stitch to Stitch Manager dialog opens. 2 In the Machine Identification field, select a machine from the list and click Setup. The Embroidery Machine Connection dialog opens. 3 Select Ethernet from the Port list. An additional field, Peripheral Name, and two checkboxes appear in the Connected To panel. 4 From the Peripheral Name list, select the embroidery machine you are setting up. Use Stitch to Stitch Manager (Standard toolbar) to access ethernet connection settings
Click to access connection settings Select machine Select Ethernet Select embroidery machine Select option as required

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 831 If the machine you require is not in the list, click Find. The system searches for all machines connected on the ethernet and adds them to the list. 5 Select Auto Delete to automatically delete files from machine memory after stitching is complete. 6 Select Auto Queue to automatically queue the design as the next one to stitch. Deselect it to send the design to the end of the existing queue. 7 Complete the machine setup as normal. See Setting up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager for details.

Setting up digitizing tablets

Digitizing tablets generally connect to COM1 but can connect to any available serial COM port. They must be set up in ES Designer to specify the format and the preferred pointer display mode. ES Designer can only support one tablet at a time. You can select from standard digitizer formats or, if the format you need is not available, define a new one. See Defining and modifying digitizing tablet formats for details.

Digitizing tablet limitations

ES Designer V6.0 and V6.1 cannot use the Windows-compatible drivers of some tabletse.g. GTCO and Calcomp tablets. Earlier versions of WinTab do not free the COM port, even when it is not in use. This means ES Designer is unable to communicate with the digitizing tablet. Check with the tablet manufacturer to obtain a version of tablet software which will free the port when not in use. Alternatively, the software may disable or uninstall WinTab, or use another COM port when working with ES Designer.

Setting up digitizing tablets

You can set up your digitizing tablet in ES Designer to define the required format and pointer display mode. The pointer display mode can be set to

Point or Stream. If you change this setting on the digitizing tablet itself, you must also change it in ES Designer.

Point mode

In Point mode, the pointer on the screen does not move when you move the digitizer puck on the tablet. The pointer position on the design area of Use Hardware Setup (Special menu) to setup digitizing tablets. ES 2006 Chapter 36 Setting up Hardware 832 the design window is only updated when you click a button on the digitizer puck.

Stream mode

In Stream mode, the pointer position is continually updated. When you move the digitizer puck on the tablet, the pointer moves on the screen. Note If you use Stream mode, you need to set the digitizer to transmit at 20 data packets per second or less. The baud rate for the digitizing tablet and serial port must both be set to 9600 baud. See Serial port settings for details. To avoid loss of data at high speed, it is important to set up the digitizer correctly. If it can only transmit at greater than 20 data packets per second, reduce the baud rate of the digitizer from 9600 baud to 2400 baud.

To set up a digitizing tablet

1 Connect the digitizing tablet and puck using the accompanying instructions, and run ES Designer. 2 Select Special > Hardware Setup. The Hardware Setup dialog opens. 3 From the Type list, select Digitizer. 4 To change the settings of the existing tablet, select it and click Values.
Select Digitizer Click to access digitizer settings

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 833 The Digitizer Setup dialog opens. 5 In the Name field, enter a name for the digitizing tablet. 6 In the Comment field, enter a comment as required. 7 In the Format panel, select a required digitizer format from the list. Alternatively, select Auto Detect to automatically match the format to the connected digitizer. Note Not all digitizers can be automatically detected by ES Designer. For these tablets, you can define a new format or modify existing format settings. See Defining and modifying digitizing tablet formats for details. 8 From the Input Mode list, select Point or Stream. Note This setting must be the same as the one you specified on the digitizing tablet. 9 From the Port list, select the COM port to which the digitizer is connected. 10 Click Setup to access the serial port settings. These settings must be the same as those set on the digitizing tablet, or ES Designer will not be able to communicate with it. See Serial port settings for details. Note If you selected Stream mode, set the Baud value to 9600. 11 Click OK to return to the Hardware Setup dialog. 12 Click Close.
Enter name Select digitizer format Select input mode Select COM port Click to access serial port settings

ES 2006 Chapter 36 Setting up Hardware 834

Defining and modifying digitizing tablet formats

If the digitizing tablet format you require is not set up in ES Designer, you

can create a new format, or modify an existing format to match the output of your tablet. Before you start, review the documentation provided with the digitizing tablet, and select a supported format. Use the specified settings to create the new format in ES Designer. Note This functionality is provided for advanced users with knowledge of the data protocols supported by their digitizing tablet. Only use it if your digitizing tablet does not work with any existing formats.

To define or modify digitizing tablet formats

1 Access the Digitizer Setup dialog. See Setting up digitizing tablets for details. 2 In the Format panel: ! To modify an existing format, select the format and click Modify. ! To define a new format, click New. The Digitizer User-Defined Format Setup dialog opens. 3 In the Format Name field, enter a name for the new or modified format. 4 In the Format String field, enter the format string your digitizing tablet outputs.
Select digitizer format Modify existing format Create new format Enter format name Enter format string for tablet Enter digitizing scale

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 835 Obtain this information from the digitizing tablet documentation. 5 In the Scale field, enter the scale at which you are digitizing. For example, a scale of 3.0 means your on-screen design will be one third of the size you digitized. 6 Click OK to return to the Digitizer Setup dialog. 7 Click OK. Note To set up the digitizing tablet with the new or modified format, complete the standard setup procedure. See To set up a digitizing tablet for details.

Setting up embroidery machines

Before you can send designs for stitching, you must configure the machine in ES Designer. You can add machines, change settings for machines already set up, or delete machines that are no longer used. ES Designer provides alternative means for sending designs directly to machine. Depending on your software options, you can stitch to machine using either Stitch Manager or ES Machine Manager. For details about Stitch Manager, see Stitching designs with Stitch Manager. ES Machine Manager is described in a separate ES Machine Manager Supplement.

Setting up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager

To set up a machine you need to define a name, the port it is attached to, and the protocol it uses. You can select whether to download directly to the selected machine or to receive a confirmation message each time. For every machine, you need to select the machine formats it supports. You can select from among standard formats, or create new formats if necessary. See Changing Machine Formats for details. Tip Machines that support serial feedback need to be set up in ES Machine Manager. See the ES Machine Manager Supplement for details. Use Hardware Setup (Special menu) to setup embroidery machines for Stitch Manager. ES 2006 Chapter 36 Setting up Hardware 836

To set up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager

1 Connect the embroidery machine using the accompanying instructions, and run ES Designer. The identical port settings must now also be entered in ES Designer Hardware Setup. 2 Select Special > Hardware Setup. The Hardware Setup dialog opens. 3 From the Type list, select Direct Machine Connection. ! To change the settings of an existing machine, select it, then click Values. ! To add a new machine, click New. If no machines are set up, you are automatically prompted to add a new one. The Embroidery Machine Connection dialog opens. 4 In the Name field, enter a name for the machine. 5 In the Comment field, enter a comment if desired. 6 From the Port list, select the COM port to which the machine is connected. See also Ethernet settings.
Select Direct Machine Connection Click to add machine Click to access machine settings Enter machine name Select COM port and protocol Click to access serial port settings

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 837 Tip See Connecting Melco Embroidery Machines to Wilcom ES Designer Embroidery software for more information. This document is available on the Wilcom website http://www.wilcom.com.au. 7 From the Protocol list, select the protocol for the connection between the computer and embroidery machine. The connection type on the computer will be either standard serial, parallel, serial to parallel converted (DCi serial), or an interface card such as Melco Starlan or Ethernet card. See the documentation supplied with the embroidery machine to determine the appropriate connection. 8 Click Setup to access the serial port settings. These settings must be the same as those set on the embroidery machine, or ES Designer will not be able to communicate with it. See Serial port settings for details. 9 In the Connected To panel, select Auto Download to directly download designs to the assigned machine. Deselect it to confirm before sending. 10 In the Machine Type panel, select the compatible machine formats. To do this, select compatible machine types in the Available list, and click > to move them to the For this machine list. Note Machine format values can be added or changed if required. See Changing Machine Formats for details. 11 Click OK to return to the Hardware Setup dialog. 12 Click Close.

Deleting embroidery machines from Stitch Manager

machine types supported by your machine Click arrow buttons to swap machine types between fields

Select machine type

Use Hardware Setup (Special menu) to delete embroidery machines from Stitch Manager. ES 2006 Chapter 36 Setting up Hardware 838 Delete embroidery machines from your system setup if they are no longer required.

To delete embroidery machines from Stitch Manager

1 Select Special > Hardware Setup. The Hardware Setup dialog opens. 2 From the Type list, select Direct Machine Connection. 3 Select a machine and click Delete. 4 Click OK.

Setting up paper tape readers and punches

Set up paper tape readers and punches from within ES Designer. The values you enter here are the default values when reading and punching tapes. Paper tape formats supported in ES Designer include Tajima, Barudan, Zangs, ZSK and Pfaff.

Setting up paper tape readers

To set up paper tape readers

To set up a paper tape reader, you need to connect it, select a machine format and enter the serial port settings for it. 1 Connect the tape reader using the accompanying instructions, and run ES Designer. 2 Select File > Paper Tape > Read.
Select Direct Machine Connection Click Delete to remove the machine Select machine to delete

Use Paper Tape > Read (File menu) to setup paper tape readers and punches. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 839 The Choose Read Tape Type dialog opens. 3 From the Choose input machine list, select the required machine format. Note Make sure you select the correct format as it cannot be detected automatically by ES Designer. 4 Click OK. The Tape Manager dialog opens. 5 Select the Confirm Setup checkbox if you want to confirm the setup of the tape reader before reading. 6 In the Reader Setup panel, select the required reader from the Reader Name list. 7 Click Setup to access the serial port settings. These settings must be the same as those set on the tape reader, or ES Designer will not be able to communicate with it. See Serial port settings for details. 8 Click Exit.

Setting up paper tape punches

Set up paper tape punches in ES Designer to select the machine format, and specify options such as labels, rewinding and punching in the reverse sequence.
Select machine format Click to access serial port settings Select required

reader Select to confirm tape reader setup before reading

Use Paper Tape Punch (File menu) to setup paper tape punches. ES 2006 Chapter 36 Setting up Hardware 840

To set up paper tape punches

1 Connect the tape punch using the accompanying instructions, and run ES Designer. 2 Select File > Paper Tape > Punch. The Choose Write Tape Type dialog opens. 3 From the Choose output machine list, select the required machine format. Note Make sure you select the correct format as it cannot be detected automatically by ES Designer. 4 Click OK. The Tape Manager dialog opens. 5 Select the Confirm Setup checkbox if you want to confirm the setup of the tape punch before punching. 6 From the Punch Name list, select the required tape punch.
Select machine format Click to access serial port settings Select options as required Select required tape punch Select to confirm punch setup before punching

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 841 Note The list contains a number of default entries. If the reader you want is not available, you can add a new one. See Setting up paper tape readers for details. 7 Click Setup to access the serial port settings. These settings must be the same as those set on the tape punch, or ES Designer will not be able to communicate with it. See Serial port settings for details. 8 Select the With Label checkbox to include a label with the design and type the label text in the field. The machine format and date are also included. 9 Select the AutoRewind at Start checkbox, if supported by the machine format, to automatically rewind the tape before stitching. 10 Select the Reverse Direction checkbox to punch in the reverse direction to the current stitching sequence. This lets you punch directly from tapes that were stored on take-up rolls without rewinding. 11 Click Exit.

Setting up scanners
ES Designer supports TWAIN-compatible scanners.

To set up scanners

1 Connect the scanner using the accompanying instructions. 2 Set it up in Windows using the accompanying instructions and/or the Microsoft Windows documentation. 3 Start ES Designer. 4 Select File > Scanner Setup. Use Scanner Setup (File menu) to setup scanners. ES 2006 Chapter 36 Setting up Hardware 842 The Select Source dialog opens displaying a list of scanner drivers

loaded on your computer. 5 Select the scanning driver to use, then click Select. Note If you have trouble with scanning after re-starting ES Designer, there may be a conflict with previously installed scanner drivers. Re-install ES Designer and test the scanner. If the selected scanner driver does not work in ES Designer, select another scanner driver from the list. There are usually two installed for each scanner.

Calibrating the monitor

To calibrate the monitor

You need to calibrate your monitor so that designs at 1:1 scale appear at real size. Do this when you first install ES Designer or whenever you change your monitor. 1 Select Special > Hardware Setup. The Hardware Setup dialog opens. 2 From the Type list, select Display Monitor.
Select scanning driver

Use Hardware Setup (Special menu) to calibrate the monitor.

Click to access screen calibration settings Select Display Monitor

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 843 3 Click Values. The Screen Calibration dialog opens. 4 Measure the height and width of the dialog box. 5 Enter the measurement in the Width and Height fields. 6 Click OK to return to the Hardware Setup dialog. 7 Click Close.
Measure width Measure height

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 844

Chapter 37

Using Digitizing Tablets

You can use a digitizing tablet and puck with ES Designer as an alternative to digitizing directly on-screen. To use a tablet, you place an enlargement drawing on the active area, and use the puck to mark reference points. You can also select commands with the puck and menu chart provided with the software. This section describes how to register both the menu chart and enlargement drawing on the digitizing tablet so that ES Designer can interpret the commands you select as well as the outlines you digitize. It also explains how to change the drawing scale, shift an enlargement drawing, and how to select preset spacing values using the menu chart. Note Before you start, you need to set up your digitizing tablet. See Setting up digitizing tablets for details.

Registering the menu chart

The menu chart provided with the software lets you select commands directly on the digitizing tablet. Before you can use it, you need to register it. A copy of the menu chart is provided in this manual together with a key to the menu chart icons. See Quick Reference for details. Tip If you prefer to use a bigger or smaller menu chart, scale ite.g. on a photocopierand register the scaled version.

To register the menu chart

1 Select Special > Tablet.

Use Tablet (Special menu) to register the menu chart. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 845 The Tablet Setup dialog opens. 2 In the Menu Chart panel, select the Register Menu checkbox. 3 Deselect all other checkboxes and click OK. 4 Place the menu chart on the digitizing tablet, leaving room for the enlargement drawing. 5 Click the three menu chart reference points with Button 1 of the digitizing puck.
Select Register Menu Menu Chart Menu Chart Ref Point 2 Menu Chart Ref Point 1 Digitizing Puck Button 1 Menu Chart Ref Point 3

ES 2006 Chapter 37 Using Digitizing Tablets 846 Note Unless you move the menu chart, you do not need to register it again.

Preparing an enlargement drawing

When you digitize with a tablet, you use an enlargement drawing to trace the shapes and outlines of the design in the same way you use backdrops on-screen. Before you start, you need to prepare the enlargement drawing.

To prepare an enlargement drawing

1 Convert the artwork to a technical drawing. Generally the drawing will be three times larger than the final embroidery. Tip If the drawing is in hard copy, scale it using a transparency projector or photocopier. If you used a graphics application to create the artwork, scale it before you print it out. 2 Modify the drawing to make it suitable for embroidery: ! Define shapes that can be easily filled with stitches. ! Overlap and distort shapes to compensate for push-pull. ! Draw digitizing guidelinese.g. stitch angle lines. 3 Draw origin and rotation reference points. These points set the position and orientation of the enlargement drawing on the digitizing tablet. Tip If the drawing is bigger than the digitizing tablet, enter additional points to help you shift the drawing as you digitize. See also Shifting an enlargement drawing. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 847 4 Write the name and scale of the enlargement drawing for future reference.

Registering an enlargement drawing

When you place an enlargement drawing on the digitizing tablet, you need to register it so ES Designer can interpret the design. To register an enlargement drawing, enter the scale, and digitize the origin and rotation points on the tablet. The origin and rotation points should be marked on the enlargement drawing. If they are not, you need to draw them in. Note The menu chart and enlargement drawing should not overlap. If they do, you may need to shift the design as you digitize, or move and re-register the menu chart. See Shifting an enlargement drawing and Registering the menu chart.

To register an enlargement drawing

1 Select Special > Tablet.

Use Tablet (Special menu) to register an enlargement drawing.

origin rotation reference point scale name flower

3:1 ES 2006 Chapter 37 Using Digitizing Tablets 848 The Tablet Setup dialog opens. 2 In the Drawing Scale panel, enter the scale of the enlargement drawing. Tip To calculate the scale, divide the height of the enlargement drawing by the required height of the final embroidery. Enlargement drawings are generally prepared at a scale of 3.00. 3 In the Drawing Position panel, select the Register Drawing checkbox. 4 In the Menu Chart panel, deselect the Register Menu checkbox. 5 In the Default panel, select the Save as defaults checkbox. This saves the registration information for this drawing so you do not have to re-register each time you resume digitizing. 6 Click OK. 7 Place the enlargement drawing on the digitizing tablet. 8 Click the origin and rotation points of the drawing with Button 1 of the digitizing puck.
Enter drawing scale Deselect Register menu Select Save as defaults Select Register Drawing

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 849 This completes the registration.

Changing the drawing scale

To change the drawing scale

You can change drawing scale during digitizing. When you change the scale, ES Designer automatically resizes the object outlines and regenerates the stitches. 1 Select Special > Tablet. The Tablet Setup dialog opens. 2 In the Drawing Scale panel, enter the new drawing scale. Tip To calculate the scale, divide the height the enlargement drawing by the required height of the final embroidery. Enlargement drawings are generally prepared at a scale of 3.00. 3 Select the Resize Design to Match Drawing checkbox. 4 In the Drawing Position panel, select the Register Drawing checkbox. Use Tablet (Special menu) to change the drawing scale.
origin rotation reference point flower 3:1 Enter new drawing scale Select Register Drawing Select Resize Design to Match Drawing

ES 2006 Chapter 37 Using Digitizing Tablets 850 5 Click OK. 6 Digitize the origin and the rotation reference points to re-register at the new size.

The design is resized to the new scale.

Shifting an enlargement drawing

If the drawing is bigger than the digitizing tablet, you can move it across the tablet and continue digitizing. To move a drawing you need to draw, and digitize, two additional reference points. These points must be over the active part of the digitizing tablet, both before and after the move. Note If the enlargement drawing overlaps the menu chart when you shift it, move the chart and register it again. See also Registering the menu chart.

To shift an enlargement drawing

1 Draw additional reference points on the enlargement drawing. Position the points so that they will be on the active part of the digitizing tablet both before and after the move. Tip If you are shifting the drawing up or down, draw the additional reference points horizontally. If you are shifting the drawing left or right, draw the reference points vertically. 2 Select Special > Tablet. The Tablet Setup dialog opens. 3 In the Drawing Position panel, select the Shift Drawing checkbox. 4 Deselect the Register Drawing and Register Menu checkboxes, and click OK. Use Tablet (Special menu) to shift an enlargement drawing.
Select Shift Drawing Deselect Register Drawing Deselect Register Menu

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 851 5 Click the additional reference points with Button 1 on the digitizing puck. 6 Move the drawing so that the part you want to digitize next is over the active area of the digitizing tablet, and click the additional reference points again. The drawing is re-registered in the new position.

Using a digitizing puck

With a digitizing tablet, you generally use a puck instead of a mouse to mark reference points and select commands from the menu chart. ES 2006 Chapter 37 Using Digitizing Tablets 852

To use a digitizing puck

! Position the cross-hairs of the puck over a point on the enlargement

drawing or menu square, then press one of the four buttons.

Selecting preset spacing values

Use the menu chart to select preset spacing values for Satin and Zigzag stitch types as well as preset stitch lengths for Run and Triple Run objects.

To select preset spacing values

1 Select the stitch type you want to use. Note For Satin stitch, turn off Auto Spacing. 2 Move the puck over the Spacing 1/2/3/4 menu chart icon and click the button that corresponds to the preset value you require. Function Button Mouse or keybd equivalent Description Digitize corner point 1 [ Digitize corner reference point when digitizing outlines. Digitize curve point 2 ] Digitize curve reference point when digitizing outlines. Terminate omitting last stitch

3 M Terminate input omitting last stitchi.e. the fill is terminated on the opposite side as the last input point. Toggle between selected fill stitch type and input method, and the Run input tool. Terminate including last stitch 4 R Terminate input including last stitchi.e. the fill is terminated on the same side as the last input point. Toggle between selected fill stitch type and input method, and the Manual input tool. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 853 Each button on the puck accesses the next preset style with different spacing values. For example, if the stitch type is Satin, clicking Button 1 accesses <PRESET_SATIN_1>. Button 2 accesses <PRESET_SATIN_2>, and so on. Tip The spacing value displays in the Status Line next to the stitch type. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 854

Chapter 38

Changing System Settings

ES Designer lets you adjust various system settings controlling the appearance of designs on screen, display of design information, the behavior of the design window, and other settings. This section describes how to change TrueView display, grid spacing and positioning, and design window scrolling options. It also describes how to save designs automatically as you work. There is also information about how to adjust the pointer position display, paste position options, and other general options. Note With the implementation of multiple colorways, the concept of the background changed. Background colors and fabrics are now considered design properties rather than system settings. In addition, display colors for borer, unsewn, selected, object outline, as well as grid and guides are also part of the colorway definition. See Working with colorways for details.

Setting design element view options

You can set options to show or hide design elements such as needle points, connector and function markers in your design. For example, view needle points to select stitches for editing, functions to check color changes or stops, and connectors to help position stitch entry and exit points. Note You can display or hide design guides in any combination. No design guides display while in TrueView.

To set design element view options

1 Select Special > Options. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 855 The Options > View Design dialog opens. 2 Select the options to display. ! TrueView: shows what the embroidery will look like. See also Viewing designs in TrueView. ! Stitches: all stitches in the design are visible. ! Outlines: all outlines in the design are visible. See also Viewing

stitches and outlines. ! Needle Points: all needle points in the design are visible. ! Connectors: all connectors in the design are visible. ! Function Symbols: all function symbols in the design are visible. See also Viewing needle points, connectors and functions.

Setting TrueView options

Change TrueView settings for different effects. You can: ! change the thickness of the pictured thread ! change the direction of the light source ! set the maximum number of colors to use.
Select design elements to display

Right-click to set TrueView (Standard toolbar) options. ES 2006 Chapter 38 Changing System Settings 856

To set TrueView options

1 Right-click the TrueView icon. The Options > View Design dialog opens. 2 Select the TrueView checkbox and click TrueView Options. The TrueView Options dialog opens. 3 Select a thread thickness from the Thread Thickness list. If you display a design at a zoom factor larger than actual size, select thick thread for good coverage. This only affects the TrueView display, not the actual thread values. To change thread thickness settings, see Adding your own colors to thread charts. 4 Select the lighting direction from the Light Source list.
Select TrueView Click to access TrueView 0ptions Select thread thickness Select light source Select maximum number of colors TrueViewthick thread, light above TrueViewthin thread, corner light

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 857 5 Enter the maximum number of colors to display in TrueView from the Max Number of Colors list. 6 Click OK.

Setting image viewing options

You can dim bitmap image backdrops on your screen to make it easier to view stitches when they are the same color as the image. You can also show colored vector images as outlines only. Dimming, however, only applies to bitmap imagesyou cannot dim vector drawings. Similarly, you cant show bitmap images as outlines only.

To set image viewing options

1 Right-click either the Show Bitmap or Show Vectors icon. The Options > View Image dialog opens. 2 To dim a bitmap image backdrop, select the Dimmed checkbox. Use Show Bitmap (Standard toolbar) to show and hide bitmap images. Right-click to set image display options. Use Show Vectors (Standard toolbar) to show and hide vector images. Right-click to set image display options.
Show vector outlines Dim bitmap image dimmed bitmap image original bitmap image

ES 2006 Chapter 38 Changing System Settings 858 3 To view a colored vector image as outlines, select the Show Wireframe checkbox.

4 Click OK.

Setting grid options

You can change grid spacing, select a reference point and turn Snap to Grid on or off in the Options dialog.

Setting grid reference point and spacing

Align the grid to a reference point in the designe.g. when you want a grid line to intersect the center of the design, or to sit under a particular object. See also Changing display colors.

To set grid reference point and spacing

1 Right-click the Grid icon. The Options > Grid and Guides dialog opens. 2 Select the Show Grid checkbox to display the grid.
Vector outlines only Original vector image

Right-click Show Grid (Standard toolbar) to set grid reference point and spacing.
Select to display grid Select to align grid to a point Enter horizontal and vertical spacing Click to save for current template

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 859 3 Select the Set Reference Point checkbox to align a significant point of the design with a grid line or grid point. For example, you can set the grid reference point to the design center. This is easier and faster than moving the whole design. 4 Enter Grid Spacing values for horizontal and vertical grid lines. Tip To use these settings as defaults for the current template, click Save. 5 Click OK. If you selected Set Reference Point, mark the reference point on your design. The grid aligns so that horizontal and vertical grid lines intersect at this point.

Setting Snap to Grid/Guides

Use the improved Snap to Grid and/or Snap to Guides feature to align objects in your design with the nearest grid or guide lines. Reference points, control points or leading edges of objects snap to grid and/or guides during digitizing, sizing, reshaping, or positioning operations. When any of these operations is taking place, grid or guide lines change color temporarily to indicate that snap to is active. Note Each design has its own set of guides and its own zero point for the rulers. When a design is saved, the ruler zero point and positions of the guides, if any, are saved with it. In the factory-shipped Normal template, rulers are on and there are no guides. If you save any template, the state of the rulers and guides are included in that template. Right-click Show Grid (Standard toolbar) to set the Snap to Grid and Snap to Guides options. Right-click Show Rulers and Guides (Standard toolbar) to set the Snap to Grid and Snap to Guides options.
Snap to Grid in X only Snap to Grid in X and Y

ES 2006 Chapter 38 Changing System Settings 860

To set Snap to Grid/Guides

1 Right-click the Grid or Rulers and Guides icon. The Options > Grid and Guides dialog opens. 2 Select the Show Grid checkbox if not already activated. 3 Select the Snap to Grid checkbox as required.

4 Select an axis setting from the Method list. ! In X and Y: snaps objects to the nearest horizontal and vertical grid line intersection. ! In X: snaps objects to the nearest horizontal grid line. ! In Y: snaps objects to the nearest vertical grid line. 5 Select the Show Rulers and Guides checkbox if not already activated. 6 Select the Snap to Guides checkbox as required. 7 Click OK. Tip To temporarily disable Snap to Grid/Guides as you digitize, hold down Alt.

Setting auto scroll options

Select Show Grid Select Snap to Grid Select Snap to Guides Select Show Rulers and Guides

Select Options > Auto Scroll (Special menu) to set Auto Scroll options. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 861 Use Auto Scroll to scroll the design automatically while you are digitizing. This can be more convenient than using panning or the scroll bars.

To set auto scroll options

1 Select Special > Options. The Options > View Design dialog opens. 2 Select the Auto Scroll tab. 3 Select the Auto Scroll checkbox to apply Auto Scroll. 4 Select the Move Pointer After Scroll checkbox to move the position of the pointer after each scroll. 5 Adjust the Autoscroll Response field as required. Enter smaller values to increase scrolling speed. 6 Select the pointer position after scrolling from the Move Input Point To list. ! Center: center of the window. Use this setting for large movements. ! Midway: halfway between the original pointer position and the center of the window. Use this setting for smaller movementse.g. when zooming into a small area of the design. ! Corner: the edge of the screen. Use this setting for slow scrolling. 7 Click OK. The effect of this setting will only become apparent when you start to digitize. The design window will automatically scroll to follow the current cursor position. Tip Hold down the Shift key to temporarily deactivate Auto Scroll.

Setting reshape options

Select Auto Scroll and Move Pointer After Scroll Adjust auto-scroll speed and pointer position

Select Options > Reshape (Special menu) to set object reshaping options. ES 2006 Chapter 38 Changing System Settings 862 Stitch generation during reshaping operations can slow down your system, depending on your computer specification. The Reshape options let you choose whether stitches are generated immediately or only after Enter is pressed.

To set reshape options

1 Select the Reshape tab by one of the following means: ! Right-click the Reshape Object icon in the pointer toolbar

! Select Special > Options > Reshape ! Select View > Design Options > Reshape.
2 Select amongst the three options for generating stitches immediately: Lettering and Motif Run checkboxes are selected by default. Outlines and stitches are updated immediately after reshaping. If left unchecked, any changes made are not updated until Enter is pressed.

Setting automatic save and backup options

Save your work automatically at regular intervals using Auto Save to protect you from losing work in the event of hardware or software failure. You can also create backup files for emergency use. Tip Backup files should be kept in a separate location to the original files, preferably off-site.

To set automatic save and backup options

1 Select Special > Options. The Options > View Design dialog opens.
Select object types for immediate stitch generation

Select Options (Special menu) to set automatic save and backup options. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 863 2 Select the General tab. 3 Select the Auto Save Design Every checkbox. 4 Enter the auto-save frequency in the Minutes field. 5 To create a backup every time you save a design, select the Always Create Backup Copy checkbox. The design will be saved in the BACKUP folder of your Wilcom ES installation. It will have the same name as the original file with the extension BAK. Warning Backup files remain in the BACKUP folder until you delete them. To prevent the folder from using too much hard disk space, delete unwanted files regularly. 6 Click OK.

Setting pointer position display

When you move the mouse or digitizer puck, the pointer position is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. You can optionally display the pointer position relative to the last digitized point or stitch point, or as an absolute value from the first needle point of the design.

Interpreting pointer position values

Select to auto-save designs Select to auto-backup designs

The X and Y values show the horizontal and vertical distance of the pointer from the relative or absolute point. The L value is the length of the line ES 2006 Chapter 38 Changing System Settings 864 connecting two points, while A is the angle of that line, relative to the horizontal. A negative X value indicates that the second point was placed to the left of the first point, while a negative Y value displays when the second point is below the first. Negative angles indicate angles of more than 180e.g. an angle of -60 is equal to 300. Tip You can measure on-screen distances using the values in the Status Bar. See Measuring distances on-screen for details.

Setting pointer position display options

You can optionally display the pointer position relative to the last digitized point or stitch point, or as an absolute value from the first needle point of the design.

To set pointer position display options

1 Select Special > Options.
X: horizontal Y: vertical L: length A: angle

X = 28.49 mm length = 32.90 mm Status bar 1 2 Y = 16.45 mm X = - 28.49 mm length = 32.90 mm 2 1 Y = -16.45 mm 90 0 135 180 -135 45 -45 -90 A = 30 2 1

Select Options (Special menu) to set pointer position display options. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 865 The Options > View Design dialog opens. 2 Select the General tab. 3 Select a Relative or Absolute setting for the pointer. ! Relative: shows pointer position relative to the last digitized point or stitch point. Useful while digitizing or editing stitches. ! Absolute: shows pointer position as an absolute value from the first needle point of the design. Useful for checking that the design fits a given area. 4 Click OK. Tip You can change the appearance of the pointer, so it displays as a cross-hair. See Setting other options for details.

Setting inserted embroidery file options

Whenever you copy and paste or insert an embroidery design or element from one file to another, the respective color palettes are merged. You have the option of adding the source palette to the target palette or of matching the source palette to the nearest colors in the target palette. Use the General tab to set one of these options as the default.

To set inserted embroidery file options

1 Select Special > Options. The Options > View Design dialog opens. 2 Select the General tab. 3 Select an inserted embroidery file option:
Select relative or absolute pointer position

Select Options (Special menu) to set inserted embroidery file options.

Select inserted embroidery file option

ES 2006 Chapter 38 Changing System Settings 866 ! Add to Palette: unique colors in the design are added to the current color palette. ! Match to Palette: when you insert a design, colors are matched to the current color palette. The system finds the nearest match based first on RGB values, and then on Brand and Code. Note Depending on the option selected, the Add/Match to Palette toggle button in the Embroidery Clipart Chooser defaults to in or out. See Viewing and selecting embroidery clipart for details.

4 Click OK.

Setting paste position options

You can control where an object is positioned when pasted into a design. The default is to paste objects at the position set by the coordinates in the Object Properties dialog. If you are pasting within the same design, this is the same position from which the object was copied or cut. Other paste position options are available. Note Paste options control the physical position of the object in the design, not its position in the stitching sequence.

To set paste position options

Colors added to palette Colors matched to palette

1 Select Special > Options. The Options > View Design dialog opens.

Select Options (Special menu) to set paste position options. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 867 2 Select the General tab. 3 Select a Paste position setting: ! Object Property Position: Objects are pasted according to the coordinates in the Object Properties dialog. ! Shift Pasted Objects: Objects are pasted slightly offset from their original position. ! Center at Current Stitch: Objects are centered at the current needle position marker. ! Start at Current Stitch: Objects are positioned after the current needle position marker. 4 Click OK.

Setting Object Property apply options

The most important dialog in ES Designer is the Object Properties dialog. This is a modeless dialog, meaning that it stays in the design window as long as you need it. By default, modified object properties to take effect immediately. Alternatively, set the default to apply settings by means of the control buttons at the bottom of the Object Properties dialog.
Select paste position setting Pasted object offset from original

Select Options (Special menu) to set default object property apply settings. ES 2006 Chapter 38 Changing System Settings 868

To set Object Property apply options

1 Select Special > Options. The Options > View Design dialog opens. 2 Select the General tab. 3 Select the required Object Properties option: ! Apply Changes Immediately: Any changes made to selected objects via the Object Properties dialog take effect immediately. ! Use Apply Button: Any changes made to selected objects via the Object Properties dialog take effect after pressing the Apply button. See also Accessing object properties. 4 Click OK.

Setting other options

Use the Special > Options > General tab to: ! Set stitch counts to display as cumulative totals ! Turn the small stitch filter on and off ! Change cursor type ! Check design integrity.

! Display design source when opening designs that may not scale well. ! Display measure tooltip when using the Measure command.
To set general options
Select object properties default

1 Select Special > Options. The Options > View Design dialog opens. Select Options (Special menu) to set stitch count display, small stitch filter, cursor type and integrity of the design. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 869 2 Select the General tab. 3 Select one or more of these options. ! Cumulative Stitch Count: displays stitch count as a cumulative total in the Stop Sequence tab of the Information dialog. See also Viewing design information in ES Designer. ! Run Small Stitch Filter on Output: automatically removes small stitches when the file is output to disk or machine. See also Removing small stitches automatically. ! Cross Hair Cursor: changes the default cursor pointer to cross-hairs for more precise positioning. It is best used together with the grid. ! Always Check Design Integrity: checks design integrity when opening a design and during digitizing. ! Show Measure Tooltip: shows length and angle in a tooltip when measuring distances on screen. See Measuring distances on-screen for details. ! Show Design Source: issues a warning dialog when opening designs that may not scale welli.e. where the design is a converted stitch or non-EMB outline format. Tip Use the tooltip with the crosshair cursor on for a more accurate measurement. 4 Click OK.
Select other general options

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 870

PART X PRODUCT DIFFERENTIATION

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 871

TABLE

Product Differentiation Table

Capability Feature 21L 21E 21D 45 65 Reference in Online Manual Basics Basic Procedures Toolbar docking and parking "! "! "! "! "! Toolbar docking and parking Context-sensitive popup menus ! ! ! ! ! Using popup menus Modeless object properties "! "! "! "! "! Accessing object properties Multiple undos/redos "! "! "! "! "! Undoing and redoing commands Open designs (EMB) ! ! ! ! ! Opening designs Create new designs (normal, custom templates) ! ! ! ! ! Creating new designs Generate stitches ! ! ! ! ! Generating stitches

Display grids, rulers and guides "! "! "! "! "! Displaying grids, rulers and guides Display measurements ! ! ! ! ! Measuring distances on-screen Select machine format ! ! ! ! ! Selecting machine formats Save designs ! ! ! ! ! Saving designs Object Selection Working with Design Objects Select all objects in a design ! ! ! ! ! Selecting all objects in a design Select individual objects "! "! "! "! "! Selecting objects with Select Object Select objects while traveling ! ! ! ! ! Selecting objects on the fly Select groups of objects ! ! ! ! Selecting objects with Polygon Select/Line Select Select objects by color ! ! ! ! Selecting objects by color Select objects by stitch type ! ! ! ! Selecting objects by stitch type Select objects with Color-Object List Color-Object List ! ! ! ! Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List Design Viewing Viewing Designs Zoom and pan designs "! "! "! "! "! Zooming and panning designs Show design in Overview window ! ! ! ! ! Working with the Overview Window Show / hide selected objects ! ! ! ! ! Showing and hiding selected objects Show objects by color ! ! ! ! ! Viewing design objects by color Show design outlines and stitches ! ! ! ! ! Viewing stitches and outlines Show design in TrueView TrueView ! ! ! ! ! Viewing designs in TrueView ! Included as standard #Cost option " New/improved feature/option L For lettering only LG For lettering and grouped objects only ES 2006 Product Differentiation Table 872 Show design needle points, connectors and functions ! ! ! ! ! Viewing needle points, connectors and functions Travel through design by stitches, color, function ! ! ! ! ! Viewing the stitching sequence Show stitch sequence Slow Redraw ! ! ! ! ! Redrawing the stitching sequence slowly Show multiple colorways "! "! "! "! "! Viewing colorways Change background "! "! "! "! "! Changing background colors and fabrics Change display colors "! "! "! "! "! Changing display colors Show design information in Windows Explorer ! ! ! ! ! Viewing design information in Windows Explorer Show design properties ! ! ! ! Viewing design information in ES Designer Estimate total thread usage ! ! ! ! Estimating total thread usage Name design elements ! ! ! ! Naming design elements via Design Properties Preview production worksheet ! ! ! ! ! Previewing production worksheets Show/hide vector images "! "! "! Showing and hiding backdrops Show/hide bitmap images ! ! ! ! ! Showing and hiding backdrops Input Methods Digitizing Methods Digitize individual stitches Manual ! ! ! ! ! Digitizing individual stitches Digitize individual stitches Triple Manual ! ! ! Digitizing individual stitches Digitize lines Run ! ! ! ! Digitizing lines Digitize columns and borders Input C # ! ! Digitizing columns of fixed width Digitize columns of varying width Input A ! ! ! Digitizing columns of varying width Digitize shapes with turning stitches Input B ! ! ! Digitizing asymmetrical columns of turning stitches Digitize complex shapes with fixed angle Complex Fill ! ! ! Creating complex shapes with fixed stitch angles Digitize complex shapes with turning angles

Fusion Fill # ! Creating complex shapes with turning stitches Digitize objects with holes ! ! ! Adding boundaries Outline and Fill Stitches Fill and Outline Stitches Single stitch Run ! ! ! ! Digitizing lines (Input Methods) Triple stitch Triple Run ! ! ! Digitizing lines (Input Methods) Satin stitch Satin L ! ! ! ! Creating fills with Satin stitch Satin Auto Spacing Auto Spacing L ! ! ! ! Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch Capability Feature 21L 21E 21D 45 65 Reference in Online Manual ! Included as standard #Cost option " New/improved feature/option L For lettering only LG For lettering and grouped objects only ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 873 Triple Satin Triple Satin L ! ! ! ! Adjusting Satin stitch count Tatami stitch Tatami L ! ! ! ! Creating fills with Tatami stitch Tatami backstitch L ! ! ! ! Selecting a Tatami backstitch Zigzag stitch Zigzag L ! ! ! ! Creating outlines with Zigzag stitch E Stitch E Stitch ! ! ! Creating outlines with E Stitch Backstitch and Stemstitch Backstitch ! ! ! Creating decorative outlines Colorways and Thread Charts Colorways and Thread Charts Change thread colors ! ! ! ! ! Changing thread colors Set up color palettes "! "! "! "! "! Setting up color palettes Multiple colorways "! "! "! "! "! Adding and deleting colorways Name design elements "! "! "! "! "! Naming design elements via the Color Palette Editor Split color blocks "! "! "! "! "! Splitting color blocks Match image colors to threads ! ! ! ! ! Matching image colors to threads Customize thread charts ! ! ! ! ! Customizing thread charts Automatic Connectors Connecting Embroidery Objects Apply automatic connectors L ! ! ! ! Using automatic connectors Add tie-offs and trims manually L ! ! ! ! Adding connectors manually Add empty stitches and empty jumps manually ! ! ! ! ! Adding empty stitches and empty jumps Add jumps with penetrations off manually L ! ! ! ! Adding jumps with penetrations off Adjust travel run stitch length ! ! ! ! Adjusting travel run stitch length Stitch Quality Improving Stitch Quality Apply automatic underlay Auto Underlay L ! ! ! ! Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays Apply pull compensation Pull Compensation L ! ! ! ! Compensating for fabric stretch Adjust column width Column Width L ! ! ! ! Adjusting column width Reverse stitch direction ! ! ! Reversing stitch direction Create smooth joins ! ! ! Creating smooth joins Reduce stitch bunching Stitch Shortening L ! ! ! ! Reducing stitch bunching with stitch shortening Capability Feature 21L 21E 21D 45 65 Reference in Online Manual ! Included as standard #Cost option " New/improved feature/option L For lettering only LG For lettering and grouped objects only ES 2006 Product Differentiation Table 874 Reduce stitch bunching Fractional Spacing L ! ! ! ! Reducing stitch bunching with fractional spacing Control corner stitching Smart Corners ! ! ! ! Controlling corner stitching Adjust stitch density LG ! ! ! ! Adjusting stitch density Remove small stitches automatically ! ! ! ! ! Removing small stitches automatically Set automatic start and end points Auto Start & End

"! "! "! "! "! Setting automatic start and end points Vector Images Digitizing with Vector Images Create vector outlinesopen, polygon, squares, circles Drawing # # ! Creating vector outlines Import vector images ! ! ! Importing and exporting vector images Export vector images ! ! Importing and exporting vector images Insert / paste vector images ! ! ! Importing and exporting vector images Smooth vector objects ! ! ! Smoothing vector objects Color vector objects ! ! ! Coloring vector objects Merge vector and embroidery objects Shaping # ! Merging vector and embroidery objects Trim vector and embroidery objects Shaping # ! Trimming vector and embroidery objects Split vector and embroidery objects Shaping # ! Splitting vector and embroidery objects Preserve original objects Shaping "# "! Preserving original objects Overlap shaped objects Shaping "# "! Overlapping shaped objects Bitmap Images Digitizing with Bitmap Images Scan bitmap images (using Win95 Twain) ! ! ! Scanning artwork into ES Designer Crop images ! ! ! Cropping images for digitizing Edit image using a graphics package ! ! ! Editing bitmaps in third-party applications Insert/paste bitmap images ! ! ! ! ! Inserting and saving bitmap images Save bitmap images as separate files ! ! ! ! ! Saving bitmap images as separate files Smooth bitmap images ! ! ! Smoothing bitmap images Image Processing Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing Reduce colors ! ! ! Preparing non-outlined images Sharpen outlines ! ! ! Preparing outlined images Capability Feature 21L 21E 21D 45 65 Reference in Online Manual ! Included as standard #Cost option " New/improved feature/option L For lettering only LG For lettering and grouped objects only ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 875 Automatic Digitizing Automatic Digitizing Convert artwork to vector drawing Auto Trace # "! ! Converting bitmaps to outlines with Auto Trace Convert artwork to embroidery objects Point & Stitch # "! ! Digitizing shapes with Point & Stitch Match palette colors to an image Match to Palette # # ! Matching palette colors to an image Automatic digitizing Smart Design ! ! ! Digitizing designs with Smart Design Create embroidery from photos Photo Flash ! ! ! ! ! Creating embroidery from photographs Combine and Resequence Combining and Resequencing Objects Combine objects and designscopy, paste, clone, etc "LG "! "! "! "! Combining objects and designs Split objects ! ! ! ! Splitting objects Resequence embroidery objects ! ! ! ! Resequencing embroidery objects Automatic object sequencing Branching ! ! Automatic branching Arrange and Transform Arranging and Transforming Objects Position, align and distribute objects "LG "! "! "! "! Positioning, aligning and distributing objects Group and lock objects "LG "! "! "! "! Grouping and locking objects Scale objects "LG "! "! "! "! Scaling objects Make objects same size "LG "! "! "! "! Making objects the same size Rotate objects "LG "! "! "! "! Rotating objects Skew objects "LG "! "! "! "! Skewing objects Mirror objects "LG "! "! "! "! Duplicating and mirroring objects Mirror-merge objects Mirror-Merge # ! Reflecting designs with Mirror-Merge

Create wreath objects Mirror-Merge # ! Creating wreaths with Mirror-Merge Convert and Reshape Converting and Reshaping Objects Convert between vector drawings and embroidery objects # ! ! Converting vector objects to embroidery Convert between Run and Triple or Input C objects ! ! ! ! Converting between run objects Convert Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill ! ! ! Converting Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill Convert Complex Fill to Auto Appliqu # ! ! Converting Complex Fill to Auto Appliqu Capability Feature 21L 21E 21D 45 65 Reference in Online Manual ! Included as standard #Cost option " New/improved feature/option L For lettering only LG For lettering and grouped objects only ES 2006 Product Differentiation Table 876 Reshape objects using control points "L "! "! "! "! Reshaping embroidery objects Reshape circle, star and ring objects ! ! ! ! Reshaping circle, star and ring objects Adjust stitch angles of Complex Fill objects ! ! ! ! ! Adjusting stitch angles Add stitch angles to Input A, Input B and Complex Fill objects ! ! ! Adjusting stitch angles Change entry / exit points L ! ! ! ! Changing entry and exit points Keep / omit last stitch ! ! ! Keeping or omitting the last stitch Stitches and Machine Functions Editing Stitches and Machine Functions Select and deselect stitches ! ! ! ! Selecting and deselecting stitches Insert, move or delete individual stitches ! ! ! ! Editing stitches Convert selected stitches to objects ! ! ! ! Converting selected stitches to objects Insert/edit/clear machine functions ! ! ! ! ! Editing machine functions Edit stitches and functions with Stitch List Stitch List ! ! ! ! Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List Filter stitches by function/stitch length Stitch List ! ! ! ! Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List Object Properties, Styles and Templates Object Properties, Styles and Templates Change properties of existing objects "! "! "! "! Changing properties of existing objects Make selected object properties current "! "! Making selected object properties current Modify current property settings "! "! "! Modifying current property settings Apply current settings to existing objects "! "! "! "! Applying current settings to existing objects Change default properties "L "! "! "! "! Changing default property settings Define styles ! ! Defining new styles Assign favorite styles ! ! Assigning favorite styles Merge styles ! ! Merging styles Create design templates ! ! ! ! ! Creating design templates Save current properties to a template L ! ! ! ! Saving current properties to a template

Revert to NORMAL template ! ! ! ! ! Reverting to the NORMAL template Capability Feature 21L 21E 21D 45 65 Reference in Online Manual ! Included as standard #Cost option " New/improved feature/option L For lettering only LG For lettering and grouped objects only ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 877 Specialized Digitizing Techniques Specialized Digitizing Techniques Create circles, stars and rings ! Digitizing circles, stars and rings Reinforce outlines Backtrack / Repeat ! ! Reinforcing outlines Remove underlying stitching # ! Removing underlying stitching Split long stitches Auto Split ! ! ! ! Splitting long stitches with Auto Split Preserve long stitches Auto Jump ! ! ! ! Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump Create offset outlines Offset Object "! "! Creating outlines and filling holes Fill holes in Complex Fill objects ! ! Filling holes in objects Add borders to designs "! "! "! "! Adding borders to designs Create appliqu designs Auto Appliqu # ! ! Digitizing for appliqu Create partial appliqu shapes Partial Appliqu # ! ! Creating partial cover appliqu objects Textured Fills Textured Fills Create textures with stippling Stipple "# "! "! Creating textures with stippling Create textures with Tatami offsets Tatami Offset "L "! "! "! "! Creating textures with Tatami offsets Create textures with program splits Program Split "! "! "! Creating textures with program splits Create textures with Flexi Split Flexi Split ! ! Creating textures with Flexi Split Create user-defined split effects User-Defined Split ! Creating user-defined splits Artistic Stitch Effects Artistic Stitch Effects Create Jagged Edges Jagged Edge ! ! ! Creating jagged edges Create open stitching with Trapunto Trapunto ! ! Creating open stitching with Trapunto Create Accordion Spacing Accordion Spacing # ! Creating accordion spacing effects Create Color Blending Color Blending # ! Creating color blending effects Create Contour Stitch and Spiral Stitch Contour ! ! Creating contoured stitch effects Create curved fills with Florentine Effect Florentine Effect ! ! Creating curved fills with Florentine Effect Create curved fills with Liquid Effect Liquid Effect ! ! Creating curved fills with Liquid Effect Motif Runs and Fills Motif Runs and Fills Create motif runs Motif Run "# "! "! Creating motif runs Create motif fills Motif Fill "# "! "! Creating motif fills Capability Feature 21L 21E 21D 45 65 Reference in Online Manual ! Included as standard #Cost option " New/improved feature/option L For lettering only LG For lettering and grouped objects only ES 2006 Product Differentiation Table 878 Create 3D effects with motif fills 3D Warp ! ! Applying 3D effects to motif fills Insert single motifs # ! ! Selecting and inserting single motifs Rotate, mirror and scale motifs # ! ! Rotating, mirroring and scaling motifs Create motifs # ! ! Saving motifs Create motif sets # ! ! Creating motif sets Sequins and Boring Sequins and Boring Set up custom sequin palette "# "# "! Setting up custom sequin palettes Create sequin runs Sequin Run "# "# "! Creating sequin runs Digitize individual sequins Sequin Manual "! "! "! "! Digitizing individual sequins Convert sequin artwork to Sequin Run "# "# "! Converting sequin artwork to Sequin Run

Scale and reshape sequin runs "! "! "! "! Scaling and reshaping sequin runs Digitize boring holes "! "! "! "! Digitizing boring holes Embroidery Lettering Embroidery Lettering Add lettering to embroidery designs "! "! "! "! "! Adding lettering to embroidery designs Add baselineshorizontal, vertical, arc, circle, custom ! ! ! ! ! Working with lettering baselines Format letteringitalic, bold, justified ! ! ! ! ! Formatting lettering Adjust letter spacing "! "! "! "! "! Adjusting letter spacing Edit lettering text ! ! ! ! ! Editing lettering text Scale lettering ! ! ! ! ! Scaling lettering Skew and rotate lettering objects ! ! ! ! ! Transforming lettering objects Adjust individual lettersreposition, transform, reshape, recolor ! ! ! ! ! Adjusting individual letters Adjust and reshape baselines ! ! ! ! ! Adjusting baselines Change stitch types of lettering objects ! ! ! ! ! Changing lettering stitch types Adjust lettering stitching sequence ! ! ! ! ! Adjusting letter sequencing Change lettering join method ! ! ! ! ! Changing lettering join method Adjust lettering underlay settings "! "! "! "! "! Adjusting lettering underlay settings Add special characters and symbols ! ! ! ! ! Adding special characters and symbols Create special effects with envelopes ! ! ! ! ! Creating special effects with envelopes Capability Feature 21L 21E 21D 45 65 Reference in Online Manual ! Included as standard #Cost option " New/improved feature/option L For lettering only LG For lettering and grouped objects only ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 879 Add multiple names to designs Team Names ! ! ! ! ! Team lettering View and edit individual team names Team Names ! ! ! ! ! Viewing and modifying individual team names Create individual designs with team names Team Names ! ! ! ! ! Creating individual designs with team names Create a matrix of team name designs Team Names "! "! "! "! "! Creating a matrix of team name designs Custom Alphabets Custom Alphabets Convert TrueType fonts to embroidery alphabets Convert TTF "! "! "! ! ! Converting TrueType fonts to embroidery alphabets Automatic letter kerning Auto Kerning "! "! "! "! "! Automatic letter kerning User-refined alphabets "! "! "! "! "! User-refined alphabets Create custom alphabets # # ! Creating custom alphabets Merge alphabets ! ! ! ! ! Merging alphabets Design Formats Processing Design Files Convert stitch files to EMB format ! ! ! ! ! Opening stitch files in ES Designer Open/save designs in Melco CND format ! ! ! ! ! Opening Melco CND outline files Color merge Melco CND files ! ! ! ! ! Color merging Melco CND files Reassign colors to stitch/CND files ! ! ! ! Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files Machine Formats Changing Machine Formats Output to different machine formats ! ! ! ! ! Outputting to different machine formats Create custom machine formats ! ! ! ! ! Creating custom formats Modify standard machine formats ! ! ! ! ! Adjusting standard machine format settings

Adjust standard machine format settings (stitch/jump length, trim, color change, boring) ! ! ! ! ! Adjusting standard machine format settings Adjust advanced machine format settings (color change sequence, start/end design, speed) ! ! ! ! ! Adjusting advanced machine format settings Design Output Outputting Designs Print / plot production worksheets ! ! ! ! ! Printing or plotting production worksheets Customize production worksheet information ! ! ! ! ! Customizing production worksheet information Capability Feature 21L 21E 21D 45 65 Reference in Online Manual ! Included as standard #Cost option " New/improved feature/option L For lettering only LG For lettering and grouped objects only ES 2006 Product Differentiation Table 880 Print backgrounds on production worksheets ! ! ! ! ! Customizing production worksheet information Print multiple colorways ! ! ! ! ! Printing multiple colorways Print color blocks ! ! ! ! ! Printing color film Print appliqu patterns ! ! ! ! ! Printing appliqu patterns Send designs as email attachments ! ! ! ! ! Sending designs as email attachments Save designs as vector images ! ! Saving designs as vector images Save designs as bitmap images ! ! ! ! ! Capturing designs as bitmap images Cut appliqu shapes ! ! ! Cutting appliqu shapes Stitch designs to machine with Stitch Manager ! ! ! ! ! Stitching designs with Stitch Manager Stitch designs to machine with ES Machine Manager (1-4 machines only) ! ! ! ! ! ES Machine Manager Supplement Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes Read designs from embroidery disk "! "! "! "! "! Reading designs from embroidery disk Format embroidery disks ! ! ! ! ! Formatting embroidery disks Save designs to embroidery disk "! "! "! "! "! Saving designs to embroidery disk Read designs from paper tape ! ! ! ! ! Reading designs from paper tape Punch designs to paper tape ! ! ! ! ! Punching designs to paper tape Embroidery Clipart Embroidery Clipart View and select embroidery clipart "# "# "# "# "# Viewing and selecting embroidery clipart Search and sort embroidery clipart "# "# "# "# "# Searching and sorting embroidery clipart Record designs to the clipart library "# "# "# "# "# Recording designs to the clipart library Assign keywords to clipart "# "# "# "# "# Assigning keywords to clipart Add, modify and delete keywords "# "# "# "# "# Adding, modifying and deleting keywords Import and export keywords "# "# "# "# "# Importing and exporting keywords Design Management (ES Design Explorer) Design Management View design thumbnails and summary information ! ! ! ! ! Displaying design thumbnails and summary information View zipped designs in folders ! ! ! ! ! Viewing zipped designs in folders Change locales ! ! ! ! ! Changing locale Modify user preferences ! ! ! ! ! Modifying user preferences Capability Feature 21L 21E 21D 45 65 Reference in Online Manual ! Included as standard #Cost option " New/improved feature/option L For lettering only LG For lettering and grouped objects only ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 881 Customize design lists ! ! ! ! ! Customizing design lists View design properties ! ! ! ! ! Viewing design properties

Browse designs in folders ! ! ! ! ! Browsing through designs in folders Browse with slide show ! ! ! ! ! Browsing designs using slide show buttons Open designs in ES Designer ! ! ! ! ! Opening designs in ES Designer Create new designs with custom templates ! ! ! ! ! Creating new designs with custom templates Run simple and complex sorts ! ! ! ! ! Sorting files in folders Limit file types displayed ! ! ! ! ! Limiting file types displayed Email designs direct ! ! ! ! ! Emailing designs direct Stitch and punch designs direct ! ! ! ! ! Stitching and punching designs direct Print production worksheets ! ! ! ! ! Printing production worksheets Print design catalogs ! ! ! ! ! Printing design catalogs Publish design catalogs for browser viewing ! ! ! ! ! Publishing design catalogs for browser viewing Export design catalogs ! ! ! ! ! Exporting design catalogs Convert design files in folders ! ! ! ! ! Converting design files in folders Archive design files ! ! ! ! ! Archiving design files Rename, add and delete folders ! ! ! ! ! Renaming, adding and deleting folders Copy and paste designs ! ! ! ! ! Copying and pasting designs Rename designs in folders ! ! ! ! ! Renaming designs in folders Delete designs ! ! ! ! ! Deleting designs Peripheral Devices Setting up Hardware Serial / parallel ports support ! ! ! ! ! Peripheral device connection settings Network support ! ! ! ! ! Peripheral device connection settings Ethernet support ! ! ! ! ! Peripheral device connection settings Digitizer tablet support ! ! ! Setting up digitizing tablets Embroidery machine support ! ! ! ! ! Setting up embroidery machines Paper tape reader and punch support ! ! ! ! ! Setting up paper tape readers and punches Scanner support ! ! ! Setting up scanners Calibrate monitor ! ! ! ! ! Calibrating the monitor Capability Feature 21L 21E 21D 45 65 Reference in Online Manual ! Included as standard #Cost option " New/improved feature/option L For lettering only LG For lettering and grouped objects only ES 2006 Product Differentiation Table 882 Digitizing Tablets Using Digitizing Tablets Register menu chart ! ! ! Registering the menu chart Register enlargement drawing ! ! ! Preparing an enlargement drawing Change drawing scales ! ! ! Changing the drawing scale System Settings Changing System Settings Set design element view options ! ! ! ! ! Setting design element view options Set TrueView options ! ! ! ! ! Setting TrueView options Set image viewing options ! ! ! ! ! Setting image viewing options Set grid options "! "! "! "! "! Setting grid options Set auto scroll options ! ! ! ! ! Setting auto scroll options Set reshape options "! "! "! "! "! Setting reshape options Set automatic save and backup options ! ! ! ! ! Setting automatic save and backup options Set the pointer position display ! ! ! ! ! Setting pointer position display Set paste options LG ! ! ! ! Setting paste position options Set general options ! ! ! ! ! Setting other options Capability Feature 21L 21E 21D 45 65 Reference in Online Manual ! Included as standard #Cost option " New/improved feature/option L For lettering only LG For lettering and grouped objects only ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 883

PART XI QUICK REFERENCE

ES 2006 Introduction 884

Introduction

All commands in ES Designer can be accessed via the various menus, both dropdown and popup, toolbar icons, menu chart (for use with digitizing tablets), as well as access and shortcut keys. Many commands can be accessed by more than one method. The Command Reference lets you see at a glance which method best suits you. It will also help DG/ML and Punchant Designer users who have converted to ES Designer to identify where equivalent commands are located. Note While the Graphical User Interface (GUI) elements in ES Designer are organized somewhat differently to DG/ML and Punchant, they provide exactly the same functionality, and more.

ES Designer main window

Design Window Title and Menu bars Standard toolbar Stitch Types toolbar Color toolbar Status bar Prompt line Pointer toolbar Input toolbar General object properties Show Vertical toolbar Travel toolbar Image toolbar

This image shows the main Graphical User Interface (GUI) elements for ES Designer.

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 885

Equivalent Feature Names

This table lists equivalent feature names for the three products, Wilcom ES, DG/ML, and Punchant. For more information about these features, refer to the Command Reference Table below. Wilcom ES DG/ML Punchant 3D Warp 3D Effect 3D Effect Branching Smart Connect Branching Coil Swirl Swirl Convert True Type Font Smart Font Quick Font Cut Appliqu Cut Appliqu Print Drawing Objects Filled Holes Fill Holes Auto Fill Holes Flexi Split Elastic Split Stream Split Florentine Effect Curve Line Fill Wave Effect Island Coil Island Swirl Contour Swirl Liquid Effect Two Curve Fill Double Wave Effect Offset Object Parallel Offset Parallel Offset Paste Vectors Paste Special Paste Special Perpendicular Fill Lattice Lattice Photo Flash Image Shot Picture Stitch Point & Stitch Point & Stitch Auto Convert Slow Redraw Slow Redraw Redraw Controller Smart Design Smart Design Quick Stitch Team Names Name Merge Name Drop ES 2006 Command Reference Table 886

Command Reference Table

This table lists all the commands available in ES Designer and details of how to access them. Note that, in the case of popup menus, the table shows the context in which a given menu displays; this may include the design window, stitch list, etc. For details of toolbar names, check also the ES Designer main window. The listing is grouped according to the chapters of the User Manual. For further information about each command, refer to the relevant chapter. For details about the Chenille and Schiffli commands, refer to the relevant User Manual Supplements. For details of how to use the tablet icons, refer to the Menu Chart appendix in the User Manual. Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut Basics About ES Help Close File A+F+C Cross Stitch Insert Exit File A+4 Generate Stitches Stitch Generate g Help Topics Help 1 Measure View m New File Standard C+N Online Manual Help Open File Standard A+F+O or C+O Quick Reference Guide Help Redo Edit Standard C+Y Release Notes Help Request Form Help Save File Standard A+f+S or C+S ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 887 Save as File A+f+A or C+S Security Special Show Image Toolbar Show Vertical Grid and Guides View Show Grid ] Standard V+G Show Rulers and Guides ] Standard C+R Show Input Toolbar Show Vertical Show Pointer Toolbar Show Vertical Show Travel Toolbar Show Vertical Toolbars View Undo Edit Standard C+Z Wilcom Web page Help New Window Window Cascade Window Tile Horizontally Window Tile Vertically Window Arrange Icons Window Split Window Window Design Viewing Center Current Stitch View 6 or C Design Properties File Overview Window View Standard V+v Pan View 7 or P

Previous View View 5 or V Redraw View 4 or R Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Command Reference Table 888 Show Connectors ] Standard V+C Show Functions ] SL Standard V+F Show Needle Points ] Standard . (period) Show Outlines ] Standard L Show Stitches ] Standard S TrueView ] Standard T View By Color View Show All > Design View DW Zoom 2 or 0 (zero) Show All > Selected Object View DW V+0 Zoom 1:1 View Zoom 1 Zoom Box View DW Zoom 8 or B Zoom Box in Overview Window Zoom V+B Zoom Factor View 3 or F Zoom In 2X View Zoom 9 or z Zoom Out 2X View Zoom 0 or V+z Show (hidden object) COL Hide (selected object) COL Hide Others COL V+S Unhide All COL E+V+S Show Bitmaps ] Standard D Show Vectors ] Standard Object Selection Add Next Object to Selection C+Ta Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 889 Add Previous Object to Selection C+V+ Ta Deselect All Edit DW or COL E / X Color-Object List View Standard V+l Polygon Select = Pointer C+l Line Select = Pointer Select All Edit DW or COL C+A Select at Current Needle Position V+O Select By > Color Edit Select By > Stitch Type Edit Select Object Below 2+[ Select Next Object T Select Previous Object V+T Select Multiple Objects C+[ Select Range of Objects V+[ Select Object Tool Pointer O Selects On / Off Edit Standard Q

Viewing Stitching Sequence Slow Redraw View V+R Start / End Design = Travel h / e Travel 1 Stitch = Travel l / r Travel 10 Stitches = Travel t / b Travel 100 Stitches = Travel - / + Travel 1000 Stitches = Travel Travel by Color = Travel z / x Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Command Reference Table 890 Travel by Function = Travel Travel by Object = Travel V+T / C+T Travel by Segment = Travel C+l / r Manual Digitizing Change between Fill Stitch and Manual R Change between Fill Stitch and Run s Embroidery Object > Input A ] Insert Input Embroidery Object > Input B ] Insert Input Embroidery Object > Input C ] Insert Input Embroidery Object > Fusion Fill ] Insert Input Embroidery Object > Complex Fill ] Insert Input Embroidery Object > Manual Insert Input Embroidery Object > Run ] Insert Input V+N Embroidery Object > Triple Manual Insert Input Embroidery Object > Triple Run ] Insert Input Embroidery Object > Backstitch ] Insert Input Embroidery Object > Stemstitch ] Insert Input Embroidery Object > Motif Run ] Insert Input Finish Digitizing a Complex/Fusion Fill Boundary R Finish Digitizing an Object Keep Last Stitch R Finish Digitizing an Object Omit Last Stitch s Delete Last Input Point B Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 891 Fill Stitches Stitch Effects Stitch Stitch Type > E Stitch ] Stitch Stitch Type Stitch Type > Satin ] Stitch Stitch Type V+I Stitch Type > Tatami ] Stitch Stitch Type V+M Stitch Type > Zigzag ] Stitch Stitch Type Object Properties, Styles and Templates Apply Current Properties Stitch DW Styles

Apply Style Stitch Styles Define Style Stitch Make Properties Current DW Styles Use Style Favorite 1 ] DW Styles Object Properties = View or Stitch DW or COL Standard Colorways and Thread Charts Match Bitmap Color DW Set Color Machine Current Colorways o Color Multi-Colorway Box Color Background Color Color Slot Color Add Color to Palette Color Compact Palette Color Split Palette Color Color Color Palette Editor Color Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Command Reference Table 892 Connecting Embroidery Objects Empty/Empty Jump Function = Pointer Penetrations Machine Generate Tie-off Pointer Trim Pointer Bitmaps Insert File Image Paste Vector > As Bitmap Edit Paste Vector > As Vector Edit Save Bitmap As File Scan File Smooth Vector Curves Image Crop Bitmap Image Crop Bitmap with Polygon Image Edit Bitmap Using > Corel PHOTO-PAINT Image Edit Bitmap Using > Paint Image Edit Bitmap Using > Paint Shop Pro Image Reduce Colors Image DW Image Sharpen Edges Image DW Image Vectors Draw Vector > Ellipse Image Image Draw Vector > Line Image Image Draw Vector > Polygon Image Image Draw Vector > Polyline Image Image Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 893 Draw Vector > Rectangle Image Image Make Complex Shape Image V+H Shaping

Shaping > Weld Arrange DW Shaping Shaping > Intersect Arrange DW Shaping Shaping > Exclude Arrange DW Shaping Shaping > Front-Back Arrange DW Shaping Shaping > Back-Front Arrange DW Shaping Shaping > Flatten Arrange DW Shaping Shaping > Divide Arrange DW Shaping Shaping > Combine Arrange DW Shaping Shaping > Keep Source Objects Shaping Shaping > Overlaps Automatic Digitizing Auto Trace Image UC+m Convert > Stitch Angles Special DW Pointer C+H Convert > Complex Fill DW Input Convert > Input C DW Input Convert > Auto Applique DW Input Convert > Run DW Input Convert > Triple Run DW Input Convert > Motif Run DW Input Convert > Backstitch DW Input Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Command Reference Table 894 Convert > Stemstitch DW Input Convert > Drawing DW Point & Stitch (Toolbar) View C+I Match to Palette Point & Stitch Outline Run Point & Stitch Pickout Run Point & Stitch Tatami Fill Point & Stitch Tatami Fill without Holes Point & Stitch Turning Satin Point & Stitch Photo Flash Insert Smart Design Insert Combining and Resequencing Branching Edit COL Standard I Copy Edit DW Standard UC+C or V+D Cut Edit DW Standard UC+X or C+Z Delete Edit DW X Duplicate Edit DW C+d Paste Edit Standard C+v or V+Z Paste > Center at Current Stitch DW Paste > Object Property Position DW Paste > Shift Pasted Objects DW Paste > Start at Current Stitch DW Resequence > By Selects Edit Resequence > By Color Edit

Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 895 Split Object Edit Arranging Objects Group Arrange COL Arrange C+g Ungroup Arrange COL Arrange C+U Lock Arrange COL Arrange k Unlock Arrange COL V+K Unlock All COL Arrange Align Left Arrange Arrange Align Horizontal Centers Arrange Arrange Align Right Arrange Arrange Align Top Arrange Arrange Align Vertical Centers Arrange Arrange Align Bottom Arrange Arrange Align Center Arrange Arrange Space Evenly > Across Arrange Arrange Space Evenly > Down Arrange Arrange Make Same Size > Width Arrange Arrange Make Same Size > Height Arrange Arrange Make Same Size > Both Arrange Arrange Transforming Objects Array Mirror-Merge Reflect Mirror-Merge Rows Row Spacing Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Command Reference Table 896 Columns Column Spacing Wreath Mirror-Merge Kaleidoscope Mirror-Merge Wreath Points Radius Initial Angle Transform Edit Transform Special Edit Mirror Horizontally DW Transform Mirror Vertically DW Transform Rotate 45 CCW Transform Rotate 45 CW Transform Rotate Skew Reshaping and Editing Change Reshape Node Type [+s Keep Last Stitch/Omit Last Stitch = Pointer Maintain proportions while resizing V+; Move Object horizontal or

vertical C+; Nudge selected object [+r Reshape Object Pointer H Stitch Angles Special Pointer C+H Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 897 Show Reshape Nodes Reshape A+N Show Stitch Angles Reshape A+a Show Start/End Reshape Stitch and Function Editing Background Color SL Black text SL Clear Function Machine SL Edit Function Machine SL Insert Function Machine SL Move Stitch (dialog) SL MultiColored text SL Select / Deselect Stitches T Set Color Machine Show All (Stitches) SL Show Functions SL Show Stitches (dialog) SL Stitch Edit Pointer E Stitch List View Standard V+J Stop Machine Stitch Quality Auto Jump ] Stitch Types Auto Spacing These options can only be accessed via the Object Auto Split Properties > Fills > Satin Auto Start and End ] Stitch Generate Auto Underlay ] Stitch Types U Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Command Reference Table 898 Fractional Spacing ] Stitch Types Pull Compensation ] Stitch Types Reverse Curves Image Shortening ] Stitch Types Small Stitches Stitch Smart Corners ] Stitch Types Specialized Digitizing Backtrack = Pointer Repeat = Pointer Borers Machine Generate Embroidery Object > Auto Applique ] Insert Input Partial Applique ] Stitch Embroidery Object > Circle = Insert Input Embroidery Object > Ring ] Insert Input Embroidery Object > Star = Insert Input

Filled Holes Insert Offset Object Insert Remove Overlaps Arrange Artistic Effects Accordion Spacing ] Stitch Types Trapunto ] Stitch Type Color Blending ] Insert Generate Flexi Split ] Stitch Types Jagged Edge ] Stitch Types Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 899 Make Program Split Special Make Line(s) for > Florentine Effect ] Special Stitch Types Make Line(s) for > Liquid Effect ] Special Stitch Types Make Line(s) for > User Defined Split ] Special Stitch Types Stitch Type > Contour ] Stitch Stitch Types Stitch Type > Program Split ] Stitch Stitch Types Stipple Fill ] Generate Motif Runs and Fills 3D Warp ] Stitch Types Embroidery Object > Motif Run ] Insert Input Motif > Make Special Motif > Use Special Stitch Type > Motif Fill ] Stitch Stitch Types Sequins Vectors to Sequins Sequin Sequin Manual Sequin Sequin Run Auto Sequin Sequin Run Manual Sequin Select Sequin Shape Add to Sequin Palette Sequin Clipart Clipart > Show Clipart Special Clipart Clipart > Record to Clipart Special Clipart C+E Clipart > Manage Keywords Special Clipart Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Command Reference Table 900 Clipart > Set Design Workflow as Enterprise Engine Special Lettering Embroidery Object > Lettering ] Insert Input a Envelope > Bridge Edit Envelope > Delete Edit Envelope > Diamond Edit Envelope > Pennant Edit Envelope > Perspective Edit Team Names Insert Input Team List View Standard

Custom Alphabets Alphabet > Convert True Type Font Special Alphabet > Make Letter Special Alphabet > Modify Alphabet Special Alphabet > Managing User-Refined Letters Special Alphabet > Save Letter Special Alphabet > Update Kerning Values Special Design Output Process Edit Generate Recognize Object Outlines Edit Machine Format Values Machine Select Machine Format Machine Capture Design Bitmap File Cut Appliqu File Export As File Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 901 Print File Standard A+f+p or C+p Print Preview File Standard Record in Database File Send File Stitch to Machine Manager File Stitch to Stitch Manager File Standard Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes Embroidery Disk > Format File Embroidery Disk > Open File Embroidery Disk > Save As File Embroidery File > DOS Disk Insert Embroidery File > Embroidery Disk Insert Paper Tape > Punch File Paper Tape > Read File Open As Standard Save to Embroidery Disk Standard Hardware Setup and System Settings Hardware Setup Special Scanner Setup File Design Options View Options Special Turn off automatic scroll V (hold down) Digitizing Tablet Backspace Enter Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Command Reference Table 902

Information Insert Auto Frame Menu Chart Help No Preset Spacing Shift Drawing Shift Menu Space Tab Tablet Special V+D Yes R Chenille Chain Chenille Option Chenille Manual Supplement Help Compound Chenille ] Chenille Option Moss Chenille Option Needle Height Chenille Option Stitch Type > Coil ] Stitch Chenille Option Stitch Type > Island Coil ] Stitch Chenille Option Stitch Type > Perpendicular Fill ] Stitch Chenille Option Stitch Type > Straight ] Stitch Chenille Option View by Machine Function > Chain / Moss View Schiffli Design Repeat Special V+W Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 903 Schiffli Repeats View W Show Repeats Schiffli W Schiffli Arrangement Special Blatt Machine > Insert Function SL > Insert Function Schiffli [ Stepp ditto ditto Schiffli ] End Jump ditto ditto Schiffli Begin Jump ] ditto ditto Schiffli Slow ditto ditto Schiffli Fast ditto ditto Schiffli Borer In ditto ditto Schiffli Borer Out ditto ditto Schiffli Borer Depth ditto ditto ; Boring Tension Start / Boring Tension End \ RPM- ditto ditto Schiffli " RPM+ ditto ditto Schiffli :

Fadenleiter- ditto ditto Schiffli > Fadenleiter+ ditto ditto Schiffli < Thread Brake- ditto ditto Schiffli Thread Brake+ ditto ditto Schiffli Drop Sequin ditto ditto Schiffli View by Machine Function > Stepp/Blatt View Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Command Reference Table 904 View by Machine Function > Schiffli Needles In/Out View Clear Function Machine SL Schiffli Edit Function Machine SL Command Dropdown Menu Popup Menu Toolbar Tablet Shortcut ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to
toggle these functions. Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 905

Keyboard Shortcuts
General functions
To .. Press start new design C+N open design C+O or A+F+O close design A+F+C save design C+S or A+f+S save as A+f+A print design C+P or A+f+p record to clipart C+E show/hide Point & Stitch toolbar C+I show/hide Grid V+G show/hide Rulers and Guides V+G show/hide Overview window V+V show/hide Color-Object List V+L show Stitch List V+J open Lettering dialog A open digitizing tablet setup V+D measure distance on-screen M undo command C+Z redo command C+Y cancel command E open online help 1 exit application A+4

Digitizing functions
To .. Press finish digitizing object (keep last stitch) R finish digitizing object (omit last stitch)

s finish digitizing Complex Fill/Fusion Fill boundary R delete last input point B generate stitches G apply Satin stitch V+I apply Tatami stitch V+M apply Run stitch V+N switch between fill and run stitch s switch between fill and manual stitch R switch between continuous and normal Input A V+A toggle Auto Underlay on/off u activate Auto Trace C+M activate Branching I make Complex Shape vector object V+H

Selecting objects
To .. Press select all objects C+A deselect all objects E or X activate Select Object tool o deactivate Select Object tool E select object at current needle position V+O select multiple objects C+[ select range of objects V+[ select next object T select previous object V+T select object beneath 2+[ add next object to selection C+T add previous object to selection C+V+T activate Polygon Select tool C+L toggle Selects On/Off Q group selected objects C+G ungroup selected objects C+U lock selected object K unlock all locked objects V+K

Viewing designs
To .. Press or toggle TrueView on/off T show/hide stitches S show/hide outlines L show/hide needle points . (period) show/hide connectors V+C show/hide function symbols V+F show whole design E, V+s * Turn TrueView off

Digitizing functions (cont)

To .. Press ES 2006 Keyboard Shortcuts 906 fit design to window 0 (zero) 2 fit selected objects to window V+0 (zero) hide others V+s show/hide image D zoom in 2X Z 9 zoom out 2X V+Z 0 zoom to 1:1 scale (100%) 1 specify zoom factor F 3

zoom box B 8 zoom box in Overview window V+B activate panning P 7 deactivate Auto Scroll V (hold down) center current stitch in design window C6 return to previous view V 5 redraw screen r 4 activate Slow Redraw * V+R

Viewing stitching sequence

To travel .. Press or to start of design h 7 to end of design e 1 to next color d 3 to previous color u 9 to next segment * C+r C+6 to previous segment * C+l C+4 to next object C+T to previous object V+T 100 stitches forward ^ + 100 stitches backward ^ 10 stitches forward ^ b 2 10 stitches backward ^ t 8 1 stitch forward ^ r 6 1 stitch backward ^ l 4 select/deselect stitches *T * Stitch Edit tool selected ^ No object selected Keypad, Num Lock off

Viewing designs (cont)

To .. Press or * Turn TrueView off

Cutting & pasting objects

To .. Press or cut object C+X V+D copy object C+C C+Z paste object C+V V+Z duplicate object C+D delete selected objects or last object D

Modifying objects & stitches

To .. Press or click move selected object horizontally or vertically * C+: nudge selected object [+t b l r maintain proportions while resizing V+: activate Reshape Object tool H activate Show Stitch Angles tool A+a activate Show Reshape Nodes tool A+N change reshape node type ^ [+M activate Stitch Angles tool C+H activate Stitch Edit tool E add stitch angles (Fusion Fill) C+H check design integrity ! * Drag object Drag handle ^ Select control point

Schiffli functions
To .. Press insert Blatt/Stepp function [ ] insert Fadenleiter Plus/Minus < >

insert Boring Tension Start/End / \ insert RPM Plus/Minus : " change Schiffli borer depth ; show Schiffli repeats W ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 907

PART XII MENU CHART

-

---------------

-()

-*

+,

--

5 67-8 -+ - 9& *" WILCOM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

not in all models; no en todos los modelos; nao em todos os modelos; non in tutti i modelli; pas dans tous les modles; nicht verfgbar fr alle Modelle Copyright 1990-2005 Wilcom International Pty. Ltd.

WILCOM 2006

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 909

Menu Chart Key

Pressing a different button on your digitizing puck can affect a command on your Menu Chart in different ways: ! Generally, a command will simply be executede.g. Save file, Undo command, Generate stitches, etc. ! Some commands toggle a function on or offe.g. Auto Jump On/Off, TrueView On/Off, etc. The same or different puck buttons may toggle the command. ! Other commands affect sequencee.g. Travel to Start/End of Design, Travel to Next/Previous Function. Different buttons generally control directioni.e. forward / backward.

! Some commands let you select options or adjust values which affect the

commande.g. Program Split display options, Fractional Spacing values. The key at the bottom of the table explains the action that a particular button press performs in combination with a given command icon. Icon Command 1 2 3 4 Icon Command 1 2 3 4 Save ! Information ! Undo ! Redo ! Select All ! Deselect All ! Auto Start / End ! Show Rulers & Guides ! $ Remove Small Stitches ! Exit ! Show All ! Previous View ! toggle on/off ! activate & deactivate $ change values ' view options (backward )forward

ES 2006 Menu Chart Key 910 Pan ! Center Current Stitch ! Redraw Screen ! Zoom Box ! Zoom 1:1 ! Zoom Factor ! Zoom In 2X ! Zoom Out 2X ! TrueView ! ' & Show Stitches ! ' & Show Outline ! ' & Show Needle Points ! ' & Show Connectors ! ' & Show Function Symbols ! ' & Show Grid ! $ & Show Repeat $ Show Drawing ! $ & Show 1. Chain/Moss 2. Stepp/Blatt 3. Needle In/Out Satin ! $ $ Tatami ! $ $ Zigzag ! $ $ E-Stitch ! $ $ Program Split ! $ $ Motif Fill ! $ $ Icon Command 1 2 3 4 Icon Command 1 2 3 4 toggle on/off ! activate & deactivate $ change values ' view options (backward )forward

1? +

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 911 Contour ! $ $ Flexi Split ! $ & Florentine Effect ! $ ! Liquid Effect ! $ ! Auto Jump ! $ & Stitch Shortening ! $ & Pull Compensation ! $ & Fractional Spacing ! $ & Automatic Underlay ! $ & Jagged Edge ! $ & Trapunto ! $ & 1/4. User Defined Split 2/3. Split Alternate !!&& Accordion Spacing ! $ & 3D Warp ! $ & Coil ! $ $ Straight ! $ $

Perpendicular Fill ! $ $ Island Coil ! $ $ Compound Chenille ! $ & Needle Height Chain Moss Select Object Polygon Select Icon Command 1 2 3 4 Icon Command 1 2 3 4 toggle on/off ! activate & deactivate $ change values ' view options (backward )forward

3D
ES 2006 Menu Chart Key 912 Reshape Object Stitch Edit 1. Keep Last Stitch 2/4. Omit Last Stitch ! ! ! Tie Off Trim 1. Empty Stitch 2/4. Empty Jump ! ! ! Add Stitch Angles 1. Backtrack 2/4. Repeat ! ! ! Next Color $ $ Input A ! Input B ! Complex Fill ! $ $ Fusion Fill ! $ $ Auto Appliqu ! Lettering ! $ $ Input C ! $ $ Run ! $ $ Triple Run ! $ $ Motif Run ! $ $ Backstitch ! $ $ Stemstitch ! $ $ Icon Command 1 2 3 4 Icon Command 1 2 3 4 toggle on/off ! activate & deactivate $ change values ' view options (backward )forward

A
ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 913 Travel to Start / End ( ) ) Travel by Object ( ) ) Travel by Segment ( ) ) Travel by Color ( ) ) Travel by Function ( ) ) Travel by 1000 Stitches ( ) ) Travel by 100 Stitches ( ) ) Travel by 10 Stitches ( ) ) Travel by 1 Stitch ( ) ) Circle ! Ring ! Star ! Stipple ! Manual ! Triple Manual ! Sequin Manual ! Sequin Run Auto ! $ ! Sequin Run Manual ! $ ! Make Motif ! Select Motif ! Use Motif ! Smart Corners ! $ & Preset Spacing 1/2/3/4 ! ! ! ! Icon Command 1 2 3 4 Icon Command 1 2 3 4 toggle on/off ! activate & deactivate $ change values ' view options (backward )forward

1000 100 10 1
1 2 3 4

ES 2006 Menu Chart Key 914 Auto Spacing ! $ & Auto Split ! $ & Cut ! Copy ! Paste Options 1/2/3/4 ! ! ! ! Move ! 1. Penetrations on 4. Penetrations off ! ! 1. Borers in 4. Borers out ! $ ! 1. Insert Fast 2/4. Add Fast ! ! ! 1. Insert Slow 2/4. Add Slow ! ! ! 1. Insert Stepp 2/4. Add Stepp ! ! ! 1. Insert Blatt 2/4. Add Blatt ! ! ! 1. Insert Auto Frame 2/4. Add Auto Frame !!! Drop Sequin ! Sequin Palette $ $ $ $ 1. Insert Stop 2/4. Add Stop ! ! ! 1. Insert Function 2/4. Clear Function !!! Shift Drawing ! Shift Menu ! Tab ! Backspace ! Icon Command 1 2 3 4 Icon Command 1 2 3 4 toggle on/off ! activate & deactivate $ change values ' view options (backward )forward
STOP

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 915 Paste Options: 1. Paste - Object Property Position, 2. Paste - Shift Pasted Objects, 3. Paste - Center at Current Stitch, 4. Paste - Start at Current Stitch. Add / Insert functions: See Machine function types for details. Cancel ! Delete ! No ! Yes ! Spacebar ! Enter ! Icon Command 1 2 3 4 Icon Command 1 2 3 4 toggle on/off ! activate & deactivate $ change values ' view options (backward )forward ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 916

PART XIII APPENDICES

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 917

Appendix A

Supported File and Machine Formats and Disk Types

This section provides details of the file and disk types supported by Wilcom ES. Details are also provided about the conversion of Melco CND, Wilcom INP, and Gunold PCH design formats to and from EMB. The section also provides details of supported paper tape formats, as well as vector and bitmap (raster) formats. Note There are many additional Schiffli file formats to suit specific Schiffli machines. Wilcom ES supports the most important of these. See the ES Schiffli User Manual Supplement for details.

Supported embroidery file formats

There are two types of embroidery file format: ! Outline: Outline or condensed files usually contain digitized shapes and lines, selected stitch types and stitch values and effects. ! Stitch: Stitch or expanded files generally contain stitches and machine functions and are only suited to specific embroidery machines.

Wilcom file formats

Wilcom ES uses its own native EMB embroidery file format which combines the advantages of outline files and stitch files. Outlines, stitches, thread colors, and other data are stored together. Outlines mean the file can be scaled and manipulated on an object basis while the stitch data preserves manual stitch-by-stitch edits and touchups. Features of most third-party ES 2006 Appendix A Supported File and Machine Formats and Disk Types 918 products are supported. Variants and precursors of the EMB file format are also shown in the table below. Note ESD is the native file format of DOS ES, the precursor to the current ES Designer. It is actually a stitch file format with stitch blocks, stitch types and parameters, and an icon. It has few of the advantages of the current EMB file format. Note Wilcom INP is the native file format of Wilcom Computer Embroidery Design software. It is an outline file format but it contains no stitch data. Wilcom INP designs can be directly converted to EMB files although ES Designer interprets some of the stitch types differently. See Conversion of Wilcom INP format to Wilcom EMB for details.

Supported outline file formats

Wilcom ES supports the following outline file (condensed) formats: Extension Format Read Write AMT artista template ! AMT42 Explorations template ! ART V4.0 artista design file ! ART42 Explorations project file ! EMB Wilcom ES design file (up to ES 2006) ! ! EMC Clipart Files ! ! EMT Wilcom ES templates ! ! ESD Wilcom DOS format ! INP Wilcom condensed format ! Extension Format Read Write CND Melco condensed file ! ! PCH Gunold APS ! ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 919 Note See below for conversion details when reading these files into EMB format or writing to CND format. See Melco CND format and Conversion of Gunold PCH format to Wilcom EMB.

Supported stitch file formats

Wilcom ES supports the following stitch file (expanded) formats: Extension Format Read Write 10O Toyota ! ! ARX artista cross stitch files ! BRO Bits & Volts ! CSD POEM/Singer/Huskygram ! ! DAT Hiraoka DAT ! !

DSB Barudan ! ! DST Tajima ! ! DSZ ZSKTajima machine format ! ! EMX Wilcom Cross Stitch ! ESL Wilcom ESL ! ! ESS Wilcom ESS ! ! EXP Melco ! ! HUS Husqvarna/Viking ! ! INB Inbro Files ! ! JEF Janome/Elna/Kenmore format (V1.0) ! ! KSM Pfaff ! ! MJD Time & Space MJD ! ! PCD Pfaff ! ! PCQ Pfaff ! ! includes needle addressing data Two optionsZSK1 and ZSK2 (see note) Can only be written by ES Cross Stitch application TAP and MON files are written togetherTAP is the stitch file, MON the header file. Used with Transport Code Disks (see note) ES 2006 Appendix A Supported File and Machine Formats and Disk Types 920 Note ZSK1 format is used with older ZSK machines, generally those older than 1991 which have no more than 7 needles. ZSK2 is for newer ZSK machines, those characterized by a single top thread trimmer. The trim is PCS Pfaff ! ! PEC Deco, Brother, Babylock ! ! PES Deco, Brother, Babylock ! ! PMU Proel ! PUM Proel DOS ! SAS Saurer SLC ! ! SEW Janome/Elna/Kenmore ! ! STC Gunold ! STX Datastitch ! TAP / MON Happy ! ! T01 TajimaWilcom DST format ! ! T03 BarudanWilcom DSB format ! ! T04 Zangs ! ! T05 ZSKWilcom DSZ format ! ! T09 PfaffWilcom KSM format ! ! T10 Wilcom Plauen ! ! T15 Wilcom Saurer ! ! U?? Barudan ! ! VEP Hiraoka VEP ! XXX Compucon ! ! Z?? ZSK TC machine format ! ! Extension Format Read Write includes needle addressing data Two optionsZSK1 and ZSK2 (see note) Can only be written by ES Cross Stitch application TAP and MON files are written togetherTAP is the stitch file, MON the header file. Used with Transport Code Disks (see note) ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 921 the most significant differentiating factor between the two types. If the ZSK machine accepts Transport Code Disks, then ZSK TC Machine Format must be used.

Melco CND format

Melco Condensed (CND) is the native file format of the Melco embroidery digitizing software. CND files store only digitized outlines and stitch values. See also Opening Melco CND outline files.

Conversion of Melco CND format to Wilcom EMB

When you open CND designs in ES Designer, outlines are scaled and stitches

recalculated to preserve density. ES Designer recognizes all Melco machine functions and stitch types, including Partition Lines and Complex Fill, and automatically converts them to EMB format. This table details how Melco features are converted. Melco CND EMB Notes Stitch Types Column Stitches Input A, Satin stitch Simple Fill Complex Fill, Tatami The stitch angle is determined by the longest stitchline. Complex Fill Complex Fill Melco EDS Complex Fill are recognized and converted to Wilcom ES Complex Fill. Column Fill Input A, Tatami fill Walk Run Bean Stitch Triple Run Singleline Column Input, Centerline Input C Singleline Column Input, Left Line / Right Line Input C Side 1 / Side 2 ES 2006 Appendix A Supported File and Machine Formats and Disk Types 922

Conversion of Wilcom EMB format to Melco CND

You can save files to Melco CND format from ES Designer. Designs originally created in ES Designer generally give the best results. Other file types may not have all the data necessary for successful conversion. This table details how Wilcom ES stitch types and effects are converted to CND format. Partition Lines Tatami partition lines Underlays Complex Underlay Tatami underlay in Complex Fill object Edge Walk Edge Run Center Walk Center Run Column Stitches only Narrow Column Zigzag Machine functions Needle Up Jump, Begin Jump Reset Stitch End Jump Manual Lock Stitch Added in Tie Off Automatic Lock Stitch Tie In, Tie Off If Automatic Lock Stitch is set for every Color Change, and at the start and end of the design, tie off and tie in stitches are inserted in the EMB design. Chain Chain Moss Moss Needle Height Needle Height Slow Slow Fast Fast Borer In/Out Borer In/Out Sequin On/Off Sequin On/Off Melco CND EMB Notes ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 923 Tip When you convert to CND, many Wilcom ES effects will be lost. If it is important to preserve the effects, save in Melco EXP stitch format instead. Alternatively, turn off all effects before saving to CND format. See also Best Wilcom ES input methods for Melco CND output. EMB Melco CND Notes

Stitch types Manual Walk Run Walk Triple Run Bean Stitch Only if the design is an original Wilcom EMB design Triple Run (run count > 3) Bean Stitch Reverts to Triple Run (run count = 3). Satin stitch Column Fill Tatami - standard Fill Stitch Use Complex Fill to make sure that the stitch lines are parallel. Tatami - with random factor applied Walk Tatami - with sharply turning stitches Walk or Complex Fill Changes to Walk if Superstar compatible, otherwise Complex Fill with a fixed angle. Tatami - with slightly turning stitches Fill Stitch, several sections The shape is divided into several sections, filled with parallel Fill Stitch. There may be small gaps between these sections. Zigzag Walk Density is not preserved when the design is scaled. E Stitch (Inputs A, B & C) Column Stitches E Stitch (Complex Fill) Walk Stitch settings Run length Set length CND Walk stitch length is the same as EMB Run stitch length. ES 2006 Appendix A Supported File and Machine Formats and Disk Types 924 Tatami length and spacing Fill or Complex Fill settings The length and density of Fill Stitches will be the same as EMB Tatami length and spacing. Underlays Center Run Walk Uses CND Auto Underlay. Edge Run Zigzag Double Zigzag Zigzag (for objects with Satin cover only) Narrow Column Effects Accordion Spacing Not preserved The effect is lost. Motif Fill Not preserved The effect is lost. Contour Stitch Not preserved The effect is lost. Flexi Split Not preserved The effect is lost. Auto Split Not preserved The effect is lost. Jagged Edge Not preserved The effect is lost.

Trapunto style Not preserved The effect is lost. Program Split Not preserved The effect is lost. User Defined Split Not preserved The effect is lost. Photo Flash Walk Density is not preserved when the design is scaled. Quality features Pull Compensation Not preserved The original shape is preserved. The effect is lost. Fractional Spacing Not preserved In ES Designer, turn on Fractional Spacing and set it to 0.5mm. Although there is no direct equivalent in CND, effectively it uses a fixed fractional spacing with a value equal to 0.5. EMB Melco CND Notes ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 925 Stitch Shortening Not preserved Outlines are more accurately recognized if Stitch Shortening is turned off. Auto Spacing Not preserved Auto Spacing is converted to fixed spacing, based on the average space value. It is best to turn off Auto Spacing when digitizing a design for CND. Smart Corners Not preserved Avoid digitizing pointed ends. Machine functions Color Change / Stop functions Color Change / Stop Functions inserted on stitches inside objects are not converted. Empty Walk Two MK1 points are repeated at the current position. Jump Needle Up Needle Up Needle Up Tie In (Lettering) Walk Tie Off Walk End Jump Reset Stitch Begin Jump Needle Up Needle Height Needle Height Moss Moss Chain Chain Trim Trim The ability to output without Trim function does not apply to this version. EMB Melco CND Notes ES 2006 Appendix A Supported File and Machine Formats and Disk Types 926

Best Wilcom ES input methods for Melco CND output

This table details which input methods give the best results when digitizing a design for Melco EDS-III CND output.

Conversion of Gunold PCH format to Wilcom EMB

PCH Punch and Stitch is the native file format of the Gunold Embroidery Design software. Gunold PCH designs can be directly converted to EMB files although ES Designer interprets some of the stitch types differently. This table details how Gunold PCH features are converted to EMB format. Input method Compatibility Notes Input A, B, C OK Use with Satin only. Complex Fill OK Only use with Tatami fill. Do not digitize pointed ends as they will be squared off during conversion. Cut off pointed ends with a straight line, parallel to the stitch angle, to avoid conversion problems.

Fusion Fill Not recommended Fusion Fill objects are separated into a single object per segment. Conversions may produce undesired results. Circle OK Ring Not recommended The exit point will be on the wrong side of the shape. Star Not recommended The stitches are output as Walk. End - Keep Last Stitch OK The exit point should always be on the opposite side to the entry point. End - Omit Last Stitch Do not use Start digitizing the next shape on the opposite side instead. Gunold PCH EMB Outline types Parallel Input A Serial Input C Block Outline Complex Fill ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 927 Run Run Incline Run Manual Manual Stitch types Satin Satin Ceding Tatami Random Ceding Tatami with random factor applied Step Tatami Piping Contour OBI Tatami Zigzag Zigzag Cross not supported Photo not supported Satin underlays none none Single Center Run Edge Edge Run Zigzag Zigzag Cross Zigzag Edge Zigzag Edge Run + Zigzag Edge Cross Edge Run + Zigzag Netting Double Zigzag Double Zigzag Double Zigzag Triple Zigzag Double Zigzag Step / block fill levels Complex Fill Holes in Complex Fill Gunold PCH EMB ES 2006 Appendix A Supported File and Machine Formats and Disk Types 928

Conversion of Wilcom INP format to Wilcom EMB

Wilcom INP is the native file format of Wilcom Computer Embroidery Design software. Wilcom INP designs can be directly converted to EMB files although ES Designer interprets some of the stitch types differently. This table details how Wilcom INP features are converted to EMB format. Form Fill User Defined Split in Complex Fill

Vector Fill User Defined Split in Complex Fill Block Fill Program Split in Complex Fill Miscellaneous Branches Grouped object (uses lettering sequence algorithm) Random - side 1 / side 2 Jagged Edge effect Pitch Stitch Spacing Length Stitch length Stitch angle Complex Fill stitch angle U turn Backtrack Compensation Pull Compensation Corner mode Smart Corners Short / Long Stitch Shortening Square backstitch Satin Step Straight stitch Trapunto Styles Motifs Patterns none Gunold PCH EMB Wilcom INP EMB Notes Auto Spacing Auto Spacing Values are different. Can be changed before stitching. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 929 Backtrack/Repeat section/marked Separate objects are added. Functions are supported correctly. Backup Lock Satin tie off Borderline Tatami Borderline Tatami Borer In/Out Borer In/Out CED Block lettering Block2 alphabet Font can be changed after conversion. CED Block, Jump out Block2 alphabet Manual edits and trimming Circle Circle ES Cross Stitch Paths imported as Run objects only Change the stitch type to Motif Run to generate cross stitch. Delete Stitch Manual only, ignored for other stitch types Can be edited Family of Curves Split Satin, single curve as split line Noticeably different from Satin. You can copy imported curve to get multiple curves. Alternating number is ignored. Geflecht Standard Tatami Can be edited Matching Tatami Non-matching Tatami Complex Fill will have matching Tatami. Motifs Patches Normal objects Needle In/Out End/Begin Jump Other Multihead Machine Functions Stop (with info label) For example, Insert Appliqu is converted to Stop.

Program Stitch Manual stitch Ring Ring Scattered Tatami Tatami with random factor applied Will look slightly different Schiffli Functions Stepp/Blatt only, others are ignored Slow/Fast Slow/Fast Split Alternate Tatami Wilcom INP EMB Notes ES 2006 Appendix A Supported File and Machine Formats and Disk Types 930

Supported machine formats

Wilcom ES supports the following machine formats: Split Stitch Standard Tatami Looks different but can be edited Tajima style Lock Tajima tie off OK most of the time Tourenblat E Stitch Looks different, so that it is easy to locate and edit Trim/Tie In/Tie Off Connector properties Turn fill (spacing measured along shape boundary) Wilcom ES turn fill (generally fewer stitches) Will look different but can be re-digitized in smaller sections Underlays slant Zigzag underlay Can be added manually Underlays, 3 or 4 layers Two underlays only Can be edited Wilcom INP EMB Notes Format Machines Supported Tajima Tajima TMCE-600 Tajima TMCE-600 Barudan Barudan FDR-II Lockstitch Barudan FDR-II Chenille Combination Barudan Chenille Barudan Z Series SWF Melco Melco Chenille ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 931

Supported embroidery disk formats

You can write a design to a disk which is formatted for a specific embroidery machine. The disk can then be read through the machiness Floppy Disk Reader. The following disk formats are supported: Pfaff Toyota Zangs ZSK 1 ZSK 2 ZSK TC Inbro Schiffli Format Machines Supported Format Density Read Write Barudan 2HD DS/HD ! ! Barudan FDR DS/DD ! !

Barudan FMC DS/DD ! ! Barudan S-FMC DS/HD ! ! DOS DS/HD ! ! Happy DS/HD ! ! Tajima DS/HD ! ! Toyota DS/HD ! ! ZSK DS/DD ! ! ZSK TC DS/HD ! ! ES 2006 Appendix A Supported File and Machine Formats and Disk Types 932 Note DS/HD is 1.44Mb while DS/DD is 720Kb.

Limitations

Microsoft Windows XP only supports the following floppy disk formats: ! 1.44 Mb 3.5" floppy disk (read, write, format) ! 720 Kb 3.5" floppy disk (read and write only)workaround available for formatting. See below. ! 1.2 Mb 5.25" floppy disk (read and write only) ! 360 Kb 5.25" floppy disk (read and write only) Windows XP will not format DS/DD 720 Kb floppy disks via the normal interfacei.e. My Computer, Windows Explorer. The reason for this is that general computer technology is moving away from the 720 Kb format. Since Wilcom ES uses Windows formatting utilities for DOS format, the formatting of 720 Kb floppy disks is not possible through Wilcom ES. However, if you have a current formatted DS/DD 720 Kb disk, Windows XP can read this disk. Note Formatting non-DOS disksBarudan FMC, Barudan FDR, Barudan S-FMC, ZSKunder Windows XP is unaffected by this issue, as Wilcom ES uses its own formatting software.

Formatting 720 Kb disks under Windows XP

It is still possible, however, to format 720 Kb disks under Windows XP, via a DOS command. There are two ways to enter this command: 1. Download the 'WinXP_720K.bat' file from the Wilcom Support Center at www.wilcom.com.au/support. This is a simple batch file which performs the steps you would otherwise have to perform manually as well as prompting you what to do. OR 2. Follow the instructions below to perform the commands yourself:

To format a 720 Kb disk under Windows XP

1 In Windows XP, select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 2 Enter format /t:80 /n:9 a: 3 Click OK. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 933 You will be prompted to insert a new disk in drive A:. 4 Press Enter when ready. After the disk has been 100% formatted, you will be prompted to give it a label or name. 5 Key in a label (or leave it unlabelled) and press Enter. You will be prompted to format another disk. 6 Click Y for Yes or N for No. Once formatted, your 720 Kb DOS disk can be used as you would a regular 1.44 Mb disk under Windows XP.

Supported paper tape formats Supported image formats

Wilcom ES supports the following paper tape formats: Artwork can be imported into ES Designer in both vector and bitmap (raster) formats. See Digitizing with Bitmap Images for details.

Supported vector image formats

Wilcom ES supports the following vector image formats: Format Read Write Tajima ! ! Barudan ! ! Zangs ! ! ZSK ! ! Pfaff ! ! Extension Format Read Write DXF AutoCAD ! EMF Enhanced Metafile ! ! EPS Encapsulated Postscript ! ! ES 2006 Appendix A Supported File and Machine Formats and Disk Types 934

Supported bitmap image formats

Wilcom ES supports the following bitmap image formats: PS Postscript ! WMF Windows Metafile ! Extension Format Read Write Extension Format Read Write BMP Windows Bitmap ! ! JPG JPEG File Interchange ! ! PNG Portable Network Graphics ! PCX PC Paintbrush ! ! ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 935

Appendix B

Object Types, Stitch Types, and Effects

Not all stitch types can be applied to all object types. Nor can all stitch effects be applied to all stitch types or objects. The tables below describe the relationships between the various object and types supported by ES Designer, as well as the stitch effects which can be applied to them.

Object interconversion
This table describes the relationship between object types and interconversion options. See Converting between object types for details. Object Types Vector Input A Input B Input C Complex Fill Fusion Fill Auto Appliqu Circle Ring Run Vector ! ! ! ! ! Input A ! ! ! Input B ! ! ! Input C ! ! Complex Fill ! !! Fusion Fill ! ! ! Auto Appliqu ! ! ! Circle ! * Run in this case refers to all outline input typesRun, Triple Run, Motif Run, Stemstitch, Backstitch. These are all interconvertible. ES 2006 Appendix B Object Types, Stitch Types, and Effects 936

Corresponding object and stitch types

This table describes the relationship between object types and stitch types. See Digitizing Methods and Fill and Outline Stitches for details. Ring ! Run ! ! ! Lettering ! Object Types Vector Input A Input B Input C Complex Fill Fusion Fill Auto Appliqu Circle Ring Run * Run in this case refers to all outline input typesRun, Triple Run, Motif Run, Stemstitch, Backstitch. These are all interconvertible. Stitch Type Input Method Satin Tatami Zigzag E Stitch Program Split Motif Fill Contour Stipple Run Input A ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Input B ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Input C ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Complex Fill ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Fusion Fill ! ! ! ! Auto Appliqu ! ! ! ! Circle ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Strictly speaking, Stipple is not a stitch type. It is an operation that converts filled objects into run stitches. Run in this case refers to all outline input typesRun, Triple Run, Motif Run, Stemstitch, Backstitch. All are considered both input methods and stitch types and all are interconvertible. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 937

Corresponding stitch types, input methods, and effects

This table describes the relationship between stitch types, input methods, and effects supported by Wilcom ES. Note that, in some cases, stitch type and input method are one and the samee.g. Run stitch. Star ! ! Ring ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Run * ! Lettering ! ! ! ! ! ! Stitch Type Input Method Satin Tatami Zigzag E Stitch Program Split Motif Fill

Contour Stipple Run Strictly speaking, Stipple is not a stitch type. It is an operation that converts filled objects into run stitches. Run in this case refers to all outline input typesRun, Triple Run, Motif Run, Stemstitch, Backstitch. All are considered both input methods and stitch types and all are interconvertible. Stitch Effects Input Method Auto Jump Shortening Pull Compensation Fractional Spacing Auto Underlay Smart Corners Jagged Edge Trapunto User Defined Split Accordion Spacing 3D Warp Flexi-Split Florentine Effect Liquid Effect Satin Input A ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Input B ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Input C ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ES 2006 Appendix B Object Types, Stitch Types, and Effects 938 Complex Fill ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Fusion Fill ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Auto Appliqu ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Circle ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Ring ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Tatami Input A ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Input B ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Input C ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Complex Fill ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Fusion Fill ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Circle ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Ring ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Zigzag Input A ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Input B ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Input C ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Complex Fill ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Auto Appliqu ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Circle ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Star ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Stitch Effects Input Method Auto Jump Shortening Pull Compensation Fractional Spacing Auto Underlay Smart Corners Jagged Edge Trapunto User Defined Split Accordion Spacing

3D Warp Flexi-Split Florentine Effect Liquid Effect ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 939 Ring ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! E Stitch Input A ! ! ! ! ! Input B ! ! ! ! ! Input C ! ! ! ! ! Complex Fill ! ! ! ! Auto Appliqu ! ! ! ! Circle ! ! ! ! Ring ! ! ! ! ! Program Split Input A ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Input B ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Input C ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Complex Fill ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Fusion Fill ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Circle ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Ring ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Motif Fill Complex Fill ! ! ! ! Contour Input A ! ! Stitch Effects Input Method Auto Jump Shortening Pull Compensation Fractional Spacing Auto Underlay Smart Corners Jagged Edge Trapunto User Defined Split Accordion Spacing 3D Warp Flexi-Split Florentine Effect Liquid Effect ES 2006 Appendix B Object Types, Stitch Types, and Effects 940 Input B ! ! Input C ! ! Circle ! Ring ! ! Run Run ! Triple Run Triple Run ! Motif Run Motif Run ! Stitch Effects Input Method Auto Jump Shortening Pull Compensation Fractional Spacing Auto Underlay Smart Corners Jagged Edge

Trapunto User Defined Split Accordion Spacing 3D Warp Flexi-Split Florentine Effect Liquid Effect ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 941

Appendix C

Standard Alphabets
The samples below show all alphabets that are standard with your Wilcom ES software. The recommended stitch method for each alphabet is indicated. This setting defines how letters in a sequence are to be joinedi.e. Closest Join (CJ), Bottom Join (BJ), As Digitized (AD). Some As Digitized alphabets also need to be applied with with Original Valuese.g. all appliqu alphabets, where values are important, and others like Kidnap, where open stitching is used. See Changing lettering join method for details. For best results when stitching, do not exceed the recommended maximum or minimum sizes. Note, however, that recommended maximum and minimum heights refer to UPPER CASE letters. Most embroidery fonts are digitized from an original TrueType Font (TTF), some of which have lower-case letterse.g. a and cwhich are about 70% the height of a capital letter. As a result, these letters may be too small to embroider neatly. You may need to increase the size of the lower-case characters to suit the embroidery. Lettering size will determine the type of underlay you need to apply. Apart from stabilizing, underlay helps give loft to raise your lettering off the fabric. Lettering with heights under 5 mm should not have underlay. Letters 6 mm to 10 mm can have a center-run underlay applied. Lettering larger than 10 mm is large enough for edge-run underlay. See Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays for details. Not all characters are available in all alphabets. You can create special characters in each alphabet by holding down the Alt key on your keyboard and typing 0 (zero), its code, using the numbers on the keypad. For example, to type with the code 234, type Alt + 0234. The accented letter will appear when you release the Alt key. See also Using the Character Map.

TrueType Font Embroidery Letters

ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 942

2 Color Plain Script

2 Color Plain Script is an old fashioned script which is made special by using two colors. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols Colors 2 colors Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type As Digitized Recommended letter height Minimum 0.5 in 13 mm

Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 943

Agatha
Agatha is a traditional decorative style suitable for initials/monograms and personalization. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 944

Algerian
Algerian is an ornate all caps alphabet. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 1.2 in 30 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 945

Anaconda

Anaconda is suitable for most fabrics due to its constant width. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 European/special characters Punctuation and symbols Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 946

Angle Block
Angle Block is an angular block alphabet which can be used for many types of situation. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.4 in 10 mm Maximum 4.0 in 100 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 947

Architect
Architect is a compact modern alphabet with fairly narrow columns, best suited in larger sizes. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.4 in 10 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 948

Arial Rounded
Arial Rounded is based on the widespread 20th century realist sans-serif. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm Maximum 1.8 in 45 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 949

Arnold

Arnold is a fancy alphabet with a medieval feel. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.4 in 10 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 950

Art Block
Art Block is a simple alphabet which is easy to read. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.4 in 10 mm Maximum 3.0 in 75 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 951

Avant Garde

Avant Garde is based on the same name sans-serif reminiscent of 1920s styling.

Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.2 in 5 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 952

Bauhaus
Bauhaus is a simple, clean, rounded sans-serif reminiscent of 1920s styling. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.4 in 10 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 953

Blacklight

Blacklight is a modern sans-serif alphabet with a noticeable italic slant and rounded ends. It is a popular style for advertising and designs with a carefree feeling. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 954

Block Caps
Block Caps is a plain block capital alphabet. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching CAPS - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.2 in 5 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 955

Block1

Block1 is a traditional sans-serif alphabet. It is more compact than the Block2 alphabet, making it useful for lettering where space is at a premium.

In capitals, it works well with enveloping. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 956

Block2

Block2 is a traditional block-style alphabet, popular for corporate logo work. It is quite bold and usually does not require additional pull compensation. It also works well with enveloping. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 2.3 in 55 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 957

Bodoni
Bodoni is a classic, high-contrast alphabet best suited to larger sizes or with very stable fabric. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 958

Book Script
Book Script is an elegant script that can be used in many different situations. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 1.0 in 25 mm Maximum 2.2 in 55 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 959

Border Block2
Border Block2 is a two-color variant of Block2. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 2 colors Stitching CAPS - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type As digitized Recommended letter height Minimum 0.5 in 13 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 960

Carla

Carla is a brush-style script with lower-case letters which do not connect. It can be used for personalization, sporting goods and many other uses. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.4 in 10 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 961

Castle

Castle is an easy-to-read sans-serif alphabet with large lower-case letters. The stylish look suits both corporate and personal text. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 962

Casual Serif

Casual Serif is a modern alphabet which would look good on casual wear and sporting goods. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.5 in 13 mm Maximum 2.2 in 55 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 963

Cayman
Cayman is a bold, script-style alphabet with connecting lower-case letters. The thickness of the strokes is even throughout. It is popular and versatile. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.4 in 10 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 964

Centurion
Centurion is a compact alphabet with strokes curving into serifs perpendicular to the letter strokes. It is more suited to medium-larger sizes. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.5 in 13 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 965

Chancery
Chancery is based on one of the most popular calligraphy scripts. It is often used in logos and is very popular for personalization. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 966

Cheltenham Tall
Cheltenham Tall is a bold yet compact serif style. It is suitable for corporate lettering where there is limited space. In capitals, it also works well with bridge enveloping. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm

Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 967

Cheshire
Cheshire is a brush style italic alphabet based on a font of the same name. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.4 in 10 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 968

City Medium

City Medium is a modern very squarish athletic-style alphabet, with half-serifs. Its solidity makes it well suited to large lettering on heavier fabrics, such as athletic wear and jeans. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 3.0 in 75 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 969

City Script
City Script is an elegant and versatile script which adds a stylish touch to your lettering designs. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 970

Civic
Civic is an angular modern alphabet. Its solidity makes it well suited to large lettering on heavier fabrics, such as athletic wear and jeans. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 European/special characters Punctuation and symbols Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height

Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 971

College

College is a bold serif block alphabet. It is suitable for athletic-style lettering on garments, and for general use in logos, etc. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching CAPS - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 1.4 in 35 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 972

College Appliqu

College Appliqu is a large alphabet suitable for making appliqu letters for college, school and university wear. The letters each have three colors, first a guide run, then a zigzag tack-down, and finally a Satin stitch. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Appliqu Default Letter Spacing 10% Connect/Join As Digitized, Original Stitch Values Recommended letter height Minimum 1.0 in 25 mm Maximum 3.2 in 80 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 973

Columbo
Columbo is a very rounded style. It suits childrens wear, sportswear and modern designs. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 European/special characters Punctuation and symbols Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 1.2 in 30 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 974

Copperplate
Copperplate is the classic banknote, business card, and prestige font. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 European/special characters Punctuation and symbols Colors 1 color Stitching CAPS - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join

Recommended letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 975

Croissant
Croissant is a specialist fancy style, giving a completely different look from most other alphabets. It is suitable for restaurants, homewear and other people-oriented designs. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 976

Dauphin

Dauphin is a fancy alphabet with proportionally large lower-case and long ascenders. It creates an old-style, formal and elegant impression. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 977

Dextor Normal

Dextor Normal is a distinctive style. It has squarish letters in upper-case, with the effect of an open bar on the left size. It makes an attractive monogram. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching CAPS - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.35 in 9 mm Maximum 2 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 978

Easy Applique
Easy Applique makes applique letters which have uneven stroke width and rounded serifs. The letters each have three colors, first a guide run, then a zigzag tackdown and finally a coverstitch. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters

Colors 1 color Stitching Applique Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 1.2 in 30 mm Maximum 4.0 in 100 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 979

Easy Script
Easy Script is a basic script-style alphabet, with simply-formed capital letters. The thickness of the strokes is reasonably uniform, making this style usable across a wide range of sizes. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Default Letter Spacing 0% Stitching Manual Run stitching Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 980

Enchantment
Enchantment is a classic romantic alphabet suitable for monograms or to convey a medieval feel to restaurants or advertising material. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.75 in 10 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 981

Energy
Energy is a fun, fast-paced style, which looks like quickly-written, hand-printed notes. It is suitable for larger lettering in youth-oriented designs. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 982

Enviro
Enviro is a distinctive non-serif style with rounded ends on columns, and a slanted effect on some letter shapes. It is suited to finer fabrics, and small sizes may need extra pull compensation.

Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.5 in 13 mm Maximum 3.0 in 75 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 983

Fancy Monogram
Fancy Monogram is a special monogramming alphabet using the following letters. To create a monogram, use the key shown below for left letter, upper case for the central letter, and lower case for the right letter. Special keys are used for each border (see table). For example, to create the first monogram shown below type !Bc; ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ !#$%&()*+,-./0123456789: ;@[] <?_|| Alphabet contains A - Z (left, center and right letters) 3 letter and 2 letter borders and flourishes (see above) Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 1.0 in 25 mm Maximum 5.0 in 125 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 984

Flares

Flares has a hint of serif created by the flared ends of the strokes. It is very stylish, and suitable for masculine monograms. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 985

Flair Script

Flair Script is a graceful script with added flairs underneath. Flairs either fit snugly under the letters or are lowered to accommodate descenders. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols Flair characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height

Minimum 0.75 in 10 mm Maximum 3.2 in 80 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 986 For Flair characters type keys as shown. Flairs can be for letters with or without descenders. For example, for the first example, type 4 abc[. 3 -5 letters type [ 5 -7 letters type \ 7 - 9 letters type ] 3 -5 letters type 5 -7 letters type { 7 - 9 letters type | 9 -11 letters type @ 11 - 13 letters type _ (underscore) 9 -11 letters type $ 11 - 13 letters type } ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 987

Flash
Flash is a modern non-serif style, reminiscent of hand printing using a thick felt-tip pen. It is quite bold and has a noticeable italic slant. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 988

Folio Condensed
Folio Condensed is a modern, dense and condensed sans-serif alphabet suitable for company logos. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 2.8 in 7 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 989

Formal Script
Formal Script is an upright calligraphy script style where the letters do not join. The style is bold and extended, and suited for monograms, homeware, etc. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm Maximum 1.4 in 35 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 990

Futura

Futura is a classic, geometric sans-serif alphabet suitable for general use in logos, etc.

Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 991

Futura Border 2 Color

Futura Border 2 Color is a two-color variant of Futura. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 2 color Stitching CAPS Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type As Digitized Recommended letter height Minimum 0.65 in 16 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 992

Futura Outline

Futura Outline is a bordered, one-color variant of Futura. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching CAPS - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.6 in 15 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 993

Gaelic
Gaelic is based on the old writing styles of Welsh and Irish texts. It is decorative and suited for a wide range of uses such as souvenirs, linen, restaurants, some ethnic designs, etc. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.45 in 11 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 994

Garamond

Garamond is based on one of the most popular typefaces originating in the 16th century. It is often used for business and corporate text.

Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 995

Glory Appliqu
Glory Appliqu makes appliqu letters which have uneven stroke width and rounded serifs. The letters each have three colors, first a guide run, then a Zigzag tack-down and finally a Satin stitch. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Default Letter Spacing 10% Stitching Appliqu Connect/Join Type As Digitized, Original Stitch Values Recommended letter height Minimum 1.2 in 30 mm Maximum 4.0 in 100 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 996

Goudy Sans

Goudy Sans is a popular font for corporate styles. Its bold lettering makes it suitable for use at smaller sizes or on heavy fabrics. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 997

Greek

Greek is a classic serif-style. It is suited for educational institutions, restaurants, and events such as marriages and births in Greek communities. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 998

Greek Script

Greek Script is a script style containing only upper-case characters. It is suitable for monograms.

Alphabet contains Characters A - Z Colors 1 color Stitching Foreign - Satin Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.5 in 12 mm Maximum 4.0 in 100 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 999

Greek Spionic

Greek Spionic is a modern Greek Block alphabet. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols Colors 1 color Stitching Foreign - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 10 mm Maximum 2.0 in 60 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1000

Hana
Hana is based on classic upright calligraphy script style where the letters do not join. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters To access " (left quotes), press * To access " (right quotes), press " Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.5 in 13 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1001

Handel Gothic
Handel Gothic is a chunky sans-serif alphabet. Its bold lettering makes it suitable for use at smaller sizes or on heavy fabrics. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1002

Handicraft
Handicraft is a modern narrow upright block, more suited for use on stable fabrics. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols

European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 2.5 in 65 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1003

Handy Script

Handy Script is a delicate script which is useful for formal occasions. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.5 in 13 mm Maximum 3.0 in 75 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1004

Hebrew Chaya
Hebrew Chaya is a modern Hebrew font. Alphabet contains Hebrew letters, numbers, punctuation Colors 1 color Stitching Foreign - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1005

Helvetica
Helvetica is the great all-purpose sans-serif alphabet, clean and simple, and suitable for any fabric. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1006

Helvetica Small
A variant of Helvetica, this alphabet is specifically created for use in small sizes. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10%

Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.2 in 4 mm Maximum 0.3 in 7 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1007

Hobo

Hobo is a bold, relaxed style, with curves throughout. It has an Art Deco feel, and can be used in most situations. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1008

Impress

Impress is a modern non-serif block style which is suitable for designs. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1009

Informal
Informal is an unstructured very black alphabet style, in upper-case characters only. It includes alternate versions of the accented letters (Oumalut) and (Uumlaut). Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching CAPS - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 1.2 in 30 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1010

Italian Script

Italian Script is a well-proportioned script which looks good for formal occasions. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin

Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.4 in 10 mm Maximum 4.0 in 100 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1011

Kabel
Kabel is a modern non-serif block style alphabet suitable for casual designs. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1012

Karin Script

Karin Script is a modern rounded script in which the letters do not join up. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum Maximum ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1013

Kindergarten Block
Kindergarten Block is a fun alphabet which has many applications for childrens wear. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.4 in 10 mm Maximum 3.6 in 90 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1014

Kids
Kids is a fun alphabet, based on childrens hand-writing. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join

Recommended letter height Minimum 0.5 in 12 mm Maximum 1.2 in 30 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1015

Krone
Krone is a solid serif alphabet, very stylish, and suitable for masculine monograms. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1016

Lariat
Lariat is a fun script-like alphabet without letters joining. It is suitable for childrens clothing and monograms. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 2 colors Stitching CAPS - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.5 in 12 mm Maximum 1.2 in 30 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1017

Legal Block
Legal Block is a solid square alphabet. This makes it useful for small lettering on thicker fabrics such as denim. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.24 in 6 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1018

Lydian
Lydian is a modern non-serif alphabet style. The varying widths in the letters give an impression of being written with a pen nib. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10%

Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1019

Mandarin

Mandarin is an alphabet consisting of upper-case characters, with an Asian influence. It is used for Asian restaurants, martial arts clubs, etc. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching CAPS - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1020

Matisse

Matisse is a stylish, modern alphabet. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching CAPS - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.4 in 10 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1021

Matrix
Matrix gives a more interesting and relaxed style than most serifs. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.4 in 10 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1022

Memo Script

Memo Script is a narrow easy-to-read script which creates a simple, elegant feel. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join

Recommended letter height Minimum 0.24 in 6 mm Maximum 1.0 in 25 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1023

Micro Block
Micro Block has been designed for use specifically where small legible block letters is required. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.2 in 4 mm Maximum 0.25 in 8 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1024

Microgramma
Microgramma is a slightly boxy, wide, sans-serif alphabet. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1025

Microscan

Microscan has a modern hi-tech look. It is suitable for a wide variety of applications. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1026

Miniature Block

Minature Block is a rounded block alphabet which can be used when very small letters are needed. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join

Recommended letter height Minimum 0.15 in 4 mm Maximum 0.24 in 6 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1027

Narrow Block
Narrow Block is a condensed, but elegant block which can be used when text needs to fit in a narrow space. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.6 in 15 mm Maximum 4.0 in 100 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1028

News Outline
News Outline has a Satin outline around the outside edge of the letter shapes. The letters have solid, heavy appearance, with a serif-effect. This alphabet should be used in larger sizes. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching CAPS - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join, unsaved Recommended letter height Minimum 1.2 in 30 mm Maximum 3.0 in 75 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1029

Old English
Old English is based on traditional medieval English calligraphy script. It is used for specialist lettering, and is especially popular for school, college and university badges. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.4 in 10 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1030

Olivia

Olivia is based on Time-Script font. It is a bold alphabet with script-like lower-case letters. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters

Colors 1 color Stitching Normal - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1031

Outline Block
Outline Block is based on the Block2 alphabet. It presents the outline without the fill, giving it an open feel. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching CAPS - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.5 in 13 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1032

Pixie
Pixie is a thin, modern alphabet based on Pixidium. It is most suited for use in larger sizes. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching CAPS - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.5 in 13 mm Maximum 1.2 in 30 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1033

Point Monogram
Point Monogram is a special monogramming alphabet using the following letters. To create a monogram, use the key shown above for left letter, upper case for the central letter, and lower case for the right letter. Special keys are used for borders (see table). For example, to create the first monogram shown below, type !Bc; ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ !#$%&()*+,-./0123456789: ;@[] <>_|{ }=\? Alphabet contains A - Z (left, center and right letters)3 letter and 2 letter borders and flourishes (see above). Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.7 in 18 mm Maximum 6.0 in 150 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1034

Round Block
Round Block is based on a bolded Arial, the widespread 20th century realist sans-serif. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.8 in 20 mm Maximum 1.4 in 35 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1035

Royale
Royale is an elegant calligraphic script style with a rich, classy look and small lower-case letters. It is reminiscent of wedding and similar invitations, and is suitable for gifts and special occasions. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.5 in 13 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1036

Run Block
Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum in mm Maximum in mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1037

Run Script
Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum in mm Maximum in mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1038

Schoolbook

Schoolbook is a classic serif-style alphabet. It has been popular for many years and is common in logos and educational designs. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1039

Script1
Script1 is a hand-writing style where lower-case letters join together. It is popular for monograms, but is not suitable for use with many capital letters together. It includes alternate versions of upper-case I and accented . Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.5 in 12 mm Maximum 3.0 in 75 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1040

Script2

Script2 is a bold script of the Brush style, which looks as it was written with a brush-type pen. It is suitable for use on heavier fabrics such as towelling. It includes alternate versions of upper-case I and accented . Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1041

Script3
Script3 is a stylish script with fine curves and flourishes. It is popular for personalizing garments. Use extra pull compensation at smaller sizes. It includes alternate versions of upper-case I and accented . Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height

Minimum 0.5 in 12 mm Maximum 4.0 in 100 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1042

Seagull

Seagull is a modern alphabet style with a slight serif-type flare to the letter shapes, making it more elegant than classic serif fonts. It can be used in many situations. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm Maximum 1.8 in 45 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1043

Seal Monogram
Seal Monogram is a special monogramming alphabet using the following letters. To create a monogram, use the key shown below for left letter, upper case for the central letter, and lower case for the right letter. Special keys are used for borders (see table). For example, to create the first monogram shown below type !Bc; ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ !#$%&()*+,-./0123456789: ;@[] <?_|{ }=\> Alphabet contains A - Z (left, center and right letters)3 letter and 2 letter borders and flourishes (see above). Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.7 in 18 mm Maximum 6.0 in 150 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1044

Serif1
Serif1 is heavy-weight serif style, with the serifs being stitched lengthways. It is typically used on heavier fabrics where the lettering needs to be quite bold. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 1.25 in 30 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1045

Serif2

Serif2 is similar in many ways to the Times Roman font, with variable width strokes and curved serifs. It is commonly used in corporate work, but is not

suitable at very small sizes because the serifs lose definition. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 1.25 in 30 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1046

Serif3

Serif3 is a medium weight alphabet with squared serifs which stitch cross-ways. It is less bold than Serif1 and suitable for lettering in logos at a variety of sizes. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1047

Slim Block
Slim Block is a thin block alphabet which can be used in situations where the lettering does not need to stand out boldly. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.8 in 20 mm Maximum 8.0 in 200 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1048

Small Block1
Small Block1 is a version of Block1 alphabet specifically for use at small sizes. The letter shapes allow for the proportionally larger amount of pull and distortion that occur at these small sizes. This makes the alphabet unsuitable for larger sizes. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.2 in 4 mm

Maximum 0.25 in 6 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1049

Small Block2
Small Block2 is a version of Block2 alphabet specifically for use at small sizes. Its bold style means that additional pull compensation is not needed. The letter shapes allow for the proportionally larger amount of pull and distortion that occur at these small sizes. This makes the alphabet unsuitable for larger sizes. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.2 in 4 mm Maximum 0.25 in 6 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1050

Small Serif 1

Small Serif1 is a variant of Serif 1, a heavy-weight serif style, with the serifs being stitched lengthways. This alphabet can be used at smaller sizes than the Serif 1 minimumi.e. < 6 mm. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended CAP letter height Minimum 0.2 in 4 mm Maximum 0.25 in 6 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1051

Souvenir
Souvenir is a rounded and informal alphabet, evoking a nostalgic, friendly feeling. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1052

Speedy
Speedy is a bold, fast-paced modern alphabet. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin

Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 8 mm Maximum 1.2 in 30 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1053

Super Block
Super Block is a very narrow block alphabet. It has simple easy-to-read letters which can be used when width is an issue. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.4 in 10 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1054

Swiss
Based on the very popular Swiss721 font, this is recommended in all logos where an even-width alphabet is needed. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.4 in 10 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1055

Swiss Run Hollow

Based on Swiss alphabet, in this variant Satin is replaced by Run stitch outlines. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Default Letter Spacing 10% Colors 1 color Stitching CAPS - Run Connector/Join type As Digitized Recommended letter height Minimum 0.6 in 15 mm Maximum 4.0 in 100 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1056

Swiss Run Satin

Swiss Run Satin is a specialist alphabet, used with As Digitized join method. The letters consist of Satin borders with a double-run pickout on all edges. This alphabet is intended for use at medium to large-sizes. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters

Colors 1 color Stitching CAPS - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connect/Join Type As Digitized Recommended letter height Minimum 1.0 in 25 mm Maximum 3.0 in 75 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1057

Tahoma
Tahoma is a traditional san-serif alphabet, popular for corporate logo work. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1058

Text Block

Text Block is a classic non-serif block style alphabet. It is a general purpose alphabet, being slightly wider than Block1, but more compact than Block2. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm Maximum 1.8 in 45 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1059

Times Roman

Times Roman is based on Times New Roman serif font that got its name from The Times of London newspaper for which it was designed in 1932. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10%3 Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 2.4 in 40 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1060

Times Small

Times Small is a variant of Times Roman, specifically designed for use in smaller sizes. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters

Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.2 in 4 mm Maximum 0.25 in 6 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1061

Typewriter
Typewriter looks similar to the old-style font on typewriter golf-balls. This style is suitable for designs with a nostalgic theme. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.5 in 13 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1062

Upright Script
Upright Script is a freehand script alphabet. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 0% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.5 in 13 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1063

Urbane

Urbane is solid block-style alphabet with simple clean lines. It is suitable for use on heavier fabrics. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 1.6 in 40 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1064

Utility Block

Utility Block is a simple rounded block. It can be used for small lettering as it has bold letters. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters

Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm Maximum 4.0 in 100 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1065

Verdana
Verdana is a modern sans-serif font that is very popular with web designs. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1066

Victorian

Victorian is an opulent font reminiscent of late 19th century stylings. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm Maximum 1.0 in 25 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1067

Viking
Viking is an alphabet consisting of capital letters, based on old-style Nordic scripts It is suited to medium and larger sized lettering. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching CAPS - Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.35 in 9 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Appendix C Standard Alphabets 1068

Western Serif
Western Serif can be used anywhere a western or cowboy feel is needed. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin

Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.3 in 7 mm Maximum 2.0 in 50 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1069

Westminster
Westminster is a solid rounded alphabet that will work well on most materials. Alphabet contains Characters A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 Punctuation and symbols European/special characters Colors 1 color Stitching Satin Default Letter Spacing 10% Connector/Join type Closest Join Recommended letter height Minimum 0.25 in 6 mm Maximum 2.4 in 60 mm ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1070

Appendix D

Motif Samples
Motifs available in Wilcom ES can be one of two types single or two-part. Single motifs can be used on their own in a Motif Run or Motif Fill. Two-part motifs consist of two separate motifs combined to form a single pattern for Motif Fills. This section contains samples of the motifs available in Wilcom ES. Use these tables to see what a particular motif looks like. The table also includes recommended size and layout specifications. If they have changed for any reason, revert to the settings using the values in these tables. See Creating motif runs and Creating motif fills for details.

Single motifs

The following table shows single motifs available in Wilcom ES together with their size values. It also shows the spacing values for Motif Runs, and column, row and offset recommended values for Motif Fills. Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset Arrow01 3.9 3.1 3.9 3.9 3.1 0.0 Arrow02 4.4 3.3 4.4 4.4 3.3 0.0 Arrow03 4.0 3.0 4.0 4.0 3.0 0.0 ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1071 Arrow04 4.0 3.0 4.0 4.0 3.0 0.0 Arrow05 4.0 2.5 4.0 4.0 3.5 0.0 Arrow06 10.1 10.0 10.6 10.1 10.0 0.0 Arrow07 5.0 4.0 5.2 5.0 4.0 0.0 Arrow08 5.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 4.0 0.0 Blocks01 3.0 5.0 2.0 2.0 5.0 1.0 Blocks02 3.2 5.0 2.3 2.3 6.0 0.0 Blocsk03 2.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 0.0 Blocks04 2.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 0.0 Blocks05 4.0 5.5 3.0 3.0 6.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample

Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Appendix D Motif Samples 1072 Blocks06 2.6 2.4 2.4 2.4 1.8 1.2 Blocks07 6.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 4.0 0.0 Blocks08 6.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 4.0 0.0 Blocks09 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 0.0 Blocks10 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 0.0 Blocks11 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 Blocks12 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 Blocks13 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 Blocks14 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1073 Blocks15 3.8 5.0 3.8 3.8 5.0 0.0 Blocks16 3.0 4.0 3.0 3.0 4.0 0.0 Blocks17 10.1 10.0 10.2 10.1 10.0 0.0 Blocks18 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 0.0 Blocks19 12.0 3.0 12.1 12.0 3.0 0.0 Blocks20 3.0 6.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 0.0 Blocks21 8.9 3.6 9.0 8.9 3.6 0.0 Blocks22 6.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 0.0 Blocks23 4.0 6.5 4.0 4.0 6.5 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Appendix D Motif Samples 1074 Blocks24 6.0 6.0 6.1 6.0 6.0 0.0 Blocks25 6.8 8.9 6.8 6.8 8.9 0.0 Blocks26 7.5 8.5 7.5 7.5 8.5 0.0 Blocks27 4.0 8.0 4.0 4.0 8.0 0.0 Blocks28 6.0 8.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 0.0 Blocks29 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 Blocks30 8.0 10.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 0.0 Blocks31 9.0 8.0 9.0 9.0 8.0 0.0 Blocks32 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 Bow01 10.0 3.1 10.0 10.0 3.1 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1075 Bow02 8.0 4.0 8.0 8.0 4.0 0.0 Circle01 4.2 4.0 5.0 5.0 4.0 2.5 Circle02 9.6 13.1 9.1 9.6 13.1 0.0 Circle03 10.7 9.1 10.7 10.7 9.1 0.0 Cloud01 7.2 6.1 7.2 7.2 6.1 0.0 Cloud02 8.3 5.7 8.2 8.3 5.7 0.0 Cross01 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0

Cross02 5.7 5.7 5.8 5.7 5.7 0.0 Cross03 4.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 0.0 Cross04 8.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 8.0.0 5.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Appendix D Motif Samples 1076 Cross05 6.0 8.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 0.0 Cross06 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 0.0 Cross07 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 0.0 Cross08 8.0 8.0 8.1 8.0 8.0 0.0 Cross09 6.0 6.0 6.1 6.0 6.0 0.0 Cross10 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 0.0 Cross11 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 Cross12 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 Cross13 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 Cross14 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1077 Cross15 8.0 7.0 8.0 8.0 7.0 0.0 Curve01 8.0 4.0 8.0 8.0 5.0 4.0 Curve02 15.0 6.9 15.0 15.0 6.8 0.0 Curve03 7.5 5.0 3.9 3.9 5.0 0.0 Curve04 7.5 3.8 7.5 7.5 4.1 2.5 Curve05 14.0 10.0 14.7 14.0 10.0 0.0 Curve06 19.1 20.5 19.4 19.1 20.5 0.0 Curve07 10.0 5.0 10mm 10.0 5.0 0.0 Curve08 9.1 5.1 9.1 9.1 5.1 0.0 Curve09 3.4 6.6 2.9 3.4 6.6 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Appendix D Motif Samples 1078 Curve10 10.3 10.0 10.2 10.3 10.0 0.0 Curve11 10.0 5.6 9.9 10.0 5.6 0.0 Curve12 5.3 4.0 5.3 5.3 4.0 0.0 Curve13 8.2 5.9 7.8 8.2 5.9 0.0 Curve14 9.0 7.0 9.0 9.0 7.0 0.0 Curve15 10.0 9.0 10.0 10.0 9.0 0.0 Curve16 8.0 28.0 8.0 8.0 28.0 0.0 Curve17 8.0 6.0 8.0 8.0 6.0 0.0 Curve18 9.0 10.0 9.0 9.0 10.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1079 Curve19 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 0.0 Heart01 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 0.0

Kite01 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 Kite02 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 Kite03 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 Kite04 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 Kite05 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 Kite06 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 Kite07 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Appendix D Motif Samples 1080 Kite08 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 Kite09 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 Kite10 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 2.0 Kite11 8.0 10.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 4.0 Kite12 10.0 10.0 10.1 10.0 10.0 0.0 Kite13 4.7 5.0 4.8 4.7 5.0 0.0 Kite14 9.0 10.0 9.0 9.0 10.0 0.0 Kite15 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 Kite16 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 0.0 Leaf01 8.6 6.8 6.0 6.0 6.7 1.8 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1081 Leaf02 8.7 7.2 6.2 6.2 7.3 0.0 Leaf03 6.5 3.0 6.6 6.5 3.0 0.0 Lines01 3.8 5.6 2.8 2.8 6.5 0.0 Lines02 2.2 3.6 1.3 1.2 3.6 0.0 Lines03 6.8 2.0 6.8 6.8 2.0 3.4 Lines04 6.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 0.0 Lines05 19.9 20.3 20.0 19.9 20.3 0.0 Lines06 20.3 20.5 21.0 20.3 20.5 0.0 Lines07 5.0 4.0 5.1 5.0 4.0 0.0 Lines08 10.0 8.0 9.9 10.0 8.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Appendix D Motif Samples 1082 Lines09 6.0 1.4 6.0 6.0 1.4 0.0 Lines10 8.6 7.7 8.6 8.6 7.7 0.0 Lines11 10.0 12.0 10.0 10.0 12.0 0.0 Lines12 9.0 10.0 9.0 10.0 10.0 0.0 Lines13 8.0 9.0 8.0 8.0 9.0 0.0 Lines14 10.0 12.5 10.0 12.5 12.5 0.0 Lines15 8.0 9.0 8.0 8.0 9.0 0.0 Lines16 4.0 10.0 4.0 10.0 10.0 0.0 Music01 6.1 9.8 3.9 6.1 9.8 0.0 Scroll01 6.0 4.8 6.0 6.0 6.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing

Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1083 Scroll02 6.5 5.6 6.5 6.5 4.3 2.8 Scroll03 10.0 5.0 10.0 10.0 6.3 0.0 Scroll04 10.0 5.0 10.0 10.0 6.3 0.0 Scroll05 9.5 9.0 9.5 9.5 9.0 0.0 Scroll06 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 0.0 Shapes01 9.5 9.0 9.5 9.5 9.0 0.0 Shapes02 10.0 9.0 10.0 10.0 9.0 0.0 Shapes03 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 0.0 Shapes04 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Appendix D Motif Samples 1084 Shapes05 10.0 9.0 10.0 10.0 9.0 0.0 Shapes06 8.0 9.0 8.0 8.0 9.0 0.0 Shapes07 8.5 8.0 8.5 8.5 8.0 0.0 Shapes08 9.0 8.5 9.0 9.0 8.5 0.0 Shapes09 7.0 8.0 7.0 7.0 8.0 0.0 Shapes10 7.0 9.0 7.0 7.0 9.0 0.0 Shapes11 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 Shapes12 10.0 8.5 10.0 10.0 8.5 0.0 Shapes13 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 0.0 Shapes14 9.0 10.0 9.0 9.0 10.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1085 Shapes15 7.5 9.0 7.5 7.5 9.0 0.0 Shapes16 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 0.0 Shapes17 10.4 9.5 10.4 10.4 9.5 0.0 Shapes18 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 0.0 Shapes19 10.0 12.0 10.0 10.0 12.0 0.0 Shapes20 9.0 9.5 9.0 9.0 9.5 0.0 Shapes21 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 Shapes22 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 0.0 Shapes23 9.5 9.0 9.5 9.5 9.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Appendix D Motif Samples 1086 Shapes24 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 0.0 Shapes25 12.0 10.0 12.0 12.0 10.0 0.0 Shapes26 8.0 9.0 8.0 9.0 9.0 0.0 Shapes27 9.0 8.0 9.0 9.0 8.0 0.0 Shapes28 10.0 12.0 10.0 10.0 12.0 0.0 Shapes29 8.5 9.0 8.5 8.5 9.0 0.0 Shapes30 10.0 12.0 10.0 10.0 12.0 0.0 Shapes31 12.0 10.0 12.0 12.0 10.0 0.0 Shapes32 8.5 9.0 8.5 8.5 9.0 0.0

Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1087 Shapes33 8.0 9.0 8.0 9.0 9.0 0.0 Shapes34 9.0 10.5 9.0 9.0 10.5 0.0 Shapes35 4.0 7.5 4.0 4.0 7.5 0.0 Shapes36 8.0 8.5 8.0 8.0 8.5 0.0 Shapes37 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 0.0 Shapes38 7.0 4.0 7.0 7.0 4.0 0.0 Shapes39 8.0 9.5 8.0 8.0 9.5 0.0 Shapes40 9.0 8.0 9.0 9.0 8.0 0.0 Shapes41 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Appendix D Motif Samples 1088 Shapes42 7.5 7.0 7.5 7.5 7.0 0.0 Shapes43 10.0 9.0 10.0 10.0 9.0 0.0 Shapes44 9.0 10.0 9.0 9.0 10.0 0.0 Square01 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 Square02 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 Square03 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 Square04 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 Square05 4.0 4.1 4.0 4.0 4.1 0.0 Square06 4.0 4.0 8.0 8.0 4.0 4.0 Star01 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1089 Star02 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 Star03 6.0 4.0 7.0 7.0 4.0 3.5 Star04 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 0.0 Star05 6mm 8.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 3.0 Star06 6.0 8.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 0.0 Star07 5.0 4.4 5.3 5.0 4.4 0.0 Star08 10.0 10.0 10.1 10.0 10.0 0.0 Star09 20.1 20.6 20.6 20.1 20.6 0.0 Star10 8.7 10.0 8.7 8.7 10.0 0.0 Star11 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Appendix D Motif Samples 1090 Star12 8.0 7.8 8.0 8.0 7.8 0.0 Star13 8.0 9.0 8.0 8.0 9.0 0.0 Star14 9.6 9.0 9.6 9.6 9.0 0.0 Star15 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 Star16 10.0 9.0 10.0 10.0 9.0 0.0

Star17 8.0 9.0 8.0 8.0 9.0 0.0 Star18 10.0 9.0 10.0 10.0 9.0 0.0 Star19 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 0.0 Star20 8.0 9.0 8.0 8.0 9.0 0.0 Star21 9.5 9.0 9.5 9.5 9.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1091 Star22 8.0 9.5 8.0 8.0 9.5 0.0 Star23 8.0 11.0 8.0 8.0 11.0 0.0 Star24 9.0 10.0 9.0 9.0 10.0 0.0 Wave01 10.0 7.0 8.0 8.7 7.0 0.0 Wave02 15.0 10.0 15.8 15.0 10.0 0.0 Wave03 10.9 7.8 10.9 10.9 7.8 0.0 Wave04 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 Xmas01 7.3 8.8 7.4 7.3 8.8 0.0 ZigZag01 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 ZigZag02 8.0 4.0 8.0 8.0 5.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Appendix D Motif Samples 1092 ZigZag03 4.6 4 4.6 4.6 5.0 0.0 ZigZag04 7.0 4.0 7.0 7.6 3.0 0.0 ZigZag05 4.0 4.0 4.0 2.0 5.0 1.0 ZigZag06 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.0 4.1 0.0 ZigZag07 10.0 10.0 10.2 10.0 10.0 0.0 ZigZag08 10.0 10.0 10.7 10.0 10.0 0.0 ZigZag09 12.0 12.0 12.3 12.0 12.0 0.0 ZigZag10 9.9 10.0 10.3 9.9 10.0 0.0 ZigZag11 18.5 19.1 19.2 18.5 19.1 0.0 ZigZag12 20.2 20.1 20.4 20.2 20.1 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1093 ZigZag13 19.5 8.1 19.8 19.5 8.1 0.0 ZigZag14 18.0 9.1 18.4 18.0 9.1 0.0 ZigZag15 12.1 11.1 12.4 12.1 11.1 0.0 ZigZag17 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 ZigZag18 14.0 7.0 14.0 14.0 7.0 0.0 ZigZag19 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 0.0 ZigZag20 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 ZigZag21 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 ZigZag22 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 ZigZag23 9.0 10.0 9.0 9.0 10.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset

ES 2006 Appendix D Motif Samples 1094 ZigZag24 8.0 9.0 8.0 8.0 9.0 0.0 ZigZag25 10.0 7.5 10.0 10.0 7.5 0.0 ZigZag26 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 ZigZag27 12.0 8.0 12.0 12.0 8.0 0.0 ZigZag28 8.0 9.0 8.0 8.0 9.0 0.0 ZigZag29 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 0.0 Name Motif Sample Size in mm Motif Run Spacing Motif Fill X Y Column Row Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1095

Two-part motifs
The following table lists the two-part motifs that are available in Wilcom ES, and the resulting pattern. It also shows the size, column, row and offset values for Motif Fills.
.

Motif A Motif B Sample Size in mm Motif Fill X Y Col Row Offset Duet01a Duet01b a=7.0 b=7.0 a=5.0 b=3.0 7.0 3.5 0.0 Duet02a Duet02b a=12.0 b=12.0 a=6.0 b=9.0 12.0 6.0 0.0 Duet03a Duet03b a=12.0 b=12.0 a=6.0 b=9.0 12.0 6.0 0.0 Duet04a Duet04b a=9.0 b=9.0 a=8.0 b=3.0 9.0 4.5 0.0 Duet05a Duet05b a=6.4 b=6.4 a=4.8 b=3.2 6.4 3.2 0.0 Duet06a Duet06b a=4.4 b=4.4 a=2.2 b=2.4 4.4 1.9 1.1 ES 2006 Appendix D Motif Samples 1096 Duet07a Duet07b a=4.8 b=4.8 a=4.4 b=4.2 4.8 2.2 1.3 Duet08a Duet08b a=11.6 b=11.6 a=4.4 b=4.4

11.2 2.9 0.0 Duet09a Duet09b a=6.5 b=6.5 a=5.0 b=5.0 6.5 3.4 3.3 Duet10a Duet10b a=8.0 b=8.0 a=4.0 b=4.0 8.0 4.0 0.0 Duet11a Duet11b a=5.2 b=12.0 a=3.8 b=9.0 5.2 3.8 0.0 Duet12a Duet12b a=15.0 b=13.5 a=8.4 b=7.8 13.5 3.9 0.0 Motif A Motif B Sample Size in mm Motif Fill X Y Col Row Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1097

Appendix E

Program Split Samples

This section contains samples of the program split patterns available in Wilcom ES. Use the table to see what a particular program split looks like. The table also includes the recommended size, column, row and offset settings. If they have changed for any reason, revert to the settings using the values in this table. See Adjusting program split stitch settings for details. Name Pattern Sample Size in mm Column Row X Y Spacing Offset Spacing Offset Arrowhd 6.0 6.0 4.5 0.0 6.0 0.0 Bars 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 8.0 0.0 Basket 9.0 7.5 9.0 0.0 4.5 4.5 Basket2 9.0 9.0 6.0 0.0 6.0 0.0 Bird 6.0 4.9 6.0 0.0 4.9 0.0 Blocks1 12.0 12.0 12.0 0.0 8.0 8.0 ES 2006 Appendix E Program Split Samples 1098 Blocks2 12.0 12.0 8.0 0.0 8.0 8.0 Breaker 10.0 6.0 10.0 0.0 6.0 0.0 Brick 6.0 3.0 6.0 0.0 3.0 3.0 Brick2 6.0 6.0 4.0 0.0 4.0 4.0 Chain 10.0 6.0 6.7 0.0 7.0 3.3 Chevron 6.0 3.0 6.0 0.0 6.0 3.0 Chevron2 2.5 6.0 2.5 0.0 6.0 0.0 Chevron3 7.0 3.0 7.0 0.0 3.0 0.0 Circle 6.0 6.0 8.0 0.0 6.0 4.0 Crosstile 7.0 7.0 5.5 -5.5 5.5 5.5 Name Pattern Sample Size in mm Column Row X Y Spacing Offset Spacing Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1099 Cube 6.0 6.0 6.0 1.5 6.0 1.4
[

Diadem 10.0 6.7 10.0 0.0 6.7 5.0 Diamnd2 4.0 8.0 4.0 4.0 8.0 0.0 Diamond 6.0 6.0 6.0 0.0 6.0 0.0 Driver 8.0 4.0 8.0 0.0 4.0 1.5 Ellipse 4.0 6.0 4.6 0.0 5.0 2.3 Flame 6.0 3.7 6.0 0.0 3.6 3.0 Greekey 6.0 4.0 6.0 0.0 6.0 2.0 Heart 6.0 6.5 6.0 0.0 6.4 3.0 Herringbone 8.0 4.0 8.0 0.0 4.0 0.0 Name Pattern Sample Size in mm Column Row X Y Spacing Offset Spacing Offset ES 2006 Appendix E Program Split Samples 1100 Hexagon 6.0 7.0 6.0 0.0 5.2 3.0 Hexagon2 7.0 6.0 7.0 0.0 6.0 0.0 Jem 10.0 10.0 10.0 0.0 9.5 5.0 Keyhole 4.0 2.7 5.3 0.0 2.7 2.7 Leaf 10.0fr 5.0 10.0 0.0 5.0 5.0 Melody 10.0 6.0 10.0 0.0 5.0 5.0 Metal 5.0 9.4 5.0 0.0 8.5 2.5 Passage 10.0 10.0 10.0 0.0 10.0 0.0 Piccolo 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 8.0 0.0 Roma 10.0 5.5 10.0 0.0 6.0 5.0 Name Pattern Sample Size in mm Column Row X Y Spacing Offset Spacing Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1101 Rope 7.5 5.0 3.8 0.0 5.5 1.9 Scale 6.4 3.5 6.4 0.0 3.5 3.2 Scale2 3.5 6.4 3.5 3.2 6.4 0.0 Seville 6.7 5.6 6.7 0.0 4.5 4.5 Star5 6.0 5.7 6.0 0.0 5.7 3.0 Steps 8.0 8.0 6.0 -6.0 6.0 6.0 Suncros 10.0 10.0 4.0 -6.0 4.0 6.0 Suncross2 11.0 11.0 6.8 -1.3 6.8 1.3 Swing 6.0 8.2 4.5 0.0 8.2 0.0 Name Pattern Sample Size in mm Column Row X Y Spacing Offset Spacing Offset ES 2006 Appendix E Program Split Samples 1102 Tick 6.8 7.9 6.8 0.1 6.0 6.0 Tile1 8.0 8.0 8.0 0.0 8.0 0.0 Tile2 12.0 12.0 12.0 0.0 12.0 0.0 Tile3 10.1 10.0 10.0 0.0 10.0 0.0 Tile4 6.0 6.0 6.0 0.0 6.0 0.0 Triangl 6.0 5.2 6.0 0.0 5.2 3.0 Triangle3 7.5 6.5 7.5 0.0 6.5 0.0 Vine 8.5 2.8 8.5 0.0 3.5 2.0 Wave 6.0 1.3 6.0 0.0 4.0 3.0 Wave2 9.9 3.2 9.9 2.9 3.2 0.0 Name Pattern Sample Size in mm Column Row X Y Spacing Offset Spacing Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1103 Wave3 10.0 4.5 10.0 0.0 4.5 0.0 Whirl 7.5 7.5 7.5 0.0 7.5 0.0 Wild 8.5 8.0 8.5 0.0 7.5 4.5 Xmastre 16.0 16.0 13.3 8.0 16.0 0.0 Ziggy 5.0 8.0 4.0 0.0 8.0 0.0 Name Pattern Sample
[

Size in mm Column Row X Y Spacing Offset Spacing Offset ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1104

Appendix F

Troubleshooting

This section provides advice for solving problems in ES Designer. If you encounter a problem, refer in the first instance to the following references: ! Wilcom ES User Manualselect Help > Online Manual (or printed version) ! Wilcom ES Online Helpselect Help > Help Topics ! Windows Online Helpselect Start > Help or Help and Support ! Microsoft Windows knowledge base ! Documentation supplied with your hardware, if the problem is hardware-related. For information about other Wilcom products, check the relevant Supplement or Online Help. For the most up-to-date support information about ES Designer and other Wilcom products, visit the Wilcom Support Center at www.wilcom.com.au/support. You will need to register in order to obtain access.

System requirements
PC requirements

Before you install, or if you experience operating problems of any sort, make sure that your computer/s meet the system requirements. Check that your PC meets the system requirements. Check CPU/RAM as well as hard disk space. The table below provides minimum and recommended system requirements. Hardware Item Minimum Requirements Recommended CPU Pentium III (800 MHz) or higher Pentium IV or higher Operating System Windows 2000 / Win XP SP1 Windows XP Professional SP1 or later ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1105

Supported operating systems

NT.

! Wilcom ES 2006 and Wilcom DW 2006 do not support Win98 or Windows ! ES Designer, ES Design Explorer, and Wilcom DW 2006 all require IE 6.0
or higherIE 6.0 is included with the Wilcom ES installation CD and is also available from the Microsoft website.

Free Hard Disk space

Wilcom ES 2006 occupies up to 200 Mb of hard disk space, depending on the options installed. Wilcom DW 2006 free hard disk requirement depends on the installation type. The following are indicative figures only: ! Client: min 200 MB Internet Connection For access to Wilcom website for regular product information and updates Browser IE 6.0 IE 6.0 or above Memory (RAM) 128 MB 512 MB (for running multiple applications) Hard Disk Size 8 GB 20 GB or more, especially for database users Free Hard Disk space 1 GB after installation (non double-spaced) More than 2 GB after installation if running multiple applications Graphics Card Support for High Color (16-bit) and high resolution (1024 x 768) 32 MB or higher graphics card

(non-integrated) Monitor 17" at 1024 x 768 resolution 20" at 1152 x 864 or larger Scanner, Printer and/or Plotter Windows compatible, any connection methode.g. parallel, USB Serial Ports Standard COM port if connecting to an embroidery machine via direct serial connection or Wilcom DCi. Note: To connect multiple machines, consult your local Wilcom Support. USB Ports Dedicated USB port (V1.0 or V2.0) Dedicated USB port (V1.0 or V2.0) Mouse Serial, PS/2 or USB mouse PS/2 or USB mouse Data drives CD-ROM drive for software installation Backup devicee.g. CD/DVD burner, tape backup, removable hard drive Sound card Not required Required for multimedia training products Hardware Item Minimum Requirements Recommended ES 2006 Appendix F Troubleshooting 1106 ! Server: min 2 GB. Note Average 1000 designs will occupy 150 MB of disk space.

Screen resolution

Some controls may be hidden on the user interface if you run your monitor at low resolutions. The physical size of your monitor will have a bearing on the optimum screen resolution.

Check CPU/RAM specifications

To check CPU/RAM specifications

Check your CPU and RAM specifications, and the version of Windows you are running to ensure they meet Wilcom ES requirements. 1 On the Windows desktop, right-click the My Computer icon and select Properties. The System Properties > General dialog opens. 2 Check the Windows version, the CPU and the amount of RAM.

Check your hard disk space

Check that your hard disk has enough space to run ES Designer effectively. This must be greater than 300 MB before intallation. After installation you will need 100 Mb free or 10% of your total hard drive space, whichever is the greater amount.

To check your hard disk space

1 Double-click the My Computer icon on your Windows Desktop. The My Computer window opens. 2 Right-click the hard-disk drive icon (usually C:) and select Properties. The Properties > General dialog opens. This tab shows the hard-disk capacity as well as any free space.

Security device messages

This section describes the messages related to the Wilcom security device. Most security device messages are caused by incorrect connection, access ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1107 codes, interference or conflict with other hardware devices. To prevent security device errors, enter all access codes as soon as you receive them. If you miss any, some features may become unavailable, or ES Designer may stop working altogether. Consult your computer technician if more assistance is required. Tip If you need to provide security device information to Wilcom Support or your reseller, send a screengrab of the Security Device dialog. This saves you transcribing the information and ensures that accurate details are sent. See Quick Start Guide.

Invalid Access Code Hardware key driver not found Please attach your dongle and restart your software
Message Invalid Access Code Cause The access codes you are trying to enter are incorrect for your

security device. You are missing a set of codes. Suggestion Check the Identity Code provided against the Identity Code in the Security Device dialog of ES Designer. If they dont match, note the security device Serial Number and current Identity Code and contact your distributor. See Quick Start Guide. Message Error 14: Hardware key driver not found Cause The dongle driver is not installed, or an incorrect driver is installed. Suggestion 1. Click on OK to close the error message window. 2. Reinstall the Hasp HL device drivers using the command line Haspdinst.exe /i /kp from the installation bin directory. The driver installation program will inform you if a reboot is required. 3. Run the embroidery software again. Message Error 7: Please attach your dongle and restart your software Cause The dongle can not be detected by the computer or the dongle is faulty. ES 2006 Appendix F Troubleshooting 1108

Invalid Product when starting ES Designer Timeout warning Missing Files

Unrecoverable errors

The system may generate unrecoverable errors when opening designs or ES Designer itself. Suggestion Log on to the Wilcom Support Center http://www.wilcom.com.au/support and download the latest dongle driver and install. If this does not solve the problem, the dongle maybe faulty. Please contact your local Wilcom reseller / disturbutor. See also Installing the dongle driver. Message Invalid Product displays when starting ES Designer. Cause The dongle is faulty or incorrect access codes have been entered. Suggestion Note your security device numbersSerial Number and Identity Codeand contact your distributor or reseller. See Quick Start Guide. New codes can normally be provided to re-enable your dongle. If the dongle is faulty, you will need a replacement. Message Your Security Device will time out in xx days. Cause New access codes are required or sent codes have not been entered. Suggestion If you have not received new access codes, note your security device numbersSerial Number and Identity Codeand contact your distributor or reseller. See Quick Start Guide. Message Some files may be missing. Cause Corrupted hard disk, virus attack or security violation. Suggestion Re-install the software. If the problem persists, further diagnose the problem. For example, run a virus checking program and scan the disk to check that the hard disk is not corrupted. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1109

Unrecoverable error when opening design Unrecoverable error when starting ES Designer

ES Design Explorer problems

The following section relates to any ES Design Explorer connection problems you may experience.

Timeout warning when starting ES Design Explorer Unknown Format in ES Design Explorer
Problem When opening a design, the message unrecoverable error, shutting down displays. Cause The design is corrupt. Solution Email the design to your local reseller/distributor for further

analysis. Problem When starting ES Designer the message unrecoverable error, shutting down displays. Cause A design in the Recover folder is corrupt. Solution Use the Purge Recovery utility to delete any corrupted files. Alternatively, delete them manually using Windows Explorer. See also Deleting files with Purge Recovery. Message The connection to ES Designer has timed out. Cause ES Design Explorer requires ES Designer to be running in order to verify security. If ES Design Explorer is started without ES Designer already running and ES Designer takes longer to load than ES Design Explorer expects, the error message will appear. This can happen on a slow PC, or a PC that is low on resources. Suggestion Start ES Designer before starting ES Design Explorer. Message Unknown Format (in place of design thumbnails) Cause Your ES Design Explorer program shortcut has the wrong ES Designer version specified in the Target Path field of the shortcut. ES 2006 Appendix F Troubleshooting 1110

Thumbnails slow to generate in ES Design Explorer Design files not showing up in ES Design Explorer

Device connection problems

The following section relates to any embroidery machine and digitizing tablet connection problems you may experience in ES Designer.

Problem connecting to Melco embroidery machine

Suggestion Right-click the relevant ES Design Explorer icon and select Properties. Change the statement to match the version you are running with ES Design Explorer, e.g. C:\Program Files\Wilcom\DE2006\WilcomDesignExplorer.exe might become: C:\Program Files\Wilcom\DE2006\WilcomDesignExplorer.exe version=2006x where x is the software version revision found under Help > About ES Select the 'Unknown Format' thumbnails and select View > Validate & Refresh to regenerate the thumbnails. Problem Thumbnails are slow to generate in ES Design Explorer. Cause The first time ES Design Explorer accesses a folder containing design files, it has to generate each design's thumbnail image. If the folder contains many files, it can take time to generate the thumbnails. Suggestion Note: Thumbnails only have to be generated once, after which accessing folders is significantly faster. Problem Design files not showing up in ES Design Explorer. Cause You have chosen to display only one type of embroidery file. Suggestion Check which file types you have chosen to display in ES Design Explorer. Select 'All Files' to display all available files. Problem Problem connecting to Melco embroidery machine from ES Designer Cause Direct connection to Melco machines is not supported under Windows 2000 / XP. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1111

Machine/digitizer connection suddenly stops working Machine/digitizer connection stops working after reinstallation of ES Designer Missing connection settings
Suggestion View the document Melco Connect Support Notes.pdf either at C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\Support Notes\Melco Connect Support Notes.pdf or at the Wilcom Support site at www.wilcom.com.au/support in the Wilcom Library section.

Problem The machine connection suddenly stops working. Nothing has changed on the PC or the embroidery machine, and no machine connection settings have changed in ES Designer. Cause The physical connection from the PC to the embroidery machine has been broken, or there is a conflict with another device. Suggestion Check that the cable connections are all sound. Check that the cable has not been damaged. For digitizing tablets, run the connection test. See Testing digitizing tablet connections for details. If you have recently installed new hardwaree.g. a soundcarddisable or remove the device. If that resolves the problem, consult a PC technician to determine how to assign Windows resources so that they dont conflict with the machine connection setup. Problem Machine and/or digitizer connection has stopped working. ES Designer recently reinstalled. Cause Reinstallation of ES Designer over an existing installation using the 'Typical or Compact installation method will overwrite existing machine and digitizer connection settings with the default settings. Suggestion To ensure settings from the existing installation are merged into the new installation, select the 'Custom Install' option. You will be prompted to merge existing settings into the new installation. Tip: Always keep a note of any custom settingsmachine or digitizer connection, user-defined split settings, etcfor use in case of emergency. For instance, your hard drive may crash and you may need to install ES Designer on a different PC. Problem You dont have a record of the connection settings required to set up your embroidery machine or digitizing tablet. ES 2006 Appendix F Troubleshooting 1112

Digitizing tablet is not listed in ES Designer Windows-compatible digitizing tablet not recognized

General problems
The following section relates to general problems you may experience in ES Designer. Suggestion See Setting up Hardware for details of how to set up the device. Visit the Wilcom Support Centre www.wilcom.com.au/support. This lists connection information for most popular devices. If not already a member of the WSC, you will need to register as a licensed user of Wilcom software. Problem The digitizing tablet is not listed in the list of formats in ES Designer, and 'Auto Detect' is not detecting the tablet. Cause If your connection settings are correct, you may need to set up a custom 'format string'. This is a string of letters or characters which tells the software how to interpret the format of the data coming from the digitizing tablet. Suggestion Use the DigiTest utility to determine the digitizing tablets format string. See Testing digitizing tablet connections for details. Enter the string in the The Digitizer User-Defined Format Setup dialog. See Defining and modifying digitizing tablet formats for details. Problem A Windows-compatible digitizing tablet is installed but ES Designer doesn't recognize it. Cause ES Designer is not capable of utilizing Windows drivers for digitizing tablets. Suggestion You need to set up the tablet in ES Designer. See Setting up digitizing tablets for details. Note: Some Windows-compatible tablets install software that runs in the background, constantly checking the serial ports for the presence of the tablet. Sometimes this software takes control of the port, making it unavailable to any other applications such

as ES Designer that need to use it. If you have a Windows-compatible tablet, check the software (usually running in the Windows taskbar) for 'auto detect' settings. You may need to disable auto detect when using the tablet within ES Designer. Note: Some tablet software does not have a disable option and must be uninstalled to free up the serial port. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1113

Units of measurement in ES Designer Designs appearing distorted Inconsistent output results Stitches not displaying
Problem Units of measurement in ES Designer are not what you wante.g. measurements are in inches instead of millimeters, or vice versa. Cause The units of measurement are set in Windows Regional options. Suggestion Change the units of measurement via the Windows Control Panel > Regional/Language options. See your MS Windows documentation for details. Problem Designs arent displayed at actual size on screen or appear distorted. Cause Your screen needs to be calibrated to match your monitor. Suggestion Go to Special > Hardware Setup > Display Monitor and customize your settings to match your monitor. When pressing 1 on the keyboard, designs should then appear at actual size. See Calibrating the monitor for details. Problem There are problems when reading and punching paper tapes, or sending designs to embroidery machines for stitching. Cause These are caused by serial communications problems. Inconsistent reading and writing may be caused by wrong port settings in the operating system or by incorrect settings In ES in the connection setup for the device. Suggestion Change the port settings in ES Designer and/or the device. See Setting up paper tape readers and punches for details. Problem No stitches are displayed in a design even though there is a stitch count in the status bar. Only the shape outlines are shown for the whole design, or for some objects. Cause The View option Show Stitches is turned off, or stitches were not generated for the design or for some objects during digitizing, or the stitches were removed subsequently from selected objects. ES 2006 Appendix F Troubleshooting 1114

TrueView always turned on or off Missing toolbars Missing toolbar buttons Control points missing

Suggestion Select the Show Stitches tool. If some objects still dont have stitches, select them and re-generate the stitches using the keyboard shortcut G. Slight reshaping of the object may also allow stitches to be regenerated. Problem TrueView is always turned on or off. Cause The TrueView display setting is saved when closing ES Designer in the mode you are currently using. Suggestion Open any design and click the TrueView button on or off as required and exit (File > Exit) with the design still open. When you restart ES Designer, all designs will open in the mode you selected when you closed ES Designer. See also Setting TrueView options. Problem Some toolbars are missing. Cause The toolbars have been closed or set not to display. Suggestion Select View > Toolbars and select the toolbar you want to display.

For the Point and Stitch toolbar, select View > Point and Stitch. Problem Buttons are missing from toolbars. Cause The screen resolution is set too low. Suggestion Change the screen resolution to 1024x768 or higher. Problem The control points on selected objects are missing. Cause This problem is related to the display adapter. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1115

Unwanted trims Design integrity errors Beeping sound when digitizing

Suggestion Check the display adapter manufacturer's website or a software driver download site for the latest display adapter driver for your display adapter. If there is a more recent driver available, download and install it. These are normally free. For a listing of popular display adapter websites, see Locate the latest display adapters. Problem Unwanted trims sometimes appear in embroidery objects. Cause You may be using the connectors After Object' or Inside Object' settings incorrectly. Suggestion Check the connector settings. See Using automatic connectors for details. Problem Some designs generate Design Integrity errors. Cause In most cases the problem is caused by a resequencing error in the design, caused when stitches become 'unsequenced' from their objects. This normally happens only when grouped objects are resequenced. Suggestion Avoid resequencing grouped objects. Leave the Design Integrity checker on when digitizing designs. Whenever you receive a Design Integrity error message, click Undo and work around the problem. Even if a design does generate errors, ES Designer will continue to work normally in most cases. Problem ES Designer generates a beeping sound when digitizing. Cause This is normal behavior and is a feature of ES Designer. ES 2006 Appendix F Troubleshooting 1116

Problem recovering design files from backup folder

Embroidery lettering problems

Problem embroidery letters

The following section relates to embroidery lettering problems you may experience in ES Designer. Suggestion To disable, overwrite the C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\RES\button*.wav files with blank wav files. Use the Windows Sound Recorder utility as follows: Select Start > Programs > Accessories > \....\Sound Recorder. Click File > New. Click File > Save As. Browse to the c:\eswin\res folder and save the file as button1.wav. Repeat the process for button2.wav. Note: Just deleting or renaming the C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\RES\button*.wav files will not stop the beeps. Problem You cannot find your backup designe.g. DesignName.BAKin the backup folder or you need to change the file extension. Cause If you have the ES Designer 'Auto Save' option enabled, backups of EMB design files will be saved to the C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\BACKUP folder. This is a basic way of backing up your files although manual backups are highly recommended through File > Save or Save As. Suggestion Start Windows Explorer and browse to the C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\BACKUP folder. Select the file and select

File > Rename. Change the file extension to EMBe.g. DesignName.EMB. Move the EMB file to your c:\design folder. You can now open the file normally in ES Designer. Note: If you cannot see the file extension BAK, you need to change your view settings in Windows Explorer. Refer to Windows Help for more details. Problem Some embroidery letters display or stitch badly. Cause You may be using the particular alphabet incorrectly. Suggestion Ensure you are using the alphabet within Wilcom's recommended sizes and sequence settings as specified in Standard Alphabets. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1117

Incorrect number of lettering connectors Installed optional alphabets not available I Installed optional alphabets not available II
Problem There are too many/too few connectors in my lettering. Cause The connector settings and/or stitch method are incorrectly set. Suggestion Check you are using 'Inside Object' as the connector properties within your lettering object. Also check you are using the recommended stitch method for your lettering. See Using automatic connectors for details. See also Adjusting stitching sequence and join method. Problem Some installed optional alphabets dont show in the alphabet dropdown list. Cause This occurs when there is more than one copy of the alphabet in one of the subfolders of the Wilcom ES installation folder C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\. For example, there is a copy of the alphabet S324.esa in both the C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\wletter and C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\userletw folders. Suggestion Search the hard drive for multiple copies of the alphabet file in question. Search the C: drive for *.ESA files. If there is more than one copy of any file, delete the extra copy from the hard drive. Ensure the remaining copy of the file is in the C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\wletter folder. Restart ES Designer. Problem An optional alphabet which is present in C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\wletter or C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\monogram folder does not appear in alphabet dropdown list. Cause You are using an incorrect security device for the installed alphabets. Suggestion If you have changed security device (without a brain transplant) since you received your optional alphabetse.g. gone from a Trysoft or Blue, Yellow or Black dongle to a Red donglethese will need to be re-created for your new security device. Contact your reseller to order a replacement alphabet disk. Note: dongles which have had a brain transplant will not cause this problem. ES 2006 Appendix F Troubleshooting 1118

Installing the dongle driver

If your dongle driver was not installed correctly or you have an updated version of the driver, you will need to reinstall it. Use the following procedure to install or reinstall your dongle driver. Adding extra switches to the command line may help. Note To install the dongle driver under Win2000 or WinXP, you need to be logged into Windows with Administrator privileges. If not, you will receive an error message User has no access to the registry.

To install the dongle driver

1 Close all Wilcom applications. 2 From the Windows taskbar, select Start > Run. The Run dialog opens. 3 In the Open field, enter: C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\bin\haspdinst.exe -i -kp If you installed ES Designer to a different folder than C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006, modify the command line accordingly. If you have downloaded a newer dongle driver from the Wilcom Support Center site, copy the file to the appropriate folder. Note A space is required before each - or the installation command will not work. 4 Click OK. If the installation is successful, the message The operation was completed successfully or HASP driver successfully installed appears. 5 Restart your PC, if prompted. 6 Start ES Designer.
Enter command line

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1119

Reverting to factory settings

If you have made changes to the default settings or they have become corrupted, use the Revert utility to revert to factory settings. Warning Reverting to the original settings removes any changes you have made to styles, templates and hardware settings. Note down any settings you want to preservee.g. machine connection settingsbefore running the utility.

To revert to factory settings

1 Close ES Designer. 2 On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button and select Programs > Wilcom ES 2006 > Wilcom Tools > Revert. The Revert to Factory Settings dialog opens. 3 Select the items you want restored to factory defaults. 4 Click OK. The selected items are restored to factory settings. Note There is no confirmation message.

Deleting files with Purge Recovery

Delete corrupt files from the C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\Recover and C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\Backup folders using the Purge Recovery utility.
Select items to be restored

ES 2006 Appendix F Troubleshooting 1120

To use Purge Recovery

1 Close ES Designer. 2 On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button and select Programs > Wilcom ES 2006 > Wilcom Tools > Purge Recovery. The Purge Recovery and Backup Directories dialog opens. Tip To delete backup files as well, select Delete Backup files. 3 Click OK. If some files cannot be deleted, a message will display. Using Windows Explorer, delete any remaining files from the C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\Recover and \Backup folders. Tip If the errors persist, try reverting to factory settings. See Reverting to factory settings for details.

Testing digitizing tablet connections

If you experience difficulties with your digitizing tablet, first check that it is correctly connected, and that the hardware settings are correctly configured

in ES Designer. See Serial port settings for details. If you are still experiencing problems, you can confirm that the tablet is communicating correctly with the PC using the DigiTest utility. Note This utility will not recognize mulitport serial cards, e.g. COM1 or COM2. Always connect your digitizing tablet to a standard PC COM port for testing purposes. Once you have confirmed that communications are correct, replace the connection to your multiport serial card and configure the port settings as described.

To test digitizing tablet connections

1 On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, and select Run. The Run dialog opens. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1121 2 In the Open field, enter C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\bin\digitest.exe where C is the drive where Wilcom ES was installed. 3 Click OK. The DigiData - DigiTest window opens. 4 Select Digitizer > Setup. The Digitizer Setup dialog opens. 5 From the Digitizer Format field, select a digitizing tablet to check. If it is not in the list, select Auto Detect. 6 From the Input Mode list, select Point or Stream. This setting must match the one on the digitizing tablet. 7 Select Interpret Digitizer Data to display digitizing tablet data as recognized by ES Designer. During the test, this shows which puck button is pressed and the X, Y coordinates at the point clicked. 8 Enter required information in the Connected To panel fields. See Peripheral device connection settings for details. 9 Click OK. 10 Click the Start/Stop Digitizer icon. 11 Place the digitizing tablet puck on the tablet and press each of the buttons on the puck.
Select digitizing tablet Select Point or Stream Show tablet data as recognized by software Enter connection settings

ES 2006 Appendix F Troubleshooting 1122 Data appears on screen representing the X, Y coordinates and corresponding button number. If the test is not successful, or you get unformatted garbage data, click the Start/Stop Digitizer icon to stop the digitizing tablet. 12 Check the settings. ! If the data is not mostly numeric, the port is in a corrupt state. Close all applications, shutdown your PC and repeat the test. ! If the data appears to be correct, switch to ES Designer and configure the port with the settings you used successfully in DigiTest. See Setting up digitizing tablets for details.

Resolving Exception Access Violation errors

The error message Exception Access Violation can appear when zooming, using lettering, printing or scanning, saving designs, or viewing the Color-Object List. This problem generally relates to the display adapter driver and/or the display adapter itself. Try each of the following solutions in sequence.

Error messages

Exception access violation when starting ES Designer

Problem An Exception Access Violation error message appears when starting ES Designer. Cause A corrupt design file in the Recover folder or a corrupt C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\res\defaults.dfl file. Suggestion Delete any files in the C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\recover folder. If ES Designer still will not start, use Windows Explorer to copy the default C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\bin\defaults.dfl file to the C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\res folder, overriding the corrupt defaults.dfl file. This will reset ES Designer to new installation. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1123

Other exception setting violations

Check the display adapter

Use the following procedure to determine which display adapter make and model you have, and what drivers are installed for the display adapter.

To check the display adapter

1 From the Windows taskbar, select Start > Settings > Control Panel. 2 Double-click the System icon. 3 Select the Device Manager option for Windows 2000/XP by selecting the Hardware tab and clicking Device Manager. 4 Click to open the Display Adapters node. 5 Note down the display adapter listed. Problem An Exception Access Violation error message appears when zooming, using lettering, printing or scanning, saving designs, or viewing the Color-Object List. Cause This problem generally relates to the display adapter driver and/or the display adapter itself. Suggestion Try each of the listed solutions in sequence. See Resolving Exception Access Violation errors for details. Use the System utility in the Control Panel to check your display adapter and drivers.
Note display adapter

ES 2006 Appendix F Troubleshooting 1124 6 Right-click the adapter and select Properties. 7 Select the Driver tab and note the date of the driver. 8 Click Driver Details. 9 Note down Provider and File Version details. 10 Cancel out of the dialogs and close the Control Panel window. 11 Check the display adapter manufacturers website for a more recent version of the driver. See Locate the latest display adapters for details.

Locate the latest display adapters

Some common problems are related to your PCs display adapter. These occur more frequently with the newer and 3D display adapters. Check the display adapter manufacturers website or a software driver download site for the latest display adapter driver. If there is a more recent driver available, download and install it. These are normally free from the provider. Some popular display adapter websites are: ! www.ati.com ! www.nvidia.com ! www.matrox.com ! www.diamondmm.com ! www.download.com ! www.intel.com ! www.helpdrivers.com ! www.neomagic.com ! www.oaktech.com

! www.s3graphics.com
Note provider and file version

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1125 ! www.sis.com ! www.tridentmicro.com ! www.tucows.com ! www.windrivers.com If your video card is integrated to your system board, please check the system board manufacturers website.

Reduce graphics acceleration

If you already have the latest driver installed, or if installing a newer driver does not solve the problem, you can reduce the Windows graphics acceleration.

To reduce graphics acceleration

1 Access the Hardware Acceleration option in your system settings for Win 2000/XP: ! Right-click the Desktop and select Properties. ! Select the Settings tab and click Advanced. ! Select the Troubleshooting tab. 2 Reduce the hardware acceleration a notch. 3 Click OK. You will be prompted to restart your computer. 4 When Windows has restarted, see how the software runs. If it has not improved, try dropping the acceleration another notch. Usually you should not need to reduce the acceleration by more than two notches to correct the problem. However, in extreme cases, you may need to reduce it to None.
Reduce hardware acceleration

ES 2006 Appendix F Troubleshooting 1126

Install a different model display adapter

In a very few cases updating the display adapter driver and/or reducing graphics acceleration will not solve the problem. The only solution is to install a different brand/model of display adapter. Wilcom can advise on the type of display adapter to use. If you have another computer with a different display adapter, we recommended swapping the two. Often a problem display adapter will work fine in another computer. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1127

Glossary
machines.

10O: Stitch file format native to Toyota 3D Warp: 3D Warp is used with Motif Fill to
create three dimensional effects. You can make shapes appear concave or convex using Globe In or Globe Out. You can also create distance effects using Perspective. Accordion Spacing: artistic stitch effect that gradually varies stitch spacing between dense and open fill along an embroidery object, producing shading and color effects which are difficult to achieve manually. Active window: The active window is one to which the next command or action will apply. If a window is active, its title bar changes color to differentiate it visually from other open

windows.

Allover: Continuous embroidery which covers

all of the goods from selvage to selvage. Alphabet: A set of characters of the same design or style including letters, numbers and typographical symbols. Anchor point: A fixed point used when rotating, scaling, skewing or mirroring a design. Anti-aliasing: A software technique similar to dithering which is used to soften hard outlines where color blocks intersect. It produces smoother outlines by blurring the pixels where colors join. Appliqu: Decoration or trimming cut from one piece of fabric and stitched to another to add dimension and texture. Designs with appliqu can be more economical than embroidery alone, if appliqu occupies a significant amount of the design, thereby lowering stitch count. In schiffli embroidery, an embroidered motif, hand cut or aetzed away from base fabric. Appliqu cutter: A device that can cut fabric along a line, somewhat like old pen plotters. It requires a vector file as input. In MS Windows they can be set up as a type of printer device. Artwork: Bitmap or vector image used as a backdrop for digitizing. See also Bitmap image and Vector image. Auto Appliqu: Auto Appliqu is an embroidery object associated with an appliqu which provides automatic stitching to place it, tack it down, and cover its edges. Auto Center: Auto Center automatically centers the start and end points of a design. Auto Jump: Auto Jump preserves long stitches in an object by splitting them into a series of jumps. This prevents the machine from inserting unwanted needle penetrations when the maximum frame movement is exceeded. Auto Scroll: The Auto Scroll feature automatically scrolls the screen while you are digitizing. Auto Spacing: Auto Spacing only affects Satin stitch. It adjusts stitch spacing according to column width. ES 2006 Glossary 1128 Auto Split: Auto Split only affects Satin stitch. When applied, it breaks any long Satin stitches into shorter ones. It also distributes needle penetrations in a random pattern so that they do not form a line in the middle of the shape. Used primarily to prevent long stitches in wide columns, it can also be used as an alternative to Tatami fill. Auto Split looks more Satin-like and works well with turning stitches,

creating soft lines and a little more depth. Auto Start and End: Before stitching, some embroidery machines require you to position the starting needle exactly above the first needle penetration point. Use Auto Start and End to connect the first and last stitches in the design. This makes it easy to position the needle before stitching, and reduces the chance of the needle hitting the side of the frame. Automatic color change: Ability of multi-needle embroidery machine to follow a command to change to a specified needle with a different thread color.

Automatic pull compensation:

Embroidery stitches pull the fabric inwards where the needle penetrates. This can cause the fabric to pucker, and gaps to appear in the embroidery. Automatic pull compensation counters this effect by overstitching outlines of filled shapes on the sides where the needle penetrates. This means the design can be optimized for different fabrics. See also Pull compensation. Automatic stitch shortening: Reduces stitch bunching at sharp corners. See also Stitch shortening. Auto Trace: Auto Trace is used to convert bitmap images to vector images. Back appliqu: A fabric piece used behind a design where the front fabric will be cut away to reveal the fabric beneath it. Backdrop: An electronic image used as a guide for digitizing designs on-screen. Two types are usedvector or bitmap. Insert them from various file sources, or copy and paste them via the Windows clipboard. Background: ES Designer lets you change the background color of the design window to match the color of your fabric. Or you can select a background fabric for more realistic previews and presentations. The background is saved with the colorway. Background: The area inside the hoop in the design window. The background color can be changed to match the color of the fabric you will be using for stitchout. Backing: See Stabilizer. Backstitch: Backstitch is an input method which can be used for delicate outlines. This stitch follows intricate curves well. It is also is the term used for every second row of stitches in a Tatami fill. See also Standard backstitch, Borderline backstitch, and Diagonal backstitch. Backtrack: Use Backtrack and Repeat to reinforce outlines while specifying the direction of the stitching. Backtrack stitches in reverse

direction to the original. It is typically used to make run stitch outlines thicker without creating unwanted connecting stitches. Repeat duplicates the original stitch direction and is typically used with closed shapes. Backup: The copying of files onto floppy disk or other storage media in order to duplicate and secure data. Usually two copies are made and kept separately. Baseline: The notional line on which the letters of an alphabet sit. Only descenders extend below it. Baselines determine the shape of lettering objects in a design. Place it on straight horizontal or vertical lines, curve it ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1129 around a circle or arc, or digitize your own baselines. Baseline Angle: The baseline angle determines the absolute angle of the baseline relative to the horizontal axis. You use it to align letters to a significant part of the design. Begin Jump function: Begin Jump functions instruct the machine not to use needle penetrations. When encoded in an output file, it normally converts to a Needle In function. See also End Jump function. Bitmap: An electronic image made up of dots or pixels, in contrast to vector outlines. Typically created in paint programs, bitmaps have file extensions such as BMP, JPG, GIF, TIF and PCX. When enlarged or scaled down, vector images preserve image quality while bitmap images generally cause problems of pixilation and image degradation. See also Pixels. Blending: See Color Blending. BMP: Windows bitmap image format. Bobbin: Spool or reel that holds the bobbin thread, which helps form stitches on the underside of the fabric. Bobbin embroidery: Designs worked with the fabric hooped facedown and the specialty thread or ribbon wound onto the bobbin. Most effective for simple designs such as leaves and vines, or special effects with threads too heavy to be threaded through the needle. Bonding: Permanently joining two fabrics together with a bonding agent. Heat sealing. Borderline backstitch: The rows are approximately parallel. With lower density fills, borderline backstitch creates a smooth, well-defined edge. Borderline backstitch is also called Trapunto style. See also Backstitch. Borer: Borer is a sharp instrument attached to embroidery machines to puncture fabrics. Schiffli machines have built-in borer knives under the needle line which can cut different sized holes in fabric.

Borer depth: You can choose the numbering

system for specifying the Borer depth: Plauen where one is the base and seven (7) the normal middle position and Saurer where the base is zero and the normal middle position is six (6). Borer Depth function: The Borer Depth function controls the size of the boring hole. The deeper the borer cuts, the larger the hole. The borer depth on Schiffli machines is changed one value at a time. Thus a change in depth of three (3) units will be automatically distributed by ES Schiffli to three (3) stitches. Borer functions: Borer In/Out functions are available for embroidery machines equipped with a borer. They instruct the machine when to use the boring knife or tool instead of a needle. Boring: Open-work incorporated into embroidered designs. A sharp-pointed instrument punctures, or bores, the fabric, and stitches are made around the opening to enclose the raw edges. Bounding box: The dotted rectangle that appears when you select a range of items. Branching: The Branching feature lets you digitize like objectse.g. the fingers of a handwithout having to think about the most efficient stitching sequence and joins. BRO: Bits & Volts file format. Cap Corner: A type of Smart Corner. Cap corners are used for very sharp corners as they produce fewer stitches. Cartoon: Finished artwork of an embroidery design to be digitized. Usually six times larger ES 2006 Glossary 1130 than finished design size, based on the art-to-stitching ratio historically used in the Schiffli industry. Cascade: A way of arranging open windows on the desktop so that they overlap each other, with the title bar of each window remaining visible. CED: A data condensed file format. Center at Current Stitch: The object will be placed with its center at the needle position marker. Center Run underlay: Center Run underlay places a row of stitches along the center of a column. It is used to stabilize narrow columns (e.g. 2-3 mm wide). Chain stitch: Stitch that resembles a chain link, formed with one thread fed from the bottom side of the fabric. Done on a manual or computerized machine with a hook that functions like a needle. Checkbox: A small square box that appears in a dialog box and that can be selected or cleared. When selected, a tick or a cross

appears. A checkbox represents an option that you can set. Chenille: Form of embroidery in which a loop (moss) stitch is formed on the top side of the fabric. Uses heavy yarns of wool, cotton or acrylic. Created by a chain stitch machine that has been adjusted to form this stitch type. Also known as loop piling. Click: Press and release the left mouse button. See also Right-click. Click-and-drag: Click to select, hold down the left mouse button, move the cursor and release. Clipboard: A temporary storage area in PC memory for what was last cut or copied. Images on the clipboard can be pasted into designs any number of times. Close button: Used to close a window or an application. In MS Windows, it appears as a small box with an X in it at the top-right of the title bar. CND: Melco Condensed (CND) is the native file format of the Melco embroidery digitizing software. CND files store only digitized outlines and stitch values. Color blending: Digitizing technique which creates interesting perspective, shading and color effects by blending colored layers. Two colors are merged smoothly from one to another using a mixture of dense and open fill. Color depth: Color depth, also called pixel depth, refers to the amount of color information available to each pixel in an image. An image with a color depth of 1-bit can display only two colors. As the color depth increases, more colors are available 16 Colors (4 bit), 256 Colors (8 bit), High Color (16 bit), True Color (24 bit). Color palette: The color palette contains a selection of thread colors tailored for each design. This color scheme, or colorway, represents the actual thread colors in which a design will be stitched. See also Thread chart. Color Reduction: See Image Preparation. Colorways: Colorways are multiple color schemes for the same design. They are made up of colors defined in color books which may be created in Wilcom ES Designer or similar design program, or may be selected from a patent color system such as Chromatone or Pantone. Column: Narrow, long, curving shape. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1131 COM port: A standard serial port used as a connection point for peripherals. Other ports may be present if the appropriate internal option cards have been installed. The computer must be informed which port is being used by which peripherale.g. COM1, COM2, etc.

Combination Split: Use of different

combinations of Satin and Tatami stitches in Program Split to create various effects with the same pattern. There are three Combination Split optionsSatin in Satin, Satin in Tatami and Tatami in Tatami. Command: An instruction issued to the software in order to carry out an action. It may be as simple as paste an object or as complex as regenerate stitches. It is usually activated via a menu item, toolbar icon, or command button in a dialog. Command button: A button in a dialog which executes or cancels the selected action. Two common command buttons are Cancel and OK. Complex Fill: Input method, used to digitize large and complex shapes. Allows holes to be designated at the same time the object outline is digitized. The object is thus digitized as one fill area, instead of being broken down into multiple sections. Objects so created are known as Complex Fill objects. Condensed file: See Outline file. Configuration: The size and type of computer hardware. Can also be used to mean the options provided with your software. Confirmation message: A message displayed by the software asking you if you are sure you want to proceede.g. when you want to delete a design. Connector stitches: Connector stitches link objects in a design. They can be run stitches or jumps. You can use automatic settings to generate connectors, trims and tie-offs, or add them manually. Connectors: Hardware devices to connect cables to ports. If the connection is male, the port is female, and vice versa. The wiring configuration of each device is determined by its function. Copy: To place a copy of a selection onto the clipboard. See also Duplicate. Control points: Control points are used to modify object shapes, stitch angles and entry and exit points. You can change the shape of an object by moving, adding or deleting control points on the outline. For most objects, you can also change control points from corner points to curves. Contour stitch: Contour is a curved fill stitch typestitches follow the contours of a shape, creating a curved, light and shade effect. It only works on columnar shapes. There are two typesStandard and Spiralboth of which can be applied to Input A, Input B, Input C or Ring objects. Standard Contour can also be

applied to Circle objects. Copyright: A right granted by the government or by international agreement giving the owner the exclusive privilege to publish and sell artistic work during the life of the creator plus 50 years. Cover stitch: The cover stitch is the Satin border around an appliqu shape. You can change the width of the cover stitch, and offset it to the inside or outside of the digitized outline. Crest: An embroidered motif like an emblem, an insignia or a Coat of Arms. Cross-stitch: Regular Bean stitch movements that cross at the center to form an X. Laid in rows or within a box shape to form ES 2006 Glossary 1132 geometric designs. Creates a handmade appearance. CSD: POEM/Singer/Huskygram file format Current property settings: Current property settings override the template defaults. Unless you deliberately change them, these take the default values. You generally change them to save time when digitizing. For example, you may preset Tatami stitch spacing to use a specific density for all new Tatami objects you create. See also Object properties. Custom alphabets: Custom alphabets are made up of letters, numbers or symbols you digitize. Custom designs: Designs created by digitizing artwork or manipulating existing patterns. Cut: An editing function. To remove a selection from a design. The cut selection is stored in memory (on the clipboard) and can be pasted into the same or different design. Cut appliqu: See Back appliqu. Cutter: See Appliqu cutter. DAT: DAT is the stitch file extension used with Hiraoka, Laesser, and Wilcom SPES formats. Default object properties: Default or starting property settings are the ones stored with the design template. These are automatically applied to any newly created objects in the design. See also Object properties. Default values: Pre-defined settings which determine object properties such as stitch spacing, as well as certain system settings. These are stored in the design template. They remain current unless you override them with new settings. See also Current property settings and Default property settings. Defects: See Stitching defects. Density: See Stitch density or Thread

density.

Design: A design is a file in the native

embroidery formate.g. EMB, JAN, ARTof embroidery digitizing software. The design source may be a stitch format design. The design contains stitching information such as fabric type in addition to stitched shapes. Design card: Disk containing computerized embroidery designs read by the embroidery machines computer. Design file: See File. Design library/catalog: Computer program which catalogs a collection of digitized designs kept by embroidery shops that allows an embroiderer to access the design by subject, stitch count, number of colors or icon. Design object: See Objects. Design properties: Designs themselves have properties, some of which can be modified, others not. The most important design property is its sourceNative Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or Imported Stitches. Other properties include the software version number, stitch count, and so on. Colorways too are properties of the whole design. Design segment: See Segments. Design sequence: See Stitching sequence. Design source: While embroidery files are broadly classified as outline (condensed) or stitch (expanded), ES Designer internally tags files as belonging to one of four typesNative ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1133 Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or Imported Stitches. See also Design properties. Design template: See Template. Design window: The design window is where designs are displayed for viewing and modification. Design Workflow Administrator: It is the DW Administrator who is generally responsible for the high-level setup of Design Workflow databases. The DW Administrator determines who gets access to databases, what users can see and do, and who defines the categories under which information will be stored. The DW Administrator is generally the manager of the companys design section. This person has the necessary background knowledge and authority to control what goes into databases and how the information is to be used. Desktop: MS Windows terminology for the screen background on which program icons are displayed. Destination folder: The folder (directory)

where you intend to copy or move one or more files. Detail: An outline, a border, a pickout run, or a small area of the design you want to be stitched out last when using Smart Design. Diagonal backstitch: The backward rows are diagonal, directly connecting the forward rows. Diagonal backstitch is suitable for turning shapes, and gives good results with Jagged Edge. See also Backstitch. Dialog: An on-screen box that either requests or provides information. Many dialogs present options to choose among before a command is carried out. Some dialogs present warnings or explain why a command cannot be completed. Digitizer: Usually refers to the person punching or digitizing the design. Digitizer can also refer to the digitizing tablet used by the digitizer. See also Digitizing tablet. Digitizing: Process of encoding a design. Artwork is converted into a series of embroidery objects to be read and manipulated by a specialist CAD/CAM application. Before outputting to embroidery machine, it is converted into stitch data. See also Punching. Digitizing puck: With a digitizing tablet, you generally use a puck instead of a mouse to mark reference points and select commands from the menu chart. Digitizing tablet: Design device used by digitizers to plot needle penetrations for embroidery designs. Sometimes used as an alternative to digitizing directly on-screen. Typically, a pencil drawing of the design is enlarged and then taped to this tablet. The digitizer then uses a device known as a puck to indicate stitch types, shapes, underlay and actual needle penetrations. Digitizing tool: Digitizing tools, sometimes referred to as input methods, are similar to drawing tools except that the end result is an embroidery object rather than a vector object. Different digitizing tools are suited to creating different shapes or design elements. Disk: See Floppy disk. Disk drive: Computers usually have three types of disk drive: a hard disk (or fixed disk) which usually supports the mass storage of information and applications, a floppy disk drive, and a CD ROM drive. Display: A screen used to display the output of a computer. Also known as the monitor. ES 2006 Glossary 1134 Dithering: A software technique which combines existing colors in a checkerboard arrangement of pixels. It is typically used to

simulate colors that are missing from an image palette. A type of optical illusion created by placing two pixels of different color next to each other. The human eye automatically resolves the two colors into a third color. Dongle: A security hardware device required to run protected software. Some are attached to a parallel port, others to a USB port. Dots Per Inch (DPI): A measurement of screen or printer resolution; the number of dots in a line of 1". Double Split Alternate: A variant of Tatami split. See User Defined Split. Double-click: Click the left mouse button twice without moving the mouse. Double-clicking carries out actions such as opening a program from an icon. Download: The process of transferring a copy of a file from a remote computer or the internet to a computer or other device such as an embroidery machine. Drag: An operation of the mouse. Holding the (left) mouse button while moving the mouse. Typically used for moving something on the screen. Drawing object: See Vector object. Drawing package: Software application that creates or allows you to edit vector images made up of separate individual vector objects. Vector images can be scaled with no loss of sharpness. Examples of vector editing programs are Adobe Illustrator, MacroMedia Freehand and Corel Draw. See also Graphics application. Dropdown list : A single-line dialog box control that opens to display a list of choices. DSB: Barudan file format. Basically the same as the T03 tape file but wit a header in front so that it can be written to floppy disk i.e. it is the floppy disk version of the T03 file. DST: Stitch file format native to Tajima machines. DSZ: ZSK stitch or expanded file format. Duplicate: When an object is duplicated, it is not copied to the clipboard. This leaves the clipboard free for you to cut or copy other objects. DXF: AutoCAD vector image format. E Stitch: Widely used for tacking down appliqus as a decorative border. The stitches form a comb pattern. Edge Run underlay: Edge Run underlay places stitches around the edge of an object. Use Edge Run together with the Zigzag or Tatami underlays when digitizing large shapes. Editing: Changing aspects of a design via a computerized editing program. Most programs allow you to scale designs up or down, edit

stitch-by-stitch or block-by-block, merge lettering with the design, move aspects of the design around, combine designs and insert or edit machine commands. Element: An element, in software terms, is a color block consisting of sequential, same-color objects. You can assign names to elements which then appear on the production worksheet. The operator generally uses these to make sure colors are correct during production. See also Production worksheet. EMB: Outline file format native to Wilcom ES. EMB designs contain a complete set of design information in a single all-in-one file object outlines and properties, actual stitches and machine functions, thread colors, a picture icon ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1135 and comments. Even the original design bitmap image can be included in EMB format. Only native EMB files provide 100% perfect scaling and transformation. Emblem: Embroidered design with a finished edge, applied to a garment after stitching, commonly an insignia of identification. Also known as a crest or patch. Embroidery: Decorative stitching on fabric. Generally involves non-lettering designs, but can also include lettering and/or monograms. Evidence of embroidery exists during the reign on Egyptian pharaohs, in the writings of Homer and from the Crusaders of the 12th century. Has evolved from hand-work to manual sewing machines and from hand-looms and Schiffli machines with hundreds of needles to high-speed, computerized multihead machines. Embroidery disk: Embroidery disks are specially formatted floppy disks used to transfer designs from computer to embroidery machine. You can format embroidery disks and save designs to them from within ES Designer. The format you use will depend on the selected embroidery machine. You can also open designs from embroidery disk directly into ES Designer. Embroidery object: See Object. Embroidery thread: See Thread. EMF: Enhanced Metafile vector image format. Empty function: An empty stitch, or non-data stitch, is an industry term for any stitch with a zero movement (0, 0). However, Wilcom ES distinguishes between intentional empty stitches related to the machine functioning, and unintentional empty stitches, which can occur in small or pointed parts of shapes. An empty function is an empty stitch that the system processes as a machine function. It is not removed by the small stitch filter and is preserved when stitches are regenerated or the design is resized. See also

Empty stitch.

Empty jump: You create empty jumps (0,0)

manually in ES Designer by digitizing with Penetrations Out. This prevents the needle from penetrating the fabric, forcing the machine to move across the design in a series of jumps. Also, use empty stitches or empty jumps when required by the selected machine format. See also Empty stitch. Empty stitch: Empty stitch is a tight (zero length) lockstitch, used together with, or as an alternative to, tie-in and tie-off stitches, particularly in objects filled with light density stitching where standard tie-ins and tie-offs may be visible. Also, use empty stitches or empty jumps when required by the selected machine format. See also Empty jump and Empty function. EMX: Wilcom Cross Stitch file format. End X/Y: The coordinates of the last stitch. Enlargement drawing: The technical drawing, usually six times larger than the original design, indicating the stitches to be digitized. When you digitize with a tablet, you use an enlargement drawing to trace the shapes and outlines of the design in the same way you use backdrops on-screen. Before you start, you need to prepare the enlargement drawing. See also Digitizing tablet. Enlarger: The draftsman or designer who draws the technical drawing for the puncher to follow. Entry point: The entry point is the point where the thread enters the embroidery object. This should coincide with the exit point of the preceding object. Lettering Art: Special effect which makes objects bulge or arch, stretch or compress. ES 2006 Glossary 1136 Lettering Art is typically applied to lettering objects, but can also be applied to other types of embroidery object. EPS (Encapsulated PostScript): A standard file format for importing and exporting PostScript language files among applications in a variety of environments. An ESP file is a PostScript file which describes a single page, usually an illustration. In general, the purpose of the EPS file is to be included (encapsulated) in another PostScript file and can contain any combination of text, graphics and images. EPS files normally include a small, low-resolution TIFF, or vector-based Windows metafile image preview as it will appear on a printed page. ESD: Native DOS format of Wilcom DOS EScontains stitch data, like stitch types and densities, which permits better processing. ESD in later versions contains lettering objects with

outlines. Exit: To leave a current window or application. Exit point: The exit point is the point where thread leaves the embroidery object. This should coincide with the entry point of the next object. EXP: Stitch or expanded file format native to Melco machines. Expanded file format: See Stitch file. Expanded tape: An expanded tape which has every stitch of the design punched. Extension: See File extension. Fabric: Fabrics have many properties, the main one being elasticity or fabric stretch. Surface texture, if present, is another property that requires different underlay types. The system can automatically compensate for the pull-push effect of different fabrics. Push, warping, and shearing are reduced by suitable underlay for the stitch type and fabric. Fabric stretch: Embroidery stitches pull the fabric inwards where the needle penetrates. This can cause the fabric to pucker, and gaps to appear in the embroidery. Use automatic pull compensation to counter this effect by overstitching outlines of filled shapes. Facing: See Topping. Factory settings: These are the initial system settings as installed. They are a standard known setting that you can return to. Some customers want to create custom settings tailored to the exact fabric they are using most frequently. The My Fabric settings are those retained in the design and can be saved to the template file. FDR: An embroidery disk format native to Barudan machines. File: A named collection of specifically related information stored on a disk. Designs that have been saved are stored as files. File extension: The dot and three letters at the end of a filename such as .BMP. The extension identifies the file as a certain type, readable by certain applications. Filename: The name of a file, including the extension, e.g. Cat.BMP. Fill stitch: Series of running stitches commonly used to cover large areas. Different fill patterns can be created by altering the angle, length and repeat sequence of the stitches. Also known as Geflect stitch. Filled Holes: This feature creates filled objects from the outlines of selected Complex Fill objects. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1137 Finishing: Processes done after embroidery is completed. Includes trimming loose threads,

cutting or tearing away excess backing, removing facing or topping, cleaning any stains, pressing or steaming to remove wrinkles or hoop marks and packaging for sale or shipment. Fixed Line baseline: A Fixed Line baseline has a fixed length which you can digitize or specify numerically. If the text is longer, the letter spacing is decreased and the letters may overlap. The letter width is not changed. With Fixed Line, you need to mark two points to define the base. See also Baseline. Flagging: Up and down motion of fabric under action of the needle, so named because of its resemblance to a waving flag. Often caused by improper framing of goods. Flagging may result in poor registration, unsatisfactory stitch formation and birdnesting. Flexi Split: Flexi Split is a decorative effect where one or more lines of a Program Split pattern are used in the object fill. The pattern follows the stitch angle and may be scaled to fit the width of the object. There are four different Flexi Split effects. You can use an existing pattern for Flexi Split or create your own. Floppy disk: A flexible disk permanently sealed in a square plastic jackete.g. HD/DD 3.5" floppy disk. Used for information storage off-line for security and/or infrequently used data. Also used for transferring punched embroidery design (stitch file) data from computer to embroidery machine. Florentine Effect: With Florentine Effect you can curve Complex Fill along a digitized line to create flowing stitch effects. The stitches follow the digitized line but maintain uniform density and needle penetration patterns. FMC: An embroidery disk format native to Barudan machines. Folder: A collection of files and sub-folders that are stored together on a disk. Part of structure for organizing files on a disk. Font: A set of characters, including letters, numbers and other typographic symbols, of the same design and style. Also called Alphabet, even if it includes non-letter characters. Fractional spacing: Fractional spacing is used to place stitches more evenly in curved shapes, producing better quality embroidery with fewer stitches. Fractional spacing is particularly useful for columns of Satin stitches with sharp turns. Frame: Holding device to secure fabric under an embroidery head for stitching. May employ a number of means to maintain stability during the embroidery process, including clamps, vacuum devices, magnets, or springs. See also Hoop.

Frame-out position: When you stitch out

appliqu objects, you can set a frame-out position. This shifts the hoop out from under the needle, making it easier to place and trim the appliqu shapes. The frame out settings determine the distance and direction of the hoop movement. Free Line baseline: Free Line is the only type of baseline which does not have a fixed or pre-determined length. When you choose Free Line, the baseline will extend as long as you keep adding letters. You only need to mark its start point. See also Baseline. French knot: A stitch featuring a raised knotted center. Fringe: Threads that are cut and hang loosely from the edge of a design. Function: See Machine Function. ES 2006 Glossary 1138 Fusion Fill: Fusion Fill is an input method used to digitize complex shapes with turning stitches. Many shapes can be digitized with this tool. Create objects using left and right clicks to mark reference points to form the boundary outlines. By digitizing boundaries within shapes, you can create filled objects with holes. Fusion Fill Trapunto: Fusion Fill Trapunto is open fill stitching that turns according to user-defined stitch angles. As with Complex Fill, Trapunto effect forces travel runs to the edges of objects so they do not show through open or loose stitching. Since the Trapunto lines are generally not parallel, lines do not connect on either side of holes. The spacing between lines can be average or maximal. Geflect stitch: Geflect refers to light or heavy stitching used to fill in an area of a design with run stitches. It is also known as Ceeding or Tatami. See also Fill stitch. Graphics application: Software application that creates or allows you to edit bitmap images and/or vector images. See also Paint package and Drawing package. Grayscale: A grayscale picture is made up of 254 different shades of gray, plus solid black and solid white for a total of 256 different tones. Black and white photographs are grayscale. Grid: Grid lines provide visual cues to help you accurately place a design. When you start the software for the first time, grid lines appear by default. Guide run: Series of stitches used to align embroideries in multi-hooping situations or to assist in fabric placement for appliqu. It is the first appliqu layer stitched and is used to position the appliqu fabric on the background material. See also Appliqu.

Handle: See Selection Handle. Hard disk: A device for mass information
storage. Usually the disk is fixed inside the system unit, and a second hard disk can be added. When you store information on the hard disk it will remain there until you delete it. As it has a finite capacity, file management is required. Hardware: Computer componentry, including monitor, keyboard, digitizing tablet, printer, scanner, sewing machine, etc. Heirloom embroidery: Embroidered goods designed to be passed down from generation to generation. Hoop: Device made from wood, plastic or steel used to tightly grip fabric and stabilizer between an inner and outer ring. Designed to hold fabric taut against the machine bed for embroidering, it attaches to machines frame. I-beam: One shape taken by the PC pointer, it indicates that text can be input at the point selected. The shape is like the capital letter I. Icons: Miniature pictures used in the screen display instead of, or as well as, text. The file list can be displayed as icons with the filenames underneath; the toolboxes which appear in the left of the screen are composed of icons. Image editing program: See Graphics application. Image preparation: Method of improving or clean up artwork. Outlined and non-outlined images require different methods of preparation. Cleaning up scanned images may involve any one or a combination of the following techniques: reducing the number of colors, adding or emphasizing outlines, removing noise, dithering or anti-aliasing, eliminating unnecessary detail, cropping sections or eliminating backgrounds. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1139 Imported outlines: Designs read from non-EMB outlineCND or PCHwhere stitches have been generated in ES Designer (or equivalent) from original outlines and stitching data. Imported stitches: Designs read from stitch or expanded files, with or without outline recognition, but stitches have not been regenerated through stitch processing. Note that if you change a stitch designe.g. add a lettering objectthe status changes to Processed Stitches even though the imported stitches may not have been regenerated. INP: Wilcom condensed file format. Turning Angle Fill: Input A is an input method used to digitize columns of varying width and stitch angle. Digitized pairs of

reference points define the outline, while lines connecting the pairs define the stitch angles. Input B: Input B is an input method used to digitize shapes where one side is different to the other, especially where one side requires more reference points than the other. Stitches turn evenly throughout the entire shape. You can use any fill stitch type except Motif Fill. Border: Input C is an input method used to digitize columns of fixed width. It is typically used for digitizing borders and outlines of larger shapes. You can digitize columns to create thick lines or borders. Border is typically used with Satin stitch. Input method: See Digitizing tool. Jagged Edge: Technique for creating rough edges, to create shading effects, or to imitate fur or other fluffy textures in your design. JPG: JPEG file interchange bitmap image format. Jump: A frame or hoop movement without a needle penetration, commonly used to get from one point in a design to another. Jump function: Jump(M) functions cause frame movements without needle penetrations and are used to move smoothly from one part of a design to another. Lacework: Lacework involves the use of threads to produce overall embroidery of full-length fabrics. Most often used to embellish women's apparel and home fashions. Such work typically uses boring. It is the most widely used application for Schiffli machines. Lettering: Embroidery using letters or words. Lettering commonly called keyboard lettering may be created from pre-defined alphabet styles or fonts, allowing variance of size, height, spacing, density and other characteristics. Line art: A drawing with only two colorsusually black and white. List box: A single-line dialog that opens to display a list of choices. Lock stitch: Commonly referred to as a lock-down or tack-down stitch, a lock stitch is formed by three or four consecutive stitches of at least a 10-point movement. It should be used at the end of all columns, fills and at the end of any element in your design where jump stitches will follow, such as color changes or the end of a design. May be stitched in a triangle, star or in a straight line. Lock stitch is also the name of the type of stitch formed by the hook and needle of home sewing machines, as well as computerized embroidery machines. Lockstitch machines: Both Schiffli and Multihead machines are lockstitch machines,

forming stitches in the same way as a home sewing machine. Lockstitch operations involve two threadstop and bottom. The top thread is ES 2006 Glossary 1140 driven by a needle, the bottom by a shuttle. The bottom thread locks the top thread in place, hence the name lockstitch. See also Multihead lockstitch machine. Logo: Name, symbol or trademark of a company or organization. Short for logotype. Looping: Loops on the surface of embroidery generally caused by poor top tension or tension problems. Typically occurs when polyester top thread has been improperly tensioned. Machine format: Different embroidery machines understand different languages. They have their own control commands for the various machine functions. Before you can stitch a design, it must be in a format which can be understood by the target machine. Common formats include Barudan, Brother, Fortran, Happy, Marco, Meistergram, Melco, Pfaff, Stellar, Tajima, Toyota, Ultramatic and ZSK. Machine function: Machine functions are commands for a specific embroidery machine. These include color changes, thread trims, jumps, machine stops, needles in/out, and boring begin/end. Machine setup: Before you can send designs for stitching, you must configure the machine in ES Designer. You can add machines, change settings for machines already set up, or delete machines that are no longer required. Manual object: When you open a stitch format file without outline recognition, it becomes a single manual object. This object consists of a series of individual needle penetration points and has only general and connector properties. When you transform (scale, rotate, mirror) a manual object, the original stitch density does not change. Max/Min stitch length: The minimum and maximum stitch lengths allowable in a design determine the outside limits as measured between needle penetration points. They are governed by the minimum and maximum frame movements that the machine can make. Maximize button: For Windows, the small box in the center of the group of three at the right of the title bar. Click the Maximize button to enlarge a window to its maximum size. Memory: The place in the computers system unit that stores information while you are working with it. If you exit without saving information in memory, it will be lost. Menu bar: The menu bar contains dropdown menus of commands. Some of the same

commands are available on the toolbar. Menu chart: The menu chart provided with the software lets you select commands directly from the digitizing tablet using the puck. You need to register it before use. Minimize button: For Windows, the small box to the left of the group of three at the right of the title bar. Click the Minimize button to reduce a window to its minimum size. Minimum stitch length: The minimum movement of the hoop. It is measured between needle penetration points. See also Max/Min stitch. Mirror: Duplication of an object in the Y and/or X axis. The location and orientation of the mirrored stitches are determined by location and angle of the axis of reflection relative to the position of the original stitches. Mirror-merge: Mirror-Merge Array can create multiple copies of designs, such as badges, spaced in rows and columns for faster stitchouts. Mirror-Merge Reflect can duplicate and mirror designs simultaneously. You can use it to quickly create borders or merge duplicates into a symmetrical object such as a heart. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1141 Mirror-Merge Wreath can duplicate objects around a center point. The Kaleidoscope tool works like Wreath but mirrors objects as well. Mitre Corner: A type of Smart Corner. Mitre Corners create a sharp line at the intersection of the two columns. They are designed primarily for corners between 75 and 90. See also Smart Corners. Modeless dialog: Dialogs which stay on the screen and are available for use at any time but permit other user activities. In contrast, modal dialogs require the user to respond before continuing the program. Modem: Unit to telegraphically send computer information from one computer to another. Monitor: The screen on which punching or stitching progress can be followed, stitch by stitch. Monogram: Embroidered design composed of one or more letters, usually the initials of a name. Moss Stitch: Chenille-type stitch. See Chenille. Motif: Pre-defined design elements, such as hearts, leaves or border patterns, that can be quickly inserted into a design. Motifs generally consist of one or more simple objects, and are stored in a special motif set. Motif Fill: Motif Fill is a decorative fill stitch with which you can fill Complex Fill objects. You

can also create special or three dimensional effects. Motif Run: Motifs which are linked together along a digitized line. You can create decorative outlines using any motif from the list. Mouse: A device, equipped with control buttons and designed to roll about on the table next to the keyboard. As the mouse moves, its circuits relay signals that move a pointer on the screen.

Multihead lockstitch machine:

Multihead lockstitch machines have a horizontal frame. The needles are vertical, and are grouped in heads. They are mainly used for stitching individual itemse.g. badges, garments, which are stretched in separate hoops attached to the frame under each head. A multihead machine can have up to 24 heads, and each head can have up to 20 or more needles. Thread change and trims can be done automatically. See also Lockstitch machine. Nap: A fuzzy or downy surface of fabric covering either one side or both, produced by brushing loosely twisted yarns. Native designs: Native designs refer to designs created in Wilcom ES software (or equivalent). Native file format: A design saved in the original format of the application you are working with is said to be the native file format. It can also refer to the stitch file format required by a specific embroidery machine. When saved to another format, it is known as a non-native format. Needle: Small, slender piece of steel with a hole for thread and a point for piercing fabric. A machine needle differs from a handwork needle; the machine needles eye is found at its pointed end. Machine embroidery needles come with sharp points for piercing heavy, tightly woven fabric; ball points which glide between fibers of knit; and variety of specialty points, such as wedge points, which are used for leather. Needle In/needle Out function: The Needle In and Needle Out functions instruct the machine whether or not to use needle ES 2006 Glossary 1142 penetrations. You can enter these functions automatically using the Penetrations tool. Needle points: You can view needle points in a design to check density or, for instance, to select stitches for editing. Nesting: Nesting lets you create or insert an object at an exact point of the stitching sequence. You can nest an object in the middle of another objects stitching sequence to prevent long connectors being generated.

Network: To link embroidery machines via a

central computer and disk-drive system, usually via a modem or network card. A group of machines linked via a central computer. Noise filtering: Noise filtering means restoring the solid color blocks of original artwork in scanned images. This is achieved by merging different shades into one solid color. Noise filtering is important for automatic digitizing because it makes it easier for the software to identify solid color blocks which become embroidery objects in the resulting design. It also cleans up blurred or mottled areas of color. NORMAL template: Default template. See also Template. Object: In embroidery design terms, an object is an individual element of a design. An object has many properties, such as its size, color, sequence in the design, stitch type and values, including the rules for stitching. See also Vector image, Vector object. Object outline: See Outline file. Object properties: All embroidery objects in ES Designer contain defining settings or values. The values stored with an object become its properties. All objects have certain properties in common such as size and position. There are other, more specific properties of objects which depend on the object type. Object recognition: See Outline recognition. Object type: An object has a type, shape, thread type and color, stitching settings and a position in the stitching order. The object type may or may not determine the intended final appearance of the stitching. Offset Object: Software function used to create new outlines from the outlines of selected objects. Options: Options provide software with extra functionality that can be purchased by registered owners of the product. Outline file: Outline or condensed files are high-level formats which contain object outlines, object properties and stitch data. When you open an outline file in ES Designer, corresponding stitch types, input methods and effects are applied. Outline files can be scaled, transformed and reshaped without affecting stitch density or quality. See also Stitch file. Outline recognition: When you convert a stitch file to outline format, ES Designer reads the data stitch-by-stitch according to the needle penetration points. The software then recognizes stitch types, spacing and length values, stitch effects, and can determine object

outlines.

Outline stitch: Stitch such as Run or Satin

used to outline an embroidery object. Overall embroidery: Overall embroidery is embroidery which covers the entire fabric. This includes lacework where the backing fabric is actually removed after manufacture. Overall embroidery is typical of Schiffli manufacture, less common with Multihead. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1143 Overview window: Use the Overview window to view a thumbnail of the design. The window is updated whenever you make a change, and can be used to zoom in or pan across the design window. Paint package: Software application that creates or allows you to edit image files. You can create lines and filled areas as well as edit the image pixel-by-pixel using paintbrushes, erasers and spraypaint tools. Examples of image editing programs are Adobe Photoshop, Jasc PaintShop Pro and Corel Photo-Paint. See also Graphics application. Pan: Use Pan to view parts of a design which are not currently visible in the design window. Paper tape: Traditional recording media used in the embroidery industry is the paper tape. The tape coding process produces the final design in stitch formata stitch-by-stitch interpretation of the designexactly as the embroidery machine will read it. Now largely replaced by floppy disk, tapes are still used by older machines. More specifically, stitch data paper tapes are eight-channel paper tapes which, in effect, are hard copies of 8 bit binary code. Parallel port: A connection on a computer, usually LPT1, where you plug in the cable for a parallel printer and/or a dongle. Parallel ports are used to connect some embroidery machines. They are named LPT1, LPT2, etc. When you set up a parallel machine connection, select the parallel port and the required protocol, and complete the machine setup procedure. Partial appliqu: Technique to create appliqu objects with partial cover stitching to create an overlapping effect without doubling-up borders. Partition Lines: Partition Lines is a method for offsetting needle penetrations in Tatami fills, used, like Tatami Offset Fractions, to create needle penetration patterns or textures in stitched embroidery. Paste: To insert an object, which has previously been placed on the clipboard by cutting or copying selected objects, into a design. You can paste from the clipboard as

many times as you like. Pattern: The design, card, punching, tape, disc, or enlargement. PCH: Gunold Outline Design or condensed file format. PCX: PC Paintbrush bitmap image format. PDF: Portable Document Format. Used to view the Online Manual in Acrobat Reader. Pattern outline: See Motif Run. Pause function: The Pause function is a conditional Stop, always on an empty stitch. It is interpreted by the machine according to the machine operator preferences. Pencil rub: Low-cost way of producing an embroidery design sample. Consists literally of a piece of tracing paper placed over a stitchout and rubbed lightly with a pencil to produce an impression of the embroidery. Penetrations: The Needle In and Needle Out functions instruct the machine whether or not to use needle penetrations. You can enter these functions automatically using the Penetrations tool. Peripheral: Any device connected to a computer which is to some degree controlled by the computere.g. an embroidery machine or printer. Photo Click: Technique for creating embroidery designs directly from photographs ES 2006 Glossary 1144 and other grayscale bitmap images. Photo Click designs consist of rows of Satin or Contour stitches of varying spacing. The effect resembles the output of a line printer. Pixel: A dot. For example, dots of light that make up the picture on a computer screen. The more pixels there are in a given areathat is, the smaller and closer together they arethe higher the resolution. Pixilation: An effect which occurs when a bitmap image is enlarged so that the individual pixels are obvious to the eye. PMU: PMU is a Proel stitch or expanded file format. PNG: Portable Network Graphics vector image format. Point & Stitch: Toolset used to create embroidery designs by automatically digitizing blocks of color in electronic images, or converting vector outlines directly to embroidery objects. See also Smart Design. Pointer: A part of the screen display, the pointer can take various shapes. It is moved by moving the mouse and can be used to point to anything on the screen to make selections and indicate points for input. It also indicates when the computer is working and no input is

possible. Point: Unit of measurement, with 10 points equal to 1 mm. Port: A connection on a computer where you plug in the cable that carries data to another device. Ports which are used to attach peripherals have names like COM1 or LPT1 so that you can specify where the peripherals are attached. Position: The Position indicator shows position of the design (X, Y) in the design window. Process: The Process feature lets you adjust the density of one or more stitch types across the whole or selected parts of a design. Change stitch density in order to stitch on a different fabric or with a different thread. Alternatively, you may want to make production cheaper by reducing the overall stitch count. Processing a stitch file is similar to converting it to an outline file when opening except that you can process only selected objects or stitches. Processed stitches: Designs read from stitch or expanded files where stitches have been regenerated by processing. Production worksheet: The production worksheet is the link between the designer and the embroidery machine operator. It contains a design preview as well as essential production information, including the design size, the color sequence and any special instructions. Program: A computer program or application is generally used for a particular kind of work, such as word processing or database management. Program Split: A decorative fill stitch which can be applied to various object types where needle penetrations form a tiled pattern. Different preset patterns are available for use. Properties: See Object properties. Protocol: The communications protocol depends on the connection type between the computer and the embroidery machine. This will be one of: standard serial, parallel, serial to parallel converted (DCi), or interface card. PS: Postscript vector format. Puck: See Digitizing puck. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1145 Puckering: Result of the fabric being gathered by the stitches. Many possible causes include incorrect density, loose hooping, lack of backing, incorrect tension or dull needle. Pull compensation: Digitizing technique that takes into account the distortion of a design that will occur because of the interaction of thread with fabric. Push and pull will cause a circle digitized perfectly round to sew with the

sides pushed out, resulting in an egg shape. Generally, it is necessary to extend horizontal elements and reduce vertical elements. See also Automatic pull compensation. Puncher: The skilled programmer who makes the apes for embroidery machines. Punching: Conversion of artwork into a series of commands to be read by an embroidery machines computer or controller. The term refers to an earlier method of machine embroidery whereby designs are punched to paper tape. A part of the machine, called an automat, reads the paper tape or Jacquards punched with holes representing stitches, pantograph movements and other commands. While still capable of producing paper tape, many digitizing systems now store this information on disk formats. See also Digitizing. Push-Pull: When any stitch is sewn into fabric, the tension in the thread between needle penetrations can build up and result in a push-pull effect. This can cause distortions in your sewn designs, poor stitch registration and even the bunching of the fabric. The degree of distortion can be affected by the following factors: stitch density, fabric type, underlay, backing type, thread type and garment orientation. See also Stitch-Pull. RAM: Random Access Memory, computer chip maintaining memory. Random factor: You can eliminate unwanted patterns and distribute stitches evenly within a shape using a random factor. Apply random factors to Tatami Partition lines or Program Splits. You can use this effect to imitate different textures such as fur, grass, leaves, etc. Raster image: See Bitmap image. Read: To open a design which has been written on a design card or to an embroidery machine. Recognition: See Outline recognition. Redraw: The screen display is refreshed. This is useful when parts of the display have become obscured in the course of editing. See also Slow Redraw. Image Preparation: The Image Preparation feature automatically reduces color blocks in bitmap images to a single color, removing anti-aliasing and noise. You can let the software reduce the color count automatically or specify a precise number. The latter is useful if you want to match design colors to an exact number of thread colors. Reference point: A point that can be aligned with the grid. For example, you can set the grid reference point to the design center.

This is easier and faster than moving the whole design. Refresh: See Redraw. Registration: Correct registration is achieved when all stitches and design elements line up correctly. Relative Pointer Setting: This setting shows the pointer position as an absolute value from the first needle point of the design. Useful for checking that the design fits a given area. ES 2006 Glossary 1146 Relative: The distance the pointer is from a previously marked point, or from the previous stitch point. Resequence: You can change the position of a selected object by cutting it, then pasting it somewhere else in the stitching sequence, or by using the Resequence command. You can also resequence objects by color or using the Color-Object List. Resizing: See Scaling. Resolution: Resolution determines the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to create an image. The higher the value, the clearer the image, but the more storage space required. A resolution of 75 dpi generally produces good results. RGB: RGB stands for red, green, and blue. It is the system used by computer monitors to create color. Right-click: To press and release the right mouse button. See also Click. Rotation handles: When you select an object, selection handles display at its extremities. If you click the object again, rotation and skew handles appear around the object. Rotation handles appear at the corners of the object and an anchor point displays at the objects center. Skew handles are diamond-shaped and appear at the center-top and bottom of the object. See also Selection handles. Run stitch: Run stitch (also called Walk stitch) places a single row of stitches along a digitized line. The needle penetrations are placed in consecutive order. Run is generally used for stitching outlines and connector stitches. Run stitch length can be set to automatically vary in order to follow tight curves. Satin stitch: Type of fill stitch. Formed by closely arranged zigzag stitches, it can be stitched at any angle and with varying lengths. The thread is laid across a shape with a zigzag sewing action where two stitches form a column. Hence it is only suitable for small or narrow shapes. As the stitches are almost

parallel, Satin provides good coverage. It is often used for lettering, outlining, and details. Because there are generally no needle penetrations breaking up the fill, Satin stitch creates a glossy effect. Save: To store (design) information in a file. Each time you save a design, you replace the previous version using the filename. You should save your design frequently. Scale factor: This option allows you to automatically scale CND designs as you load them. For example, to scale the imported design to 120% of the original, you would enter a scale factor of 1.2. Scaling: Ability to enlarge or reduce a design in size. In stitch or expanded format, most scaling is limited to 5% because the stitch count remains constant despite final design size. In outline or condensed formats, scale changes may be more dramatic because stitch count and density are recalculated. Scanner: A device that converts physical images into digital form so that they can be stored and manipulated by computer. Scanning allows you to take scanned images as a basis for embroidery design. Scanning resolution: Most scanners require you to enter scanning resolution information. Resolution determines the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to create a drawing. The higher the value, the clearer the image but larger the file. For digitizing purposes, use a maximum resolution of 300 dpi (dots per inch). A resolution of 72 dpi (screen resolution) will usually be sufficient. Generally speaking, the ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1147 smaller the source image and/or more detail it contains, the higher the resolution needs to be. Schiffli machine: Commercial embroidery machine that utilizes the combination of needle and shuttle to form a stitch. Massive in size. Some schiffli machinesalso known as loomsweigh 10 tons and have up to 1024 needles. Most Schiffli machines do not have automatic thread trim or automatic color change. Excellent for emblem production, the creation of lace, embroidery production on oversized items and production orders of very large quantities. Screen calibration: You need to calibrate your monitor so that designs at 1:1 scale appear at real size. Do this when you first install ES Designer, whenever you change your monitor, or adjust your monitors horizontal or vertical controls. Screen resolution: See Pixels. Scroll bar: The bar at the bottom and right edge of a window whose contents are not

entirely visible. Each scroll bar contains a small box, called a scroll box, and two scroll arrows to allow different types of scrolling. Security code: Options in ES Designer are controlled by a security device installed on the computer. Security access codes entered into the software are sent to this security device. Each security device has a unique serial number and identity code. Security Device: See Dongle. Select: To highlight an object or group of objects for the purpose of editing. Only selected items can be edited. Selection handles: Eight small squares that appear symmetrically at the corners and edges of a selected object. Use them to position and resize objects. See also Rotation handles. Sequence: See Stitching Sequence. Sequin attachment: Sequin attachments are computerized or manual machine devices which apply sequins by stitching, glue or heat. Sequin mode: Sequin mode enables quick digitizing of Drop Sequin functions. See also Drop Sequin functions. Serial port: A connection point on a computer where you plug a serial communications device such as a modem. PC serial COM ports are male connectors, and can be either 9-pin or 25-pin. They are named COM1, COM2, COM3, etc. The number of available ports limits the number of devices you can connect. If additional ports are required, you can add them. Multi-port serial cards can also be used. Serial Port Setup: Here you can adjust Baud, Data Bits, Stop Bits, Parity values. These settings must be identical to those of the embroidery machine. The type of handshaking must match the type of cable you are using. Sharpen Edges: Tool used to prepare outlined images for automatic digitizing. Sharpen Edges automatically sharpens outlines and reduces noise. Areas enclosed by a black outline are reduced to a single color. Outline sharpening makes it easier for the software to recognize distinct areas in the artwork. These areas then become the embroidery objects of the finished design. Use it particularly if the outlines are blurry, fuzzy or indistinct. Short stitch: Digitizing technique that places shorter stitches in curves and corners to avoid an unnecessarily bulky build-up or stitches. Shortcut key: A key stroke or a series of keystrokes you can use to perform a task instead of using the mouse. For example, Ctrl+C actions the Copy command.

ES 2006 Glossary 1148 Sizing handles: See Selection handles. Skew handles: See Rotation handles. Slow Redraw: Use to redraw your design slowly. Slow Redraw lets you view the stitching and color sequence of a design in slow motion. Small stitches: Use the Small Stitch Filter to remove unwanted small stitches from a design automatically. Smart Corners: Sharp points in a shape may cause a bunching of stitches and needle penetrations which can create a hard spot in the embroidery and may damage the fabric or needle. Smart Corners helps you control sharp corners in Input A and Input C objects. See also Mitre Corner and Cap Corner. Smart Design: Toolset used to create embroidery designs by automatically digitizing electronic images. Smart Design automatically converts bitmap images to fully digitized embroidery with little or no intervention. See also Point & Stitch. Software: Programs, such as MS Windows and Wilcom ES, which run your computer. Specialty threads: Threads designed for effects such as shine, glitter, iridescence or thickness. The threads often are made from synthetic materials including rayon, mercerized cotton, metallics and textured nylon. Spiral Contour: Spiral Contour creates a single, continuous line of stitching that spirals around to fill the shape. Typically, it is used for rings and borders, but it is also suitable for other closed shapes. See also Contour stitch. Split Alternate: Split Alternate is a variation of Tatami split. See also User Defined Split. Split object: You can split embroidery objects that were created with the Input A, Input B, and Input C tools, if Satin or Tatami, or Program Split is the selected stitch type. SPI: Stitches per inch; system for measuring density or the number of Satin stitches in an inch of embroidery. SPM: Stitches per minute; system for measuring the running speed of an embroidery machine. SR/SD: Melco Star format. Star and Superstar are types of Melco machine (quite old now). Stabilizer: Also know as backing, stabilizers are woven or non-woven materials used underneath the item or fabric being embroidered to provide support and stability. It can be hooped with the item or placed between the machine throat plate and hooped garment. Available in various weights and types such as cut-away, tear-away and wash-away (soluble).

The more stitches your design has, the more backing you will need. Professional embroiderers use tear-away stabilizers for woven fabrics and cut-away stabilizers for knits. See also Topping. Standard backstitch: The rows are approximately parallel, with every backstitch row slightly shorter than the forward row. Because the rows are different lengths, there are fewer small stitches at the edge of the shape, reducing possible damage to the fabric. Standard backstitch is suitable for high density fills. See also Backstitch. Standard Contour: Standard Contour creates rows of stitches across the shape, perpendicular to the digitized stitch angle. The number of stitch lines is constant, so the stitching is denser where the shape is narrower, and more open where the shape is wider. See also Contour stitch. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1149 Status bar: Provides information about the whole design: number of stitches, position of the design (X, Y), number of colors (C), number of stops (S), etc. STC: Gunold stitch or expanded file format. Stemstitch: Stemstitch is an input method which gives a thicker outline than backstitch and can be used to mimic hand-sewn embroidery. It is used for stems and vines with other decorative stitches, or as an outline for Satin or Motif fills. Stitch: A stitch is one needle penetration; also used to refer to the thread laid down from one needle penetration to the next. Stitch angle: The stitch angle is the angle the overall stitching follows within a shape. The shape may have a fixed stitch anglee.g. 45 to the horizontalor multiple stitch angles. Stitch bunching: Standard stitch spacing is calculated at the outside edge of a shape. With sharp curves, spacing which provides adequate coverage on the outside edge may cause bunching along the inside edge. This may cause thread breakage when stitching out. Stitch count: Stitch count refers to the number of stitches in a design. In ES Designer one stitch is considered one machine revolution. See also Design properties. Stitch density: The number of stitches per given area (or stitch lines per distance in a fill). Stitch editing: Digitizing feature that allows one or more stitches in a pattern to be deleted or altered. Stitch file: Stitch or expanded designs are low-level formats for direct use by embroidery machines. They contain only stitch coordinates

and machine functions. Stitch designs are generally not suited to scaling because stitches are not regenerated during rescaling. See also Outline file. Stitch length: The distance between two needle penetration points. For maximum stitch length, the length is measured according to the X and Y co-ordinates, whichever is greater. Run stitch length can be set to automatically vary in order to follow tight curves. See also Max/Min stitch length. Stitch List: The Stitch List displays stitch number, stitch coordinates, stitch length, stitch function, stitch color. When you select a stitch in the list, it is simultaneously selected in your design. Stitch processing: The calculation of stitch information by means of specialized software, allowing scaling of expanded format designs with density compensation. Stitch Processor: A patented software feature developed by Wilcom International P/L. Stitch Processor is a function of the software which interprets raw stitch data and converts it into objects that the software can recognize. Stitch-Pull: When any stitch is sewn into fabric the tension in the thread between needle penetrations can build up and result in Stitch-Pull. Stitch-Pull can cause distortions in your sewn designs, poor stitch registration and even the bunching up of fabric. The amount of Stitch-Pull that results in your design can be affected by the following factors: Stitch Density, Fabric Type, Underlay, Backing Type, Thread Type and Garment Orientation. See also Push-Pull. Stitch type: Three basic stitch types are available with lockstitch machinesRun, Satin and Tatami (Weave). Wilcom ES provides many variants of these. Stitch shortening: When a shape takes a sharp turn, the spacing of stitches on the inside ES 2006 Glossary 1150 of the shape decreases rapidly. This results in bunching on the inside and gaps on the outside of the shape; the longer the stitch, the worse the problem. Automatic Stitch Shortening solves this problem by eliminating thread bunching. The embroidery has smooth, even, stitch spacing throughout. It also reduces thread breakages during production. Stitch spacing: Spacing between two consecutive needle penetrations on the same side of a column. The smaller the value, the greater the stitch density. For more open stitching, use larger values. Stitching defects: Stitching defects may appear in the form of gaps between filled areas,

fabric show-through and thread breaks. These are often caused by incorrect stitching settingse.g. setting pull compensation too small for the fabric stretchiness. Stitch-To-Machine: The software lets you send a design directly to the embroidery machine for stitching if it is connected to your computer. Stitching direction: Stitching direction can affect embroidery quality because of the Push-Pull effect. Only closed embroidery objects can be reversed. Stitching sequence: The embroidery objects in a design form a stitching sequence. Initially, objects are stitched in the order in which they were created. You can change the position of a selected object by cutting it, then pasting it somewhere else in the sequence, or by using the Resequence command. You can also resequence objects by color or with the Color-Object List. Stock designs: Embroidery designs readily available on disk or proprietary embroidery card. Digitized embroidery designs that are commercially available for general use by embroiderers. Stop code: Stop codes are interpreted as explicit stops. The machine stops stitching. Stop function: If you want the embroidery machine to stop for any special reason while stitching a design, you need to insert a Stop function in the stitching sequence. If there are Stops in a design, these can be read into ES Designer as either a Color Change function or a Stop function. Straight stitch machine: Machine, which features needles that move up and down in one spot. The pantograph pushes the design along. The majority of commercial embroidery machines use this type of needle movement. STX: Datastitch stitch or expanded file format. Style: A style is a group of property settings stored under a unique name. You can save any combination of settings to a style. This makes it easy to apply these settings to selected embroidery and lettering objects. When you apply a style to an object, the style settings replace its current properties. Any properties not specified in the style, retain their current settings. Tablet: See Digitizing tablet. Tacking: Used to fix appliqu shapes to a background fabric before cover stitching is applied. Tape: See Paper tape. Tassels: Group of long stitches, which dangle

from a design. Most often used to decorate home decor. Tatami stitch: Series of run stitches, commonly used to cover large, irregular shapes. Stitches are laid in rows traversing back and forth across the shape. These can be parallel or slightly turning. Different fill patterns can be ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1151 created by varying the stitch length, angle or sequence. Also known as Weave stitch. Tatami offset fractions: With Tatami fills you can specify how each row is offset in order to create patterns formed by needle penetrations. You do this by adjusting either offset fractions or partition lines. By adjusting offset fractions, you can create textured fills where the stitch penetrations are more clearly visible. Tatami partition lines: With Tatami fills you can specify how each row is offset in order to create patterns formed by needle penetrations. Partition lines, with up to eight offsets, can create more patterns. Tatami underlay: Tatami underlay is used to stabilize large, filled shapes. It resembles an extremely open Tatami fill stitch, where rows of stitches are placed across the object to create the underlay. Team Names: The Team Names feature lets you create designs with multiple names. For example, you can use the same logo with different names for sports teams or corporate uniforms without having to create multiple copies of the same design. Template: Special files used to store styles and default property settings. Use templates when digitizing frequently-used design types to save time re-adjusting the current property settings. Tension: Tautness of thread when forming stitches. Top thread tension, as well as bobbin thread tension, need to be correctly set. Proper thread tension is achieved when about one third of the thread showing on the underside of the fabric on a column stitch is bobbin thread. Thread: Fine cord or natural or synthetic material made from two or more filaments twisted together and used for stitching. Machine embroidery threads come in rayon (high sheen), cotton (duller finish), polyester (strong and colorfast), metallics (synthetic core wrapped with metal foil or thin slivers of metal foil) and acrylic (sheen similar to rayon). Thread chart: Thread charts are lists of pre-defined thread colors. They may be based on commercially available thread charts, or charts you define yourself. You can copy colors between different thread charts to create your

own charts from existing colors. See also Color palette. Thread code: Code is the identification number of a thread color in a brand. Thread density: Different thread density systems are used by different thread manufacturers. Density A is normal embroidery thread (density 120/2, or 40). Density B is thicker, Density C is finer, and Density D is very fine. Thread thickness: See Thread density. Thread type: Embroidery thread varies in thickness. Types are A, B, C and D. Stitch density should be set according to the thread type. See also Thread thickness. Tie-ins: Tie-in stitches are inserted at the start of objects to prevent stitches from unraveling. They are inserted inside the shape on the second stitch. You generally use them when the previous connector is trimmed. Tie-offs: Tie-offs are generally placed before trims to prevent stitches from unraveling. You can adjust connector settings to automatically add tie-offs under certain conditions, or add them manually. You can also include trim functions so machines with trimmers cut the thread automatically. Title bar: The horizontal bar located at the top of a window and containing the title of the ES 2006 Glossary 1152 window. On many windows, the title bar also contains the Control menu box and Maximize and Minimize buttons. Toolbar: Toolbars provide quick and easy access to ES Designer commands. Click a toolbar button to activate a command or, where applicable, right-click to view and adjust its settings. Topping: Material hooped or placed on top of fabrics that have definable nap or surface texture, such as corduroy and terry cloth, prior to embroidery. The topping compacts the wale or nap and holds the stitches above it. It includes a variety of substances, such as plastic wrap, water-soluble plastic foil and open-weave fabric that has been chemically treated to disintegrate with the application of heat. Also known as facing. See also Stabilizer. Trapunto: Trapunto is a general term for very open fill stitching, often used as a background or for filling large shapes. In ES Designer, Trapunto effect forces travel runs to the edges of objects so they do not show through open or loose stitching. Travel run: Travel runs are typically used to connect segments of complex shapes. They can

also connect adjacent objects. Because runs are not trimmed, they may be visible in the final embroidery. For this reason, they are less commonly used as connectors between objects than jumps. If objects are adjacent and connectors will be hidden, they can be used. Traveling: You generally check a designs stitching sequence by traveling through it by stitches, segments, functions or objects. Trims functions: If you are using a machine with an automatic trimmer, the trim code causes the thread to be cut after a tie-off. In the software, trims are represented by a triangle with a small circle at the point where stitching starts again. The trimmed connector appears as a dotted line. You can adjust connector settings to automatically add trims, or add them yourself. Trimmers: Devices built into an embroidery machine to automatically trim or cut remaining thread when the design jumps from one area to another or performs a color change. Trimming: Action of cutting loose thread, removing backing, etc, from the final embroidered product. Triple Run stitch: Triple Run repeats each Run stitch three (or more) times for a thick line. Typically used to add borders and pickout runs to designs. Triple Satin: Triple Satin is often used for folk designs to mimic handmade embroidery that uses thicker thread. If you require thicker stitches, set the Satin stitch to repeat itself multiple times. TrueType Font: Digital font technology designed by Apple Computer and now used by both Apple and Microsoft in their operating systems. TrueView: TrueView provides you with a preview of how your embroidery will look when stitched out. It gives the screen image a three dimensional look. TWAIN: Industry standard which allows devices (such as scanners) to communicate directly with design and layout programs. Both device and program must be TWAIN-compliant. This lets you use any TWAIN-compliant scanner with your software. U?? Stitch file format native to Barudan machines. UDL file: Design Workflow uses the Microsoft Data Link (UDL) format to link to its databases. UDL files are similar to Windows shortcuts, but ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1153 they contain more information about where the actual database and all of its attendant files are located. Copies of UDL files can be shared,

renamed and relocated so that many people can use the information. In effect, every user with Design Workflow can have their own UDL link to the same database. Underlay: Stitches sewn before other design elements to help stabilize fabrics. The stitching action that will attach the backing to the fabric being embroidered. It also supports the top embroidery for a more lofty, dimensional look. Underlay stitches are made up of a series of single run stitches, usually with a very short stitch length, and are digitized manually or placed automatically under the column (satin) or fill stitch areas of your embroidery design. Underlay margin: The distance between an object outline and the edge of the underlay. Increase this margin to prevent underlay stitches from extending outside the cover stitches. User Defined Split: User Defined Split lets you add detail to filled objects by digitizing lines of needle penetrations called split lines. Split lines are stored as object properties. They are preserved when stitches are regenerated even if you apply a different stitch type. Values: The actual settingsletters and numbersthat you enter into dialogs. See also Object Properties. Variable sizing: Ability to scale a design to different sizes. Variable stitch length: The software can automatically calculate the best length for each stitch with the Variable Run Length option. A chord gap value controls how closely the stitches follow the digitized lines. Vector image: Unlike raster images, vector images contain vector data. This is a collection of geometric shapes and lines that combine to make an image. Rather than pixels, such data is recorded as a set of mathematical formulas. Vector images are scalable without distortion, and are small files. See also Bitmap image. Vector object: Vector objects are derived from vector images and can be created in ES Designer or imported. In ES Designer they can be converted to and from embroidery objects. You can set general properties such as size and position, and arrange and transform them in the same way as other objects. See also Vector image. Weave stitch: See Tatami stitch. Weight: When referring to T-shirts, the three standard weight divisions are mid-weight/value, heavyweight/premium, and super heavyweight. WMF: Windows Metafile vector format. Write: To send design information to an embroidery disk, design card or embroidery

machine for immediate stitchout or storage. X/Y coordinates: The horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) distances on a graph or computer screen. Use X values to measure width, and Y values to measure height. XXX: Compucon stitch or expanded file format in the professional market. Zigzag stitch: Zigzag stitch is similar to Satin but is generally used where fewer stitches are required. The needle penetrates each side of the column, laying the thread across in an open zigzag pattern. The density is determined by the stitch spacing setting. The settings for Zigzag fill stitches are stored separately from Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay settings. Zigzag underlay: Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay stitching is used to support wide columns. ES 2006 Glossary 1154 ZSK: ZSK1 format is for older ZSK machines, generally those older than 1991. ZSK2 is for newer ZSK machines, those characterized by a single top thread trimmer. The trim is the most significant differentiating factor between the two types. ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1155

Index
Numerics
3D Warp tool 527, 529

accessing designs, databases and folders 800 Accordion Spacing Accordion Spacing tool 484, 485 applying 485 overview 484 selecting types 485 setting values 485 spacing values 485 Active Thread Charts dialog 156, 170 Add Color To Palette tool 156, 159 Add Thread dialog 174 Add To Favorites dialog 405 adding Empty Stitch/Empty Jump 188 folders 822 stitch angles to Complex/Fusion Fill 367 tie-offs 186 trims 187 adjusting Satin stitch spacing 133 stitch angles 365 Align Bottom tool 325 Align Horizontal Centers tool 325 Align Left tool 324 Align Right tool 325

Align Top tool 325 Align Vertical Centers tool 324 aligning objects 324 alphabets 620 converting TrueType 654 converting TrueType fonts 649 converting TrueType to embroidery fonts 649 creating new 672 digitizing from artwork 666 letter kerning 657 merging files 679 modifying 675 modifying custom letter 677 preparing drawings 668 user-refined 661 Zurich 1029, 1068, 1069 See also lettering anchor points, rotation 334 angles rotating by exact angle 335 rounding sharp corners, Input C 217 setting for partition lines 453 skewing by exact angle 339 Tatami underlay stitch angle 197 See also stitch angle anti-aliasing 258 Any Shape baselines, reshaping 602 any shape, drawing lines 229 appliqu adding appliqu 24 cover stitch values 442 guide run values 439 offsetting cover stitches 442 outputting shapes 749 partial cover 444 smart corners 437 tacking values 441 using Input C Offset 113 See also Auto Appliqu Apply Current Properties tool 400, 498 Apply Style tool 403 archived design files, handling 819 Arrange menu Remove Overlaps 421 Remove Overlay Stitching 421 Arrange toolbar Align Bottom 325 Align Horizontal Centers 325 Align Left 324 Align Right 325 Align Top 325 Align Vertical Centers 324 Group 326 Lock 327 Make Same Height 333 Make Same Width 333 Make Same Width and Height 333 Space Evenly Across 325 Space Evenly Down 326

Ungroup 326 Unlock All 327 arranging objects grouping 326 locking 326 Array tool 345 artwork anti-aliased images 258 bitmap images 256 converting bitmaps to vectors 235285 converting to vector drawings 284 dithered images 257 enlargement drawings 846 preparing for automatic digitizing 270 preparing for scanning 258 scanned images 257 scanning 258 vector drawings 228 artwork, sequins 551 Auto Appliqu 24, 437 Auto Appliqu tool 349, 437 converting to Complex Fill 355 cover stitch values 442 guide run values 439 tacking values 441 Auto Appliqu tool 355, 437, 439, 440, 441, 442, 444 Auto Center 223 Auto Jump applying 426 Auto Jump tool 425 connectors 426 overview 425 setting values 427 Auto Scroll 860 Auto Spacing dialog 136 setting values 135 spacing offset 136 stitch length 136 stitch spacing 136 Auto Split 423

ES 2006 Index 1156

Auto Start and End dialog 223 Auto Start and End tool 223 Auto Trace tool 284 Auto Underlay applying 192 Auto Underlay tab 192 Auto Underlay tool 192, 320 Center Run 194, 622 Double Zigzag 195 Edge Run 194, 622 selecting a type 192 setting margins 199 Tatami 197 Zigzag and Double Zigzag 195 Auto Underlay tool 622 automatic backup 862 borders 435 branching 317

color matching 156 connectors, See connectors digitizing 284 jumps, See Auto Jump pull compensation 202 save 862 spacing, See Auto Spacing split, See Auto Split trims 185 underlay 191 borders, See also lettering automatic digitizing Auto Trace 284 cleaning up images 271 color reduction 271 converting grayscale images 297 cropping images 265 image preparation tools 274 noise filtering 274 outline sharpening 273 Photo Flash 284 Point & Stitch 284 preparing images 270 Smart Design 284 automatic letter kerning 657 automatic stitching 290 adjusting shape tracing options 294 adjusting values 297 creating embroidery designs 291 object sequencing 296 Automatic Stitching Values dialog 294

backdrops 12 digitizing with backdrops 255 dimming 857 inserting bitmap images 263 inserting vector drawings 233 locking and unlocking 327 pasting bitmap images 264 pasting vector drawings 236 saving as separate files 264 scanning 261 smoothing bitmap images 268 smoothing vector drawings 237 using bitmap images 262 backdrops, displaying 97 Back-Front tool 249 backgrounds changing colors and fabrics 88 printing on production worksheets 740 scanning 261 Backstitch adjusting settings 147 backstitch Borderline 142 Diagonal 142, 143 selecting for Contour fill 492 selecting for Tatami 142 Standard 142, 142143 types 142

Backstitch tool 102, 106, 146, 147, 352 Backtrack/Repeat tool 420 backtracking objects 420 baselines adjusting 601 any shape 575 arc 572 changing 568 circular 574 custom 575 horizontal 570 moving letters along 582 reshaping 602 vertical 571 baud rate, setting 831 bitmap images anti-aliasing 258 automatic digitizing 256 converting to vectors 285 dimming 857 displaying 97 dithered 257 inserting 263 outputting designs as 747 pasting 264 saving separately 264 scanned 257 scanning 261 smoothing 268 supported file types 263 using as backdrops 262 Borderline backstitch 142 borders digitizing with Input C 111 offset objects 429 offsetting Input C stitches 113 setting width 114 Borders tool 435 boring Borers tool 556 changing borer display color 89 digitizing boring holes 555 oval holes 556 round holes 556 boundaries Complex Fill 124 digitizing for appliqu 437 digitizing for rings 419 digitizing with Complex Fill 120 bounding outline, selecting objects 58 branching 317 applying 318 applying two-layer outline stitching 321 Branching tool 317 using auto underlay 320 using Color-Object List 319 Branching tool 318 brands, thread 174 Browse for Folder dialog 790, 818 browsing designs, slide show 800 for designs 790 bunching

reducing with fractional spacing 211 reducing with stitch shortening 207

C
cap corners 213 Capture Design Bitmap dialog 748 Capture Design Bitmap command 747 catalogs exporting in CSV format 816 exporting in Tab delimited format 816 printing 813 publishing 815 Center Out, letter sequencing 618 Center Run underlay 194, 622 centering object, with cross-hair cursor 324 Change Locale command 793 changing locale (language) 793 Character Map dialog 627 charts, See thread charts checking sequence 80 Choose Locale dialog 793 Choose Read Tape Type dialog 767, 838 Choose Write Tape Type dialog 711, 768, 840 chord gap 108 circle objects changing entry point 368 moving 362 reshaping 362 Circle/Star tool 417 circles Circle/Star tool 418 digitizing 417 drawing 232 in circles (Ring) 418 in ovals (Ring) 418 Clear Function command 387 clearing, machine functions 387 clipart link to Design Workflow 785 search and sort 775 view / select 772 Clipart toolbar Manage Keywords 781, 783 Record to Clipart 778 Show Clipart 772, 775, 776, 779 clipart, recording 778 clipping motifs to fit shapes 519 cloning objects 308 closed shapes, drawing 230 CND CND files, color merging 702 compatible input methods 926 conversion options 699 conversion tables 921 saving to 922 CND format, saving as 751, 753

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1157

codes thread 174 color change functions 714 Color Blending adjusting settings 489 applying 487 Color Blending tool 487 color blocks, printing 742 color blocks, split 164 Color dialog 89, 175, 538 color film, printing 742 color matching 156 automatic 166 Color Merge utility 702 Color Palette Editor 156 Color Palette Editor dialog 170 Color Palette Editor tool 156, 159, 161, 164, 168, 169, 170, 172, 173, 175 color palette, selecting thread colors 154 color reduction automatic digitizing 271 images 293, 294 Color toolbar Add Color To Palette 156, 159 Color Palette Editor 156, 159, 161, 164, 168, 169, 170, 172, 173, 175 Colorways 87 Compact Palette 156, 159 Multi-Colorway Box 158, 159, 164 Split Palette Color 164 Color-Object List dialog 65, 316, 328 displaying hidden objects 65 grouping/locking objects 328 printing color film 742 resequencing objects 315 selecting objects 64 tool 64, 319, 328 Color-Object List tool 315 colors adding to thread charts 173 changing background 88 changing borer display 89 changing for an object 153 changing grid display 89 changing object outlines 89 changing stitch display 89 Color palette 152 copying across thread charts 172 creating thread charts 168 deleting thread charts 169 display colors 89 matching images to threads 166 merging Melco CND files 702 modifying colorways 159 modifying thread charts 168 modifying thread values 161, 170 removing from thread

charts 161, 170 resequencing by 314 selecting for an object 152 selecting objects by color 63 selecting the current color 153 setting for consecutive objects 154 thread colors 152 traveling by 83 Colorway Options dialog 740 colorways 155 Add Colors to Palette 291 basing on existing 158 changing backgrounds 88 changing display colors 89 changing display settings 87 creating 158 default settings 159 Match Colors to Palette 291 modifying 159 multiple 155 printing 740 viewing 87 Colorways dropdown 87 column spacing, Program Split 460 column width adjusting 203 Pull Compensation tool 203 columns digitizing with Input A 116 digitizing with Input C 111 offsetting Input C 113 setting width 114 columns, sorting 796 combination splits Satin in Satin 459 Satin in Tatami 459 selecting 458 Tatami in Tatami 459 types 458 Combine tool 246 combining designs 310 objects (branching) 304 objects (nesting) 309 objects and designs 305 styles 407 Comma Separated Value files, See CSV files commands popup menus 40 registering the menu chart 844 undo/redo 43 using 37 using toolbars 39 Compact Palette tool 156, 159 compensating for stretch, See pull compensation Complex Fill adding boundaries 124 adding stitch angles 367 changing stitch angle on-screen 365 Complex Fill tool 120 converting to Auto Appliqu 355

ES 2006 Index 1158

creating borders 429 digitizing objects 120, 122 digitizing the stitch angle 121, 123 entry and exit points 121, 123 filling holes 434 Motif Fill 514 offset objects 429 open stitching 482 overlapping rows 127 removing boundaries 124 stitch angle 126 Trapunto 482 Complex Fill tool 102, 120, 124, 126, 127, 354, 496501, 514 complex shape drawing objects 241 Condensed File Input Values dialog 700704 condensed files 699 See also outline files connection settings ethernet 830 Melco StarLAN 829 network 829 parallel ports 829 peripheral devices 827 serial ports 827 connectors add Empty Stitch/Empty Jump 188 adding tie-offs and trims 186 Auto Jump 426 automatic 179 digitizing with Needles Out 189 displaying 79 hiding 79 inside objects 181 jumps 177 jumps (automatic) 179 minimizing with nesting 309 Runs 178 runs (automatic) 181 setting automatic tie-in values 182 setting automatic tie-off values 184 setting automatic trim values 185 show/hide 854 tie-ins 178 tie-offs 178 travel runs 189 trims 178 types 177 consecutive objects selecting 57 setting colors 154 Continuous Input 205 Contour applying 491 contour stitch in rings 418 Contour stitch overview 490 Contour tool 490

offset fraction 493 selecting a backstitch 492 selecting a type 492 setting stitch values 493 Spiral 491 Standard 490 control commands, checking 725 control points 103 changing 356 reshape objects 356 conversion tables digitizing for CND format 926 opening CND files 921 opening Gunold PCH files 926 saving to CND format 922 supported stitch file formats 917 Conversion Values dialog 650656 Convert Auto Appliqu 349 Backstitch 350 Complex Fill 349 Drawing 351 Fusion Fill 349 Input C 349 Motif Run 350 Run 349 Stemstitch 350 Stitch Angles 349 Triple Run 350 Convert Options dialog 818 Convert Selected Designs tool 817 convert sequin artwork 551 Convert True Type Font command 654 Convert TrueType Font dialog 655 converting between objects 348 bitmaps to vectors 285 designs 805 drawing objects to embroidery 349 embroidery > drawing 351 file types 817 photos to designs 297 See also conversion tables See also converting file formats converting file formats CND conversion options 699 CND conversion tables 921 PCH conversion table 926 converting outline designs EMB conversion limitations 751 EMB to CND 751 EMB to CSD 752 EMB to ZSK 753 converting stitch designs recognize Jumps as Trim 688 recognize Objects/Outlines 687 coordinates length 50 setting for objects 324 Copy From dialog 172 copying and pasting designs 822

cloning objects 308 colors across thread charts 172 Copy tool 305 designs 822 duplicating objects 307 object properties 399 objects 305 corner fraction value 115 corner points 103 corners appliqu 437 cap 213 corner fractions, Input C 115 mitre 213 rounding, Input C 217 smart corners 213 corrupt files, deleting 1119 cover stitches offsetting 442 setting values 442 CPU/RAM specifications 1106 Create a Zip Archive dialog 819 create lettering letter height 667 letter shapes 667 letter width 668 creating baselines any shape 575 arc 572 circular 574 horizontal 571 vertical 572 Crop Bitmap command 265 Crop Bitmap with Polygon command 265 cross stitch, adding 24 cross-hair cursor 324 CSD format, saving as 752 CSV files Comma Separated Value files 816 exporting catalogs as 816 current color, changing 153 current needle position marker 81 current object properties applying 400

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1159

changing 399 make current 399 curve points 103 curved fills adjusting settings 500503 applying to existing objects 497 applying to multiple objects 498 Contour 490 creating 495 creating fills with two curves 501 creating new objects 496501 custom alphabets saving 672 selecting 674 custom letters deleting 676 renaming 676 reshaping 677

saving 670 custom sequin palettes 538 custom templates, selecting 46, 802 Customize Worksheet dialog 739 cut and paste Cut tool 313 objects 305 resequencing 313 Cut Appliqu command 749 cutting designs 823 threads 187

D
Decoding Options dialog 687690, 706 defaults design view 795 Define Stop Sequence dialog 706 Define Style command 404407 Delete command 309 deleting colors from thread charts 161, 170 designs 824 folders 822 motifs 536 objects 309 styles 409 templates 415 thread charts 169 density, applying fractional spacing 212 deselecting stitches 376 deselecting objects 55 design elements, naming 162 Design Explorer opening 787 Design Explorer icon 787 Design Explorer toolbar Show/Hide folders 790 design formats Gunold PCH 683 old format ESD 683 Wilcom INP 683 design lists, customizing 796 design management 32 Design Properties command 92 Design Properties dialog Colorways 168 Information 92 Stop Sequence 96 Summary 92 Design Properties tool 797 design templates, See templates Design Workflow, link embroidery clipart 785 designs accessing 800 archiving 819 Auto Start and End 223 browsing 790 browsing with slide show buttons 800

checking 92 combining 310 converting 805 converting formats 682 converting formats (tables) 917 converting to other file types 817 creating new 45 emailing 808 managing 787 opening 44, 800, 801 opening multiple 44 opening stitch designs 687 organizing 822 outputting 734, 805 planning a design 12 redrawing slowly 85 renaming 823 resequencing 313 saving 52 selecting 800 sorting 805 sorting using Navigation buttons and Slide Show buttons 805 starting 45 stitching and punching 810 viewing 805 viewing in databases 805 viewing records 797 DesignStyles 402 details lists, sorting 807 device connections, troubleshooting 1110 Device Manager dialog 1123 devices, security messages 1106 Diagonal backstitch 142, 143 dialogs Active Thread Charts 156, 170 Add Thread 174 Add To Favorites 405 Auto Spacing 136 Auto Start and End 223 Automatic Stitching Values 294 Browse for Folder 790, 818 Capture Design Bitmap 748 Character Map 627 Choose Locale 793 Choose Read Tape Type 767, 838 Choose Write Tape Type 711, 768, 840 Color 89, 175, 538 Color Palette Editor 156, 170 Color-Object List 65, 316, 328 Colorway Options 740 Condensed File Input Values 700704 Conversion Values 650656 Convert Options 818 Convert TrueType Font 655 Copy From 172 Create a Zip Archive 819 Customize Worksheet 739 Decoding Options 687690, 706 Define Stop Sequence 706

Design Properties > Information 92 Design Properties > Stop Sequence 96 Design Properties > Summary 92 Device Manager 1123 Digi Test 1120 Digitizer Setup 828834, 1120 Digitizer User-Defined Format Setup 834 Disk Format Test Selection 760 Display 88, 89, 160 DXF File Options 234 Edit Function 386, 389 Edit Thread 161, 171 Effects 579 Effects > Accordion 485 Effects > Accordion Spacing 489 Effects > Auto Jump 427 Effects > Auto Underlay 193201, 321 Effects > Color Blending 488 Effects > Curve Fill 497504 Effects > Flexi Split 471473

ES 2006 Index 1160

Effects > Jagged Edge 480, 481 Effects > Others 203204, 212, 477, 527529 Effects > Shortening 207, 208 Effects > Smart Corners 215 Embroidery Clipart 773 Embroidery Machine Connection 830836 Export As 236 Format 763 Format Embroidery Disk 763 General Properties 41 Group Members Add 632 Group Name 631 Guide Position 49 Hardware Setup 828842 Holes 434 Insert Function 383 Layout 584, 606611 Length Calculation 94 Machine Format Values 713722 Machine Format Values > Standard 723724 Make Letter 670672, 678 Make Motif 534535 Make Program Split 469 Manage User-Refined Lettering 664 Match Drawing Color 166 Merge With Style 407 Modify Alphabet 675676 Modify Thread Chart 161, 168, 170, 171174 Move Stitch 388 Multi-Colorway Box 158, 160, 164 New 46, 802 New Alphabet 672

New Colorway 158 New Motif Set 535 New Object Style 404 New Thread Chart 168 Object Properties 41, 400401 Object Properties Lettering 563580, 591, 625, 639650, 656674 Object Properties - Lettering > Fill Stitch 579, 614617 Object Properties > Auto Appliqu 439444 Object Properties > Complex Fill 126, 128, 129 Object Properties > Connectors 180185 Object Properties > Embroidery 190 Object Properties > Fill Stitch 134145, 424, 450466, 470, 483, 493, 515527 Object Properties > Fills > PhotoSatin 298 Object Properties > Fusion Fill 126, 128 Object Properties > General 324, 331340 Object Properties > Image 268 Object Properties > Input C 113115, 217 Object Properties > Outline Stitch 108110, 147, 149, 507511, 542 Object Properties > Special > Photo Flash 298 Object Properties > Special > Vector 239 Object Property - Lettering > Others 592 Offset List 433 Offset Object 429, 433 Open 44, 234, 263, 687, 700, 745, 786 Open Embroidery Disk 761 Open From Embroidery Disk 761 Options 75 Options > Auto Scroll 861 Options > General 205, 862868 Options > Grid 858860 Options > Reshape 862 Options > View Design 854, 856 Options > View Drawing 857 Organize Favorites 405 Organize Styles 404410 Print Designs Options 814 Print Options 736742, 812 Process 219221, 692 Properties 797, 799 Properties (Windows Explorer) 91 Publish Options 815 Punch Options 811

Purge Recover and Backup Directories 1120 Quick Names 634 Recognition - Advanced Options 695 Record to Clipart 778 Reduce Colors 277 Rename Alphabet 675 Rename Letter 676 Rename Object Style 409 Rename Thread Chart 170 Revert to Factory Settings 414, 1119 Save As 53, 411, 747, 752, 753, 817, 819 Save Options 646, 752, 753 Save to Embroidery Disk 765 Screen Calibration 842 Select By Color 63, 76 Select By Stitch Type 64 Select Machine Format 52, 710 Select Motif 531536 Select Sequin Type 538 Select Source 841 Sequence 618620 Sequence By Color 315 Sequin Palette 538 Serial Port Setup 828 Set Color 154 Sharpen Edges 280 Show Functions 390 Show Stitches 392 Slow Redraw 85 Small Stitches 222 Smart Design 291297 Smooth Drawing Curves 238 Sort 808 Stipple 447 Stitch List 373, 390 Stitch Manager 755 Stitch Options 810 Stitch to Stitch Manager 755, 830 Symbol Selection 436, 625 Tablet Setup 844849, 850 Tape Manager 768, 811, 838840 Team Members 636, 639, 641, 643, 644 Team Names 631636 Team Names Matrix 644 Test Disk 760 Tie In Values 183 Tie Off Values 184 Toolbars 38 Transform 332340 TrueView Options 856 Use Object Style 403 User Preferences 795 Windows Properties 803 Zoom Factor 69 Digi Test dialog 1120 Digitizer Setup dialog 828834, 1120 digitizer tablets 14

baud rate 831 changing drawing scale 849 defining and modifying formats 834 overview 844 Point mode 831 puck actions 851 registering enlargement drawings 846 registering the menu chart 844 setting up 831 shifting the drawing 850 Stream mode 832 user-defined formats 834

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1161

using 851 using preset spacing 852 Digitizer User-Defined Format Setup dialog 834 digitizers, See digitizer tablets digitizing appliqu 437 boring holes 555 circles and ovals 417 columns and borders 111 columns with Input A 116 columns with Input C 111 individual stitches 104 input methods 101 lines with Run/Triple Run 105 Motif Run 506 new motifs 534 ring boundaries 419 rings 418 shapes with Auto Trace 284 shapes with Complex Fill 120 shapes with Input B 118 split lines 475 turning stitches 496502 using a digitizer tablet 851 with backdrops 255 with manual input methods 255 with Needles Out 189 with Photo Flash 255 with Point & Stitch 255 with Smart Design 255 with User Defined Split 475 digitizing artwork Outline Run 289 Pickout Run 289 Tatami Fill 287 Tatami Fill without Holes 287 Turning Satin 287 digitizing tablets, testing connections 1120 dimming backdrops 857 Disk Format Test Selection dialog 760 display changing display colors 89 changing display settings 87 grid 48 setting display options 74 display adapters checking 1123 locating drivers 1124

Display dialog 8889, 160 distances, measuring on-screen 50 dithering 257 Divide tool 251, 253 DOS disks, opening designs 761 Double Zigzag, setting values 196 drawing objects apply input method 349 apply stitch type 349 circles 232 closed shapes 230 coloring 238 coloring fills 238 coloring outlines 238 converting bitmaps to vectors 285 converting to embroidery 349 creating complex shapes 241, 244 ellipses 232 ovals 232 polygons 230 rectangles 231 See vector objects 228 squares 231 drawing scale, changing 849 Drawing toolbar Ellipse 232 drawings creating 228 creating enlargement drawing 846 enlargement drawings 846 inserting vector drawings 233 pasting vector drawings 236 smoothing vectors 237 See also backdrops duplicating Duplicate command 307 objects 307 DXF File Options dialog 234

E
E Stitch appliqu 441 E Stitch tool 144 E Stitch tool 132 Edge Run setting values 194, 622 underlay 194, 622 edges, applying Jagged Edge 480 Edit Bitmap Using command 267 Edit Function command 385 Edit Function dialog 386 Edit menu Delete 309 Duplicate 307 Envelope 628 Envelope > Delete 630 Paste Drawing > As Vector 236 Paste Vector As Bitmap 264 Resequence > By Color 314 Resequence > By Selects 314 Split Object 311 Transform 332, 337

Transform Special 336 Edit Thread dialog 161, 171 editing lettering on-screen 587 with Lettering dialog 587 editing objects 348 reshaping 356 editing stitches 378 deleting stitches 379 inserting stitches 377 moving stitches 378 removing small stitches 222 using Stitch List 387 editing, machine functions 380 EDS-III conversion table 921 digitizing for 926 saving to CND format 922 effects Accordion Spacing 484 Auto Jump 425 Auto Underlay 191 Color Blending 487 fractional spacing 211 Jagged Edge 480 pull compensation 201 smart corners 213 stitch shortening 207 Trapunto 482 Effects dialog 579 Accordion 485 Accordion Spacing 489 Auto Jump 427 Auto Underlay 193201, 321 Color Blending 488 Curve Fill 497504 Flexi Split 471473 Jagged Edge 480, 481 Others 203212, 477, 527529 Shortening 207, 208 Smart Corners 215 elements, naming 92, 162 ellipses digitizing 417 drawing 232 Ellipse tool 232 email attachments 745 email designs 808 Email Selected Designs tool 808 embroidery clipart link to Design Workflow 785 search and sort 775 view / select 772 Embroidery Clipart dialog 773 embroidery clipart, recording 778 embroidery disks

ES 2006 Index 1162

Embroidery Disk Format command 763 formats 763 formatting 763 opening designs 761 saving designs 758 testing 760 Embroidery Machine Connection

dialog 830836 embroidery machines automatic download 835 connections 835 feedback 835 setting up 835 See also machine formats embroidery objects creating complex shapes 244 Empty Function tool 188 Empty Stitch/Empty Jump tool 188 EMT files 411 End of Design functions 717 enlargement drawings changing scale 849 creating 846 preparing 846 registering 847 shifting 850 entry and exit points, changing 368 envelopes Delete command 630 distorting lettering objects 628 Envelope command 628 types 628 ES Design Explorer problems troubleshooting 1109 ES Designer, starting 35 ethernet connection settings 830 Exception Access Violation, resolving errors 1122 Exclude tool 249 Export As dialog 236 exporting catalogs as CSV files 816 catalogs as Tab delimited files 816 exporting vectors 235

F
fabric stretch, See pull compensation fabrics changing background 88 pull compensation guidelines 202 fancy fill stitches Motif Fill 514 Program Split 456 favorites, assigning favorite styles 405 File menu Capture Design Bitmap 747 Cut Appliqu 749 Design Properties 92, 94, 95 Embroidery Disk > Format 763 New 46 Paper Tape > Punch 768, 839 Paper Tape > Read 766, 838 Print 736, 739, 740, 742 Print Preview 736, 739, 740, 742, 743 Save Bitmap As 264 Scan 261

Scanner Setup 841 Send 745 file tree, refresh 794 file types EMT 411 stitch files 917 files, combining designs 310 fill stitches changing between fill and outline 349 switching between fill and outline 104 types 131, 132 filling holes, Complex Fill 434 fills adjust curved fill settings 503 adjusting curved fill settings 500 adjusting textured fill settings 473 applying curved fills 497, 498 creating curved fills 495496 creating fills with two curves 501 selecting textured patterns 472 filtering stitches by function 390 by stitch length 391 Flatten tool 251, 253 Flexi Split tool 471, 472473 Florentine Effect adjusting settings 500 Florentine Effect tool 500 Florentine Effect tool 496, 497, 498 folders adding 822 deleting 822 masking file types 806 organizing designs 822 refreshing/validating 794 renaming 822 searching 805 viewing zipped designs 791 Format dialog 763 Format Embroidery Disk dialog 763 formats, digitizer tablet formats 834 formatting, embroidery disks 763 fractional spacing applying 212 offset fraction 212 overview 211 Fractional Spacing tool 212 frame movement, Auto Jump 425 French dots, digitizing 418 Front-Back tool 249 functions displaying 79 End of Design 717 hiding 79 show/hide 854 Stop 717 traveling by 84 Fusion Fill

adding stitch angles 367 nominal stitch angle 126 offset objects 429 overlapping rows 127 Fusion Fill TM tool 102, 122, 124, 126, 127, 129, 354

gaps, offsetting filled holes 434 General Properties toolbar 41 General tab dimensions 331 mirroring objects 340 positioning using coordinates 324 rotating objects 335 skewing objects 339 Generate Stitches tool 47, 562, 563 Generate toolbar Auto Start and End 223 Borders 435 Borers 556 Color Blending 487 Generate Stitches 47, 562, 563 Offset Object 429, 432 Penetrations 189 Penetrations with Borers on 555 Process 218, 692 Stipple Run 446 generating stitches 47 graphics acceleration, reducing 1125 graphics packages, linking 267 grayscale images, converting to designs 297 grid changing display color 89 display 48 setting options 858 snap to 859 grids, rulers and guides 48 Group Members Add dialog 632 Group Name dialog 631 group name, creating 631 Group tool 326 grouping objects 326 with the Color-Object List 328 guide patterns Motif Fill 523 Program Split 465 Guide Position dialog 49 guide runs offsetting 439 setting values 439 guides and rulers 48 Gunold, opening PCH files 926

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1163

H
handles, See selection handles hard disk space, checking 1106 hardware peripheral device settings 827 setting up digitizer tablets 831 setting up display monitor 842

setting up embroidery machines 835 setting up paper tape punches 839 setting up paper tape readers 838 setting up scanner 841 hardware acceleration, reducing 1125 Hardware Setup dialog 828842 Hardware Setup command 827, 831, 835, 837, 842 height, make objects same size 333 help viewing the online manual 6 See also troubleshooting help, accessing 7 hidden objects display in Color-Object List 65 hiding backdrops 97 bitmap images 97 outlines 77 stitches 77 holes creating in Complex Fill 124 digitizing boring holes 555 digitizing rings 418 digitizing with Complex Fill 120 filling holes 434 Holes dialog 434 hoops, frame out (Auto Appliqu) 440

icons, menu chart 909 image colors, matching threads 166 Image menu Crop Bitmap 265 Crop Bitmap with Polygon 265 Edit Bitmap Using 267 Insert Drawing File 235 Insert File 233, 263 Reverse Curves 204 image preparation 270 cropping 265 non-outlined images 277 outlined images 280 using tools 275 image sharpening, scanning 261 Image toolbar Auto Trace 284 Line 229 Polygon 230 Polyline 229 Rectangle 231 Reduce Colors 277 Sharpen Edges 280 Smart Design 291 images bitmaps 262 cleaning up 271 color reduction 271

cropping 265 dimming bitmaps 857 displaying bitmaps 97 editing 267 inserting bitmaps 263 noise filtering 274 non-outlined 277 outline sharpening 273 outlined vs non-outlined 271 outputting designs as 746 pasting bitmap images 264 preparation tools 274 saving bitmaps separately 264 scanning bitmaps 261 smoothing bitmaps 268 Input A adding stitch angles 365 creating borders 429 digitizing columns 116 Input A tool 116 offset objects 429 tool 556 with Continuous Input 205 Input A tool 102, 116 Input B adding stitch angles 365 creating borders 429 digitizing columns 118 Input B tool 118 offset objects 429 Input B tool 102, 118 Input C column width 114 corner fractions 115 creating offset objects 429 digitizing columns and borders 111 Input C tab 113 Input C tool 111, 217 input side 113 offsetting stitches 113 reversing stitch direction 204 round sharp corners 217 Input C tool 102, 111, 113, 114, 115, 352 input methods 101 applying to drawing objects 349 Circle/Star 418 Complex Fill 120 Input A 116 Input B 118 Input C 111 Motif Run 505 Ring 418 Run and Triple Run 105 input methods, selecting 102 Input toolbar Auto Appliqu 355, 437, 439, 440, 441, 442, 444 Backstitch 102, 106, 146, 147, 352 Circle/Star 417, 418 Complex Fill 102, 120, 124, 126, 127, 354, 496501, 514 Fusion Fill TM 102, 122, 124,

126, 127, 129, 354 Input A 102, 116, 556 Input B 102, 118 Input C 102, 111, 113, 114, 115, 217, 352

ES 2006 Index 1164 Lettering 562, 563, 565, 568, 587, 591, 601, 605, 608, 618, 620, 624629, 641, 650, 656, 658, 674 Manual 102, 104, 556
Manual with Sequins On 555 Motif Run 352, 506, 507, 509, 510, 511, 530 Ring 418 Run 102, 106, 107, 109, 352, 556 Stemstitch 102, 106, 146, 149, 352 Team Names 631, 632, 634, 635 Triple Manual 102, 104 Triple Run 102, 106, 107, 109, 110, 352 Inputs A and B, converting to Complex Fill 349, 354355 Insert File command 233, 263 Insert Function command 383 Insert Function dialog 383 Insert menu Filled Holes 434 Offset Object 429 Photo Flash 297 inserting bitmap images 263 one design into another 310 one object inside another 309 stitches 377 vector drawings 233 Intersect tool 249

Jagged Edge applying 480 Jagged Edge tab 481 Jagged Edge tool 480 setting values 481 Jagged Edge tool 480, 481 joining columns with underlay 199, 201 objects, See connectors joins, creating smooth joins 205 jumps adding 189 adding Empty Jumps Empty Stitches 188 Auto Jump 425 automatic connectors 179 digitizing with Needles Out 189 overview 177 using 382

K
kaleidoscope using with wreath 343 Kaleidoscope tool 343

Keep Source Objects tool 252 keep/omit last stitch Input A 117 Input B 118 Keep Last Stitch tool 369 keep/omit motif (Motif Run) 511 kerning letters 657

L
last stitch, keep or omit 117, 118 layers removing extra stitching layers 421 layout Motif Fills 523 Program Split patterns 465 Layout dialog 584, 606611 length automatic split 423 calculation methods 427 Contour stitch 493 Edge Run and Center Run stitches 194, 622 nominal 500, 503 preserving long stitches 425 Program Split stitch length 461 Run and Triple Run 108 Tatami 140 Tatami stitches (underlay) 197 travel runs 189 variable (Run and Triple Run) 109 Zigzag and Double Zigzag stitches 196 Length Calculation dialog 94 letter kerning 657 letter spacing, changing 584 lettering 2-color alphabets 620 adding to designs 27 adjusting individual letters 595 adjusting Satin stitch settings 614 adjusting Tatami stitch settings 616 adjusting Zigzag stitch settings 617 applying lettering art 628 Arc angle 608 As Digitized join method 621 automatic borders 435 Bottom Join method 621 changing line spacing 583 Closest Join method 621 color changes between letters 564 coloring 601 coloring on-screen 601 converting TrueType letters 650 creating embroidery fonts from TrueType 649 edit envelopes 629 entering on-screen 562 entering via dialog 563 generating stitches 47 I-beam 601

join methods 620 keeping original stitch values 620 letter justification 580 letter spacing 584 line spacing 584 making bold 578 making italic 578 moving letters along baseline 582 names, See names removing envelopes 630 reshaping baseline 602 reshaping curved baselines 602 reshaping on-screen 598 rotating with Reshape tool 594 scaling with Select Object tool 593 selecting symbols 624 special characters and symbols 624 stitching sequence 618 Tilt angle 608 transforming with Reshape Object tool 597 transforming with Select Object tool 593 troubleshooting 1116 word spacing 584 See also alphabets See also baselines lettering art, applying 628 Lettering tool 562, 563, 565, 568, 587, 591, 601, 605, 608, 618, 620, 624629, 641, 650, 656674 Line Select tool 62 line spacing, changing 584 Line tool 229 lines digitizing with Run and Triple Run 105 drawing 229 split lines 475 Liquid Effect tool 501, 503 locale, changing languages 793

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1165

locate missing files 792 Lock tool 327 locking objects 326 locking objects, with the Color-Object List 328 lockstitches, See Empty Stitch

machine connections, testing tablets 1120 Machine Format Values command 724 Machine Format Values dialog 713722 Standard 723724 machine formats advanced values 718 changing 711 checking 725

color change sequence 718 creating custom 723 creating custom format 723 customizing for specific designs 724 modifying values 716 removing 725 selecting 51, 710 start of design/end of design 720 machine functions borers in/out 380 boring 382 checking control commands 725 clearing 387 color change 380, 381 displaying 79 editing 387 hiding 79 inserting manually 383 Jumps 382 jumps 380 sequins 383 sequins on/off 380 show/hide 854 speed 721 Stops 381 stops 380 thread trim 381 trims 380 types 381 using 383 Machine menu Clear Function 387 Edit Function 385 Insert Function 383 Machine Format Values 724 Select Machine Format 51, 710, 723 Set Color 154 machines, See embroidery machines Make Letter command 670, 677 dialog 670672, 678 Make Motif 535 dialog 534535 make objects same size 333 Make Program Split dialog 469 Make Properties Current tool 399, 498 Make Same Height tool 333 Make Same Width and Height tool 333 Make Same Width tool 333 Manage Keywords tool 781, 783 Manage User-Refined Lettering dialog 664 managing designs 787 manual digitizing, sequins 549 manual objects splitting 311 Manual tool 102, 104, 556 Manual, right-clicking 105 margins

Jagged Edge 481 setting for underlays 199 masking files in folders 806 Match Drawing Color dialog 166 Match to Palette tool 286, 772 matrix of team names 644 maximum stitch length 500503 Measure command 50 measuring calculating stitch length 427 distances on-screen 50 status line 50 Melco CND conversion tables 921 CND files, color merging 702 digitizing for CND (tables) 926 StarLAN network settings 829 Melco CND format, saving as 751 menu chart icons 909 registering 844 Merge With Style dialog 407 merging styles 407 minimum stitch, Tatami 140 Mirror Horizontally tool 340 Mirror Vertically tool 340 mirroring with kaleidoscope 343 mirroring motifs 532 mirroring objects around a specified axis 340 around X or Y axis 340 creating wreaths 343 using Object Properties dialog 340 Mirror-Merge toolbar Array 345 Kaleidoscope 343 Reflect 341 Wreath 343 missing files, locating 792 mitre corners 213 Modify Alphabet command 675, 676 dialog 675676 Modify Thread Chart dialog 161168, 170, 171174 modifying designs 21 moving objects 323 with the Color-Object List 64 modifying objects aligning 324 changing entry point in Circle 368 changing entry point in Star 368 changing entry point of Circle 368 changing radius of Circle 362 changing size of Ring 363 grouping 326 locking 326 mirroring 339 moving Ring object boundary 363 reshaping Circle objects 361 reshaping circles 362

reshaping circles to ovals 362 reshaping Ring objects 363 reshaping Star objects 361 rotating 334 scaling 329 skewing spacing evenly 325 using envelopes 628 viewing by color 76 monitor, setting up 842 Motif Fill applying 514 filling shapes with 514 layout motifs 523 modifying layouts on-screen 523 Motif Fill tool 514, 515, 518 motif size 520 motifs 1 & 2 521 offsets 518 rotating 522 selecting motifs 515

ES 2006 Index 1166

spacing 518 values 518 motif fills two-part motifs 517 Motif Run creating offset objects 429 keep/omit motifs 511 overview 505 reshaping 512 scaling 509 selecting motifs 507 spacing 510 using 506 values 509 Motif Run tool 352, 506, 507, 509, 510, 511, 530 motif sets Make command 534, 535 making 535 Select command 536 motifs adjusting offsetting on-screen 526 adjusting spacing on-screen 525 clipping to fit shape 519 creating new 534 deleting 536 inserting 530 laying out on-screen (Motif Fill) 523 mirroring 532 modifying 532 Motif Fill 514 overview 505 reference points 534 remove functions 534 rotating 532 rotating patterns on-screen 524 saving 534 scaling 532 scaling (Motif Fill) 520 scaling (Motif Run) 509 scaling patterns on-screen 524

select 507, 542 selecting 530 selecting (Motif Fills) 515 selecting (Motif Run) 507 single 1070 skewing patterns on-screen 525 spacing (Motif Run) 510 two-part 1095 See also Motif Fill See also Motif Run Move Stitch dialog 388 moving circles 362 moving objects nudging 324 positioning with X:Y coordinates 324 with click-and-drag 324 moving stitches 378 Multi-Colorway Box dialog 158, 160, 164 Multi-Colorway Box tool 158, 159, 164 multiple colorways, See colorways multiple stitch angles Input A 365 Input B 365

N
name groups adding individual members 632 adding multiple members 634 creating 631 names adding to design 636 creating groups of 631 editing 638 outputting designs 646 viewing 638 needle penetrations applying partition lines 452 decorative (Program Split) 456 digitizing split lines 475 digitizing with Needles Out 189 offsetting (Tatami) 450 random factor 455 random factor, Program Split 464 needle points 77 displaying 79 hiding 79 offsetting for Contour 493 show/hide 854 needle position marker 81, 313 nesting objects 309 network settings 829 ethernet 830 New Alphabet dialog 672 New Colorway dialog 158 New command 46 new designs creating 45 New command 46 starting 12 new designs, creating 802 New dialog 46, 802 New Motif Set dialog 535

New Object Style dialog 404 New Thread Chart dialog 168 New tool 46 noise filtering, automatic digitizing 274 nominal stitch length 500503 non-outlined images 277 NORMAL template overview 410 reverting 414 using 46 nudging objects into position 324

O
object outlines changing display color 89 object properties accessing 40 apply current properties 400 changing defaults 401 changing for an object 398 changing stitch type 132 connectors 177 current 396, 397 default 397 defaults 396 existing 397 make current 399 overview 131 presetting 399, 400 saving current 399 saving new defaults 401 saving to a template 413 styles 402 templates 410 Object Properties - Lettering dialog 563591, 625, 639641, 650674 Fill Stitch 579, 614617 Others 592 Object Properties dialog 41, 400401 Auto Appliqu 439444 Complex Fill 129 Complex Fill/Fusion Fill 126, 128 Connectors 180185 Embroidery 190 Fill Stitch 134145, 424, 450470, 483, 493, 515527 General 324, 331340 Image 268 Input C 113, 114, 115, 217 Outline Stitch 108110, 147, 149, 507511, 542 Photo Flash 298 PhotoSatin 298 Special > Vector 239 Object Properties tool 40, 779 object sequencing, automatic stitching 296 objects appliqu 437 applying underlay 192 backtracking 420

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1167

changing colors 153 changing the object properties 398 circles 416 cloning 308 connecting 177 converting 348 converting drawing objects 349 copying and pasting 305 creating duplicates 420 deleting 309 deselecting 55, 56 duplicating 307 editing 348 French dots 416 mirroring 339 moving 323 nesting 309 ovals 416 positioning 323 repeating 420 resequencing 312 reshaping 348 rings 416418 rotating 334 selecting 55 selecting colors 152 shaping 244 skewing 338 splitting 311 traveling by 83 vector 228 See also modifying objects Offset List dialog 433 Offset Object command 429 dialog 429, 433 Offset Object tool 429, 432 offsetting appliqu cover stitches 442 appliqu guide runs 439 appliqu tacking 441 Auto Spacing (Satin) 136 Contour needle points 493 creating offset objects 429 filled holes (Complex Fill) 434 fractional spacing 212 Motif Fill patterns 518 objects 429 offset fractions (Tatami) 450 offsets setting for Input C objects 113 Program Split columns and rows 462 Program Split patterns on-screen 468 Program Split stitches 462 random factor (Tatami) 455 using partition lines 452 omit/keep last stitch Input A 117 Input B 118 omit/keep motifs (Motif Run) 511 online help 4, 7 online manual 4 open

Design Explorer 787 designs 800 shapes, drawing 229 stitching, See color blending stitching, Trapunto 482 Open As tool 761 Open Design tool 801 Open dialog 44, 234, 263, 687, 700, 745, 786 Open Embroidery Disk dialog 761 Open From Embroidery Disk dialog 761 Open tool 44, 745 opening designs 801 converting stitch designs 687 from DOS disk 761 from paper tape 766 Open tool 44 other formats 761 preview window 44 opening files object/outline recognition 686 recognition limitations 687 scaling 686 Options Auto Scroll dialog 861 command 860, 861, 862, 864, 865, 866, 867, 868 View Drawing 857 Options dialog 75 Auto Scroll 861 General 205, 862868 Grid 858860 Reshape 862 View Design 854, 856 Organize Favorites dialog 405 Organize Styles dialog 404410 organizing designs 822 outline files 682, 699 Outline Run digitizing artwork 289 Outline Run tool 286, 289 outline sharpening automatic digitizing 273 outline stitches, Motif Run 505 outlined images, sharpening 280 outlines 77 changing between fill and outline 349 changing display color 89 control points 103 creating borders around objects 429 displaying 77 selecting objects with 58 stitch types 132 switching between fill and outline 104 outputting designs 805 as bitmap images 747 as images 746 as vector drawings 746 punching paper tape 768 to different formats 711 ovals

boring oval holes 556 digitizing 417 drawing objects 232 in circles (Ring) 418 in ovals (Ring) 418 reshaping circles to ovals 362 overlap stitching removing 421 overlap taper angle 127 Overlap tool 253 overlapping cap corners 215 color blending 487 Complex Fill and Fusion Fill segments 127 mitre corners 215 overstitching, pull compensation 201 Overview Window tool 71

palette Add Colors to Palette 291 Match Colors to Palette 291 See also color palette palette colors, match to drawing 286 palettes, sequins 538 panning designs 69 paper tape opening designs 766 Punch command 768, 839 punching 768 Read command 766, 838 setting up punches 839 setting up readers 838 storing designs 766 parallel ports connection settings 829

ES 2006 Index 1168

Partial Appliqu command 444 partial cover appliqu 444 partition lines 452 angle 453 sequence 452 Paste Drawing As Vector command 236 paste options Center at Current Stitch 865, 866 Object Property Position 865, 866 Start at Current Stitch 865, 866 Paste Vector As Bitmap command 264 pasting bitmap images 264 designs 822 objects 305 Paste tool 305, 313 vector drawings 236 patterns creating patterns 469 editing 470 laying out on-screen (Motif Fill) 523

laying out on-screen (Program Split) 465 Program Split 456 scaling for Motif Fill 520 selecting (Program Split) 457 selecting for Motif Fills 515 See also motifs Penetrations tool 189 peripheral devices connection settings 827 setting up 827 See also hardware perspective effects, Accordion Spacing 485 perspective effects, Color Blending 487 Photo Flash command 297 photos, converting to embroidery 297 Pickout Run digitizing artwork 289 tool 286, 289 pictures, See backdrops planning design shapes 12 stitching sequence 12 Point & Stitch toolbar Match to Palette 286 Outline Run 286, 289 Pickout Run 286, 289 Tatami Fill 286, 288 Tatami Fill without Holes 286, 288 Turning Satin 285, 287 Point mode, digitizer tablets 831 pointer position display 863 Pointer toolbar Backtrack/Repeat 420 Empty Function 188 Keep Last Stitch 369 Line Select 62 Polygon Select/Line Select 61 Reshape Object 237, 356, 359, 362, 363, 365, 368, 497, 498, 512, 527, 529, 553, 581, 582, 583, 590, 594, 595, 597, 598, 660, 662, 677 Select Object 57, 58, 60, 61, 308, 553, 589, 593 Stitch Angles 367 Stitch Edit 372, 373, 375, 377, 378, 379, 380 Tie Off 186 Trim 187 Polygon Select/Line Select tool 61 Polygon tool 230 Polyline tool 229 popup menu Convert Auto Appliqu 349 Convert Backstitch 350 Convert Complex Fill 349 Convert Drawing 351 Convert Fusion Fill 349 Convert Input C 349 Convert Motif Run 350

Convert Run 349 Convert Stemstitch 350 Convert Stitch Angles 349 Convert Triple Run 350 using 40 ports parallel 829 serial 827 position coordinates 50 preparing, enlargement drawings 846 preserving long stitches 425 preset spacing values 852 preset styles, NORMAL template 410 Print command 736, 739, 740, 742 Print Designs Options dialog 814 Print Options dialog 736742, 812 Print Preview command 736, 739, 740, 742, 743 Print Preview tool 96 Print Selected Designs tool 812 Print tool 735 printing backgrounds 740 catalogs 813 multiple colorways 740 production worksheets 812 Process dialog 219221, 692 tool 218, 220, 692 production information 96 production worksheets customizing 739 print options 736 printing 735, 812 printing backgrounds 740 Text to Print 739 viewing 96 Program Split adjusting spacing on-screen 467 applying 456 applying random factors 464 combination splits 458 creating patterns 469 editing patterns 470 filling shapes with 457 layout patterns 465 modifying layouts on-screen 465 offsetting 462 offsetting patterns on-screen 468 Program Split tool 456, 457, 458, 460, 461, 462, 464, 465 random factor 464 rotating patterns on-screen 467 scaling patterns on-screen 467 selecting patterns 457 skewing patterns on-screen 467 stitch values 461 properties Object Properties tool 179, 181, 182, 184, 185, 189, 238, 399, 401, 413

viewing 797 See also object properties Properties dialog 799 ES Explorer 797 Windows Explorer 91 Properties Window tool 659 properties, of objects 40 Publish Options dialog 815 publishing catalogs 815 puck, digitizer 851 pull compensation applying 202 overstitching amount 203 overview 201 Pull Compensation tool 202 recommended values 202 reversing stitch direction 204 Punch Options dialog 811 Punch Selected Designs tool 811 punching designs 810 from ES Explorer 811 paper tape 768 See also paper tape punches Purge Recover and Backup Directories dialog 1120 push-pull effect, compensating for 127

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1169

Q R

Quick Names dialog 634 random factor 455 Program Split 464 readers, See paper tape readers reassigning colors, to stitch files 706 Recognition - Advanced Options dialog 695 recoloring objects 153 Record to Clipart dialog 778 Record to Clipart tool 778 records, viewing 797 Rectangle tool 231 rectangles, drawing 231 Redo tool 43 redoing commands 43 redrawing designs slowly 85 Reduce Colors dialog 277 Reduce Colors tool 277 reference lines mirroring objects 340 rotating by specified angle 337 rotating relative to 336 reference points motifs 534 origin 846, 847 rotating using 336 rotating using (exact angle) 337 rotation point 846847 scaling objects with 332 See also control points

Reflect tool 341 refreshing display/folders/tree node 794 registering enlargement drawings 847 the menu chart 844 Remove Overlaps command 421 Remove Overlay Stitching command 421 Rename Alphabet dialog 675 Letter dialog 676 Object Style dialog 409 Thread Chart dialog 170 renaming designs 823 folders 822 styles 408 thread charts 169 repeating motifs (Motif Run) 526 objects 420 Resequence By Color command 314 By Selects command 314 resequencing by color 314 by selection 314 objects 312 objects, branching 304 using cut and paste 313 using the Color-Object List 315 Reshape Object tool 237, 356368, 498, 512529, 553, 581583, 590598, 660, 662, 677 reshape options 861 Reshape toolbar Show Reshape Nodes 356, 359 Show Start/End 357, 368 Show Stitch Angles 356, 365 reshaping objects 348, 356 circles 362 lettering 602 Motif Run 512 Ring 363 Sequin Run 553 Star 361 Reverse Curve 204 Reverse Curves command 204 reverse stitch direction 204 reverse stitching Backtrack and Repeat 420 Revert to Factory Settings dialog 414, 1119 revert, to NORMAL template 414 Ring objects changing entry point 368 changing size 363 digitizing 418 moving boundary 363 reshaping objects 363 Ring tool 418 Ring tool 418 Rotate 45 CCW tool 335

Rotate 45 CW tool 335 Rotate tool 335 rotating motifs 532 motifs in Motif Fills 522 objects 334 patterns on-screen 524 Program Split patterns on-screen 467 See also rotating objects rotating objects by an exact amount 335 by click-and-drag 334 from the Object Properties dialog 335 on-screen 334 using a reference line 336 using a reference line and angle 337 roughness, Jagged Edge values 481 rounding corners, Input C 217 row spacing, Program Split 460 rulers and guides 48 Run Backtrack and Repeat 420 chord gap 108 creating offset objects 429 setting stitch length 108 stitch length 108 tool 556 underlays 194, 622 values 107 variable stitch length 109 Run and Center Run values 194, 622 Run tool 102, 106, 107, 109, 352 runs appliqu guide runs 439 automatic connectors 181 overview 178 setting Center Run and Edge Run values 194, 622 travel runs 189 runs, sequins 540

same size, objects 333 sample motifs, Motif Fill 523 sample patterns, Program Split 465 Satin appliqu cover stitch 442 applying Auto Split 423 automatic spacing 135 digitizing with Input C 111

ES 2006 Index 1170

overview 132 Satin tool 132, 423 setting stitch count 138 spacing 134 splitting long stitches 423 Triple Satin 138 Satin tool 132, 133, 135, 136, 138, 614 Save As dialog 53, 411, 747, 752,

753, 817, 819 Save Bitmap As command 264 Save Options dialog 646, 752, 753 Save to Embroidery Disk dialog 765 Save to Embroidery Disk tool 711, 764 Save tool 52 saving bitmap images as separate files 264 designs 52 designs to embroidery disk 758766 object properties to a template 413 Save tool 52 saving designs CSD format 752 Melco CND format 751 ZSK-TC format 753 scaling enlargement drawing scale 849 motifs 532 motifs (Motif Fill) 520 motifs (Motif Run) 509 objects 329 Program Split patterns on-screen 467, 524 scaling objects by click-and-drag 329 make same size 333 on-screen 329 to an exact size 331 using Object Properties 331 using reference points 332 Scanner Setup command 841 scanning 258262 artwork 258, 261 bitmap images 261 color mode 259 preparing artwork 258 resolution 259 Scan command 261 setting up scanners 841 sharpening 261 tips 260 Screen Calibration dialog 842 security device messages 1106 segments Complex Fill objects 120, 122 traveling by 82 segments, adjusting overlap 127 Select By Color dialog 63, 76 By Stitch Type dialog 64 Machine Format command 710, 723 Machine Format dialog 52, 710 Motif dialog 531536 Source dialog 841 Select Machine Format command 51 Select Object tool 57, 58, 60, 61,

308, 553, 589, 593 Select Sequin Type dialog 538 selecting alphabets 565 Tatami backstitch 142 selecting designs 800 selecting objects bounding outline 58 by color 63 by stitch type 64 cancelling a selection 56 current object 60 grouping 326 resequencing by selection 314 Select Object tool 56 selecting a range 59 selecting all 55 selecting consecutive objects 57 selecting first and last 61 selecting multiple objects 57 selecting the next or previous object 61 using Line Select 62 using point and click 57 using Selects On 59 using SHIFT to select a range 57 while traveling 60 with Polygon Select 61 with the Color-Object List 64 selecting stitches 372 by needle point 372 cancelling a selection 376 selecting a range 375 several stitches 372 single stitch 372 using outline 373 using Selects On 375 while traveling through a design 375 with a bounding box 373 with the Stitch List 373 selection handles rotating 334 scaling 324 selection tools Polygon Select/Line Select 61 Select Object/Select Current 57 Selects On 59, 375 Selects On tool 59, 375 Selects On, selecting a range of stitches 375 Send command 745 sequence checking 80 partition lines (Tatami) 452 resequencing 313 traveling 80 Sequence By Color dialog 315 Sequence dialog 618620 sequencing objects, automatic stitching 296 sequin artwork, convert 551 Sequin Manual tool 549 Sequin Palette dialog 538 Sequin Palette Editor tool 538 Sequin Palette tool 538, 541, 542

sequin palettes, setting up 538 Sequin Run Auto tool 540 Sequin Run Manual tool 540 sequin runs, creating 540 sequin runs, scale/reshape 553 Sequin toolbar Manual Sequin 549 Sequin Palette 538, 541, 542 Sequin Palette Editor 538 Sequin Run Auto 540 Sequin Run Manual 540 Vectors to Sequins 551 sequins digitizing individual 549 serial devices, recommended settings 827 Serial Port Setup dialog 828 serial ports, connection settings 827 Set Color command 154 dialog 154 setting Always Check Design Integrity 868 Cross Hair Cursor 867, 868 Cumulative Stitch Count 868 design view defaults 795 other options 868 pointer position display 863 Run Small Stitch Filter on Output 868 Show Design Source 868 user preferences 795 setting options

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1171

pointer position display 864 settings adjusting view 793 settings, changing display 87 shading effects, Accordion Spacing 485 shading effects, Color Blending 487 Shaping toolbar Back-Front 249 Combine 246 Divide 251, 253 Exclude 249 Flatten 251, 253 Front-Back 249 Intersect 249 Keep Source Objects 252 Overlap 253 Weld 246 Sharpen Edges dialog 280 Sharpen Edges tool 280 sharpening outlines 280 Shortcut to Windows Properties dialog 803 Shortening tool 207 shortening, See stitch shortening show needle penetration points 77 outlines 77 Show Connectors 854

Show Drawing tool 97 Show Functions 854 Show Needle Points 854 stitches 77 Show All tool 69 Show Bitmap tool 97, 857 Show Clipart tool 772, 775, 776, 779 Show Drawing tool 244 Show Functions dialog 390 Show Grid tool 48, 858, 859 Show Image Toolbar tool 37 Show Input Toolbar tool 37 Show Needle Points tool 79 Show Outlines tool 77 Show Pointer Toolbar tool 37 Show Reshape Nodes tool 356, 359 Show Rulers and Guides tool 48, 859 Show Start/End tool 357, 368 Show Stitch Angles tool 356, 365 Show Stitches dialog 392 Show Stitches tool 77 Show Travel Toolbar tool 37 Show Vectors tool 97, 857 Show Vertical toolbar Show Image Toolbar 37 Show Input toolbar 37 Show Pointer toolbar 37 Show Travel toolbar 37 Show/Hide folders icon 790 Skew tool 339 skewing objects by click-and-drag 339 by exact angle 339 patterns on-screen 525 Program Split patterns on-screen 467 using Object Properties dialog 339 with rotation handles 339 slide show browsing designs 800 running 798 thumbnails and properties 798 viewing designs 798 Slow Redraw dialog 85 Slow Redraw command 85 Small Stitches command 222 Small Stitches dialog 222 small stitches, removing 222 smart corners appliqu 437 applying 214 cap 213 mitre 213 round corners, Input C 217 setting values 215 Smart Corners tool 213, 214 Smart Design dialog 291297 tool 291 Smooth Drawing Curves

dialog 238 smooth joins, creating 205 snap to grid 859 Sort dialog 808 Sort tool 807 sorting design lists 796 designs 805 using details lists 807 using Sort 807 using View menu 806 Space Evenly Across tool 325 Space Evenly Down tool 326 spacing Accordion Spacing 484 fractional spacing 211 objects evenly 325 offset, Auto Spacing 136 open spacing (color blending) 487 open spacing (Trapunto) 482 preset 852 Program Split stitches 461 Tatami underlay 197 using Auto Spacing 135 Zigzag and Double Zigzag stitches 196 Special menu Alphabet > Make Letter 670677 Alphabet > Modify Alphabet 675, 676 Convert TrueType Font 654 Hardware Setup 827, 831, 835, 837, 842 Motif > Make 534535 Motif > Select 536 Options 74, 860, 861, 862, 864, 865, 866, 867, 868 Tablet 844, 847, 849, 850 Spiral Contour 491 in circles 417 Split Object command 311 Split Palette Color tool 164 splitting combination splits 458 lines 475 objects 311 Split Object command 311 using Auto Split 423 using split lines 475 squares, drawing 231 stabilizing, with auto underlay 191 Standard backstitch 142 Standard Contour 490 Standard toolbar Branching 317, 318 Color-Object List 64, 315319, 328 Copy 305 Cut 313 New 46 Object Properties 40, 179, 181, 182, 184, 185, 189, 238, 399,

401, 413 Open 44, 745 Open As 761 Overview Window 71 Paste 305, 313 Print 735 Print Preview 96 Properties Window 659 Redo 43 Save 52 Save to Embroidery Disk 711, 764 Selects On 59, 375

ES 2006 Index 1172 Show Bitmap 97, 857

Show Connectors 79 Show Drawing 244 Show Functions 79 Show Grid 48, 858, 859 Show Needle Points 79 Show Outlines 77 Show Rulers and Guides 48, 859 Show Stitches 77 Show Vectors 97, 857 Stitch List 373, 387, 388, 389, 390, 391 Stitch to Stitch Manager 711, 755, 830 Team List 638, 641, 643 TrueView 78, 855 Undo 43 Ungroup 677 Star objects changing entry point 368 digitizing 418 reshaping 361 StarLAN network settings 829 Start/End Design tool 82 starting new designs 45 Stemstitch adjusting settings 149 Stemstitch tool 102, 106, 146, 149, 352 Stipple dialog 447 Stipple Run tool 446 stippling creating textures 446 stitch angles adding to Complex/Fusion Fill 367 adding to Input A 365 adding to Input B 365 Complex Fill/Fusion Fill 126 defining for Complex Fill 121, 123 Stitch Angles tool 368 turning stitches, Input A 116 Stitch Angles tool 367 stitch density adjusting 218 adjusting for certain stitch types 220 stitch designs conversion options 687 opening 687

processing into objects 687 stitch recognition 687 stitch direction, reversing 204 Stitch Edit tool 372, 373, 375, 377, 378, 379, 380 stitch files overview 683 reassigning colors 706 supported formats 917 Stitch List dialog 373, 390 editing stitch coordinates 388, 389 filtering by function 390 Stitch List tool 373, 387, 388, 389, 390, 391 using 387 Stitch Manager deleting embroidery machines 837 dialog 755 setting up embroidery machines 835 using 755 Stitch menu Define Style 404, 405, 407 Partial Appliqu 444 Small Stitches 222 Stitch Options dialog 810 stitch recognition 687 advanced options 694 Stitch Selected Designs tool 810 stitch shortening applying 207 customizing 208 overview 207 setting values 208 Stitch to Stitch Manager dialog 755, 830 Stitch to Stitch Manager tool 711, 755, 830 stitch types Backstitch 147 changing 132 Contour 490 fill 132 Motif Fill 514 Motif Run 505 overview 131 Program Split 456 Satin 132 selecting 132 Stemstitch 149 Triple Satin 138 Stitch Types toolbar 3D Warp 527, 529 Accordion Spacing 484, 485 Auto Jump 426 Auto Underlay 192, 320, 622 Contour 490, 491, 492, 493 E Stitch 132, 144 Flexi Split 471473 Florentine Effect 496500 Fractional Spacing 212 Liquid Effect 501, 503

Motif Fill 514, 515, 518 Program Split 456, 457, 458, 460, 461, 462, 464, 465 Pull Compensation 202, 203 Satin 132, 133, 135, 136, 138, 423, 614 Shortening 207 Smart Corners 214 Tatami 132, 139, 140, 142, 449, 450, 452, 455, 616 Trapunto 482 User Defined Split 475, 476, 477 Zigzag 132, 143, 617 stitch usage, estimating total 94 stitch values Auto Spacing (Satin) 135 backstitch 142 cover appliqu 442 guide runs (appliqu) 439 length (Tatami) 140 setting Tatami offsets 449 setting Tatami values 139 stitch type 132 tacking (appliqu) 441 stitches 77 adjusting density 220 appliqu cover stitches 442 appliqu tacking 441 calculating stitch length 427 changing display color 89 Contour stitch values 493 deselecting 376 digitizing Run stitches 105 displaying 77 Edge Run and Center Run length 194, 622 editing 378 generating 47 keep/omit last stitch 117118 Manual 104 multiple stitch counts (Triple Run) 110 preserving with Auto Jump 425 selecting 372 selecting a stitch type 132 shortening 207 stitch types 132 Tatami underlay 197 travel runs 189 traveling by 81 Triple Manual 104 Zigzag and Double Zigzag length 196 See also editing stitches See also selecting stitches stitching removing layers 421 stitching designs selecting machine and options 810 using Stitch Manager 755 See also Stitch Manager stitching sequence 80 See also sequence

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1173

storing designs embroidery disks 758 paper tape 766 Stream mode, digitizer tablets 832 strengthening auto underlays 191 styles applying 403 applying favorites 403 assigning favorites 405 creating new style 404 deleting 409 make object properties current 399 merging 407 modifying 407 overview 402 renaming 408 See also templates toolbar 402 Styles toolbar Apply Current Properties 400, 498 Apply Style 403 favorite styles 403 Make Properties Current 399, 498 switching, between fill and outline 104 Symbol Selection dialog 436, 625 system preferences automatic backup 862 automatic save 862 setting 854 viewing options 855

T
Tab delimited files, exporting catalogs 816 Tablet command 844, 847, 849, 850 Tablet Setup dialog 844849, 850 tablets, See digitizing tablets tacking offsetting 441 setting values 441 Tape Manager dialog 768, 811, 838840 tape, See paper tape taper angle, overlapping segments 127 Tatami backstitch 142 Borderline backstitch 142 Diagonal backstitch 143 offset fractions 450 offsets 449 partition lines 452 random factor 455 setting underlay stitch angles 197 setting underlay values 197 Standard backstitch 142 stitch length 140 Tatami tool 132

values 139 Tatami Fill tool 286, 288 Tatami Fill without Holes tool 286, 288 Tatami tool 132, 139, 140, 142, 449, 450, 452, 455, 616 Tatami values stitch spacing, length and minimum length 140 Team List 638, 641, 643 Team Members dialog 636, 639, 641, 643 team name matrix 644 Team Names 630 dialog 631636 See also names team names creating 635 creating separate designs 643 editing 638 outputting designs 646 viewing 638 Team Names tool 631, 632, 634, 635 templates creating 411 deleting 415 modifying 412 NORMAL 410 overview 410 reverting to original 414 saving object properties 413 using 412 using custom templates 46 using the NORMAL template 46 See also styles templates, using custom templates 802 Test Disk dialog 760 textured fills adjusting settings 473 creating 471 selecting patterns and options 472 textures stippling 446 third-party applications 267 thread charts adding colors 173 copying colors 172 creating 168 deleting 169 modifying 168 modifying threads 161, 170 renaming 169 thread colors 152 adding to thread charts 173 copying across thread charts 172 creating thread charts 168 matching 156, 166 matching to image 166 mixing your own 175 modifying threads 161, 170 See also colors

threads brands 174 code 174 color matching 166 density 174 thickness 136 type 174 types 136 Tie In Values dialog 183 Tie Off tool 186 Tie Off Values dialog 184 tie-ins overview 178 setting automatic tie-ins values 182 tie-offs adding 186 methods 184 overview 178 setting automatic tie-off values 184 setting automatic trim values 185 Tie Off tool 186 toolbars selecting commands 39 showing 37 Styles toolbar 402 Toolbars dialog 38 total stitch count, estimating 94 Transform dialog 332340 Transform toolbar Mirror Horizontally 340 Mirror Vertically 340 Rotate 335 Rotate 45 CCW 335 Rotate 45 CW 335 Skew 339 transforming letters, on-screen 597

ES 2006 Index 1174

transforming objects mirroring (reference line) 340 rotating (reference line and angle) 337 rotating (reference line) 336 scaling (reference points) 332 Transform command 332, 337 Transform Special command 336 Trapunto applying (Complex Fill) 483 overview 482 Trapunto tool 482 Travel by Color tool 83 Travel by Function tool 84 Travel by Object tool 83 travel runs 189 Travel toolbar Start/End Design 82 Travel 1 Stitch 81 Travel 10 Stitches 81 Travel 100 Stitches 81 Travel 1000 Stitches 81 Travel by Color 83 Travel by Function 84

Travel by Object 83 Travel by Segment 82 traveling by 1 stitch 81 by 10 stitches 81 by 100 stitches 81 by 1000 stitches 81 by color 83 by function 84 by segment 82 by stitches 81 overview 80 selecting objects while traveling 60 selecting stitches 375 traveling tools Start/End Design 82 Travel by Color 83 Travel by Function 84 Travel by Object 83 travel by stitches tools 81 tree node, refresh 794 Trim tool 187 trims adding 186 overview 178 trim functions 714 Trim tool 187 Triple Manual tool 102, 104 Triple Run creating offset objects 429 repeating stitches 110 variable stitch length 109 Triple Run tool 102, 106, 107, 109, 110, 352 Triple Satin 138 troubleshooting 1104 beeping sound 1115 deleting files with purge recovery 1119 design integrity 1115 device connections 1110 digitizer connections 1120 embroidery lettering 1116 ES Design Explorer problems 1109 exception access violations 1122, 1123 general problems 1112 invalid access code 1107 invalid product 1108 Missing files 1108 missing toolbars 1114 output 1113 recovering backups 1116 reverting to factory settings 1119 security device messages 1106 stitch display 1113 testing embroidery disks 760 Timeout warning 1108 Timeout warning when starting ES Design Explorer 1109 TrueView 1114 units of measurement 1113 Unrecoverable error when

opening design 1109 Unrecoverable error when opening ES Designer 1109 unrecoverable errors 1108 unwanted trims 1115 TrueType fonts 649 conversion stitch methods 656 converting complete alphabets 654 converting to embroidery fonts 649 TrueView Options dialog 856 TrueView 77 selecting options 855 thread thickness 855 tool 78 TrueView tool 855 viewing in 78 Turning Satin digitizing artwork 287 Turning Satin tool 285, 287 turning stitches applying fractional spacing 212 applying stitch shortening 207 Contour 490 corner fractions 115 digitizing with Input A 116 digitizing with Input B 118 Input C 115 turning-off automatic tie-ins 182 automatic tie-offs 184 automatic trims 185 fractional spacing 212 pull compensation 202 TWAIN 841 two-color alphabets 620 two-part motifs 517

U
underlays Center Run 194, 622 choosing suitable underlays 194, 622 Edge Run 194, 622 setting Auto Underlay margins 199 See also Auto Underlay Undo tool 43 undoing commands 43 Ungroup tool 326, 677 ungrouping objects 326 Unlock All tool 327 unlocking objects 327 unrecoverable errors, troubleshooting 1108 Use Object Style dialog 403 User Defined Split applying 476 digitizing objects with 475 User Defined Split tool 475, 476, 477 User Preferences dialog 795 setting 795 User Preferences command 795

user-refined alphabets 661

validating folders 794 values Auto Jump 427 automatic connectors 179 pull compensation 202 Run and Triple Run 107 selecting stitch types 132 Tatami underlay 197 travel runs 189 See also object properties variable stitch length (Run and Triple Run) 109 vector drawings automatic digitizing 228 convert to embroidery 349 converting artwork 284 digitizing 349 importing and exporting 233 inserting 233 outputting designs as 746 pasting 236 reshaping 237 smoothing 237 vector objects creating 228 open shapes 229 straight lines 229 Vectors to Sequins tool 551 View By Color command 76 View Design tab setting display options 74 View menu Measure 50 Slow Redraw 85 User Preferences 793, 795 View By Color 76 view settings, adjusting 793 viewing backdrops 97 colorways 87 design properties 797 designs 69 information online 4 objects by color 76 options, See user preferences slide show 800 viewing design options connectors 854 functions 854 needle points 854 viewing designs connectors 79 display options 77 displaying hidden objects 65 functions 79 needle points 79 outlines and stitches 77 panning 69 redrawing slowly 85 setting display options 74 setting options 855 TrueView 78

ES 2006 Wilcom ES Online Manual 1175

TrueView options 855 zooming 69

W
Weld tool 246 width, make objects same 333 WinZip tool 819 word spacing, changing 584 worksheets, See production worksheets WorkWithObjectProperties 397 Wreath tool 343 wreaths kaleidoscope effect 343 objects as wreaths 343

X Z

X and Y coordinates, setting 324 Zigzag underlay, setting 196 using with boring holes 555 Zigzag tool 132, 143, 617 Zigzag tool 132 zipped designs extracting 820 viewing in folders 791 Zoom 1-1 tool 69 Zoom Box tool 69 Zoom Factor dialog 69 Zoom Factor tool 69 Zoom In 2X tool 69 zoom in/out 69 Zoom Out 2X tool 69 Zoom toolbar Show All 69 Zoom 1-1 69 Zoom Box 69 Zoom Factor 69 Zoom In 2X 69 Zoom Out 2X 69 ZSK-TC format, saving as 753